Connection Manual: Series

Series
Connection Manual
(Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
BUS CONNECTION
DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
ETHERNET CONNECTION
MELSECNET/H CONNECTION
MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION
CC-Link IE CONNECTION
CC-Link CONNECTION
INVERTER CONNECTION
SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION
ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION
CNC CONNECTION
ENERGY MEASURING UNIT/ELECTRIC MULTI-MEASURING
INSTRUMENT CONNECTION
GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION
MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Always read these precautions before using this equipment.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product.
In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

WARNING resulting in death or severe injury.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.
Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances.
Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off.
Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch.
An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a
serious accident.
Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
● If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT,
communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative.
For bus connection : The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative.
For other than bus connection : The GOT becomes inoperative.
A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the
system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT
communication fault will occur.
● Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident.
An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device
that displays and outputs serious warning.
Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
A-1
WARNING
● Incorrect operation of the touch switch(s) may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone
out.
When the GOT backlight goes out, the display section dims, while the input of the touch switch(s)
remains active.
This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in "screensaver" mode, who then tries to
release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section, which may cause a touch switch to
operate.
Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out.
<When using the GT1655-V, Handy GOT, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, or GT105 >
The POWER LED blinks (green/orange) and the monitor screen appears blank.
<When using the GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, or GT1662>
The POWER LED blinks (green/orange) and the monitor screen appears dimmed.
<When using the GT104 >
The monitor screen appears blank.
<When using the GT103 or GT102 >
The monitor screen appears dimmed.
● The display section of the GT16, GT1595-X, GT14, GT12 or GT1020 are an analog-resistive type
touch panel.
If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more, the switch that is located around
the center of the touched point, if any, may operate.
Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously.
Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
● When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by the GOT are
changed, be sure to reset the GOT or shut off the power of the GOT at the same time.
● To maintain the safety of the system incorporating the GOT, take measures against unauthorized
access from external devices via a network.
To maintain the safety against unauthorized access via the Internet, take measures such as installing
a firewall.
CAUTION
● Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring.
Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart.
Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction.
● Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver.
Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section.
A-2
CAUTION
● When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network, the available IP address is restricted according
to the system configuration.
• When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network:
Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network.
• When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network:
Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the controllers except the GOT in the network.
Doing so can cause the IP address duplication. The duplication can negatively affect the
communication of the device with the IP address (192.168.0.18).
The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system.
● Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they
communicate with the GOT.
Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT.
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the GOT to/from the panel.
Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the communication unit, option function board or multi-color display board onto/from the
GOT.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
● Before mounting an optional function board or Multi-color display board, wear a static discharge wrist
strap to prevent the board from being damaged by static electricity.
CAUTION
● Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in the User's
Manual.
Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration.
● When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque
range.
Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the
GOT.
● When loading the communication unit or option unit to the GOT (GT16, GT15), fit it to the extension
interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
A-3
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When mounting the multi-color display board onto the GOT (GT15), connect it to the corresponding
connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range.
Loose tightening may cause the unit and/or GOT to malfunction due to poor contact.
Overtightening may damage the screws, unit and/or GOT; they might malfunction.
● When mounting the option function board onto the GOT (GT16), connect it to the corresponding
connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range.
● When mounting an optional function board onto the GOT(GT15), fully connect it to the connector
until you hear a click.
● When mounting an optional function board onto the GOT(GT11), fully connect it to the connector.
● When inserting a CF card into the GOT(GT16, GT15, GT11), push it into the CF card interface of
GOT until the CF card eject button will pop out.
Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact.
● When inserting/removing a SD card into/from the GOT(GT14), turn the SD card access switch off in
advance.
Failure to do so may corrupt data within the SD card.
● When inserting/removing a CF card into/from the GOT(GT16, GT15, GT11), turn the CF card access
switch off in advance.
Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card.
● When removing a SD card from the GOT(GT14), make sure to support the SD card by hand, as it
may pop out.
Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT and break.
● When removing a CF card from the GOT, make sure to support the CF card by hand, as it may pop
out.
Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break.
● When installing a USB memory to the GOT(GT16, GT14), make sure to install the USB memory to
the USB interface firmly.
Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact.
● Before removing the USB memory from the GOT(GT16, GT14), operate the utility screen for removal.
After the successful completion dialog box is displayed, remove the memory by hand carefully.
Failure to do so may cause the USB memory to drop, resulting in a damage or failure of the memory.
● For closing the USB environmental protection cover, fix the cover by pushing the mark on the latch
firmly to comply with the protective structure.
● Remove the protective film of the GOT.

When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed.
● Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight, high temperature, dust, humidity,
and vibrations.
● When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals, use the protective cover for oil.
Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT.
A-4
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.
CAUTION
● Please make sure to ground FG terminal and LG terminal and protective ground terminal of the GOT
power supply section by applying Class D Grounding (Class 3 Grounding Method) or higher which is
used exclusively for the GOT.
Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction.
● Be sure to tighten any unused terminal screws with a torque of 0.5 to 0.8N•m.
Failure to do so may cause a short circuit due to contact with a solderless terminal.
● Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque.
If any solderless spade terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes
loose, resulting in failure.
● Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal
arrangement of the product.
Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.
● Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.
● Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT.
Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.
● The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts,
from entering the module during wiring.
Do not peel this label during wiring.
Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation.
● Plug the bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it "clicks".
After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly.
Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.
● Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and
terminal screws in the specified torque range.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
● Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller (A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the
connector of the connected unit until it "clicks".
After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly.
Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.
A-5
[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen (such as turning ON or
OFF bit device, changing the word device current value, changing the settings or current values of
the timer or counter, and changing the buffer memory current value), read through the manual
carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method.
During test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant
operation for the system.
False output or malfunction can cause an accident.
[PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOTE CONTROL]

WARNING
● Remote control is available through a network by using GOT functions, including the SoftGOT-GOT
link function, the remote personal computer operation function, and the VNC server function.
If these functions are used to perform remote control of control equipment, the field operator may not
notice the remote control, possibly leading to an accident.
In addition, a communication delay or interruption may occur depending on the network
environment, and remote control of control equipment cannot be performed normally in some cases.
Before using the above functions to perform remote control, fully grasp the circumstances of the field
site and ensure safety.
[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● When power is on, do not touch the terminals.
Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction.
● Correctly connect the battery connector.

Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire.
Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.
● Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all
phases.
Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
CAUTION
● Do not disassemble or modify the unit.
Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire.
● Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly.
Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure.
A-6
[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.
Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental
pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.
● When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull the cable portion.
Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable
connection fault.
● Do not drop or apply strong impact to the unit.

Doing so may damage the unit.
● Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit.

Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery.
If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using.
● Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metal, etc. to discharge static electricity from
human body, etc.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
● Replace battery with GT15-BAT(GT16, GT15) or GT11-50BAT(GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10) by

Mitsubishi electric Co. only.
Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.
● Dispose of used battery promptly.

Keep away from children. Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.
[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION
● For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required. However,
the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use
elapses. When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute
the touch panel calibration.
● When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be
activated. This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction.
A-7
[BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply of the GOT (and the PLC CPU in the case
of a bus topology) and remove the GOT from the control panel before replacing the backlight (when
using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user).
Not doing so can cause an electric shock.
Replacing a backlight without removing the GOT from the control panel can cause the backlight or
control panel to drop, resulting in an injury.
CAUTION
● Wear gloves for the backlight replacement when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the
user.
Not doing so can cause an injury.
● Before replacing a backlight, allow 5 minutes or more after turning off the GOT when using the GOT
with the backlight replaceable by the user.
Not doing so can cause a burn from heat of the backlight.
[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When disposing of the product, handle it as industrial waste.
● When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. When disposing of batteries, separate
them from other wastes according to the local regulations.
(For details of the battery directive in EU member states, refer to the User's Manual of the GOT to be
used.)
[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.
(For details on models subject to restrictions, refer to the User's Manual for the GOT you are using.)
● Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be
exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of the
User's Manual, as they are precision devices.
Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail.
Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation.
A-8
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi Electric GOT).
Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly
in advance to ensure correct use.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................A - 1

INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................A - 9
CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................................................A - 9
MANUALS............................................................................................................................................... A - 21
QUICK REFERENCE ............................................................................................................................. A - 23
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ...........................................................................................A - 25
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL ............................................................................................................. A - 30
1.PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface............................................................................................... 1 - 3
1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting)................................................................... 1 - 4
1.1.2 I/F communication setting................................................................................................... 1 - 13
1.1.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 1 - 15
1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT............................................................................. 1 - 16
1.2.1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT................................................................... 1 - 16
1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT ............................................................ 1 - 17
1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection ............................................................................. 1 - 18
1.3.1 Communication module ...................................................................................................... 1 - 18
1.3.2 Option unit .......................................................................................................................... 1 - 19
1.3.3 Conversion cables .............................................................................................................. 1 - 19
1.3.4 Connector conversion adapter ........................................................................................... 1 - 19
1.3.5 Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit ...................................................................................... 1 - 19
1.3.6 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter .............................................................................. 1 - 19
1.3.7 Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position) ............................ 1 - 20
1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection ....................................................................... 1 - 27
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications ............................................................................................ 1 - 27
1.4.2 Coaxial cable connector connection method ...................................................................... 1 - 30
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT ............................................................................................. 1 - 31
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor ............................................................ 1 - 34
1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment........................................................................ 1 - 35
1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring .................................................................................................... 1 - 40
1.6.1 Check on the GOT.............................................................................................................. 1 - 40
1.6.2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet connection) ............. 1 - 46
1.6.3 Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring function) ............ 1 - 48
1.6.4 Check on GX Developer ..................................................................................................... 1 - 51
1.6.5 Check on GX Works2 ......................................................................................................... 1 - 55
1.6.6 Check on the PLC .............................................................................................................. 1 - 56
A-9
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC CONNECTIONS
2.DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET
2.1 MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT ...................................................................................................................... 2 - 8
2.2 MELSEC iQ-F .................................................................................................................................. 2 - 9
2.3 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700......................................................................... 2 - 10
2.4 MELSEC-L ..................................................................................................................................... 2 - 11
2.5 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * ............................................................................................. 2 - 12
2.6 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion ......................................................................................................... 2 - 13
2.7 MELSEC-A .................................................................................................................................... 2 - 14
2.8 MELSEC-FX .................................................................................................................................. 2 - 15
2.9 MELSEC-WS ................................................................................................................................. 2 - 16
3.ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING

3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems........................................................... 3 - 2
3.1.1 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network,
CC-Link IE Field Network ..................................................................................................... 3 - 2
3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection ................................................... 3 - 13
3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring.............................................................................. 3 - 14
3.4 Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access Range for Monitoring ........................................ 3 - 17
3.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU............................................................... 3 - 18
3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System........................................ 3 - 19
3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network System .......................................... 3 - 22
4.HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM

4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System.......................................... 4 - 8
4.1.1 Direct CPU connection (Direct CPU connection to the remote I/O station) .......................... 4 - 8
4.1.2 Computer link connection (Connection to serial communication module mounted on
remote I/O station) ................................................................................................................ 4 - 9
4.1.3 Ethernet connection (Connection to Ethernet module mounted on remote I/O station) ..... 4 - 10
4.2 Direct CPU Connection.................................................................................................................. 4 - 11
4.2.1 When using one GOT ......................................................................................................... 4 - 11
4.2.2 When using two GOTs........................................................................................................ 4 - 12
4.2.3 Precautions when connecting a GOT directly to a PLC CPU in the redundant system
without making Q redundant setting ................................................................................... 4 - 13
4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station)............................................................................ 4 - 18
4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4) ........................................................................................................ 4 - 20
4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network Systems) ...................................... 4 - 22
4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network System) ...................................................... 4 - 23
4.7 Ethernet Connection ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 24
4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit.............................................................. 4 - 25
4.8.1 Computer link connection (Connection to the Serial communication module mounted
on the redundant type extension base unit)........................................................................ 4 - 25
4.8.2 Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type
extension base unit)............................................................................................................ 4 - 26
A - 10
4.8.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (Connection to the CC-Link module
mounted on redundant type extension base unit) .............................................................. 4 - 27
4.8.4 CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant
type extension base unit).................................................................................................... 4 - 28
4.9 Q Redundant Setting ..................................................................................................................... 4 - 29
4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function ................................. 4 - 31
4.10.1 Method for using the station number switching function..................................................... 4 - 31
4.10.2 Method for using the screen changing function .................................................................. 4 - 38
5.BUS CONNECTION
5.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 5 - 2
5.2 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 5 - 7
5.2.1 Connecting to QCPU ............................................................................................................ 5 - 7
5.2.2 Connecting to QnACPU or AnCPU .................................................................................... 5 - 11
5.2.3 Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU................................................................................ 5 - 14
5.2.4 Connection to A0J2HCPU .................................................................................................. 5 - 20
5.2.5 Connection to motion controller CPU
(A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3), A373UCPU(-S3)) ........................................................... 5 - 21
5.2.6 Connecting to motion controller CPU (A171SCPU(-S3(N)), A171SHCPU(N),
A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU(-S1)) ................................................................................. 5 - 26
5.3 GOT Side Settings......................................................................................................................... 5 - 32
5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 5 - 32
5.3.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 5 - 32
5.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 5 - 36
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS .................................................................................. 5 - 36
5.4.2 Turning the GOT ON .......................................................................................................... 5 - 36
5.4.3 Powering OFF the GOT, reapplying the power (OFF to ON) ............................................. 5 - 37
5.4.4 Reset switch on GOT ......................................................................................................... 5 - 37
5.4.5 Powering OFF or resetting the PLC ................................................................................... 5 - 37
5.4.6 Position of the GOT ............................................................................................................ 5 - 37
5.4.7 When the GOT is bus-connected to a PLC CPU without the communication driver written
............................................................................................................................................ 5 - 37
5.4.8 When designing the system ............................................................................................... 5 - 38
5.4.9 When assigning GOT I/O signals ....................................................................................... 5 - 38
5.4.10 When connecting to a QCPU (Q mode) ............................................................................. 5 - 38
5.4.11 When connecting to a QnA(S)CPU or An(S)CPU type ...................................................... 5 - 39
5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs ........................................................................................ 5 - 40
5.4.13 When using a PLC CPU in the direct mode ....................................................................... 5 - 40
5.4.14 When connecting to a Q4ARCPU redundant system ......................................................... 5 - 41
5.4.15 When monitoring the Q170MCPU ...................................................................................... 5 - 41
5.4.16 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 5 - 41
6.DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU

6.2.1 Connecting to QCPU ............................................................................................................ 6 - 7
6.2.2 Connecting to LCPU ............................................................................................................. 6 - 8
6.2.3 Connecting to QnACPU...................................................................................................... 6 - 10
6.2.4 Connecting to ACPU .......................................................................................................... 6 - 11
6.2.5 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-F Series .................................................................................. 6 - 12
A - 11
6.2.6 Connecting to FXCPU ........................................................................................................ 6 - 15
6.2.7 Connecting to WSCPU ....................................................................................................... 6 - 25
6.2.8 Connecting to the motion controller CPU ........................................................................... 6 - 25
6.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 27
6.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 27
6.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 28
6.4 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 6 - 30
6.5 PLC Side Setting ........................................................................................................................... 6 - 33
6.5.1 L6ADP-R4 adapter settings ................................................................................................ 6 - 33
6.5.2 GX Works2 settings ............................................................................................................ 6 - 33
6.6 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 6 - 34
7.COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION

7.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU................................................................................................... 7 - 2
7.1.2 Serial communication module/Computer link module........................................................... 7 - 7
7.2.1 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R series..................................................................................... 7 - 8
7.2.2 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) ............................................................................................ 7 - 9
7.2.3 Connecting to LCPU ........................................................................................................... 7 - 10
7.2.4 Connecting to QCPU (A mode) .......................................................................................... 7 - 11
7.2.5 Connecting to QnACPU (QnACPU type)............................................................................ 7 - 12
7.2.6 Connecting to QnACPU (QnASCPU type) ......................................................................... 7 - 13
7.2.7 Connecting to ACPU (AnCPU type) ................................................................................... 7 - 15
7.2.8 Connecting to ACPU (AnSCPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC) ......................................... 7 - 16
7.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 7 - 17
7.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 7 - 19
7.5 PLC Side Setting ........................................................................................................................... 7 - 24
7.5.1 Connecting serial communication module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) .................................... 7 - 24
7.5.2 Connecting serial communication module (Q, L Series)..................................................... 7 - 25
7.5.3 Connecting serial communication module (QnA Series) .................................................... 7 - 26
7.5.4 Connecting computer link module ...................................................................................... 7 - 28
7.6 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 7 - 31
8.ETHERNET CONNECTION
8.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU................................................................................................... 8 - 2
8.1.2 Ethernet module ................................................................................................................... 8 - 7
8.2.1 Connection to Ethernet module ............................................................................................ 8 - 8
8.2.2 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module ...................................... 8 - 12
8.2.3 Connecting to Display I/F.................................................................................................... 8 - 14
8.2.4 Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module ................................... 8 - 15
A - 12
8.2.5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU) ............... 8 - 16
8.3.3 Ethernet setting .................................................................................................................. 8 - 19
8.3.4 Routing parameter setting .................................................................................................. 8 - 20
8.4 PLC Side Setting ........................................................................................................................... 8 - 22
8.4.1 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (one-to one connection) .................................... 8 - 23
8.4.2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (multiple connection) ......................................... 8 - 24
8.4.3 Connecting to Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) .................................................... 8 - 26
8.4.4 Connection to C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)............................................... 8 - 29
8.4.5 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (one-to-one connection) .................................... 8 - 31
8.4.6 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (multiple connection) ......................................... 8 - 33
8.4.7 Connecting to Ethernet module (Q/L Series)...................................................................... 8 - 35
8.4.8 Connecting to C Controller module (Q Series) ................................................................... 8 - 38
8.4.9 Connecting to Ethernet module (QnA Series) .................................................................... 8 - 41
8.4.10 Connecting to Ethernet module (A Series) ......................................................................... 8 - 44
8.4.11 Connecting to Ethernet module (FX Series) ....................................................................... 8 - 49
8.4.12 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port FXCPU (FX3GE) ....................................................... 8 - 53
8.4.13 Connecting to Display I/F (CNC C70)................................................................................. 8 - 55
8.4.14 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module ................................... 8 - 57
8.4.15 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU) ............... 8 - 59
8.5 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 8 - 62
9.MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

9.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU .................................................................................................. 9 - 2
9.1.2 MELSECNET/H network module.......................................................................................... 9 - 7
9.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system ........................................................................................ 9 - 8
9.2.2 Connecting to the coaxial bus system .................................................................................. 9 - 8
9.3.3 Routing parameter setting .................................................................................................. 9 - 11
9.4 PLC Side Settings.......................................................................................................................... 9 - 12
9.4.1 System configuration .......................................................................................................... 9 - 12
9.4.2 Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module ............................................................ 9 - 12
9.4.3 Parameter setting ............................................................................................................... 9 - 13
9.4.4 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 .................................................................................. 9 - 16
9.5 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 9 - 17
10.MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

10.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 10 - 2
10.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU ................................................................................................ 10 - 2
10.1.2 MELSECNET/H (NET/10 mode), MELSECNET/10 network module ................................. 10 - 7
10.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 10 - 8
10.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system ...................................................................................... 10 - 8
10.2.2 Connecting to the coaxial bus system ................................................................................ 10 - 9
A - 13
10.3 GOT Side Settings ....................................................................................................................... 10 - 10
10.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................. 10 - 10
10.3.2 Communication detail settings.......................................................................................... 10 - 10
10.3.3 Routing parameter setting ................................................................................................ 10 - 11
10.3.4 Switch setting (Only when MELSECNET/10 communication unit is used)....................... 10 - 12
10.4 PLC Side Setting ......................................................................................................................... 10 - 13
10.4.1 Connecting to MELSECNET/H network module............................................................... 10 - 13
10.4.2 Connecting to MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series) ....................................... 10 - 18
10.4.3 Connecting to MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) ............................................ 10 - 22
10.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 10 - 26
11.CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

11.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU................................................................................................. 11 - 2
11.1.2 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit............................................................ 11 - 7
11.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system ...................................................................................... 11 - 8
11.3 GOT side settings .......................................................................................................................... 11 - 9
11.4 PLC Side Setting ......................................................................................................................... 11 - 11
11.4.1 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R Series ................................................................................ 11 - 11
11.4.2 Connecting to C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)............................................. 11 - 15
11.4.3 Connecting to MELSEC-Q/L............................................................................................. 11 - 19
11.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 11 - 25
12.CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

12.1.2 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit ................................................................... 12 - 7
12.2.1 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit ............................................ 12 - 8
12.3 GOT side settings .......................................................................................................................... 12 - 9
12.4 PLC Side Setting ......................................................................................................................... 12 - 11
12.4.1 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R Series ................................................................................ 12 - 11
12.4.2 Connection to C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)............................................. 12 - 13
12.4.3 Connecting to MELSEC-Q/L............................................................................................. 12 - 16
12.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 12 - 19
13.CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

13.1.2 CC-Link module .................................................................................................................. 13 - 6
A - 14
13.2.1 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible ........................................................................ 13 - 7
13.2.2 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible ........................................................................ 13 - 9
13.2.3 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed ................................................ 13 - 10
13.3 GOT Side Settings....................................................................................................................... 13 - 11
13.3.3 Switch setting (Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is
used)................................................................................................................................. 13 - 13
13.4 PLC Side Setting ......................................................................................................................... 13 - 14
13.4.1 Connecting to CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) with Ver.1 compatible................ 13 - 15
13.4.2 Connecting to CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) with Ver.2 compatible................ 13 - 16
13.4.3 Connecting to CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles
mixed ................................................................................................................................ 13 - 18
13.4.4 Connection to C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)............................................. 13 - 20
13.4.5 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1 compatible .................................... 13 - 22
13.4.6 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.2 compatible .................................... 13 - 25
13.4.7 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed .............. 13 - 29
13.4.8 Connecting to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible..................................... 13 - 33
13.4.9 Connecting to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible..................................... 13 - 34
13.4.10 Connecting to CC-Link module (QnA Series) ................................................................... 13 - 36
13.4.11 Connecting to CC-Link module (A Series)........................................................................ 13 - 40
13.5 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 13 - 48
14.CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)

14.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU ................................................................................................ 14 - 2
14.1.2 CC-Link module/peripheral module .................................................................................... 14 - 6
14.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) .......................................................................................... 14 - 7
14.2.2 Connecting to LCPU ........................................................................................................... 14 - 8
14.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 14 - 9
14.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 14 - 9
14.5 PLC Side Settings........................................................................................................................ 14 - 12
14.5.1 Connecting AJ65BT-G4-S3 .............................................................................................. 14 - 12
14.5.2 Connecting AJ65BT-R2N ................................................................................................. 14 - 13
14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series) .................................................................... 14 - 15
14.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX Developer ............................................................................. 14 - 15
14.5.5 Parameter setting (when connecting to C Controller module (Q Series))......................... 14 - 16
14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 ................................................................................ 14 - 17
14.6 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 14 - 18
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS

15.INVERTER CONNECTION
A - 15
15.2.1 Connecting to FREQROL-A500/A500L/F500/F500L/V500/V500L ..................................... 15 - 3
15.2.2 Connecting to FREQROL-E500/S500/S500E/F500J/D700/F700PJ .................................. 15 - 7
15.2.3 Connecting to FREQROL E700/sensorless servo (FREQROL-E700EX)......................... 15 - 10
15.2.4 Connecting to FREQROL-A700/F700/700P ..................................................................... 15 - 14
15.2.5 Connecting to FREQROL-A800/F800 .............................................................................. 15 - 18
15.2.6 Connecting to MD-CX522-K(-A0) ..................................................................................... 15 - 21
15.3 Connection Diagram .................................................................................................................... 15 - 24
15.3.1 RS-485 cable .................................................................................................................... 15 - 24
15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings ..................................................................................... 15 - 34
15.5.1 Connecting FREQROL-S500, S500E, F500J series ........................................................ 15 - 34
15.5.2 Connecting FREQROL-E500 series ................................................................................. 15 - 35
15.5.3 Connecting FREQROL-F500, F500L series ..................................................................... 15 - 36
15.5.4 Connecting FREQROL-A500, A500L series..................................................................... 15 - 37
15.5.5 Connecting FREQROL-V500, V500L series..................................................................... 15 - 38
15.5.6 Connecting FREQROL-E700 series ................................................................................. 15 - 39
15.5.7 Connecting FREQROL-D700 series................................................................................. 15 - 40
15.5.8 Connecting FREQROL-F700/700P series........................................................................ 15 - 41
15.5.9 Connecting FREQROL-F700PJ series ............................................................................. 15 - 43
15.5.10 Connecting FREQROL-A700 series ................................................................................. 15 - 44
15.5.11 Connecting FREQROL-A800/F800 series........................................................................ 15 - 46
15.5.12 Connecting a sensorless servo (FREQROL-E700EX series)........................................... 15 - 47
15.5.13 Connecting MD-CX522-K(-A0) ......................................................................................... 15 - 48
15.5.14 Station number setting...................................................................................................... 15 - 49
15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set .................................................................................................... 15 - 50
15.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 15 - 53
16.SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION

16.2.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series................................................................ 16 - 3
16.2.2 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M Series ....................................................................... 16 - 4
16.2.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series..................................................................... 16 - 5
16.2.4 Connecting to the MELSERVO-JE Series .......................................................................... 16 - 8
16.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 16 - 9
16.3.2 RS-422 cable .................................................................................................................... 16 - 10
16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side ................................................................................................... 16 - 17
16.5.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series.............................................................. 16 - 17
16.5.2 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M Series ..................................................................... 16 - 18
16.5.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4,J3,JE Series .............................................................. 16 - 19
A - 16
16.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 16 - 58
17.ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION

17.2.1 Connecting to robot controller (CRnD-700) ........................................................................ 17 - 2
17.3.3 Ethernet setting .................................................................................................................. 17 - 5
17.4 PLC Side Settings.......................................................................................................................... 17 - 6
17.4.1 Connecting to robot controller (CRnD-700) ........................................................................ 17 - 6
17.5 Device Range that Can Be Set...................................................................................................... 17 - 8
17.6 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 17 - 8
18.CNC CONNECTION
18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU ................................................................................................... 18 - 3
18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) .......................................................... 18 - 4
18.2.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)................................................................... 18 - 5
18.2.4 Ethernet connection............................................................................................................ 18 - 6
18.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 18 - 7
18.4.3 Ethernet setting ................................................................................................................ 18 - 13
18.4.4 Switch setting ................................................................................................................... 18 - 13
18.5 CNC Side Settings....................................................................................................................... 18 - 16
18.5.1 MELSECNET/10 connection ............................................................................................ 18 - 16
18.5.2 CC-Link (ID) connection ................................................................................................... 18 - 19
18.5.3 Ethernet connection.......................................................................................................... 18 - 21
18.6 Device Range that Can Be Set.................................................................................................... 18 - 23
18.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 18 - 23
18.7.1 Direct connection to CPU ................................................................................................. 18 - 23
18.7.2 MELSECNET/10 connection ............................................................................................ 18 - 23
18.7.3 CC-Link (ID) connection ................................................................................................... 18 - 23
18.7.4 Ethernet connection.......................................................................................................... 18 - 24
19.ENERGY MEASURING UNIT/ELECTRIC MULTI-MEASURING

19.2.1 Connecting to an energy measuring unit/electronic multi-measuring instrument ............... 19 - 3
A - 17
19.5 Setting of Energy Measuring Unit/Electric Multi-measuring Instrument....................................... 19 - 10
19.5.1 Connecting to an energy measuring unit/electronic multi-measuring instrument ............. 19 - 10
19.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 19 - 12
MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS

20.GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
20.1 CPU that can be Monitored ........................................................................................................... 20 - 2
20.3 System Configuration .................................................................................................................. 20 - 16
20.4 Connection Diagram .................................................................................................................... 20 - 17
20.4.1 RS-485 cable .................................................................................................................... 20 - 17
20.5.1 Setting communication interface (communication settings).............................................. 20 - 25
20.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit ............................................................................... 20 - 26
20.6.1 Write the OS ..................................................................................................................... 20 - 26
20.6.3 Setting switches................................................................................................................ 20 - 30
20.7 Setting of connection conversion adapter.................................................................................... 20 - 31
20.7.1 Setting switches................................................................................................................ 20 - 31
20.8 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 20 - 32
21.MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION

21.2.1 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-232 interface ............................................................. 21 - 2
21.2.2 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-422 interface ............................................................. 21 - 4
21.3.1 RS-232 Cable ..................................................................................................................... 21 - 5
21.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 21 - 6
21.5 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 21 - 11
22.MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
22.1 What is Multi-channel Function?.................................................................................................... 22 - 2
22.2.1 Bus connection and serial connection ................................................................................ 22 - 4
22.2.2 Ethernet multiple connection .............................................................................................. 22 - 6
A - 18
22.3.1 Basics of interface selection ............................................................................................... 22 - 7
22.3.2 General flow from system selection to drawing ................................................................ 22 - 12
22.3.3 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection) ............................ 22 - 13
22.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) ................................................ 22 - 23
22.3.5 Setting for communication settings................................................................................... 22 - 35
22.3.6 Items to be checked before starting drawing .................................................................... 22 - 39
22.4 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 22 - 41
22.4.1 Precautions for hardware ................................................................................................. 22 - 41
22.4.2 Precautions for use........................................................................................................... 22 - 41
22.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet ........................................................................................... 22 - 42
23.FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION
23.1 FA Transparent Function ............................................................................................................... 23 - 2
23.2 Compatible Software ..................................................................................................................... 23 - 2
23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored.......................................................................................... 23 - 15
23.4 System Configuration .................................................................................................................. 23 - 34
23.4.1 GX Works3, CW Configurator, GX Developer, GX Works2, GX LogViewer,
MX Component, MX Sheet, CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool,
Setting/Monitoring tool for C Controller module................................................................ 23 - 34
23.4.2 PX Developer, GX Configurator ....................................................................................... 23 - 38
23.4.3 MT Developer, MT Works2............................................................................................... 23 - 39
23.4.4 MR Configurator, MR Configurator2 ................................................................................. 23 - 41
23.4.5 FR Configurator ................................................................................................................ 23 - 43
23.4.6 FX Configurator-FP, FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool .................................................... 23 - 43
23.4.7 RT ToolBox2..................................................................................................................... 23 - 44
23.4.8 NC Configurator................................................................................................................ 23 - 44
23.5.1 Setting communication interface ...................................................................................... 23 - 45
23.6 Personal Computer Side Setting ................................................................................................. 23 - 48
23.6.1 Accessing by GX Works3 ................................................................................................. 23 - 48
23.6.2 Accessing by CW Configurator......................................................................................... 23 - 52
23.6.3 Accessing the PLC by the GX Developer, PX Developer, GX Configurator..................... 23 - 53
23.6.4 Accessing by GX Works2 ................................................................................................. 23 - 57
23.6.5 Accessing by GX LogViewer ............................................................................................ 23 - 67
23.6.6 Accessing PLC by GX Configurator-QP ........................................................................... 23 - 67
23.6.7 Accessing by the MT Developer ....................................................................................... 23 - 68
23.6.8 Accessing by the MT Works2 ........................................................................................... 23 - 69
23.6.9 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator..................................................... 23 - 73
23.6.10 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator2................................................... 23 - 73
23.6.11 Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator ................................................................. 23 - 73
23.6.12 Accessing PLC by FX Configurator-FP ............................................................................ 23 - 74
23.6.13 Accessing by FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool ............................................................... 23 - 74
23.6.14 Accessing by RT ToolBox2 .............................................................................................. 23 - 75
23.6.15 Accessing by NC Configurator ......................................................................................... 23 - 77
23.6.16 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator .................................................................................. 23 - 78
23.6.17 Accessing by CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool ................................................... 23 - 78
23.6.18 Accessing by Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module ........................................ 23 - 79
A - 19
23.6.19 Accessing by MX Component(MX Sheet) ........................................................................ 23 - 81
23.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 23 - 85
23.7.1 Precautions common to each software............................................................................. 23 - 85
23.7.2 When using GX Works3, GX Works2, GX Developer ...................................................... 23 - 87
23.7.3 When using MT Developer, MT Works2........................................................................... 23 - 89
23.7.4 When using MR Configurator, MR Configurator2 ............................................................. 23 - 90
23.7.5 When using FR Configurator ............................................................................................ 23 - 90
INDEX
REVISIONS
A - 20
MANUALS
The following table lists the manual relevant to this product.

Refer to each manual for any purpose.
 Screen creation software manuals

Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)
GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product -
SH-080866ENG
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in DVD-ROM
(1D7MB9)
SH-080867ENG
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in DVD-ROM
(1D7MC1)
SH-080861ENG
GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM
(1D7MB1)
SH-080862ENG
GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM
(1D7MB2)
 Connection manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080868ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM
(1D7MC2)
SH-080869ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM
(1D7MC3)
SH-080870ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM
(1D7MC4)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT SH-080871ENG
Stored in DVD-ROM
Works3 (1D7MC5)
 Extended and option function manuals

Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080858ENG
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM
(1D7MA7)
SH-080859ENG
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM
(1D7MA8)
SH-080863ENG
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM
(1D7MB3)
 GT SoftGOT1000 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080860ENG
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM
(1D7MA9)
A - 21
 GT16 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080928ENG
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) Stored in DVD-ROM
(1D7MD3)
SH-080929ENG
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) Stored in DVD-ROM
(1D7MD4)
JY997D41201
GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM JY997D41202
(09R821)
 GT15 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080528ENG
GT15 User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM
(1D7M23)
 GT14 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
JY997D44801
(09R823)
 GT12 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
SH-080977ENG
(1D7ME1)
 GT11 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
JY997D17501
(09R815)
JY997D20101
GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM JY997D20102
(09R817)
 GT10 manuals
Manual Number
(Model code)
JY997D24701
(09R819)
A - 22
QUICK REFERENCE
 Creating a project
Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3
Setting available functions on GT Designer3

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual
(Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2
Creating a screen displayed on the GOT
Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing
Setting details for figures and objects
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action
1/2, 2/2
Setting functions to use peripheral devices
Simulating a created project on a personal computer GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3
 Connecting a controller to the GOT

Obtaining information of Mitsubishi Electric products applicable to the
GOT
Connecting Mitsubishi Electric products to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric
Products) for GT Works3
Connecting multiple controllers to one GOT (Multi-channel function)
Establishing communication between a personal computer and a

controller via the GOT (FA transparent function)
Obtaining information of Non-Mitsubishi Electric products applicable to the • GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
GOT Electric Products 1) for GT Works3
• GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
Connecting Non-Mitsubishi Electric products to the GOT Electric Products 2) for GT Works3
Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer,
MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3
Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT
 Transferring data to the GOT

Writing data to the GOT

Reading data from the GOT
(Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2
Verifying a editing project to a GOT project
A - 23
 Others
Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and • GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
options) of each GOT • GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual
• GT15 User's Manual
Installing the GOT • GT11 User's Manual
• GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual
• GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)

Operating the utility
Configuring the gateway function GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT

Configuring the MES interface function
Works3
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option

Configuring the extended function and option function
Functions) for GT Works3
Using a personal computer as the GOT GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3
A - 24
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS
 GOT
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT1695 GT1695M-X Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD
GT1685 GT1685M-S Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD
GT1675M-S Abbreviation of GT1675M-STBA, GT1675M-STBD
GT1675 GT1675M-V Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M-VTBD
GT1675-VN Abbreviation of GT1675-VNBA, GT1675-VNBD
GT1672 GT1672-VN Abbreviation of GT1672-VNBA, GT1672-VNBD
GT1665M-S Abbreviation of GT1665M-STBA, GT1665M-STBD
GT1665
GT1665M-V Abbreviation of GT1665M-VTBA, GT1665M-VTBD
GT1662 GT1662-VN Abbreviation of GT1662-VNBA, GT1662-VNBD
GT1655 GT1655-V Abbreviation of GT1655-VTBD
GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662, GT1655, GT16 Handy GOT
GT1595 GT1595-X Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA, GT1595-XTBD
GT1585V-S Abbreviation of GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD
GT1585
GT1585-S Abbreviation of GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD
GT1575V-S Abbreviation of GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD
GT1575-S Abbreviation of GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD
GT157 GT1575-V Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD

GT1565-V Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD
GT156
GT1555-V Abbreviation of GT1555-VTBD
GT155 GT1555-Q Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD

GOT1000
Series GT1550-Q Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD
GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155

GT1455-Q Abbreviation of GT1455-QTBDE, GT1455-QTBD
GT145
GT1450-Q Abbreviation of GT1450-QMBDE, GT1450-QMBD, GT1450-QLBDE, GT1450-QLBD
GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455-Q, GT1450-Q
GT1275 GT1275-V Abbreviation of GT1275-VNBA, GT1275-VNBD
GT1265 GT1265-V Abbreviation of GT1265-VNBA, GT1265-VNBD
GT12 Abbreviation of GT1275, GT1265
Abbreviation of GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA, GT1155-QSBDA,
GT1155-Q
GT115 GT1155-QTBD, GT1155-QSBD
GT1150-Q Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA, GT1150-QLBD
GT11 Abbreviation of GT115 , GT11 Handy GOT

GT1055-Q Abbreviation of GT1055-QSBD
GT105
GT1050-Q Abbreviation of GT1050-QBBD
GT1045-Q Abbreviation of GT1045-QSBD
GT104
GT1040-Q Abbreviation of GT1040-QBBD
Abbreviation of GT1030-LBD, GT1030-LBD2, GT1030-LBL, GT1030-LBDW, GT1030-LBDW2,
GT1030-LBLW, GT1030-LWD, GT1030-LWD2, GT1030-LWL, GT1030-LWDW, GT1030-LWDW2,
GT1030 GT1030-LWLW, GT1030-HBD, GT1030-HBD2, GT1030-HBL, GT1030-HBDW, GT1030-HBDW2,
GT1030-HBLW, GT1030-HWD, GT1030-HWD2, GT1030-HWL, GT1030-HWDW, GT1030-HWDW2,
GT1030-HWLW
Abbreviation of GT1020-LBD, GT1020-LBD2, GT1020-LBL, GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBDW2,
GT1020 GT1020-LBLW, GT1020-LWD, GT1020LWD2, GT1020-LWL, GT1020-LWDW, GT1020-LWDW2,
GT1020-LWLW
GT10 Abbreviation of GT105 , GT104 , GT1030, GT1020
A - 25
GT16
Handy GT1665HS-V Abbreviation of GT1665HS-VTBD
Handy GOT
GOT1000
GOT GT11 GT1155HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD
Series
Handy
GOT GT1150HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD
GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000

GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT-A900 series, GOT-F900 series
GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT-800 series
 Communication unit
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L,
Bus connection unit
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE
RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P, GT15-RS2T4-25P
Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100
MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13
MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication
GT15-J71GP23-SX
unit
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3

Interface converter unit GT15-75IF900
Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M
Connection Conversion Adapter GT10-9PT5S
RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P
*1 A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set

*2 A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set
*3 A8GT-J61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set
 Option unit
Printer unit GT15-PRN
Video input unit GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4
RGB input unit GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1
Video/RGB unit
Video/RGB input unit GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1
RGB output unit GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT
Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR
CF card unit GT15-CFCD
CF card extension unit*1 GT15-CFEX-C08SET

External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR
Sound output unit GT15-SOUT
*1 GT15-CFEX + GT15-CFEXIF + GT15-C08CF set
A - 26
 Option
GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05-MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC,
CF card GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM-512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC,
Memory card GT05-MEM-4GC, GT05-MEM-8GC, GT05-MEM-16GC
NZ1MEM-2GBSD, NZ1MEM-4GBSD, NZ1MEM-8GBSD, NZ1MEM-16GBSD, L1MEM-2GBSD,
SD card
L1MEM-4GBSD
Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC
GT16-MESB, GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M,
Option function board
GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT11-50FNB, GT15-MESB48M
Battery GT15-BAT, GT11-50BAT
GT16-90PSCB, GT16-90PSGB, GT16-90PSCW, GT16-90PSGW,
For GT16 GT16-60PSCB, GT16-60PSGB, GT16-60PSCW, GT16-60PSGW,
GT16-90PSCB-012, GT16-80PSCB-012, GT16-70PSCB-012,
GT16-60PSCB-012, GT16-50PSCB-012, GT16H-60PSC
For GT15 GT15-70PSCB, GT15-70PSGB, GT15-70PSCW, GT15-70PSGW,
Protective Sheet GT15-60PSCB, GT15-60PSGB, GT15-60PSCW, GT15-60PSGW,
GT15-50PSCB, GT15-50PSGB, GT15-50PSCW, GT15-50PSGW
For GT14 GT14-50PSCB, GT14-50PSGB, GT14-50PSCW, GT14-50PSGW
For GT12 GT11-70PSCB, GT11-65PSCB
For GT11
GT11H-50PSC
For GT10
GT10-20PSCB, GT10-20PSGB, GT10-20PSCW, GT10-20PSGW
GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO, GT05-50PCO,
Protective cover for oil
GT16-50PCO, GT10-40PCO, GT10-30PCO, GT10-20PCO
USB environmental protection cover GT16-UCOV, GT16-50UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT14-50UCOV, GT11-50UCOV
Stand GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND, GT05-50STAND
GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96,
Attachment
GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85
GT16-90XLTT, GT16-80SLTT, GT16-70SLTT, GT16-70VLTT, GT16-70VLTTA, GT16-70VLTN,
Backlight GT16-60SLTT, GT16-60VLTT, GT16-60VLTN, GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT, GT15-70SLTT,
GT15-70VLTT, GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT, GT15-60VLTN
Multi-color display board GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB
Connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S, GT16H-CNB-42S
Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H-50ESCOV, GT16H-60ESCOV
With wall-mounting Attachment GT14H-50ATT
Memory loader GT10-LDR
Memory board GT10-50FMB
Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S, GT10-C10EXUSB-5S
A - 27
 Software
GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SW DND-GTWK3-E and SW DND-GTWK3-EA

GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series
GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000
GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works
Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SW DNC-IQWK (iQ
MELSOFT Navigator
Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works)
MELSOFT iQ AppPortal SW DND-IQAPL-M type integrated application management software
Abbreviation of SW DND-GXW3-E and SW DND-GXW3-EA type programmable controller

GX Works3
engineering software
Abbreviation of SW DNC-GXW2-E and SW DNC-GXW2-EA type programmable controller

GX Works2
engineering software
GX Simulator3 Abbreviation of GX Works3 with the simulation function
GX Simulator2 Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function
Controller simulator
Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages
GX Simulator
(SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)
GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package
GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN-VIEWER-E type software package
PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control
MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 (SW DND-MTW2-E)
MT Developer Abbreviation of SW RNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series
MR Configurator2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-MRC2-E type Servo Configuration Software
MR Configurator Abbreviation of MRZJW -SETUP E type Servo Configuration Software
FR Configurator Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software (FR-SW -SETUP-WE)

NC Configurator Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator
Abbreviation of parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U-20SSC-H
FX Configurator-FP
(SW D5C-FXSSC-E)
FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool Abbreviation of FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)
RT ToolBox2 Abbreviation of robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)
MX Component Abbreviation of MX Component Version (SW D5C-ACT-E, SW D5C-ACT-EA)
MX Sheet Abbreviation of MX Sheet Version (SW D5C-SHEET-E, SW D5C-SHEET-EA)

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Abbreviation of CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)
 License key (for GT SoftGOT1000)

License GT15-SGTKEY-U, GT15-SGTKEY-P
A - 28
 Others
IAI Abbreviation of IAI Corporation
AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (former Yamatake Corporation)
OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation
KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION
KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation
JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation
SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.
CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION
TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION
TOSHIBA MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.
HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi, Ltd.
FUJI Abbreviation of FUJI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX Abbreviation of Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation
YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ALLEN-BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.
GE Abbreviation of GE Intelligent Platforms
LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
MITSUBISHI INDIA Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd.
SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA
SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG
SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG
RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC.
HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation
MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co., Ltd.
PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller
Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by each corporation
Indicating controller Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation
Control equipment Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation
CHINO controller Abbreviation of indicating controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION
PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD
GOT (server) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function
GOT (client) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function
Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows

Windows font
(Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3)
Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are mounted
Intelligent function module
to the base unit
Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial
MODBUS/RTU
communication
MODBUS/TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP/IP network
A - 29
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
 Symbols
Following symbols are used in this manual.
BUS CONNECTION Connectable model name

Not connectable model name
5.1 Connectable Model List 5-2

Applicable model name
Shows GT16.
Shows GT15.
Shows GT14.
Shows GT12.
Shows GT11.
Shows GT11 (BUS).
Shows GT11 (SERIAL).
Shows GT10.
Shows GT105 ,GT104 .
Shows GT1020,GT1030 (input power supply : 24V).
Shows GT1020,GT1030 (input power supply : 5V).
1. 2. 3. …
Indicates the operation steps.
2.
[ ]: Indicates the setting items displayed on
the software and GOT screen.
3.
4.
Refers to the information required.
Refers to information useful

Click! for operation.
Indicates the location of related content.
Since the above page was created for explanation purpose, it differs from the actual page.
A - 30
 About system configuration
The following describes the system configuration of each connection included in this manual.
The configuration of The cable connecting The configuration of

equipment connected the GOT to the the GOT connected to
to GOT is shown. equipment is shown. equipment is shown.
For the option devices,
refer to the following.
1.3 Option Devices for
the Respective
Connection
RS-422 connector
QCPU GOT
conversion Cable
A representative example
Connection cable of the system configuration
is described with an
illustration.
Indicates the connection diagram Indicates the maximum distance between

number of cables to be prepared by the PLC and GOT.
the user.
Refer to the connection diagram
section in each chapter.
System Configuration Examples
(When connecting the PLC [MELSEC-Q] and GT16, with RS-422 cable)
1) Connect the RS-422 conversion cable [FA-CNV2402CBL] to the [MELSEC-Q].
Indicates the commercially available 2) Connect the option [GT16-C02R4-9S] to [GT16].
cable models that can be used. 3) Connect [MELSEQ-Q] and [GT16] with the connection cable [GT01-C30R4-25P].
Since the above page was created for explanation purpose, it differs from the actual page.
A - 31
A - 32
1
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

PREPARATORY PROCEDURES
DEVICE RANGE
1.
FOR MONITORING 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
1.1 Setting the Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18 4
HOW TO MONITOR
1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection . . . . . . 1 - 27
REDUNTANT
1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment . . . . . . 1 - 35
SYSTEM
1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 40
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
1-1
1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR
MONITORING
The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections.
Setting the communication interface

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface
Determine the connection type and channel No. to be used, and
Each chapter GOT Side Settings
perform the communication setting.
Writing the project data and OS

Write the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option 1.2.1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT
OS, project data and communication settings onto the GOT.
Verifying the project data and OS

Verify the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option
1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT
OS, project data and communication settings are properly
written onto the GOT.
Attaching the communication unit and 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
connecting the cable 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection
Each chapter System Configuration
Mount the optional equipment and prepare/connect the
Each chapter Connection Diagram
connection cable according to the connection type.
Verifying GOT recognizes connected

equipment 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment
Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication
Settings] of the Utility.
Verifying the GOT is monitoring normally

Verify the GOT is monitoring normally using Utility, Developer, 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
etc.
1-2 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Set the communication interface of GOT and the connected equipment.
When using the GOT at the first time, make sure to set the channel of communication interface and the communication
driver before writing to GOT.
Set the communication interface of the GOT at [Controller Setting] and [I/F Communication Setting] in GT Designer3.
2
POINT
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
When using the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator.
The system configuration of MELSOFT Navigator can be reflected to the project of GT Designer3 using the
parameter function of MELSOFT Navigator.
For details of the parameter functions of MELSOFT Navigator, refer to the following.
Help of MELSOFT Navigator 3
(1) The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to
FOR MONITORING
green. Set items, which are displayed in green cells, from the MELSOFT Navigator. When changing in GT
ACCESS RANGE
Designer3, refer to the following (3).
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
(2) When setting the communication interface for the connection with the iQ Works untargeted equipment, set
[Set with GT Designer3] to the channel connected at [Input Detailed Configuration Information] in MELSOFT
Navigator and make the settings at [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3. 6
(3) To make the items reflected from MELSOFT Navigator editable on GT Designer3, select the [Option] menu
CONNECTION TO
and put a check mark at [Enable an editing of parameters set in MELSOFT Navigator] in the [iQ Works
Interaction] tab.
However, when the items set in MELSOFT Navigator are edited in GT Designer3, the interaction function with
DIRECT
MELSOFT Navigator is unavailable due to a mismatch with the system configuration of MELSOFT Navigator.
CPU
Eliminate mismatches using the parameter verification function etc. before using the interaction function of
MELSOFT Navigator.
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1-3

1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting)
Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT.
 Setting
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.
2. The Controller Setting dialog box appears. Select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.
3. Refer to the following explanations for the setting.
POINT
Channel No.2 to No.4
Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function.
For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following.
Mitsubishi Electric Products 22. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION

1
 Setting item
PROCEDURES FOR
This section describes the setting items of the Manufacturer, Controller Type, Driver and I/F.
PREPARATORY
When using the channel No.2 to No.4, put a check mark at [Use CH*].
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
Item Description
Use CH* Select this item when setting the channel No.2 to No.4.
Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.
Select the type of the equipment to be connected to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following.
Type
(2)Setting [Controller Type]
Select the interface of the GOT to which the equipment is connected.For the settings, refer to the following. 6
I/F
(3)Setting [I/F]
CONNECTION TO
Select the communication driver to be written to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following.
Driver
(1)Setting [Driver]
DIRECT
Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver.
Detail Setting
CPU
Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.
7
(1) Setting [Driver]
COMPUTER LINK
The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F].
CONNECTION
When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct.
For the settings, refer to the following.
[Setting the communication interface] section in each chapter
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

(2) Setting [Controller Type]
The types for the selection differs depending on the PLC to be used.
For the settings, refer to the following.
Type Model name
Type Model name
Q03UDVCPU
R04CPU Q04UDVCPU
R08CPU Q06UDVCPU
R16CPU Q13UDVCPU
R32CPU Q26UDVCPU
R120CPU
Q12DCCPU-V
R16MTCPU Q24DHCCPU-V/VG
R32MTCPU Q24DHCCPU-LS
R08PCPU Q26DHCCPU-LS
R16PCPU Q172DCPU
R32PCPU Q173DCPU
MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT R120PCPU For GT16, GT15,GT12*1*2
Q172DCPU-S1
MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700
R04ENCPU Q173DCPU-S1
R08ENCPU Q172DSCPU
R16ENCPU For GT14, GT11*1
Q173DSCPU
R32ENCPU MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR
Q170MCPU
R120ENCPU Q170MSCPU
R08SFCPU For GT10*1 Q170MSCPU-S1
R16SFCPU MELSEC-QnU/DC
CNC C70
R32SFCPU (Q173NCCPU)
R120SFCPU
CRnQ-700
R12CCPU-V (Q172DRCPU)
FX5U CR750-Q
MELSEC iQ-F
FX5UC (Q172DRCPU)
Q00CPU CR751-Q
Q01CPU (Q172DRCPU)
Q02CPU CRnD-700
Q02HCPU CR750-D
Q06HCPU CR751-D
Q12HCPU Q00JCPU
For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11 Q25HCPU Q00CPU
MELSEC-Q(MULTI)/Q MOTION Q02PHCPU Q01CPU
Q06PHCPU
Q02CPU
For GT10 Q12PHCPU
Q02HCPU
MELSEC-Q(MULTI) Q25PHCPU
Q06HCPU
Q172CPU Q12HCPU
Q173CPU
Q25HCPU
Q172CPUN
Q02PHCPU
Q173CPUN
Q06PHCPU
Q172HCPU
For GT16, GT15, GT12*1*2 Q12PHCPU
Q173HCPU
MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* Q25PHCPU
Q00UJCPU
Q12PRHCPU
Q00UCPU
GT11*1
For GT14, Q25PRHCPU
Q01UCPU
MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* QS001CPU
Q02UCPU
Q2ACPU
Q03UDCPU For GT10*1 Q2ACPU-S1
Q04UDHCPU MELSEC-QnA/Q Q3ACPU
For GT16, GT15, GT12*1*2
Q06UDHCPU Q4ACPU
Q10UDHCPU Q4ARCPU
Q13UDHCPU
For GT14, GT11*1 Q2ASCPU
Q20UDHCPU
MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR Q2ASCPU-S1
Q26UDHCPU
Q2ASHCPU
Q03UDECPU
For GT10*1 Q04UDEHCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1
MELSEC-QnU/DC Q06UDEHCPU MELDAS C6
Q10UDEHCPU (FCA C6)
Q13UDEHCPU MELDAS C64
Q20UDEHCPU (FCA C64)
Q26UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU

Type Model name
Type Model name
1
L02CPU
PROCEDURES FOR
L06CPU A2UCPU
L26CPU
PREPARATORY
A2UCPU-S1
MONITORING
L26CPU-BT
A3UCPU
L02CPU-P
MELSEC-L L06CPU-P A4UCPU
L26CPU-P A2ACPU
L26CPU-PBT A2ACPUP21
L02SCPU
L02SCPU-P
A2ACPUR21
2
NZ2GF-ETB A2ACPU-S1
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
A2ACPUP21-S1
*1 When using the multiple CPU system
When using the GOT to monitor the multiple CPU system of A2ACPUR21-S1
other station, select [MELSEC-Q(Multi)/Q-Motion], or
[MELSEC-QnU/DC,Q17nD/M/NC/DR,CRnD-700] for the A3ACPU
type regardless of the host PLC CPU type. A3ACPUP21
*2 When connecting to the remote I/O station in the
MELSECNET/H network system, set the type to [MELSEC- A3ACPUR21
QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 *]. A1NCPU 3
A1NCPUP21
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1 4
A2NCPUR21-S1
HOW TO MONITOR
A3NCPU
REDUNTANT
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
SYSTEM
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
MELSEC-A
A2USHCPU-S1 5
A1SCPU
BUS CONNECTION
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
A2SCPU
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1 6
A1SJCPU
CONNECTION TO
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
DIRECT
A0J2HCPUP21
CPU
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
7
A2CCPU
A2CCPUP21
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
A273UCPU
8
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3

Type Model name Type Model name
A171SCPU FREQROL-E700
A171SCPU-S3 FREQROL-F700
A171SCPU-S3N FREQROL-F700P
A171SHCPU FREQROL 500/700/800 Series FREQROL-F700PJ
MELSEC-A A171SHCPUN FREQROL-A700
A172SHCPU FREQROL-A800
A172SHCPUN FREQROL-F800
A173UHCPU Sensorless Servo FREQROL-E700EX
A173UHCPU-S1
FX0
FX0S
FX0N
FX1
FX2
FX2C
FX1S
FX1N
MELSEC-FX FX2N
FX1NC
FX2NC
FX3S
FX3G
FX3GC
FX3GE
FX3U
FX3UC
FX3S
FX3G
FX3GC
MELSEC-FX(Ethernet)
FX3GE
FX3U
FX3UC
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1
WS0-CPU3
MELSERVO-J2M-P8A MELSERVO-J2M-P8A
MELSERVO-J2M-*DU MELSERVO-J2M-*DU
MELSERVO-J2S-*A MELSERVO-J2S-*A
MELSERVO-J2S-*CP MELSERVO-J2S-*CP
MELSERVO-J2S-*CL MELSERVO-J2S-*CL
MELSERVO-J3-*A MELSERVO-J3-*A
MELSERVO-J3-*T MELSERVO-J3-*T
MELSERVO-J4-*A MELSERVO-J4-*A
MELSERVO-JE-*A MELSERVO-JE-*A
FREQROL-S500
FREQROL-S500E
FREQROL-E500
FREQROL-F500
FREQROL-F500L
FREQROL 500/700/800 Series FREQROL-F500J
FREQROL-A500
FREQROL-A500L
FREQROL-V500
FREQROL-V500L
FREQROL-D700

(3) Setting [I/F]
1
PROCEDURES FOR
The interface differs depending on the GOT to be used.
Set the I/F according to the connection and the position of communication unit to be mounted onto the GOT.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(a) GT16
Extension interface 1
3rd stage Extension interface 2 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Standard interface 3
2nd stage (RS-422/485 interface built in the GOT)
(Ethernet interface built in the GOT)
1st stage 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
(RS-232 interface built in the GOT)
HOW TO MONITOR
(Example: In the case of the GT1685)
REDUNTANT
(USB interface built in the GOT)
SYSTEM
(b) GT15
Extension interface 1 5
BUS CONNECTION
3rd stage
2nd stage 6
1st stage CONNECTION TO

DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
(Example: In the case of the GT1575) Standard interface 2

8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

(c) GT14
[Front view]] [Rear view]

Standard interface 3 Standard interface 1
(GOT built-in USB interface) (GOT built-in RS-422 interface)
(GOT built-in RS-232 interface)
(GOT built-in Ethernet interface)
[Under view]
(d) GT12
[Front view] [Rear view] Standard interface 4

(GOT built-in Ethernet interface)
1 - 10 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

(e) GT11 1
• GT11 Serial
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
[Front view] [Rear view] 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
(GOT built-in USB interface) (GOT built-in RS-422 interface)
• GT11 Bus
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
[Front view] [Rear view]
(GOT built-in USB interface) (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) 6
CONNECTION TO
(GOT built-in Bus interface)
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 11

(f) GT105
[Rear view]

(GOT built-in RS-422 interface) (GOT built-in USB interface)
(g) GT104

(GOT built-in RS-422 interface) (GOT built-in USB interface)
(h) GT1020, GT1030
(GOT built-in RS-422 interface) Standard interface 2
or (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) (GOT built-in RS-232 interface)

1.1.2 I/F communication setting 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
This function displays the list of the GOT communication interfaces.
MONITORING
Set the channel and the communication driver to the interface to be used.
 Setting
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
1. Select [Common] [I/F Communication Setting] from the menu.
BUS CONNECTION
2. The I/F Communication Setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
POINT
When using the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator. 6
When setting [Controller Setting] in GT Designer3 using the parameter function of MELSOFT Navigator, all of I/F
Communication Setting are grayout and cannot be edited.Set these items at [Controller Setting] or [Peripheral Unit
CONNECTION TO
Setting]. DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 Setting item
The following describes the setting items for the standard I/F setting and extension I/F setting.
Item Description
Set channel No. and drivers to the GOT standard interfaces.

GT16, GT14, GT12: Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2, Standard I/F-3, Standard I/F-4
Standard I/F setting
GT15, GT1030, GT1020: Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2
GT11, GT105 , GT104 : Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2, Standard I/F-3
Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose.

The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used.
0: Not used
1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel
setting)
8: Used for fingerprint authentication, barcode function, RFID function, remote personal computer operation
CH No.
(serial), report function (when using the serial printer), hard copy function (when using the serial printer) or GOT
(extended computer)
9: Used for connecting Host (PC) or Host (modem)
*: Used for remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), Ethernet download, gateway function or MES
interface function
Multi: Used for Ethernet multiple connection
I/F The communication type of the GOT standard interface is displayed.
Set the driver for the device to be connected.

Driver
None Host (Personal computer) Each communication driver for connected devices
Detail Setting
To validate the 5V power supply function in RS232, mark the [Enable the 5V power supply] checkbox.
The RS232 setting is invalid in the following cases.
RS232 Setting • CH No. of [I/F-1: RS232] is [9] in GT15 and 16.
• CH No. of [I/F-1: RS232] is [9] or [8] in GT14.
• For GT12, GT11 and GT10
(Continued to next page)

Item Description
1
PROCEDURES FOR
Extension I/F setting Set the communication unit attached to the extension interface of the GOT.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose.
The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used.
0: Not used
1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel
setting)
CH No.
5 to 7: Used for barcode function, RFID function, remote personal computer operation (serial), report function
(when using the serial printer) or hard copy function (when using the serial printer)
2
* : Used for remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), video display function, multimedia function,
THAT CAN BE SET

operation panel function, external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a
DEVICE RANGE
PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound
output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit, Ethernet download, gateway
function or MES interface function
Set the driver for the device to be connected.

Driver
None Each driver for connected devices
3
Detail Setting
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
POINT
Channel No., drivers, [RS232 Setting]
(1) Channel No.2 to No.4 4
Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function.
HOW TO MONITOR
For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following.
Mitsubishi Electric Products 22. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
(2) Drivers
The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F].
When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct.
[Setting the communication] section in each chapter
5
BUS CONNECTION
(3) [RS232 Setting] of GT14
Do not use [RS232 Setting] of GT14 for other than the 5V power feeding to the RS-232/485 signal conversion
adaptor.
For details, refer to the following manual.
GT14 User's Manual 7.11 RS-232/485 Signal Conversion Adaptor
6
1.1.3 Precautions
CONNECTION TO
(1) When using the multiple CPU system
DIRECT
When using the GOT to monitor the multiple CPU system of other stations, select [MELSEC-Q(Multi)/Q-Motion]
CPU
or [MELSEC-QnU, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700] for the type, regardless of the host PLC CPU type (QCPU,
QnACPU, ACPU). When other models are selected, the setting of the CPU No. becomes unavailable.
7
(2) Precautions for changing model
(a) When devices that cannot be converted are included.
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
When setting of [Manufacturer] or [Controller Type] is changed, GT Designer3 displays the device that
cannot be converted (no corresponding device type, or excessive setting ranges as [??]. In this case, set
the device again.
(b) When the changed Manufacturer or Controller Type does not correspond to the network.
The network will be set to the host station. 8
(c) When the Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed to [None]
The GT Designer3 displays the device of the changed channel No. as [??]. In this case, set the device
CONNECTION
again.
ETHERNET
Since the channel No. is retained, the objects can be reused in other channel No. in a batch by using the
[Device Bach Edit], [CH No. Batch Edit] or [Device List].

1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT
Write the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, project data and communication settings onto the GOT.
For details on writing to GOT, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual
1.2.1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT
1. Select [Communication] [Write to GOT…] from the menu.
2. The [Communication configuration] dialog box appears.

Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer.
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
3. The [GOT Write] tab appears on the [Communicate with GOT] dialog box.
Select the [Project data, OS] radio button of the Write Data.
4. Check-mark a desired standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, extended function OS, and
Communication Settings and click the [GOT Write] button.
POINT
Writing communication driver onto GT10
When writing a communication driver onto the GT10 in which a Boot OS Ver. under F or a standard monitor OS
Ver. under 01.08.00 is written, turn on the GOT in the OS transfer mode.
GT10 User's Manual
(Operating of transmission mode)
Turn on the GOT while the bottom right corner is touched.

1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Confirm if the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, project data and communication settings are
MONITORING
properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designer3.
For reading from the GOT, refer to the following manual.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
1. Select [Communication] [Read from GOT…] from the menu.
2. The [Communication configuration] dialog box appears.

Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer.
3. The [GOT Read] tab appears on the [Communicate with GOT] dialog box. 6
Select the [Drive information] radio button of the Read Data.
CONNECTION TO
4. Click the [Info Reception] button.
5. Confirm that the project data and OS are written correctly onto the GOT.
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
The following shows the option devices to connect in the respective connection type.
For the specifications, usage and connecting procedure on option devices, refer to the respective device manual.
1.3.1 Communication module
Product name Model Specifications
For QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series)

GT15-QBUS
Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model

GT15-QBUS2
For A/QnACPU, motion controller CPU (A series)

GT15-ABUS

GT15-ABUS2
Bus connection unit
GT15-75QBUSL
Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model

GT15-75QBUS2L

GT15-75ABUSL

GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (male))
Serial communication module GT15-RS4-9S RS-422/485 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (female))
GT15-RS4-TE RS-422/485 serial communication unit (terminal block)
GT15-RS2T4-9P RS-422 side connector 9-pin

RS-422 conversion unit RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit
GT15-RS2T4-25P RS-422 side connector 25-pin
MELSECNET/H GT15-J71LP23-25 Optical loop unit

Communication module GT15-J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit
MELSECNET/10 GT15-75J71LP23-Z Optical loop unit (A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set)

Communication module GT15-75J71BR13-Z Coaxial bus unit (A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set)
CC-Link IE Controller Network

GT15-J71GP23-SX Optical loop unit
communication unit
CC-Link IE Field Network

GT15-J71GF13-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network (1000BASE-T) unit
communication unit
GT15-J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit CC-LINK Ver. 2 compatible

CC-Link communication unit Intelligent device station unit
GT15-75J61BT13-Z
(A8GT-61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set)
Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100 Ethernet (100Base-TX) unit

1.3.2 Option unit 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Printer unit GT15-PRN USB slave (PictBridge) for connecting printer 1 ch
Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 1 ch, playing movie
GT16M-V4
Video input unit
GT15V-75V4
For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch
2
GT16M-R2
THAT CAN BE SET

RGB input unit For analog RGB input signal 2 ch
DEVICE RANGE
GT15V-75R1
GT16M-V4R1
Video/RGB input unit For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch, for analog RGB mixed input signal 1 ch
GT15V-75V4R1
GT16M-ROUT
RGB output unit
GT15V-75ROUT
For analog RGB output signal 1 ch
3
CF card unit GT15-CFCD For CF card installation (B drive) For GOT back face CF card eject
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
CF card extension unit GT15-CFEX-C08SET For CF card installation (B drive) For control panel front face CF card eject
Sound output unit GT15-SOUT For sound output
For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Negative Common
GT15-DIOR
Input/Source Type Output)
External I/O unit
GT15-DIO
For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Positive Common
Input/Sink Type Output)
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
1.3.3 Conversion cables
SYSTEM
RS-422 connector conversion

GT16-C02R4-9S RS-422/485 (Connector) RS-422 connector conversion cable (D-sub 9-pin)
5
Cable
BUS CONNECTION
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05
RS-485 terminal block RS-422/485 (Connector) RS-485 (Terminal block)
FA-LTBGTR4CBL10
conversion modules Supplied connection cable dedicated for the conversion unit
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20
1.3.4 Connector conversion adapter 6
CONNECTION TO
Connector conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S RS-422/485 (D-Sub 9-pin connector) RS-422/485 (Terminal block)
DIRECT
CPU
1.3.5 Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 7

COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION
Serial multi-drop GOT multi-drop connection module

GT01-RS4-M
connection unit Mitsubishi Electric Products 20. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
1.3.6 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter 8

CONNECTION

ETHERNET
RS-232/485 signal conversion

GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232 signal (D-Sub 9-pin connector) RS-485 signal (Terminal block)
adapter

1.3.7 Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position)
This section describes the precautions for installing units on another unit.
For the installation method of each unit, refer to the User's Manual for the communication unit and option unit you are
using.
For the method for installing a unit on another unit, refer to the following.
User's Manual of GOT used.
 Calculating consumed current

For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units,
bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply.
For the current that the GOT can supply and the current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller,
refer to the following tables. Make sure that the total of consumed current is within the capacity of the GOT.
(1) Current supply capacity of the GOT
Current supply Current supply

GOT type capacity GOT type capacity
(A) (A)
GT1695M-X 2.4 GT1595-X 2.13
GT1685M-S 2.4 GT1585V-S 1.74
GT1675M-S 2.4 GT1585-S 1.74
GT1675M-V 2.4 GT1575V-S 2.2
GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN 2.4 GT1575-S 2.2
GT1665M-S 2.4 GT1575-V, GT1572-VN 2.2
GT1665M-V 2.4 GT1565-V, GT1562-VN 2.2
GT1662-VN 2.4 GT1555-V 1.3
GT1655-V 1.3 GT1555-Q, GT1550-Q 1.3
(2) Current consumed by an extension unit/barcode reader/RFID controller
Consumed Consumed
Module type current Module type current
(A) (A)
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS,
0.275*1 GT16M-R2 0*1
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L
GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2,
0.12 GT15V-75R1 0.2*1
GT15-RS2-9P 0.29 GT16M-V4R1 0.12*1
GT15-RS4-9S 0.33 GT15V-75V4R1 0.2*1
GT15-RS4-TE 0.3 GT16M-ROUT 0.11*1
GT15-RS2T4-9P 0.098 GT15V-75ROUT 0.11
GT15-J71E71-100 0.224 GT16M-MMR 0.27*1
GT15-J71GP23-SX 1.07 GT15-CFCD 0.07
GT15-J71LP23-25 0.56 GT15-CFEX-C08SET 0.15
GT15-J71BR13 0.77 GT15-SOUT 0.08
GT15-J61BT13 0.56 GT15-DIO 0.1
Bar code reader *2 GT15-DIOR 0.1
GT15-PRN 0.09 RFID controller *2
GT16M-V4 0.12*1 GT15-80FPA 0.22
GT15V-75V4 0.2*1
*1 Value used for calculating the current consumption of the multi-channel function.
For the specifications of the unit, refer to the manual included with the unit.
*2 When the GOT supplies power to a barcode reader or a RFID controller from the standard interface, add their consumed current.
(Maximum value is less than 0.3 A)

(3) Calculation example
1
PROCEDURES FOR
(a) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (3 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (For the gateway function)
PREPARATORY
and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1575-V
MONITORING
Current supply capacity of GOT (A) Total consumed current (A)
2.2 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=2.104
Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GOT, they can be connected to the GOT.
2
(b) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (2 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (For the gateway function)
THAT CAN BE SET

and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1585-S
DEVICE RANGE
1.74 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=1.774
Since the calculated value exceeds the capacity of the GOT, such configuration is not allowed.
3
 When using a bus connection unit
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
The installation position varies depending on the bus connection unit to be used.
(1) Wide bus units (GT15-75QBUS(2)L, GT15-75ABUS(2)L, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2)
Install a bus connection unit in the 1st stage of the extension interface.
If a bus connection unit is installed in the 2nd stage or above, the unit cannot be used.
Example: Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units 4

Serial communication unit Bus connection unit
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
Bus connection unit Serial communication unit
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

POINT
Cautions for using GT15-QBUS2 and GT15-ABUS2
The stage number of communication units installed on the next stage of GT15-QBUS2 or GT15-ABUS2 are
recognized by the GOT differently depending on the extension interface position.
For communication units installed in the extension interface 2 side, even if the communication unit is physically
installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage.
Recognized as the
3rd stage of extend Recognized as the 2nd stage
interface 1 of extend interface 2
Recognized as the
2nd stage of extend Recognized as the 1st stage
interface 1 of extend interface 2
Recognized as the 1st stage

of extend interface 1
GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2
Relay connector
(2) Standard size bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS and GT15-ABUS)

A bus connection unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface.
Example: Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units
Serial communication unit Bus connection unit
Bus connection unit Serial communication unit

1
 When using a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network
PROCEDURES FOR
communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, or CC-Link communication
PREPARATORY
unit (GT15-J61BT13)
MONITORING
Install a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field
Network communication unit, or CC-Link communication unit in the 1st stage of an extension interface.
These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage.
Example: When installing a MELSECNET/H communication unit and a serial communication unit 2
THAT CAN BE SET

Serial communication unit MELSECNET/H
DEVICE RANGE
communication unit
MELSECNET/H Serial communication unit

communication unit
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
POINT 4
HOW TO MONITOR
Precautions for using a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit,
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)
REDUNTANT
The installed stage number of communication units installed on the next stage of MELSECNET/H communication
SYSTEM
unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, or CC-Link
communication unit are recognized by the GOT differently depending on the extension interface position.
installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage. 5
BUS CONNECTION
Recognized as the 3rd stage
of extension interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage
of extension interface 2
Recognized as the 2nd stage

of extension interface 1 Recognized as the 1st stage
6
Recognized as the 1st stage
CONNECTION TO
MELSECNET/H communication unit
DIRECT
Relay connector
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 When using a MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15- 75J71BR13-
Z) or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z)
Install a MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z) or CC-Link communication
unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) at the 1st stage of the extension interface.
These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage.
For GT16 and the GT155 , the MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15- 75J71BR13-Z)
and the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) are not applicable.
Example: When installing a MELSECNET/10 communication unit and a serial communication unit
MELSECNET/10
communication unit
Serial communication unit
 When using an Ethernet communication unit

An Ethernet communication unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface.
For GT16, the Ethernet communication unit is not applicable.
Use the Ethernet interface built in the GOT.
Example: When installing an Ethernet communication unit and a serial communication unit
Serial communication unit Ethernet

communication unit
Ethernet Serial communication unit
communication unit
 When using a serial communication unit

A serial communication unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface.
Serial Serial
communication communication
unit unit

1
 When using the printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit
PROCEDURES FOR
The printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the
PREPARATORY
extension interface.
MONITORING
Example: When installing a printer unit
Communication Printer unit
unit
Communication 2
Printer unit
unit
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
 When using the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or
multimedia unit
Install the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or multimedia unit at the 1st stage 4
of the extension interface.These units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage.
HOW TO MONITOR
When any of these units is used, the communication units indicated below must be installed in the 2nd stage of the
extension interface.
REDUNTANT
Communication unit Model
SYSTEM
Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2

5
GT15-J71GP23-SX
communication unit
BUS CONNECTION
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13
Example: When installing a video input unit and a MELSECNET/H communication unit
MELSECNET/H Video/RGB
communication unit
input unit 6
Video/RGB MELSECNET/H
CONNECTION TO
communication unit
input unit
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

POINT
Precautions for video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, and multimedia unit
When a communication unit is installed on any of the units above, the stage number of the communication unit
recognized by the GOT varies according to the extension interface.
installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage.
Recognized as the 3rd stage of

extension interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage
Recognized as the 2nd stage of

extension interface 1 Recognized as the 1st stage
Recognized as the 1st stage of

extension interface 1
Video/RGB input unit
Relay connector
 When using CF card unit or CF card extension unit

Install the CF card unit or CF card extension unit on the extension interface at the last.
The following figures show how to install the CF card unit.
CF card unit
Serial communication
unit
unit
CF card unit

1
1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
To connect the GOT to a device in the respective connection type, connection cables between the GOT and a device are
necessary.
For cables needed for each connection, refer to each chapter for connection.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications 2
THAT CAN BE SET

The following shows the connector specifications on the GOT side.
DEVICE RANGE
Refer to the following table when preparing connection cables by the user.
 RS-232 interface
Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side
connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.
(1) Connector specifications
3
FOR MONITORING
Hardware
ACCESS RANGE
GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer
version*1
GT16 ― 17LE-23090-27(D4C )
GT1595-X ― DDK Ltd.
17LE-23090-27(D4CK)
GT1585V-S ―
GT1585-STBA
B or later
C
GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
4
HOW TO MONITOR
GT1585-STBD ― 17LE-23090-27(D4CK) DDK Ltd.
GT1575V-S ―
REDUNTANT
B or later GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
GT1575-STBA
SYSTEM
C
17LE-23090-27(D4CK) DDK Ltd.
GT1575-STBD ―
D or later GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
GT1575-VTBA
E 9-pin D-sub (male) 5
inch screw fixed type
GT1575-VTBD ―
BUS CONNECTION
GT1575-VN ―
GT1572-VN ―
GT1565-V ― 17LE-23090-27(D4CK)
GT1562-VN ―
DDK Ltd.
GT155 ―
GT14 ― 6
GT12 ―
CONNECTION TO
GT115 -Q ―
GT105 -Q ― 17LE-23090-27(D3CC)
GT104 -Q ―
DIRECT
CPU
GT1030, GT1020 ― 9-pin terminal block*2 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc

GT15-RS2-9P ― 9-pin D-sub (male)
GT01-RS4-M ― inch screw fixed type
17LE-23090-27(D3CC) DDK Ltd. 7
*1 For the procedure to check the GT15 hardware version, refer to the GT15 User's Manual.
COMPUTER LINK
*2 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030, GT1020.
CONNECTION
(2) Connector pin arrangement

GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 , GT01-RS4-M GT1030, GT1020
GOT main part connector See from the back of a

see from the front GOT main part 8
1 5
CONNECTION
NC
NC
CS
RS
SG
DR
ER
RD
SD
6 9
ETHERNET
9-pin D-sub (male) 9-pin terminal block

Use the following as the RS-422 interface and the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT.
For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.
(1) Connector model
GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer
9-pin D-sub (female)

RS-422 conversion unit M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D2AC) DDK Ltd.
fixed type
GT16*1 14-pin (female) HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
GT14
GT12
GT115 -Q M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
fixed type
GT105 -Q
GT104 -Q
GT1030, GT1020 9-pin terminal block*2 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT15-RS4-9S M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
fixed type
GT01-RS4-M
*1 When connecting to the RS-422/485 interface, use HDR-E14MAG1+ as a cable connector.

To use HDR-E14MAG1+, a dedicated pressure welding tool is required.
For details on the connector and pressure welding tool, contact Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.

GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 ,
GT16 GT1030, GT1020
GT104 , GT01-RS4-M
GOT main part connector GOT main part connector See from the back of a
see from the front see from the front GOT main part
8 14 5 1
1 7
CSB
CSA
RSB
RSA
RDB
RDA
SDB
9 6
SDA
SG
14-pin (female) 9-pin D-sub (female) 9-pin terminal block

1
PROCEDURES FOR
Use the following as the RS-485 interface and the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT.
PREPARATORY
For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.
MONITORING
(1) Connector model
GOT Hardware version*1 Connector type Connector model Manufacturer
GT16*2 ― 14-pin (female) HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. 2

GT14 ―
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GT12 ―
GT1155-QTBD C or later
GT1155-QSBD M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
F or later
fixed type
GT1150-QLBD
GT105 -Q C or later 3
GT104 -Q A or later
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT1030 B or later
9-pin terminal block*3 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc
GT1020 E or later

GT15-RS4-9S ― M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
fixed type
GT15-RS4-TE ― ― SL-SMT3.5/10/90F BOX Weidmuller interconnections inc

4
HOW TO MONITOR
*1 For the checking procedure of the hardware version, refer to the User's Manual.
*2 When connecting to the RS-422/485 interface, use HDR-E14MAG1+ as a cable connector.
REDUNTANT
To use HDR-E14MAG1+, a dedicated pressure welding tool is required.
For details on the connector and pressure welding tool, contact Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd..
SYSTEM
GT16
GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11,
GT1030, GT1020
5
GT105 , GT104
BUS CONNECTION
GOT main part connector GOT main part connector See from the back of a
see from the front see from the front GOT main part
8 14 5 1
1 7
CSB
CSA
RSB
RSA
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
9 6
SG
6
14-pin (female) 9-pin D-sub (female) 9-pin terminal block
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

1.4.2 Coaxial cable connector connection method
The following describes the method for connecting the BNC connector (connector plug for coaxial cable) and the cable.
CAUTION
 Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly.
Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions.
Components of the BNC connector Structure of the coaxial cable
External conductor
Outer sheath Insulating material
Nut Washer Gasket
Plug shell
Internal conductor
Clamp Contact
1. Remove the external sheath of the coaxial cable with

dimensions as shown below.
A
Cable in use A
Cut this portion of the outer sheath 3C-2V 15mm
5C-2V, 5C-2V-CCY 10mm
2. Pass the nut, washer, gasket, and clamp through the coaxial
Clamp
cable as shown on the left and loosen the external conductor.
Nut
Washer
Gasket
Insulating material 3. Cut the external conductor, insulting material, and internal
Internal conductor conductor with the dimensions as shown below.
Note that the external conductor should be cut to the same
dimension as the tapered section of the clamp and smoothed
C down to the clamp.
B Clamp and external
Cable in use B C
conductor
3C-2V 6mm 3mm
5C-2V, 5C-2V-CCY 7mm 5mm
Solder here 4. Solder the contact to the internal conductor.
5. Insert the connector assembly shown in into the plug

shell and screw the nut into the plug shell.
Precautions for soldering

Note the following precautions when soldering the internal conductor and contact.
• Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section.
• Make sure there are no gaps between the connector and cable insulator or they do not cut into each other.
• Perform soldering quickly so the insulation material does not become deformed.

1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
The following shows the terminating resistor specifications on the GOT side.
MONITORING
When setting the terminating resistor in each connection type, refer to the following.
 RS-422/485 communication unit  GT16

Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
resistor setting switch.
2
THAT CAN BE SET

Terminating Switch No. Terminating Switch No.
DEVICE RANGE
resistor*1 resistor*1
ON
ON
1 2 SW1 1 2 SW1
1
1
100 OHM ON ON Enable ON ON
2
2
Disable OFF OFF Disable OFF OFF
*1 The default setting is "Disable". *1 The default setting is "Disable".

3
• For RS-422/485 communication unit • For GT1685M-S
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
ON
SW1
1
2
ON
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Terminating resistor setting switch
Rear view of RS-422/485 communication unit.
 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter 5

For details, refer to the following.
BUS CONNECTION
Terminating resistor setting switch
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion (inside the cover)
adaptor
 GT14
resistor setting switch. 6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
Terminating resistor selector switch

CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 GT12  GT105
Set the terminating resistor using the terminating Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
resistor setting switch. resistor setting switch.
 GT11 Terminating resistor selector switch

 GT104

1
 GT1030
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
 GT1020
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor
Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch according to the connection type.
POINT
Enable the 5V power supply
Make sure to validate "Enable the 5V power supply" in the [RS232 Setting] to operate the RS-232/485 signal
conversion adaptor.
1.1.2 I/F communication setting
When validating the function using the utility function of the GOT main unit, refer to the following manual.
GT14 User's Manual 8.2 Utility Function List
2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch
 Setting the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch

O
N
1
2
3
4
5
6
Switch No.
Setting item Set value
1 2 3 4 5 6
2-wire (1Pair) ON ON - - - OFF

2-wire/4-wire
4-wire (2Pair) OFF OFF - - - OFF
110 - - ON OFF OFF OFF
Terminating resistor OPEN - - OFF OFF OFF OFF
330 - - OFF ON ON OFF
POINT
RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter
For details on the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter, refer to the following manual.
GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232/485 Signal Conversion Adapter User's Manual

1
1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication Settings] of the Utility.
• Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status
• Communication unit installation status
For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual.

2
GT User's Manual
THAT CAN BE SET

 When using GT16, GT12
DEVICE RANGE
(For GT16)
1. 1. After powering up the GOT, touch [Main menu]

[Communication setting] from the Utility.
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
2.
BUS CONNECTION
Touch [Communication setting].
2.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

3. The [Communication Settings] appears.
3. 4.
4. Verify that the communication driver name to
be used is displayed in the communication
interface box to be used.
5. When the communication driver name is not

displayed normally, carry out the following
procedure again.
1.1Setting the Communication Interface

1
 For GT15, GT14 or GT11
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
1.
MONITORING
After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu]
[Communication setting] from the Utility.
1.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
2. Touch [Communication setting].
(The screen on the left is not displayed on
GT11.)
4
2.
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
3. 4. 3. The [Communication Setting] appears.
6
CONNECTION TO
be used is displayed in the box for the
communication interface to be used. DIRECT

CPU

procedure again. 7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 For GT10
1. 1. After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu]
[Comm. Setting] from the Utility.
2. Touch [Standard I/F] on [Comm. Setting].

2.
3. The [Standard I/F] appears.

3. 4.
be used is displayed in the box for the
communication interface to be used.

procedure again.

1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Utility
(1) How to display Utility (at default)
When using GT16, GT1595, GT14, GT12 or GT1020
2
Utility call key
1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner
Utility display
(When using GT16, GT12) (When using GT15)
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
(When using GT105 ,
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
When using GT1585, GT157 , (When using GT14, GT11) GT104 )
GT156 , GT155 , GT11, GT105 ,
GT104 or GT1030
Utility call key
Simultaneous 2-point press
HOW TO MONITOR
(When using GT1030,GT1020)
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
(2) Utility call
When setting [Pressing time] to other than 0 second on the setting screen of the utility call key, press and hold 5
the utility call key until the buzzer sounds.For the setting of the utility call key, refer to the following.
BUS CONNECTION
GT User's Manual
(3) Communication interface setting by the Utility
The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing
[Communication Settings] of project data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual.
GT User's Manual
6
(4) Precedence in communication settings
CONNECTION TO
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective. DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
1.6.1 Check on the GOT
 Check for errors occurring on the GOT
Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo
amplifier and communications.
For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual.
GT User's Manual
(When using GT15)

Error code Communication Channel No.
Error message Time of occurrence

(Displayed only for errors)
HINT
Advanced alarm popup display

With the advanced alarm popup display function, alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether
an alarm display object is placed on the screen or not (regardless of the display screen).
Since comments can be flown from right to left, even a long comment can be displayed all.
For details of the advanced popup display, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual

1
 Perform an I/O check
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. 2
If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection.
THAT CAN BE SET

Display the I/O check screen by Main Menu.
DEVICE RANGE
• For GT16, GT12
Display the I/O check screen by [Main menu] [Self check] [I/O check].
• For GT15, GT14, GT11
Display the I/O check screen by [Main menu] [Debug & self check] [Self check] [I/O check].
For details on the I/O check, refer to the following manual:
3
FOR MONITORING
GT User's Manual
ACCESS RANGE
1. Touch [CPU] on the I/O check screen.
Touching [CPU] executes the communication
check with the connected PLC.
4
HOW TO MONITOR
1.
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
2. When the communication screen ends
successfully, the screen on the left is displayed. 6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 Communication monitoring function
The communication monitoring is a function that checks whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT.
If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection.
Display the communication monitoring function screen by [Main Menu] [Comm. Setting] [Comm. Monitor].
For details on the communication monitoring function, refer to the following manual:
GT10 User's Manual
(Operation of communication monitoring function screen)
Main Menu
Touch [Comm. Setting] Touch [ ]
Communication settings
Touch [Comm. Monitor]

1
 Confirming the communication status with network unit by GOT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
(1) For MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system
The communication status between the GOT and the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system can be
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT.
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)
GT15 User's Manual
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
POINT
BUS CONNECTION
Communication unit for displaying network module status
Use the GT15-J71LP23-25 or GT15-J71BR13 for displaying the network module status on the GOT.
The GOT cannot display the network module status with GT15-75J71LP23-Z or GT15-75J71BR13-Z.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

(2) For CC-Link IE Controller Network system
The communication status between the GOT and CC-Link IE Controller Network can be confirmed by the utility
screen of the GOT.
GT15 User's Manual
(3) For CC-Link IE Field Network system

The communication status between the GOT and CC-Link IE Field Network can be confirmed by the utility
screen of the GOT.
GT15 User's Manual

(4) For CC-Link system
1
PROCEDURES FOR
The communication status between the GOT and the CC-Link System can be confirmed by the Utility screen of
the GOT.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
GT15 User's Manual
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
POINT
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
CC-Link communication unit when network module status display is made
When displaying the network module status, use the CC-Link communication unit of MODEL GT15-J61BT13.
For the MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z, the network module status cannot be displayed.
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

1.6.2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet
connection)
 Confirming the communication state on Windows®, GT Designer3

(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows®
Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows®.
(a) When normal communication
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.18
Reply from 192.168.0.18: bytes=32time<1ms TTL=64
(b) When abnormal communication
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.18
Request timed out.
(2) When using the [PING Test] of GT Designer3
Select [Communication] [Communication configuration] [Ethernet] and [Connection Test] to display
[PING Test].
1. Specify the [GOT IP Address] of the [PING

Test] and click the [PING Test] button.
2. The [Test Result] is displayed after the [PING

Test] is finished.
2.
Click!
1.
(3) When abnormal communication
At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again.
• Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit
• Cable connecting condition
• Confirmation of [Communication Settings]
• IP address of GOT specified by Ping command
POINT
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC.
For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer, refer to the following manual.
User's manual of the Ethernet module

1
 Confirming the communication state on the GOT (For GT16, GT14)
PROCEDURES FOR
[PING Test] can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
GT14 User's Manual
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

1.6.3 Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring
function)
The station monitoring function detects the faults (communication timeout) of the stations monitored by the GOT.
When detecting the abnormal state, it allocates the data for the faulty station to the GOT special register (GS).
(1) No. of faulty stations

(a) Ethernet connection (Except for Ethernet multiple connection)
Total No. of the faulty CPU is stored.
Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0
GS230 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations
(b) Ethernet multiple connection

Total No. of the faulty connected equipment is stored.
Channel Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Ch1 GS280 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations
POINT
When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display
When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display, check [mask processing] with data operation tab as the following.
For the data operation, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual
 Numerical Display (Data Operation tab)
Set [mask processing] to the upper eight bits (b8

to b15) of GS230 on Numerical Display.

(2) Faulty station information (GS231 to GS238)
1
PROCEDURES FOR
The bit corresponding to the faulty station is set.(0: Normal, 1: Abnormal)
The bit is reset after the fault is recovered.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(a) Ethernet connection (Except for Ethernet multiple connection)
GS231 bit 0
GS231 bit 1 2
GS231 bit 2
THAT CAN BE SET

GS231 bit 3
DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
PLC No.
Device
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
GS231 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GS232 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
4
GS233 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
HOW TO MONITOR
GS234 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
REDUNTANT
GS235 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65
SYSTEM
GS236 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81
GS237 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97
GS238 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113
5
BUS CONNECTION
(b) Ethernet multiple connection, servo amplifier connection, inverter connection
The station number to which each device corresponds changes according to the connection/non
connection with Ethernet.
With Ethernet connection: 1 to 128
With other than Ethernet connection: 0 to 127
Example) With Ethernet connection, when PC No. 100 CPU connecting to Ch3 is faulty, GS327.b3 is set.
The following table shows the case with Ethernet connection.
6
CONNECTION TO
Device PLC No./Station No.
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

DIRECT
CPU
GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
GS283
GS284
GS303
GS304
GS323
GS324
GS343
GS344
48
64
47
63
46
62
45
61
44
60
43
59
42
58
41
57
40
56
39
55
38
54
37
53
36
52
35
51
34
50
33
49
7
GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81
GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97
GS288 GS308 GS328 GS348 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113
For details on the GS Device, refer to the following manual.

8
GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) Appendix.2.3 GOT special register (GS)
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

(3) Network No., station No. notification
The network No. and station No. of the GOT in Ethernet connection are stored at GOT startup.
If connected by other than Ethernet, 0 is stored.
Device
Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
GS376 GS378 GS380 GS382 Network No. (1 to 239)
GS377 GS379 GS381 GS383 Station No. (1 to 64)

1.6.4 Check on GX Developer 1
PROCEDURES FOR
 Check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT (For bus connection) (QCPU (Q mode) only)
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Using the [System monitor] of GX Developer, check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT or not.
For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual.
GX Developer Version Operating Manual
(1) Check the Module Name, I/O Address and Implementation Position. (The display example is based on GX
Developer Version 8) 3
Startup procedure
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GX Developer [Diagnostics] [System monitor]
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
Not displayed No error displayed
CONNECTION TO
at all times
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 Checking the wiring state (For optical loop system only)
Check if the optical fiber cable is connected correctly in [Loop test] of GX Developer.
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
(2) Check the [Receive direction error station] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8)
Startup procedure
GX Developer [Diagnostics] [MELSECNET (II)/10/H diagnostics] Loop test

1
 Checking if the GOT is performed the data link correctly
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) For MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system
Check if the GOT is performed the data link correctly in [Other station information].
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
(a) Check [Communication status of each station] and [Data-Link status of each station] (The display example
on GX Developer Version 8)
Startup procedure
3
GX Developer [Diagnostics] [MELSECNET (II)/10/H diagnostics] Other station info.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

(2) For CC-Link IE Controller Network system
Use [CC IE Control diagnostics…] of GX Developer to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link.
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
(a) Check the [Select station network device status display] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8)
Startup procedure
GX Developer [Diagnostics] [CC IE Control diagnostics…] [CC IE Control Network Diagnostics]
(3) For CC-Link system

Use [Monitoring other station] of the GX Developer to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link.
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N
(a) Check the [Status] (The display example on GX Developer Version 8)
Startup procedure
GX Developer [Diagnostics] [CC-Link / CC-Link LT diagnostics] Monitoring other station

1.6.5 Check on GX Works2 1
PROCEDURES FOR
 For CC-Link IE Field Network system
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Use [CC IE Field diagnostics] of GX Works2 to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link.
For the GX Works2 operation method, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual
Startup procedure 2
GX Works2 → [diagnostics] → [CC IE Field diagnostics]
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

1.6.6 Check on the PLC
 Checking the wiring state of the optical fiber cable (For CC-Link IE Controller Network only)
Check if the fiber-optic cable is connected correctly to all the modules in the CC-Link IE Controller Network.
Perform the line test from the control station of the CC-Link IE Controller Network to check the wiring state of the
fiber-optic cable.
For the line testing method, refer to the following manual.
 Checking the wiring state of the CC-Link dedicated cable (For CC-Link system only)
Check if the CC-Link dedicated cable is connected correctly to all the modules in the CC-Link system.
Perform the line test from the master station of the CC-Link System to check the wiring state of the CC-Link
dedicated cable.
For the line testing method, refer to the following manuals.
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual AJ61QBT11, A1SJ61QBT11
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual AJ61BT11, A1SJ61BT11

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC
CONNECTIONS
2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 1

3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1
4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 1
5. BUS CONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1
6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 1
7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 1
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 1
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 1
10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 1
11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION . . . 11 - 1
12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 - 1
13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 - 1
14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 - 1
2
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET
DEVICE RANGE
2.
3
2.1 MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
2.2 MELSEC iQ-F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
2.3 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 . . . . . . 2 - 10
2.4 MELSEC-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 11
4
2.5 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT SYS-
2.6 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13
2.7 MELSEC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 14
TEM
2.8 MELSEC-FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 15
2.9 MELSEC-WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 16 5
BUS CONNECTION
6
DIRECT CONNEC-
TION TO CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
ETHERNET CON-
NECTION
2-1
2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET
The device ranges that can be set for the Mitsubishi Electric PLCs are as follows.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models, even though belonging to the same series.
Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used.
When a non-existent device or a device number outside the range is set, other objects with correct device settings may
not be monitored.
2.1 MELSEC iQ-R, RnMT

2.2 MELSEC iQ-F
2.3 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 *1
2.4 MELSEC-L
2.5 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * *2
2.6 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion*3
2.7 MELSEC-A
2.8 MELSEC-FX
2.9 MELSEC-WS
*1 The PLC names differ depending on the type of GOT.

• GT11: MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR
• GT10: MELSEC-QnU/DC
• GT11: MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6 *
• GT10: MELSEC-QnA/Q
• GT10: MELSEC-Q (MULTI)
2-2 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET

1
 Setting item
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
When selecting buffer memory (G) with the following controllers
MELSEC-L
MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 *
MELSEC-Q(MULTI)/Q MOTION
(For MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700) 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT SYS-
(For MELSEC-FX)
Item Description
TEM
Set the device name, device number, and bit number.
The bit number can be set only by specifying the bit of word device.
When setting buffer memory (BM) and (G), set the buffer memory address in the space for the device number.
5
Reading the device comment data created by GX Developer and confirming the device
BUS CONNECTION
comment/device name are available during device setting.
For details on the procedure to refer to the device comment, refer to the following.
Set the block number of the extended file register.

Block
This item can be set only when the extended file register (ER) is selected.
Unit top I/O

Set when the buffer memory (BM) is selected.
Set the head I/O number of the buffer memory for the intelligent function module.
6
Device Intelligent
Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit head I/O number.
DIRECT CONNEC-
function
Set when the buffer memory (G) is selected.
module
TION TO CPU
Unit No. Set the head I/O number of the buffer memory for the intelligent function module.
Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit head I/O number.
Set for using the buffer memory of MELSEC-FX series.
Set the mask type for monitoring or writing only specified bits of the buffer memory.
Mask type
MELSEC-
FX buffer
(4) Setting of the mask type (MELSEC-FX)
7
Set for using the buffer memory of MELSEC-FX series.
memory
Set the module No. of the special function unit or special function block to monitor or write.
Unit No.
COMPUTER LINK
(5) Setting of the module No. (MELSEC-FX)

CONNECTION
Information Displays the device type and its setting range selected in [Device].
Set the station number of the controller to be monitored.
Set the CPU No. of the controller.
CPU No.
(1) Setting of the CPU No.
8
Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller.
Network
Select this for monitoring other controllers.
ETHERNET CON-
After selecting the item, set the station number and network number of the controller to be
Other monitored.
NECTION
NW No.: Set the network No.

Station No.: Set the station No.
2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2-3

(For device BM and CPU No. 0)
(1) Setting of the CPU No.
(a) When monitoring a single CPU system

Set to 0.
(b) When monitoring a multiple CPU system Device number
Set the CPU No. (0 to 4) in [CPU No.] when Head I/O number of buffer memory
monitoring a multiple CPU system. Device name
When [CPU No.] is set to "0", the monitoring target
differs depending on the connection method. (For device BM and CPU No. 1 to 4)
Connection method Monitoring target
• Direct CPU connection Connected PLC CPU
• Bus connection
• Computer link connection
• MELSECNET connection Control CPU
• Ethernet connection
• CC-Link connection Device number
Head I/O number of buffer memory
(2) When monitoring link relay (B) and link register (W) Device name
assigned in link parameter and network parameter. CPU No. 1 to 4
Set the device link relay (B) and link register (W)
running cyclic communication as [Host]. (For device G and CPU No. 0)
If it is set as [Other] in the network setting, the cyclic
transmission is changed to the transient transmission
regardless of the network type, resulting in delay of the
object display.
(3) Setting the device by inputting directly from the
keyboard
When setting the device by inputting directly from the
keyboard, set the items as follows. Device number
(For devices except BM and G) Device name
Unit No.
(For device G and CPU No. 1 to 4)
Bit condition
Device number
Device name
CPU No.
PLC station number
N/W No.
Device number
Channel No.
Device name
Unit No.
CPU No. 1 to 4

(4) Setting of the mask type (MELSEC-FX) (c) Mask type 2 1
• (For 16 bits)
PROCEDURES FOR
Set the item for monitoring or writing only the specified
Monitor and write only b4 to b7 of the buffer
bits of the buffer memory.
PREPARATORY
memory.
MONITORING
Example:
The monitor value is 0002H when monitoring
HINT BM0=4321H as mask type 2.
Mask type
The mask type is effective when using for the buffer
BM0 4 3 2 1 H
2
memories divided per 4 bits, such as an analog input
THAT CAN BE SET

Monitor value 0 0 0 2 H
block.
DEVICE RANGE
(a) Mask type 0 BM0=0010H when writing input value 4321H to
Monitor and write the buffer memory value directly. BM0=0000H as mask type 2.
Input value 4 3 2 1 H
(b) Mask type 1
• (For 16 bits)
3
BM0 0 0 0 0 H
Monitor and write only b0 to b3 of the buffer (Before writing)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
memory.
Example: BM0
(After writing) 0 0 1 0 H
BM=4321H as mask type 1. • (For 32 bits)
BM0 4 3 2 1 H Monitor and write only b4 to b7 and b20 to 23 of
the buffer memory.
Example:
4
Monitor value 0 0 0 1 H The monitor value is 00060002H when monitoring
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT SYS-
BM0=87654321H as mask type 2.
BM0=0001H when writing input value 4321H to
BM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
TEM
Monitor value 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 2 H
BM0
(Before writing)
0 0 0 0 H 5
BM0=00500010H when writing input value
BUS CONNECTION
BM0
87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 2.
(After writing) 0 0 0 1 H
Input value 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
• (For 32 bits)
BM0
Monitor and write only b0 to b3 and b16 to 19 of (Before writing) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H
the buffer memory.
Example:
BM0
(After writing) 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 0 H 6
DIRECT CONNEC-
(d) Mask type 3
BM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
TION TO CPU
• (For 16 bits)
Monitor and write only b8 to b11 of the buffer
Monitor value 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 H memory.
Example:
BM0=00050001H when writing input value BM0=4321H as mask type 3. 7
87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 1. BM0 4 3 2 1 H
COMPUTER LINK
Input value 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
CONNECTION
BM0
(Before writing) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H
BM0=0100H when writing input value 4321H to
BM0
(After writing) 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 H
8
ETHERNET CON-
BM0 0 0 0 0 H
(Before writing)
NECTION
BM0 0 1 0 0 H
(After writing)

• (For 32 bits) (f) Mask type 5
Monitor and write only b8 to b11 and b28 to 31 of • (For 16 bits)
the buffer memory. Monitor and write only b0 to b7 of the buffer
Example: memory.
The monitor value is 00070003H when monitoring Example:
BM0=87654321H as mask type 3. The monitor value is 0021H when monitoring
BM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
BM0 4 3 2 1 H
87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 3. BM0=0021H when writing input value 4321H to
Input value 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H BM0=0000H as mask type 5.
BM0
BM0 0 0 0 0 H
(Before writing)
BM0
(After writing) 0 5 0 0 0 1 0 0 H
BM0 0 0 2 1 H
(After writing)
(e) Mask type 4
• (For 16 bits) • (For 32 bits)
Monitor and write only b12 to b15 of the buffer Monitor and write only b0 to b7 and b16 to 23 of
memory. the buffer memory.
Example: Example:
The monitor value is 0004H when monitoring The monitor value is 00650021H when monitoring
BM0=4321H as mask type 4. BM0=87654321H as mask type 5.
BM0 4 3 2 1 H BM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
Monitor value 0 0 0 4 H Monitor value 0 0 6 5 0 0 2 1 H
BM0=1000H when writing input value 4321H to BM0=00650021H when writing input value
BM0=0000H as mask type 4. 87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 5.
Input value 4 3 2 1 H Input value 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
BM0 0 0 0 0 H BM0
(Before writing) (Before writing) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H
BM0 1 0 0 0 H BM0
(After writing) (After writing) 0 0 6 5 0 0 2 1 H
• (For 32 bits) (g) Mask type 6

Monitor and write only b12 to b15 and b28 to 31 • (For 16 bits)
of the buffer memory. Monitor and write only b8 to b15 of the buffer
Example: memory.
The monitor value is 00080004H when monitoring Example:
BM0=87654321H as mask type 4. The monitor value is 0043H when monitoring
BM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H BM0=4321H as mask type 6.
BM0 4 3 2 1 H
BM0=50001000H for writing input value
87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 4. BM0=2100H when writing input value 4321H to
Input value 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H BM0=0000H as mask type 6.
BM0
BM0 0 0 0 0 H
(Before writing)
BM0
(After writing) 5 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 H
BM0 2 1 0 0 H
(After writing)

• (For 32 bits) 1
Monitor and write only b8 to b15 and b24 to 31 of
PROCEDURES FOR
the buffer memory.
PREPARATORY
Example:
MONITORING
BM0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
87654321H to BM0=00000000H as mask type 6.
Input value 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 H
BM0
(Before writing) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H 3
FOR MONITORING
BM0
ACCESS RANGE
(After writing) 6 5 0 0 2 1 0 0 H
(5) Setting of the module No. (MELSEC-FX)

Set the module No. of the special function unit or
special function block to monitor or write.
The module No.0 to No.7 are assigned in order for the 4
nearest module or block from the main unit. For details
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT SYS-
of the module No., refer to the following.
User's Manual (Hardware) of MELSEC-FX
(a) Direct specification
Specify the module No. (No.0 to No.7) of the
TEM
special function unit or special function block
directly, to monitor or write when setting the
devices. 5
(b) Indirect specification*1
BUS CONNECTION
Specify the module No. of the special function unit
or special function block indirectly, to monitor or
write when setting the devices, by using the 16-bit
GOT internal data register (GD10 to GD25).
When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on
GT Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25
corresponding to the module No. will be the 6
module No. of the special function unit or special
DIRECT CONNEC-
function block.
TION TO CPU
Compatible
Module No. Setting range
device
100 GD10 0 to 7
7
101 GD11 For the setting other than the above,
error (dedicated device is out of range)
: :
will occur.
114 GD24 If a non-existent module No. is set, a
COMPUTER LINK
timeout error occurs.

CONNECTION
115 GD25
*1 The module No. cannot be specified indirectly for the multi-

drop connection.
8
ETHERNET CON-
NECTION

The table below shows the device ranges in [MELSEC iQ- Device No.
Device name Setting range
R, RnMT] as the controller type. representation
Device No. File register (R) R0 to R32767
representation Extension Block 0 to 255
Input (X) X0 to X3FFF Hexadecimal file register
Device ER0 to ER32767
number (ER)
Output (Y) Y0 to Y3FFF
Extension file register Decimal
Internal relay (M)*1 M0 to M161882111 ZR0 to ZR10027007
(ZR)*1 number
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Decimal
Index register (16 bits) (Z) Z0 to Z23
Step relay (S)*5 S0 to S16383 number
Buffer memory
Annunciator (F) F0 to F131071 (Intelligent function module) G0 to G268435455
Hexadecimal (G)*3
Link relay (B)*1 B0 to B9A61FFF
number
Ww Ww0 to Ww1FFF Hexadecimal
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT8993439
Timer*1 Wr Wr0 to Wr1FFF number
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC8993439
Multiple CPU high speed
Long timer Contact (LTT) LTT0 to LTT2529407 U3E000000 to
transmission memory
Word device
U3E012287
*1*2 Coil (LTC) LTC0 to LTC2529407 (U3E0) *4
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT8993439 Multiple CPU high speed

Counter*1 U3E100000 to
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC8993439 transmission memory
*4
U3E112287
Contact (U3E1)
Long LCT0 to LCT4761215 Decimal
Bit device
(LCT) Multiple CPU high speed

*1
counter Decimal U3E200000 to number
Coil (LCC) LCC0 to LCC4761215 transmission memory
number U3E212287
Special relay (SM) SM0 to SM4095 (U3E2)*4
Retentive Contact (SS) SS0 to SS8993439 Multiple CPU high speed
U3E300000 to
timer*1 Coil (SC) SC0 to SC8993439 transmission memory
U3E312287
Long Contact (U3E3)*4
LSS0 to LSS2529407
retentive (LSS) Motion device (#) #0 to #108287
timer*1*2 Coil (LSC) LSC0 to LSC2529407 Word-specified bit devices
SFC block (BL) BL0 to BL319 (except timer, long timer,
Setting range of each
counter, long counter, -
Step relay (block)(BLS) BLS0 to BLS511 bit device
retentive timer, and long
Link special relay (SB)*1 SB0 to SB9A61FFF retentive timer)
Remote input (RX) RX0 to RX3FFF Hexadecimal Long timer
number LTN0 to LTN2529407
Remote output (RY) RY0 to RY3FFF (current value) (LTN)*1*2
Double-word device
Link relay (LB) LB0 to LB7FFF Long counter

LCN0 to LCN4761215
Bit-specified word device (current value) (LCN)*1
(Except the timer, counter, Setting range of each Decimal
- Long retentive timer
retentive timer, and index word device LSN0 to LSN2529407 number
(current value) (LSN)*1*2
register (Z))
Index register (32 bits)
Data register (D)*1 D0 to D10117631 Decimal ZZ0 to ZZ22
(ZZ)*2
Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD4095 number
Index register (32 bits) (LZ) LZ0 to LZ11
Hexadecimal
Link register (W)*1 W0 to W9A61FF *1 For the maximum number of devices when an extended
number
SRAM cassette is installed, refer to the following.
Timer
Word device
TN0 to TN8993439 MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual

(current value) (TN)*1 (Application)
Counter Decimal *2 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device
CN0 to CN8993439 designation mode.
(current value) (CN)*1 number
*3 Only the intelligent function module on the station connected
Retentive timer to GOT can be specified.
SN0 to SN8993439 Set the buffer memory within the address range of the buffer
(current value) (SN)*1
memory existing in the intelligent function module.
Hexadecimal *4 For monitoring the multiple CPU high speed transmission
Link special register (SW)*1 SW0 to SW9A61FF memory, the CPU buffer memory access device (HG) for
number
RCPU is monitored.
The CPU buffer memory access device (G) is not monitored.
*5 Only reading is possible.

1
2.2 MELSEC iQ-F
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The table below shows the device ranges in [MELSEC iQ-
F] as the controller type.
Device No.
representation
Input (X)
Output (Y)
X0 to X1777
Y0 to Y1777
Octal 2
Internal relay (M) M0 to M32767
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767
Decimal
Step relay (S) S0 to S4095
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767
Link relay (B) B0 to B7FFF Hexadecimal
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT1023
Timer
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC1023 3
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT1023
Counter
FOR MONITORING
Bit device
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC1023
ACCESS RANGE
Contact
LCT0 to LCT1023 Decimal
Long counter (LCT)
Coil (LCC) LCC0 to LCC1023
Special relay (SM) SM0 to SM9999
Retentive timer
Contact (SS)
Coil (SC)
SS0 to SS1023
SC0 to SC1023
4
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FFF Hexadecimal
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT SYS-
The bit specification of the
word device
Setting range of
(except Timer, Counter, ―
each word device
Retentive timer, Index register
TEM
(Z))
Data register (D) D0 to D7999
Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD11999
Decimal
5
Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF Hexadecimal
BUS CONNECTION
Timer (current value) (TN) TN0 to TN1023
Counter (current value)(CN) CN0 to CN1023
Decimal
Retentive timer (current value)
SN0 to SN1023
(SN)
Word device
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FFF Hexadecimal
6
*1 R0 to R32767
File register (R)
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z23
Buffer memory Decimal
DIRECT CONNEC-
(Intelligent function module) G0 to G262143
TION TO CPU
(G)*2
The word specification of the
bit device*3 Setting range of
―
(except Timer, Counter, each bit devices
Retentive timer)
Long counter (current value)
7
Double word device
*3
LCN0 to LCN1023
(LCN)
COMPUTER LINK
-
CONNECTION
Index register (LZ) LZ0 to LZ11
*1 Available for file register of block No. switched with the RSET
*2
instruction.
Only the intelligent function module on the station connected 8
to GOT can be specified.
Set within the address range of the buffer memory existing in
ETHERNET CON-
the target intelligent function module.

*3 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16.
NECTION

2.2 MELSEC iQ-F
2.3 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700
The table below shows the device ranges in [MELSEC- Device No.
Device name*6*12 Setting range
QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700]*9 as the controller representation
type. Motion device (#) #0 to #12287 Decimal
Word device
Device No. The word specification of
Device name*6*12 Setting range
the bit device*7*11 Setting range of each bit
representation ―
(except Timer, Counter, devices
Input (X) X0 to X3FFF
Hexadecimal Retentive timer)
Internal relay (M)*5*10 M0 to M61439 *1 Do not set a file register by GT Designer3 when executing
multiple programs with the file of the file register set at [Use
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Decimal the same file name as the program] by the PLC parameter of
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 GX Developer.
Otherwise, read/write at GOT will be erroneous.
Link relay (B) B0 to B9FFFF Hexadecimal *2 Available for file register of block No. switched with the RSET
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767 instruction.
Timer*5 *3 Available for file register of block No. of file name switched
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767 with the QDRSET instruction.
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767 *4 Only the intelligent function module on the station connected
Bit device
Counter*5 to GOT can be specified.

Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767 Set within the address range of the buffer memory existing in
Decimal the target intelligent function module.
*5 Do not use local devices set in the MELSEC-Q system.
Retentive Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767 Otherwise, normal monitoring is not performed.
timer*5 Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767 *6 Even though Universal model QCPU processes 64-bit data,
the GOT cannot monitor 64-bit data.
Step relay (S) S0 to S32767 *7 This is not supported by GT10.
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FFF Hexadecimal *8 This cannot be monitored when in GOT multi-drop
connection.
The bit specification of the *9 For GT14, GT11 and GT10, the controller type is as follows.
word device • GT14, GT11: MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR
Setting range of each • GT10: MELSEC-QnU/DC
word device *10 For monitoring the internal relay (M) or data register (D) of a
Retentive timer, Index
C Controller module (Q Series), configure the settings
register) related to the device functions in the device setting tab of the
Data register (D)*5*10 D0 to D4910079 language controller setting utility.
Decimal *11 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16.
Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD2255 *12 To continuously write the Q172DR (CR750-Q), use the
Link register (W) W0 to W4AEBFF Hexadecimal Q172DR (CR750-Q) Ver.R6b or later.
*5 TN0 to TN32767
Timer (current value) (TN)
Counter (current value)
CN0 to CN32767
(CN)*5 Decimal
Retentive timer
SN0 to SN32767
File register (R)*1*2 R0 to R32767

Extension Block 0 to 255
file register
Device ER0 to ER32767
(ER)*1
Extension file register
ZR0 to ZR4849663
Word device
(ZR)*1*3
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z19 Decimal
Buffer memory
(Intelligent function module) BM0 to BM32767
(BM)*4
Buffer memory
(G)*4
Ww*7*8 Ww0 to Ww1FFF
*7*8 Wr0 to Wr1FFF
Wr
U3E010000 to U3E024335
transmission memory (U3E0)
Multiple CPU high speed Hexadecimal
U3E110000 to U3E124335
U3E210000 to U3E224335
U3E310000 to U3E324335
2 - 10 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET

2.3 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700
1
2.4 MELSEC-L
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The device ranges that can be set when selecting
*1 Do not set a file register by GT Designer3 when executing
[MELSEC-L] as the controller type are as follows. multiple programs with the file of the file register set at [Use
the same file name as the program] by the PLC parameter of
Device No.
Device name Setting range GX Developer.
representation Otherwise, read/write at GOT will be erroneous.
Input (X)
Output (Y)
X0
Y0
to
to
X3FFF
Y3FFF
Hexadecimal
*2 Available for file register of block No. switched with the RSET
instruction. 2
*3 Available for file register of block No. of file name switched
with the QDRSET instruction.
THAT CAN BE SET

Internal relay (M)*5 M0 to M61439
DEVICE RANGE
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Decimal to GOT can be specified.
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 Set within the address range of the buffer memory existing in
Link relay (B) B0 to BEFFF Hexadecimal *5 Do not use local devices set in the MELSEC-L system.
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767 Otherwise, normal monitoring is not performed. (The data
Timer*5 register (D) can be used for D32768 or later.)
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767 *6 This is not supported by GT10.
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767 *7 This cannot be monitored when in GOT multi-drop 3
Bit device
Counter*5 connection.
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767 *8 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16.
FOR MONITORING
Decimal
ACCESS RANGE
Retentive Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767
timer*5 Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FFF Hexadecimal
word device
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT SYS-
word device
register)
Data register (D)*5 D0 to D421887
Decimal
TEM
Timer (current value) (TN)*5 TN0 to TN32767
5
CN0 to CN32767
BUS CONNECTION
(CN)*5 Decimal
Retentive timer
SN0 to SN32767
6
Word device
ZR0 to ZR393215
(ZR)*1*3
DIRECT CONNEC-
Buffer memory Decimal
TION TO CPU
(BM)*4
Buffer memory
(G)*4
7
Hexadecimal
Wr*6*7 Wr0 to Wr1FFF
COMPUTER LINK
The word specification of

CONNECTION

―
Retentive timer)
8
ETHERNET CON-
NECTION
2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 - 11

2.4 MELSEC-L
2.5 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 *
*1 Do not set a file register by GT Designer3 when executing
[MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*]*12 as the controller multiple programs with the file of the file register set at [Use
type are as follows. the same file name as the program] by the PLC parameter of
GX Developer.(Except MELSEC-QnA)
Device No. Otherwise, read/write at GOT will be erroneous.
Device name*6*7*11 Setting range *2 Available for file register of block No. switched with the RSET
representation
instruction.
Input (X) X0 to X3FFF *3 Available for file register of block No. of file name switched
Hexadecimal with the QDRSET instruction.
Internal relay (M)*8 M0 to M32767 to GOT can be specified.
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 *5 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16.
*6 When monitoring MELDAS C6/64, if a word device outside
Link relay (B) B0 to B7FFF Hexadecimal the range is set, the value becomes indefinite.
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767 When a bit device outside the range is set, the object may
Timer*8 not be displayed or the set function may fail to operate.
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767 Check the set device using the device list of GT Designer3.
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767 *7 Devices used by the MELDAS C6/64 system cannot be
Bit device
Counter*8 used.
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767 *8 Do not use local devices set in the MELSEC-Q system.
Decimal
Special relay (SM) SM0 to SM2047 Otherwise, normal monitoring is not performed.
*9 This is not supported by GT10.
Retentive Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767 *10 This cannot be monitored when in GOT multi-drop
*8 connection.
timer Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767
*11 Only reading is possible from QS001CPU.
Step relay (S) S0 to S32767 *12 For GT14, GT11 and GT10, the controller type is as follows.
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FFF Hexadecimal • GT14, GT11: MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6 *
• GT10: MELSEC-QnA/Q
word device
word device
register)
Data register (D)*8 D0 to D32767
Decimal
*8 TN0 to TN32767
Timer (current value) (TN)
CN0 to CN32767
(CN)*8 Decimal
Retentive timer
SN0 to SN32767

Extension Block 0 to 255
file register
Device R0 to R32767
(ER)*1*9*10
Word device

ZR0 to ZR1042431
(ZR)*1*3*9*10
Buffer memory
(BM)*4*9*10
Buffer memory
(G)*4*9*10
Hexadecimal
*9*10 Wr0 to Wr1FFF
Wr
―
Retentive timer)

1
2.6 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(When using the QCPU)
[MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion]*13 as the controller type are * For details of *1 to *6, refer to 2.5 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS,
as follows. MELDAS C6 *.
*7 This is not supported by GT10.
Device No. *8 This cannot be monitored when in GOT multi-drop
representation connection.
2
Input (X) X0 to X1FFF (When using the Q Motion)
Hexadecimal *9 When setting special internal relay M9000 to M9255, use SM
THAT CAN BE SET

for the device name and set the value subtracted 9000 for
DEVICE RANGE
Internal relay (M)*12 M0 to M32767 the device number (0 to 255).
*10 The setting range is D9000 to D9255 when setting the
special data register.
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 *11 D8192 to D8999 and D9256 to D9999 are out of the valid
setting range.
Link relay (B) B0 to B7FFF Hexadecimal
(When using the QCPU/Q Motion)
Timer*12
Contact (TT)
Coil (TC)
TT0
TC0
to
to
TT32767
TC32767
*12 Do not use local devices set in the MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q
Motion system.
3
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767 Otherwise, normal monitoring is not performed.
FOR MONITORING
Bit device
Counter*12 *13 For GT10, the controller type is [MELSEC-Q(Multi)].
ACCESS RANGE
Decimal
Special relay (SM)*9 SM0 to SM2047
Retentive Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767
timer*12 Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FF Hexadecimal 4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT SYS-
word device
word device
register)
Data register (D)*10*11*12 D0 to D32767
TEM
Decimal
Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF Hexadecimal 5
Timer (current value) (TN)*12 TN0 to TN32767
BUS CONNECTION
CN0 to CN32767
(CN)*12 Decimal
Retentive timer
SN0 to SN32767
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF Hexadecimal
File register (R)
Extension
*1*2
Block
R0
0
to
to
R32767
255
6
file register
DIRECT CONNEC-
Device R0 to R32767
(ER)*1*7*8
Word device
TION TO CPU
ZR0 to ZR1042431
(ZR)*1*3*4*7*8
Buffer memory
(Intelligent function module) BM0 to BM32767 7
(BM)*5*7*8
Buffer memory
COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION
(G)*4*5*7*8
Ww*7*8 Ww0 to Ww7FF
Hexadecimal
*7*8 Wr0 to Wr7FF
Wr
Motion device (#)*7*8
#0 to #8191 Decimal
8
―
ETHERNET CON-

Retentive timer)
NECTION

2.6 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion
2.7 MELSEC-A
[MELSEC-A] as the controller type are as follows. (2) For GT10, GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
(1) For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11 Device No.
representation
Device No.
Device name Setting range Input (X) X0 to X1FFF
representation
Input (X) X0 to X1FFF Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF
Hexadecimal Internal relay/
Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF M0 to M9255 Decimal
Special internal relay (M)
Internal relay/Special
M0 to M32767 Latch relay (L) L0 to L8191
internal relay (M)
Decimal Annunciator (F) F0 to F2047
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767
Bit device
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767 Link relay (B) B0 to B1FFF Hexadecimal
Link relay (B) B0 to B7FFF Hexadecimal Contact (TT) TT0 to TT2047

Timer
Bit device
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767 Coil (TC) TC0 to TC2047

Timer Decimal
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767 Contact (CT) CT0 to CT1023
Decimal Counter
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767 Coil (CC) CC0 to CC1023
Counter Specified bit of the
Word device bit following word devices ―
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FF Hexadecimal
(Except Index register)
Data register/
word device Setting range of each D0 to D9255 Decimal
― Special data register (D)
(except Index register (Z), word device
Buffer memory) Link register (W) W0 to W1FFF Hexadecimal
Data register/Special data Timer (current value) (TN) TN0 to TN2047

D0 to D32767 Decimal
register (D) Counter (current value)
CN0 to CN1023
Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF Hexadecimal (CN)
Word device
Timer (current value) (TN) TN0 to TN32767 File register (R) R0 to R8191 Decimal
Counter (current value) Decimal Index (Z) Z0 to Z6
CN0 to CN32767
(CN) register*1 (V) V0 to V6
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF Hexadecimal *2 A0 to A1
Accumulator (A)
File register (R) R0 to R32767 Converting the above bit
Extension Block 1 to 255 devices into words
Bit device word*3*4*5 ―
file register (Except Timer and
Word device
*1 Device ER0 to ER32767 Counter)

(ER) Decimal
Index (Z) Z0 to Z15 *1 In the computer link connection, writing to the index register
(e.g., the touch switch function, numerical input function) is
register*2 (V) V0 to V6 not available.
Accumulator (A) A0 to A1 *2 With the computer link connection, the GOT cannot read/
write data from/to the accumulator.
Buffer memory *3 This is not supported by GT10.
(Intelligent function module) BM0 to BM32767 Decimal *4 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16.
(BM)*3 *5 If the special internal relay (M) is converted to the word
device, treat 9000 of the device No. as 0 and set in multiples
Ww Ww0 to Ww7FF of 16.
Hexadecimal Example: M9000, M9016, M9240
Wr Wr0 to Wr7FF
Setting range of each bit
the bit device*4*5 ―
devices
(except Timer, Counter)
*1 In the computer link connection, the bit specification writing
of the word device to the ER29-0 (block 29 of the extension
file register) or later of A3ACPU, A3UCPU, or A4UCPU is
not available.
When the bit specification writing of the word device is
required, use the range of block No. 0 to 28.
*2 In the computer link connection, writing to the index register
(e.g., the touch switch function, numerical input function) is
not available.
to GOT can be specified.
*4 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16.
*5 If the special internal relay (M) is converted to the word
device, treat 9000 of the device No. as 0 and set in multiples
of 16.
Example: M9000, M9016, M9240

2.7 MELSEC-A
1
2.8 MELSEC-FX
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The device ranges that can be set when selecting specification for the buffer memory of 32 bit data.
[MELSEC-FX] as the controller type are as follows. If using the 16 bit specification for a buffer
memory of 32 bit data, monitoring and writing
Device No. may not be executed normally.
representation For the data size of each buffer memory, refer to
Input relay (X) X0 to X377
Octal
the following. 2
Output relay (Y) Y0 to Y377 User's Manual of the special block or special
THAT CAN BE SET

Auxiliary relay (M) M0 to M7679 module
DEVICE RANGE
Special auxiliary relay (M) M8000 to M8511 • When reading from/writing to the special block or
special module by interrupt processing of the
Bit device
State (S) S0 to S4095 Decimal

Timer contact (T) T0 to T511 sequence program, monitoring/writing from GOT
Counter contact (C) C0 to C255 to the buffer memory may not be executed
normally.
word device*1 Setting range of each
(2) How to select a keyword protection level 3
(except Timer (set value), word device
― For equipment that are allowed to operate the FX
FOR MONITORING
Counter (set value)) PLC online, 3 levels of protection level can be set.
ACCESS RANGE
When monitoring or changing settings by any
Data register (D) D0 to D0999
online equipment is required, set a keyword
File register (D) D1000 to D7999
referring to the following.
Special data register (D) D8000 to D8511
(a) When setting the keyword only
Timer (current value) (T) T0 to T511 Select a protection level by the initial letter of
Counter (current value) (C) C0 to C255 the keyword.
All operation protect: Set a keyword with the
4
Timer (set value) (TS)*3*5 TS0 to TS511
initial letter "A", "D" to "F", or "0" to "9".
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT SYS-
Counter (set value)
Word device
CS0 to CS255 Incorrect write/read protect: Set a keyword

(CS)*4*5
Decimal with the initial letter "B".
Extension register (R) R0 to R32767
Incorrect write protect: Set a keyword with the
Index register (V) V0 to V7
initial letter "C".
TEM
(b) When setting the keyword and 2nd keyword
Buffer memory (BM)*7 BM0 to BM32767 Select a protection level by [Registration
The word specification of condition]. 5
(3) Monitoring availability at each keyword protection
BUS CONNECTION
(except Timer contact, devices
level
Counter contact)
The following shows the device monitoring
*1 When executing the touch switch function set during the bit availability at each keyword protection level.
specification of the word device, do not write any data to the
word device through the sequence program. When registering the
When registering the Keyword
*2 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16. keyword and 2nd
keyword only not
*3 Only 16-bit (1-word) designation is allowed. keyword
*4 For CS0 to CS199, only 16-bit (1-word) designation is
allowed.
Item
All
Incorrect
write/
Incorrect All online Read/
registered
or
Write protection
6
operation write operation write
For CS200 to CS255, only 32-bit (2-word) designation is protect
read
protect protect protect
protect cancelled
DIRECT CONNEC-
allowed. protect
*5 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device Monitoring devices
TION TO CPU
designation mode.
In addition, setting values of the timer and counter, which are T, C set
not used for the program, cannot be monitored. If monitoring value and
is executed, a reading error occurs. file
register *1 *1 *1
*6 This is not supported by GT10. Changing (D1000
*7 Can be used only for special blocks or special units devices
compatible with FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC.
and the
following) 7
(Except FX0N-3A, FX2N-2AD, and FX2N-2DA) Other than
above
COMPUTER LINK
*1 When the T, C set values are specified indirectly, changing

POINT
CONNECTION
devices is available.
(1) Precautions when using the buffer memory (4) Difference between all online operations
prohibition and all operations prohibition
• When the power supply of the special block or
When specifying all online operations prohibition,
special module is turned off, the contents of the
buffer memory are initialized, except for some
displaying devices and inputting data with 8
programming tools or GOT are all prohibited.
keeping areas.
When all operations are prohibited, displaying
ETHERNET CON-
• When the buffer memory is monitored by the

devices and inputting data with the GOT are
GOT, the PLC scan time may increase instantly.
enabled while all operations using programming
• Use the 16 bit specification for the buffer
NECTION
tools are prohibited.

memory of 16 bit data. Use the 32 bit

2.8 MELSEC-FX
2.9 MELSEC-WS
The device ranges that can be set when selecting (3) Engineering software for MELSEC-WS and device
[MELSEC-WS] as the controller type are as follows. representation of GT Designer3
The engineering software for MELSEC-WS and
Device No. the device representation of GT Designer3 are
Device Setting range
representation different. Set the device by referring to the
Input (I) I1.1 to I12.8 following table.
Output (Q) Q1.1 to Q12.8 Decimal Engineering software for
Device GT Designer3
Bit device
Logic result (LQ) LQ0.0 to LQ3.7 +Decimal MELSEC-WS

Logic input (LI) LI0.0 to LI3.7 [ ].I
The bit specification of Setting range of each I . : I/O model name
-
the word device word device I*1 (1-12(Dec)): Module number (such as XTIO)
Data (byte)(D) D0 to D99 (1-8): Input position (1-12(Dec)): Module number
Decimal
Data (word)(W) W0 to W49 (1-8): Input position
Decimal [ ].Q
Word device
EFI input (byte)(EI) EI110 to EI233 +Decimal Q . : I/O model name

+Decimal Q*1 (1-12(Dec)): Module number (such as XTIO)
Decimal (1-8): Output position (1-12(Dec)): Module number
EFI output (byte)(EQ) EQ10 to EQ22
+Decimal (1-8): Output position
Logic input (byte)(LD) LD0 to LD3 Decimal .
LQ .
Logic input (word)(LW) LW0 to LW1 Decimal : "Result"
LQ*1 (0-3): Byte number
(0-3): Byte number
(0-7): Bit position
(0-7): Bit position
POINT [0] . .
LI .
: CPU type (CPU0, CPU1)
(1) Devices of MELSEC-WS LI*1 (0-3): Byte number
(0-3): Byte number
Only reading is possible for all devices. (0-7): Bit position
(0-7): Bit position
(2) Device settings of MELSEC-WS [0].EFI : , Byte
EI
• Input(I), Output(Q) : CPU type (CPU0, CPU1)
(1-2): EFI number
EI*1 (1-2): EFI number
(1-3): Device number
(1-3): Device number
(0-3): Byte number
(0-3): Byte number
[0].EFI :1, Byte
Device Input position(1 to 8) EQ
: CPU type (CPU0, CPU1)
name EQ*1 (1-2): EFI number
Module number(1 to 12) (1-2): EFI number
(0-2): Byte number
• Logic result(LQ), Logic input(LI) (0-2): Byte number
D RS232 data
D
(0-99(Dec)): Byte number (Safety controller to RS232)
W
(0-49(Dec)): Word number
Device Bit position(0 to 7) Word virtualization of D GOT independent device
name W
Byte number(0 to 3) device (Not available)
W0= (D1(Upper bits),
• EFI input(EI) D0(Lower bits))
LD RS232 data
LD
(0-3): Byte number (Safety controller to RS232)
LW
Device Byte number(0 to 3) (0-1): Word number
name Word virtualization of LD GOT independent device
Device number(1 to 3) LW
device (Not available)
EFI number(1 to 2) LW0= (LD1(Upper bits),
LD0(Lower bits))
• EFI output(EQ)
*1 When the mapping position is changed by the MELSEC-WS
engineering software, a mismatch occurs between virtual
devices on GOT and MELSEC-WS mapping devices.
When mapping is changed, use D devices or LD devices.
Device Byte number(0 to 2)

name
EFI number(1 to 3)

2.9 MELSEC-WS
(4) When using offset specification
Offset
(f) EFI output(EQ)
+0 +1 +2 +3 to +15
1
When setting devices using the offset function, the
PROCEDURES FOR
+0 EQ10 EQ11 EQ12
device values are as follows.
PREPARATORY
+16 Fixed to 0
(a) Input(I)
MONITORING
: Fixed to 0
+240
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 to +15
+256 EQ20 EQ21 EQ22 Device range error
+0 I1.1 I1.2 I1.3 I1.4 I1.5 I1.6 I1.7 I1.8
+272 Device range error
+16 I2.1 I2.2 I2.3 I2.4 I2.5 I2.6 I2.7 I2.8
+32
+48
I3.1
I4.1
I3.2
I4.2
I3.3
I4.3
I3.4
I4.4
I3.5
I4.5
I3.6
I4.6
I3.7
I4.7
I3.8
I4.8
2
+64 I5.1 I5.2 I5.3 I5.4 I5.5 I5.6 I5.7 I5.8
THAT CAN BE SET

+80 I6.1 I6.2 I6.3 I6.4 I6.5 I6.6 I6.7 I6.8 Fixed to 0
DEVICE RANGE
+96 I7.1 I7.2 I7.3 I7.4 I7.5 I7.6 I7.7 I7.8 (OFF)
+112 I8.1 I8.2 I8.3 I8.4 I8.5 I8.6 I8.7 I8.8

+128 I9.1 I9.2 I9.3 I9.4 I9.5 I9.6 I9.7 I9.8
+144 I10.1 I10.2 I10.3 I10.4 I10.5 I10.6 I10.7 I10.8
+160 I11.1 I11.2 I11.3 I11.4 I11.5 I11.6 I11.7 I11.8
+176 I12.1 I12.2 I12.3 I12.4 I12.5 I12.6 I12.7 I12.8 3
FOR MONITORING
(b) Output(Q)
ACCESS RANGE
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 to +15
+0 Q1.1 Q1.2 Q1.3 Q1.4 Q1.5 Q1.6 Q1.7 Q1.8
+16 Q2.1 Q2.2 Q2.3 Q2.4 Q2.5 Q2.6 Q2.7 Q2.8
+32 Q3.1 Q3.2 Q3.3 Q3.4 Q3.5 Q3.6 Q3.7 Q3.8
+48
+64
Q4.1
Q5.1
Q4.2
Q5.2
Q4.3
Q5.3
Q4.4
Q5.4
Q4.5
Q5.5
Q4.6
Q5.6
Q4.7
Q5.7
Q4.8
Q5.8
4
+80 Q6.1 Q6.2 Q6.3 Q6.4 Q6.5 Q6.6 Q6.7 Q6.8
HOW TO MONITOR
Fixed to 0
REDUNTANT SYS-
+96 Q7.1 Q7.2 Q7.3 Q7.4 Q7.5 Q7.6 Q7.7 Q7.8 (OFF)
+112 Q8.1 Q8.2 Q8.3 Q8.4 Q8.5 Q8.6 Q8.7 Q8.8

+128 Q9.1 Q9.2 Q9.3 Q9.4 Q9.5 Q9.6 Q9.7 Q9.8
+144 Q10.1 Q10.2 Q10.3 Q10.4 Q10.5 Q10.6 Q10.7 Q10.8
TEM
+160 Q11.1 Q11.2 Q11.3 Q11.4 Q11.5 Q11.6 Q11.7 Q11.8
+176 Q12.1 Q12.2 Q12.3 Q12.4 Q12.5 Q12.6 Q12.7 Q12.8
+192 Device range error 5
(c) Logic result(LQ)
BUS CONNECTION
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7
+0 LQ0.0 LQ0.1 LQ0.2 LQ0.3 LQ0.4 LQ0.5 LQ0.6 LQ0.7
6
(d) Logic input(LI)
DIRECT CONNEC-
Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7
+0 LI0.0 LI0.1 LI0.2 LI0.3 LI0.4 LI0.5 LI0.6 LI0.7
TION TO CPU
(e) EFI input(EI) 7

Offset +0 +1 +2 +3 +8 to +15
COMPUTER LINK
+0 EI110 EI111 EI112 EI113

CONNECTION
+16 EI120 EI121 EI122 EI123

+32 EI130 EI131 EI132 EI133
+48 Fixed to 0
: Fixed to 0
+240
+256 EI210 EI211 EI212 EI213 8
+272 EI220 EI221 EI222 EI223
+288 EI230 EI231 EI232 EI233 Device range error
ETHERNET CON-

NECTION

2.9 MELSEC-WS
2.9 MELSEC-WS
3
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING
DEVICE RANGE
3.
3
3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems
FOR MONITORING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
ACCESS RANGE
3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 13
3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring . . . . . . . . . .3 - 14 4
3.4 Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access Range for
HOW TO MONITOR
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 17
REDUNTANT
3.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU . . .3 - 18
SYSTEM
3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 19 5
3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network
BUS CONNECTION
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 22
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
3-1
3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING
3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network

Systems
3.1.1 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network,
 Bus connection
(1) When connecting to multiple CPU system
• The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the Control station
network.
GOT
*1
Normal Normal
station station
Normal
station
• The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal Control station
stations on other networks. *1
(For monitoring stations on other networks, be sure to set the GOT Control
station
routing parameter)
Normal Normal Normal
When the Universal model QCPU is used as a relay station, the station station station
GOT can monitor stations with the station No.65 or later in the CC-
Normal Normal
Link IE controller network. station station
• When connecting to the multiple CPU system, the GOT can Control station
monitor CPU No.1 to No.4.
GOT Control
station

station station station
Normal
station
Normal station
• Devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) may not
allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU.
■ Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices (Examples 1
to 2)
• The motion controller CPU (Q Series) at other stations cannot be monitored.
*1 The control station and normal station correspond to the master station and local station in the CC-Link IE field network
respectively.
3-2 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING

(2) When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU/AnUCPU
1
PROCEDURES FOR
• The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations on the *1
Control
network.
PREPARATORY
GOT station
MONITORING
*1
Normal Normal
station station
Normal
station
2
THAT CAN BE SET

• The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal
DEVICE RANGE
Control Control
stations on other networks. GOT
station station
(For monitoring stations on other networks, be sure to set the Normal Normal Normal
routing parameter) station station station
When the Universal model QCPU is used as a relay station, the Normal Normal
GOT can monitor stations with the station No.65 or later in the CC-
Link IE controller network.
station station
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
• When connected to a relay station and the data link system is included,
the master station and local stations can be monitored. GOT
• When connected to a relay station, it is not necessary to designate the Control Control
station
data link parameter [Effective unit number for accessing other stations] station
for the PLC CPU of the connected station. (Even if designated, the Normal
4
Normal station
parameter is ignored) station M station Normal
station
HOW TO MONITOR
L station L station
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
• Devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) may not
allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU.
5
■ Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices (Examples 1
BUS CONNECTION
to 2)
respectively.
(3) When connecting to AnACPU/AnNCPU 6

• The GOT can monitor the control station on the network. Control
CONNECTION TO
When the PLC CPU on the control station is the QCPU (Q mode) or station
QnACPU, the GOT cannot monitor devices other than B and W assigned
Normal Normal
for the network parameter. GOT station station
DIRECT
• The GOT cannot monitor normal stations on the network.

CPU
Normal
• The GOT cannot monitor any stations on the other networks. station
7
Control Control
station station
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION

GOT station station station
Normal Normal
station station
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3-3

 Direct CPU connection/computer link connection
(1) When connecting to multiple CPU system
• Corresponding to the access range described in ■ Bus connection (1).
(2) When connecting to RCPU
• For the computer link connection, refer to the following.
■ MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network
connection, CC-Link IE Field Network connection
• For connections via a MELSECNET (II), computer link, or CC-Link network, the GOT cannot access any
CPUon a network via the relay network.
(3) When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU
(4) When connecting to QCPU (A mode)/AnUCPU
• The GOT can monitor the control station and all the normal stations *1
Control
on the network. GOT station
For monitoring devices (other than B and W assigned for the network *1
Normal Normal
parameter) of other stations, the GOT cannot monitor the devices of station station
the PLC CPU that is the QCPU (Q mode) or QnACPU.
Normal
station
• If connected to a relay station, use data link parameter [Effective unit

number for accessing other stations] to designate the unit number GOT
that is connected to the network to be monitored. Control Control
station station
Normal
Normal station Normal
station M station
station
L station L station
(5) When connecting to AnACPU/AnNCPU

(6) When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series), CNC (CNC C70), or robot controller (CRnQ-700)
via direct CPU connection
Monitor the motion controller CPU (Q series), CNC (CNC C70), or robot controller (CRnQ-700) via the following
QCPUs in the multiple CPU system.
Controller Relay CPU
Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU QCPU (Q mode)

Motion controller CPU (Q Series)
Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU
CNC (CNC C70) Q173NCCPU QnUCPU
Robot controller (CRnQ-700) Q172DRCPU
respectively.
 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station), CC-Link connection (via G4)

• Only the station connected to the GOT can be monitored.
■ Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 6:
When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) /CC-Link connection (via G4)
• When the station connected to the GOT is in the multiple CPU system, the GOT can monitor CPU No.1 to
No.4.
• The GOT cannot monitor other stations.

1
 MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network
PROCEDURES FOR
connection, CC-Link IE Field Network connection
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
POINT
Precautions for cyclic transmission
Devices that can be accessed by cyclic transmission differ according to connection type. 2
Connection type Devices that can be accessed
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
MELSECNET/H B, W, LB, LW, SB, SW
MELSECNET/10 B, W, LB, LW, SB, SW
CC-Link IE Controller Network B, W, LB, LW, SB, SW
CC-Link IE Field Network X, Y, RX, RY, Ww, Wr, SB, SW

3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
• The GOT is regarded as a normal station and monitors the control station and all normal stations on the
network.
When the monitoring target is a PLC CPU within a multiple CPU system, the GOT can monitor CPU No. 1 to
CPU No. 4 by specifying CPU No.
• When monitoring other networks, a CPU on another Ethernet, MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE
Controller Network, or CC-Link field network is accessible via the PLC CPU.(Monitoring other networks via a 4
motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) is available by Ethernet only.)
HOW TO MONITOR
However, the GOT cannot monitor the CNC C70 on other networks.
Only the RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), and QnACPU are accessible on Ethernet networks.
REDUNTANT
• When monitoring other networks in MELSECNET/10 connection, install the MELSECNET/H communication
SYSTEM
unit on the GOT.
• To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required.
For routing parameter setting, refer to the following manuals.
5
Routing parameter setting for the GOT
BUS CONNECTION
10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION
12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION
6
Routing parameter setting for the PLC CPU (MELSECNET/H network system, MELSECNET/10 network
CONNECTION TO
system)
DIRECT
CPU
Routing parameter setting for the PLC CPU (When connecting to the CC-Link IE Controller Network)
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual 7
COMPUTER LINK
Routing parameter setting for the PLC CPU (When connecting to the CC-Link IE Field Network)
CONNECTION
CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual

• If devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter) are
monitored, monitoring may not be available depending on the PLC CPU of the network system to be monitored.
■ Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Example 5: 8
When using MELSECNET/10 connection
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

POINT
Precautions when using the QCPU redundant system
When monitoring other networks, do not set the QCPU redundant system as a relay station.
If the QCPU redundant system is set as a relay station, the GOT cannot switch the monitoring target automatically
when the system is switched.
(A timeout error occurs due to failed monitoring)
 Monitoring devices of other stations on the network

If devices of other stations on the network system are monitored, the display speed will be significantly reduced.
Therefore, monitor the link relay (B) and link register (W) that are allocated by the network parameter.
 Monitoring devices of other networks (Bus connection, CPU direct connection, computer link
connection)
• Be sure to designate the routing parameter to the PLC CPU of the connected station.
• If another network is monitored, the display speed of object etc. will be significantly reduced.

1
 Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices
PROCEDURES FOR
Example 1: When using bus connection
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Control station Control station
AnU QnA
(1-1) (2-1)
2
AnU
THAT CAN BE SET

QnA AnU
Network No.1 (1-4) Network No.2
DEVICE RANGE
(1-2) (2-4)
(2-2)
AnA AnN
(1-3) (2-3)
3
• Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks
FOR MONITORING
Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table.
ACCESS RANGE
(1) To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host
station.
(2) To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station
No.).
Station to be accessed Network No.1 Network No.2
4
HOW TO MONITOR
Station AnU (1-1) QnA (1-2) AnA (1-3) AnU (1-4) QnA (2-1) AnU (2-2) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4)
connected to GOT
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
AnU (1-1)
Host ── Other (1-3) Other (1-4) ── Other (2-2) ── Other (2-4)
QnA (1-2)
Other (1-1) Host ── Other (1-4) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) ── Other (2-4) 5
BUS CONNECTION
AnA (1-3)
Other (0-0) ── Host ── ── ── ── ──
(1-4)
AnU
(2-2) Other (1-1) ── ── Host ── Host ── Other (2-4)
QnA (2-1)
Other (1-1) Other (1-2) ── Other (1-4) Host Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4)
6
AnN (2-3)
── ── ── ── ── ── Host ──
CONNECTION TO
AnU (2-4)
Other (1-1) ── ── Other (1-4) ── Other (2-2) ── Host
DIRECT
CPU
How to read the table
Upper line: Accessibility

: Accessible
7
: Not accessible
COMPUTER LINK
Lower line: Network settings

CONNECTION
Host
Other (Network No. - Station number)
POINT
8
Monitoring link device B or W
For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when
CONNECTION
designating devices allocated to another station.

ETHERNET
Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.

Example 2: When using bus connection
QnA AnU
(1-1) (2-1)
AnU
Network No.1 QnA Network No.2
(2-4)
(1-3)
(2-2)
(M) AnU
AnA
(2-3)
(1-2)
Data link
system
QnA AnA
(L1) (L2)
station.
No.).
Station to be Network No.1 Network No.2 Data link system
accessed
QnA (1-1) AnA (1-2) QnA (1-3) AnU (2-1) QnA (2-2) AnU (2-3) AnU (2-4) QnA (M) QnA (L1) AnA (L2)
Station
connected to GOT
Other (1-3)
QnA (1-1)
Host Other (1-2) Other (1-3) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4) or ── ──
Other (2-2)
AnA (1-2)
── Host ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ──
(1-3)
QnA (2-2)
Other
Other (1-1) ── Host Other (2-1) Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Host ──
(M) (0-2)*1
AnU (2-1)
── ── ── Host ── Other (2-3) Other (2-4) ── ── ──
AnU (2-3)
── ── ── Other (2-1) ── Host Other (2-4) ── ── ──
AnU (2-4)
── ── ── Other (2-1) ── Other (2-3) Host ── ── ──
QnA (L1)
── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Host ──
AnA (L2)
── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Host
*1 When monitoring the data link system, designate the network No. as 0.
How to Upper line: Accessibility

read the : Accessible
table : Not accessible
Host
POINT

Example 3: When using CPU direct connection or computer link connection 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
AnU QnA
(1-1) (2-1)
2
AnU
Q(Q mode) AnU
Network No.1 (1-4) Network No.2
(1-2) (2-4)
(2-2)
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
AnA AnN
(1-3) (2-3)
Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table. 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
station.
No.).
Station AnU (1-1)

Q(Q mode)
AnA (1-3) AnU (1-4) QnA (2-1) AnU (2-2) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4)
4
connected to GOT (1-2)
HOW TO MONITOR
AnU (1-1)
REDUNTANT
Host ── Other (1-3) Other (1-4) ── Other (2-2) ── ──
SYSTEM
Q (Q mode) (1-2)
Other (1-1) Host ── Other (1-4) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) ── Other (2-4)
AnA (1-3)
Other (0-0) ── Host ── ── ── ── ──
5
(1-4)
BUS CONNECTION
AnU
(2-2) Other (1-1) ── ── Host ── Host ── ──
QnA (2-1)
Other (1-1) Other (1-2) ── Other (1-4) Host Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4)
AnN (2-3)
── ── ── ── ── ── Host ──
6
AnU (2-4)
── ── ── ── ── Other (2-2) ── Host
How to read the table CONNECTION TO

DIRECT
CPU
Upper line: Accessibility

: Accessible
Lower line:
: Not accessible
Network settings
7
Host
COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION
POINT
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

Example 4: When using CPU direct connection or computer link connection
Q(Q mode) AnU

(1-1) (2-1)
AnU
Network No.1 QnA Network No.2
(2-4)
(1-3)
(2-2)
(M) AnU
AnA
(2-3)
(1-2)
Data link
system
QnA AnA
(L1) (L2)
station.
No.).
Station to be Network No.1 Network No.2 Data link system
accessed
Station QnA (1-1) AnA (1-2) QnA (1-3) AnU (2-1) QnA (2-2) AnU (2-3) AnU (2-4) QnA (M) QnA (L1) AnA (L2)
connected to GOT
Other (1-3)
Q (Q mode) (1-1)
Host Other (1-2) Other (1-3) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4) or ── ──
Other (2-2)
AnA (1-2)
── Host ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ──
(1-3)
QnA (2-2)
*1
Other (1-1) ── Host Other (2-1) Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Host ──
(M) Other (0-2)
AnU (2-1)
── ── ── Host ── Other (2-3) Other (2-4) ── ── ──
AnU (2-3)
── ── ── Other (2-1) ── Host Other (2-4) ── ── ──
AnU (2-4)
── ── ── Other (2-1) ── Other (2-3) Host ── ── ──
QnA (L1)
── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Host ──
AnA (L2)
── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── ── Host
*1 When monitoring the data link system, designate the network No. as 0.
How to Upper line: Accessibility

read the : Accessible
table : Not accessible
Host
POINT
3 - 10 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING

Example 5: When using MELSECNET/10 connection 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
QnA Q (Q mode)
MONITORING
(1-1) (2-1)
AnU
Q (Q mode) Network No. 1 Network No. 2 QnA
2
(1-4)
(1-2) (2-2)
(2-4)
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
AnN
GOT (2-3)
(1-3)
• Monitor access range for other station devices (other than B and W)
3
QnA Q (Q mode) GOT AnU Q (Q mode) QnA AnN AnU
Station
FOR MONITORING
connected to GOT (1-1) (1-2) (1-3) (1-4) (2-1) (2-2) (2-3) (2-4)
ACCESS RANGE
GOT (1-3) ――
: Accessible : Not accessible

• Designating network No. and station number for setting monitor device
(a) Monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by network parameter
NW No.: 1, Station number: Host
4
HOW TO MONITOR
POINT
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the local device number if designating
devices allocated to another station.
5
BUS CONNECTION
(b) Monitoring other stations (other than B and W)
Station to be accessed
QnA Q (Q mode) GOT AnU
Station How to read the table 1, Other (2)
(1-1) (1-2) (1-3) (1-4)
connected to GOT ↑ ↑
GOT (1-3) 1, Other (1) 1, Other (2) ―― 1, Other (4) NW No. Station number
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 - 11

Example 6: When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) /CC-Link connection (via G4)
Image of CC-Link Connection

GOT
Q(Q mode) CC-Link Master Network module

(1-2) module (0 station) (1-2)
CC-Link System
QnA AnA
GOT
(1-1) (1-3)
Network
System
AnN
GOT (1-4) GOT
QnA Q (Q mode) AnA AnN
Station
(1-1) (1-2) (1-3) (1-4)
connected to GOT
QnA (1-1)
Q(Q mode) (1-2)
AnA (1-3)
AnN (1-4)
: Accessible : Not accessible

1
3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet
PROCEDURES FOR
Connection
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
 Access range 2
(1) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC
THAT CAN BE SET

The PLC can be monitored via the Ethernet module set in the Ethernet setting on GT Designer3.
DEVICE RANGE
The GOT can access CPUs on another Ethernet, MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller
Network, or CC-Link field network via the RCPU,QCPU or QnACPU.(Monitoring other networks via a motion
controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) is available by Ethernet only.)
However, the GOT cannot monitor the CNC C70 on other networks.
(The GOT cannot monitor the AnNCPU on the CC-Link IE Controller Network, MELSECNET/H, and
MELSECNET/10 networks) 3
For monitoring CPUs on the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network, and CC-Link
FOR MONITORING
field network, set the routing parameter.
ACCESS RANGE
For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following manuals.
• Routing parameter setting of the GOT
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
• Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the MELSECNET/H network system, or MELSECNET/10
network system
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) 4
• Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the CC-Link IE Controller Network
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
• Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the CC-Link IE Field Network
SYSTEM
MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual
CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual
Monitoring via the MELSECNET (II) or MELSECNET/B network cannot be performed.
GOT 5
BUS CONNECTION
Hub etc.
Gateway
(Router etc.)
6
MELSECNET/H etc.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
POINT
7
(1) Host in the Ethernet connection
While the GOT is handled as the host in MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 or CC-Link connection, the station
COMPUTER LINK
(Ethernet module) set as the host in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 is handled as the host in Ethernet
CONNECTION
connection.
(2) Precautions when using the QCPU redundant system
When monitoring other networks, do not set the QCPU redundant system as a relay station.
If the QCPU redundant system is set as a relay station, the GOT cannot switch the monitoring target
automatically when the system is switched. 8
(A timeout error occurs due to failed monitoring)
 Various settings
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
For the Ethernet setting by GT Designer3, refer to the following.


3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection
3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring
 When using Bus connection/CPU direct connection/computer link connection
Only connected stations can be monitored.
 When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
(1) Access range

The master station and local station can be monitored.
: Can be monitored, : Cannot be monitored
Monitor target Monitoring by cyclic transmission Monitoring by transient transmission
Master station (Remote network Ver.2 mode)
Local station Station No.1 (Ver.1 compatible)
Local station Station No.6 (Ver.2 compatible) *1
*1 Monitoring is available only when the CC-Link communication module is the GT15-J61BT13.
All devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by the CC-Link parameter setting can
be monitored.
When the monitor target is the multi-PLC system, CPU No. 1 to No. 4 can be monitored.
The device range of RX, RY, RWw, RWr to be allocated to the GOT differs according to the setting of the number
of CC-Link communication units (one station/four station) occupied.
For details on the number of CC-Link stations occupied, refer to the following manual .
User's manual of the CC-Link master unit to be connected
(2) Setting device name and device number

(a) Monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by CC-Link parameter
setting
Use the following device names.
For devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr, designate the addresses allocated by station number setting.
• In the case of CC-Link Ver.2 (Device names to be refreshed automatically are indicated as X, Y, and D.)
Automatic Device name on master Link GT Designer3 settings

Device name on PLC CPU
refresh station scan Device name Set device range
Input X ← Remote input RX ← X X0 to X1FFF
Output Y → Remote output RY → Y Y0 to Y1FFF
Remote register
Register (write area) D ← RWw ← Ww Ww0 to Ww7FF
(write area)
Remote register
Register (read area) D → RWr → Wr Wr0 to Wr7FF
(read area)
• In the case of CC-Link Ver.1 (Device names to be refreshed automatically are indicated as X, Y, and D.)
Automatic Device name on master Link GT Designer3 settings

Device name on PLC CPU
refresh station scan Device name Set device range
Input X ← Remote input RX ← X X0 to X7FF
Output Y → Remote output RY → Y Y0 to Y7FF
Remote register
Register (write area) D ← RWw ← Ww Ww0 to WwFF
(write area)
Remote register
Register (read area) D → RWr → Wr Wr0 to WrFF
(read area)

(b) Monitoring PLC CPU devices of other stations 1
Set the device name and device No.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(3) Setting NW No. and station number
(a) When monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master station by CC-Link
parameter setting 2
NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Local
THAT CAN BE SET

(b) When monitoring PLC CPU devices of another station
DEVICE RANGE
NW No. 0, PLC station number: Other (Station number: n)
(n: Station number of another station to be monitored (0: Master station, 1-64: Local station))
POINT 3
For monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated by CC-Link parameter, use the local device even
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
if designating devices allocated to another station.
 When using CC-Link connection (via G4) (Q series only) 4

(1) Access range
HOW TO MONITOR
GT16, GT15 and GT14 can monitor the master station and local stations.
GT10 and GT11 can monitor the master station only.
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
(2) Setting NW No. and station number
(a) When monitoring master station
NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Host/other (station number: 0)
(b) When monitoring local station
5
NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Other (station number: 1 to 64)
BUS CONNECTION
(3) Setting device name and device number
Set the device name and device No.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 Monitoring overview
The following two methods are available for monitoring by the GOT with CC-Link communication unit.
Monitoring method Monitoring by transient transmission*2 Monitoring by cyclic transmission*2
All remote inputs/outputs and remote registers assigned to

Devices of the PLC CPU on the CC-Link system master and
Contents the Master station by CC-Link parameter setting are
local station are specified and monitored.
specified and monitored.
The CC-Link parameter setting sequence program is

Advantage required. However, the GOT communication sequence The data communication processing speed is high.
program is not needed.*1
• Writing from the GOT (read command from the master

station) can be performed only to remote outputs and
The data communication processing speed is lower than
Disadvantage remote registers assigned to the GOT of the master
that of cyclic transmission.
station and to the GOT internal registers.
• GOT communication sequence program is required.*1
*1 This program is not required if the CC-Link parameter setting sequence program and GOT communication sequence program
satisfy the following conditions.
• Use a QCPU (Q mode) or QnACPU whose number given in the DATE field of the rating plate is "9707B" or later as the PLC
CPU of the master station.
• Use GX Developer or SW2 -GPPW and make CC-Link parameter setting and batch refresh device setting in the CC-Link
setting on the package.
For details of the connection method, refer to the following manual .
User's manual of the CC-Link master unit to be connected
*2 For whether the data can be sent to/received from the CC-Link Ver. 2 compatible station by transient transmission and cyclic
transmission, refer to the following.
■ When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
POINT
In transient transmission, connection of several (five or more as a guideline) intelligent device stations (GOTs and
intelligent device units) reduces the data communication speed.
To raise the data communication speed, increase the CC-Link system, for example, and do not connect five or
more intelligent device stations to a single CC-Link system.

1
3.4 Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access
PROCEDURES FOR
Range for Monitoring
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
 Bus connection, CPU direct connection, Computer link connection
THAT CAN BE SET

(1) When connecting to the master station
DEVICE RANGE
• Local stations can be monitored. M GOT
When the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B
L1 L3
and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored.
L2
(2) When connecting to the local station

M
3
• The master station can be monitored.
FOR MONITORING
However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other
ACCESS RANGE
L1 L3
than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored.
L2
• Other local stations cannot be monitored. GOT
(3) When connecting to the master station on the third layer

• The master station on the second layer and local stations on the third layer M
4
can be monitored. L1 L3
HOW TO MONITOR
However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other
L2
than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored. m GOT
REDUNTANT
• Local stations on the second layer cannot be monitored.
SYSTEM
1 3
5
 Monitoring devices of other stations
BUS CONNECTION
If devices of other stations on the data link system are monitored, the display speed will be significantly reduced.
Therefore monitor the link relay (B) and link register (W) that are allocated by the link parameter.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

3.4 Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access Range for Monitoring
 Setting method of monitor device
The following example describes the method of setting the network No. and the station numbers when setting
monitor devices .
L1 L3
L2
m
1 3 GOT
(1) Monitoring the connected station (host station) and B and W allocated by the link parameter
Specify the host station.
(2) Monitoring devices of other stations
Network No.: 0, Station number: Refer to the following table.
Setting of the station No.

L2
Station M L1 L3 1 2 3
m
connected to GOT
M Host Other 1 Other 2 Other 3 ― ― ―
L1 Other 0 Host ― ― ― ― ―
L2
Other 0 ― Host ― Other 1 Other 2 Other 3
m
L3 Other 0 ― ― Host ― ― ―
1 ― ― Other 0 ― Host ― ―
2 ― ― Other 0 ― ― Host ―
3 ― ― Other 0 ― ― ― Host
POINT
3.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting

FXCPU
The access range that can be monitored for the direct CPU connection is only the connected CPU. (The GOT cannot
monitor other stations.)
The access range that can be monitored for the Ethernet connection is the host and others.
The access range that can be monitored for the multi-drop communication is only the CPU to which the serial multi-drop
connection unit (GT01-RS4-M) is connected directly.

3.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU
1
3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/
PROCEDURES FOR
H Network System
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
When connected to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPU of 2
the master station.
THAT CAN BE SET

When connecting the GOT to the remote I/O station, use the following connection methods.
DEVICE RANGE
POINT
(1) Connection to remote I/O station of MELSECNET/B, (II) or /10
The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/B, (II) data link system and 3
MELSECNET/10 network system.
FOR MONITORING
Connect the GOT to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system.
ACCESS RANGE
Network No.1
Monitor Station No.0
target (master station)
QJ71LP21-25
Q33B
module
Power supply
PLC CPU
Empty
Empty
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
MELSECNET/H remote I/O Network
SYSTEM
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
QJ71E71-100
Q33B
module
Power supply
Empty
Network No.1
Station No.1
(remote I/O station) 5
BUS CONNECTION
Hub
GOT GOT GOT
(1) Direct CPU (2) Computer link (3) Ethernet connection

6
connection connection
CONNECTION TO
(2) Connection to GT11 and remote I/O station on MELSECNET/H
GT11 can not access the master station on MELSECNET/H network system.
DIRECT
GT11 can access only the connected host station (remote I/O station).
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System
 Direct CPU connection
(1) The network units (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QP72BR15) of the remote I/O station are handled as PLC CPU.
Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the network unit.
For cables required for connection with the network module and other details, refer to the following.
6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
(2) Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT
Designer3. Then, specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.]
(Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16,
GT15 only)
The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission.
Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU.
For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link
devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network.
For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/Q network)
(3) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter
settings of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
 Computer link connection

(1) Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2,
QJ71C24N-R4) or modem interface module (QJ71CMO) mounted on the remote I/O station.
For the cables required for connection with the serial communication module or modem interface module and
other details, refer to the following.
7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
(2) Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT
GT15 only)
The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission.
devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network.
(3) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing parameter
settings of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.

1
 Ethernet connection
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
(1) Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71) mounted on
MONITORING
the remote I/O station.
For details of cables and others required for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module, refer to the following.
(2) Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GT15 only)
The GOT monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission.Therefore, a longer
time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU.
devices B and W of the remote I/O station.
For settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual. 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
(3) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the GOT and PLC CPU as necessary. For routing
parameter settings of the GOT, refer to the following manual.
For routing parameter settings of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.
HOW TO MONITOR
 Restrictions on connection to remote I/O station
The GOT does not allow the clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility function.
REDUNTANT
The master station clock will not change even if the clock setting is made.
SYSTEM
Use GX Developer or a similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station.
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field
Network System
When connected to the head module of the CC-Link IE Field Network, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPUs of the master
station and local stations. When connecting the GOT to the head module, use the following connection methods.
 Computer link connection

Monitor target Network No. 1, Station No. 0
module
Power supply
CLP CPU
QJ71GF11-T2
Empty
Empty
Q33B

LJ72GF15-T2
LJ71C24
LX40C6
LY10R2
module
Power supply
Network No. 1,
Station No. 1
GOT
(1) Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2) mounted on the head module.
For cables required for connection with the serial communication module and other details, refer to the following.
(2) Specify a GOT type which includes MELSEC-QnU in the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify
[Network No. 1 (Network No. of CC-Link IE Field Network), Station No. 0 (Master station)] as the monitoring
target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. (GT16, GT15, GT14 only)
In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the CC-Link IE Field Network.
devices B and W of the host station set in the CC-Link field network.
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual
(3) To monitor other networks, set the routing parameter to the PLC CPU as necessary. For routing
parameter setting of the PLC CPU, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual

3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network System
1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Connection between GT11, GT10 and head module of CC-Link IE Field Network
GT11, GT10 can not access the master station on CC-Link IE Field Network.
GT11, GT10 can access only the connected host station (head module).
2
 Restrictions on connection to head module
THAT CAN BE SET

The GOT does not allow the clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility function.
DEVICE RANGE
Use GX Works or similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT
DEVICE RANGE
4.
SYSTEM 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 8
4.2 Direct CPU Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 4
4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station) . . . . . . . . .4 - 18
HOW TO MONITOR
4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 20
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network
Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 22
4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network System) 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 23
BUS CONNECTION
4.7 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 24
4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit . .4 - 25
4.9 Q Redundant Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 29
6
4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 31
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
4-1
4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM
This section explains the restrictions on the connection methods and other information applicable when the QCPU
redundant system is monitored by the GOT.
Monitor
target
Station No. 0 Station No. 1
(Multiplexed remote master station) (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
module
Power supply
Empty
module
Power supply
Empty
Control Standby
system system
(System A) (System B)
Tracking cable MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
Station No. 2
(remote I/O station)
The GOT monitors

GOT the control system
CPU direct PLC CPU.
connection
When an error occurs in System A, System B switches from standby system to control system.
Monitor target
(Multiplexed remote master station) (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
module
Power supply
Empty
module
Power supply
Empty
Standby Control
system system
Tracking cable MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
Station No. 2
The GOT monitors the PLC CPU

GOT of the new control system after
CPU direct system switching.
connection
In a redundant system, the monitoring can be performed with the monitoring target specified as the control system or the
standby system on the GOT. By specifying the monitoring target PLC CPU as the control system of the redundant
system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU in the control system when system switching
occurs.
To enable this automatic changing of the monitoring target at the GOT, settings are required in the GT Designer3.
4.9 Q Redundant Setting
4-2 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM

The following connection methods are available for the QCPU redundant system. 1
PROCEDURES FOR
• Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Direct CPU connection (Remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system)
4.1.1 Direct CPU connection (Direct CPU connection to the remote I/O station)
(2) Computer link connection (Serial communication module mounted on remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H
network system)
2
4.1.2 Computer link connection (Connection to serial communication module mounted on remote
THAT CAN BE SET

I/O station)
DEVICE RANGE
(3) Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network
system)
4.1.3 Ethernet connection (Connection to Ethernet module mounted on remote I/O station)
• Direct CPU connection 3

4.2 Direct CPU Connection
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
• CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device Station)
• CC-Link connection (Via G4)

4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4) 4
HOW TO MONITOR
• MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection (Network system)
4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network Systems)
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
• CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (Network system)
4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network System)
5
BUS CONNECTION
4.7 Ethernet Connection
• Connection to the redundant type extension base unit

(1) Computer link connection (Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)
4.8.1 Computer link connection (Connection to the Serial communication module mounted on the
redundant type extension base unit) 6
(2) Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)
CONNECTION TO
4.8.2 Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type
extension base unit)
DIRECT
(3) CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base
CPU
unit)
4.8.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (Connection to the CC-Link module 7
mounted on redundant type extension base unit)
COMPUTER LINK
(4) CC-Link connection (Via G4) (CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)
CONNECTION
4.8.4 CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant
type extension base unit)
For details of PLC CPUs that can be monitored in each connection method of GOT, refer to the following.
8
Monitorable controllers of each chapter
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4-3

The following table shows the features of each connection method.
Connection type Before system switching After system switching
• Direct CPU connection

(Remote I/O station of Control system Standby system Standby system Control system
MELSECNET/H network
system) Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote
• Computer link connection master station sub master station master station sub master station
(Serial communication
module mounted on the MELSECNET/H remote I/O network MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
remote I/O station on
MELSECNET/H network Serial Serial
Remote Ethernet Remote Ethernet
system) communication communication
I/O station module I/O station module
• Ethernet connection module module
(Ethernet module mounted
on the remote I/O station
GOT1 GOT2 GOT3 GOT1 GOT2 GOT3
of the MELSECNET/H
network system) Direct CPU Computer link Ethernet
Direct CPU Computer link Ethernet
connection connection connection connection connection connection
The monitoring target is automatically changed to the control

system PLC CPU.

GOT GOT
Control
Control Standby system system
system Standby system
Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote
Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote
master station sub-master station
master station sub-master station
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Remote I/O
Remote I/O
station
station
By the Q redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes

the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system.*1
GOT1 GOT2 GOT1 GOT2
Control Control
system Standby system Standby system system
Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote Multiplexed remote
master station sub-master station master station sub-master station
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
Remote I/O Remote I/O

station station
Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GOT1. Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GOT2.

1
PROCEDURES FOR
• CC-Link connection
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(intelligent device station) Intelligent device station
GOT1
• CC-Link connection (Via GOT1

AJ65BT-G4-S3 CC-Link
G4) GOT2
CC-Link
2
GOT2
Master station Standby master station
Master station Standby master station
Control
THAT CAN BE SET

Standby
DEVICE RANGE
system system
Control Standby
system system
The monitoring target is automatically changed to the control
system PLC CPU.
• MELSECNET/H
connection, MELSECNET/
10 connection
GOT Station No.3
(normal station)
GOT Station No.3
(normal station)
3
(Network system)
FOR MONITORING
MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network
ACCESS RANGE
(MELSECNET/H mode or (MELSECNET/H mode or
MELSECNET/10 mode) MELSECNET/10 mode)
Station No.1 Station No.2 Station No.1 Station No.2

(control station) (normal station) (normal station) (sub control station)
Control Standby Standby Control 4

system system system system
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
• CC-Link IE Controller
Network connection GOT Station No.3 GOT Station No.3
(Network system) (normal station) (normal station)
CC-Link IE Controller Network CC-Link IE Controller Network

5
BUS CONNECTION
Station No.1 Station No.2 Station No.1 Station No.2
(control station) (normal station) (normal station) (sub control station)
Control Standby Standby Control

By the Q redundant setting, the GOT automatically changes 6

*2
the monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system.
CONNECTION TO
GOT
Station No. 3 GOT
Station No. 3
Ethernet Ethernet
DIRECT
CPU
Station Station
No. 1 No. 2
Control Standby Standby Control

7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION

8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET


(Serial communication Control system Control system Standby system
module mounted on the
redundant type extension Station Station Station Station
base unit) No. 1 No. 2 No. 1 No. 2
(Ethernet module mounted
Serial Serial
on the redundant type CC-Link Ethernet CC-Link Ethernet
communication module communication
extension base unit) module module module
module module
• CC-Link connection
(intelligent device station)
GOT2 GOT3 GOT1 GOT2 GOT3
(CC-Link module mounted GOT1
on the redundant type CC-Link Computer link Ethernet CC-Link Computer link Ethernet
extension base unit) connection connection connection connection connection connection
• CC-Link connection (Via

G4)
(CC-Link module mounted
on the redundant type
extension base unit)
*1 To monitor the control system after the system switching without the Q redundant setting, change the cable connection from the
PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control system after system switching.
*2 To monitor the control system after the system switching without the Q redundancy setting, refer to the following.
4.10Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function

1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Precautions for monitoring the QCPU redundant system
(1) A system alarm may be detected when the system is switched in a redundant system.
When Q redundant setting is made : "450 Path has changed or timeout occurred in redundant system."
When Q redundant setting is not made : "402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication pathway or
modules."
2
However, even if the error occurs, the GOT automatically resumes monitoring and there are no problems in
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
the monitoring operation.
(2) The system alarm is displayed when the system is switched due to cable disconnection etc. (when the path is
changed).
The system alarm is not displayed when the system is switched by the user.
(3) When connected to the remote I/O station, the GOT can monitor only the following GOT functions. 3
Monitoring function System monitoring function
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
(4) When connected to the remote I/O station, the GOT does not allow the PLC CPU clock of the master station
to be set in the clock setting of the utility.
Use GX Developer or a similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station.
(5) When the Q redundant setting is not made, the GOT does not automatically change the monitoring target
even if system switching occurs in the redundant system. When the GOT is connected to the standby system, 4
data written to a device are overwritten by the data of the control system, failing to be reflected.
HOW TO MONITOR
In this case, when data are written to a device in the standby system normally, the system alarm "315 Device
writing error. Correct device." is not detected.
REDUNTANT
(6) For monitoring the QCPU redundant system when connecting to MELSECNET/H, use QCPU of function
SYSTEM
version D or later, with the upper five digits later than "07102".
Also, use GX Developer of Version 8.29F or later.
(7) A message "Unable to communicate with CPU." is displayed when the system switching occurs while an 5
option function such as the ladder monitor is used.
BUS CONNECTION
(8) In the MELSECNET/H connection or MELSECNET/10 connection, when the control station of the
MELSECNET/H network or MELSECNET/10 network fails and is taken over by a station outside the QCPU
redundant system, the timeout is detected as the system alarm.
If this occurs, the monitor display speed may slow down.
(9) In the direct CPU connection, the GOT fails to automatically change the monitoring target in the following
cases. 6
• When the power supply to the CPU where the GOT is connected is OFF
CONNECTION TO
• When the cable connecting the GOT with the CPU is broken
• When the tracking is disabled
DIRECT
(10) If the Q redundant setting is made for a system that is not a QCPU redundant system, no error occurs at the
CPU
start up of the GOT and the GOT operates normally.

In this case, if an abnormality (such as powering OFF, or communication timeout error) occurs at the PLC
CPU for which the Q redundant setting has been made, the PLC CPU may operate in a different way from the
7
monitoring target change mode that was set in the Q redundant setting.
COMPUTER LINK
(11) If the QCPU redundant system is in the debug mode, do not make the Q redundant system setting for the
CONNECTION
GOT side when connecting the GOT.
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/
H Network System
4.1.1 Direct CPU connection (Direct CPU connection to the remote I/O station)
This section explains the direct CPU connection that connects the GOT to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H
network system.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
Network No. 1, Station No. 0 Network No. 1, Station No. 1
Monitor target (Multiplexed remote master station) (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply
Standby system
Control system (System B)
(System A)

QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
Network No. 1, Station No. 2

(Remote I/O station)
CPU direct connection
GOT
(1) Connection method

Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the network module (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72BR15) on
the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
(2) GT Designer3 setting
Set GT Designer3 as follows.
Setting item Settings Model
GT16, GT15, GT12: MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*

Controller Type
GT14, GT11: MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* *1
NW No.: Network No. of MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Device setting (Network setting) Other
Station No.: 0 (Master station)
Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item. *2
*1 GT14 and GT11 are not compatible with MELSEC-QS.

*2 Only the CPU which is connected to GT11 directly can be monitored on GT11. The setting of GT Designer3 is not necessary.
In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the MELSECNET/H network system.
For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag or using GT11, set the device for link devices B and W of the host
station set in the MELSECNET/H network and execute the cyclic transmission.
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system
When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system
takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU that
is operating as the master.

4.1.2 Computer link connection (Connection to serial communication module 1
mounted on remote I/O station)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
This section explains the computer link connection that connects the GOT to the serial communication module mounted
on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the remote I/O 2
station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
supply module
Power
supply module
Power
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
Empty
Standby system
Control system
(System B)
(System A)
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
supply module
Power
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty
(Remote I/O station)
Computer link connection

4
HOW TO MONITOR
GOT
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2,
QJ71C24N-R4) or modem interface module (QJ71CM0) mounted on the remote I/ O station of the
MELSECNET/H network system. 5
BUS CONNECTION
Controller Type
6
CONNECTION TO
Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item. *2

DIRECT
CPU

*2 Only the CPU which is connected to GT11 in the computer link connection can be monitored on GT11. The setting of GT
Designer3 is not necessary.
7
COMPUTER LINK
For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag or using GT11, set the device for link devices B and W of the host
CONNECTION
station set in the MELSECNET/H network and execute the cyclic transmission.
When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system 8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4.1.3 Ethernet connection (Connection to Ethernet module mounted on remote I/O
station)
This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/
O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the I/O station of the
MELESCNET/H network system.
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
Control system Standby system

QJ72LP25-25
QJ71E71-100
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
(remote I/O station) Network No. 2, Station No. 2
Ethernet

GOT

Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71) mounted on
the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.

Controller Type
GT14: MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* *1

Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.
Routing Information Setting 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
*1 GT14 is not compatible with MELSEC-QS.

For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, set the device for link devices B and W of the host station set in
the MELSECNET/H network and execute the cyclic transmission.
When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system
4 - 10 4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
This section describes the direct CPU connection by which a GOT is connected to a PLC CPU in the redundant system.
Two methods for the CPU direct connection, using one or two GOTs, are available.
2
4.2.1 When using one GOT
THAT CAN BE SET

CPU direct connection
DEVICE RANGE
GOT
Monitor target
(Multiplexed remote master station)
(Multiplexed remote sub master station)
3
FOR MONITORING
supply module
Power
supply module
Power
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
ACCESS RANGE

4
HOW TO MONITOR
supply module
Power
Empty
Empty
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the control system CPU module (Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU) of 5
the redundant system.
BUS CONNECTION
Controller Type
GT16, GT15, GT12: MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* 6
CONNECTION TO
Device setting (Network setting) Host
Q Redundant Setting 4.9 Q Redundant Setting

DIRECT
*2
CPU

7
When the system switching occurs, the PLC CPU (other station) of the control system after system switching
COMPUTER LINK
takes over the host station operation.

CONNECTION
Since the GOT monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to other station.
POINT
To monitor the control system without Q redundant setting 8
If the system switching occurs when the Q redundant setting is not made, the GOT cannot change the monitoring
target at the occurrence of system switching since it monitors the connected PLC CPU (host station).
CONNECTION
As a countermeasure, change the cable connection from the PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control
ETHERNET
system after system switching.
4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 - 11

4.2.2 When using two GOTs
Connect a GOT to each PLC CPU to respond to the system switching.

CPU direct connection CPU direct connection
GOT1 GOT2
Monitor Network No. 1, Station No. 0 Network No. 1, Station No. 1

target (Multiplexed remote master station) (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty

module
Power supply
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty

Connect GOTs to the RS-232 interface of the control system and standby system CPU modules (Q12PRHCPU,
Q25PRHCPU) of the redundant system.

Controller Type

*2

When the system switching occurs, the GOT cannot change the monitor target automatically in response to the
system switching.
The GOT that is connected to the control system CPU module after system switching continues the monitoring.
Different from the case using one GOT, no cable reconnection is required.
POINT
To automatically change the monitoring target after system switching using one GOT, make the Q redundant
settings.

4.2.3 Precautions when connecting a GOT directly to a PLC CPU in the redundant 1
system without making Q redundant setting
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) As the GOT monitors exclusively the PLC CPU that is directly connected to, the monitor target cannot be
changed in response to the system switching of the redundant system.
To change the target monitor in response to the system switching, change the target of the connection cable
between the GOT and PLC CPU to the other PLC CPU, or configure the system using GOTs connected to each
PLC CPU. 2
(2) In CPU direct connection, when monitoring a PLC CPU in the redundant system, only the PLC CPU that is
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
directly connected to the GOT can be monitored.
(3) When connected to the standby system PLC CPU, the writing of the GOT to a device in the connected PLC
CPU is not reflected. Design a monitor screen that disables writing to the standby system.
In the redundant system, the tracking function transfers device data from control system to standby system.
When the tracking function is enabled, the device value of the standby system PLC CPU is overwritten by the
device value transferred from the control system to the standby system even if the GOT writes to the standby 3
system PLC CPU (Numerical input, Ascii input, Script, Recipe, or others).
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
CPU direct connection CPU direct connection
GOT1 GOT2
2) Tracks D100=5 from control 1) Numerically input D100=100 4

system to standby system. from the GOT.
HOW TO MONITOR
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network 1) D100=100 5
BUS CONNECTION
2) D100=5
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
As countermeasures to the above, perform the following.

• Display a monitor screen which indicates that "the connected PLC CPU is the standby system" on a GOT 6
when connecting the GOT to the standby system PLC CPU.
CONNECTION TO
• To display the specified monitor screen when connecting the GOT to the standby system PLC CPU, use the
special relay SM1515 (Control status identification flag) of the PLC CPU.
(When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is the standby system)
DIRECT
• Control the operation of each object by the SM1515, which is set for the operation condition.
CPU
• For the screen switching device, use a GOT internal device.

If a device of the PLC CPU is used, the Status Observation operation of the GOT may be disabled since the 7
device data of the PLC CPU will is overwritten by the device value transferred with the redundant system
tracking function.
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

The following diagram shows an example of screen setting using SM1515.
System configuration example: when using one GOT
GOT
Control Standby
Q25PRH QJ71 Station system Q25PRH QJ71 Station
system
CPU BR11 No. 0 CPU BR11 No. 1
QJ72 Station
BR15 No. 2
Create a monitor screen on the base screen 1 that performs the following operations for when connecting a
GOT to control system and standby system.
1) When connecting to the control system, the monitor screen displays a message calling a touch switch
operation, by which the screen switches to the next screen.
2) When connecting to the standby system, the monitor screen displays a message calling the reconnection of
the connection cable.
1) When connecting to the control system 2) When connecting to the standby system

1
1. Set the screen switching device of the base screen.
PROCEDURES FOR
Choose [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device
PREPARATORY
GD100 as the base screen switching device.
MONITORING
(Do not use PLC CPU devices for the screen switching device. If used, the Status Observation operation of the GOT
may be disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred with the
redundant system tracking function)
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
2. Set the Status Observation.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Make the setting so that the base screen 1 is displayed when the connected PLC CPU is the standby system
(SM1515 is OFF) in the project specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation].
Condition 1 : SM1515 (while OFF) When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is the standby system.
Operation : GD100=1 The screen switches to the base screen 1.
Create the status observation in the project on the Project tab.

4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

3. Set the comment display on the base screen 1.
Set a comment to be displayed on the base screen 1 depending on the system status (ON/OFF of the SM1515) of
the connected PLC CPU using the Comment Display (Bit).
Select [Object] [Comment Display] [Bit Comment] and set Comment Display (Bit).
Device/Style tab
Device : SM1515
Shape : None
Comment tab : Basic Comment
Comment Display Type Text (ON) : The operation status is control system.
Touch the screen to display the next screen.
Comment Display Type Text (OFF) : The operation status is standby system.
Reconnect the PLC connection cable to the control system CPU.
1) Device/Style tab screen 2) Comment tab screen (ON status)
3) Comment tab screen (OFF status)

1
4. Set the touch switches on the base screen 1.
PROCEDURES FOR
By using the go to screen switch function, set a touch switch for shifting the screen to the next screen with a screen
PREPARATORY
touch, when the connected PLC CPU is the control system (SM1515 is ON).
MONITORING
Select [Object] [Switch] [Go To Screen Switch] and set the screen switching function.
Set the same size for the touch switch as the base screen size so that touching any place of the screen enables the
switch operation.
Next Screen tab 2

Screen Type : Base
THAT CAN BE SET

Go To Screen : Fixed 2
DEVICE RANGE
Style tab
Display Style : None (Shape)
Trigger tab
Trigger Type : ON
Trigger Device : SM1515
3
FOR MONITORING
1) Next Screen tab 2) Style tab screen 3) Trigger tab screen
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
The following shows the created base screen 1.
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

This section describes the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) that connects the GOT set as the intelligent
device station to the CC-Link network.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT set as the intelligent device station to the CC-Link network.
CC-Link connection
(Master station) (Standby master station) GOT
CC-Link
Monitor target
Network No. 0,
supply module
Power
supply module
Power
Empty
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Station No. 2
Control (Intelligent device station)
system Standby system
(System A)
(System B)

supply module
Power
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty

Connect the CC-Link network system to the GOT.
Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
NW No.: 0 (fixed)
In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the CC-Link network system.
For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, set the device for RX, RY, RWw, RWr of the host station set in the
CC-Link network and execute the cyclic transmission.

1
PROCEDURES FOR
(a) System switching due to an alarm occurred in the control system
PREPARATORY
When system switching occurs, the CC-Link switches the station No. 0 of the master station and the station
MONITORING
No. 1 of the standby master station on the network.
The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the master
station.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the new
control system after system switching. 2
(b) System switching due to a network communication error occurred in other than the CC-Link of the control
THAT CAN BE SET

system, or due to switching by the user
DEVICE RANGE
When system switching occurs, the CC-Link does not switch the station No. 0 of the master station and the
station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network.
The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the
standby master station.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is not automatically changed to the new 3
control system after system switching.
FOR MONITORING
To automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT to the new control system after system switching,
ACCESS RANGE
switch the data link control from the standby master station to the master station by the sequence program
of the new control system.
For details of the sequence program, refer to the following manual.
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
(Sample Programs when Using CC-Link) 4
HOW TO MONITOR
POINT
REDUNTANT
CC-Link network setting
SYSTEM
To automatically change the monitoring target in the QCPU redundant system when using the CC-Link connection,
set the CC-Link master station as System A and the standby master station as System B.
For details of using the CC-Link network in the redundant system, refer to the following manual. 5
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
BUS CONNECTION
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4)
This section explains the CC-Link connection (via G4) that connects the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link
network.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network.
(AJ65BT-G4-S3)

(Master station) (Standby master station) GOT
CC-Link
Monitor target
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empty
Control
Standby system
system
(System B)
(System A)

module
Power supply
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty

Connect the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network to the GOT.
14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
Controller Type GT14, GT11: MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* *1
GT10: MELSEC-QnA/Q*1

*2
*1 GT14, GT11, and GT10 are not compatible with MELSEC-QS.

*2 Only master station can be monitored in GT11 and GT10. The setting of GT Designer3 is not necessary.

1
PROCEDURES FOR
(a) System switching due to an alarm occurred in the control system
PREPARATORY
When system switching occurs, the CC-Link switches the station No. 0 of the master station and the station
MONITORING
No. 1 of the standby master station on the network.
The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the master
station.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the new
control system after system switching. 2
(b) System switching due to a network communication error occurred in other than the CC-Link of the control
THAT CAN BE SET

system, or due to switching by the user
DEVICE RANGE
When system switching occurs, the CC-Link does not switch the station No. 0 of the master station and the
station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network.
The CC-Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the
standby master station.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, the monitoring target is not automatically changed to the new 3
control system after system switching.
FOR MONITORING
To automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT to the new control system after system switching,
ACCESS RANGE
switch the data link control from the standby master station to the master station by the sequence program
of the new control system.
For details of the sequence program, refer to the following manual.
(Sample Programs when Using CC-Link) 4
HOW TO MONITOR
POINT
REDUNTANT
CC-Link network setting
SYSTEM
To automatically change the monitoring target in the QCPU redundant system when using the CC-Link connection,
set the CC-Link master station as System A and the standby master station as System B.
For details of using the CC-Link network in the redundant system, refer to the following manual. 5
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
BUS CONNECTION
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections
(Network Systems)
This section explains the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (network systems) that connect the GOT to
the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network system.
The following provides an example of connecting the GOT set as a normal station to the MELSECNET/ H network
system.
Network No. 1, Station No. 3 (Normal station)
GOT
Network No. 1, Station No. 1 MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network
(Control station) (MELSECNET/H mode or Network No. 1, Station No. 2
MELSECNET/10 mode) (Normal station)
Monitor target
Empty
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Control Empty Standby

system system

module
Power supply
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empty
Empty

Connect the MELSECNET/H network system to the GOT.
NW No.: Network No. of MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network
Station No.: Station number of the control system
When system switching occurs, the network module station No. 2 changes from the normal station to the sub
control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET/H network system.
Since the GOT monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the network
module station No. 2.
POINT
To monitor the control system without Q redundant setting
When system switching occurs, the network module station No. 2 changes from the normal station to the sub
control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET/H network system.
Since the GOT monitors the station of the specified station number, the monitoring target cannot be changed to the
station No. 2 in response to the system switching.
As a countermeasure, create a screen to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by switching the station
numbers between System A and System B using the script function.
4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function

4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network Systems)
1
4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network
PROCEDURES FOR
System)
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
This section explains the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (network system) that connects the GOT to the CC- 2
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT set as a normal station to the CC-Link IE Controller Network.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Network No. 1, Station No. 3 (Normal station)
GOT

(Control station) Network No. 1, Station No. 2
Monitor target
CC-Link IE Controller Network (Normal station) 3
QJ71GP21-SX
QJ71GP21-SX
QJ61BT11N
FOR MONITORING
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71E71-100
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply
ACCESS RANGE
Control Standby
system system

4
HOW TO MONITOR
QJ71C24N
Empty
QJ72LP25-25
module
Power supply
Empty
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Connect the GOT to the CC-Link IE Controller Network.
5
BUS CONNECTION
11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION
Set GT Designer3 as described below.

NW No.: Network No. of CC-Link IE Controller Network 6
CONNECTION TO

DIRECT
To specify the station number which was set in the Q redundant setting in the device setting, set the station
CPU
number as the other station.
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system 7
When system switching occurs, the network module station No.2 changes from a normal station to the sub
COMPUTER LINK
control station, and the system with the module takes over the control of the CC-Link IE Controller Network as
CONNECTION
the control system.

Since the GOT monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the network
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection (Network System)
This section explains the Ethernet connection that connects the GOT to the Ethernet network system.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet network.
GOT
Network No. 1,
Network No. 1, Station No. 1 Station No. 2
Ethernet
Monitor target
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empt y
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71BR11
QJ71E71-100
QJ61BT11N
Empt y
Control
Standby
system
(System A) system
(System B)

module
Power supply
QJ72LP25-25
QJ71C24N
Empt y
Empt y

Connect the Ethernet network system to the GOT.
Set the Ethernet modules of System A and System B (including NW No., station No, and IP address) to the
Ethernet setting of the GOT side.
Controller Type
Host Host (The control system is monitored.)
Device setting (Network setting) NW No.: Network No. of Ethernet
Other

To specify the station number which was set in the Q redundant setting in the device setting, set the station
number as the other station.
When system switching occurs, Ethernet module station No. 2 takes over the control of the Ethernet network
system as the control system.
Since the GOT monitors the control system, he monitoring target is automatically changed to the Ethernet
POINT
When monitoring control system without Q redundant setting (Only GT16, GT15 and GT14)
When system switching occurs, Ethernet module station No. 2 takes over the control of the Ethernet network
system as the control system.
Since the GOT monitors the station of the specified station number, the monitoring target cannot be changed to the
station No. 2 in response to the system switching.
As a countermeasure, create a screen to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by switching the station
numbers between System A and System B using the script function.

1
4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base
PROCEDURES FOR
Unit
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
4.8.1 Computer link connection (Connection to the Serial communication module
mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
This section explains the computer link connection for connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted
on the redundant type extension base unit.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted on the redundant
type extension base unit.
Monitor target 3
FOR MONITORING
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply
ACCESS RANGE
4
QJ71C24N
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
Empty
HOW TO MONITOR
Computer link
REDUNTANT
connection
SYSTEM
Redundant type extension base unit
GOT
5
BUS CONNECTION
Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24N) mounted on the redundant type extension
base unit.
Set GT Designer3 as follows. 6
CONNECTION TO
Controller Type
DIRECT

CPU

7
When the system switching occurs, the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU
COMPUTER LINK
switched to the control system.

CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit
4.8.2 Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on
redundant type extension base unit)
This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type
extension base unit.
Monitor target

Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply
QJ71E71-100
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
Empty
Ethernet connection
GOT
Network No.2, Station No.1

(Ethernet module)

Connect the GOT to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2) mounted on the
redundant type extension base unit.
Controller Type

4.8.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (Connection to the CC-Link 1
module mounted on redundant type extension base unit)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
This section explains the CC-Link connection for connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the redundant
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the redundant type
2
extension base unit.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Monitor target

Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
QJ61BT11N
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
Empty
CC-Link connection
GOT
Network No. 0, Station No. 1 4
HOW TO MONITOR
(Master station)
REDUNTANT
Connect the GOT to the CC-Link module (QJ61BT11N) mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
NW No.: 0 (fixed)
6
In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the CC-Link network system.
CONNECTION TO
For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, set the device for RX, RY, RWw, RWr of the host station set in the
CC-Link network and execute the cyclic transmission.
DIRECT

CPU

(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system 7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4.8.4 CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link module mounted
on redundant type extension base unit)
This section explains the CC-Link connection (Via G4) for connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mounted on the
redundant type extension base unit via the AJ65BT-G4-S3.
The following shows an example of connecting the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network.
Monitor target
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71BR11
Empty
Empty
module
Power supply
module
Power supply

(Master station)
QJ61BT11N
module
Power supply
Empty
Empty
Empty
CC-Link
connection
GOT

(AJ65BT-G4-S3)

Connect the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network to the GOT.
Controller Type

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The following explains the setting for automatically change the monitoring target of the GOT when monitoring a QCPU
redundant system.
2
POINT
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Before making the Q redundant setting
In the Q redundant setting, do not set stations other than redundant CPUs.
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [Q Redundant] from the menu.

3
2. The setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
3. Make the settings for the Q redundant setting.
In the Q Redundant Setting dialog box, settings can be made for each channel of the controller.
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
(Example: Ethernet connection (Station No. 5), redundant CPU pair No. 1 and No. 2, redundant CPU station No. 1 to 4)
Item Contents Model

CH1 to CH4 Select a tab of the CH No. for the Q redundant setting.
Target at its own Station Select this item to monitor the control system as a host station.
(0-FF) (In Ethernet connection, not available even when selected) 6
Set the network No. (1 to 225) for each of pair numbers (1 to 64).
Upper row: Setting for the first redundant CPU.
CONNECTION TO
NW No.
Lower row: Setting for the second redundant CPU.
(The same value as the value set for the first redundant CPU is displayed)
Pair No.*1
Set the station No. (1 to 63) of the redundant CPU for each of pair numbers (1 to 64).
DIRECT
Station Upper row: Setting for the first redundant CPU.

CPU
No. Lower row: Setting for the second redundant CPU.
New
(The value of "Setting for the first redundant CPU" + 1 is displayed)
Create a new pair No.
*2 7
Duplicate Copies one setting of the selected pair number to append it at the last line.
COMPUTER LINK
Deletes one setting of the selected pair.

CONNECTION
Delete
After deletion, the succeeding pair numbers are renumbered to fill the deleted pair number.
Delete All Deletes the setting of all pair numbers.
Copy All Copies the Q redundant setting on the selected CH No. tab.
Paste All Pastes the copied Q redundant setting in the selected CH No. tab.
For details of *1, refer to the explanation below.
8
*2 GT14, GT12, GT11 are applicable to built-in serial interface only.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

*1 Pair number
Redundant CPU pair means the redundant CPUs (System A / System B) in the redundant system configuration.
Pair number is the number assigned to each redundant CPU pair.
Example: Ethernet connection (Pair No. 1 and Pair No. 2)
Redundant CPU pair (No.1)

Station Station
<System A> <System B>
No.1 No.2
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71E71-100
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71E71-100
GOT
Station
No.5
Ethernet (Network No.1)
Redundant CPU
pair (No.2)
Station Station
<System A> <System B>
No.3 No.4
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71E71-100
module
Power supply
Q25PRHCPU
QJ71E71-100
POINT
Precautions for making Q redundant setting
Pay attention to the following items when making the Q redundant setting.
• In the setting, station Nos. of the System A CPU and System B CPU must be adjacent numbers to be set as a
pair.
As long as adjacent numbers are used, allocation of them to the System A CPU and System B CPU may be
determined as desired.
• Pairing of the last station No. and station No. 1 (Example: Station No. 64 and station No. 1) is not allowed.
• Make sure that the QCPU in the station for which Q redundant setting is made is a redundant CPU.
If any of the QCPUs to which the Q redundant setting is made is not a redundant CPU, the GOT fails to
automatically change the monitoring target to the control system when the system is switched.
• When making the Q redundant setting for MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, or Ethernet connections, check
the station Nos. of network modules before the setting. If the settings of the Q redundant setting and the actual
network module station Nos. are not matched, the GOT fails to automatically change the monitoring target to
the control system when the system is switched.
• The redundant pair number setting is necessary in the Q redundant setting when the monitoring target changes
automatically at the system switching with the host station specified in Ethernet connection. (The "Target at its
own Station (0-FF)" function of the Q redundant setting is not valid in Ethernet connection.)
• GOT supports the backup mode (separate mode), which is the operation mode of the QCPU redundant system,
and does not support the debug mode.

1
4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System
PROCEDURES FOR
Using the Script Function
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The following explains how to create a script screen, to be used for the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 2
connection (network system), or Ethernet connection, that automatically changes the monitoring target (Station No.)
THAT CAN BE SET

at the occurrence of system switching even if the Q redundant setting is not made.
DEVICE RANGE
The script executes the station number switching function or screen switching function.
The following shows the advantages and disadvantages of the station number switching function and screen
switching function.
Function Advantage Disadvantage
Station number switching

The monitor screens for Station No. 1 (control system)
and Station No. 2 (standby system) can be created on one
Some objects do not allow the station number to be 3
function switched.
screen.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Monitor screens must be created separately for Station
All objects can be used since monitor screens are created
Screen switching function No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby
for each station number.
system).
The following explains how to use each function.
4
4.10.1 Method for using the station number switching function
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
• As a feature of this function, monitor screens for Station No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby system)
can be created on one screen.
SYSTEM
• If the system switching occurs, the GOT can change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the
same monitor screen.
• To achieve this, the script of the GOT monitors the special relay SM1515 (Control system identification flag) of the
PLC CPU and stores the station number of the latest control system into the station number switching device.
5
• Restrictions: Some objects do not allow the station number to be switched.
BUS CONNECTION
 Setting method (For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection)

System configuration example 1: MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection
MELSECNET/H 6
(MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode)
CONNECTION TO
Station Network No. 1
GOT
No. 3
Control system Q25PRH QJ71 Q25PRH QJ71 Standby system
DIRECT
(System A) CPU BR11 CPU BR11 (System B)

CPU
Connected module Network No. Station No. 7

MELSECNET/H network module of control system 1
COMPUTER LINK
MELSECNET/H network module of standby system 2

CONNECTION
1
GOT connected to MELSECNET/H network or MELSECNET/10
3
network
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

1. Set the station number switching device.
Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [Station No. Switching], and set the internal device GD100 as the
station number switching device.
Do not use a device of PLC CPU as a screen switching device. Since the device information is transferred by the
tracking transfer function of the redundant system, the status observation may be disabled.
Set here.
2. Set the status observation.

Make the settings so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (SW70) of
MELSECNET/H turns ON in the project specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation].
Condition 1 : SW70.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal.

Operation : GD100=2 Station No. is changed to 2.

Operation : GD100=1 Station No. is changed to 1.
POINT
Setting for the status observation function
For the status observation function, hexadecimals cannot be used.
To use the status observation function, set the N/W No. and the station No. of the PLC CPU in [Unsigned BIN].
(For the status observation function, set [Unsigned BIN] for [Storing Device])
Example:
When N/W No.: 1 and Station No.: 1 (0101H)
Set "257".
When N/W No.: 10 and Station No.: 10 (0A0AH)
Set "2570".

1
3. Create a monitor screen.
PROCEDURES FOR
For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection or Ethernet connection: (Common)
PREPARATORY
In the device setting (network setting) of each object, set Network No. 1 and Station No. 1 of the control system.
MONITORING
4. Validate the station number switching function.
On the Basic tab screen specified by selecting [Screen] [Screen Property], select the item [Switch Station No.] to
validate the station number changing function.
Make this setting for each monitor screen. 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Check here.
HOW TO MONITOR
5. Change the station number switching device value in the script.
REDUNTANT
By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515
SYSTEM
status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device
value.
Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)].
5
• Screen script for MELSECNET/H connection and MELSECNET/10 connection:
BUS CONNECTION
// If the host station is not a control station, the station number is switched to that of the other station.
if([b:SM1515]==OFF){
if([w:GD100]==1){
[w:GD100]=2;
}else{ 6
[w:GD100]=1;
}
CONNECTION TO
} DIRECT
Set the created script for each screen on the Screen tab.
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

HINT
When the MELSECNET/H network is connected to the redundant system only, SW56 (current control station) can
be set as the station number switching device.
In this case, even if the system switching occurs, the GOT always monitors the station number that is currently the
control station.
 Setting method (Ethernet connection)

System configuration example 2: Ethernet connection
Ethernet
Network No. 1
Station No. 3 GOT

(System A) CPU E71 CPU E71 (System B)
Connected module Network No. Station No.

Ethernet module of control system 1
Ethernet module of standby system 1 2
GOT connected to the Ethernet network 3
1. Set the station number switching device.

Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [Station No. Switching], and set the internal device GD100 as the
station number switching device.
Do not use a device of PLC CPU as a screen switching device. Since the device information is transferred by the
tracking transfer function of the redundant system, the status observation may be disabled.
Set here.

1
PROCEDURES FOR
Make the setting so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (GS231) from the station
PREPARATORY
monitoring specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation] turns ON.
MONITORING
(For Network No. 1 and Station No. 2, set "258"(0102H))
Condition 1 : GS231.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal.

Operation : GD100=258(0102H) Station No. is changed to 2.
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Operation : GD100=257(0101H) Station No. is changed to 1.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
POINT
Setting for the status observation function 5
For the status observation function, hexadecimals cannot be used.
BUS CONNECTION
To use the status observation function, set the N/W No. and the station No. of the PLC CPU in [Unsigned BIN].
(For the status observation function, set [Unsigned BIN] for [Storing Device])
Example:
When N/W No.: 1 and Station No.: 1 (0101H)
Set "257".
When N/W No.: 10 and Station No.: 10 (0A0AH) 6
Set "2570".
CONNECTION TO
3.
DIRECT
Create a monitor screen.

CPU

In the device setting (network setting) of each object, set Network No. 1 and Station No. 1 of the control system.
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4. On the screen 1, set the switch for writing the station No. 1 to the station number switching device.
After the GOT is started up, the station number switching device value of the GOT is "0".
For Ethernet connection, the monitor becomes abnormal when the station number switching device value is "0".
Therefore, set the switch for writing the station number to the station number switching device and the switch for
shifting to the monitor screen on the screen 1.
To make this setting, select [Object] [Switch] [Switch].
The following shows an example of setting GD100=257 (0101H: Network No. 1, Station No. 1) and base screen=2
to one switch.(Base screen 2 is the actually monitoring screen)
5. Validate the station number switching function.

On the Basic tab screen specified by selecting [Screen] [Property], select the item [Switch Station No.] to
validate the station number changing function.
Make this setting for each monitor screen.
However, do not make this setting on the screen 1 created in the item above.
Check here.

1
6. Change the station number switching device value in the script.
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
value.
• Screen script for Ethernet connection:

2
// If the host station is not a control station, the station number is switched to that of the other station.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
if([b:SM1515]==OFF){
if([w:GD100]==0x0101){ // Station No. 1 to 2
[w:GD100]=0x0102;
}else{ // Station No. 2 to 1
[w:GD100]=0x0101;
} 3
}
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
For the Ethernet connection, create a script so that the network No. and station number are set to the station
switching device.
For Network No. 1 and Station No. 2, create "[w:GD100]=0x0102".
Set the created script for each screen on the Screen tab. 4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4.10.2 Method for using the screen changing function
• As a feature of this function, monitor screens are created for each station number.
When the system switching occurs, the GOT can change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the
other monitor screen.
• To achieve this, the script of the GOT monitors the special relay SM1515 (Control system identification flag) of the
PLC CPU and stores the screen number corresponding to the latest station number of the control system into the
screen switching devices.
• Precautions:
There are the following 8 different screen switching devices.Set the screen switching devices for all screens to be
used.
(1) Base screen switching device
(2) Overlap window 1 switching device
(7) Superimpose window 1 switching device
(8) Superimpose window 2 switching device
 Setting method (For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection)

System configuration example 1: MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection
MELSECNET/H
(MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode)
Network No. 1
Station No. 3 GOT

(System A) CPU BR11 CPU BR11 (System B)

MELSECNET/H network module of control system 1
MELSECNET/H network module of standby system 2
1
GOT connected to MELSECNET/H network or MELSECNET/10
3
network
1. Set the screen switching device of the base screen.

Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device

1
PROCEDURES FOR
Set the status observation so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (SW70) of
PREPARATORY
MELSECNET/H turns ON in the project specified by choosing [Common] [Status Observation].
MONITORING
Operation : GD100=2 Screen No. is changed to 2.

2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM

5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

3. Set monitor screens.
• Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 1 on Screen No. 1 (1-1).
4. Change the screen switching device value in the script.

value.
Screen scripts for MELSECNET/H connection and MELSECNET/10 connection:

The same script can be used for MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection and Ethernet
connection.
// Script of Screen No. 1

// If Station 1 is not a control station, the screen is changed to that of Station 2.
if([1-1:b:SM1515]==OFF){
[w:GD100]=2;
}

if([1-2:b:SM1515]==OFF){
[w:GD100]=1;
}
Script screen of Screen No. 1 Script screen of Screen No. 2
HINT
When the MELSECNET/H network is connected to the redundant system only, SW56 (current control station) can
be set as the screen switching device.
In this case, even if the system switching occurs, the GOT always monitors the station number that is currently the
control station.

1
 Setting method (Ethernet connection)
PROCEDURES FOR
System configuration example 2: Ethernet connection
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Ethernet
Network No. 1
Station No. 3 GOT

(System A) CPU E71 CPU E71 (System B)
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Ethernet module of control system 1
Ethernet module of standby system 1 2
GOT connected to the Ethernet network 3
1. Set the screen switching device of the base screen. 3

Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Condition 1 : GS231.b0 (while ON)

Operation : GD100=2
When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal.
Screen No. is changed to 2.
5
BUS CONNECTION
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
3. Set monitor screens.

8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

4. Change the screen switching device value in the script.
value.
Screen script for Ethernet connection:
The same script can be used for MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection and Ethernet
connection.

if([1-1:b:SM1515]==OFF){
[w:GD100]=2;
}

if([1-2:b:SM1515]==OFF){
[w:GD100]=1;
}
Script screen of Screen No. 1 Script screen of Screen No. 2

5
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

BUS CONNECTION
DEVICE RANGE
5.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
5.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
4
5.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
HOW TO MONITOR
5.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32
REDUNTANT
5.4 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5-1
5. BUS CONNECTION
5.1 Connectable Model List

The following table shows the connectable models.
Communication
Series Model name Clock Refer to
type
R04CPU
R08CPU
R16CPU
R32CPU
R120CPU
R08PCPU
R16PCPU
R32PCPU
MELSEC iQ-R R120PCPU

Bus connection -
Series R04ENCPU
R08ENCPU
R16ENCPU
R32ENCPU
R120ENCPU
R08SFCPU
R16SFCPU
R32SFCPU
R120SFCPU
Motion controller R16MTCPU

CPU (MELSEC Bus connection -
iQ-R Series) R32MTCPU
C Controller
module
R12CCPU-V Bus connection -
(MELSEC iQ-R
Series)
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U

Bus connection -
Series FX5UC
5-2 5. BUS CONNECTION

Communication
1
PROCEDURES FOR
type
PREPARATORY
Q00JCPU*1
MONITORING
Q00CPU*2
Q01CPU*2
Q02CPU*2
2
Q02HCPU*2 Bus *3
5.2.1
THAT CAN BE SET

Q06HCPU*2 connection
DEVICE RANGE
Q12HCPU*2
Q25HCPU*2
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU 3
Q12PRHCPU (Main base)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
- -
Q12PRHCPU (Extension base)
Q00UJCPU*1
MELSEC-Q
Q00UCPU 4
(Q mode)*5 Q01UCPU
HOW TO MONITOR
Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
REDUNTANT
Q04UDHCPU
SYSTEM
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
5
BUS CONNECTION
Q03UDECPU Bus *3
connection 5.2.1
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU 6
Q100UDEHCPU
CONNECTION TO
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
DIRECT
Q26UDVCPU
CPU
Q12DCCPU-V*4
C Controller Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Bus
*3 7
module Q24DHCCPU-LS 5.2.1
connection
(Q Series)
COMPUTER LINK
Q26DHCCPU-LS
CONNECTION
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU - -

*1 When using the bus extension connector box, attach it to the extension base unit. (Connecting it to the main base unit is not
allowed.)
*2 For the multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later. 8
*3 Only GT115 -Q BDQ can be connected.
*4 Use a module with the upper five digits later than 12042.
*5 When a slim base is used, a bus connection cannot be established.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5. BUS CONNECTION 5-3

Communication
type
L02CPU
L06CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT
L02CPU-P
MELSEC-L - -
L06CPU-P
L26CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
L02SCPU-P
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A - -
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA Bus
Q3ACPU *1
5.2.2
(QnACPU) connection
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU*2
Q2ASCPU
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1 Bus *1
(QnASCPU) connection 5.2.3
Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A Bus *1
A3ACPUR21 5.2.2
(AnCPU) connection
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A A2SCPU Bus *1
(AnSCPU) connection 5.2.3
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU*3
A1SJCPU-S3*3
A1SJHCPU*3
A0J2HCPU Bus *1
MELSEC-A 5.2.4
A0J2HCPUP21 connection
*1 Only GT115 -Q BDA can be connected.
*2 Bus-connect the GOT on the last redundant extension base A68RB (version B or later) for the Q4ARCPU redundant system.
*3 When an extension base unit is connected, a bus connection cannot be established.

Series Model name Clock
Communication
Refer to
1
type
PROCEDURES FOR
A0J2HCPUR21 *1
Bus connection 5.2.4
PREPARATORY
A0J2HCPU-DC24
MONITORING
A2CCPU
A2CCPUP21
MELSEC-A A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3 2
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*3*4
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Q173CPU*3*4
Q172CPUN*3
Q173CPUN*3
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion
controller
Q172DCPU
Q173DCPU Bus connection *2
5.2.1
3
CPU Q172DCPU-S1
FOR MONITORING
(Q Series) Q173DCPU-S1
ACCESS RANGE
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*5
Q170MSCPU*7
Q170MSCPU-S1*7
MR-MQ100
A273UCPU
- - 4
A273UHCPU
HOW TO MONITOR
A273UHCPU-S3 Bus connection *1
5.2.5
A373UCPU
REDUNTANT
A373UCPU-S3
SYSTEM
A171SCPU*6
Motion
A171SCPU-S3*6
controller
A171SCPU-S3N*6
CPU
(A Series) A171SHCPU*6 5
*6 Bus connection *1
A171SHCPUN 5.2.6
BUS CONNECTION
A172SHCPU*6
A172SHCPUN*6
A173UHCPU*6
A173UHCPU-S1*6
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 - -
WS0-CPU3 6
MELSECNET/H QJ72LP25-25
Remote I/O QJ72LP25G - -
CONNECTION TO
station QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 - -
DIRECT
head module
CPU
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB9 - -
Ethernet
adapter module 7
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU Bus connection *2 5.2.1
COMPUTER LINK
CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU)
*2
CONNECTION
Robot controller CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU) Bus connection 5.2.1

CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU)
*1 Only GT115 -Q BDA can be connected.
*2 Only GT115 -Q BDQ can be connected.
*3 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed.
• SW6RN-SV13Q : 00E or later
• SW6RN-SV22Q : 00E or later 8
• SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later
*4 Use main modules with the following product numbers.
• Q172CPU: Product number K******* or later
CONNECTION
• Q173CPU: Product number J******* or later

ETHERNET
*5 Connect Q170MCPU to QC30B directly, or to the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B).

*6 When using an extension base, use the A168.
*7 Connect Q170MSCPU to QC30B directly, or to the extension base unit (Q5 B/Q6 B).

POINT
List of the main base or extension base available for the GOT bus connection
: The GOT bus connection is available. : The GOT bus connection is not available.
Main/Extension base Model GOT bus connection
Q3 B
Q3 DB (Multiple CPU high speed main base unit)
Main base Q3 BL (Large type base unit)
Q3 SB (Slim type main base unit)
Q38RB (Redundant power main base unit)
Q5 B (Model requiring no power supply module)
Q6 B (Model requiring a power supply module)
QA1S6 B (Small type QA base unit)
Q5 BL (Large type base unit, Model requiring no power supply module)
Extension base Q6 BL (Large type base unit, Model requiring a power supply module)
QA6 B (Large type QA base unit)
QA6ADP (QA conversion adapter module) + A5 B/A6 B
Q68RB (Redundant power extension base unit)
Q65WRB (Redundant extension base unit)

1
5.2 System Configuration
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
POINT
When "CONTROL BUS ERR" or "UNIT VERIFY ERR" occurs
It can be considered that noise due to a long bus connection cable causes a malfunction. 2
Check whether a signal line such as bus cable is placed near the equipment to operate. If the line is close to the
THAT CAN BE SET

equipment, make a distance of 100mm or more from the equipment.
DEVICE RANGE
5.2.1 Connecting to QCPU
 When one GOT is connected 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Bus extension Extension base
Main base unit connector box unit GOT
Communication driver
Bus(Q)
HOW TO MONITOR
Extension cable Connection cable
PLC GOT
REDUNTANT
Main base Extension base
SYSTEM
Bus Bus
Extension Connection cable Max. distance
Main extension *1 Extension extension Option device*4 Model
cable
base connector
box*2
base connector
box*2
5
GT15-75QBUSL
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-75QBUS2L
- - - - GT15-QC06B(0.6m)
GT15-QBUS Between main base and
GT15-QC12B(1.2m)
GT15-QBUS2 GOT: 13.2m
GT15-QC30B(3m)
Extension (Including the extension
GT15-QC50B(5m)
cable Extension cable length)
- - GT15-QC100B(10m) - (Built into GOT)
(13.2m or base
Main
less) 6
GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-75QBUSL
base A9GT GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-75QBUS2L
CONNECTION TO
- - -
-QCNB*3 GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QBUS
GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QBUS2 Between main base and
GT15-QC100B(10m) GOT: 37m
DIRECT
Extension GT15-QC150BS(15m) (Including the extension

CPU
cable Extension A9GT GT15-QC200BS(20m) cable length)

- - (Built into GOT)
(13.2m or base -QCNB GT15-QC250BS(25m)
less) GT15-QC300BS(30m) 7
GT15-QC350BS(35m)
*1 For the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-Q catalog (L(NA)08032).
COMPUTER LINK
*2 When installing the GOT 13.2m or more away from the main base unit, the bus extension
CONNECTION
connector box is required.

Attach the bus extension connector box to the extension connector of the base unit.
Also, connect the connection cable to the bus extension connector box.
When using no extension base unit: Attach it to the main base unit.
When using the extension base unit: Attach it to the extension base unit on the last stage.
*3 When using Q00JCPU or Q00UJCPU, attach the bus extension connector to the extension base unit. (Connecting it to the main
base unit is not allowed)
8
*4 When using the following functions, use GT15-QBUS(2). GT15-75QBUS(2)L cannot be used.
Used for remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function, operation panel function,
CONNECTION
external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function
ETHERNET
(when using a PictBridge compatible printer), sound output function, functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit,
Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function
However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface.

 When 2 to 5 GOTs are connected
GOT
Bus extension Extension base Intermediary
Main base unit 1st GOT (Terminating
connector box unit GOT station)
Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3)
PLC GOT (1st)*5
Main base Extension base

Extension Connection cable 1)
Option device
Bus extension cable Extension Bus extension Model
Main base *6*7
*1
connector box*2 base connector box*2
GT15-75QBUS2L
- - - -
GT15-QBUS2
GT15-QC06B(0.6m)
GT15-QC12B(1.2m)
GT15-QC30B(3m)
GT15-QC50B(5m)
GT15-QC100B(10m)
Extension
Extension GT15-75QBUS2L
- cable -
base GT15-QBUS2
(13.2m or less)
Main base
GT15-QC06B(0.6m)
GT15-75QBUS2L
A9GT-QCNB*3 - - - GT15-QC12B(1.2m)
GT15-QBUS2
GT15-QC30B(3m)
GT15-QC50B(5m)
GT15-QC100B(10m)
GT15-QC150BS(15m)
GT15-QC200BS(20m)
Extension GT15-QC250BS(25m)
Extension GT15-75QBUS2L
- cable A9GT-QCNB GT15-QC300BS(30m)
base GT15-QBUS2
(13.2m or less) GT15-QC350BS(35m)
*1 For the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-Q catalog (L(NA)08032).

*2 When installing the GOT 13.2m or more away from the main base unit, the bus extension
connector box is required.
Attach the bus extension connector box to the extension connector of the base unit.
When using no extension base unit: Attach it to the main base unit.
When using the extension base unit: Attach it to the extension base unit on the last stage.
Also, connect the connection cable to the bus extension connector box.
Set the bus extension connector box to the same Stage No. as that of the GOT unit.
For details on the Stage No. setting, refer to the following.
5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)
*3 When using Q00JCPU or Q00UJCPU, attach the bus extension connector to the extension base unit. (Connecting it to the main
base unit is not allowed)

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Bus(Q) 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT (intermediary)*4*5 GOT (terminal)*4*5
Connection cable 2)
Option device
*6*7
Model
Connection cable 3)
Option device
*6*7
Model
Max. distance
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-75QBUSL,
Between main base and GOT
GT15-75QBUS2L,
(1st): 13.2m
GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS,
GT15-QBUS2 GT15-QBUS2
Between main base and GOT
(terminal): 37m
- (Built into GOT)
4
GT15-75QBUSL, Between main base and GOT
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-75QBUS2L, (1st): 13.2m (Including the
GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QC06B(0.6m) GT15-QBUS, extension cable length)
GT15-75QBUS2L,
REDUNTANT
GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QC12B(1.2m) GT15-QBUS2
GT15-QBUS2
SYSTEM
GT15-QC30B(3m) GT15-QC30B(3m) Between main base and GOT
GT15-QC50B(5m) GT15-QC50B(5m) - (Built into GOT) (terminal): 37m (Including the
GT15-QC100B(10m) GT15-QC100B(10m) extension cable length)
GT15-QC150BS(15m)
GT15-QC200BS(20m)
GT15-QC150BS(15m)
GT15-QC200BS(20m) GT15-75QBUSL, 5
GT15-QC250BS(25m) GT15-QC250BS(25m) GT15-75QBUS2L,
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-QC300BS(30m) GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QC300BS(30m) GT15-QBUS, Between main base and GOT
GT15-QC350BS(35m) GT15-QBUS2 GT15-QC350BS(35m) GT15-QBUS2 (terminal): 37m
- (Built into GOT)
GT15-75QBUSL,
GT15-75QBUS2L, Between main base and GOT
GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS, (terminal): 6
GT15-QBUS2 GT15-QBUS2 37m (Including the extension
cable length)
CONNECTION TO
- (Built into GOT)
*4 When connecting 3 or more GOTs, the overall cable length is restricted.

DIRECT
5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOTs

CPU
*5 The connection of multiple GOTs

When connecting to multiple GOTs with GT 16, GT15 and GT11 mixed, use GT11 as a terminal.
*6 The bus connection unit 7
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-QBUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT)
GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT)
COMPUTER LINK
*7 When using the following functions, use GT15-QBUS(2). GT15-75QBUS(2)L cannot be used.
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

5 - 10 5. BUS CONNECTION
5.2.2 Connecting to QnACPU or AnCPU 1
PROCEDURES FOR
 When one GOT is connected
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Extension base Bus extension
Main base unit GOT
unit connector box
Communication driver 2
THAT CAN BE SET

Bus(A/QnA)
DEVICE RANGE
Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
PLC GOT
Bus
3
Extension connector Connection cable 2) Max. distance
Main Extension
FOR MONITORING
cable Connection cable 1) Option device Model
ACCESS RANGE
base base conversion
*1
box*2
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS Between main base and
- - - - GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-C50NB(5m)
GT15-ABUS2 GOT: 6.6m
4
- (Built into GOT)
HOW TO MONITOR
Main GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and
REDUNTANT
base GT15-75ABUS2L GOT: 36.6m
GT15-ABUS (Including between main
SYSTEM
GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-ABUS2 base and bus connector
GT15-AC12B(1.2m) A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
- - conversion box)
GT15-AC30B(3m) -CNB GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m)
GT15-AC50B(5m) *3
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and
bus connector conversion
5
BUS CONNECTION
box: 6.6m
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base and
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS GOT: 6.6m
- - GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-ABUS2 (Including the extension
GT15-C50NB(5m)
cable length)
- (Built into GOT)
Main Extension Extension GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and

6
base cable base GT15-75ABUS2L GOT: 36.6m
CONNECTION TO
GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-ABUS
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-AC12B(1.2m) A7GT GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and
GT15-AC30B(3m) -CNB bus connector conversion
DIRECT
GT15-AC50B(5m) box: 6.6m

- (Built into GOT)
CPU
(Including the extension

cable length)
*1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)08024). 7
*2 When installing the GOT 6.6m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required.
*3 When using GT15-C EXSS-1, follow the precautions below.
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS

*4 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used.
However, Ethernet download, gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface. 8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5. BUS CONNECTION 5 - 11
 When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected

Main base unit 1st GOT 2nd GOT 3rd GOT
unit connector box
Extension cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4)
PLC*5 GOT (1st)*3
Extension Extension Bus connector Connection cable 2)

Option device
Main base *1
Connection cable 1) *2
Model
cable base conversion box *6*7
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - - -
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-C50NB(5m)
Extension GT15-75ABUS2L
Extension cable - -
base GT15-ABUS2
Main base
GT15-75ABUS2L
- -
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-AC06B(0.6m)
GT15-AC12B(1.2m)
A7GT-CNB GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-AC30B(3m)
*4
Extension GT15-AC50B(5m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Extension cable
base GT15-ABUS2
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - - -
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
Main base GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-C50NB(5m)
Extension GT15-75ABUS2L
Extension cable - -
base GT15-ABUS2
*1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)08024).

*2 When installing the GOT 6.6m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required.
*3 When connecting to multiple GOTs with GT 16, GT15 and GT11 mixed, use GT11 as a terminal.
*4 When using GT15-C EXSS-1 or GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions.
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS

*5 The number of connectable GOTs is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules.
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Bus(A/QnA) 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT (2nd)*3*5 GOT (3rd)*3*5
Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4) Max. distance
Option device Option device
*6*7
Model
*6*7
Model
3
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and GOT(1st): 6.6m
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-ABUS2 Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m
- -
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base and GOT (2nd):
GT15-C300BS(30m) GT15-ABUS 36.6m
*4 GT15-ABUS2 (Including the extension cable length) 4
GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and bus connector
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-75ABUS2L conversion box: 6.6m
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
GT15-ABUS (Including the extension cable length)
REDUNTANT
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C30BS(3m)
SYSTEM
Between bus connector conversion box
GT15-C50BS(5m) - -
GT15-75ABUSL and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-75ABUS2L
*4 GT15-ABUS
GT15-ABUS2
Between main base and GOT (2nd):
36.6m
5
(Including the extension cable length)
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-ABUS2 GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-ABUS2 Between main base and GOT(1st): 6.6m
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) - (Built into GOT)
GT15-C50BS(5m)
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C50BS(5m)
Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m 6
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base and GOT (3rd): 36.6m
CONNECTION TO
*4 GT15-75ABUS2L *4 GT15-ABUS (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-ABUS2 GT15-ABUS2
- (Built into GOT)

DIRECT
CPU
*6 About the bus connection unit

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT)
*7
GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-ABUS2: Used for an intermediary GOT. (Can be used for a terminal GOT)
When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75ABUS(2)L cannot be used.
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION

8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5.2.3 Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU

Main base unit GOT
unit connector box
Bus(A/QnA)
PLC GOT
Bus
Extension Main
cable Connection cable 1) conversion Option device*4 Model
base base
*1 box
*2
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-ABUS Between main base
- -
GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-ABUS2 and GOT: 5m
GT15-A1SC50B(5m)
- (Built into GOT)
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-ABUS Between main base
- -
GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-ABUS2 and GOT: 30m
Main *3
- - - (Built into GOT)
base
GT15-75ABUSL Between main base

GT15-75ABUS2L and GOT: 35m
GT15-ABUS (Including between
GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-ABUS2 main base and bus
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) connector conversion
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) -CNB GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) box)
GT15-A1SC50NB(5m) *3
- (Built into GOT) Between main base
and bus connector
conversion box: 5m
PLC GOT 1
Bus
PROCEDURES FOR
Extension Main
PREPARATORY
cable Connection cable 1) conversion Option device*4 Model
MONITORING
base base
*1 box
*2
GT15-75ABUSL
Between extension
base and GOT: 6m
- -
GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
GT15-ABUS
GT15-ABUS2
(Including the 2
extension cable
GT15-A1SC50B(5m)
THAT CAN BE SET

- (Built into GOT) length)
DEVICE RANGE
GT15-75ABUSL
Between extension
base and GOT: 36m
GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-ABUS
- - (Including the
GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-ABUS2
extension cable
Extension Extension Main
3
*3
base cable base
GT15-75ABUSL Between extension
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-75ABUS2L base and GOT: 36m
GT15-ABUS
GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-ABUS2 Between extension
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) base and bus
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) -CNB GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) connector conversion
GT15-A1SC50NB(5m) *3 box: 6m
- (Built into GOT) (Including the
extension cable
4
length)
HOW TO MONITOR
*1 For details on the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)8024).
REDUNTANT
*2 When installing the GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required.
*3 When using GT15-C EXSS-1, connect as the following precautions.
SYSTEM
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS
external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function 5
BUS CONNECTION
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
 When two GOTs are connected

Main base unit 1st GOT 2nd GOT
unit connector box
Bus(A/QnA)
PLC*5 GOT (1st)*3

Option device
*1
Main base Connection cable 1) Model
base cable conversion box *6*7
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
- -
GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC50B(5m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - Main base - - GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-ABUS2
*4
GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m)
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-75ABUS2L
A7GT-CNB*2 GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) GT15-ABUS2
*4
GT15-A1SC50NB(5m)
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
- -
GT15-A1SC50B(5m)
Extension Extension GT15-75ABUS2L
Main base - - GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
base cable GT15-ABUS2
*4
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) GT15-ABUS2
*4
GT15-A1SC50NB(5m)

*2 When installing the 1st GOT 30m or more away from the main base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required.
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT (2nd)*3*5
Connection cable 3) Max. distance
Option device
*6*7
Model
3
GT15-75ABUSL
FOR MONITORING
Between main base and GOT(1st): 5m
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-ABUS
Between GOT (1st) and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 35m
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-75ABUS2L 4
Between main base and GOT (2nd): 30m
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C200BS(20m)
REDUNTANT
GT15-C300BS(30m) - (Built into GOT)
*4
SYSTEM
GT15-75ABUSL
Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 5m
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-ABUS
Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
5
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-75ABUSL
Between extension base and GOT (1st): 6m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-ABUS
GT15-ABUS2
- (Built into GOT) Between extension base and GOT (2nd): 36m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
6
CONNECTION TO
Between extension base and GOT (2nd): 36m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
DIRECT
GT15-C300BS(30m)
CPU
*4
GT15-75ABUSL
Extension base and bus connector conversion box: 6m (Including extension cable length)
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-ABUS
7
GT15-ABUS2
COMPUTER LINK
- (Built into GOT) Between extension base and GOT (2nd): 36m (Including the extension cable length)
CONNECTION
*6 About the bus connection unit

external I/O function, RGB display function, report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function 8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
 When three GOTs are connected
Extension base
unit
PLC*3 GOT (1st)*2

Option device
*1
Main base Connection cable 1) Model
base cable conversion box *5*6
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
- - Main base - -
GT15-A1SC50B(5m)
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
Extension Extension GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Main base - -
base cable GT15-A1SC30B(3m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC50B(5m)

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Bus(A/QnA) 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT (2nd)*2*3 GOT (3rd)*2*3
Option device Option device
*5*6
Model
*5*6
Model
3
GT15-75ABUSL
FOR MONITORING
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS Between main base and GOT(1st): 5m
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-ABUS2 Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C100BS(10m) Between main base and GOT (3rd): 35m
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
*4 *4
4
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-75ABUSL Between extension base and GOT (1st): 6m
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS
GT15-75ABUS2L
REDUNTANT
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-ABUS2 Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C100BS(10m)
SYSTEM
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m) Between extension base and GOT (3rd): 36m
- (Built into GOT)
*4 *4 (Including the extension cable length)
*4 When using GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions. 5

5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS
BUS CONNECTION
*5 The bus connection unit
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5.2.4 Connection to A0J2HCPU
Power supply
PLC GOT
module
Bus(A/QnA)
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
PLC GOT1000 series*1
Power supply Connection cable 2) Max. distance

Model name Connection cable 1) Option device*2 Model
module
GT15-75ABUSL
A0J2C03(0.3m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Between PLC and GOT: 6.6m
A0J2C06(0.55m) GT15-ABUS
A0J2HCPU A0J2-PW GT15-J2C10B(1m) Between power supply module and
A0J2C10(1m) GT15-ABUS2
GOT: 1m
A0J2C20(2m)
- (Built into GOT)
*1 The number of connectable GOTs is restricted depending on the number of intelligent function modules mounted to the
A0J2HCPU.

5.2.5 Connection to motion controller CPU 1
(A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3), A373UCPU(-S3))
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
Main base unit GOT
unit connector box
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Bus(A/QnA)
PLC GOT1000 Series

3
FOR MONITORING
Bus
ACCESS RANGE
Main Extension connector Connection cable 2) Option device Max. distance
Extension cable Connection cable 1) Model
base base conversion *3
box*1
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
- -
GT15-A370C12B-S1(1.2m) GT15-ABUS Between main base 4
GT15-A370C25B-S1(2.5m) GT15-ABUS2 and GOT: 2.5m
HOW TO MONITOR
-
(Built into GOT)
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Main GT15-75ABUS2L and GOT: 32.5m
- -
base GT15-ABUS (Including between
GT15-ABUS2 main base and bus
GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) A7GT
connector 5
conversion box)
GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) -CNB GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m)
BUS CONNECTION
*2 - Between main base
(Built into GOT) and bus connector
conversion box:
2.5m
GT15-75ABUSL
Between main base
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-ABUS and GOT: 6.6m 6
- - GT15-C30NB(3m) GT15-ABUS2 (Including the
GT15-C50NB(5m) extension cable
CONNECTION TO
- length)
(Built into GOT)

DIRECT
Main GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) Extension

GT15-75ABUS2L and GOT: 36.6m
CPU
base GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) base

GT15-ABUS
GT15-AC06B(0.6m) GT15-ABUS2 Between main base
GT15-AC12B(1.2m) A7GT
GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) and bus connector 7
GT15-AC30B(3m) -CNB GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) conversion box:
GT15-AC50B(5m) *2 6.6m
COMPUTER LINK
-
(Including the
CONNECTION
(Built into GOT)

extension cable
length)
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS 8

CONNECTION
ETHERNET


unit connector box
Bus(A/QnA)
PLC*4 GOT (1st)*2
Main Extension Bus connector Connection cable 2)

Extension cable Connection cable 1) Option device*5*6 Model
base base conversion box
GT15-A370C12B-S1(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
- -
GT15-A370C25B-S1(2.5m) GT15-ABUS2
Main
- -
base
GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) GT15-ABUS2
*3
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - GT15-C30NB(3m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50NB(5m)
Main GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) Extension

base GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) base
GT15-AC06B(0.6m)
GT15-AC12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-AC30B(3m) GT15-ABUS2
*3
GT15-AC50B(5m)
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT (2nd)*2*4
Option device*5*6 Model
3
GT15-75ABUSL
FOR MONITORING
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS Between main base and GOT(1st): 2.5m
GT15-C30BS(3m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50BS(5m)
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 32.5m
GT15-C300BS(30m)
*3 4
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 2.5m
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS
REDUNTANT
GT15-C30BS(3m)
GT15-ABUS2 Between bus connector conversion box and GOT (2nd): 30m
GT15-C50BS(5m)
SYSTEM
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m) - (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 32.5m
*3
5
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS Between main base and GOT (1st): 6.6m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C30BS(3m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50BS(5m)
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C300BS(30m)
*3
6
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
GT15-75ABUS2L Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 6.6m (Including extension cable
CONNECTION TO
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS length)
GT15-C30BS(3m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50BS(5m)
DIRECT
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
CPU
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 36.6m (Including the extension cable length)
*3
*5 The bus connection unit 7

COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
 When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected*2
Extension base
unit
PLC*2 GOT (1st)*1
Extension Connection Bus connector Connection cable 2)

Extension cable Main base Option device*4*5 Model
base cable 1) conversion box
GT15-A370C12B-S1(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
- - Main base - -
GT15-A370C25B-S1(2.5m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C12NB(1.2m)
Extension GT15-A370C12B(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Main base - - GT15-C30NB(3m)
base GT15-A370C25B(2.5m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50NB(5m)

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Bus(A/QnA) 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT (2nd)*2*3 GOT (3rd)*2*3
Option device*4*5 Model Option device*4*5 Model
3
GT15-75ABUSL
FOR MONITORING
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS Between main base and GOT(1st): 2.5m
GT15-75ABUS2L GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C50BS(5m) GT15-C50BS(5m) Between GOT (1st) and GOT (3rd): 30m
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C100BS(10m) Between main base and GOT (3rd): 32.5m
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
*3 *3
4
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and GOT(1st): 6.6m
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
GT15-ABUS2
SYSTEM
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m) Between main base and GOT (3rd): 36.6m
- (Built into GOT)
*3 When using GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions.

5
BUS CONNECTION
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS
Ethernet download, gateway function or MES interface function 6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5.2.6 Connecting to motion controller CPU (A171SCPU(-S3(N)), A171SHCPU(N),
A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU(-S1))

Main base unit GOT
unit connector box
Bus(A/QnA)
PLC GOT1000 Series
Bus
Main Extension Extension connector Connection cable 2) Max. distance
Connection cable 1) Option device*5 Model
base cable*1 base*2 conversion
box
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-ABUS Between main base
- - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS2 and GOT: 3m
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
- (Built into GOT)
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-ABUS Between main base
- -
GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-ABUS2 and GOT: 30m
Main *4
- - - (Built into GOT)
base

GT15-75ABUS2L and GOT: 33m
GT15-ABUS (Including between
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-ABUS2 main base and bus
A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) connector
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m)
-CNB*3 GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) conversion box)
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m)
*4
- (Built into GOT) Between main base
and bus connector
conversion box: 3m
PLC GOT1000 Series 1
Bus
PROCEDURES FOR
Main Extension Extension connector Connection cable 2) Max. distance
Connection cable 1) Option device*5 Model
PREPARATORY
base cable*1 base*2 conversion
MONITORING
box
GT15-75ABUSL
Between extension
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m) base and GOT: 3m
GT15-ABUS
- - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
GT15-ABUS2
(Including the
extension cable 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m) GT15-75ABUS2L base and GOT:
GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) GT15-ABUS 33m
- -
GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m) GT15-ABUS2 (Including the
*4 extension cable
Main Extension Extension - (Built into GOT)
base cable base
length)
3
GT15-75ABUS2L base and GOT:
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-ABUS 33m
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) Between extension
A7GT GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) *3
base and bus
-CNB GT15-C300EXSS-1(30m)
GT15-A1SC30NB(3m) connector
*4
- (Built into GOT) conversion box: 3m
(Including the
extension cable
4
length)
HOW TO MONITOR
*1 For details on the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-A/QnA catalog (L(NA)8024).
REDUNTANT
*2 Use the A168B for the extension base unit.
SYSTEM
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS

5
BUS CONNECTION
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

unit connector box
Bus(A/QnA)
PLC*5 GOT (1st)*4
Extension Extension Connection cable 2)

Bus connector
Main base Connection cable 1) Option device*7*8 Model
cable*1 base*2 conversion box
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
Main base - - GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)

GT15-75ABUS2L
- - GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-ABUS2
*5
GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) A7GT-CNB*3 GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
- - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
Extension Extension
Main base GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
cable base GT15-75ABUS2L
- - GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-ABUS2
*5
GT15-A1SC05NB(0.45m) GT15-C100EXSS-1(10m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-A1SC07NB(0.7m) A7GT-CNB*3 GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m)
GT15-ABUS2

5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT (2nd)*4*6
Option device*7*8 Model
3
FOR MONITORING
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
GT15-C300BS(30m)
*5
GT15-75ABUSL
4
GT15-75ABUS2L
HOW TO MONITOR
GT15-ABUS
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-ABUS2
REDUNTANT
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
SYSTEM
GT15-C30BS(3m) - (Built into GOT)
GT15-C50BS(5m)
Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 3m
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-C200BS(20m)
*5 GT15-ABUS
5
GT15-ABUS2
BUS CONNECTION
GT15-C12BS(1.2m) GT15-75ABUS2L
Between main base and GOT (1st): 3m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C100BS(10m)
GT15-C200BS(20m)
6
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m (Including the extension cable length)
GT15-C300BS(30m)
CONNECTION TO
*5
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
DIRECT
GT15-ABUS
CPU
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C12BS(1.2m)
GT15-C30BS(3m) - (Built into GOT) 7
GT15-C50BS(5m)
Between main base and bus connector conversion box: 3m (Including extension cable length)
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
*5 GT15-ABUS
GT15-ABUS2
- (Built into GOT) Between main base and GOT (2nd): 33m (Including the extension cable length)

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a terminal GOT. (Not available for an intermediary GOT) 8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
 When 2 to 3 GOTs are connected*4
Extension base
unit
PLC*3 GOT (1st)*3
Extension Extension Connection cable 2)

Bus connector
Main base *1 *2
Connection cable 1) Option device*6*7 Model
cable base conversion box
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
GT15-75ABUS2L
Main base - - - - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)
GT15-A1SC07B(0.7m)
Extension Extension GT15-75ABUS2L
Main base - - GT15-A1SC12B(1.2m)
cable base GT15-ABUS2
GT15-A1SC30B(3m)

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Bus(A/QnA) 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT (2nd)*3*4 GOT (3rd)*3*4
Option device*6*7 Model Option device*6*7 Model
3
GT15-75ABUSL
FOR MONITORING
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-C30BS(3m) GT15-ABUS Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-C200BS(20m) GT15-C200BS(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
*5 *5
4
GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-C07BS(0.7m) GT15-75ABUSL Between main base and GOT(1st): 3m
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
GT15-ABUS2
SYSTEM
GT15-C100BS(10m) GT15-C100BS(10m)
- (Built into GOT)
*5 When using GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions.

5
BUS CONNECTION
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5.3 GOT Side Settings
5.3.1 Setting communication
5.3.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings) (1) Bus(Q)
Set the channel of the connected equipment.
2.
Item Description Range
3. Number of
Stages
(Default: 1) 1 to 7
Slot No. (Default: 0) 0 to 9

Set the monitor speed of the GOT.
High*1/Normal/
4. Monitor Speed This setting is not valid in all systems.
(Default: Normal) Low*2
Set the time period for a

Timeout Time
communication to time out. 12 to 90
(Sec.)
(Default: 12)
Click! *1 This range is effective when collecting a large amount of
data (such as logging and recipe function) on other than the
monitor screen.
However, the range may affect the sequence scan time
when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/
Q00/Q01CPU.
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time,
do not set [High].
menu. (This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above.)
*2 Set this range if you want to avoid the influence on the
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the sequence scan time further than the [Normal] setting when
connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/Q00/
channel to be used from the list menu. Q01CPU.
However, the monitor speed may be reduced.
3. Set the following items.
(2) Bus(A/QnA)
• Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
• Controller Type: Set the option according to the
Controller Type to be connected.
• I/F: Interface to be used
• Driver: Set either of the following option according
to the Controller Type to be connected.
BUS (Q)
BUS (A/QnA) Item Description Range
Number of
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Stages
(Default: 1) 1 to 7
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Slot No. (Default: 0) 0 to 7
Make the settings according to the usage Set the time period for a
Timeout Time
environment. (Sec.)
communication to time out. 3 to 90
(Default: 3)
POINT
The settings of connecting equipment can be
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
1
 Setting Stage No. and Slot No.
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Communication interface setting by Utility POINT
The communication interface setting can be changed
on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing Before setting Stage No. and Slot No.
[Communication Settings] of project data. The PLC CPU recognizes the GOT as follows.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. • QCPU (Q mode) 2
GT User's Manual : Intelligent function module of 16 I/O points
(2) Precedence in communication settings • Other than QCPU (Q mode)
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the : Intelligent function module of 32 I/O points
Utility, the latest setting is effective. At the [Detail setting], assign the GOT to an empty I/O
(3) When changing Stage No. and Slot No. slot on the PLC CPU.
Change these settings with the PLC CPU turned
OFF, and then reapply the power to the PLC CPU (1) When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)
and GOT. Set an additional stage (16 points 10 slots) for GOT 3
Failure to do so may generate a system alarm connection, and assign a GOT to one of the I/O slots.
(No.487).
FOR MONITORING
(The GOT cannot be assigned to empty slots of the
ACCESS RANGE
main base unit or extension base unit.)
Main base unit

HINT Q312B
Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the

controller 4
Empty
Empty
By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the
HOW TO MONITOR
portion of multiple connection of the controller. For
example, faulty station that has communication
REDUNTANT
timeout can be cut from the system.
SYSTEM
Disconnect the
Extension base unit
faulty station
Q68B
Extension
stage 1
5
BUS CONNECTION
Empty
Empty
Stage No. setting

For details of the setting contents of GOT internal connector
device, refer to the following manual. 6

CONNECTION TO
Stage No. :2 Stage No. :2 Stage No. :2
(Fundamentals) Slot No. :0 Slot No. :1 Slot No. :2
DIRECT
CPU
POINT 7
COMPUTER LINK
When using the bus extension connector box

CONNECTION
Set the Stage No. switch on the bus extension

connector box to the same Stage No. as the GOT.
For setting details, refer to the following manual:
A9GT-QCNB Bus Extension Connector Box
User's Manual 8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
POINT HINT
When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q Series) Setting unused I/O slots to empty (0 points) (only when
In the [Base Setting] on MT Developer, set "10" to the connecting to QCPU (Q mode))
number of slots for the extension base used for GOT Setting unused I/O slots as empty slots (0 points) from
connection. "PC parameters" "I/O assignments" of GX Developer
Example: When setting "2" to Stage No. and "0" to Slot allows you to use I/O numbers of "16 points number
No. in the communication interface settings, of empty slots" for other purposes.
For details on I/O assignment settings, refer to the
set "10" to [2nd Stage].
following manual:
QnU User's Manual (Function Explanation,
Program Fundamentals)
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual
(Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
Example: I/O assignment (when 16 points are assigned
to each of all modules installed with the PLC
CPU)
Main base unit
Q35B
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 · · · · Slot No.
X00 to X0F
X10 to X1F
X20 to X2F
X30 to X3F
X40 to X4F
Extension base unit
Q68B
Extension
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 stage 1
XC0 to XCF
XA0 to XAF
XB0 to XBF
X50 to X5F
X60 to X6F
X70 to X7F
X80 to X8F
X90 to X9F
Q65B
Extension
13 14 15 16 17 stage 2
X100 to X10F
X110 to X11F
XD0 to XDF
XE0 to XEF
XF0 to XFF
Stage No. setting

connector
1 2 3 4 5
Schematic image of Stage No. for GOT connection

viewed from PLC CPU (16 points x 10 slots occupied)
Extension
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 stage 3
X1A0 to X1AF
X1B0 to X1BF
X120 to X12F
X130 to X13F
X140 to X14F
X150 to X15F
X160 to X16F
X170 to X17F
X180 to X18F
X190 to X19F
1 2 3 4 5
Set Empty (0 points)
to unused I/O slots.
(2) Other than QCPU (Q mode)
1
PROCEDURES FOR
Assign the GOT to an empty I/O slot on the extension
base unit.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
When there is no extension base unit or no empty I/O
slots are left on an extension base unit, set an
additional stage, and assign the GOT to one of the I/O
slots.
(Assigning the GOT to an empty slot on the main base
unit is not allowed.)
(a) When there is an empty I/O slot on the extension
2
base unit
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Main base unit
A1S35B
Empty
Empty
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Extension base unit
A1S65B
0 1 · · · · Slot No.
Empty
Empty
Empty
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Slot No. :2 Slot No. :3 Slot No. :4
5
BUS CONNECTION
(b) When there are no empty I/O slots on the
extension base unit
Main base unit
A1S35B
6
Empty
Empty
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
Extension base unit
A1S65B 7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
Slot No. :0 Slot No. :1 Slot No. :2
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5.4 Precautions
5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, (b) When using GT15-C BS
Follow the GOT side grounding steps in (a) above
GT15-C [ ] BS for both GOTs.
(1) Composition of GT15-C EXSS-1

It is composed of GT15-EXCNB (0.5m) and GT15-
5.4.2 Turning the GOT ON
C BS (10 to 30m).
Calculate the cable length based on GT15-C100EXSS- (1) System configuration
1(10m), GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) and GT15- The PLC CPU remains in the reset status until the GOT
C300EXSS-1(30m). is started.
Therefore, no sequence program will run until then.
(2) GT15-C EXSS-1 connector The system configuration, in which the GOT is turned
Connect the connectors as follows: on from a sequence program, is not available.
GT15-EXCNB PLC CPU side
GT15-C BS GOT side (2) Time taken until the PLC runs after power-on of the
GOT
PLC side GOT side The following time is taken from when the GOT is
powered on until when the PLC runs.
• QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU
(GT15-EXCNB) (GT15-C□BS) (Q series): 10 seconds or more
• MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more
(3) Grounding When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system
(a) When using GT15-C EXSS-1 alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the
GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
PLC
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
Manual
FG (3) Power-up sequence for connection of 3 GOTs or
LG
N more (when connecting QCPU (Q mode))
L
5.4.10 (1)Restrictions in overall cable length to
2SQ cables to
FG terminals, No. of GOTs
28cm or less
Not connected (4) Power-up sequence for connection of the
(GT15-C□BS)
Q4ARCPU redundant system
5.4.14 (2)Power-On sequence for GOT and
(GT15-EXCNB) Q4ARCPU redundant system
GOT
(5) Power-up sequence for cases other than (3) and (4)
OUT IN
The GOT and PLC can both be started up whichever of
2SQ cables to these devices is turned ON first. (There is no specific
FG terminals,
L N LG FG sequence in which they are powered ON)
28cm or less
Note, however, that operation is as follows when the
GOT is turned ON followed by the PLC:
When the PLC power is OFF with the GOT turned ON,
the system alarm (No.402: timeout error) is generated.
1. Connect the LG and FG terminals of the
Upon power-on of the PLC CPU, the GOT
terminal block on the GOT unit power and
ground them with a cable. automatically starts monitoring.
Use System Information to reset the alarm.
2. Use the GT15-C BS's FG cable of 28cm For the System Information, refer to the following
or less. manual:
3. Do not connect the GT15-EXCNB's FG GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
ground cable. Manual
4. Connect the GT15-C BS's FG cable on
the GOT side to FG of the GOT unit power's
terminal block.
5. Connect the GT15-C BS's FG cable on
the PLC side to FG of the PLC's power
supply module.
6. Connect the LG and FG terminals of the
terminal block on the PLC and ground them
with a cable.
5.4 Precautions
5.4.3 Powering OFF the GOT, 5.4.5 Powering OFF or resetting the 1
reapplying the power (OFF to PLC
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
ON)
MONITORING
(1) When turning OFF or resetting the PLC during
(1) Precautions for reapplying the power to the GOT monitoring
When turning OFF or resetting the PLC during
(OFF to ON)
monitoring, the system alarm (No.402: timeout error) is
Do not power-cycle the GOT (OFF to ON) while the
PLC is ON.
generated. 2
When the PLC CPU is restored, the GOT automatically
Before doing so, be sure to turn off the PLC first.
THAT CAN BE SET

resumes monitoring.
DEVICE RANGE
Use System Information to reset the alarm.
For the System Information, refer to the following
HINT manual:
Operations causing automatic reboot of the GOT1000 GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
Series Manual
Since the GOT1000 Series is automatically rebooted
3
(2) When turning OFF or resetting the PLC CPU before
in the following cases, the power does not need to be display of the user creation screen
FOR MONITORING
reapplied to the GOT (OFF to ON).
ACCESS RANGE
When the PLC CPU is turned OFF or reset before the
• When an OS is written from GT Designer3 or a CF user creation screen is displayed on the GOT,
card subsequent communications may be no longer
• When utility settings have been changed possible.
In such a case, reapply the power to the PLC CPU and
(2) When turning OFF the GOT before display of the
user creation screen
GOT.
4
(3) Precautions for connection of 3 GOTs or more (when
When the GOT is turned OFF before the user creation
HOW TO MONITOR
connecting QCPU (Q mode))
screen is displayed on the GOT, subsequent
5.4.10 (1)Restrictions in overall cable length to
REDUNTANT
communications may be no longer possible.
In such a case, reapply the power to the PLC CPU and No. of GOTs
SYSTEM
GOT.
(3) Precautions for connection of 3 GOTs or more (when 5.4.6 Position of the GOT
connecting QCPU (Q mode)) 5
5.4.10 (1)Restrictions in overall cable length to Always connect the GOT to the last base unit.
BUS CONNECTION
No. of GOTs Connecting a GOT between base units is not allowed.
5.4.4 Reset switch on GOT
When bus connection is used, the reset switch on the GOT

does not function. 6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
5.4.7 When the GOT is bus-
connected to a PLC CPU
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
without the communication

driver written
When the GOT is bus-connected to a PLC CPU without the
standard monitor OS and the communication driver for the 8
bus connection being written onto the GOT, the PLC CPU
is reset. (GX Developer cannot communicate with the PLC
CPU)
CONNECTION
In this case, disconnecting the bus connection cable from

ETHERNET
the GOT will cancel the reset status of the PLC CPU.
5.4 Precautions
5.4.8 When designing the system (3) When using a Q00J/Q00UJ/Q00/Q00U/Q01/Q01U/
Q02UCPU
When the GOT is OFF, the following currents are supplied When a GOT is bus-connected to a Q00JCPU or
to the GOT from the PLC CPU side (the power supply Q00UJCPU, number of extension stages including the
module on the main base unit).(The GOT does not operate GOT must be 2 or less.
when it is OFF.) When a GOT is bus-connected to a Q00CPU,
Design the system so that the 5V DC current consumption Q00UCPU, Q01CPU, Q01UCPU or Q02UCPU,
of the modules on the main base unit and the total current number of extension stages including the GOT must be
consumption of the GOTs will not exceed the rated output 4 or less.
current of 5V DC of the power supply module in use.
Main base unit
Total current Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU
When connecting to No. of GOTs
consumption
5 2200mA
4 1760mA
When connecting to
3 1320mA
QCPU (Q mode) Extension base unit Extension
2 880mA stage 1
1 440mA
3 360mA
Other than QCPU (Q mode) 2 240mA
1 120mA
Stage No. setting
connector
GOT
5.4.9 When assigning GOT I/O Stage No. :2
signals
Do not use the I/O signals assigned to the PLC CPU in

sequence programs, as these signals are used by the GOT
Main base unit
system.
Q00CPU, Q00UCPU, Q01CPU,
When these signals are used, GOT functions cannot be Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU
assured.
5.4.10 When connecting to a QCPU

(Q mode) Extension base unit Extension
stage 1
(1) Restrictions in overall cable length to No. of GOTs

The following restrictions apply when 3 of more GOTs
are connected: Extension
stage 2
Number Overall Cable Overall Cable
Restriction Restriction
of GOTs Length Length
1
(No restrictions)
2
Extension
Less than Use the same stage 3
3 25 to 37m
25m power supply for
Less than the PLC and all
(No
4 20 to 37m GOTs, and turn
20m restrictions)
these devices
Less than ON and OFF
5 15 to 37m
15m simultaneously. Stage No. setting
connector
GOT
(2) When using a Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU Stage No. :4
The bus extension connector box can be connected
only to the extension base unit.
(Connecting it to the main base unit is not allowed)
Q00JCPU,
Q00UJCPU
5.4 Precautions
(4) In the case of CPUs other than (2) (3) above
1
(4) When using the QA1S6 B extension base unit
PROCEDURES FOR
A GOT is physically connected to the last of all Even if the max. number of stages are used with no
extension base units. In the Stage No. setting, however, empty I/O slots, when there is a free space of 32 I/O
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
assign the GOT as a stage next to the last Q B type points or more, a GOT can be connected under the
extension base unit. following communication interface setting.
Assign the QA1S6 B type extension base unit as a For the communication interface setting, refer to the
stage next to the GOT. following.
Connection method Stage No.

5.3.1 Setting communication interface 2
(Communication settings)
Q38B
THAT CAN BE SET

Main base unit Communication interface
DEVICE RANGE
Max.
When connecting to stage setting
No. Stage No. Slot No.
A1 CPU/A2USCPU(-S1)
Q68B 1 2 0
/QnAS(H)CPU(-S1)
Extension base unit
A2 CPU/Q2ACPU 3
7
4 0
3
A3 CPU/A4 CPU
FOR MONITORING
Q3ACPU/Q4ACPU 7 Cannot be used
ACCESS RANGE
QA1S68B A0J2HCPU 1
Extension base unit
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
5.4.11 When connecting to a
SYSTEM
QnA(S)CPU or An(S)CPU type
(1) When connecting with a QnASCPU type and an 5

AnSCPU type
BUS CONNECTION
A GOT can be connected to an extension connector on
only one side of the main base unit.
(Concurrently connecting GOTs to extension
connectors on both sides is not allowed)
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
(2) In the case of Q4A(R)CPU, Q3ACPU, A3 CPU, 7

A4UCPU
Empty I/O slots are required within the max. number of
COMPUTER LINK
extension stages.
CONNECTION
(3) For A0J2HCPU

Assign the GOT to the I/O slots 0 to 3 of extension
stage 1.
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
5.4 Precautions
5.4.12 When connecting multiple 5.4.13 When using a PLC CPU in the
GOTs direct mode
(1) System including different GOT series Note that when the I/O control mode of the PLC CPU is the
The GOT1000 series can be connected with GOT-A900 direct mode, and if the 1st GOT is connected to the main or
series in a system. extension base unit with a 5m extension cable (GT15-
When using them together, refer to the following AC50B, GT15-A1SC50NB), the input X of the empty I/O
Technical News. slot cannot be used.
Precautions when Replacing GOT-A900 Series No restrictions apply when the I/O control mode is the
with GOT1000 Series (GOT-A-0009) refresh mode.
The GOT1000 series cannot be used with GOTs other On PLC CPUs whose I/O control mode can be selected by
than GOT-A900 series in a system. a switch, set the I/O control mode to the refresh mode
before use.
GOT1000 GOT-A900 GOT800
POINT
In the cases where input X of an empty I/O slot is used
(1) When input X is assigned on the MELSECNET/10
network
(2) Restrictions on No. of GOTs
The number of connectable GOTs is restricted (2) When input X of an empty I/O slot is turned ON/
according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent OFF by the computer link module
function modules. (3) When input X of the I/O slot is turned ON/OFF by
the touch switch function (Bit SET/RST/Alternate/
Total number of Momentary) of GOT
Number of
connectable GOTs
When connecting to connectable
and intelligent
GOTs
function modules*1
5 GOTs
QCPU(Q mode),
Up to 5 + 6 intelligent
motion controller CPU (Q Series)
function modules*2
Not
QCPU (A mode) ―――――
connectable
QnACPU Up to 3 6 in total
AnUCPU,
AnACPU, Up to 3 6 in total
A2US(H)CPU
AnNCPU,
ACPU AnS(H)CPU, Up to 2 2 in total
A1SJ(H)CPU
A0J2HCPU Up to 1 2 in total
Not
A1FXCPU ―――――
connectable
A273UCPU,
Motion A273UHCPU(-S3),
Up to 3 6 in total
controller A373UCPU(-S3),
CPU A173UHCPU(-S1)
(A Series) A171SHCPUN,
Up to 2 2 in total
A172SHCPUN
*1 Indicates the following models:
AD51(S3), AD51H(S3), AD51FD(S3), AD57G(S3),
AJ71C21(S1), AJ71C22(S1), AJ71C23, AJ71C24(S3/S6/
S8), AJ71UC24, AJ71E71(-S3), AJ71E71N-B2/B5/T/B5T,
AJ71E71N3-T, AJ61BT11 (in intelligent mode only),
A1SJ71C24(-R2/PRF/R4),
A1SJ71UC24(-R2/PRF/R4),
A1SJ71E71-B2/B5(-S3),
A1SJ71E71N-B2/B5/T/B5T, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SD51S,
A1SJ61BT11 (in intelligent mode only)
*2 Only the A1SD51S can be connected to the QCPU (Q
Mode).
5.4 Precautions
5.4.14 When connecting to a 5.4.15 When monitoring the 1
Q4ARCPU redundant system Q170MCPU
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) When the GOT is bus-connected to a Q4ARCPU Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the
redundant system device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2).
Connect the GOT to the last redundant extension base
When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the
unit (A68RB) of the Q4ARCPU redundant system.
PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored.
For the redundant extension base units, use version B
When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0" to
2
or later.
The version can be confirmed in the DATE field of the "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
THAT CAN BE SET

cannot be executed.
DEVICE RANGE
rating plate.
For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual.
Manual
Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Caution
Version of redundant extension base unit
Enlarged view of rating plate

5
5.4.16 Troubleshooting
BUS CONNECTION
POINT For the troubleshooting, refer to the User's Manual for the
GOT you are using.
Precautions for Q4ARCPU redundant system
configurations
The GOT does not operate normally in the following 6
system configurations.
CONNECTION TO
(1) When the GOT is bus connected to the bus
switching module (A6RAF) on a redundant main
base unit (A32RB/A33RB)
DIRECT
(2) When the GOT is bus connected to a version-A

CPU
redundant main base unit (A68RB)
(2) Power-On sequence for GOT and Q4ARCPU

7
redundant system
COMPUTER LINK
Apply the power to the GOT and Q4ARCPU redundant

CONNECTION
system in the following sequence.
1. Turn ON the GOT.
2. After the monitor screen is displayed on the GOT, turn

ON the Q4ARCPU redundant system. 8
At this time, a timeout is displayed on the system
alarm. Use System Information to reset the alarm.
For the system alarm, refer to the following manual:
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

Manual
5.4 Precautions
5.4 Precautions
6
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
DEVICE RANGE
6.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
6.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7 4
HOW TO MONITOR
6.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 27
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
6.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 33
6.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 34 5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
6-1
Communication
type
R04CPU
R08CPU
R16CPU
R32CPU
R120CPU
R08PCPU
R16PCPU
R32PCPU
MELSEC iQ-R R120PCPU RS-232

-
Series R04ENCPU RS-422
R08ENCPU
R16ENCPU
R32ENCPU
R120ENCPU
R08SFCPU
R16SFCPU
R32SFCPU
R120SFCPU

RS-232
CPU (MELSEC -
R32MTCPU RS-422
iQ-R Series)
C Controller
module RS-232
R12CCPU-V -
(MELSEC iQ-R RS-422
Series)
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U RS-232

-
Series FX5UC RS-422
6-2 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU

Communication
1
PROCEDURES FOR
type
PREPARATORY
Q00JCPU
MONITORING
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
RS-232
Q02CPU*1
RS-422 2
Q02HCPU*1
Q06HCPU*1
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Q12HCPU*1 6.2.1
Q25HCPU*1
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
RS-232
RS-422
*3 *3
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Q12PRHCPU
(Extension base)
- *3 *3 -
Q25PRHCPU
(Extension base)
MELSEC-Q
Q00UJCPU 4
(Q mode) Q00UCPU
HOW TO MONITOR
Q01UCPU
Q02UCPU
REDUNTANT
Q03UDCPU
RS-232
SYSTEM
Q04UDHCPU RS-422 6.2.1
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU 5
Q20UDHCPU
BUS CONNECTION
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
6
RS-232 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
Q50UDEHCPU 6.2.1
CONNECTION TO
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
DIRECT
Q06UDVCPU
CPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
Q12DCCPU-V*4
7
C Controller Q24DHCCPU-V/VG *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
module RS-232
COMPUTER LINK
Q24DHCCPU-LS 6.2.1
(Q Series)
CONNECTION
Q26DHCCPU-LS *2 *2 *2 *2

*1
*2
When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later.
Access via the (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system.
8
*3 Exclude the GT10 from the multiple CPU system configuration.
*4 Use a module with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6-3

Communication
type
L02CPU*1
L06CPU*1
L26CPU*1
L26CPU-BT*1
L02CPU-P*1 RS-232
MELSEC-L 6.2.2
RS-422
L06CPU-P*1
L26CPU-P*1
L26CPU-PBT*1
L02SCPU
L02SCPU-P
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q RS-232
Q02HCPU-A 6.2.1
(A mode) RS-422
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA RS-422
Q3ACPU 6.2.3
(QnACPU)*3 Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU RS-422
Q2ASCPU
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1
RS-422 6.2.3
(QnASCPU)*3 Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
A3ACPUR21
MELSEC-A
A1NCPU*2 RS-422 6.2.4
(AnCPU)
A1NCPUP21*2
A1NCPUR21*2
A2NCPU*2
A2NCPUP21*2
A2NCPUR21*2
A2NCPU-S1*2
A2NCPUP21-S1*2
A2NCPUR21-S1*2
A3NCPU*2
A3NCPUP21*2
A3NCPUR21*2
MELSEC-A
A2USCPU RS-422 6.2.4
(AnSCPU)
*1 When connecting in direct CPU connection, the adapter L6ADP-R2 or L6ADP-R4 is required.
When using L6ADP-R4, use an LCPU whose upper five digits are "15102" or later.
*2 When monitoring AnNCPU or A2SCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU.
• AnNCPU(S1) with link: Version L or later, AnNCPU(S1) without link: Version H or later
• A2SCPU: Version H or later
*3 GT10 can be connected to CPUs of the following HW versions or later.
PLC type HW/SW Version PLC type HW/SW Version
Q2ACPU DA Q2ASCPU AL
Q2ACPU-S1 DA Q2ASCPU-S1 AL
Q3ACPU DA Q2ASHCPU BL
Q4ACPU EA Q2ASHCPU-S1 BL
Q4ARCPU AL - -

Communication
1
type
PROCEDURES FOR
A2USCPU-S1
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A A2SCPU*1
2
RS-422 6.2.4
(AnSCPU) A2SCPU-S1*1
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU*1
3
FOR MONITORING
A0J2HCPUP21*1
ACCESS RANGE
RS-422 6.2.4
A0J2HCPUR21*1
A0J2HCPU-DC24*1
A2CCPU*1
MELSEC-A
A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21 4
A2CCPUC24 RS-422 6.2.4
HOW TO MONITOR
A2CCPUC24-PRF
REDUNTANT
A2CJCPU-S3
SYSTEM
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*2*3
Q173CPU*2*3 RS-232
RS-422 6.2.1 5
Q172CPUN*2
BUS CONNECTION
Q173CPUN*2
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Q172DCPU
Motion
Q173DCPU
controller RS-232 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4
CPU (Q Series) Q172DCPU-S1
6.2.1
6
Q173DCPU-S1
CONNECTION TO
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU
DIRECT
Q170MSCPU RS-232 6.2.8

CPU
Q170MSCPU-S1
MR-MQ100 RS-422 6.2.8 7

COMPUTER LINK
*1 When monitoring A0J2HCPU, A2CCPU or A2SCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU.
CONNECTION
• A0J2HCPU (with/without link): Version E or later

• A0J2HCPU-DC24: Version B or later
• A2CCPU, A2SCPU: Version H or later
8
CONNECTION

ETHERNET
*4 Access via QCPU (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system.

Communication
type
A273UCPU RS-422
A273UHCPU
RS-422
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU RS-422
Motion
A171SCPU-S3
controller 6.2.4
CPU (A Series) A171SCPU-S3N
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
RS-422
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 RS-232 6.2.7
WS0-CPU3
MELSECNET/ QJ72LP25-25
H QJ72LP25G *1
RS-232 6.2.1
Remote I/O
station QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
head module
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU RS-232 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2

6.2.1
CRnQ-700
Robot (Q172DRCPU) *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
RS-232 6.2.1
controller CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU)
CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU)
FX0 RS-422 *4
FX0S
RS-422
FX0N
FX1 RS-422 *4
FX2
*3 RS-422 *4
FX2C
FX1S
FX1N RS-232
FX2N RS-422
MELSEC-FX 6.2.6
FX1NC
*3
RS-232
FX2NC
RS-422
FX3S
FX3G
FX3GC RS-232
FX3GE RS-422
FX3U
FX3UC
*1 GT11 can not access the master station on MELSECNET/H network system. GT11 can access only the connected host station
(remote I/O station).
*2 Access via QCPU (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system.
*3 It is available by installing the real time clock function board or the EEPROM memory with the real time clock function.
*4 Cannot be connected to products with input voltage 5V.

6.2 System Configuration 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
Serial (MELSEC)
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
RS-422 connector
QCPU GOT
conversion cable
Connection cable
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
PLC Connection cable GOT Number of
RS-422 connector Communication Max. connectable
Model name Cable model Option device Model
conversion cable type distance equipment*5
- (Built into GOT) 4
HOW TO MONITOR
GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m
- RS-232
GT15-RS2-9P
REDUNTANT
GT01-RS4-M*4
SYSTEM
-
GT10-C30R2-6P(3m) *7
3m - (Built into GOT)
*2
GT16-C02R4-9S 5
1 GOT for 1
MELSEC-Q GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 *6
BUS CONNECTION
PLC
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT15-RS4-9S
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)
FA-CNV2402CBL(0.2m) - (Built into GOT)
RS-422
FA-CNV2405CBL (0.5m)
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
6
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
CONNECTION TO
30m - (Built into GOT) *8
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
*3
DIRECT
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
CPU
*2 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS-232 connection diagram 3))
*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS-422 connection diagram 2)) 7
*4 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following.
20. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
COMPUTER LINK
*5 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two
CONNECTION
GOTs.
21. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION

*6 Applicable to the QnUCPU only
*7 Use the RS-232 connection model.
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

6.2.2 Connecting to LCPU
Serial (MELSEC)
RS-422 connector
LCPU Adapter GOT
conversion cable
Connection cable

Model name Adapter Cable model Option device Model
conversion cable type distance equipment*5
- (Built into GOT)
GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m
L6ADP-R2 - RS-232
GT15-RS2-9P
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
L02CPU *6
GT10-C30R2-6P(3m)*2 3m - (Built into GOT)
L06CPU
L26CPU
GT16-C02R4-9S
L26CPU-BT
L02CPU-P
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
L06CPU-P
L26CPU-P GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
L26CPU- GT01-C100R4-25P(10m)
30m
PBT GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1
FA-CNV2402CBL(0.2m)
L6ADP-R2 RS-422 PLC
FA-CNV2405CBL(0.5m)
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
*3
L02CPU GT15-RS2-9S
L06CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT RS-422 connection
1200m
L02SCPU diagram 6) - (Built into GOT)
L6ADP-R4 - RS-422
L02CPU-P
L06CPU-P
L26CPU-P
L26CPU-
RS-422 connection *7
PBT 1200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 7)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of 1
PROCEDURES FOR
Model name Adapter Cable model Option device Model equipment*5
conversion cable type distance
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
- (Built into GOT)
GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m
- RS-232 2
GT15-RS2-9P
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
*6
GT10-C30R2-6P(3m)*2 3m - (Built into GOT)
GT16-C02R4-9S
L02SCPU 1 GOT for 1
L02SCPU-P
-
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 PLC 3
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m)
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) - (Built into GOT)
FA-CNV2402CBL(0.2m)
RS-422
FA-CNV2405CBL(0.5m)
GT01-RS4-M*4
4
-
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
HOW TO MONITOR
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
REDUNTANT
*3
SYSTEM
*3
*4
For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. (
For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following.
RS-422 connection diagram 2)) 5
BUS CONNECTION
GOTs.

CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

6.2.3 Connecting to QnACPU
Serial (MELSEC)
QnACPU GOT
Connection cable
PLC Connection cable GOT

Number of connectable
Communication Max.
Model name Cable model Option device Model equipment*4
type distance
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT15-RS4-9S
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
MELSEC-QnA RS-422 1 GOT for 1 PLC
*3 -
GT01-RS4-M
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
*2
GOTs.
6 - 10 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU

6.2.4 Connecting to ACPU 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Communication driver Communication driver
Serial (MELSEC) MELSEC-A

( For GT10)
THAT CAN BE SET

ACPU GOT
DEVICE RANGE
Connection cable

3
Communication Max.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
type distance
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT15-RS4-9S
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
4
MELSEC-A RS-422 1 GOT for 1 PLC
HOW TO MONITOR
*3 -
GT01-RS4-M
REDUNTANT
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
SYSTEM
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
5
*2
BUS CONNECTION
GOTs.
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 - 11

6.2.5 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-F Series
FX5U Expansion Expansion

FX5UC board adapter GOT
Serial (MELSEC)
Connection cable
 When connecting to FX5U (RS-422 connection)

Number of
Cable model connectable
Model Expansion Communication Max.
Expansion board Connection diagram Option device Model equipment*3
name adapter type distance
number
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
- (Built into GOT)
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) 1 GOT for 1
FX5-422-BD-GOT - RS-422 GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) Expansion
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) board
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
*2
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
FX5U GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
*2
GT16-C02R4-9S
RS-422 connection GT15-RS2T4-9P*1

30m
diagram 8) 1 GOT for 1
GT15-RS4-9S
- - RS-422 PLC built-in
- (Built into GOT) port
diagram 9)
GT16-C02R4-9S

30m
GT15-RS4-9S
FX5-485-BD - RS-422 Expansion
- (Built into GOT) board
diagram 9)

Number of
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
number
MONITORING
GT16-C02R4-9S

30m
1 GOT for 1
FX5U -
FX5-
485ADP
RS-422
diagram 8) GT15-RS4-9S
Expansion 2
- (Built into GOT) adapter
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
diagram 9)
*3 When the expansion board (communication board) and the expansion adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral such as a
PC with GX Works3 installed can be connected to them individually. 3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
 When connecting to FX5U (RS-232 connection)
Number of
Expansion board Connection diagram Option device Model
name adapter type distance equipment*2
number
4
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) - (Built into GOT)
HOW TO MONITOR
or
15m
RS-232 connection 1 GOT for 1
GT15-RS2-9P
REDUNTANT
FX5-232-BD - RS-232 Expansion
diagram 1)
SYSTEM
GT01-RS4-M*1 - board
FX5U
diagram 4)
5
BUS CONNECTION
or
15m
FX5- GT15-RS2-9P
- RS-232 Expansion
232ADP diagram 1)
GT01-RS4-M*1 - adapter
diagram 4)
6
CONNECTION TO
PC with GX Works3 installed can be connected to them individually.
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 When connecting to FX5UC (RS-422 connection)
Number of
number
GT16-C02R4-9S

30m
GT15-RS4-9S
- - RS-422 PLC built-in
- (Built into GOT) port
diagram 9)
FX5UC
GT16-C02R4-9S

30m
FX5- GT15-RS4-9S
- RS-422 Expansion
485ADP
- (Built into GOT) adapter
diagram 9)
 When connecting to FX5UC (RS-232 connection)

Number of
Expansion board Connection diagram Option device Model
name adapter type distance equipment*2
number

or
15m
RS-232 1 GOT for 1
FX5- GT15-RS2-9P
FX5UC - RS-232 Expansion
232ADP connection diagram 1)
GT01-RS4-M*1 - adapter
RS-232 *3
connection diagram 4)


6.2.6 Connecting to FXCPU 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Function
Function
FXCPU expansion GOT
adapter
board Communication driver
Connection cable
MELSEC-FX 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
 When connecting to FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FX2 or FX2C
Number of
Function
Model Function Communication Max. connectable
expansion Cable model Option device Model
name adapter*5 type distance equipment*4
board*5
3
GT16-C02R4-9S
FOR MONITORING
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
ACCESS RANGE
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
FX0 GT10-C10R4-8P(1m) 4
FX0S - - RS-422 GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
HOW TO MONITOR
FX0N GT10-C100R4-8P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m)
REDUNTANT
GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *6
SYSTEM
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m) 5
GT10-C10R4-8PL
1 GOT for 1
BUS CONNECTION
*2
PLC
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
FX0S GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *6
- - RS-422 3m - (Built into GOT)
FX0N GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL
*2
GT16-C02R4-9S 6
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
CONNECTION TO
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT15-RS4-9S
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
FX1 GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) - (Built into GOT)
DIRECT
FX2 - - RS-422
CPU
FX2C GT01-RS4-M*3 -
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
7
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
COMPUTER LINK
*7
CONNECTION
*4 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs. 8
*5 When using function expansion boards or function adapters, confirm the communication settings.
CONNECTION
6.6 Precautions Connection to FXCPU (2)When connecting with function extension board or communication special
ETHERNET
adapter

 When connecting to FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC (RS-422 connection)
Function connectable
Model Function Communication Max.
expansion Cable model Option device Model equipment
name *4*7 adapter*7 type distance
*6
board
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*5 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
FX1S GT10-C100R4-8P(10m)
FX1N GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) 1 GOT for 1
FX2N - - RS-422 GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) PLC built-in
FX1NC GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *8 port
FX2NC GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2
*3
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *8
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2
*3
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*5 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) 1 GOT for 1
FX1S
FX1N-422-BD GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) function
FX1N - RS-422 GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
FX2N-422-BD expansion
FX2N GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
30m - (Built into GOT) *8 board
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)
*3
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *8
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)
*3
*2 GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m) can be available for FX1S, FX1N and FX2N.
*4 The function expansion board to be used differs according to the type of the FXCPU to be connected.
Use the applicable function expansion board shown in the following table.
Function expansion board to be used
Item
When connecting to FX1N or FX1S Series When connecting to FX Series
RS-422 communication FX1N-422-BD FX2N-422-BD


GOTs. 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
adapter
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 When connecting to FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC (RS-232 connection)
Number of
Function Cable model
Model Function Communication Max. connectable
expansion Connection diagram Option device Model
name adapter*4 type distance equipment*3
board*1*4 number

or
15m 1 GOT for 1
FX1N-232-BD RS-232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
- RS-232 function
FX2N-232-BD diagram 1)
GT01-RS4-M*2 - expansion board
diagram 4)

or
FX1S 15m
FX2NC RS-232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
FX1N RS-232
-232ADP diagram 1)
FX2N GT01-RS4-M*2 -
FX1N-CNV-BD diagram 4)
FX2N-CNV-BD
or
15m
FX0N RS-232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
RS-232
-232ADP diagram 2)
GT01-RS4-M*2 -
function adapter
or
15m
FX2NC RS-232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
RS-232
-232ADP diagram 1)
GT01-RS4-M*2 -
FX1NC diagram 4)
-
FX2NC
or
15m
FX0N RS-232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
RS-232
-232ADP diagram 2)
GT01-RS4-M*2 -
diagram 5)
*1 The function expansion board to be used differs according to the type of the FXCPU. Select the function expansion board from
the following table.
Function expansion board to be used

Item
When connecting to FX1N or FX1S Series When connecting to FX Series
RS-232 communication FX1N-232-BD FX2N-232-BD
When the function adapter is used FX1N-CNV-BD FX2N-CNV-BD

GOTs.
adapter

1
 When connecting to FX3G, FX3S, FX3GE (RS-422 connection)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Number of
MONITORING
Function connectable
expansion Cable model Option device Model equipment
name adapter*6 type distance
board*6 *5
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 2
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
THAT CAN BE SET

GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
DEVICE RANGE
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
- - RS-422
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m)
1 GOT for 1
PLC built-in
3
GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) port
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
*2
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
3m - (Built into GOT) *4*7
4
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
HOW TO MONITOR
FX3G
*2
FX3S
REDUNTANT
FX3GE GT16-C02R4-9S
SYSTEM
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m) - (Built into GOT) 5
BUS CONNECTION
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m) 1 GOT for 1
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) function
FX3G-422-BD - RS-422
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) expansion
GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) board
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
6
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
CONNECTION TO
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
*2
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
DIRECT
*4
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) 3m - (Built into GOT)
CPU
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
*2
7
COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION

*4 When connecting FX3G, FX3S series to GT10 (input power supply: 5V), they cannot be connected to standard built-in port (RS-
422) and function expansion board (FX3G-422-BD) simultaneously.
*5 When the function expansion board (communication board) and the function adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral
such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to them individually.
GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two 8
GOTs.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
adapter

 When connecting to FX3G, FX3S, FX3GE (RS-232 connection)
Number of
Function Cable model connectable
expansion Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
name adapter*3 type distance *2
board*3 number

or
15m 1 GOT for 1
FX3G RS-232 connection function
FX3S FX3G-232-BD - RS-232 diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P expansion
FX3GE
board
GT01-RS4-M*1 -
diagram 4)

or
FX3G-CNV-ADP 15m
+
FX3G - RS-232 diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P function
FX3U-232ADP
adapter
FX3U-232ADP-MB
GT01-RS4-M*1 -
diagram 4)

or
15m
FX3U-232ADP
FX3GE - RS-232 diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P function
FX3U-232ADP-MB
adapter
GT01-RS4-M*1 -
diagram 4)

or
FX3S-CNV-ADP 15m
+
FX3S - RS-232 diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P function
FX3U-232ADP
adapter
FX3U-232ADP-MB
GT01-RS4-M*1 -
diagram 4)

GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two
GOTs.
adapter

1
 When connecting to FX3GC (FX3GC- /D, FX3GC- /DSS) (RS-422 connection)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Communication Max. connectable
type distance equipment*4
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
2
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
THAT CAN BE SET

GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
DEVICE RANGE
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
FX3GC- /D
RS-422
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m)
1 GOT for 1 PLC built- 3
FX3GC- /DSS in port
GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
FOR MONITORING
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
ACCESS RANGE
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
*2
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
4
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
HOW TO MONITOR
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
*2
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
*4
5
GOTs.
BUS CONNECTION
 When connecting to FX3GC (FX3GC- /D, FX3GC- /DSS) (RS-232 connection)

connectable
6
Function Communication Cable model Max.
Model name Option device Model
adapter*3 type Connection diagram number distance equipment*2
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) - (Built into GOT) CONNECTION TO

or
DIRECT
15m
FX3U-232ADP RS-232 connection 1 GOT for 1
CPU
FX3GC- /D GT15-RS2-9P
FX3U-232ADP- RS-232 function
FX3GC- /DSS diagram 1)
MB GT01-RS4-M*1 - adapter
7
diagram 4)
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION

*2 A GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to the function adapter and the FXCPU
individually.
GOTs. 8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
adapter

 When connecting to FX3U or FX3UC (FX3UC- -LT(-2)) (RS-422 connection)
Function Function connectable
Communication Max.
Model name expansion adapter Cable model Option device Model equipment
type distance
board*6 *6 *5
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) 1 GOT for 1
- - RS-422 GT10-C300R4-8P(30m) PLC built-in
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *7 port
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2
*3
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *7
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
FX3U GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2
*3
FX3UC
(FX3UC- -LT(-2)) GT16-C02R4-9S
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
- (Built into GOT)
GT01-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) 1 GOT for 1
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m)
function
FX3U-422-BD - RS-422 GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
expansion
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m) *7
30m - (Built into GOT) board
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2
*3
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PL(1m)*2
*3
*2 GT10-C10R4-8PL can be used for FX3U or FX3UC- -LT(-2).
GOTs.
adapter

1
 When connecting to FX3U or FX3UC (FX3UC- -LT(-2)) (RS-232 connection)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Number of
MONITORING
Function Cable model connectable
Function Communication Max.
Model name expansion Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
adapter*3 type distance *2
board*3 number
- (Built into GOT)

2
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
or
THAT CAN BE SET

15m 1 GOT for 1
DEVICE RANGE
RS-232 connection function
FX3U-232-BD - RS-232 diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P expansion
board
GT01-RS4-M*1 -
RS-232 connection
FX3U
3
FX3UC diagram 4)
(FX3UC- -
FOR MONITORING
LT(-2))
ACCESS RANGE
or
15m
FX3U-422-BD FX3U-232ADP RS-232 connection 1 GOT for 1
FX3U-232-BD FX3U- RS-232 diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P function
FX3U-CNV-BD 232ADP-MB adapter
GT01-RS4-M*1 -
4
RS-232 connection
HOW TO MONITOR
diagram 4)
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
GOTs. 5
BUS CONNECTION
adapter
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 When connecting to FX3UC (FX3UC- /D, FX3UC- /DS, FX3UC- /DSS) (RS-422
connection)
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C100R4-8P(10m) 30m
GT01-C200R4-8P(20m)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
FX3UC- /D GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8P(10m) 1 GOT for 1 PLC
FX3UC- /DS RS-422
GT10-C200R4-8P(20m) built-in port
FX3UC- /DSS GT10-C300R4-8P(30m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
GT10-C100R4-8PC(10m)
GT10-C200R4-8PC(20m)
GT10-C300R4-8PC(30m)
*2
GT10-C10R4-8P(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8P(3m)
GT10-C10R4-8PC(1m)
GT10-C30R4-8PC(3m)
*2

*4 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs.

 When connecting to FX3UC (FX3UC- /D, FX3UC- /DS, FX3UC- /DSS) (RS-232
connection)
Number of
Function Communication Max.
Model name Connection diagram Option device Model
adapter*3 type distance equipment*2
number

or
FX3UC- /D FX3U-232ADP 15m 1 GOT for 1
RS-232 connection
FX3UC- /DS FX3U-232ADP- RS-232 diagram 1) function
GT15-RS2-9P
FX3UC- /DSS MB adapter
GT01-RS4-M*1 -
RS-232 connection 15m - (Built into GOT) *4

diagram 4)

*2 A GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to the function adapter and the FXCPU
individually.
GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs.
adapter

6.2.7 Connecting to WSCPU 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
WSCPU GOT
MELSEC-WS
Connection cable
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Communication Cable model Max. equipment
type Connection diagram number distance
- (Built into GOT)
3
WS0-C20R2(2m) 2m
MELSEC-WS RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P 1 GOT for 1 PLC
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
WS0-C20R2(2m)
+
2.3m - (Built into GOT) *1
RS-232 connection
diagram 6)
6.2.8 Connecting to the motion controller CPU

4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
Motion controller
GOT
CPU
SYSTEM
Serial (MELSEC)
Connection cable
BUS CONNECTION
Motion controller CPU Connection cable GOT
Communication Max.
type distance
- (Built into GOT)

GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m
Q170MCPU RS-232
GT15-RS2-9P
1 GOT for 1 motion
controller CPU 6
GT10-C30R2-6P(3m) *5
CONNECTION TO
*1
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
Q170MIOCBL1M-B(1m)
DIRECT
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
+
CPU
30m GT15-RS4-9S
RS-422 connection
diagram 3)
- (Built into GOT)
1 GOT for 1 motion 7
MR-MQ100 RS-422
controller CPU
Q170MIOCBL1M-B(1m)
COMPUTER LINK
+
CONNECTION

RS-422 connection
diagram 4)
*6
Q170MIOCBL1M-A(1m)*3 1m - (Built into GOT)
*1
*2
For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. ( RS-232 connection diagram 3))
Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).It cannot be mounted on GT155 .
8
CONNECTION
GOTs.
ETHERNET


POINT
When connecting to the motion controller CPU (Q Series) other than Q170MCPU, MR-MQ100
A motion controller CPU (Q Series) mounted to the multiple CPU system of the QCPU (Q mode) can be monitored.
The system configuration, connection conditions, and system equipment for connecting a GOT to a motion
controller CPU (Q Series) are the same as those for connecting to the QCPU.

1
6.3 Connection Diagram
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The following diagram shows the connection between the
GOT and the PLC.
RS-232 connection diagram 4)
GOT side FX PLC side
6.3.1 RS-232 cable (terminal block) (D-sub 9-pin)
SD 2
2
 Connection diagram
THAT CAN BE SET

RD 3
DEVICE RANGE
RS-232 connection diagram 1) ER 6
FX PLC side
GOT side (D-sub 9-pin) DR 8
SG 5
1 1
2 3
RS 4
3
CS 7
3 2
FOR MONITORING
NC 1
ACCESS RANGE
4 6
NC 9
5 5
6 8
7 4 GOT side FX PLC side
8 7
(terminal block) (D-sub 25-pin)
4
HOW TO MONITOR
9 9 SD 3
RD 2
REDUNTANT
ER 5
SYSTEM
FX PLC side
GOT side (D-sub 25-pin) DR 20
SG 7
5
2 2
3 3 RS 6
BUS CONNECTION
8 5 CS
4 6 NC
5 7 NC
6 20
GOT side
(terminal block)
WS0-C20R2(male)side
(D-Sub 9-pin)
6
CONNECTION TO
SD 3
RD 2
DIRECT
ER
GOT side Untied wire color
CPU
(terminal block) of GT10-C30R2-6P DR
SD Brown SG 5 7
RD Red RS
COMPUTER LINK
ER Blue CS
CONNECTION
DR Yellow NC
SG Green NC
RS Purple
CS 8
NC
CONNECTION
NC
ETHERNET

 Precautions when preparing a cable GOT side
(terminal block)
Untied wire color of
GT10-C□□□R4-25P
(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-232 cable must be within the SDA Brown
maximum distance specifications. SDB Red
(2) GOT side connector RDA Orange

For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
RDB Yellow
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
SG Green
RSA Blue
6.3.2 RS-422 cable RSB Purple
CSA Black
 Connection diagram CSB White

GT10 (input power supply : 24V)
GOT side Untied wire color of
(terminal block) GT10-C□□□R4-8P GOT side Q170MIOCBL1M-B side
SDA Brown SDA 1 1 SDA
SDB Red RDA 2 2 RDA
RDA Orange RSA 3 3 RSA
RDB Yellow CSA 4 4 CSA
SG Green SG 5 5 SG
RSA Black SDB 6 6 SDB
RSB White RDB 7 7 RDB
CSA RSB 8 8 RSB
CSB CSB 9 9 CSB
GT10 (input power supply : 5V) RS-422 connection diagram 4)

GOT side Untied wire color of GOT side
(terminal block) GT10-C□□□R4-8P (terminal block) Q170MIOCBL1M-B side
SDA Brown SDA 1 SDA
SDB Red SDB 6 SDB
RDA Orange RDA 2 RDA
RDB Yellow RDB 7 RDB
SG Green SG 5 SG
RSA Black RSA 3 RSA
RSB White RSB 8 RSB
- CSA 4 CSA
INPUT
DC5V + CSB 9 CSB

RS-422 connection diagram 5) RS-422 connection diagram 8) 1
GOT side United wire color of PLC side *1
PROCEDURES FOR
(terminal block) Q170MIOCBL1M-A GOT side (terminal block)
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
SDA Yellow(Dot mark:Black) RDA 2 SDA
SDB Yellow(Dot mark:Red) RDB 7 SDB
RDA Pink(Dot mark:Black) SDA 1 RDA
RDB Pink(Dot mark:Red) SDB 6 RDB

2
SG White(Dot mark:Black) RSA 3 RDR
THAT CAN BE SET

RSB 8
DEVICE RANGE
RSA White(Dot mark:Red)
RSB
CSA 4
CSB 9
CSA
SG 5 SG
CSB
FG -
3
*1 Set the terminating resistor of the PLC side to "330Ω "
FOR MONITORING
GOT side PLC side
ACCESS RANGE
(terminal block) RS-422 connection diagram 9)
2 SDA
GOT side PLC side *1
(terminal block) (terminal block)
7 SDB
SDA RDA
1 RDA
6 RDB
SDB RDB
4
RDA SDA
HOW TO MONITOR
5 SG
RDB SDB
3
REDUNTANT
SG SG
4
SYSTEM
RSA
8
RSB
9
CSA 5
RS-422 connection diagram 7) CSB
BUS CONNECTION
GOT side PLC side
*1 Set the terminating resistor of the PLC side to "330Ω ".
RDA SDA
RDB SDB  Precautions when preparing a cable

SDA RDA (1) Cable length
The length of the RS-422 cable must be within the
6
SDB RDB
maximum distance specifications.
CONNECTION TO
SG SG
(2) GOT side connector
RSA For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
DIRECT
CSA 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications

CPU
RSB
 Connecting terminating resistors
CSB 7
(1) GOT side
When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating
COMPUTER LINK
resistor must be connected to the GOT.

CONNECTION
(a) For GT16, GT15, GT12

Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
GOT main unit to "Disable".
(b) For GT14, GT11, GT10
Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ". 8
For the procedure to set the terminating resistor,
refer to the following.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT

interface (Communication 4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set.
settings)
Make the settings according to the usage
environment.
6.4.2Communication detail settings
POINT
GOT Multi- Drop Connection Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
When using the serial multi-drop connection unit, refer
to the following.
POINT
Set the channel of the connected equipment. For details, refer to the following:
2.
Make the settings according to the usage environment.

3. (1) Serial (MELSEC)
4.
Click!
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the

menu.
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Item Description Range
channel to be used from the list menu. Set this item when change the
transmission speed used for
3. Set the following items. communication with the connected
9600bps,
equipment.
• Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC 19200bps,
Transmission (Default: 115200bps)
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Speed When the setting exceeds the limit of
38400bps,
57600bps,
Type to be connected. the connected equipment,
115200bps
• I/F: Interface to be used communication is performed at the
fastest transmission speed supported
• Driver: Set either of the following according to the
by the connected equipment.
Set the number of retries to be
For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11 performed when a communication
Retry 0 to 5times
Serial (MELSEC) timeout occurs.
(Default: 0time)
MELSEC-FX
Set the time period for a communication
MELSEC-WS
Timeout Time to time out. 3 to 30sec
For GT10 (Default: 3sec)
Serial (MELSEC) Set this item to adjust the transmission
MELSEC-A Delay Time
timing of the communication request
0 to 300 (ms)
from the GOT.
MELSEC-FX
(Default: 0ms)
MELSEC-WS

(b) For GT10 1
*3
Select the communication format.
Format 1, 2
PROCEDURES FOR
(Default: 1)
PREPARATORY
Set the monitor speed of the GOT. High*1
MONITORING
Monitor Speed
This setting is not valid in all systems. Normal
(GT16 only)
(Default: Normal) Low*2
*1 This is effective when collecting a large data on other than

the monitor screen (logging, recipe function, etc.). However,
when connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, the sequence scan
time may be influenced. If you want to avoid the influence on
2
the sequence scan time, do not set "High".
THAT CAN BE SET

(High performance is hardly affected)
DEVICE RANGE
*2 Set this item if you want to avoid the influence on the
sequence scan time further than the "Normal" setting when
connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU. However, the monitor
speed may be reduced.
*3 The format setting differs depending on the controller.
L6ADP-R4 adapter : [2] Item Description Range
Other than L6ADP-R4 adapter: [1] Set this item when change the
(2) MELSEC-FX transmission speed used for

communication with the connected
3
(a) For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11 9600bps,
equipment.
FOR MONITORING
19200bps,
ACCESS RANGE
38400bps,
Speed When the setting exceeds the limit of the
57600bps,
connected equipment, communication is
115200bps
performed at the fastest transmission
speed supported by the connected
equipment.
(3) Serial (MELSEC) (GT10)

4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Set this item when change the 5
BUS CONNECTION
9600bps,
equipment.
19200bps,
38400bps,
Speed When the setting exceeds the limit of the
57600bps,
connected equipment, communication is
115200bps
equipment. Item Description Range
6
Set the number of retries to be Set this item when change the transmission
performed when a communication speed used for communication with the
CONNECTION TO
connected equipment. 9600bps,
timeout occurs. When receiving no
Retry 0 to 5times (Default: 115200bps) 19200bps,
response after retries, the Transmission
When the setting exceeds the limit of the 38400bps,
communication times out. Speed
connected equipment, communication is 57600bps,
DIRECT
(Default: 0time) performed at the fastest transmission 115200bps

CPU
Set the time period for a communication speed supported by the connected
Timeout Time to time out. 3 to 30sec equipment.
(Default: 3sec) 7
Set this item to adjust the transmission
COMPUTER LINK

Delay Time 0 to 300 (ms)
from the GOT.
CONNECTION
(Default: 0ms)
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

(4) MELSEC-A (GT10)
POINT
The communication interface setting can be
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following
manual.
GT User's Manual
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.

HINT
Set this item when change the transmission
speed used for communication with the
connected equipment.
(Default: 9600bps) controller
Transmission
Speed
When the setting exceeds the limit of the 9600bps By setting GOT internal device, GOT can cut the
connected equipment, communication is portion of multiple connection of the controller. For
equipment. timeout can be cut from the system.
Disconnect the
(5) MELSEC-WS faulty station
For details of the setting contents of GOT internal

device, refer to the following manual.
(Fundamentals)

Set this item when change the transmission
speed used for communication with the
(Default: 115200bps) 19200bps,
Transmission
When the setting exceeds the limit of the 38400bps,
Speed
connected equipment, communication is 57600bps,
performed at the fastest transmission 115200bps
equipment.
Set the number of retries to be performed
when a communication timeout occurs.
Retry When receiving no response after retries, 0 to 5times
the communication times out.
(Default: 3times)
Set the time period for a communication to
Timeout Time time out. 1 to 30sec
(Default: 3sec)
timing of the communication request from
the GOT.
(Default: 5ms)

1
6.5 PLC Side Setting
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
When a GOT and an LCPU are connected via an L6ADP-
R4 adapter, set the following communication setting. 6.5.2 GX Works2 settings
6.5.1 L6ADP-R4 adapter settings Set the communication speed in GX Works2.

2
Set the communication settings by the DIP switches of the
THAT CAN BE SET

L6ADP-R4 adapter.
DEVICE RANGE
L6ADP-R4
SD
RD
SW
DATA 1
ON
3
PARITY 2
FOR MONITORING
STOP 3
1.
BAUD0 4 *1
ACCESS RANGE
DIP SWITCH
BAUD1 5
Click [PLC parameter] [Adapter Serial Setting].
BAUD2 6
7
SW1 to 8
8
2. Set [RS-422/485] in [Adapter Type].
RS-422/485
SDA
3. Set [GOT Connection] in [Select Function].
SDB
RDA 4. Adjust [Communication Speed Setting] with the GOT 4
RDB
communication setting.
HOW TO MONITOR
SG
(FG) 6.4.2 Communication detail settings
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
POINT
*1 SW7 and SW8 are not used.
L6ADP-R4 adapter
(1) DIP switches (SW1 to SW3)
Set the data length, parity bit, and stop bit. For details on the L6ADP-R4 adapter, refer to the 5
following manual.
BUS CONNECTION
Setting switch Description Setting range
OFF 7bit MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual
SW1 Data length*1 (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
ON 8bit
Inspection)
OFF Disable
SW2 Parity*1
ON Enable
OFF 1bit
SW3 Stop bit*1
ON 2bit 6
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
CONNECTION TO
(2) DIP switches (SW4 to SW6)

Set the transmission speed.
DIRECT
CPU
Transmission speed*1
Setting
switch 9600
bps
19200
bps
38400
bps
57600
bps
115200
bps
7
SW4 ON OFF ON OFF ON
COMPUTER LINK
SW5 ON OFF OFF ON ON

CONNECTION
SW6 OFF ON ON ON ON

8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

6.6 Precautions
 Connection to FXCPU
(1) When connecting to FX3 series  Connection in the multiple CPU system
When the keyword of FXCPU (FX3 series) has been When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system,
set, GOT may not be able to monitoring.Perform an I/O the following time is taken until when the PLC runs.
check again. • QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series):
( ■ Perform an I/O check) When the result of the I/ 10 seconds or more
O check is normal, check the status of keyword • MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more
registration.
When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system
(2) When connecting with function extension board or
alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the
communication special adapter
When a sequence program and settings that the
FXCPU communicates with devices other than the GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
GOT are set with software, including GX Developer, the Manual
FXCPU cannot communicate with the GOT.
 Connection to LCPU
(a) Settings with sequence program
LCPU may diagnose (check file system, recovering
Check the sequence program and delete the
following. process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the
power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until
FX SERIES PROGRAMMABLE
the SD memory card becomes available. When the
CONTROLLERS USER'S MANUAL - Data
Communication Edition GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a
• No protocol communication (RS instruction) system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in
• Sequence program with the computer link, N:N the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
network, and parallel link GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
• Parameter setting Manual
• Set the following special registers to 0.
Except FX3U, FX3UC: D8120  Connection to basic model QCPU
FX3U, FX3UC: D8120, D8400, D8420 Do not set the serial communication function of Q00UJ/
FX3G, FX3GC, FX3GE: D8120, D8400, D8420, Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU, Q00/Q01CPU. If the function
D8370
is set, the communication may not be performed.
FX3S: D8120, D8400
(b) Settings with GX Developer  Connection to Q170MCPU
Select [PLC parameter] in [Parameter], and then
Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the
click the PLC system(2) tab on the FX parameter
screen. device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2).
Uncheck [Operate communication setting], and When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the
then transfer the parameter to the programmable PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored.
controller.After the transfer, turn off the
When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0"
programmable controller, and then turn on the
programmable controller again. to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
cannot be executed.
Manual
Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device
(3) Connection to GT1020-L L , GT1030- L

When connecting GT1020-L L or GT1030- L
to FX3G, FX3S series, they cannot be connected to
standard built-in port (RS-422) and function expansion
board (FX3G-422-BD) simultaneously.

6.6 Precautions
1
 Connection to MELSEC iQ-F Series
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
POINT
MELSEC iQ-F Series communication settings
For details of MELSEC iQ-F Series communication
settings, refer to the following manual. 2
MELSEC iQ-F Series User's Manual
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Module parameter settings as a default value (MELSOFT
Connection).
If it sets up other than a default value, it becomes
impossible to communicate with GOT.
(1) Module parameter setting 3
(When using FX5-485-BD)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
POINT
SYSTEM
When changing the module parameter
After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn 5
the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the
BUS CONNECTION
PLC CPU.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

6.6 Precautions
6.6 Precautions
7
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
DEVICE RANGE
7.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
7.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2 4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
7.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 24
5
7.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
7-1

7.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU
Communication
type
R04CPU
R08CPU
R16CPU
R32CPU
R120CPU
R08PCPU
R16PCPU
R32PCPU
R120PCPU
MELSEC iQ-R RS-232
Series R04ENCPU RS-422 7.2.1
R08ENCPU
R16ENCPU
R32ENCPU
R120ENCPU
R08SFCPU*2
R16SFCPU*2
R32SFCPU*2
R120SFCPU*2

RS-232
CPU (MELSEC 7.2.1
R32MTCPU RS-422
iQ-R Series)
C Controller
module*1 RS-232
R12CCPU-V 7.2.1
(MELSEC iQ-R RS-422
Series)

-
Series FX5UC RS-422

*1 Use the serial port of a serial communication module controlled by another CPU on the multiple CPU.
*2 Mount a safety function module R6SFM next to the RnSFCPU on the base unit. The RnSFCPU and the safety function module
R6SFM must have the same pair version. If their pair versions differ, the RnSFCPU does not operate.
7-2 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION

Series Model name Clock Communication Refer to
1
PROCEDURES FOR
Q00JCPU
PREPARATORY
Q00CPU*1
MONITORING
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1 RS-232
RS-422 7.2.2
Q02HCPU*1
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1
2
Q25HCPU*1
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU RS-232 *2 *2
Q12PHCPU RS-422 7.2.2
Q25PHCPU
- *2 *2 -
Q12PRHCPU 3
(Extension base) RS-232 *2 *2
FOR MONITORING
RS-422 7.2.2
Q25PRHCPU
ACCESS RANGE
(Extension base)
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
MELSEC-Q
Q01UCPU
(Q mode)
Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU 4
Q04UDHCPU
HOW TO MONITOR
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
REDUNTANT
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
SYSTEM
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU RS-232
Q04UDEHCPU RS-422 7.2.2
Q06UDEHCPU 5
Q10UDEHCPU
BUS CONNECTION
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU 6
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
CONNECTION TO
*1 When in multiple CPU system configuration, use CPU function version B or later.
*2 For GT10, do not include in the multiple CPU system configuration.
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7-3

*1*2
Q12DCCPU-V
C Controller
Q24DHCCPU-V*2/VG*2 RS-232
module 7.2.2
Q24DHCCPU-LS RS-422
(Q Series)
Q26DHCCPU-LS
L02CPU
L06CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT
L02CPU-P RS-232
MELSEC-L 7.2.3
L06CPU-P RS-422
L26CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
L02SCPU-P
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q RS-232
Q02HCPU-A 7.2.4
(A mode) RS-422
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1 RS-232
MELSEC-QnA Q3ACPU RS-422
(QnACPU) Q4ACPU 7.2.5
*3
RS-232
Q4ARCPU
RS-422
Q2ASCPU
MELSEC-QnA
Q2ASCPU-S1 RS-232
(QnASCPU) 7.2.6
Q2ASHCPU RS-422
*3
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A RS-232
A3ACPUR21 7.2.7
(AnCPU) RS-422
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21

*1 Use only modules with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042.
*3 If the A series computer link module is applied to the QnACPU, the GOT can monitor the devices in the same range on AnACPU.
However, the following devices cannot be monitored.
• Devices added to QnACPU
• Latch relays (L) and step relays (S)
(In case of QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay (S) are different from the internal relay. However, whichever is specified,
an access is made to the internal relay.)
• File register (R)

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
A2USCPU
MONITORING
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2*6
2
A1SHCPU*1
THAT CAN BE SET

MELSEC-A RS-232
A2SCPU*1 7.2.8
DEVICE RANGE
(AnSCPU) RS-422
A2SCPU-S1*1
A2SHCPU*1
A2SHCPU-S1*1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3 3
*1
A1SJHCPU
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
A0J2HCPU*1
A0J2HCPUP21*1 RS-232
RS-422 7.2.8
A0J2HCPUR21*1
A0J2HCPU-DC24*1
MELSEC-A
A2CCPU 4
A2CCPUP21 - -
HOW TO MONITOR
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 RS-232
REDUNTANT
RS-422 7.2.8
A2CCPUC24-PRF
SYSTEM
A2CJCPU-S3
- -
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*2*3 5
*2*3
Q173CPU
BUS CONNECTION
Q172CPUN*2
Q173CPUN*2
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Q172DCPU
Motion
Q173DCPU
RS-232
RS-422 7.2.2
6
controller CPU
CONNECTION TO
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
DIRECT
CPU
Q170MCPU*4
Q170MSCPU*5
7
Q170MSCPU-S1*5
MR-MQ100 - -
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION

*1 The computer link module version U or later supports the A2SCPU(S1), A2SHCPU(S1), A1SHCPU, A1SJHCPU and A0J2HCPU.
In addition, A0J2-C214-S1 (A0J2HCPU-dedicated computer link module) cannot be used.
• SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later
• SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later 8
• Q172CPU: Product number N******* or later
CONNECTION
• Q173CPU: Product number M******* or later

ETHERNET
*4 Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B).
*5 The extension base unit (Q5 B/Q6 B) can be used.
*6 Use hardware version C or later, software version E or later.

A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
RS-232
A273UHCPU-S3 7.2.7
RS-422
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU
Motion A171SCPU-S3
controller CPU A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series)
A171SHCPU*2
RS-232
A171SHCPUN*2 7.2.8
RS-422
A172SHCPU*2
A172SHCPUN*2
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
WS0-CPU0
WS0-CPU3
RS-232 *1
Remote I/O QJ72LP25G 7.2.2
RS-422
station QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
RS-232 *3 *3 *3
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 7.2.3
RS-422
head module
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module
RS-232
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU 7.2.2
RS-422
CRnQ-700
Robot (Q172DRCPU) RS-232
controller CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU) RS-422 7.2.2
CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU)
FX0
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1
FX2
-
FX2C
FX1S
FX1N
-
MELSEC-FX FX2N -
FX1NC
FX2NC -
FX3S
FX3G
FX3GC
-
FX3GE
FX3U
FX3UC
*1 GT11 can not access the master station on MELSECNET/H network system. GT11 can access only the connected host station
(remote I/O station).
*2 For computer link connection of A171SHCPU(N) and A172SHCPU(N), use the computer link module whose software version is
version U or later.
*3 GT11,GT10 can not access the master station on CC-Link IE field network system. GT11,GT10 can access only the connected
host station (head module station).

7.1.2 Serial communication module/Computer link module 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
CPU series Model name*1
MELSEC iQ-R Series

Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) RJ71C24, RJ71C24-R2, RJ71C24-R4
C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)*7
MELSEC-Q (Q mode) QJ71C24*2, QJ71C24-R2*2

2
THAT CAN BE SET

MELSECNET/H remote I/O station QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4
DEVICE RANGE
CNC C70
Robot controller (CRnQ-700) QJ71CMO*3, QJ71CMON*3
MELSEC-L LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2
A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71UC24-PRF

MELSEC-Q (A mode)
A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-R4, A1SJ71C24-PRF 3
*4 *4 *4
AJ71QC24 , AJ71QC24-R2 , AJ71QC24-R4
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
AJ71QC24N*4, AJ71QC24N-R2*4, AJ71QC24N-R4*4
A1SJ71QC24*4, A1SJ71QC24-R2*4
MELSEC-QnA (QnACPU) A1SJ71QC24N*4, A1SJ71QC24N-R2*4

MELSEC-QnA (QnASCPU)
A1SJ71QC24N1*4, A1SJ71QC24N1-R2*4
4
AJ71UC24*4*6
HOW TO MONITOR
A1SJ71C24-R2*6, A1SJ71C24-R4*6, A1SJ71C24-PRF*6
REDUNTANT
A1SJ71UC24-R2*6, A1SJ71UC24-R4*6, A1SJ71C24-PRF*6
SYSTEM
AJ71UC24*4*5
MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A1SJ71UC24-R2*5, A1SJ71UC24-R4*5, A1SJ71UC24-PRF*5

MELSEC-A (AnSCPU)
MELSEC-A
A1SJ71C24-R2*5, A1SJ71C24-R4*5, A1SJ71C24-PRF*5 5
Motion controller CPU (A Series)
BUS CONNECTION
A1SCPUC24-R2*8
A2CCPUC24*4, A2CCPUC24-PRF*4
*1 Communication cannot be performed with RS-485.
A0J2-C214-S1 cannot be used.
*2 Either CH1 or CH2 can be used for the function version A. Both CH1 and CH2 can be used together for the function version B or
later.
*3 Only CH2 can be connected. 6
*4 Either CH1 or CH2 can be used.
*5 The computer link module version U or later supports the A2SCPU(S1), A2SHCPU(S1), A1SHCPU, A1SJHCPU and A0J2HCPU.
CONNECTION TO
*6 The module operates in the device range on AnACPU.
*8 Use hardware version C or later, software version E or later.
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

7.2.1 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R series
Serial (MELSEC)
Serial
MELSEC iQ-R GOT
communication
Series
module
Connection cable

Number of
Serial connectable
Communication Max.
Model name communication Cable model Option device Model
type distance equipment
module*1
GT09-C30R2-9P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
15m
RJ71C24 RS-232 connection
RS-232 diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P
RJ71C24-R2
diagram 3)
RS-422 connection
diagram 2) 2 GOTs for 1 serial
MELSEC iQ-
communication
R Series GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT16-C02R4-9S module
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m)
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
RJ71C24 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
RS-422 1200m GT15-RS4-9S
RJ71C24-R4 or
RS-422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
diagram 3)
*1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual.
Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series

*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655.

7.2.2 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Serial (MELSEC)
2
Serial
QCPU GOT
THAT CAN BE SET

communication
(Q mode)
DEVICE RANGE
module
Connection cable

3
Number of
FOR MONITORING
Serial connectable
ACCESS RANGE
Communication Max.
module*1

QJ71C24
QJ71C24N
or
RS-232 connection
15m 4
QJ71C24-R2
HOW TO MONITOR
QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71CMO
GT01-RS4-M*4 -
REDUNTANT
QJ71CMON
RS-232 connection
SYSTEM
diagram 3) 2 GOTs for 1 serial
communication
RS-422 connection
MELSEC-Q diagram 2)
1200m - (Built into GOT) module*3
5
(Q mode)
1 GOT for 1
BUS CONNECTION
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) modem interface
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 module
QJ71C24 GT09-C200R4-6C(20m)
1200m GT15-RS4-9S
QJ71C24N RS-422 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
QJ71C24N-R4 or
- (Built into GOT)
RS-422 connection
diagram 1) 6
500m GT01-RS4-M*4 -
CONNECTION TO
diagram 3)
DIRECT
CPU
Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User’s Manual (Basic)

For details on the system configuration on the modem interface module side, refer to the following manual.
Modem Interface Module User's Manual 7
*3 Two GOTs can be connected with the function version B or later of the serial communication module.
COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION

*5 GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 connection function to connect up to four
GOTs.
However, when using modem interface modules or serial communication modules (function version A), up to two GOTs can be
connected.
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

Serial (MELSEC)
Serial
LCPU communication GOT
module
Connection cable

Number of
Serial connectable
Communication Max.
type distance equipment
module*1

or
15m
LJ71C24 RS-232 connection
LJ71C24-R2
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
diagram 3)
RS-422 connection
1200m - (Built into GOT) 2 GOTs for 1 serial
MELSEC-L diagram 2) communication
module
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m)
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m)
1200m GT15-RS4-9S
LJ71C24 RS-422 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
or
- (Built into GOT)
RS-422 connection
diagram 1)
500m GT01-RS4-M*3 -
diagram 3)
MELSEC-L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Basic)


7 - 10 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION

7.2.4 Connecting to QCPU (A mode) 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Serial (MELSEC)
2
QCPU Computer
GOT
THAT CAN BE SET

(A mode) link module
DEVICE RANGE
Connection cable

3
Number of
FOR MONITORING
Computer link Communication Max. connectable
ACCESS RANGE
Model name Cable model Option device Model equipment
module*1 type distance
GT09-C30R2-9P(3m)
A1SJ71UC24-R2 15m
A1SJ71C24-R2 RS-232 connection
A1SJ71UC24-PRF
RS-232 diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P
4
A1SJ71C24-PRF
HOW TO MONITOR
diagram 3)
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
RS-422 connection
500m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1
MELSEC-Q diagram 2) computer link
(A mode)
module
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m)
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) 5
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
BUS CONNECTION
A1SJ71UC24-R4 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
RS-422 500m GT15-RS4-9S
A1SJ71C24-R4 or
RS-422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
diagram 3) 6
*1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION TO
Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print. func.) User’s Manual
DIRECT

CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 - 11

7.2.5 Connecting to QnACPU (QnACPU type)
Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver
Serial (MELSEC) AJ71C24/UC24 Serial (MELSEC)

(GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) (When connecting to a computer link module) ( For GT10)
QnACPU module GOT
(QnACPU type) /Computer link module
Connection cable

Number of
Serial connectable
Communication Max.
Model name communication Cable model Option device Model equipment
type distance
module*1

or
AJ71QC24 15m
AJ71QC24N RS-232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
RS-232 diagram 2)
AJ71QC24-R2
AJ71QC24N-R2 GT01-RS4-M*3 -

diagram 4)
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) GT15-RS4-9S
30m
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
AJ71QC24-R4
RS-422 GT01-RS4-M*3 -
AJ71QC24N-R4
1 GOT for 1
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
MELSEC-QnA serial
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
(QnACPU) communication
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m)
module
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m) 30m - (Built into GOT) *5
or
RS-422 connection
diagram 4)
RS-422 connection 1200m - (Built into GOT)

diagram 2)
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m)
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
AJ71QC24 GT09-C200R4-6C(20m)
AJ71QC24N 1200m GT15-RS4-9S
RS-422 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
AJ71QC24-R4 or
AJ71QC24N-R4 - (Built into GOT)
RS-422 connection
diagram 1)
500m GT01-RS4-M*3 -

diagram 3)
Serial Communications Module User’s Manual (Modem Function Additional Version)



1
PROCEDURES FOR
Computer link Communication Max. connectable
module*1 type distance
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
or
15m
RS-232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
AJ71UC24 RS-232 diagram 2)
GT01-RS4-M*3 - 2
THAT CAN BE SET

diagram 4)
DEVICE RANGE
RS-422 connection 500m - (Built into GOT)
MELSEC-QnA
computer link
(QnACPU)
GT16-C02R4-9S module
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m)
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m)
GT15-RS4-9S
3
AJ71UC24 RS-422 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) 500m
or
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
- (Built into GOT)
RS-422 connection
diagram 1)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -

diagram 3)
*1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual. 4
HOW TO MONITOR
When connecting to a computer link module, set the communication driver to [AJ71C24/UC24].
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
7.2.6 Connecting to QnACPU (QnASCPU type) 5
BUS CONNECTION
Serial (MELSEC) AJ71C24/UC24 Serial (MELSEC)

(GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11) (When connecting to a computer link module) ( For GT10)
QnACPU
(QnASCPU type)
module
/Computer link module
GOT
6
Connection cable
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU

Serial communication connectable
Model name
module*1
Communication
type
Cable model
Max.
distance
Option device Model equipment 7
COMPUTER LINK

A1SJ71QC24 or
CONNECTION
A1SJ71QC24N 15m 1 GOT for 1

MELSEC-QnA A1SJ71QC24N1 RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P serial
(QnASCPU) A1SJ71QC24-R2 communication
A1SJ71QC24N-R2 GT01-RS4-M*2 - module
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
RS-232
8
Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Modem Function Additional Version)
CONNECTION

ETHERNET


Number of
Serial communication connectable
Communication Max.
Model name module/Computer link Cable model Option device Model equipment
type distance
module*1
RS-422 connection
diagram 2)
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m)
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) 1 GOT for 1
A1SJ71QC24 1200m GT15-RS4-9S
MELSEC-QnA GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) serial
A1SJ71QC24N RS-422
(QnASCPU) or communication
A1SJ71QC24N1
- (Built into GOT) module
RS-422 connection
diagram 1)
500m GT01-RS4-M*3 -
diagram 3)

or
A1SJ71UC24-R2 15m
A1SJ71C24-R2 RS-232 connection GT15-RS2-9P
RS-232 diagram 1)
A1SJ71UC24-PRF
A1SJ71C24-PRF GT01-RS4-M*3 -
diagram 3)
RS-422 connection
MELSEC-QnA
computer link
(QnASCPU) GT16-C02R4-9S module
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m)
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m)
A1SJ71UC24-R4 GT15-RS4-9S
RS-422 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m) 500m
A1SJ71C24-R4 or
- (Built into GOT)
RS-422 connection
diagram 1)
GT01-RS4-M*3 -
diagram 3)
Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Modem Function Additional Version)
For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual.
When connecting to a computer link module, set the communication driver to [AJ71C24/UC24].


7.2.7 Connecting to ACPU (AnCPU type) 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
ACPU Computer
link module GOT
(AnCPU type) Communication driver
Connection cable 2
AJ71C24/UC24
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Number of
Computer link connectable
Communication Max.
Model name module
*1
type
Cable model
distance
Option device Model equipment
3
FOR MONITORING
GT09-C30R2-25P(3m)
ACCESS RANGE
15m
RS-232 connection
AJ71UC24 RS-232 diagram 2)
GT15-RS2-9P
RS-232 connection
diagram 4)
4
HOW TO MONITOR
RS-422 connection
MELSEC-A diagram 2) computer link
REDUNTANT
(AnCPU)
module
GT16-C02R4-9S
SYSTEM
GT09-C30R4-6C(3m)
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m)
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
AJ71UC24 RS-422 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
or
500m GT15-RS4-9S
5
RS-422 connection
BUS CONNECTION
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
diagram 3)
*2
Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

7.2.8 Connecting to ACPU (AnSCPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC)
ACPU
Computer link
(AnSPU type) GOT
module Communication driver
(A0J2HCPU,A2CCPUC)
Connection cable
AJ71C24/UC24

Number of
Computer link connectable
Communication Max.
Model name module Cable model Option device Model equipment
type distance
*1
A1SJ71UC24-R2 GT09-C30R2-9P(3m)
A1SJ71C24-R2
15m
A1SJ71UC24-PRF RS-232 connection
A1SJ71C24-PRF RS-232 diagram 1)
A1SCPUC24-R2 GT15-RS2-9P
A2CCPUC24
A2CCPUC24-PRF RS-232 connection *3
diagram 3)
MELSEC-A RS-422 connection

(AnSCPU) diagram 2) computer link
(A0J2H)
module
(A2CCPUC) GT09-C30R4-6C(3m) GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C100R4-6C(10m)
GT09-C200R4-6C(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
A1SJ71UC24-R4 GT09-C300R4-6C(30m)
RS-422 500m GT15-RS4-9S
A1SJ71C24-R4 or
RS-422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
diagram 3)


1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
The following diagram shows the connection between the RS-232 connection diagram 2)
GOT and the PLC.
PLC side connector D-sub 25-pin
7.3.1 RS-232 cable For GT16, GT15
GOT side
 Connection diagram (D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side

2
RS-232 connection diagram 1) CD 1 4 RS(RTS)
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
PLC side connector D-sub 9-pin RD(RXD) 2 2 SD(TXD)
For GT16, GT15
SD(TXD) 3 3 RD(RXD)
GOT side
(D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR)
SG 5 7 SG
3
CD 1 7 RS(RTS)
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD) DR(DSR) 6 20 ER(DTR)
FOR MONITORING
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD) RS(RTS) 7 8 CD
ACCESS RANGE
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) CS(CTS) 8 5 CS(CTS)
SG 5 5 SG - 9 1 FG
DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR)
For the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 , Serial Multi-Drop Unit
(When connecting to the Q/QnA Serial Communication Module)
RS(RTS) 7 1 CD
GOT side 4
CS(CTS) 8 8 CS(CTS) (D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side
HOW TO MONITOR
- 9 9 -
NC 1 4 RS(RTS)
REDUNTANT
For the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 , Serial Multi-Drop Unit RD(RXD) 2 2 SD(TXD)
SYSTEM
(When connecting to the Q/QnA/L Serial Communication Module)
SD(TXD) 3 3 RD(RXD)
GOT side
(D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR)
RS(RTS)
SG 5 7 SG 5
NC 1 7
BUS CONNECTION
DR(DSR) 6 20 ER(DTR)
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD)
RS(RTS) 7 8 CD
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD)
CS(CTS) 8 5 CS(CTS)
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR)
- 9 1 FG
SG 5 5 SG
DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR) For the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104

(When connecting to the Computer Link Module)
6
RS(RTS) 7 1 CD
GOT side
CONNECTION TO
CS(CTS) 8 8 CS(CTS) (D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side
- 9 9 -
NC 1 4 RS(RTS)
DIRECT
For the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 RD(RXD) 2 2 SD(TXD)

CPU
(When connecting to the Computer Link Module)

SD(TXD) 3 3 RD(RXD)
GOT side
(D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR) 7
SG 5 7 SG
COMPUTER LINK
NC 1 1 CD
CONNECTION
DR(DSR) 6 20 ER(DTR)
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD)
RS(RTS) 7 8 CD
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD)
CS(CTS) 8 5 CS(CTS)
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR)
- 9 1 FG
SG 5 5 SG
8
DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR)
RS(RTS) 7 7 RS(RTS)
CONNECTION
CS(CTS) CS(CTS)
ETHERNET
8 8
- 9 9 -

RS-232 connection diagram 3) RS-232 connection diagram 4)
PLC side connector D-sub 9-pin PLC side connector D-sub 25-pin
For GT1030, GT1020 For GT1030, GT1020
(When connecting to the Q/QnA/L Serial Communication Module) (When connecting to the Q/QnA Serial Communication Module)
GOT side GOT side
(terminal block) PLC side (terminal block) PLC side
SD 2 RD(RXD) SD 3 RD(RXD)
RD 3 SD(TXD) RD 2 SD(TXD)
ER 6 DR(DSR) ER 6 DR(DSR)
DR 4 ER(DTR) DR 20 ER(DTR)
SG 5 SG SG 7 SG
RS 1 CD RS 8 CD
CS 7 RS(RTS) CS 4 RS(RTS)
NC 8 CS(CTS) NC 5 CS(CTS)
NC 9 - NC 1 FG
For GT1030, GT1020 For GT1030, GT1020

(When connecting to the Computer Link Module) (When connecting to the Computer Link Module)
GOT side GOT side
(terminal block) PLC side (terminal block) PLC side
SD 2 RD(RXD) SD 3 RD(RXD)
RD 3 SD(TXD) RD 2 SD(TXD)
ER 6 DR(DSR) ER 6 DR(DSR)
DR 4 ER(DTR) DR 20 ER(DTR)
SG 5 SG SG 7 SG
RS 1 CD RS 8 CD
CS 7 RS(RTS) CS 4 RS(RTS)
NC 8 CS(CTS) NC 5 CS(CTS)
NC 9 - NC 1 FG
 Precautions when preparing a cable

(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.

7.3.2 RS-422 cable RS-422 connection diagram 3) 1
(For GT1030, GT1020)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
GOT side
MONITORING
(terminal block) PLC side
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ), Serial Multi-Drop Unit SDA RDA
RDA SDA
GOT side PLC side
RSA - 2
R
SDA 1 RDA CSA -
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
RDA 2 SDA SG SG
RSA 3 - SDB RDB
R
CSA 4 - RDB SDB
SG 5 SG RSB -
SDB 6 RDB CSB - 3
RDB 7 SDB
FOR MONITORING
FG
ACCESS RANGE
RSB 8 -
CSB 9 -
FG - FG (For GT1030, GT1020)
GOT side
(terminal block)
Untied wire color of
GT10-C□□□R4-25P 4
HOW TO MONITOR
(For GT16)
SDA Brown
GOT side PLC side
REDUNTANT
SDB Red
SYSTEM
R RDA Orange
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 RDA
RDB Yellow
SDB1(TXD1-) RDB
5
2
SG Green
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 SDA
RSA Blue
BUS CONNECTION
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 SDB
RSB Purple
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 SG
CSA Black
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 FG
CSB White
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
6
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
RSA(RTS+) 9
CONNECTION TO
RSB(RTS-) 10
CSA(CTS+) 11
(1) Cable length
CSB(CTS-)
DIRECT
12
CPU
SG 13
NC 14
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications 7
Shell
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

(1) GOT side
Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer

to the following.
(2) Serial communication module or computer link
module side
Connect the terminating resistors (330 1/4W (orange/
orange/brown/ ) ) on the serial communication module
or computer link module side. For details, refer to the
following manual.
User's Manual for the serial communication
module or computer link module
(a) Other than A2CCPUC24(-PRF)

Connect the terminating resistors supplied with the
module across RDA and RDB.
(b) A2CCPUC24(-PRF)
Set TXD and RXD on the terminating resistor
setting pin to "A".

1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
POINT
settings)
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
2.
3
3. Make the settings according to the usage environment.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
(1) Serial (MELSEC)
4.
HOW TO MONITOR
Click!
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
menu.
5
BUS CONNECTION
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the
channel to be used from the list menu.
Set this item when change the
3. Set the following items. transmission speed used for
equipment.
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller 19200bps,
Type to be connected.
Transmission
Speed
(Default: 115200bps)
When the setting exceeds the limit of
38400bps, 6
57600bps,
• I/F: Interface to be used the connected equipment,
115200bps
CONNECTION TO
• Driver: Set either of the following according to the communication is performed at the
For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11
DIRECT

Serial (MELSEC)
CPU
performed when a communication

AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* timeout occurs. When receiving no
AJ71C24/UC24
Retry
response after retries, the
0 to 5times
7
For GT10 communication times out.
(Default: 0time)
COMPUTER LINK
Serial (MELSEC)
CONNECTION

AJ71C24/UC24
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,

(Default: 3sec)
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Set this item to adjust the transmission
environment.
Delay Time
from the GOT.
0 to 300 (ms)
8
(Default: 0ms)
7.4.2 Communication detail settings Select the communication format.
Format*3 1, 2
CONNECTION
(Default: 1)
ETHERNET

(2) AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6*
Monitor Set the monitor speed of the GOT. High*1
Speed This setting is not valid in all systems. Normal
(GT16 only) (Default: Normal) Low*2
*1 This is effective when collecting a large data on other than
the monitor screen (logging, recipe function, etc.). However,
when connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, the sequence scan
time may be influenced. If you want to avoid the influence on
the sequence scan time, do not set "High".
(High performance is hardly affected)
*2 Set this item if you want to avoid the influence on the
sequence scan time further than the "Normal" setting when
connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU. However, the monitor
speed may be reduced.
*3 Refer to the following POINT.
POINT
Setting [Format]
4800bps,
This setting is required for replacement of F900 series Set this item when change the 9600bps,
with GOT1000 series. Transmission transmission speed used for 19200bps,
(1) To change the communication settings of the Speed communication with the connected 38400bps,
serial communication module which is connected equipment. (Default: 19200bps) 57600bps,
to F900, set as follows. 115200bps
The value of Transmission Speed can be set to Set this item when change the data
115200bps. length used for communication with the
Data Bit 8bit (fixed)
(a) [Intelligent function module switch setting] of
(Default: 8bit)
PLC
Specify the stop bit length for
Switch No. CH1 side CH2 side Stop Bit communications. 1bit (fixed)
(Default: 1bit)
Switch 1 0000H -
Specify whether or not to perform a
Switch 2 0000H -
parity check, and how it is performed
Switch 3 - 0000H Parity Odd (fixed)
during communication.
Switch 4 - 0000H (Default: Odd)
Switch 5 0000H 0000H Set the number of retries to be
7.5 PLC Side Setting timeout occurs. When receiving no
Retry 0 to 5times
(b) GOT communication settings response after retries, the
communication times out.
Format (Default: 0time)
1 Set the time period for a communication
Timeout Time 3 to 30sec
to time out. (Default: 3sec)
(2) To maintain the communication settings of the
serial communication module which is connected
Delay Time timing of the communication request 0 to 300 (ms)
to F900, set the communication setting of the GOT
from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)
as follows.
The value of Transmission Speed remains
38400bps.
Format Transmission Speed

2 38400bps

(3) AJ71C24/UC24 (4) QnA/L/Q CPU (GT10)
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Item Description
Range
Set this item when change the 3
4800bps, transmission speed used for
Transmission transmission speed used for
9600bps, communication with the connected
FOR MONITORING
Speed communication with the connected 9600bps,
ACCESS RANGE
19200bps equipment.
equipment. (Default: 19200bps) 19200bps,
Set this item when change the data 38400bps,
Speed When the setting exceeds the limit of
length used for communication with the 57600bps,
the connected equipment,
Data Bit 8bit (fixed) 115200bps
connected equipment. communication is performed at the
(Default: 8bit) fastest transmission speed supported
Stop Bit
communications. 1bit (fixed)
4
(Default: 1bit)
HOW TO MONITOR
Specify whether or not to perform a POINT
parity check, and how it is performed
REDUNTANT
Parity Odd (fixed)
during communication.
SYSTEM
(Default: Odd)
Set the number of retries to be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
performed when a communication after writing [Communication Settings] of project
Retry
timeout occurs. When receiving no
response after retries, the
0 to 5times data.
5
communication times out. manual.
BUS CONNECTION
(Default: 0time) GT User's Manual
Set the time period for a communication (2) Precedence in communication settings
to time out. (Default: 3sec) When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Set this item to adjust the transmission Utility, the latest setting is effective.
Delay Time timing of the communication request 0 to 300 (ms)
from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)
6
HINT
CONNECTION TO
controller
DIRECT

CPU

Disconnect the 7
faulty station
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION

ETHERNET
(Fundamentals)

The GOT operates under the following transmission
specifications when it is connected to a Mitsubishi Electric 7.5.1 Connecting serial
PLC in the computer link connection. communication module
Transmission specifications Setting
(MELSEC iQ-R Series)
Data bit 8bits
Parity bit Yes (Odd) POINT

Stop bit 1bit
Serial communication module
Sum check Yes (MELSEC iQ-R Series)
Transmission speed Set the same transmission speed on For details of the serial communication module
(Baud rate) both the GOT and the PLC. (MELSEC iQ-R Series), refer to the following
manual.
The PLC side settings (the serial communication module, Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series
computer link module) are explained in Section 7.5.2 to
Section 7.5.4.
 [Unit parameter] of GX Works3
Refer
Model The PLC can communicate with the GOT with the
to
default unit parameter setting.
RJ71C24,
(MELSEC iQ-R Series)
RJ71C24-R2, 7.5.1 (1) Unit parameter
RJ71C24-R4
QJ71C24N,
QJ71C24
POINT
QJ71C24N-R2, 7.5.2 (1) When changing the unit parameter
(Q Series)
QJ71C24-R2 After writing unit parameters to the PLC CPU, turn
QJ71C24N-R4 the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset
the PLC CPU.
QJ71CMO,
Modem interface module 7.5.2 (2) Connection of multiple GOTs
QJ71CMON
To some serial communication module models,
Serial communication module LJ71C24,
7.5.2 two GOTs can be connected using both CH1 and
(L Series) LJ71C24-R2
CH2.
AJ71QC24N,
AJ71QC24
AJ71QC24N-R2,
AJ71QC24-R2
AJ71QC24N-R4,
Serial communication module AJ71QC24-R4
7.5.3
(QnA Series)
A1SJ71QC24N1,
A1SJ71QC24N,
A1SJ71QC24
A1SJ71QC24N1-R2,
A1SJ71QC24N-R2,
A1SJ71QC24-R2
AJ71UC24 7.5.4
A1SJ71UC24-R2,
A1SJ71UC24-PRF,
7.5.4
A1SJ71C24-R2,
A1SJ71C24-PRF
Computer link module
A1SJ71UC24-R4,
7.5.4
A1SJ71C24-R4
A1SCPUC24-R2 7.5.4
A2CCPUC24,
7.5.4
A2CCPUC24-PRF

7.5.2 Connecting serial (2) When connecting to the CH2 side
1
communication module (Q, L
PROCEDURES FOR
Series)
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
POINT
(1) Serial communication module (Q, L Series) Bit
2
For details of the serial communication module (Q, Switch Specifi Description
Set
Positi
L Series), refer to the following manual. No. value*3
THAT CAN BE SET

ed
on
DEVICE RANGE
Q Corresponding Serial Communication value
Module User’s Manual (Basic) Operation

b0 OFF
MELSEC-L Serial Communication Module setting
User's Manual (Basic) b1 OFF Data bit

(2) Modem interface module
For details of the modem interface module, refer to b2 OFF
Parity
bit
3
the following manual.
FOR MONITORING
Even/odd
Modem Interface Module User's Manual b3 OFF
ACCESS RANGE
parity
CH2
(Operates
b4 OFF transmiss Stop bit
according
 [Intelligent function module switch setting] on ion Sum to the GOT
Switch 3 settings*1 check 0000H
GX Developer b5 OFF side
code specificatio
[The intelligent function module switch setting] on GX
Developer is not necessary. (When no [intelligent Write
ns.) 4
b6 OFF during
function module switch setting] is made, the module
HOW TO MONITOR
RUN
runs in the GX Developer connection mode.)
REDUNTANT
A module can be also connected to a GOT by making Setting
b7 OFF modifica-
the following [intelligent function module switch setting]
SYSTEM
tions
on GX Developer.
b8 to CH2 transmission
―
(1) When connecting to the CH1 side b15 speed setting*2
5
GX
CH2 Communication
BUS CONNECTION
Switch 4 ― Developer 0000H
protocol setting
connection
Switch 5 ― Station number setting 0th station 0000H
*1 The module operates under the following transmission

Bit specifications.
Switch Specifi Set
Positi Description
No.
on
ed
value
value*3 Transmission specifications Setting details
6
Operation Operation setting Independent
b0 OFF
setting
CONNECTION TO
Data bit 8bits
b1 OFF Data Bit
b2 OFF Parity Bit Parity bit Yes
Even/Odd
DIRECT
b3 OFF Even/odd parity Odd

parity
CPU
b4 OFF CH1 Stop bit (Operates Stop bit 1bit

transmiss Sum
Switch 1
b5 OFF ion check
according
to the GOT
0000H
Sum check code Yes
7
settings*1 code side *2 The serial communication module operates at the
specificatio transmission speed set on the GOT.
Write
COMPUTER LINK
ns.) *3 When the value of switch setting is other than "0", the setting
b6 OFF during
of [Format] and [Transmission Speed] on the GOT side are
CONNECTION
RUN required to be changed.

Setting
b7 OFF modifica-
tions
b8 to CH1 transmission
b15
―
speed setting*2 8
GX
CH1 Communication
Switch 2 ― Developer 0000H
protocol setting
connection
CONNECTION
Switch 5 ― Station number setting 0th station 0000H

ETHERNET

7.5.3 Connecting serial
POINT communication module (QnA
(1) When the [intelligent function module switch
Series)
setting] has been set
After writing PLC parameters to the PLC CPU,
turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or
reset the PLC CPU. POINT
(2) Connection of multiple GOTs
Serial communication module (QnA Series)
To some serial communication module models,
two GOTs can be connected using both CH1 and For details of the serial communication module (QnA
CH2. Series), refer to the following manual.
Serial Communication Module User's Manual
Connection of 2 GOTs (Modem Function Additional Version)
Model
Function version A Function version B
QJ71C24(-R2)  Switch setting on serial communication

QJ71C24N(-R2/R4) - module
LJ71C24(-R2) -
Set the Station number switches, the Mode setting
switch for the channel used for GOT connection, and
: 2 GOTs connectable, : 1 GOT connectable, -: Not applicable
the Transmission specifications switches.
(3) When connecting to the modem interface module
When the modem interface module is connected, AJ71QC24N, AJ71QC24N-R2, A1SJ71QC24N1, A1SJ71QC24N1-R2
AJ71QC24N-R4,AJ71QC24, A1SJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24N-R2,
only CH2 can be used. AJ71QC24-R2, AJ71QC24-R4 A1SJ71QC24, A1SJ71QC24-R2
AJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N
RUN CH1.ERR.
CPUR/W CH2.ERR.
RUN ERROR
ERR. C.R/W SW.E ERR.
C/N NEU NEU C/N
P/S ACK ACK P/S
NEU NEU
ACK ACK PRO NAK NAK PRO
NAK NAK SID SD.W. SD.W. SIO
C/N C/N SD SD
P/S P/S
CH.1 CH.2 RD RD
PRO PRO
SIO SIO CH1 CH2
SD.WAIT SD.WAIT
SD SD DISPLAY AB
RD RD STS ERR.
10 1
5 5
0
10
5
0
1
STATION
No. (3) STATION NO.
0 0
(3)
CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2
8 8 8 8
MODE
(1) (1)
C
MODE
4
C
4
4
0 0 0 0
SW
01 1
02
03
2
04 3
05
4
(2)
06
07 5
08 6
09
10
SW 7
8
(2)
11 9
12
10
11
12
ON CH2 RS-422/RS-485
SDA
CH1 SG
RS-232C
SDB
(FG)
RDA
(NC)
CH2
RDB
RS422
RS485
SDA
RDA
CH1 RS-232-C A1SJ71QC24N
SDB
RDB
NC
SG
FG
(1) Mode setting switch
Mode setting switch*1 Description Set value
CH
Dedicated protocol (Format 5)

5
MODE (Binary mode)
*1 The mode switch in the figure is for the AJ71QC24 (N) (-R2/
R4).

(a) Transmission speed setting (SW09 to SW12) 1
Set the transmission speed (SW09 to SW12) as
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
follows.
PREPARATORY
The transmission speed setting must be consistent
MONITORING
When connecting a GOT to CH2
with that of the GOT side.
Set the CH1 side mode switch to any other than "0"
(interlocked operation).
Transmission speed*1*2*3
CH1 CH2 Setting
Switch 4800
bps
9600
bps
19200
bps
38400
bps*4
57600
bps*4
115200
bps*4
2
MODE
THAT CAN BE SET

SW09 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
DEVICE RANGE
SW10 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
SW11 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF

(2) Transmission specifications setting switch SW12 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
Transmission *1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are

specifications setting
Setting
switch
Description
Set
value *2
shown.
When the software version of AJ71QC24 (-R2/R4) and
3
switch A1SJ71QC24 (-R2) is "L" or earlier, and when 2 devices are
FOR MONITORING
Operation Independent connected to the two interfaces individually, make the setting
ACCESS RANGE
SW01 OFF so that the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is
setting operation
within 19200bps.
AJ71QC24(N)
SW02
Data bit
8bits ON
When the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is
(-R2/R4) setting within 19200bps, a controller other than GOT can be
connected to the computer link module.
ON SW ON Parity bit
01 When only one device is connected to either of the
SW03 enable/disable Enable ON
02 interfaces, a maximum transmission speed of 19200bps can
4
setting
03 be set to the one where the device is connected.In this
04
Even/odd parity instance, set SW09 to SW12 to "OFF" on the other side.
05 SW04 Odd OFF *3 When 3 devices are connected to the two interfaces
06
setting
HOW TO MONITOR
07
individually in the case of AJ71QC24N(-R2/R4),
08
SW05 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF A1SJ71QC24N(-R2), and A1SJ71QC24N1(-R2), make the
setting so that the total transmission speed of the two
REDUNTANT
Sum check
SW06 enable/disable Enable ON
interfaces is within 115200bps (within 230400bps in the case
09
of A1SJ71QC24N1(-R2)).
SYSTEM
10 setting
11 When the total transmission speed of the two interfaces is
12 Write during within 115200bps (within 230400bps in the case of
SW07 RUN enable/ Enable ON A1SJ71QC24N1(-R2)), a controller other than GOT can be
A1SJ71QC24(N)
(N1)(-R2)*1
disable setting
Setting change Disable

connected to the computer link module.
When only one device is connected to either of the 5
SW08 OFF interfaces, a maximum transmission speed of 115200bps
enable/disable (prohibit) can be set to the one where the device is connected.In this
BUS CONNECTION
1
(Consistent instance, set SW09 to SW12 to "OFF" on the other side.
2 SW09
3 Transmission with the GOT *4 This can be set only in the case of AJ71QC24N (-R2/R4),
4 to See (a) A1SJ71QC24N (-R2) or A1SJ71QC24N1 (-R2).
speed setting side
5 SW12
6 specifications)
SW 7
8 The switch is (3) Station number switch (for both CH1 and CH2)
9 located on
10
the left side
SW13 Set
6
11
12
to ―
of the
All OFF Station number switch*5 Contents
ON module. value
SW15
(only on
AJ71QC24 (-
CONNECTION TO
10 1 Set the station number of the
R2/R4))
serial communication module
0
*1 The following shows the layout of switches in the case of the STATION to which an access is made
No.
following hardware versions for the module. from the GOT.
DIRECT
Switch settings and switch ON/OFF directions are the same.

CPU
CH1/2 *5 The station number switch in the figure is for the AJ71QC24
(N) (-R2/R4).
1
2
9
10
7
3 11 POINT
COMPUTER LINK
4 12
CONNECTION
SW
5 When the switch setting has been changed
6
Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the
7
PLC CPU.
8
ON
8
Target unit Hardware version
A1SJ71QC24 Version E hardware or earlier

CONNECTION
ETHERNET
A1SJ71QC24-R2 Version D hardware or earlier
A1SJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24N-R2 Version A hardware

7.5.4 Connecting computer link (1) Mode setting switch
module
Mode setting switch Contents Set value
RS-232
BCD 1
POINT Dedicated connection
EF
8 9A
012
protocol type 1
67
RS-422
5
345
Computer link module connection
For details of the computer link module, refer to the
following manual.
(2) Transmission specifications switch
Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print.
(a) AJ71UC24
func.) User’s Manual
Transmission
Setting Set
 Switch setting on the computer link module specifications
switch
switch
Description
value
Set the Mode setting switch, the Transmission RS-232

OFF
specifications switches and the Station number setting connection
SW11 Main channel setting
switches. RS-422
ON
connection
AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-R4,
AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24-PRF, A1SJ71C24-R4 SW12 Data bit setting 8bits ON
RUN
2 - SD
2 - RD
2-C/N
2-P/S
2 - PRO A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71UC24 - R4
ON
SW11 SW13
2 - SIO RUN NEU SCAN
2 - NEU
(Consistent See
4-C/N L4
A1SJ71C24-PRF
SD ACK SET E.
2 - ACK 4-P/S L5
RD NAK SCAN E.
2 - NAK 4 - PRO L6
CPU C/N SIO E.
L1 4 - NEU 4 - SIO
L2
L3
4 - ACK
4 - NAK
4 - SD
CPUR / W
COM
MD P/S
PRO
SIO
ST. DWN
SW12 Transmission speed with the GOT descripti
SW14
4 - RD M.D.M COM MD / L
M.D.L
B0
B1
B2
A1SJ71UC24-R2
NEU NEU
SW13 setting side ons
SW14
ACK ACK
NAK
C/N
NAK
C/N SW SW15 specifications) below.
MODE (1) PRO
SIO
P/S 01
02
03
STATION NO.
7 8
(2) SW15
SW16 SW16 Parity bit setting Set ON
SIO 04
5
10
(3)
STATION NO. 2 3
10 05
(3) 06
07
7 8
1
SW17
5
1 08 23
09
SW17 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF

SW11 ON
(1)
10
11
B CD
(1) SW18
F0
89
12
MODE
13 12 34
14
SW
15
ON SW18 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF

16 03
17
18 (2) 04
(2)
21 05 MODE
22
23
06
07 1.FORM1 SW21
SW21 Sum check setting Set ON
08 SDA
24 2.FORM2
09
3.FORM3
SW22
10
4.FORM4 SG
11
12 5.MOFORM SDB
RDA
FG
SW23 Write during RUN

RS-232-C NC
SW24 SW22 Enabled ON

RS-232-C RDB enabled/disabled setting
Computer link/multi-drop Computer

RS - 422 / 485
A1SJ71UC24 - R4
SW23 ON
RS - 422
RS - 485
selection link
SDA A1SJ71UC24-R2
Master station/Local (Setting
SW24 OFF
SG
SDB
RDA
FG station setting ignored)
NC
• Transmission speed setting (SW13 to SW15)

RDB

A1SCPUC24-R2 follows.
MELSEC A1S CPU24-R2 MELSEC A1S CPU24-R2
STOP STOP
RUN L CLR RUN RUN L CLR RUN

RESET RESET RESET RESET
ERROR ERROR
MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI
(1) Transmission speed*1

Setting switch
(2) 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps
SW13 OFF ON OFF
SW14 OFF OFF ON
PULL
SW15 ON ON ON
*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are

When the cover is open shown.
A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF
(1)
(3)
(2)
When the cover is open

(b) A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF, • Transmission speed setting (SW05 to SW07) 1
A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF Set the transmission speed (SW05 to SW07) as
PROCEDURES FOR
follows.
PREPARATORY
Transmission The transmission speed setting must be consistent
MONITORING
Setting Set
specifications
switch
Description
value
switch
SW03 Unused ― OFF Transmission speed*1
Setting switch
SW ON Write during RUN
03
04
SW04
enabled/disabled setting
Enabled ON
SW05
4800bps
OFF
9600bps
ON
19200bps
OFF
2
SW05 (Consistent See
THAT CAN BE SET

Transmission speed with the GOT descripti SW06 OFF OFF ON
ON SW06
DEVICE RANGE
setting side ons
05 SW07 specifications) below. SW07 ON ON ON
06
07 SW08 Data bit setting 8bits ON *1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are
08 SW09 Parity bit setting Set ON shown.
09
10 SW10 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF (d) A1SCPUC24-R2
11
12
SW11 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF
Transmission
3
SW12 Sum check setting Set ON Setting
specifications Description Set value
FOR MONITORING
switch
• Transmission speed setting (SW05 to SW07)
ACCESS RANGE
switch
Write during RUN
follows. 1 enabled/ Enabled ON
The transmission speed setting must be consistent disabled setting
with that of the GOT side. ON 2 (Consistent

with the See
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 Transmission speed
GOT side description
Transmission speed*1 setting
Setting switch specification s below.
4 s)
4800bps 9600bps 19200bps
HOW TO MONITOR
SW05 OFF ON OFF 5 Data bit setting 8bits ON
REDUNTANT
SW06 OFF OFF ON 6 Parity bit setting Set ON
SYSTEM
SW07 ON ON ON Even/odd parity
7 Odd OFF
setting
shown. 8 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF
(c) A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71C24-R4

9 Sum check setting Set ON 5
• Transmission speed setting (2 to 4)
BUS CONNECTION
Transmission Set the transmission speed (2 to 4) as follows.
Setting Set
specifications Description The transmission speed setting must be consistent
switch value
switch with that of the GOT side.
Master station/Local (Setting
SW01 OFF
station setting ignored) Transmission speed*2
Setting switch
SW ON
SW02
Computer link/multi-drop Computer
selection link
ON 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps
6
2 OFF ON OFF
01 SW03 Unused ― OFF
CONNECTION TO
02 3 OFF OFF ON
03 Write during RUN
SW04 Enabled ON
enabled/disabled setting
04 4 ON ON ON
ON SW05 (Consistent See
DIRECT

05 Transmission speed with the GOT descripti shown.
CPU
06 SW06
setting side ons
07 SW07 specifications) below.
08
09 SW08 Data bit setting 8bits ON 7
10
SW09 Parity bit setting Set ON
11
COMPUTER LINK
12 SW10 Even/odd parity setting Odd OFF

CONNECTION
SW12 Sum check setting Set ON
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

(e) A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF
Transmission
POINT
Setting Set
specifications Description
switch
switch value When connecting the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 and
the computer link unit
SW11 (Consistent
Transmission speed with the GOT
See When the GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 and the computer
SW12 descriptio
setting side link unit are connected via RS-232C, set the buffer
ns below.
SW13 specifications) memory in the computer link unit using the sequence
ON OFF
SW14 Data bit setting 8bits ON
program so that CD signals are not checked.
SW
11 Examples of the CPU units equipped with built-in
SW15 Parity bit setting Set ON
12 computer link are explained below also.
13
14 Even/odd parity
SW16 Odd OFF
15 setting
16 (1) In the case of A computer link
17 Refer to the program example below in which the
18
19 SW18 Sum check setting Set ON I/O signals of the computer link unit are 80 to 9F
ON
20
SW19 Main channel setting RS-232 OFF
(H).
Write during RUN Write to buffer memory
SW20 enabled/ Enabled ON Computer link unit
disabled setting connection point
X87
• Transmission speed setting (SW11 to SW13) TO P H8 H10B K1 K1
10B(H):CD terminal will be checked
follows.
K1:CD terminal will not be checked
with that of the GOT side. (2) In the case of CPU equipped with built-in
computer link
Transmission speed*1 (a) A1SCPUC24-R2
Setting switch
4800bps 9600bps 19200bps Write to buffer memory
SW11 OFF ON OFF Computer link unit connection point
(Fixed values)
SW12 OFF OFF ON
X0E7
SW13 ON ON ON
TO P H0E H10B K1 K1
shown. 10B(H):CD terminal will be checked
(3) Station number setting switch Fixed values K1:CD terminal will be checked
(b) A2CCPUC2
Station number switch*2 Description Set value
Write to buffer memory
STATION NO. Computer link unit connection point
7 8 (Fixed values)
9 01
4 5 6
10 Set the station number of the X1E7

2 3 computer link module to TO P K61 H10B K1 K1
0
which an access is made
7 8
from the GOT.
9 01
4 5 6
1 10B(H):CD terminal will be checked

2 3
Fixed values K1:CD terminal will not be checked
*2 The station number setting switch in the figure is for the
A1SJ71UC24-R4.
POINT
When the switch setting has been changed
PLC CPU.

1
7.6 Precautions
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
 Time taken until the PLC runs when  Connection to RnSFCPU
MONITORING
connected in the multiple CPU system The RnSFCPU takes 10 seconds or more to run.
The following time is taken until the PLC runs. If the GOT is started before the RnSFCPU runs, a
QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 system alarm occurs.
seconds or more To prevent a system alarm from occurring, adjust the 2
title display time in the [GOT Setup] dialog.
MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more
THAT CAN BE SET

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Help
DEVICE RANGE
Manual
3
FOR MONITORING
LCPU may diagnose (check file system, recovering
ACCESS RANGE
process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the
power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until
GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a
system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in
the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
4
HOW TO MONITOR
Manual
REDUNTANT
 When monitoring the Q170MCPU
SYSTEM
device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2).
5
BUS CONNECTION
to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
cannot be executed.
GT Designer3 Version
Manual
Screen Design 6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

7.6 Precautions
7.6 Precautions
8
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
2
THAT CAN BE SET

ETHERNET CONNECTION
DEVICE RANGE
8.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
8.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22
SYSTEM
8.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 62
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8-1


Communication *1
type
R04CPU
R08CPU
R16CPU
R32CPU
R120CPU
R08PCPU
R16PCPU
R32PCPU
R120PCPU
MELSEC iQ-R
Ethernet 8.2.1
Series R04ENCPU
R08ENCPU
R16ENCPU
R32ENCPU
R120ENCPU
R08SFCPU*2
R16SFCPU*2
R32SFCPU*2
R120SFCPU*2

CPU (MELSEC Ethernet 8.2.1
C Controller
module
R12CCPU-V Ethernet 8.2.1
(MELSEC iQ-R
Series)
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U

Ethernet 8.2.1
Series FX5UC

*1 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE, GT1450-QMBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.
8-2 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION

Communication *3
1
PROCEDURES FOR
type
PREPARATORY
Q00JCPU
MONITORING
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1
2
Q02HCPU*1
Q06HCPU*1
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Q12HCPU*1
Q25HCPU*1
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
3
FOR MONITORING
Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Ethernet 8.2.1
ACCESS RANGE
Q12PRHCPU
(Extension base)
Q25PRHCPU
(Extension base)
MELSEC-Q Q00UJCPU 4
(Q mode)
Q00UCPU
HOW TO MONITOR
Q01UCPU
Q02UCPU
REDUNTANT
Q03UDCPU
SYSTEM
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
5
Q26UDHCPU
BUS CONNECTION
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU Ethernet
8.2.1 6
Q100UDEHCPU 8.2.2
CONNECTION TO
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
DIRECT
Q13UDVCPU
CPU
Q26UDVCPU
Q12DCCPU-V*2
C Controller Q24DHCCPU-V/VG 7
module Q24DHCCPU-LS Ethernet 8.2.2
(Q Series)
COMPUTER LINK
Q26DHCCPU-LS
CONNECTION

8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8-3

Communication *2
type
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU Ethernet 8.2.1

L02CPU
L06CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT
L02CPU-P 8.2.2
MELSEC-L Ethernet
L06CPU-P 8.2.1
L26CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
L02SCPU-P
Q02CPU-A*3
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A*3 Ethernet 8.2.1
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A*3
Q2ACPU*3
Q2ACPU-S1*3
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU*3 Ethernet *1 *1 *1 *1
8.2.1
(QnACPU)
*3
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU*3
Q2ASCPU
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1 *1 *1 *1 *1
Ethernet 8.2.1
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21 Ethernet 8.2.1
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21

*1 If the A series Ethernet module is applied to the QnACPU, the GOT can monitor the devices as the same as the case of AnACPU.
*3 Combination with the Ethernet module is restricted. 8.1.2 Ethernet module

Communication *4
1
type
PROCEDURES FOR
A2USCPU
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU 2
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU Ethernet 8.2.1
(AnSCPU)
THAT CAN BE SET

A2SCPU-S1
DEVICE RANGE
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU 3
A0J2HCPU
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
A0J2HCPUP21
Ethernet 8.2.1
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21 4
A2CCPUC24 - -
HOW TO MONITOR
A2CCPUC24-PRF
REDUNTANT
A2CJCPU-S3
SYSTEM
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*1*2
Q173CPU*1*2
5
Q172CPUN*1
BUS CONNECTION
Q173CPUN*1 Ethernet 8.2.1
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Q172DCPU
Motion
controller Q173DCPU
CPU
(Q Series)
Q172DCPU-S1 6
Q173DCPU-S1
CONNECTION TO
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
8.2.1
Ethernet
Q170MCPU*3 8.2.5
DIRECT
Q170MSCPU*5
CPU
Q170MSCPU-S1*5
MR-MQ100 7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION

*3
When using Ethernet module, only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B).
8
*5 When using Ethernet module, the extension base unit (Q5 B/Q6 B) can be used.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

Communication *3
type
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
Motion A171SCPU
controller A171SCPU-S3
Ethernet 8.2.1
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series) A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
WS0-CPU0
WS0-CPU3
Remote I/O QJ72LP25G Ethernet 8.2.1
station QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
head module
CC-Link IE CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB 8.2.4
Ethernet Ethernet
adapter module
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU Ethernet 8.2.3
CRnQ-700
(Q172DRCPU)
Robot CR750-Q
Ethernet*2 8.2.1
controller (Q172DRCPU)
CR751-Q
(Q172DRCPU)
FX0
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1
FX2
-
FX2C -
FX1S
FX1N
-
FX2N
MELSEC-FX
FX1NC
FX2NC -
FX3S*1
FX3G*1
Ethernet
FX3GE
8.2.1
FX3GC*1
FX3U*1
Ethernet
FX3UC*1
*1 The supported version of the main units varies depending on the Ethernet module to be used as shown below.
Ethernet module FX3U(C) FX3G(C) FX3S
FX3U-ENET-L Ver. 2.21 or later FX3U-ENET-L is not supported.
FX3U-ENET-ADP Ver. 3.10 or later Ver. 2.00 or later Ver. 1.00 or later
*2 The Ethernet connection of robot controller can be established only via the Ethernet module (QJ71E71) or Built-in Ethernet port of
QnUDE.

8.1.2 Ethernet module 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
CPU series Ethernet module*1
MELSEC iQ-R Series

RJ71EN71
Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)
MELSEC-Q (Q mode)
MELSEC-QS
2
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71E71-100 QJ71E71-B5 QJ71E71-B2 QJ71E71
THAT CAN BE SET

CNC C70
DEVICE RANGE
Robot controller (CRnQ-700)
AJ71QE71N3-T*2 AJ71QE71N-B5*2 AJ71QE71N-B2*2 AJ71QE71N-T*2

*2
AJ71QE71N-B5T AJ71QE71 AJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71N3-T*2
MELSEC-QnA
*2 *2 *2
A1SJ71QE71N-B5 A1SJ71QE71N-B2 A1SJ71QE71N-T A1SJ71QE71N-B5T*2
A1SJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71-B2
3
AJ71E71N3-T AJ71E71N-B5 AJ71E71N-B2 AJ71E71N-T
MELSEC-Q (A mode)
FOR MONITORING
AJ71E71N-B5T AJ71E71-S3 A1SJ71E71N3-T A1SJ71E71N-B5
MELSEC-A
ACCESS RANGE
A1SJ71E71N-B2 A1SJ71E71N-T A1SJ71E71N-B5T A1SJ71E71-B5-S3
Motion Controller CPU (A Series)
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3
MELSEC-FX FX3U-ENET-L FX3U-ENET-ADP
CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB
MELSEC-L LJ71E71-100
4
*1 If the A series Ethernet module is applied to the QnACPU, the GOT can monitor the devices as the same as the case of AnACPU.
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
*2 Use B or a later function version of Ethernet module and PLC CPU.
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

8.2.1 Connection to Ethernet module
 When connecting to MELSEC iQ-R, motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series), C Controller
module (MELSEC iQ-R Series), MELSEC-Q, QS, QnA, A or motion controller CPU (Q Series)
Ethernet Communication driver

PLC CPU GOT
module
Connection cable Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700
PLC Connection cable*1 Maximum GOT Number of

segment connectable
Ethernet module Communication
Model name Cable model length*3 Option device Model equipment
*4*5 type
MELSEC iQ-R
Series *2
Motion controller RJ71EN71 Ethernet - (Built into GOT)
*8
CPU (MELSEC
iQ-R Series)
*2
MELSEC-Q 100m
(Q mode) *8*9
QJ71E71-100 - (Built into GOT)
QJ71E71-B5
MELSEC-QS Ethernet
QJ71E71-B2
QJ71E71
Motion controller
GT15-J71E71-100
CPU (Q Series)*6
AJ71QE71N3-T
AJ71QE71N-B5 *2
AJ71QE71N-B2 Twisted pair cable
• 10BASE-T *8
AJ71QE71N-T - (Built into GOT)
AJ71QE71N-B5T Shielded twisted pair
AJ71QE71 cable (STP) or unshielded
128 GOTs*7
AJ71QE71-B5 twisted pair cable (UTP):
MELSEC-QnA Ethernet 100m (recommended to
A1SJ71QE71N3-T Category 3, 4, and 5
16 units or less)
A1SJ71QE71N-B5 • 100BASE-TX
A1SJ71QE71N-B2 Shielded twisted pair
A1SJ71QE71N-T cable (STP):
GT15-J71E71-100
A1SJ71QE71N-B5T Category 5 and 5e
A1SJ71QE71-B5
A1SJ71QE71-B2
AJ71E71N3-T
*2
AJ71E71N-B5
AJ71E71N-B2 *8
- (Built into GOT)
MELSEC-A AJ71E71N-T
AJ71E71N-B5T
MELSEC-Q AJ71E71-S3
(A mode) A1SJ71E71N3-T Ethernet 100m
A1SJ71E71N-B5
Motion controller A1SJ71E71N-B2
CPU (A Series) A1SJ71E71N-T GT15-J71E71-100
A1SJ71E71N-B5T
A1SJ71E71-B5-S3
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3

PLC Connection cable*1 Maximum GOT Number of 1
segment connectable
Communication
PROCEDURES FOR
Ethernet module
Model name Cable model length*3 Option device Model equipment
*4*5 type
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Twisted pair cable *2
• 10BASE-T
*8
Shielded twisted pair - (Built into GOT)
cable (STP) or unshielded
128 GOTs*7
twisted pair cable (UTP):
MELSEC-L LJ71E71-100 Ethernet 100m
Category 3, 4, and 5
• 100BASE-TX
(recommended to
16 units or less) 2
Shielded twisted pair GT15-J71E71-100
THAT CAN BE SET

cable (STP):
DEVICE RANGE
Category 5 and 5e
*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
*2
A cross cable is available for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module.
When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching 3
hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment.
FOR MONITORING
For how to check the function version, refer to the following.
ACCESS RANGE
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
*3 A length between a hub and a node.
The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used.
The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used.
• 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m)
• 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m)
When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of
cascades.
4
For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.
HOW TO MONITOR
*4 For the system configuration of the Ethernet module, refer to the following manuals.
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic)
REDUNTANT
For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual
SYSTEM
For A Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual
*5 Select one of the following [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.
• Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series): RJ71EN71
• Ethernet module (Q Series): QJ71E71 5
• Ethernet module (QnA Series): AJ71QE71
BUS CONNECTION
• Ethernet module (A Series): AJ71QE71
For [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following.
8.3.3 Ethernet setting
*6 When using the peripheral I/F of Q170MCPU, Q17nDCPU-S1 or MR-MQ100, refer to the following.
8.2.5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU)
*7 In case of RJ71EN71, the number of connectable GOTs for one network is 119 units (at most).
*8
Other than RJ71EN71, the number of connectable GOTs for one network is 63 units (at most).
GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE, GT1450-QMBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.
6
*9 GT14 cannot be connected with MELSEC-QS.
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET

 When connecting to MELSEC-FX
Ethernet Communication driver

PLC CPU GOT
module
Connection cable Ethernet (FX), Gateway
PLC Connection cable*1 Maximum GOT Number of

Communication segment connectable
Ethernet module
*4*5 type length*3 equipment
*2
*7
MELSEC-FX - (Built into GOT)
FX3U-ENET-L Ethernet 100m
(FX3U)
GT15-J71E71-100
2 GOTs
*2
FX3UC-1PS-5V,
*7
MELSEC-FX FX2NC-CNV-IF - (Built into GOT)
Ethernet 100m
(FX3UC) +
FX3U-ENET-L*6
GT15-J71E71-100
*2
FX3U-CNV-BD,
FX3U-422-BD, Twisted pair cable - (Built into GOT) *7
MELSEC-FX
FX3U-232-BD, Ethernet • 10BASE-T 100m
(FX3U)
+ Shielded twisted pair
FX3U-ENET-ADP*8*9 cable (STP) or unshielded
GT15-J71E71-100
twisted pair cable (UTP):
Category 3, 4, and 5 *2
• 100BASE-TX *7
MELSEC-FX - (Built into GOT)
Shielded twisted pair
FX3U-ENET-ADP Ethernet 100m
(FX3UC) cable (STP):
Category 5 and 5e
GT15-J71E71-100
4 GOTs
*2
FX3G-CNV-ADP,
MELSEC-FX *7
+ Ethernet - (Built into GOT)
(FX3G) *9
FX3U-ENET-ADP 100m
MELSEC-FX
FX3U-ENET-ADP*9 Ethernet GT15-J71E71-100
(FX3GC)
*2
FX3S-CNV-ADP - (Built into GOT) *7

MELSEC-FX
+ Ethernet 100m
(FX3S)
FX3U-ENET-ADP*9
GT15-J71E71-100
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
*2 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching
cascades.
8 - 10 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
*4 For the system configuration of the Ethernet module, refer to the following manuals.
For FX Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual

1
PROCEDURES FOR
*5 Select one of the following [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.
• Ethernet module (FX Series): FX
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
*6 When using an Ethernet module with the FX3UC series, FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is required.
*8 When using an Ethernet module with the FX3U series, FX3U-CNV-BD, FX3U-422-BD, or FX3U-232-BD is required.
*9 FX3U-ENET-ADP occupies one extension communication adapter CH (Max. 2 CHs) of the FX3U(C) or FX3G(C) and one extension 2
communication adapter CH (Max. 1 CH) of the FX3S. One CPU allows the connection of only one FX3U-ENET-ADP.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 11
8.2.2 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controller module
Connecting to
Built-in
GOT Communication driver
Ethernet port
CPU
Connection cable
Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700
PLC Maximum GOT Number of

Connection cable*1*2 segment connectable
Communication
Model name length*4 Option device Model equipment
type
MELSEC iQ-R
Ethernet
Series*10*11
Motion controller
CPU*10*11 *3
Ethernet
(MELSEC iQ-R - (Built into GOT)
*9
Series)
C Controller module
(MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet 100m 16 GOTs
Series)
*3
MELSEC-QnUDE(H) - (Built into GOT) *9

*5*6
Ethernet
MELSEC-QnUDV
*5*6
Twisted pair cable
GT15-J71E71-100
• 10BASE-T
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or
*3
unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP):
Category 3, 4, and 5 *9
- (Built into GOT)
C Controller module • 100BASE-TX
Ethernet 100m *14
(Q Series) Shielded twisted pair cable (STP):
Category 5 and 5e
GT15-J71E71-100
*3
*9
- (Built into GOT)
MELSEC-L*7*8 Ethernet 100m 16 GOTs
GT15-J71E71-100
*3
*9
- (Built into GOT)
MELSEC-FX
Ethernet 100m 4 GOTs
(FX3GE)
GT15-J71E71-100
Twisted pair cable

• 10BASE-T
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): *3
MELSEC iQ-F
Ethernet Category 3 or higher 100m - (Built into GOT) 8 GOTs
Series*12*13 *9
• 100BASE-TX
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP):
Category 5 or higher
system.
*2 For a connection via a hub, use the straight cable.
When the GOT is directly connected to the CPU with an Ethernet cable, both the straight cable and cross cable are applicable.
*3 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
cascades.
2
THAT CAN BE SET

*5 For the system configuration of Built-in Ethernet port QCPU, refer to the following manual.
DEVICE RANGE
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
*6 Select [QnUD(P)V/QnUDEH] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.
*7 For the system configuration of Built-in Ethernet port LCPU, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-In Ethernet Function)

3
*8 Select [LCPU] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
*10 Select [RCPU] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.
*11
For the system configuration of Built-in Ethernet port RCPU, refer to the following manual. 4
HOW TO MONITOR
*12 Select [FX5CPU] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
*13 For the system configuration of MELSEC iQ-F Series, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC iQ-F User's Manual

*14 By the controller type of the C Controller module (Q Series) and an operation mode, It's different in number of connectable GOTs.
5
Controller Type Operation mode Number of connectable GOTs
BUS CONNECTION
Standard monitor mode 1
Q12DCCPU-V
Expansion mode 16
Q24DHCCPU-V/VG/LS - 16
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8.2.3 Connecting to Display I/F
CNC
PLC CPU GOT
C70 Communication driver
Connection cable
PLC Maximum GOT

Connection cable *1 segment
Communication equipment
Model name length*3 Option device Model
type

• 10BASE-T
*6
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or - (Built into GOT)
CNC C70
(Q173NCCPU) Ethernet 100m 16 GOTs for 1 network
*4*5
• 100BASE-TX
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): GT15-J71E71-100
Category 5 and 5e
system.
cascades.
*4 For the system configuration of the CNC C70, refer to the following manual.
C70 Series SET UP MANUAL

*5 Select [Q17nNC] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.
8.2.4 Connection to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module 1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Ethernet(MELSEC),
Q17nNC, CRnD-700
CC-Link IE Field CC-Link IE

2
Field Network
QCPU Network Master/ GOT
THAT CAN BE SET

Ethernet adapter
Local module
DEVICE RANGE
module
CC-Link IE
3
Connection cable
PLC Field Network *1 GOT
Connection cable 2)
FOR MONITORING
1)*4
ACCESS RANGE
Ethernet adapter module
CC-Link Number of
IE Field connectable
Cable model Maximum equipment
Model Network Cable Max. Communication Model Communication Option
Connection diagram segment Model
name Master/ model distance type name type *3
device
number length
Local
module 4
HOW TO MONITOR
• 10BASE-T - (Built
*7
Shielded twisted into
REDUNTANT
MELSEC-Q GOT)
pair cable (STP) or
(Q mode) Double- 128 GOTs*6
SYSTEM
unshielded twisted
shielded NZ2G (recommen
QJ71GF pair cable (UTP):
C twisted 100m CC-Link IE F- Ethernet 100m ded to 16
11-T2 Category 3, 4, and
Controller pair ETB units or
module cable*4
5
• 100BASE-TX
GT15-
J71E71
less) 5
(Q Series)
Shielded twisted -100
BUS CONNECTION
pair cable (STP):
Category 5 and 5e
system.
*2
When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching
6
CONNECTION TO

DIRECT

CPU
7
cascades.
COMPUTER LINK

*4 Use cables with the following specifications.
CONNECTION
Connector Range
Cable that satisfies the following specifications:

Category 5e or higher
IEEE802.3 1000BASE-T
Shielded RJ-45
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B(Category 5e)
8
*5 For the system configuration on the CC-Link IE Field Network module side, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual

CONNECTION
*6 The number of connectable GOTs for one network is 63 units (at most).
ETHERNET
8.2.5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller
CPU)
Q172DCPU-S1
PLC Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU GOT Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700
CPU
Q173DSCPU
Connection cable
Q170MCPU
Q170MSCPU
Q170MSCPU-S1
MR-MQ100
PLC Maximum GOT Number of

Communication Connection cable*1 segment connectable
Model name*3 length*4 Option device Model equipment
type
Motion controller CPU *2

(Q Series) Twisted pair cable
*5
Q172DCPU-S1 • 10BASE-T - (Built into GOT)
Q173DCPU-S1 Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or
Q172DSCPU unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP):
Ethernet 30m 16 GOTs for 1 network
Q173DSCPU Category 3, 4, and 5
Q170MCPU • 100BASE-TX
Q170MSCPU Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): GT15-J71E71-100
Q170MSCPU-S1 Category 5 and 5e
MR-MQ100
system.

*3 When using the PERIPHERAL I/F, set as shown below.
• Use the GT Designer3 Version1.12N or later.
• Select [QnUDE(H)] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.
cascades.
HINT
Direct connection between PERIPHERAL I/F and GOT
The PERIPHERAL I/F and GOT can be directly connected by using a cross cable for the Ethernet connection
cable.
1
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.
 GT16, GT14 2
THAT CAN BE SET

2.
DEVICE RANGE
3. 3
FOR MONITORING
4.
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
Set the network No. of the GOT.
GOT NET No. 1 to 239
(Default: 1)
REDUNTANT
Set the station No. of the GOT.
SYSTEM
Click! GOT PLC No.*3 1 to 64
(Default: 1)
GOT Set the IP address of the GOT. 0.0.0.0 to

IP Address*2 (Default: 192.168.3.18) 255.255.255.255
Set the subnet mask for the sub 5
menu. network. (Only for connection via
BUS CONNECTION
router) 0.0.0.0 to
Subnet Mask*2
If the sub network is not used, the
default value is set.
255.255.255.255
channel to be used from the list menu. (Default: 255.255.255.0)
3. Set the following items. Default

Set the router address of the default
gateway where the GOT is connected. 0.0.0.0 to
• Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Gateway*2 (Only for connection via router) 255.255.255.255
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller
Type to be connected. Ethernet
1024 to 5010,
6
Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet
5014 to 65534
Download Port download.
• I/F: Interface to be used (Except for 5011, 5012,
CONNECTION TO
No.*2 (Default: 5014)
5013 and 49153)
• Driver:
Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 Set the GOT port No. for the
connection with the Ethernet module.
Ethernet(FX), Gateway
DIRECT
1024 to 5010,
GOT • For Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC,
5014 to 65534
CPU
Communication and CRnD-700

4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Port No.*4 (Default: 5001)
(Except for 5011, 5012,
5013 and 49153)
7
• For Ethernet(FX), Gateway
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. (Default: 5019)
Make the settings according to the usage Set the number of retries to be
environment. performed when a communication
COMPUTER LINK
timeout occurs.
CONNECTION
Retry 0 to 5times
8.3.2 Communication detail settings When receiving no response after
retries, the communication times out.
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. (Default: 3times)
Specify the time period from the GOT

startup until GOT starts the
POINT Startup Time 3 to 255sec
communication with the PLC CPU.
(Default: 3sec) 8
The settings of connecting equipment can be Set the time period for a
Timeout Time
communication to time out. 1 to 90sec
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. *1
(Default: 3sec)
CONNECTION

ETHERNET
Set the delay time for reducing the

1.1.2 I/F communication setting Delay Time load of the network/destination PLC.
0 to 10000
( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)
*1 To connect the GOT with the Ethernet module (Q Series) in
the one-on-one relationship using a cross cable, set
[Timeout Time] to 6sec. or longer.
 GT15
*2 Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT
IP Address Setting] screen.
*3 Each of [GOT PLC No.] set in the communication detail

setting and [PLC No.] set in the Ethernet setting must be set
to different station numbers.
*4 When connecting to the QCPU, LCPU, do not set [5009] for
the port No. Otherwise, monitoring becomes unavailable. Item Description Range

(Default: 1)

GOT PLC No.*2 1 to 64
(Default: 1)

IP address (Default: 192.168.0.18) 255.255.255.255
Set the subnet mask for the sub

network.(Only for connection via router)
Subnet 0.0.0.0 to
If the sub network is not used, the
Mask 255.255.255.255
(Default: 255.255.255.0)

gateway where the GOT is
Default 0.0.0.0 to
connected.(Only for connection via
Gateway 255.255.255.255
router)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
1024 to 5010,
Ethernet Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet
5014 to 65534
Download download.
(Except for 5011, 5012,
Port No. (Default: 5014)
5013 and 49153)
Set the GOT port No. for the connection

with the Ethernet module.
1024 to 5010,
GOT • For Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC,
5014 to 65534
Communication and CRnD-700
(Except for 5011, 5012,
Port No.*3 (Default: 5001)
5013 and 49153)
• For Ethernet(FX), Gateway
(Default: 5019)

timeout occurs.
Retry 0 to 5times
When receiving no response after
(Default: 3times)

Startup Time 3 to 255sec
(Default: 3sec)

Timeout Time
to time out. 3 to 90sec
*1
(Default: 3sec)
Set the delay time for reducing the load

Delay 0 to 10000
of the network/destination PLC.
Time ( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)
*1 To connect the GOT with the Ethernet module (Q Series) in

the one-on-one relationship using a cross cable, set
[Timeout Time] to 6sec. or longer.
*3 When connecting to the QCPU, LCPU, do not set [5009] for
the port No. Otherwise, monitoring becomes unavailable.
8.3.3 Ethernet setting 1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Example of [Detail setting].
For examples of [Detail setting], refer to the
following.
(2) Communication interface setting by Utility 2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
data.
manual. Item Description Range
GT User's Manual The host is displayed.
(3) Precedence in communication settings Host (The host is indicated with an
asterisk (*).))
- 3
FOR MONITORING
Utility, the latest setting is effective. Set the network No. of the
ACCESS RANGE
N/W No. connected Ethernet module. 1 to 239
(Default: blank)
Set the station No. of the
PLC No.*4 connected Ethernet module. 1 to 64
(Default: blank)
RCPU,
RnCCPU, 4
FX5CPU,
HOW TO MONITOR
QnUD(P)V/QnUDEH,
QnD(H)CCPU,
REDUNTANT
Set the type of the connected LCPU,
Type*1
SYSTEM
Ethernet module. Q17nNC,
(Default: QJ71E71/LJ71E71) RJ71EN71,
QJ71E71/LJ71E71,
AJ71QE71,
AJ71E71, 5
FX,
BUS CONNECTION
NZ2GF-ETB
Set the IP address of the
0.0.0.0 to
IP Address connected Ethernet module.
255.255.255.255
(Default: blank)
Set the port No. of the
Port No.*2 connected Ethernet module. 1024 to 65534
(Default: 5001)
6
Communication*3 UDP UDP, TCP
CONNECTION TO
*1 Select one of the following [Controller Type].
• Built-in Ethernet port (hereafter CPU): RCPU, RnMTCPU,
RnPCPU
• C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series): RnCCPU
DIRECT
• Built-in Ethernet port (MELSEC iQ-F Series): FX5CPU

CPU
• Connection to Built-in Ethernet port: QnUD(P)V/QnUDEH,

QCPU, Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU(-S1), Q173D(S)CPU/
Q172D(S)CPU
• C Controller module (Q Series): QnD(H)CCPU 7
• Connection to Built-in Ethernet port LCPU: LCPU
• Ethernet module (NZ2GF-ETB): NZ2GF-ETB
COMPUTER LINK
• Q17nNCCPU: Q17nNC
CONNECTION
• The RnENCPU varies in choice of Controller Type by a

port name.
Port CPU P1 : RCPU
Port P1 : RJ71EN71
Port P2 : Not applicable to the Ethernet
connection.
• Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series): RJ71EN71
• Ethernet module (Q, L Series): QJ71E71/LJ71E71
8
• Ethernet module (QnA Series): AJ71QE71
• Ethernet module (A Series): AJ71QE71
CONNECTION
• Ethernet module (FX Series): FX

• Built-in Ethernet port FXCPU: FX
ETHERNET
For the applicable Ethernet module, refer to the following.

*2 Set only when selecting "AJ71E71" in [Controller Type].
When other than [AJ71E71] is selected, the port No. is as
8.3.4 Routing parameter setting
follows.
• [RCPU], [RnCCPU], [QnUDE(H)]: 5006 (fixed)
• [FX5CPU]: 5562 (fixed) Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set.
• [RJ71EN71][Q17nNC], [QJ71E71], [AJ71QE71]: 5001 However, the same transfer network number cannot be set
(fixed)
• [FX]: 5551 (When using FX3U-ENET-L)
twice or more (multiple times).
5556 (When using FX3U-ENET-ADP) Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the
When using built-in Ethernet port FXCPU:5556
request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network
*3 When selecting the FX in [Controller Type], the
communication type is the TCP (fixed). No.]s.
to different station numbers. POINT
Routing parameter setting
When communicating within the host network, routing
POINT
parameter setting is unnecessary.
(1) Example of [Ethernet setting]
For details of routing parameters, refer to the following
For examples of [Ethernet setting], refer to the
manual.
following.
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module
User's Manual (Application)
(2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT
Navigator
(a) The color of the cells for the items which are
reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT
Navigator changes to green. Set items, which
are displayed in green cells, from the
MELSOFT Navigator.
(b) When the settings of N/W No., PLC No., type
or IP address are reflected to the parameter
from the MELSOFT Navigator, those settings
are added. Items set in advance are not
deleted. However, if the combination of the N/
W No. and the PLC No. or the IP address
overlaps, the item set in advance is
overwritten.
(3) Changing the host on the GOT main unit Item Range
The host can be changed by the utility function of
the GOT main unit. For the detailed connection Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
method, refer to the following manual. Relay Network No. *1 1 to 239
Relay Station No.*1 1 to 64
(When using GT16)
*1 When accessing to other networks relaying a Build-in
Ethernet port CPU, set the virtual network No. and PLC No.
set in the Ethernet settings on GT Designer3.
(2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT 1
Navigator
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Routing parameter setting of relay station
(a) Routing parameter setting may also be
necessary for the relay station. For the
MELSOFT Navigator.
setting, refer to the following.
(b) When the settings of Transfer network No.,
8.4 PLC Side Setting Relay network No. or Relay station No. are 2
(b) If the routing parameter setting is necessary reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT
for the PLC which is set as a relay station
THAT CAN BE SET

Navigator, those settings are added. Items set
DEVICE RANGE
when the monitoring target of the GOT is in advance are not deleted.However, if the
connected to another network via the Ethernet target network No. overlaps, the item set in
port of the built-in Ethernet port PLC, refer to advance is overwritten.
the following system configuration example. (c) The routing information is used manually by
Do not set the network No. of the the user when the data is created. Therefore,
communication detail settings of the GOT
side.
after changing the network configuration by 3
MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing
For the setting, refer to the following.
FOR MONITORING
information again. For details of the creation
ACCESS RANGE
8.4 PLC Side Setting of the routing information, refer to the
MELSOFT Navigator help.
(System configuration example)
GOT

4
Target network No.: [3]
HOW TO MONITOR
Built-in Ethernet Relay network No.: [1]
port PLC Relay station No.:
REDUNTANT
Station number of relay station 1
SYSTEM
Hub etc. Network No.1
Gateway
(Router etc.)
5
BUS CONNECTION
Relay Target network No.: [3]
station 1 Relay network No.: [2]
Relay station No.: Station number of relay station 2
MELSECNET/H etc. Network No.2

Relay Target network No.: [1]
station 2 Relay network No.: [2]
Relay station No.: Station number of relay station 1
6
MELSECNET/H etc. Network No.3
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Model Reference
Model Reference
AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5,
R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU,
AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T,
R32CPU, R120CPU, R16MTCPU,
AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3,
R32MTCPU
A1SJ71E71N3-T,
R08PCPU, R16PCPU
Ethernet module (A A1SJ71E71N-B5,
R32PCPU, R120PCPU 8.4.10
Series) A1SJ71E71N-B2,
R04ENCPU,
A1SJ71E71N-T,
Built-in Ethernet R08ENCPU, 8.4.1
A1SJ71E71N-B5T,
port RCPU R16ENCPU, 8.4.2
A1SJ71E71-B5-S3,
R32ENCPU,
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3
R120ENCPU,
Ethernet module
R08SFCPU, FX3U-ENET-L, FX3U-ENET-ADP 8.4.11
(FX Series)
R16SFCPU,
R32SFCPU, Built-in Ethernet
FX3GE 8.4.12
R120SFCPU, port FXCPU
C Controller CNC C70 Q173NCCPU 8.4.13

module (MELSEC R12CCPU-V 8.4.4 CC-Link IE Field
iQ-R Series) Network Ethernet QJ71GF11-T2 8.4.14
Built-in Ethernet adapter module
FX5U 8.4.1
port (MELSEC iQ-F
FX5UC 8.4.2
Series)
Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU,
Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU,
Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU, 8.4.5
Built-in Ethernet
Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, 8.4.6
port QCPU
Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, 8.4.15
Q172DSCPU, Q173DSCPU,
Q172DCPU-S1, Q173DCPU-S1,
Q170MCPU,
Q170MSCPU, Q170MSCPU-S1
Q12DCCPU-V
C Controller Q24DHCCPU-V/VG
8.4.8
module (Q Series) Q24DHCCPU-LS
Q26DHCCPU-LS
L02CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT
Built-in Ethernet L02CPU-P 8.4.5
port LCPU L06CPU-P 8.4.6
L26CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L06CPU
Ethernet module
(MELSEC iQ-R RJ71EN71 8.4.3
Series)
Ethernet module (Q QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5,
Series) QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71
8.4.7
Ethernet module (L
LJ71E71-100
Series)
AJ71QE71N3-T,
AJ71QE71N-B5,
AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T,
AJ71QE71N-B5T,
AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5,
Ethernet module
A1SJ71QE71N3-T, 8.4.9
(QnA Series)
A1SJ71QE71N-B5,
A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T,
A1SJ71QE71N-B5T,
A1SJ71QE71-B5,
A1SJ71QE71-B2
8.4.1 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet 1
 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
port CPU (one-to one
PROCEDURES FOR
Designer3
PREPARATORY
connection)
MONITORING
POINT
This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in
Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system (1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
configuration. Designer3 2
For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
POINT Designer3, refer to the following.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
8.3.1 Setting communication interface
Built-in Ethernet port CPU (Communication settings)
For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the (2) Ethernet setting
following manual. When connecting Built-in Ethernet port RCPU to a
Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series GOT, the setting items for the network No. and
Manuals of MELSEC iQ-F Series station No. do not exist at the PLC side. However, 3
these virtual values must be set on the GOT side.
FOR MONITORING
Therefore, set the network No. and station No.
ACCESS RANGE
 System configuration Set the network No. that does not exist on the
network system and any station No.
For connecting one Built-in Ethernet port CPU to one
GOT, the PLC side settings are not required. Set
[Ethernet] for [Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, and (1) Controller setting
then connect Built-in Ethernet port CPU to the GOT.
(For MELSEC iQ-R Series)
Item Set value (Use default value) 4
GOT NET No. 1
HOW TO MONITOR
■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3 GOT PLC No. 1
REDUNTANT
<GOT> GOT IP Address 192.168.3.1
SYSTEM
(The settings other than the
following are set to the default) GOT Port No.
5001
Network No. :1 (Communication)
PLC No. :1
IP address : 192.168.3.1
GOT Port No.
(Ethernet Download)
5014 5
Port No. : 5001
BUS CONNECTION
Communication : UDP (fixed) Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
format
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Retry 3times
<Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU> *1
(The following settings are set to the default) Startup Time 3sec
Network No. : 1 (virtual) *2
Timeout Time 3sec
PLC No.
IP address
: 2 (virtual) *2
: 192.168.3.39 Delay Time 0ms
6
Port No. : 5006 (fixed)
Communication : UDP (fixed)
CONNECTION TO
format (2) Ethernet setting
*1 For the settings when using system devices including a hub
and a transceiver, refer to the following. Item Set value
DIRECT
8.4.6 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU Host *

CPU
(multiple connection)
N/W No. 1*1
*2 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However,
the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. 7
PLC No. 2*2
■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
Ethernet
COMPUTER LINK
Type RCPU*3
setting No.1
CONNECTION
IP address 192.168.3.39
Port No. 5006 (fixed)*4
Communication UDP (fixed)*5
*1
*2
Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No.
Set a value different from that of GOT PLC No.
8
*3 In the case of MELSEC iQ-F series, it is FX5CPU.
*4 In the case of MELSEC iQ-F series, it is 5562 (fixed).
*5 In the case of MELSEC iQ-F series, it is TCP (fixed).
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8.4.2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet
 Checking communication state of Built-in
Ethernet port CPU port CPU (multiple connection)
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in
Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system
Windows. configuration.
C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 POINT
Reply from 192.168.3.39: bytes=32 time
<10ms TTL=32 Built-in Ethernet port CPU
(b) When abnormal communication For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the
C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39 following manual.
Request timed out.
(2) When abnormal communication Manuals of MELSEC iQ-F Series
At abnormal communication, check the following and
execute the Ping command again.
• Cable connecting condition  System configuration
• Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting (For MELSEC iQ-R Series)
• Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
• The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified Designer3
in the ping command <GOT>

following are set to the default)
POINT Network No. :1
PLC No. :1
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer IP address : 192.168.0.18
Port No. : 5001
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a Communication : UDP(fixed)
Ping test from the PLC. format
For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer,
refer to the following manual.
<Connecting to Built-in
1
Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series Ethernet port CPU>
PLC No. : 2 (virtual) *1
IP address : 192.168.0.1
Port No. : 5006(fixed)
Communication : UDP(fixed)
format
<Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU>
2
(The settings other than the following are
set to the default)
IP address : 192.168.0.2
format
■ [Module parameter] of GX Works3

the virtual values must be set on the GOT side.
Designer3
1
 [Module parameter] of GX Works3  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
PROCEDURES FOR
(1) Built-in Ethernet port
Designer3
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(For MELSEC iQ-R Series)
POINT
(1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3 2
Designer3, refer to the following.
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
(2) Ethernet setting
When connecting Built-in Ethernet port CPU to a
GOT, the setting items for the network No. and
station No. do not exist at the PLC side. However, 3
Setting these virtual values must be set on the GOT side.
FOR MONITORING
necessity at Therefore, set the network No. and station No.
ACCESS RANGE
Item Set value
GOT Set the network No. that does not exist on the
connection network system and any station No.
IP Address 192.168.0.1
(1) Controller setting
Subnet Mask -
Default Gateway - Item Set value (Use default value) 4

Online Program Change GOT NET No. 1
HOW TO MONITOR
Permission/Protection Setting
GOT PLC No. 1
(Use default value)
REDUNTANT
Communication Data Code GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18
SYSTEM
Open Method Setting GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001
Target Device Connection GOT Port No.
- 5014
Configuration Setting (Ethernet Download)
5
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
BUS CONNECTION
Retry 3times
Startup Time 3sec
Timeout Time 3sec
Delay Time 0ms

6
Set value CONNECTION TO

Item
DIRECT
CPU
Host * -
N/W No. 1*1 1*1 7

PLC No. *2 *2
2 3
COMPUTER LINK
Ethernet setting
Type RCPU*3 RCPU*3
CONNECTION
No.1
IP address 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.2
Port No. 5006 (fixed)*4 5006 (fixed)*4
Communication UDP (fixed)*5 UDP (fixed)*5
*1 Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No.

8
*2 Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No. and the
PLC No. of other PLCs on the same network.
*3 In the case of MELSEC iQ-F series, it is FX5CPU.
CONNECTION
*4 In the case of MELSEC iQ-F series, it is 5562 (fixed).

ETHERNET
*5 In the case of MELSEC iQ-F series, it is TCP (fixed).
 Checking communication state of Built-in
Ethernet port CPU POINT
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows.
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 is available to a
Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of
Ping test from the PLC.
Windows. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3, refer
(a) When normal communication to the following manual.
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1
<10ms TTL=32
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1 8.4.3 Connecting to Ethernet
Request timed out. module (MELSEC iQ-R
(2) When abnormal communication Series)
At abnormal communication, check the following and
This section describes the settings of the GOT and
Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in the following
• Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting
case of the system configuration.
• Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not)
• The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified
in the ping command POINT
Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)
For details of the Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R
Series), refer to the following manual.
 System configuration
Designer3
<GOT>
Network No. :1
PLC No. :1
IP address : 192.168.3.18
Port No. : 5001
format
<Ethernet module>*1
Network No. :1
PLC No. :2
IP address : 192.168.3.19
Port No. : 5001
format
■ [Module parameter] of GX Works3
*1 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0.

The Start XY No. of the Ethernet module is set to "0".
1
 [Module parameter] of GX Works3 (2) Target Device Connection Configuration Setting
PROCEDURES FOR
(1) Module parameter of Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
R Series)*1
*1 Set [Module parameter] of the port under [Module
information].
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
Item Set value 3
Protocol (Use default value)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Open system MELSOFT connection (fixed)
Host station port No. (Use default value)
POINT
Setting 4
necessity at When changing the module parameter
Item Set value
HOW TO MONITOR
GOT After writing module parameters to the PLC CPU, turn
connection the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the
REDUNTANT
IP Address 192.168.3.19 PLC CPU.
SYSTEM
Subnet Mask -
Default Gateway -
Setting Method of Network

(3) Routing setting
Up to 238 [Target Station Network No.]s can be set.
5
Do Not Use IP Address
No. and Station No. However, the same target station network number
BUS CONNECTION
Network No.*2 1 cannot be set twice or more (multiple times).
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from
Station No.*3 2 the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of [Target
Transient Transmission Station Network No.]s.
Group No.
Online Program Change

Permission/Protection
6
(Use default value)
Setting
CONNECTION TO
Communication Data Code
Open Method Setting

DIRECT
Target Device Connection

CPU
Refer to (2).
Configuration Setting
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary 7

*2 Set the same network No. as that of the GOT.
*3 Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT.
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
Item Range
Target Station network No. 1 to 239

8
Relay Station network No. 1 to 239
Relay station No. 1 to 120

CONNECTION
ETHERNET
POINT  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3
Routing parameter setting of request source
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the (1) Controller setting
request source GOT.
For the setting, refer to the following. Item Set value (Use default value)
8.3.4 Routing parameter setting GOT NET No. 1
GOT PLC No. 1
GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18

(4) Communication confirmation
The INIT. LED on the Ethernet module turns on when GOT Port No.
5001
(Communication)
the module is ready to communicate.
For confirming the communication state, refer to the GOT Port No.
5014
following. (Ethernet Download)
■ Confirming the communication state of Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

Ethernet module Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
RJ71EN71 Retry 3times
RUN ERR. Startup Time 3sec

INIT. COM.ERR.
Timeout Time 3sec
OPEN 100M
SD RD Delay Time 0ms
Item Set value
Host *
N/W No. 1
PLC No. 2
Ethernet
Ethernet Type RJ71EN71
setting No.1
IP address 192.168.3.19
Port No. 5001 (fixed)
Communication UDP (fixed)
POINT
[Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
8.4.4 Connection to C Controller 1
 Confirming the communication state of
module (MELSEC iQ-R
PROCEDURES FOR
Ethernet module
PREPARATORY
Series)
MONITORING
This section describes the settings of the GOT and C
Windows. Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in the following
C:\>Ping 192.168.3.19
case of system configuration.
2
Use CW Configurator for the C Controller module
Reply from 192.168.3.19: bytes=32 time<1ms (MELSEC iQ-R Series) communication settings.
THAT CAN BE SET

TTL=64
DEVICE RANGE
C:\>Ping 192.168.3.19 POINT
Request timed out.
C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)
(2) When abnormal communication For details of C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R
At abnormal communication, check the following and Series), refer to the following manual. 3
Manuals of C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
• Cable connecting condition Series)
• IP address of the Ethernet module specified by Ping
command Designer3
<GOT>
4
POINT (The settings other than the
HOW TO MONITOR
Network No. :1
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3
REDUNTANT
PLC No. :1
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 is available to a IP address : 192.168.0.18
SYSTEM
Ping test from the PLC. Port No. : 5001
For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer, Communication : UDP(fixed)
format
5
<C Controller module
BUS CONNECTION
1
(MELSEC iQ-R Series)>
IP address : 192.168.0.3
format 6
<C Controller module
2
CONNECTION TO
(MELSEC iQ-R Series)>
DIRECT

CPU
IP address : 192.168.0.4
format
7
■ [Module parameter] of CW Configurator
COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION

Designer3
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
 [Module parameter] of CW Configurator  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
(1) Module parameter
Designer3
POINT
Designer3
GOT, the setting items for the network No. and
station No. do not exist at the PLC side. However,
Setting Therefore, set the network No. and station No.
*1
necessity at Set the network No. that does not exist on the
Item Set value
GOT network system and any station No.
connection
CH1 Use (1) Controller setting

IP Address 192.168.3.3
Item Set value (Use default value)
Subnet Mask -
GOT NET No. 1
Default Gateway -
GOT PLC No. 1
CH2 Not Use GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18
IP Address - GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001
Subnet Mask - GOT Port No.

5014
(Ethernet Download)
Default Gateway -
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
External Device
-
Configuration Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Retry 3times

*1 Set the IP address corresponding to the CH No. to be used Startup Time 3sec
to connect to the GOT.
Timeout Time 3sec
Delay Time 0ms
Set value
Item
Host * -
N/W No. 1*1 1*1
PLC No. 2*2 3*2

Ethernet setting
No.1 Type RnCCPU RnCCPU
IP address 192.168.0.3 192.168.0.4
Port No. 5006 (fixed) 5006 (fixed)
Communication UDP (fixed) UDP (fixed)

 Checking communication state of C
port CPU (one-to-one
PROCEDURES FOR
Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)
PREPARATORY
connection)
MONITORING
Windows. Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.3
configuration.
2
POINT
THAT CAN BE SET

<10ms TTL=32
DEVICE RANGE
Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.3
Request timed out. For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the
following manual.
(2) When abnormal communication QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via
At abnormal communication, check the following and Built-in Ethernet Port) 3
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
• Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting In Ethernet Function)
• The IP address of C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-
R Series) specified in the ping command
For connecting one Built-in Ethernet port QCPU to one
POINT
GOT, the PLC side settings are not required. Set
[Ethernet] for [Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, and
4
then connect Built-in Ethernet port QCPU to the GOT.
HOW TO MONITOR
Ethernet diagnostics of CW Configurator
Ethernet diagnostics of CW Configurator is available to
REDUNTANT
Designer3
a Ping test from the PLC.
SYSTEM
For details of Ethernet diagnostics of CW Configurator, <GOT>
refer to the following manual. following are set to the default)
Manuals of C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R
Series)
Network No.
PLC No.
:1
:1
5
IP address : 192.168.3.1
BUS CONNECTION
Port No. : 5001
format

(The following settings are set to the default)
Network No.
PLC No.
: 1 (virtual) *2
: 2 (virtual) *2
6
IP address : 192.168.3.39
CONNECTION TO
format
DIRECT

CPU
and a transceiver, refer to the following.

8.4.6 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
(multiple connection) 7
COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT  Checking communication state of Connecting
Designer3 to Built-in Ethernet port CPU

POINT Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of
Windows.
Designer3
C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39
<10ms TTL=32
C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39
Request timed out.
When connecting Built-in Ethernet port QCPU or
LCPU to a GOT, the settings items for the network (2) When abnormal communication
No. and station No. do not exist at the PLC side. At abnormal communication, check the followings and
However, these virtual values must be set on the execute the Ping command again.
GOT side. Therefore, set the network No. and • Cable connecting condition
station No. • Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting
Therefore, set the network No. and station No. • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not)
Set the network No. that is not existed on the • The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified
network system and any station No.. in the ping command
(3) Controller setting POINT

Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a
GOT NET No. 1
GOT PLC No. 1 For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer,
GOT IP Address 192.168.3.1 refer to the following manual.
GOT Port No.

QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design,
(Communication)
5001 Maintenance and Inspection)
GOT Port No.

MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual
(Ethernet Download)
5014 (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
Inspection)
Retry 3times
Startup Time 3sec
Timeout Time 3sec
Delay Time 0ms
Item Set value
Host *
N/W No. 1*1
PLC No. 2*2

Ethernet
setting No.1 Type QnUDE(H), LCPU
IP address 192.168.3.39

*2 Set a value different from that of GOT PLC No.
 [Q parameter setting] or [L parameter setting]
port CPU (multiple connection)
PROCEDURES FOR
for GX Developer
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Example: [Q parameter setting] screen
Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system
configuration.
2
POINT
THAT CAN BE SET

Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
DEVICE RANGE
For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to the
following manual.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via
Built-in Ethernet Port)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built- 3
In Ethernet Function)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Designer3
<GOT>
(The settings other than the Setting 4
following are set to the default) necessity at
Item Set value
HOW TO MONITOR
Network No. :1 GOT
PLC No. :1 connection
REDUNTANT
IP address : 192.168.0.18
Port No. : 5001 IP address 192.168.0.1
SYSTEM
Subnet mask pattern -
format
Default router IP address -
1
<Connecting to Built-in Communication data code 5
Ethernet port CPU>
BUS CONNECTION
(The settings other than the Enable online change
following are set to the default) (FTP, MC protocol)
PLC No. : 2 (virtual) *1 Disable direct connection (Use default value)
IP address : 192.168.0.1 to MELSOFT
Do not respond to search
for CPU (Built-in Ethernet
6
format
port) on network
<Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU>
2
(The settings other than the following are Open settings Refer to (2).
set to the default)
CONNECTION TO
Network No. : 1 (virtual) *1 FTP settings
PLC No. : 3 (virtual) *1 (Use default value)
IP address : 192.168.0.2 Time settings
DIRECT

: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
CPU
format
■ [Q parameter setting] or [L parameter
setting] for GX Developer 7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
(2) Open settings  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
The setting is required for all the connected GOTs.
Designer3
POINT
Designer3

GOT, the settings items for the network No. and
Set the network No. that is not existed on the
network system and any station No..
Item Set value
Protocol UDP (fixed) (1) Controller setting

Host station port No. (Use default value)
GOT NET No. 1
GOT PLC No. 1
GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001
GOT Port No.

5014
(Ethernet Download)
Retry 3times
Startup Time 3sec
Timeout Time 3sec
Delay Time 0ms
Set value
Item
Host * -
N/W No. 1*1 1*1
PLC No. 2*2 3*2

Ethernet setting QnUDE(H), QnUDE(H),
No.1 Type
LCPU LCPU
IP address 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.2

8.4.7 Connecting to Ethernet 1
 Checking communication state of Connecting
module (Q/L Series)
PROCEDURES FOR
to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. This section describes the settings of the GOT and
Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Ethernet module (Q Series) in the following case of the
Windows. system configuration.
2
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1 POINT
THAT CAN BE SET

<10ms TTL=32 Ethernet module (Q/L Series)
DEVICE RANGE
(b) When abnormal communication For details of the Ethernet module (Q/L Series), refer
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1 to the following manual.
Request timed out.
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module
(2) When abnormal communication User's Manual (Basic)
At abnormal communication, check the followings and MELSEC-L Ethernet Interface Module User's 3
execute the Ping command again. Manual (Basic)
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
• The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified
 System configuration (for Q series)
in the ping command ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3
POINT
<GOT> (The settings other than the
4
HOW TO MONITOR
Network No. :1
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer PLC No. :1
IP address : 192.168.0.18
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a
REDUNTANT
Port No. : 5001
Communication format : UDP (fixed)
SYSTEM
For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer, *1
refer to the following manual. <Ethernet module> (The settings other than the
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design,
Maintenance and Inspection)
Network No.
PLC No.
:1
:2
5
IP address : 192.168.0.19
BUS CONNECTION
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual Port No. : 5001
Communication format : UDP(fixed)
(Hardware Design, Maintenance and ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer
Inspection)
*1 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0.
The Start I/O No. of the Ethernet module is set to "0".
POINT 6
When connecting to Q170MCPU
CONNECTION TO
When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of
the Ethernet module is set to "70".
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (2) Operation setting
(1) Network parameter
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Communication data code*1 (Use default value)

Setting
IP address 192.168.0.19
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT Initial timing *1
connection
Send frame setting
Network type Ethernet (fixed)
(Use default value)
Enable Write at RUN time*1
Starting I/O No.*1 0000H
TCP Existence confirmation
Network No.*2 1 setting
Group No. 0 (fixed) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
*3 2 *1 Because port No. 5001 is fixed, these items operate at the

Station No.
following setting without relations to the setting given here.
Mode Online (fixed) • Communication : [Binary code]
date code
Operation setting Refer to (2)
• Initial timing : "Always wait for OPEN"
Initial settings (Communication is applicable while
stopping the PLC CPU.)
Open settings • Enable Write at : [Enable Write at RUN time] (Writing
Router relay parameter RUN time Data is applicable while running the
PLC CPU.)
Station No.<->IP information
(Use default value)
FTP Parameters
POINT
E-mail settings
Interrupt settings
When changing the network parameter
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU,
Redundant settings*4 operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON
Routing Parameters Refer to (3) or resetting.

*1 When using Q170MCPU, set the start I/O to 0070H.
*2 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT.
*4 Set when using Ethernet module in a redundant QnPRHCPU
system.
1
(3) Routing parameter setting  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
PROCEDURES FOR
Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set.
However, the same transfer network number cannot be
Designer3
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
set twice or more (multiple times). (1) Controller setting
the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Item Set value (Use default value)
Network No.]s.
GOT NET No. 1
GOT PLC No. 1

2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GOT Port No.
5001
(Communication)
GOT Port No.

5014
(Ethernet Download)

3
FOR MONITORING
Retry 3times
ACCESS RANGE
Startup Time 3sec
Timeout Time 3sec
Delay Time 0ms
(2) Ethernet setting 4
HOW TO MONITOR
Item Set value
REDUNTANT
Host *
SYSTEM
N/W No. 1
Item Range PLC No. 2

Ethernet
Target network No. 1 to 239 setting No.1
Type QJ71E71
5
Relay network No. 1 to239 IP address 192.168.0.19
BUS CONNECTION
Relay station No. 1 to 64 Port No. 5001 (fixed)
POINT
POINT
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 6
request source GOT. For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
CONNECTION TO
For the setting, refer to the following. Designer3, refer to the following.
8.3.4 Routing parameter setting 8.3.1 Setting communication interface
DIRECT
CPU
(4) Communication confirmation

The INIT. LED on the Ethernet module turns on when
7
For confirming the communication state, refer to the
COMPUTER LINK
following.
CONNECTION
■Confirming the communication state of

Ethernet module
*1
QJ71E71-100
RUN
INIT.
ERR.
COM.ERR.
8
OPEN 100M
SD RD
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
*1 The LEDs layout of QJ71E71-100.
8.4.8 Connecting to C Controller
Ethernet module module (Q Series)
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. This section describes the settings of the GOT and C
Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Controller module (Q Series) in the following case of the
Windows. system configuration.
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 POINT
Reply from 192.168.0.19: bytes=32 time<1ms
TTL=64 C Controller module (Q Series)
(b) When abnormal communication For details of C Controller module (Q Series), refer to
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 the following manual.
Request timed out. C Controller Module (Q Series) User's Manual
(2) When abnormal communication (Hardware Design, Function Explanation)
At abnormal communication, check the followings and
• Cable connecting condition ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
• Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Designer3
• Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) <GOT>

• IP address of GOT specified by Ping command (The settings other than the
Network No. :1
POINT PLC No. :1
IP address : 192.168.3.18
Port No. : 5001
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer is available to a format
For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Developer,
<C controller module (Q Series)>
refer to the following manual. 1
User's manual of the Ethernet module following are set to the default)
IP address : 192.168.3.1
format
<C controller module (Q Series)>

2
(The settings other than the following are
set to the default)
IP address : 192.168.3.2
format
■ Utility setting for C Controller module (Q
Series)

Designer3
(c) Detail settings 1
 Utility setting for C Controller module (Q
PROCEDURES FOR
Series)
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Q12DCCPU-V
Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the C
Controller (Q Series) setting utility.
(a) Connection settings
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT Setting
connection necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default)
Write authority Mark the checkbox

connection
4
IP address 192.168.3.1
HOW TO MONITOR
User name*2 target
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Password*2 password
REDUNTANT
Default gateway -
SYSTEM
Detailed settings -
IP address settings CH2 -
*1 If the IP address of the C Controller module (Q Series) has
*2
been changed, input the changed IP address or host name.
If the account of the C Controller module (Q Series) has
5
been changed, input the changed user name and password.
BUS CONNECTION
(b) Online operation
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
Setting
necessity at
COMPUTER LINK
Item Set value

GOT
CONNECTION
connection
Detailed settings Refer to (3)
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
(d) System settings (2) Q24DHCCPU-V/VG
Use SW4PVC-CCPU-E for the C Controller (Q Series)
setting utility.
(a) Connection settings
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Points occupied by empty
slot
Remote reset
Output mode at STOP to
RUN
Intelligent function module
Setting
settings
necessity at
Initial settings of intelligent (Use default value) Item Set value
GOT
function module connection
WDT (Watchdog timer)
192.168.3.39
setting IP Address*1
(Default)
Error check
255.255.255.0
Operation mode at the Subnet Mask
(Default)
time of error
Default Gateway -
Module synchronization
Built-in Ethernet port open : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Mark the checkbox *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module (Q Series) has
settings
been changed, input the changed IP address.
Event history registration
(Use default value)
settings

Designer3
POINT
Designer3

When connecting C Controller module (Q Series)
to a GOT, the setting items for the network No. and
Set the network No. that is not existed on the
network system and any station No..
(1) Controller setting 8.4.9 Connecting to Ethernet 1
PROCEDURES FOR
module (QnA Series)
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
GOT NET No. 1
GOT PLC No. 1 Ethernet module (QnA Series) in the following case of the
GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18 system configuration.
GOT Port No. (Communication) 5001 2
GOT Port No. POINT
5014
THAT CAN BE SET

(Ethernet Download)
DEVICE RANGE
Ethernet module (QnA Series)
For details of the Ethernet module (QnA Series), refer
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 to the following manual.
Retry 3times For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User’s
Manual
Startup Time
Timeout Time
3sec
3sec
3
FOR MONITORING
Delay Time 0ms
ACCESS RANGE
(2) Ethernet setting ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3
Set value <GOT>(The settings other than
Item the following are set to the default)
Network No. :1 4
Host * - PLC No. :1
IP address : 192.168.0.18
HOW TO MONITOR
Port No. : 5001
N/W No. 1*1 1*1 Communication format : UDP(fixed)
REDUNTANT
PLC No. 2*2 3*2
SYSTEM
Ethernet setting *1
<Ethernet module> (The settings other than
No.1 Type QnD(H)CCPU QnD(H)CCPU
the following are set to the default)
IP address 192.168.3.1 192.168.3.2 Network No. :1

PLC No.
IP address
Port No.
:2
: 192.168.0.19
: 5001
5
Communication UDP (fixed) UDP (fixed) Communication format : UDP(fixed)
BUS CONNECTION
■ Switch settings of Ethernet module
*1 Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No. ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer
PLC No. of other PLCs on the same network. *1 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0.
 Checking communication state of C
Controller module (Q Series)
6
CONNECTION TO
Windows.
DIRECT
C:\>Ping 192.168.3.1
CPU

<10ms TTL=32
(b) When abnormal communication 7
C:\>Ping 192.168.3.1
Request timed out.
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION

8
• The IP address of C Controller module (Q Series)
specified in the ping command
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
 Switch settings of Ethernet module (2) Exchange condition setting switch
Set the operation mode setting switch and exchange Setting
Exchange
condition setting switch. Setting Set necessity at
condition Description
switch value GOT
AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, setting switch
connection
AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T,
AJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71-B5, Selection of line
AJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71-B2
processing at
SW1 OFF
AJ71QE71N3-T *1 A1SJ71QE71N3-T *1 TCP timeout
RUN BUF1
RUN
RDY
BUF1
BUF2
BUF3
RDY
BSY
SW.ERR.
BUF2
BUF3
BUF4
error
BSY BUF4
SW.ERR. BUF5 COM.ERR. BUF5
COM.ERR. BUF6 TEST BUF6
Data code
CPU R/W BUF7 TEST ERR.
OFF
BUF8 BUF7
CPU R/W BUF8
OFF ON SW2
setting*2 (fixed)
TEST
TEST ERR.
MODE
0:ONLINE BCD
SW1
MODE 1:OFFLINE 6789A
EF 12
C
AB DE
(1) 2:TEST1 345

‚O (1) SW2 Self start mode
789
0:ONLINE
F01
1:OFFLINE
2 3456
3:TEST2
SW3 ON
2:TEST1 4:TEST3
3:TEST2 ON 5:TEST4
setting*3
4:TEST3 SW1
5:TEST4 SW1
SW2 SW2 SW3
SW3 SW3
SW4
SW5 (2) SW4
SW4
SW6
SW7 SW5
(2)
SW6
SW4
SW8
SW7
SW8 SW5
SW6 (Must not to be OFF
ON
SW5
SW7 used) (fixed)
SW8 SW6
10BASE-T
CPU exchange OFF

SW7
timing setting*2 (fixed)
10BASE-T
Initial timing
SW8 OFF
setting
A1SJ71QE71N3-T

*2 Because port No. 5001 is fixed, these items operate at the
following setting without relations to the setting given here.
*1 The figure of AJ71QE71N3-T and • Data code setting : [Binary code]
A1SJ71QE71N3-T.
• Enable Write at : [Enable Write at RUN time] (Writing
(1) Operation mode setting switch RUN time Data is applicable while running the
PLC CPU.)
Setting *3 When SW3 is ON, the initial processing is executed
Operation mode setting Set necessity at regardless of the initial request signal (Y19).
Description In addition, communication is applicable while stopping the
switch value GOT
PLC CPU.
connection For the initial processing by using the initial request signal
(Y19), refer to the following manual.
For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual
0
Online
(fixed)
POINT
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary When the switch setting has been changed
PLC CPU.
1
 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (2) Routing parameter setting
PROCEDURES FOR
(1) Network parameter However, the same transfer network number cannot be
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
set twice or more (multiple times).
the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer
Network No.]s.
2
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
Item Range
Item Set value

Setting necessity
Target network No. 1 to 239 5
at GOT connection Relay network No. 1 to 239
BUS CONNECTION
Network type Ethernet (fixed) Relay station No. 1 to 64
Start I/O No. 0000H
Network No.*1 1
POINT
Group No. 0 (fixed)
Station No.*2 2
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the 6
IP address 192.168.0.19 request source GOT.
CONNECTION TO
Station No.<->IP For the setting, refer to the following.
information 8.3.4 Routing parameter setting
(Use default value)
FTP Parameters
DIRECT
CPU
Router relay parameter
Routing parameters Refer to (2)

7
COMPUTER LINK

CONNECTION
POINT
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, 8
operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON
or resetting.
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
(3) Communication confirmation 8.4.10 Connecting to Ethernet
The RDY LED on the Ethernet module turn on when module (A Series)
For confirming the communication state, refer to the
following. This section describes the settings of the GOT and
Ethernet module (A Series) in the following case of the
8.3.4 ■Confirming the communication state of system configuration.
Ethernet module
AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5,
AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T, POINT
AJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T,A1SJ71QE71-B5,
AJ71QE71-B5 A1SJ71QE71-B2
Ethernet module (A Series)
RUN BUF1
BUF2
RUN BUF1 For details of the Ethernet module (A Series), refer to
RDY BUF2
RDY
BSY
BUF3
BUF4
BSY BUF3 the following manual.
SW.ERR. BUF4
SW.ERR.
COM.ERR.
BUF5
BUF6
COM.ERR.
TEST
BUF5
BUF6
CPU R/W BUF7 TEST ERR. BUF7
BUF8
CPU R/W BUF8
TEST
TEST ERR.
 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3

<GOT> (The settings other than the
Designer3 following are set to the default)
Network No. :1
(1) Controller setting PLC No. :1
IP address : 192.168.0.18
Port No. : 5001
Item Set value (Use default value) Communication format : UDP (fixed)
GOT NET No. 1
*1
GOT PLC No. 1 <Ethernet module> (The settings other than the
Network No. : 1 (virtual)*2
GOT Port No. PLC No. : 2 (virtual)*2
5001 IP address : 192.168.0.19
(Communication)
Port No. : 5001
GOT Port No. Communication format : UDP(fixed)
5014 ■ Switch settings of Ethernet module
(Ethernet Download)
■ Sequence program
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 *1 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0.
Retry 3times
Startup Time 3sec the virtual values must be set on the GOT side.
Timeout Time 3sec ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value
Host *
N/W No. 1
PLC No. 2
Ethernet
Type AJ71QE71
setting No.1
IP address 192.168.0.19
POINT
1
 Switch settings of Ethernet module (1) Operation mode setting switch
PROCEDURES FOR
Set the operation mode setting switch and exchange
Setting
PREPARATORY
condition setting switch.
MONITORING
Operation mode necessity at
Description Set value
setting switch GOT
AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5,
AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T, connection
AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3 A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3,
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3
A J71E71N3-T
RUN
RDY
BSY
BUF1
BUF2
BUF3
BUF4
*2 A1SJ71E71N3-T
RUN
RDY
BSY
SW.ERR.
BUF1
BUF2
BUF3
BUF4
*2
Online
0 2
(fixed)
SW.ERR. BUF5
COM.ERR. BUF6 COM.ERR. BUF5
CPU R/W BUF7 TEST BUF6
BUF8
TEST ERR. BUF7
CPU R/W BUF8
THAT CAN BE SET

TEST
TEST ERR.
DEVICE RANGE
MODE
BCD
MODE 0:ONLINE
(1)
6789A
EF012
C 1:OFFLINE

0:ONLINE
8
2:TEST1
(1)
0
1:OFFLINE 4 345
2:TEST1 3:TEST2
3:TEST2 ON 4:TEST3
4:TEST3
SW1 SW1
SW2
SW3 SW2
(2) Exchange condition setting switch*1

SW4
SW3
SW5
SW6
SW7
(2) SW4 (2)
SW8 SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
ON
Setting
10BASE-T
Exchange
condition
Setting
Description
Set necessity at 3
switch value GOT
setting switch
FOR MONITORING
connection
ACCESS RANGE
10BASE-T Selection of line
SW1 processing at TCP OFF
A1SJ71E71N3-T timeout error
Data code setting OFF

OFF ON SW2
(binary code) (fixed)
*2 The figure of AJ71E71N3-T and A1SJ71E71N3-T. SW1
SW3
4
SW2
HOW TO MONITOR
SW3 SW4 (Must not to be OFF
SW4
SW5 used) (fixed)
REDUNTANT
SW5
SW6 SW6
SYSTEM
SW7
CPU exchange
SW8
timing setting ON
SW7
(Enable write at
RUN time)
(fixed)
5
BUS CONNECTION
SW8 Initial timing setting OFF

*1 The exchange condition setting switches of A1SJ71E71-B5-
S3 and A1SJ71E71-B2-S3 are specified as the below.
Setting
Exchange
condition
Setting
switch
Description
Set
value
necessity at
GOT
6
setting switch
connection
CONNECTION TO
Selection of line
SW1 processing at TCP OFF
timeout error
DIRECT
Data code setting OFF

CPU
ON OFF SW2
SW1 (binary code) (fixed)
SW2
SW3 CPU exchange 7
SW4 timing setting ON
SW3
(Enable write at (fixed)
COMPUTER LINK
RUN time)
CONNECTION
SW4 Initial timing setting OFF
POINT 8
CONNECTION

ETHERNET
PLC CPU.
(c) Buffer memory settings used in the present
 Sequence program example
The sequence program for initial processing and
communication line opening processing are required. Buffer memory
address Item Set value
(1) Programming condition Dec (Hex)
This program performs the initial processing of the
Ethernet module and the opening processing of C0A80013H
0 to 1 (0 to 1H) IP address of Ethernet module
(192.168.0.19)
connection No. 1 when the stopping PLC CPU starts
running. 16 (10H) Application setting*1 100H
(a) I/O signal of Ethernet module 24 (18H) Port No. of Ethernet module 5001
25 to 26
IP address of GOT FFFFFFFFH
(19 to 1AH)
(b) Device used by user
27 (1BH) Port No. of GOT FFFFH (fixed)
Device Application 80 (50H) Initial fault code ―
M102 COM.ERR turned off command *1 The details of the application setting are shown below.
Settings 1), 2) and 3) can be changed by the user.
D100 IP address of Ethernet module
4), 5) and 6) are fixed.
D110 Application setting
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D111 Port No. of Ethernet module 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D112 to D113 IP address of GOT 5) 4) 3) 2) 1)
6)
D114 Port No. of GOT
1) Fixed buffer application
D200 Initial fault code 0: For sending; no exchange
1: For receiving
2) Existence check
0: No
1: Yes
3) Pairing open
0: No
1: Yes
4) Communication format (Set to "1" (UDP/IP).)
0: TCP/IP
1: UDP/IP
5) Fixed buffer exchange (Set to "0" (With procedure).)
0: With procedure
1: Without procedure
6) Open method (Set to "00" (Active, UDP/IP).
00: Active, UDP/IP
10: Unpassive
11: Fullpassive
(2) Example of sequence program 1
PROCEDURES FOR
* Initial processing
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
IP address of Ethernet
module(192.168.0.19)
Turned on WDT
at first scan ERR
only while detection
running
Initial request
2
Read the initial fault code.
THAT CAN BE SET

Initial WDT ERR
DEVICE RANGE
fault detection
detection
COM.
COM. ERR turned off request
3
ERR
turned off Clear the initial fault code.
FOR MONITORING
command
ACCESS RANGE
* Opening processing of communication line
Set to the permit of
communication while stopping
Initial request the PLC CPU.
No. 1 Normal
Communication
format(UDP/IP)
4
open completed
HOW TO MONITOR
completed initial
REDUNTANT
Port No. of Ethernet
module(5001)
SYSTEM
IP address of GOT
(When GOT is used, FFFFFFFFH)
Port No. of GOT

(When GOT is used, FFFFH) 5
BUS CONNECTION
Request to open
POINT 6
When changing the sequence program
CONNECTION TO
After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting.
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
(3) Communication confirmation  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
The RDY LED on the Ethernet module turn on when
Designer3
For confirming the communication state, refer to the (1) Controller setting
following.
8.4.7 ■Confirming the communication state of Item Set value (Use default value)
Ethernet module GOT NET No. 1
The BUF1 LED turns on when the opening processing
GOT PLC No. 1
of the connection No. 1 is completed in normal at
executing of the sequence program example described GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18
at (2). GOT Port No.
5001
(Communication)
AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5,
AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T, GOT Port No.
AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3 A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, 5014
(Ethernet Download)
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3
RUN BUF1 RUN BUF1
BUF2 RDY BUF2
RDY BUF3 BSY BUF3
BSY BUF4 SW.ERR. BUF4
SW.ERR. BUF5 COM.ERR. BUF5 Retry 3times
COM.ERR. BUF6 TEST BUF6
CPU R/W BUF7 TEST ERR.
BUF8 BUF7 Startup Time 3sec
CPU R/W BUF8
Timeout Time 3sec
TEST Delay Time 0ms

TEST ERR.
Item Set value
Host *
N/W No. 1
PLC No. 2
Ethernet
Type AJ71E71
setting No.1
IP address 192.168.0.19
Port No. 5001
POINT
8.4.11 Connecting to Ethernet 1
 Ethernet parameter settings of FX3U-
module (FX Series)
PROCEDURES FOR
ENET-L Configuration tool
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) Ethernet settings
Set the Ethernet parameter with FX3U-ENET-L
Ethernet module (FX Series) in the following case of the
Configuration tool.
system configuration.
For using FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool, install GX
Developer Ver. 8.88S or later on the personal computer. 2
POINT For details on FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool, refer to
THAT CAN BE SET

Ethernet module (FX Series)
DEVICE RANGE
FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool Operation
For details of the Ethernet module (FX Series), refer to manual
FX3U-ENET-L User's manual
FX3U-ENET-ADP User's manual
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Designer3
<GOT>
PLC No. :1 4
IP address : 192.168.0.18
HOW TO MONITOR
Port No. : 5019
Communication : TCP (fixed)
REDUNTANT
format
SYSTEM
<Ethernet module> (The settings other than the Setting
following are set to the default) Item Setting
5
(with GOT connected)
PC No. : 2 (virtual)*1 Module Module 0*1
BUS CONNECTION
IP address : 192.168.0.19
Port No. : 5551 Operational settings Refer to (2)
Initial settings (Use default value.)
format
■ Ethernet parameter settings of FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool
Open settings Refer to (3)
the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. Router relay parameter
(Use default value.)
Designer3
E-mail settings 6
:Required :Set if necessary :Not required
CONNECTION TO
*1 Set the number of the Ethernet module.
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
(2) Operational settings (3) Open settings
Setting
Item Setting
Communication
date code*1
Setting
Item Setting
IP address 192.168.0.19 (with GOT connected)
Initial timing*1 Protocol TCP
Send frame setting Open system MELSOFT connection

TCP Existence Fixed buffer
confirmation setting Fixed buffer communication
procedure
Pairing open
*1 Because the port No. 5551 is fixed, the GOT oper-
ates as follows, regardless of the setting for the item. Existence confirmation
• Communication date code : [Binary code] (Use default value.)
• Initial timing : [Always wait for OPEN] Host station Port No.
(Communications are enabled while the programmable (DEC.)
controller CPU stops.)
Transmission target device
*2 The default value of IP address is 192.168.1.254. Set the IP
IP address
address corresponding to the system configuration.
Transmission target device
Port No. (DEC.)
POINT
When changing Ethernet parameter

After writing the Ethernet parameter to the POINT
programmable controller CPU, turn off and then on, or
reset the programmable controller CPU. When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral
devices
The number of protocols equivalent to that of the GOTs
and devices must be set.
1
 Ethernet parameter settings of FX3U-ENET- (2) Open settings
PROCEDURES FOR
ADP
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Set the Ethernet parameter at [FX Parameter] on GX
Works2.
To set FX3U-ENET-ADP, GX Works2 Ver.1.90U or later
is required. 2
For details on the setting of FX3U-ENET-ADP, refer to
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
FX3U-ENET-ADP User's Manual
Setting
Item Setting
Protocol TCP
3
Open System MELSOFT connection
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
POINT
When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral
devices
The number of protocols equivalent to that of the GOTs 4
HOW TO MONITOR
\
REDUNTANT
Setting
SYSTEM
Item Setting
Channel CH1 or CH2*1
IP Address 192.168.1.250*2
5
BUS CONNECTION
Open Settings Refer to (2).
Communication Data
Code
Disable direct
connection to
MELSOFT
Do not respond to
6
search for CPU on
CONNECTION TO
network

*1 Set a channel according to the installation position of FX3U-
DIRECT
ENET-ADP on the CPU body.

CPU

7
POINT
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION

After writing Ethernet parameters to the PLC CPU, turn
the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again.
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT  Confirming the communication state of
Designer3 Ethernet module
(1) Controller setting (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows.
Item Setting (Use default value.)
Windows.
GOT NET No. 1
GOT PLC No. 1 C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18 Reply from 192.168.0.19: bytes=32 time<1ms
TTL=64
GOT Port No.
(Communication)
5019 (b) When abnormal communication
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
GOT Port No. Request timed out.
5014
(Ethernet Download)
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 execute the Ping command again.
Retry 3times • Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit
Startup Time 3sec
Timeout Time 3sec • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not)
Delay Time 0ms • IP address of GOT specified by Ping command
(2) Ethernet setting POINT

Item Setting Ethernet diagnostics of FX3U-ENET-L Configuration
Host * tool
Ethernet diagnostics of FX3U-ENET-L Configuration
N/W No. 1
tool is available to a Ping test from the PLC.
PLC No. 2 For details of Ethernet diagnostics of FX3U-ENET-L
Ethernet Type FX (fixed) Configuration tool, refer to the following manual.
setting No.1
FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool Operation
IP address 192.168.0.19*1
manual
Port No. 5551*2
Communication TCP (fixed)
*1 Set the value according to the IP address of the connected

PLC.
*2 Set the value according to the Port No. of the connected
PLC.
POINT
 Ethernet parameter settings of FX3GE
port FXCPU (FX3GE)
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Set the Ethernet parameter at [FX Parameter] on GX
Works2.
Ethernet module (FX Series) in the following case of the
To set FX3GE, GX Works2 Ver.1.91V or later is required.
For details on the setting of FX3GE, refer to the following
manual. 2
POINT FX3GE SERIES PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLERS HARDWARE MANUAL
THAT CAN BE SET

FX3GE
DEVICE RANGE
For details of the FX3GE, refer to the following manual.
FX3GE SERIES PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLERS HARDWARE MANUAL
3
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Designer3
<GOT>
PLC No. :1
IP address
Port No.
: 192.168.0.18
: 5019
4
HOW TO MONITOR
format
REDUNTANT
Setting
Item Setting
SYSTEM
<Ethernet module> (The settings other than the
following are set to the default) Channel CH1
PC No. : 2 (virtual)*1 IP Address 192.168.1.250*1
IP address : 192.168.0.19
Open Setting Refer to (2).
5
BUS CONNECTION
Communication Data
format
■ Ethernet parameter settings of FX3GE Code
Disable direct
*1 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However, connection to
the virtual values must be set on the GOT side. (Use default value.)
MELSOFT
Do not respond to
Designer3
search for CPU on 6
network
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
POINT
7
After writing Ethernet parameters to the PLC CPU, turn
COMPUTER LINK
the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again.

CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
(2) Open settings  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Designer3
GOT NET No. 1
GOT PLC No. 1
GOT Port No.

5019
(Communication)
Setting GOT Port No.

Item Setting 5014
(with GOT connected) (Ethernet Download)
Protocol TCP Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
Open System MELSOFT connection Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Retry 3times
Startup Time 3sec

POINT
Timeout Time 3sec
When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral Delay Time 0ms
devices
The number of protocols equivalent to that of the GOTs (2) Ethernet setting
\
Item Setting
Host *
N/W No. 1 (Use default value.)
PLC No. 2
Ethernet Type FX (fixed)
setting No.1
IP address 192.168.0.19*1
Port No. 5556*2
Communication TCP (fixed)
*1 Set the value according to the IP address of the connected

PLC.
*2 Set the value according to the Port No. of the connected
PLC.
POINT
8.4.13 Connecting to Display I/F 1
(CNC C70)
PROCEDURES FOR
Ethernet module
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows. This section describes the settings of the GOT and Display
Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of I/F (CNC C70) in the following case of the system
Windows. configuration.
2
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 POINT
THAT CAN BE SET

TTL=64 Display I/F (CNC C70)
DEVICE RANGE
(b) When abnormal communication For details of the Display I/F (CNC C70), refer to the
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19 following manual.
Request timed out.
C70 Series SET UP MANUAL
At abnormal communication, check the followings and 3
execute the Ping command again.  System configuration
FOR MONITORING
• Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
ACCESS RANGE
• Cable connecting condition Designer3
• Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting <GOT> (The settings other than the
• Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not) following are set to the default)
• IP address of GOT specified by Ping command Network No. : 239
PLC No. :1
IP address : 192.168.1.1
Port No. : 5001
4
HOW TO MONITOR
<Q17nNCCPU> (The settings other than the
REDUNTANT
Network No. : 239
SYSTEM
PLC No. :2
IP address :192.168.1.2
Port No. : 5001
Communication format : UDP(fixed)
■ IP address settings of CNC C70
5
BUS CONNECTION
 IP address settings of CNC C70
(1) Remote monitor tool
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
Setting necessity at
Item Set value
GOT connection
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 8

Gateway address 0.0.0.0
Port number 64758 (fixed)

CONNECTION
ETHERNET
Speed auto/10M 0 (fixed)
(2) CNC monitor (2) Ethernet setting
Item Set value
Host *
N/W No. 239
PLC No. 2
Ethernet
Type Q17nNC
setting No.1
POINT
Setting necessity at For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Item Set value Designer3, refer to the following.
GOT connection
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway address 0.0.0.0
Port number 64758 (fixed)  Checking communication state of CNC C70

Speed auto/10M 0 (fixed)
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of
Windows.
(3) Communication check
The CNC C70 can communicate with the GOT when (a) When normal communication
INIT.LED of the CNC C70 is lit. C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
For confirming the communication state, refer to the Reply from 192.168.0.19: bytes=32 time<1ms
following. TTL=64
■Checking communication state of CNC C70 (b) When abnormal communication
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Request timed out.
Designer3 (2) When abnormal communication
(1) Controller setting execute the Ping command again.
• Mounting condition of CNC C70
GOT NET No. 1 • Switch settings and network parameter settings
GOT PLC No. 1 • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not)
• IP address of the CNC C70 specified for the Ping
command
GOT Port No.
5001
(Communication)
GOT Port No.

5012
(Ethernet Download)
Retry 3times
Startup Time 3sec
Timeout Time 3sec
Delay Time 0ms
8.4.14 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field 1
 GX Works2 network parameter
Network Ethernet Adapter
PROCEDURES FOR
Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET
PREPARATORY
Module
MONITORING
For details of the setting contents of PLC side, refer to the
following manual.
This section describes the settings of the GOT, Ethernet MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/
adapter module and the PLC in the following system Local Module User's Manual
configuration.
(1) Network Type, Network No., Total Stations setting 2
 System configuration Example: Master station setting
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
<GOT>
(Use default value for settings other than the following.)
Network No. :3 *1
PC No. :1
IP address :192.168.3.18
3
Port No. :5001
Communication :UDP (fixed)
format
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
Ethernet
<Ethernet adapter module>

Ethernet setting
IP address :192.168.3.30
CC-Link IE Field Network setting Set value
Network No.
Station No.
:1
:1
Item
Master station Local station 4
CC IE Field CC IE Field
HOW TO MONITOR
Network type
(Master station) (Local station)
Network No. 1 1
REDUNTANT
Total Stations 2 -
SYSTEM
HUB Station No. 0 (fixed) 2
(2) Routing parameter setting

<CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module>
*2

Set the followings as necessary. 5
Network Type : CC IE Field (Master station) Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set.
BUS CONNECTION
Network No. :1 However, the same transfer network number cannot be
PC No. :0
Total Stations :2
the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer
Network No.]s.
*2
<CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module>
(Use default value for settings other than the following.) 6
Network Type : CC IE Field (Local station)
Network No. :1
CONNECTION TO
PC No. :2
*1 Set the GOT network No. according to the third octet
(network No.) of the Ethernet adapter module IP address.
DIRECT
*2 The CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local module is

mounted on slot 0 of the base unit.
CPU
The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network Master/

Local module is set at [0].
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
Item Range
CONNECTION
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239

ETHERNET
Relay Network No. 1 to 239

Relay Station No. 1 to 64
 Ethernet Adapter Module setting  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
Set the parameter with the Ethernet adapter module Designer3
setting tool.
For details of the setting method, refer to the following
manual.
POINT
CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
Module User's Manual For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT
(1) CC-Link IE Field Network setting Designer3, refer to the following.
GOT NET No. 3*1

GOT PC No. 1
GOT Port No.
5014
Item Set value (Ethernet Download)
Network No. 1*1
Station No. 1*2
Retry 3 times
*1 Set the same value as the network No. set on the PLC side.
Startup Time 3 sec
*2 Set a value other than the network No. set on the PLC side.
Timeout Time 3 sec
(2) Ethernet setting Delay Time 0ms
*1 Set the GOT network No. according to the third octet

(network No.) of the Ethernet adapter module IP address.
Item Set value

Host *
N/W No. 3*1
PC No. 30*2
Ethernet Setting
Type NZ2GF-ETB
No.1
IP address 192.168.3.30*3
Item Set value Port No. 5001(fixed)

Communication UDP(fixed)
IP address 192.168.3.30*1
*1 Set according to the third octet (network No.) of the Ethernet
*1 Set the IP address within the following range. adapter module IP address.
*2 Set according to the fourth octet (PC No.) of the Ethernet
192.168. 3. 30 adapter module IP address.
*3 Set according to the Ethernet adapter module IP address.
Set the fourth octet within the range from 1 to 64.
Set the third octet within the range from 1 to 239.
Item Set value
Transfer Network No. 1*1
Relay Network No. 3*2
Relay Station No. 30*3
*1 Set the same value as the Ethernet adapter module network

No.
*2 Set according to the third octet (network No.) of the Ethernet
adapter module IP address.
*3 Set according to the fourth octet (PC No.) of the Ethernet
adapter module IP address.
8.4.15 Connecting to PERIPHERAL 1
I/F (Built-in Ethernet port
PROCEDURES FOR
Leave the Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU
PREPARATORY
Motion Controller CPU) settings as default in the following system
MONITORING
configuration.
This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in ■ [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU in the following case
of system configuration. <GOT>
2
POINT
THAT CAN BE SET

Network No. :1
DEVICE RANGE
PLC No. :1
IP address : 192.168.3.1
(1) GOT type setting Port No. : 5001
For details, refer to the following. Communication : UDP (fixed)
1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel format
setting)
(2) Setting [Controller Type]
3
(2) CPU No. specification of Q170MCPU (The following settings are set to the default)
FOR MONITORING
Set whether to monitor the PLC CPU area or the Network No. : 1 (virtual) *2
ACCESS RANGE
Motion CPU area of Q170MCPU, in the CPU No. PLC No. : 2 (virtual) *2
specification. For details, refer to the following. IP address : 192.168.3.39
Open system : MELSOFT connection (fixed)
8.5 Precautions
(3) PLC type of GX Works2/GX Developer
When creating a program, set the following PLC
type:
and a transceiver, refer to the following.
8.4.6 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
4
• For Q173D(S)CPU/Q172D(S)CPU (multiple connection)
HOW TO MONITOR
QnUD(E)(H)CPU *2 These setting items do not exist at the PLC side. However,
• For Q170MCPU the virtual values must be set on the GOT side.
REDUNTANT
Q03UDCPU ■[Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3
SYSTEM
(4) Built-in Ethernet port CPU
For details of Built-in Ethernet port CPU, refer to  Basic setting of MT Works2
the following manual. Use the default values of the basic setting for the
User's Manual of Q173D(S)CPU/ system configuration above. 5
Q172D(S)CPU and Q170MCPU
BUS CONNECTION
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
Item Set value

Setting necessity
at GOT 8
connection
192.168.3.39
IP address
CONNECTION
(Default)
ETHERNET
Subnet mask pattern -
Default router IP address -
Setting necessity
Item Set value at GOT (3) Controller setting
connection
Communication data code
GOT NET No. 1
Enable online change (Use default value)
GOT PC No. 1
(MC protocol)
Open settings Refer to (2)
GOT Port No.
5014
(2) Open settings (Ethernet Download)
The setting is required for all the connected GOTs. Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
Retry 3times
Startup Time 3 sec
Timeout time 3 sec
Delay Time 0ms

Item Set value
Host *
N/W No. 1*1
PC No. 2*2
Ethernet
Type QnUDE(H)
setting No.1
IP address 192.168.3.39*3

Item Set value *2 Set a value different from that of GOT PLC No.
*3 Set it to the IP address value of the Built-in Ethernet port
Protocol UDP (fixed) Motion Controller CPU side.
Host station port No. -
 Checking communication state of Connecting
to Built-in Ethernet port CPU
 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows
Designer3 Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of
Windows.
POINT (a) When normal communication
C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39
(1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Reply from 192.168.3.2: bytes=32 time
Designer3 <10ms TTL=32
For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT (b) When abnormal communication
Designer3, refer to the following. C:\>Ping 192.168.3.39
Request timed out.
(Communication settings) (2) When abnormal communication
(2) Ethernet setting At abnormal communication, check the followings and
The settings items for the network No. and station execute the Ping command again.
No. do not exist at the Built-in Ethernet port • Cable connecting condition
Motion Controller CPU side. However, these • Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting
virtual values must be set on the GOT side. • Operation state of PLC CPU (faulty or not)
Therefore, set the network No. and station No. on • The IP address of Built-in Ethernet port CPU specified
the GOT side. Set the network No. that is not in the Ping command
existed on the network system and any station
No..
1
POINT
PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer
Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer is
available to a Ping test from the PLC.
For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX
Developer, refer to the following manual. 2
GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual
(Common)
THAT CAN BE SET

DEVICE RANGE
GX Developer Version8 Operating Manual
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
4
HOW TO MONITOR
REDUNTANT
SYSTEM
5
BUS CONNECTION
6
CONNECTION TO
DIRECT
CPU
7
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8.5 Precautions
 Connection to QnA (S) CPU type
Use B or a later function version of Ethernet module
(QnA Series) and PLC CPU (QnA/QnASCPU type). LCPU may diagnose (check file system, recovering
process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the
 Connection to QSCPU power or when resetting. Therefore, it takes time until
The GOT can only read device data and sequence GOT starts before the SD card becomes available, a
programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU. system alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in
The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU. the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
 Connection to Q170MCPU Manual
 When connecting to multiple GOTs
When the CPU No. is set to "1", the device on the PLC (1) Setting PLC No.
CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet
network, set each [PLC No.] to the GOT.
When the CPU No. is set to "0", the monitoring target 8.3.1 Setting communication interface
differs depending on the GOT connection destination. (Communication settings)
Refer to the following.
(2) Setting IP address
GOT connection destination Monitoring target
Do not use the IP address "192.168.0.18" when using
QJ71E71 module PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) multiple GOTs.
PERIPHERAL I/F Motion CPU area (CPU No.2) A communication error may occur on the GOT with the
IP address.
to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring (3) Setting for starting up multiple GOTs simultaneously
cannot be executed. (When connected to Built-in Ethernet port CPU)
When connecting multiple GOTs to one Built-in
For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. Ethernet port CPU, adjust the timing of GOT
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design communication start. When the communication
Manual concentrates on the PLC, the communication between
GOT and PLC becomes difficult, and the monitoring by
GOT may not start. As a method for adjusting the
timing, communicating one GOT alone first, and then
communicating the other GOTs is effective.
Set the following items on each GOT.
• [Startup Time] of [Controller Setting], or [Title Display
Time] of [GOT Setup].
• [Timeout Time] of [Controller Setting]
The following shows a setting example.
HUB
QnUDE(H)CPU GOT1 GOT2 GOT10
Item GOT1 GOT2 GOT10

Startup Time 3sec (default) 4sec 4sec
Timeout Time 3sec (default) 4sec 4sec
 When connecting to the multiple network

 Connection in the multiple CPU system equipment (including GOT) in a segment
When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, By increasing the network load, the transmission speed
the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. between the GOT and PLC may be reduced.
QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 The following actions may improve the communication
seconds or more performance.
MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more • Using a switching hub
• More high speed by 100BASE-TX (100Mbps)
alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the • Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT
Manual
8.5 Precautions
1
 When setting IP address
PROCEDURES FOR
Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address.
PREPARATORY
MONITORING
(Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the
system)
The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with
the above numbers.
Consult with the administrator of the network before 2
setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.
THAT CAN BE SET

 When monitoring to another network No. on
DEVICE RANGE
the same line
When the network No. of the GOT does not match with
that of the PLC on the same Ethernet, the PLC cannot
be monitored. When monitoring, set the same network
No. as that of the GOT, or connect a Ethernet module to
the PLC and set the routing setting to monitor as other
3
network.
FOR MONITORING
ACCESS RANGE
When the Multi-channel is supported for GT16, set
each channel with the networks No. to monitor.
 Remote password
Do not set a remote password for the following CPUs.
Otherwise, monitoring with the GOT becomes
unavailable.
4
RCPU, FX5UCPU, QCPU (Q mode), LCPU
HOW TO MONITOR
 When connecting to Built-in Ethernet port of
REDUNTANT
Built-in Ethernet port CPU
SYSTEM
Connect to GOT after turning on the network equipment
such as Built-in Ethernet port CPU or HUB to enable
the communication. 5
When the communication with Built-in Ethernet port
BUS CONNECTION
CPU is not available, a communication error may occur
on the GOT.
 The number of connectable CPUs for one

GOT
QCPU : 128 CPUs can be set (10 or less CPUs are
recommended)
6
FXCPU : 128 CPUs can be set (10 or less CPUs are
CONNECTION TO
recommended)
 Connection to RnSFCPU
DIRECT
The RnSFCPU takes 10 seconds or more to run.

CPU
If the GOT is started before the RnSFCPU runs, a

system alarm occurs. 7
To prevent a system alarm from occurring, adjust the
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION
8
CONNECTION
ETHERNET
8.5 Precautions
8.5 Precautions
9
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H CONNECTION
MELSECNET/10
9.
(PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 11
CC-Link IE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
9.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
9.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 8
NETWORK
9.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10
9.4 PLC Side Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
9.5 Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 17
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
9-1
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION
(PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
POINT
(1) Connectable network
When using MELSECNET/H in NET/10 mode, refer to MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION.
Connect the GOT to the following network systems as an ordinary station.
• MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network) optical loop system
• MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network) coaxial bus system
(2) MELSECNET/H network module
When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/H network system, specify the
MELSECNET/H Mode or the MELSECNET/H Extended Mode as a network type.

Communication
type
R04CPU
R08CPU
R16CPU
R32CPU
R120CPU
R08PCPU
R16PCPU
R32PCPU

MELSECNET/H -
Series R04ENCPU
R08ENCPU
R16ENCPU
R32ENCPU
R120ENCPU
R08SFCPU
R16SFCPU
R32SFCPU
R120SFCPU

CPU (MELSEC MELSECNET/H -
9-2 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

Communication
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
C Controller
MELSECNET/H
module MELSECNE
R12CCPU-V -
(MELSEC iQ- T/H
R Series)
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U MELSECNE
-
Series FX5UC T/H
Q00JCPU 10
Q00CPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q01CPU
MELSECNET/10
Q02CPU
Q02HCPU
Q06HCPU
Q12HCPU MELSECNE *1 *1
9.2
MELSEC-Q
(Q mode)
Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU
T/H
11
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
CONNECTION
Q25PHCPU
NETWORK
- -
12
Q00UJCPU
CC-Link IE FIELD
Q00UCPU
CONNECTION
Q01UCPU
NETWORK
Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
MELSEC-Q MELSECNE
Q04UDHCPU 9.2
(Q mode) T/H
Q06UDHCPU 13
Q10UDHCPU
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
STATION)
*1 Use CPU function version B or a later version.
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9-3

Communication
type
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
MELSEC-Q Q26UDEHCPU
MELSECNET/H 9.2
(Q mode) Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
Q12DCCPU-V*1
module Q24DHCCPU-LS MELSECNET/H 9.2
(Q Series)
Q26DHCCPU-LS
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU MELSECNET/H 9.2
L02CPU
L06CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT
L02CPU-P
MELSEC-L - -
L06CPU-P
L26CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
L02SCPU-P
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A - -
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU - -
(QnACPU)
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
- -
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
MELSEC-A A2ACPUR21-S1
- -
(AnCPU) A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
A3ACPUR21
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1


Communication
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
A2USCPU
MELSECNET/H
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
10
A1SHCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU - -
(AnSCPU)
MELSECNET/10
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3 11
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
CONNECTION
A0J2HCPUP21
- -
NETWORK
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
12
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
A2CCPUC24 - -
NETWORK
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*1*2
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Q173CPU*1*2
Q172CPUN*1
Q173CPUN*1
STATION)
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Q172DCPU 14
Motion
controller Q173DCPU MELSECNET/H 9.2
CPU Q172DCPU-S1
CONNECTION
(Q Series)
Q173DCPU-S1
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*3 15
Q170MSCPU*4
Q170MSCPU-S1*4
CONNECTION
MR-MQ100 - -
INVERTER

• SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION


Communication
type
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU
Motion
- -
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series)
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
WS0-CPU0
WS0-CPU3
QJ72LP25-25
MELSECNET/H
station
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
head module
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU MELSECNET/H 9.2
Robot
CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) MELSECNET/H 9.2
controller
FX0
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1
FX2
-
FX2C
FX1S
FX1N
-
MELSEC-FX FX2N -
FX1NC
FX2NC -
FX3S
FX3G
FX3GC
-
FX3GE
FX3U
FX3UC

9.1.2 MELSECNET/H network module 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Model name
CPU series
Optical loop Coaxial bus
MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*1
QJ71LP21
MELSEC-QS
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71LP21-25 QJ71BR11*1 10
CNC C70 QJ71LP21S-25
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
QJ71LP21-25
C Controller module (Q Series) QJ71BR11*1
QJ71LP21S-25
*1 Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H network module and CPU.
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

9.2.1 Connecting to optical loop system
MELSECNET/H
QCPU GOT Communication driver
network module
Connection cable
MELSECNET/H

Number of
MELSECNET/H
Model name network module Cable model Option device Model equipment
*1
type distance
QJ71LP21
MELSEC-Q
QJ71LP21-25 MELSECNET/H Optical fiber cable*2 *3 GT15-J71LP23-25
MELSEC-QS
QJ71LP21S-25
63 GOTs
C Controller
QJ71LP21-25
module MELSECNET/H Optical fiber cable*2 *3 GT15-J71LP23-25
QJ71LP21S-25
(Q Series)
*1 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H network module, refer to the following manual.

*2 For the optical fiber cable, refer to the following manual.

*3 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total
number of stations.
9.2.2 Connecting to the coaxial bus system
MELSECNET/H
QCPU GOT Communication driver
network module
Connection cable
MELSECNET/H

Number of
MELSECNET/H connectable
Communication Max.
Model name Network module Cable model Option device Model equipment
*2
type distance
MELSEC-Q
*1
C Controller Coaxial cable
QJ71BR11 MELSECNET/H *4 GT15-J71BR13 31 GOTs
module *3
(Q Series)
MELSEC-QS
*1 Use a PLC CPU of function version B or a later version.
*2 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H network module, refer to the following manual.

Use a MELSECNET/H network module of function version B or a later version.

*3 For the coaxial cable, refer to the following manual. 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
For the coaxial cable connector connection method, refer to the following.
MELSECNET/H
1.4.2 Coaxial cable connector connection method
number of stations.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

2.
3.
4.
• MNET/H mode
Set the network type. • MNET/10 mode
Network Type
(Default: MNET/H mode) • MNET/H
Click!
Extended mode*1
Set the network No.

Network No. 1 to 239
(Default: 1)
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Station No.

(Default: 1)
1 to 64
menu.
• Online
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the (auto.
reconnection)
• Offline
3. Set the following items. Set the operation mode of the

• Test between
slave station*2
• Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC GOT.
Mode Setting • Self-loopback
(Default:
Online (auto. reconnection)) test*2
Type to be connected. • Internal self-
• I/F: Interface to be used loopback
• Driver: MELSECNET/H test*2
• H/W test*2
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. performed when a
Make the settings according to the usage communication timeout occurs.
environment. Retry When no response is received 0 to 5times
after retries, a communication
times out.
(Default: 3times)
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. Set the time period for a
Timeout
Time
(Default: 3sec)
POINT
Set the delay time for reducing
The settings of connecting equipment can be Delay the load of the network/
0 to 300ms
Time destination PLC.
(Default: 0ms)
For details, refer to the following:
9 - 10 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

Item Description Range 9
Set the number of refreshes to
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
secure the send/receive data in
MELSECNET/H
station units during
communication.
Refresh (Default: 1time)
1 to 1000times
Interval Valid when [Secured data send/
Secured data receive] Is marked
by the control station side
network parameters of the 10
melsecnet/h network system.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Set the communication
MELSECNET/10
transmission speed.
Transmission (Default: 25Mbps)
10Mbps/25Mbps
Speed When specifying [MNET/10
mode] as The network type, only Item Range
10mbps can be set applicable.
*1 For monitoring the QCPU redundant system, use QCPU of
11
function version D or later, with the upper five digits later than
"07102".
Also, use GX Developer of Version 8.29F or later.
*2 For details, refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System
POINT
NETWORK
Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

POINT Routing parameter setting is also necessary for 12
the relay station.
(1) Communication interface setting by Utility For the setting, refer to the following.
CC-Link IE FIELD
9.4 PLC Side Settings
CONNECTION
NETWORK
after writing [Communication Settings] of project (2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT
data. Navigator
For details on the RS-422 conversion unit and the (a) The color of the cells for the items which are
GOT utility, refer to the following manual:
GT User's Manual
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
(2) Precedence in communication settings are displayed in green cells, from the
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the MELSOFT Navigator.
Utility, the latest setting is effective. (b) When the settings of Transfer network No.,
Relay network No. or Relay station No. are
STATION)
reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT
Navigator, those settings are added. Items set
9.3.3 Routing parameter setting in advance are not deleted.However, if the
14
target network No. overlaps, the item set in
advance is overwritten.
Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. (c) The routing information is used manually by
CONNECTION
However, the same transfer network number cannot be set the user when the data is created. Therefore,
twice or more (multiple times). after changing the network configuration by (Via G4)
CC-Link
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the MELSOFT Navigator, create a routing
request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network information again. For details of the creation
No.]s. of the routing information, refer to the
MELSOFT Navigator help. 15
POINT
CONNECTION

INVERTER

For details of routing parameters, refer to the following 16

manual.
SERVO AMPLIFIER
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network

System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC
CONNECTION
network)
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9 - 11

MELSECNET/H network module in the case of system 9.4.2 Switch setting of
configuration shown as 9.4.1. MELSECNET/H network
When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to
the MELSECNET/H network system, specify the
module
MELSECNET/H Mode or the MELSECNET/H Extended Set the station number setting switch and mode setting
Mode as a network type.
switch.
QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25
POINT
QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25
RUN MNG RUN MNG
T.PASS D.LINK EXT.PW T.PASS D.LINK
MELSECNET/H network module SD RD SD
ERR.
RD
L ERR.
ERR. L ERR.
For details of the MELSECNET/H network module,

STATION NO. STATION NO. 23
23
90 1
456
456
90 1
X10 78 X10 78
(1) (1)
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network 23 23
90 1
456
456
90 1
X1 78 X1 78

network)
IN IN
9.4.1 System configuration 34 5 3 45
EF 2
67
EXT.PW
EF 2
67
EXT.PW
(2) (2)
01
01
MODE
89 A
89 A
BCD MODE BCD
+24V
+24V
9.4.4 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
<GOT>
24G
24G
(Use the default value for settings other OUT OUT
than the following.)
(FG)
24G
Network type : MNET/H Mode
Network No. :1 QJ71LP21
Station No. :2 -25 QJ71LP21 S-25
Made Setting : Online (auto,reconnection)
Network range assignment *2: LB0100H to LB01FFH
LW0100H to LW01FFH
MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network)
Transmission speed : 10Mbps
QJ71BR11
<MELSECNET/H network module> *1
(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) QJ71BR11
RUN MNG
Station No. :1 T.PASS D.LINK
SD RD
Mode : Online (10Mbps) L ERR.
ERR.
Network type : MNET/H mode (Control station)
Network No. :1 STATION NO.
23
Total stations :2
901
456
X10
Network range assignment *2: LB0000H to LB00FFH 78
23
(1)
LW0000H to LW00FFH
90 1
456
X1
9.4.2 Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module 78
(1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer 345

EF 2
67
(2)
01
MODE
89 A
BCD
*1 The MELSECNET/H network module is mounted at slot 0 of

the base unit.
The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/H network module is
set at "0".
*2 The network type must be set according to the number of
assignment of send points for each station.
When the number of assignment is 2000 bytes or less:
MELSECNET/H mode
When the number of assignment is 2000 bytes or more:
MELSECNET/H Extended Mode
POINT QJ71BR11

the MELSECNET/H network module is set to "70".

(1) Station number setting switch 9.4.3 Parameter setting 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Setting
 Connecting to MELSEC-Q or QS series
MELSECNET/H
Station number setting Set necessity at
Description
switch value GOT (1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer
connection
(a) Network parameter
STATION NO.
10
23
Station number
456
90 1
X10 78
setting 1
23
(Station No.1)*1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
4
90 1
56
X1 78
MELSECNET/10
Setting 11
Set necessity at
Mode setting switch Description
value GOT
connection
CONNECTION
Mode setting
NETWORK
34 5
(Online:
EF 2
67
0
01
MODE
89 A
BCD
10Mbps)*2
*2
Set the same mode setting and transmission speed as those
12
of the GOT.
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
POINT Setting
NETWORK
Item Set value necessity at
When the switch setting has been changed GOT connection
Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the MNET/H mode
PLC CPU. Network type (Control station)
(fixed) 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Network No.*2 1
STATION)
Total stations 2
Group No. 0 (fixed)
Mode*3 Online
14
Network range assignment Refer to (b).
Refresh parameters
Interrupt settings CONNECTION

(Via G4)
CC-Link
Control station return setting

(Use default value)
Redundant settings*4
Interlink transmission 15
parameters
Routing parameters Refer to (c).

CONNECTION

INVERTER
*1 When using Q170MCPU, set it according to the system

configuration.
*3 Set the same mode setting as that of the GOT.
*4 Set it when the MELSECNET/H network module is used in
the redundant QnPRHCPU system. 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(b) Network range assignment (c) Routing parameter setting
However, the same transfer network number
cannot be set twice or more (multiple times).
Therefore, the one that can access to other station
from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of
[Transfer Network No.]s.
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Monitoring time 200
Station Start 0000H

Send
range No.1 End 00FFH
for
station Station Start 0100H
(LB) No.2 End 01FFH
LB/LW
Station Start 0000H
setting*1 Send
for
(LW) Item Range
No.2 End 01FFH
Target network No. 1 to 239
Pairing setting*2 Disable
Relay network No. 1 to 239
*1 No setting
LX/LY setting
Specify I/O master station*1 No setting
Specify reserved station No setting

POINT
Supplementary setting
(Use default value) Routing parameter setting of request source
Station inherent parameters
Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary request source GOT.
*1 Be sure to set the setting to perform the cyclic transmission. For the setting, refer to the following.
the redundant QnPRHCPU system. 9.3.3 Routing parameter setting
POINT
or resetting.

9
 Connecting to C Controller module (Q Setting
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
necessity at
Series) Item Set value
GOT
MELSECNET/H
Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the connection
MELSECNET/H utility. MNET/H mode
Network type
(Control station)
Operation settings
(1) Connection settings
Network No.*1 1
Group No. 0 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Mode*2 Online
MELSECNET/10
Return (Use default value)
Refresh parameters (Use default value)
Total stations 2
Assignment method Start/End

11
Start 0000H
Sta.
each station LB
Send range for
Setting No.1 End 00FFH
Start 0100H
CONNECTION
LB/LW settings*3
GOT connection Sta.
NETWORK
Network range assignment
No.2 End 01FFH
Write authority Mark the checkbox Sta. Start 0000H
each station LW
Send range for
User name*2 target
No.1 End 00FFH 12
Sta. Start 0100H
Password*2 password
CC-Link IE FIELD
No.2 End 01FFH
CONNECTION
Detailed settings -
NETWORK
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (LX/LY) settings*3 No setting
*1 If the IP address of the C Controller module (Q Series) has Monitoring time (Use default value)
*2 If the account of the C Controller module (Q Series) has *3 No setting
Specify I/O master Sta.
Specify reserved Sta. No setting
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
(2) MELSECNET/H Utility's [Parameter Settings]
Supplementary settings (Use default value)
(a) Parameter settings
STATION)
*3 Be sure to set the setting to perform the cyclic transmission.
POINT
14
After writing the network parameter to the C Controller CONNECTION
module (Q Series), either turn the C Controller module (Via G4)
CC-Link
(Q Series) OFF and then ON or reset it.
15
CONNECTION
Setting
INVERTER

GOT connection
Number of modules 1
Link device refresh cycle (Use default value) 16

Routing parameter Refer to (b).
SERVO AMPLIFIER
Target module 1
CONNECTION
Start I/O No. 0000H
Channel No. (Use default value)

(b) Routing parameter setting 9.4.4 [Controller Setting] of GT
Designer3
from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Item Set value
[Transfer Network No.]s. Network Type MNET/H mode
Network No. 1: Network No.1
Station No. 2: Station No.2
Mode Setting Online (auto. reconnection)
Retry count 3times (Use default value)
Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)
Delay Time 0sec (Use default value)
Refresh Interval 1time (Use default value)
Monitor Speed 10Mbs
POINT
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the
following.
Item Range
Transfer target network No. 1 to 239
POINT
request source GOT.

9
9.5 Precautions
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
 Network configuration
Use MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) to  Connection in the multiple CPU system
configure a network including the GOT. When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system,
The following networks including the GOT cannot be the following time is taken until when the PLC runs.
configured. QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10
10
• MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
seconds or more
MELSECNET/10
 Network type setting MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more
• Specify all the network modules on the same network When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system
as the same network type. alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the
(MELSECNET/H Mode and MELSECNET/H GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
Extended Mode cannot be mixed.)
• When connecting to MELSECNET/H in the QCPU
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual 11
redundant system, [MELSECNET/H Extended Mode]
cannot be specified as the network type.
 Connection to QSCPU
The GOT can only read device data and sequence
 Monitoring range
CONNECTION
programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU.
NETWORK
Only PLC CPU of the same networks No. can be The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU.
monitored in GOT.
 Connection to Q170MCPU
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
 GOT startup in the MELSECNET/H When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the
CONNECTION
connection PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored.
NETWORK
In the MELSECNET/H connection, the data link is When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0"
started approximately 10 seconds after the GOT to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
startup. cannot be executed.
13
 When a network error occurs in the system
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
alarm GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual
In the MELSECNET/H connection, when a network
error occurs in the system alarm, the system alarm
STATION)
message cannot be canceled even though the causes
are removed.
To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT. 14
 MELSECNET/H network module version
CONNECTION
For version restrictions of the MELSECNET/H network
module, refer to the following manual. (Via G4)
CC-Link

network) 15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

9.5 Precautions
9.5 Precautions
10
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION
MELSECNET/10
10.
(PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
10.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
10.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
NETWORK
10.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
10.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
10.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 26
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
10 - 1
10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC
TO PLC NETWORK)
POINT
The MELSECNET/10 connection includes the MELSECNET/H network system used in the MELSECNET/10
mode. The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O network.
• MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) optical loop system
• MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) coaxial bus system

When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/10 network system, specify the
MELSECNET/10 Mode as a network type.

Communication
type
R04CPU
R08CPU
R16CPU
R32CPU
R120CPU
R08PCPU
R16PCPU
R32PCPU

MELSECNET/10 -
Series R04ENCPU
R08ENCPU
R16ENCPU
R32ENCPU
R120ENCPU
R08SFCPU
R16SFCPU
R32SFCPU
R120SFCPU

CPU (MELSEC MELSECNET/10 -
10 - 2 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

Communication
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
C Controller
MELSECNET/H
module MELSECNET/
R12CCPU-V -
(MELSEC iQ-R 10
Series)
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U MELSECNET/
-
Series FX5UC 10
Q00JCPU 10
Q00CPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q01CPU
MELSECNET/10
Q02CPU
Q02HCPU
Q06HCPU
Q12HCPU
Q25HCPU
MELSECNET/10 *1 *1
10.2
11
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
CONNECTION
MELSEC-Q
NETWORK
(Q mode) Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU 12
(Extension base)
- -
Q25PRHCPU
CC-Link IE FIELD
(Extension base)
CONNECTION
Q00UJCPU
NETWORK
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU MELSECNET/10 10.2
Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
*1 Use CPU function version B or a later version.
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 - 3

Communication
type
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
MELSEC-Q Q10UDEHCPU
MELSECNET/10 10.2
(Q mode) Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
Q12DCCPU-V*1
module Q24DHCCPU-LS MELSECNET/10 10.2
(Q Series)
Q26DHCCPU-LS
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU MELSECNET/10 10.2
L02CPU
L06CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT
L02CPU-P
MELSEC-L - -
L06CPU-P
L26CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
L02SCPU-P
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A MELSECNET/10 10.2
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU MELSECNET/10 10.2
(QnACPU)
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
MELSECNET/10 10.2
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1


Communication
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
A2UCPU
MELSECNET/H
A2UCPU-S1
MELSECNET/10 10.2
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU 10
A2ACPUP21
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
A2ACPUR21
MELSECNET/10
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
11
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU
CONNECTION
NETWORK
A1NCPUP21 - -
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
12
A2NCPUR21
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
A2NCPU-S1
NETWORK
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
A3NCPUR21
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1 MELSECNET/10 10.2
STATION)
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2 14
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU
CONNECTION
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
- - (Via G4)
CC-Link
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU 15
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
CONNECTION

INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Communication
type
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
- -
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*1*2
Q173CPU*1*2
Q172CPUN*1
Q173CPUN*1
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Q172DCPU
Motion
controller Q173DCPU MELSECNET/10 10.2
CPU Q172DCPU-S1
(Q Series)
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*3
Q170MSCPU*4
Q170MSCPU-S1*4
MR-MQ100 - -
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
MELSECNET/10 10.2
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU
Motion
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series) - -
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
MELSECNET/10 10.2
A173UHCPU-S1

*1 When using SV13, SV22 or SV43, use the motion controller CPU on which any of the following main OS version is installed.

Communication
Refer to
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
WS0-CPU0
MELSECNET/H
WS0-CPU3
QJ72LP25-25
MELSECNET/H
remote I/O QJ72LP25G - -
station
QJ72BR15
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link IE
MELSECNET/10
head module
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module
11
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU MELSECNET/10 10.2
CRnQ-700
Robot (Q172DRCPU)
MELSECNET/10 10.2
CONNECTION
NETWORK
CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU)
FX0
FX0S
FX0N
- 12
FX1
CC-Link IE FIELD
FX2
CONNECTION
-
NETWORK
FX2C
FX1S
FX1N
-
MELSEC-FX FX2N - 13
FX1NC
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
FX2NC -
FX3S
STATION)
FX3G
FX3GC
-
FX3GE
FX3U
14
FX3UC
10.1.2 MELSECNET/H (NET/10 mode), MELSECNET/10 network module CONNECTION

(Via G4)
CC-Link
Model name
CPU series
MELSEC-Q (Q mode)*1
Optical loop Coaxial bus
15
MELSEC-QS
QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71BR11*1
QJ71LP21S-25
CONNECTION
CNC C70
INVERTER

C Controller module (Q Series) QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1
AJ71QLP21, AJ71QLP21S AJ71QBR11
MELSEC-QnA
MELSEC-Q (A mode)
A1SJ71QLP21, A1SJ71QLP21S A1SJ71QBR11
16
AJ71LP21 AJ71BR11
MELSEC-A
SERVO AMPLIFIER
A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11
CONNECTION
*1 Use function version B or later of the CPU and MELSECNET/H network module.

MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10
(When MELSECNET/H (When MELSECNET/10
communication unit is used) communication unit is used)
MELSECNET/H,
PLC MELSECNET/10 GOT
network module
Connection cable
MELSECNET/H, Number of
MELSECNET/10 Communication Max. connectable
network module type distance
*1
GT15-J71LP23-25
QJ71LP21 *4
Optical fiber cable
MELSEC-Q QJ71LP21-25 MELSECNET/10 *3
*2 GT15-75J71LP23-Z
QJ71LP21S-25
*5
C Controller
QJ71LP21-25 Optical fiber cable GT15-75J71LP23-25
module MELSECNET/10 *2
*3
QJ71LP21S-25 *4
(Q Series)
QJ71LP21
Optical fiber cable GT15-75J71LP23-25
MELSEC-QS QJ71LP21-25 MELSECNET/10 *2
*3
*4 63 GOTs
QJ71LP21S-25
AJ71QLP21 GT15-J71LP23-25
AJ71QLP21S Optical fiber cable *4
MELSEC-QnA MELSECNET/10 *3
A1SJ71QLP21 *2 GT15-75J71LP23-Z
A1SJ71QLP21S *5
GT15-J71LP23-25
AJ71LP21 Optical fiber cable *4
MELSEC-A MELSECNET/10 *3
A1SJ71LP21 *2 GT15-75J71LP23-Z
*5
*1 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network module, refer to the following manuals.

For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual
Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual

number of stations.
*4 Specify the MELSECNET/10 Mode as the Communication Settings.For the setting, refer to the following.

*5 Not available for the GT155 .

10.2.2 Connecting to the coaxial bus system 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H,
MELSECNET/10
PLC MELSECNET/10 GOT
network module
Connection cable
11
MELSECNET/H, Number of
MELSECNET/10 Communication Max. connectable
CONNECTION
network module type distance
NETWORK
*2
MELSEC-Q GT15-J71BR13*5
Coaxial cable
*1 QJ71BR11*1 MELSECNET/10
*3
*4
GT15-75J71BR13-Z*6
12
C Controller
CC-Link IE FIELD
module Coaxial cable
CONNECTION
QJ71BR11*1 MELSECNET/10 *3
*4 GT15-J71BR13*5
(Q Series)
NETWORK
MELSEC-QS
31 GOTs
GT15-J71BR13*5
AJ71QBR11 Coaxial cable
MELSEC-QnA MELSECNET/10 *4
A1SJ71QBR11 *3
GT15-75J71BR13-Z*6 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
GT15-J71BR13*5
AJ71BR11 Coaxial cable
MELSEC-A MELSECNET/10 *4
A1SJ71BR11 *3
GT15-75J71BR13-Z*6
STATION)
*1 Use a PLC CPU and MELSECNET/H network module of function version B or later.
*2 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network module, refer to the following manuals.

14
*3 For the coaxial cable, refer to the following manuals.

For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual CONNECTION
Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC network) Reference Manual (Via G4)
CC-Link
number of stations.
CONNECTION
INVERTER

*6 Not available for the GT155 .
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Set the channel of the connected equipment. (1) MELSECNET/H
2.
3.
4.

• MNET/H mode
Set the network type. • MNET/10 mode
Click! Network Type
• MNET/H Extended
(Default: MNET/H mode)
mode*1
Set the network No.
Network No.
(Default: 1)
1 to 239
menu. Set the station No. of the GOT.

Station No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1)
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the • Online
channel to be used from the list menu. (Auto Reconnect)
• Offline
Set the operation mode of the
• Test between
• Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC GOT. slave station*2
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Mode Setting
(Default: • Self-loopback test*2
Type to be connected. Online (auto. reconnection)) • Internal self-
• I/F: Interface to be used loopback
• Driver: test*2
When using the MELSECNET/H communication unit • H/W test*2
MELSECNET/H Set the number of retries to be
When using the MELSECNET/10 communication performed when a communication
unit timeout occurs.
Retry When no response is received 0 to 5times
MELSECNET/10
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, times out.
(Default: 3times)
Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90sec
environment. (Default: 3sec)
10.3.2 Communication detail settings Set the delay time for reducing the
load of the network/destination
Delay Time 0 to 300ms
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. PLC.
(Default: 0ms)
POINT

10.3.3 Routing parameter setting 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
station units during Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set.
MELSECNET/H
communication.
Refresh (Default: 1time) However, the same transfer network number cannot be set
1 to 1000times twice or more (multiple times).
Interval Valid when "Secured data send/
Secured data receive" is marked Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the
by the control station side network request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network
parameters of the MELSECNET/H
network system.
No.]s. 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
POINT
MELSECNET/10
transmission speed.
10Mbps/25Mbps
Speed When specifying [MNET/10 mode]
as the network type, only 10Mbps
When communicating within the host network,
can be set applicable.
routing parameter setting is unnecessary.
*1 Cannot be set for the QCPU redundant system.
*2 For details, refer to the following manual. (2) Selection of communication unit
Routing parameters cannot be set in the GT15-
11
Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) 75J71LP23-Z and the GT15-75J71BR13-Z.
When setting routing parameters, use the GT15-
(2) MELSECNET/10 J71LP23-25 or the GT15-J71BR13 according to
CONNECTION
the connection type to be used.
NETWORK
manual.
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
network)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
timeout occurs.
Retry 0 to 5times
When no response is received after
STATION)
retries, a communication times out.
(Default: 3times)
Timeout Time
to time out. 3 to 90sec
14
(Default: 3sec)
POINT Item Range CONNECTION

(Via G4)
CC-Link

(1) When MELSECNET/H communication unit is used Relay Network No. 1 to 239
When connecting the MELSECNET/H network
module to the MELSECNET/10 network system, Relay Station No. 1 to 64
15
specify the [MNET/10 mode] as a [Network Type].
The communication interface setting can be POINT
CONNECTION

INVERTER
after writing [Communication Settings] of project Routing parameter setting of relay station
data. Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the
For details on the Utility, refer to the following relay station.
manual.
GT User's Manual
For the setting, refer to the following. 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

10.3.4 Switch setting (Only when (3) Station number setting switch
MELSECNET/10
Station number setting
communication unit is used) switch
4
5 6 Set the station No. of the
7 8
2 3
X10 MELSECNET/10 1 to 64: GT15-
POINT
9
0 1
STATION communication unit. 75J71LP23-Z
No.
4
5 6 Set to not duplicate other 1 to 32: GT15-
stations in the network. 75J71BR13-Z
7 8
2 3
Switch setting of the communication unit X1
(Default: 01)
9
0 1
When using the MELSECNET/H communication unit,
the switch setting is not needed.
For details of each setting switch and LED, refer to the
following manual. Mode setting switch Description Set value
GT15 MELSECNET/10 communication unit
User's Manual 67
89
On-line
AB
45
0
CDE
MODE
(Default: 0)
23
F0 1
GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z
POINT
RUN POWER
PC
DUAL
SW.E
M/S.E
D.LINK
T.PASS (1) Switch setting example
For the switch setting example, refer to the
E PRM.E GOT R/W E
R CRC CRC R
R OVER R
OVER
O O
R AB.IF AB.IF R
TIME TIME
DATA
UNDER
LOOP
SD
DATA
UNDER
LOOP
SD
following.
RD RD
F.LOOP R.LOOP
(2) When the switch setting is changed
4 5 6
(2) When changing the switch setting after mounting

7 8
2 3
GROUP No.
9 0 1
(4) 67
89
4 5 6
the MELSECNET/10 communication unit to the
AB E
45
7 8
2 3
CD
MODE X100
23
F0 1 9 0 1
4 5 6 4 5 6
(1) GOT, reset the GOT.

7 8
2 3
7 8
2 3
X10 X10 NETWORK

9 0 1 9 0 1 No.
(3) STATION
No.
4 5 6 4 5 6 (3) Self check test
7 8
2 3
7 8
2 3
X1 X1
Select "6" to "9" as the mode setting switch to

9 0 1 9 0 1
provide a self check test of the MELSECNET/10

(1) Network number setting switch communication unit.
Network number setting
switch
Description Set value GT15 MELSECNET/10 communication unit
User's Manual
5 6
4
7 8
2 3
X100
9 0 1
Set the network No. of

4 5 6
the MELSECNET/10
7 8
2 3
X10 NETWORK 1 to 239

9 0 1 No. communication unit.
(Default: 001)
4 5 6
7 8
2 3
X1
9 0 1
(2) Group number setting switch
Group number setting

switch
Set the group No. of the

4 5 6 0:
MELSECNET/10
No group
7 8
2 3
GROUP No.
9 0 1 communication unit.
setting (fixed)*1
(Default: 0)
*1 The GOT does not use the group number.

Specify "0".

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Model name Reference
QJ71LP21, POINT
QJ71LP21-25,
MELSECNET/H network module 10.4.1
QJ71LP21S-25,
QJ71BR11
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
AJ71QLP21, the MELSECNET/H network module is set to "70".
AJ71QLP21S,
MELSECNET/10
MELSECNET/10 network
AJ71QBR11,
module 10.4.2
A1SJ71QLP21,
(QnA Series)
A1SJ71QLP21S,
A1SJ71QBR11
 Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network
module
MELSECNET/10 network
module
AJ71LP21,
AJ71BR11,
10.4.3
Set the station number setting switch and mode setting 11
A1SJ71LP21, switch.
(A Series)
A1SJ71BR1
QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25
CONNECTION
QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25
10.4.1 Connecting to MELSECNET/H RUN MNG RUN MNG
NETWORK
T.PASS D.LINK EXT.PW T.PASS D.LINK
SD RD SD RD
network module ERR. L ERR. ERR. L ERR.
STATION NO. STATION NO. 23

23
12
90 1
456
456
90 1
X10 78 X10 78
23
(1) 23
(1)
MELSECNET/H network module in the following case of
90 1
456
456
90 1
X1 78 X1 78
CC-Link IE FIELD
When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to
CONNECTION
IN IN
the MELSECNET/10 network system, specify the
NETWORK
34 5 3 45
EF 2
67
EXT.PW
EF 2
67
EXT.PW
(2) (2)
01
01
MODE
89 A
89 A
BCD MODE BCD
POINT +24V
+24V
13
24G
24G
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
MELSECNET/H network module
CC-Link CONNECTION
OUT OUT
For details of the MELSECNET/H network module,

(FG)
24G
refer to the following manual. QJ71LP21

-25 QJ71LP21 S-25
STATION)
network) QJ71BR11
QJ71BR11
RUN MNG
14
T.PASS D.LINK
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
CONNECTION
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 STATION NO.
23
901
■ Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit

456
X10
78
23
(1) (Via G4)
CC-Link
90 1
456
X1
<GOT> (Use the default value for settings other 78
than the following.) 345

EF 2
67
(2)
01
MODE
89 A
BCD
Station No. :2
Mode
Network No.
: Online
:1
Network range assignment: LB0100H to LB01FFH
15
LW0100H to LW01FFH
MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network)
CONNECTION
<MELSECNET/H network module> *1

INVERTER
(Use the default value for settings other than the following.)
Station No. :1
Mode : Online (10Mbps)
Network type : MNET/10 mode (Control station)
16
Network No. :1
Total stations :2 QJ71BR11
LW0000H to LW00FFH
SERVO AMPLIFIER
■ Switch setting of MELSECNET/H network module

(1)[Network parameter] of GX Developer
CONNECTION
*1 The MELSECNET/H network module is mounted at slot 0 of

the base unit.
The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/H network module is
set at "0".

(1) Station number setting switch  Parameter setting (when connecting to
Setting
MELSEC-Q or QS series)
Station number necessity
setting switch
at GOT
(1) [Network parameter] of GX Developer
connection (a) Network parameter
Station number
setting 1
(Station No.1)*1

Setting
necessity
Mode setting switch Description Set value
at GOT
connection
Mode setting
0 (fixed)
(Online: 10Mbps)
POINT
Setting
When the switch setting has been changed Item Set value
necessity at
GOT
connection
PLC CPU.
MNET/10 mode
Network type
(Control station) (fixed)
Network No.*2 1
Total stations 2
Group No. 0 (fixed)
Mode Online (fixed)
Network range assignment Refer to (b)
Refresh parameters
Interrupt settings
Control station return setting

(Use default value)
Redundant settings*3
Interlink transmission
parameters
Routing parameters Refer to (c)

configuration.
the redundant QnPRHCPU system.

(b) Network range assignment (c) Routing parameter setting 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Setting
necessity at
11
Item Set value
GOT
connection
CONNECTION
Monitoring time 200
NETWORK
Station Start 0000H
Send
for
station Station Start 0100H 12
(LB) No.2 End 01FFH
CC-Link IE FIELD
LB/LW
Start 0000H
CONNECTION
setting*1 Send Station
No.1
NETWORK
range End 00FFH
for
(LW) No.2 Item Range
End 01FFH
Pairing setting*2 Disable

Target network No. 1 to 239 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
LX/LY setting*1 No setting
STATION)
POINT
(Use default value)
14
request source GOT.
*1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission.
*2 Set it when the MELSECNET/H network module is used in For the setting, refer to the following.
the redundant QnPRHCPU system. 10.3.3 Routing parameter setting CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
POINT
When changing the network parameter 15
or resetting.
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

 Parameter setting (when connecting to C Setting
necessity at
Controller module (Q Series)) Item Set value
GOT
Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the connection
MELSECNET/H utility. MNET/10 mode
Network type
(Control station)
Operation settings
Network No.*1 1
Group No. 0
Mode Online
Return (Use default value)
Total stations 2
Assignment method Start/End
Sta. Start 0000H
each station LB
Send range for
Setting No.1 End 00FFH
GOT connection Start 0100H
LB/LW settings*2
Sta.
Network range assignment No.2 End 01FFH
Write authority Mark the checkbox Sta. Start 0000H
each station LW
Send range for
No.1 End 00FFH
User name*2 target
Start 0100H
Password*2 password Sta.
No.2 End 01FFH
Detailed settings -
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (LX/LY) settings*2 No setting

*1 If the IP address of the C Controller module (Q Series) has Monitoring time (Use default value)
*2 If the account of the C Controller module (Q Series) has
been changed, input the changed user name and password. Specify I/O master Sta.*2 No setting
Specify reserved Sta. No setting

(2) MELSECNET/H Utility's [Parameter Settings]
Supplementary settings (Use default value)
(a) Parameter settings
*2 Be sure to set the setting to perform the cyclic transmission.
POINT
After writing the network parameter to the C Controller
module (Q Series), either turn the C Controller module
Setting
GOT connection
Number of modules 1
Link device refresh cycle (Use default value)
Routing parameter Refer to (b).
Target module 1
Start I/O No. 0000H

(b) Routing parameter setting 9
Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set.  [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Item Set value (Use default)
Therefore, the one that can access to other station Retry 3times
Timeout Time 3sec
10
POINT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT
11
 Setting of the MELSECNET/10
communication unit
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Item Set value
Network number setting switch 1: Network No.1
Group number setting switch 0: No group setting (fixed) 12

Station number setting switch 2: Station No.2
CC-Link IE FIELD
Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
POINT
Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit
Item Range
For the setting method of the MELSECNET/10
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
communication unit, refer to the following.
Relay network No. 1 to 239 10.3.1 Setting communication interface
Relay station No. 1 to 120 (Communication settings)
STATION)
POINT
Routing parameter setting of request source 14
request source GOT.
CONNECTION
10.3.3 Routing parameter setting (Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

10.4.2 Connecting to MELSECNET/
 Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network
10 network module (QnA module
Series) Set for each setting switch.
This section describes the settings of the GOT and AJ71QLP21 AJ71QLP21S AJ71QBR11
MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA series) in the A J71QLP21 A J71QLP21S AJ71QBR11
following case of system configuration.
RUN - - POWER RUN - - POWER RUN - - POWER
PC - - MNG PC - - MNG PC - - MNG
REMOTE - - S.MNG REMOTE - - S.MNG REMOTE - - S.MNG
10 DUAL - - D.LINK 1 10 DUAL - - D.LINK 1 10 - D.LINK 1
SW.E - - T.PASS SW.E - - T.PASS SW.E - - T.PASS
100 M/S.E - - 100 M/S.E - - EX.POWER 100 M/S.E - -
In this section, the network parameter (common

PRM.E - - CPUR/W PRM.E - - CPUR/W PRM.E - - CPUR/W
CRC - - CRC CRC - - CRC CRC -
E OVER - - OVER E E OVER - - OVER E E OVER -
AB.IF - - AB.IF AB.IF - - AB.IF AB.IF -
R TIME - - TIME R R TIME - - TIME R R TIME -
R DATA - - DATA R R DATA - - DATA R R DATA -
parameter) of GX Developer is taken as an example to O UNDER - - UNDER O O UNDER - - UNDER O O UNDER -

R LOOP - - LOOP R R LOOP - - LOOP R R
SD - - SD SD - - SD SD -
RD - - RD RD - - RD RD -
provide explanations.
F.LOOP R.LOOP F.LOOP R.LOOP
NETWORK NO. NETWORK NO. NETWORK NO.

X100 X100 X100
X10 (1) X10

(1) X10 (1)
POINT X1 X1 X1
GROUP NO.
(2) GROUP NO. (2) GROUP NO. (2)
STATION NO. STATION NO. STATION NO.
MELSECNET/10 network module (QnA Series)

X10 X10 X10
X1
(3) X1
(3) X1
(3)
For details of the MELSECNET/10 network module MODE
0: ONLINE(A.R) (5) MODE
0: ONLINE(A.R) (5) MODE
0: ONLINE(A.R) (5)
(QnA Series), refer to the following manual.
2: OFFLINE 2: OFFLINE 2: OFFLINE
OFF ON OFF ON SW OFF ON OFF ON SW OFF ON OFF ON SW

PC REMOTE 1 PC REMOTE 1 PC REMOTE 1
N.ST MNG 2 N.ST MNG 2 N.ST MNG 2
For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network

3
(6) (6) (6)
PRM D.PRM PRM D.PRM 3 PRM D.PRM 3
STATION SIZE 4 STATION SIZE 4 STATION SIZE 4
(8.16.32.64) 5 (8.16.32.64) 5 (8.16.32.64) 5
LB/LW SIZE 6 LB/LW SIZE 6 LB/LW SIZE 6
(2.4.6.8K) 7 (2.4.6.8K) 7 (2.4.6.8K) 7
System Reference Manual

8 8 8
24V
24G
FG
 System configuration FRONT SIDE FRONT SIDE
IN IN
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 OUT OUT
<GOT>
(Use the default value for settings other A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21S
A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21S
RUN PW CRC RUN PW CRC

Station No. :2 MNG
S.MNG
PC
REM.
OVER
AB. IF
‚d
‚q
EXT.P W
MNG
S.MNG
PC
REM.
OVER
AB. IF
‚d
‚q
‚q ‚q
Mode : Online DUAL
D.LINK
SWE.
M/S.E.
TIME
DATA
‚n
‚q
DUAL
D.LINK
SWE.
M/S.E.
TIME
DATA
‚n
‚q
Network No. :1 T.PASS

F.E.
PRM E.
R.E.
UNDER
SD
T.PASS
F.E.
PRM E.
R.E.
UNDER
SD
CPU R/W RD CPU R/W RD
Network range assignment: B0100H to B01FFH
MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network) W0100H to W01FFH NETWORK NETWORK
NO. 78 DISPLAY NO. 78 DISPLAY
(4)
456
456
901
(4)
901
X100 L R X100 L R
23 23
(F.L) (R.L.) (F.L) (R.L.)
<MELSECNET/10 network module> *1 (1) 78
(1) 78
456
456
901
901
X10 X10
23 23
(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) 78 78
456
456
901
901
X1 SW OFF ON X1 SW OFF ON
23 23
1 PC REM. 1 PC REM.
Station No. :1 78 2 N.ST MNG 78 2 N.ST MNG
(2) (2)
456
456
901
901
GR.NO. 3 PRM D.PRM GR.NO. 3 PRM D.PRM
Mode : Online 23 4
5
ST,SIZE
8,16,32,64
23 4
5
ST,SIZE
8,16,32,64
Network type : MNET/10 (Control station) ST.NO. 78 6 LB/LW SIZE

(3) ST.NO. 78 6 LB/LW SIZE
456
456
901
901
X10 7 2,4,6,8k X10 7 2,4,6,8k
(3)
23 23
8 EXT.PW 8
Network No. :1 78 78
456
456
901
901
Total stations :2 X1
23 OFF ON
SW {24V
X1
23 OFF ON
SW
Network range assignment: B0000H to B00FFH BCD 1 BCD 1

67 A
67 A
EF
EF
(5)
89
89
01
01
MODE 23 2 MODE 23 2
W0000H to W00FFH
45 45
3 3
24G
MODE
0 : ONLINE(A.R)
4
5 (6) MODE
0 : ONLINE(A.R)
4
5 (6)
■ Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module
2 : OFFLINE 2 : FOFFLINE
6 6
FRONT SIDE 7 FRONT SIDE 7
■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer
FG
8 8
IN IN
*1 The MELSECNET/10 network module is mounted at slot 0 of (5)

the base unit.
OUT OUT
The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/10 network module is A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21S
set at "0".
A1SJ71QBR11
A1SJ71QBR11
RUN PW CRC
‚d
MNG PC OVER
‚q
S.MNG REM. AB. IF ‚q
SWE. TIME ‚n
D.LINK M/S.E. DATA ‚q
T.PASS PRM E. UNDER
SD
CPU R/W RD
NETWORK
NO. 78 DISPLAY
(4)
456
901
X100 L R
23
(F.L) (R.L.)
(1) 78
456
901
X10
23
78
456
901
X1 SW OFF ON
23
1 PC REM.
78 2 N.ST MNG
(2)
456
901
GR.NO. 3 PRM D.PRM

23 4 ST,SIZE
5 8,16,32,64
ST.NO. 78 6 LB/LW SIZE
456
901
X10 7 2,4,6,8k
23
(3) 78
8
456
901
X1
23 OFF ON
SW
BCD 1
(5)
67 A
EF
89
01
MODE 23 2
45
3
MODE
0 : ONLINE (A.R)
2 : OFFLINE
4
5 (6)
6
7
8
A1SJ71QBR11

(1) Network number setting switch (5) Mode setting switch
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Setting Setting
MELSECNET/H
Network number Set necessity at Set necessity at
Description Mode setting switch Description
setting switch value GOT value GOT
NETWORK NO. 78
10
90 1
4 5 6
X100 MODE BCD Mode setting 0
89A
EF
(Online) (fixed)
23
01
0 : ONLINE(A.R)
67
23
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
45
78 Network 2 : OFFLINE
MELSECNET/10
9 0 1
4 5 6
X10 No. setting 1

(Network No.1)*1
23
78
(6) Condition setting switches
9 0 1
4 5 6
X1
23
Setting

Condition setting
switches
Setting
switch
Description
Set
value
necessity at
GOT
11
*1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. connection
(2) Group number setting switch Network type
CONNECTION
(PLC to PLC OFF
SW1
NETWORK
Setting net-work (fixed)
Set necessity at (PC))
Group number setting switch Description
value GOT Station type
connection
OFF ON
SW
SW2
(Control
station
ON
(fixed)
12
1 (MNG))
Group
CC-Link IE FIELD
78
No. setting 0 2 Parameter
90 1
CONNECTION
4 5 6
GROUP.NO.
(No group (fixed) 3 for using*1
NETWORK
23
OFF
setting) 4 SW3 (common
(fixed)
5 parameter
(PRM))
6
13
7 SW4 No. of OFF
(3) Station number setting switch 8 SW5 stations*1 (fixed)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
SW6 B/W
Setting OFF
Total BW
Set necessity at SW7 (fixed)
Station number setting switch Description points*1
STATION)
value GOT
connection OFF
SW8 Not used
(fixed)
STATION.NO. 78 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary 14

9 0 1
4 5 6
X10 *1 The MELSECNET/10 network module can be communicated

23 Station number by default parameters.
setting For details, refer to the following manual.
78 1
CONNECTION
For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System
9 0 1
4 5 6
X1 (Station No.1)*2
23 Reference Manual
(Via G4)
CC-Link
POINT
*2
Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT. When the switch setting (other than the LED indication
15
select switch) is changed
(4) LED indication select switch
CONNECTION
PLC CPU.
INVERTER
Setting
Set necessity at
LED indication select switch Description
value GOT
connection
DISPLAY
16
LED indication
SERVO AMPLIFIER
L R L (F.L.)
select
CONNECTION
(F.L) (R.L.)

 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (2) Network range assignment
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Monitoring time 200
Send Start 0000H

Station
range
No.1 End 00FFH
for
Setting
each Start 0100H
necessity at Station
Item Set value station
GOT No.2
BW (LB) End 01FFH
connection
setting*1 Send Start 0000H
MNET/10 Station
Network type range
(Control station) (fixed) No.1 End 00FFH
for
Start I/O No. 0000H each Start 0100H
Station
station
Network No.*1 1 No.2
(LW) End 01FFH
Total stations 2
XY setting*1 No setting
Network range assignment Refer to (2)
Refresh parameters
Interlink transmission (Use default value)
parameters (Use default value)
Routing parameters Refer to (3)
*1 Specify the same network No. as that of the network number
setting switch of the MELSECNET/10 network module.
POINT
or resetting.

9
(3) Routing parameter setting  [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Item Set value (Use default)
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from Retry 3times
the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Timeout Time 3sec
Network No.]s.
10
POINT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
11
communication unit
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Item Set value

CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
POINT
Item Range Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit
Target network No. 1 to 239 For the setting method of the MELSECNET/10
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
POINT
request source GOT.
CONNECTION
10.3.3 Routing parameter setting (Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

10.4.3 Connecting to MELSECNET/
 Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network
10 network module (A Series) module
Set for each setting switch.
AJ71LP21 AJ71BR11
MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) in the
following case of system configuration. AJ71LP21 AJ71BR11
RUN - - POWER RUN - - POWER
In this section, the network parameter (common

PC - - MNG PC - - MNG
10REMOTE - - S.MNG 1 REMOTE - - S.MNG
10 1
DUAL - - D.LINK - D.LINK
SW.E - - T.PASS SW.E - - T.PASS
parameter) of GX Developer is taken as an example to

100M/S.E - - EX.POWER M/S.E - -
100
PRM.E - - CPUR/W PRM.E - - CPUR/W
CRC - - CRC CRC -
E OVER - - OVER E E OVER -
AB.IF - - AB.IF AB.IF -
provide explanations.
R R R
TIME - - TIME TIME -
R DATA - - DATA R R DATA -
O UNDER - - UNDER O O UNDER -
LOOP - - LOOP
R R SD - - SD R R
SD -
RD - - RD RD -
F.LOOP R.LOOP
POINT
NETWORK NO. NETWORK NO.
X100 X100
X10
(1) X10
(1)
MELSECNET/10 network module (A Series) X1 X1
For details of the MELSECNET/10 network module (A GROUP NO. (2) GROUP NO. (2)
Series), refer to the following manual. STATION NO.
X10
STATION NO.
X10
(3) (3)
Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to X1 X1
PLC network) Reference Manual (5)

MODE MODE
0: ONLINE(A.R)
2: OFFLINE
(5) 0: ONLINE(A.R)
2: OFFLINE
OFF ON OFF ON SW OFF ON OFF ON SW

PC REMOTE 1 PC REMOTE 1
N.ST MNG 2 N.ST MNG 2
PRM D.PRM 3 PRM D.PRM 3
STATION SIZE
(8.16.32.64)
4
5 (6) STATION SIZE
(8.16.32.64)
4
5 (6)
LB/ LW SIZE 6 LB/LW SIZE 6
(2.4.6.8K) 7 (2.4.6.8K) 7
8 8
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

<GOT>
(Use the default value for settings other
FRONT SIDE
IN
Station No. :2 OUT
Mode : Online
Network No. :1
MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network) LW0100H to LW01FFH
<MELSECNET/10 network module> *1

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11
RUN PW CRC RUN PW CRC
E
Station No. :1 MNG
S.MNG
PC
REM.
OVER
AB. IF
R
MNG
S.MNG
PC
REM.
OVER
AB. IF
E
R
R R
Mode : Online DUAL SWE. TIME O SWE. TIME O
D.LINK M/S.E. DATA R D.LINK M/S.E. DATA R
Network type : MNET/10 (Control station) T.PAS. PRM E. UNDER T.PAS. PRM E. UNDER
F.E. R.E. SD SD
Network No. :1 CPU R/W RD CPU R/W RD
Total stations :2
Network range assignment: LB0000H to LB00FFH NETWORK NETWORK
LW0000H to LW00FFH NO. 78 DISPLAY NO. 78 DISPLAY
456
901
X100
(4) (4)
5
L R X100 L R
■ Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module
23 23
(F.L) (R.L.)
78 78
■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) (1)
456
901
X10
0
X10
23 23
78 78
456
901
X1 SW OFF ON X1
23 23 SW OFF ON
1 PC REM. 1 PC REM.
*1 The MELSECNET/10 network module is mounted at slot 0 of 78 2 N.ST MNG 78 2 N.ST MNG
(2) (2)
456
901
3 PRM D.PRM 3 PRM D.PRM

5
GR.NO.
0
GR.NO.
the base unit. 23 4
5
ST,SIZE
8,16,32,64
23 4
5
ST,SIZE
8,16,32,64
The start I/O No. of the MELSECNET/10 network module is ST.NO. 78 6 LB/LW SIZE ST.NO. 78 6 LB/LW SIZE
456
901
X10
5
7 2,4,6,8k X10 7 2,4,6,8k

0
set at "0".
23 23
(3) 78
8
(3) 78
8
456
901
X1 X1
5
23
OFF ON
23 OFF ON
SW SW
CD BCD 1
AB E 1
(5) (5)
89
789
F01
F01
MODE 2 MODE 2
67
23 345
45
3 3
MODE
0 : ONLINE(A,R)
2 : OFFLINE
4
5
(6) MODE
0 : ONLINE(A,R)
2 : OFFLINE
4
5 (6)
6 6
FRONT SIDE 7 7
8 8
IN
OUT

(1) Network number setting switch (5) Mode setting switch
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Setting Setting
MELSECNET/H
Network number Set necessity at Set necessity at
Description Mode setting switch Description
setting switch value GOT value GOT
NETWORK NO. 78
10
90 1
4 5 6
X100
23 Mode setting 0
MODE BCD
67 A
(Online) (fixed)
EF
Network
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
89
0:ONLINE(A.R)
01
78
No. setting
23
MELSECNET/10
9 0 1
4 5 6
45
X10 1 2:OFFLINE
23 (Network
*1*2
78 No.1) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
9 0 1
4 5 6
X1
23
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Setting 11

Condition setting Setting Set necessity at
*1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. Description
*2 Do not specify a number between 240 and 255. switches switch value GOT
connection
(2) Group number setting switch
CONNECTION
Network type
NETWORK
(PLC to PLC OFF
Setting SW1
net-work (fixed)
Group number Set necessity at
Description (PC))
setting switch value GOT
connection Station type 12
OFF ON (Control ON
SW SW2
station (fixed)
CC-Link IE FIELD
1 (MNG))
Group No.
CONNECTION
78
setting 0 2
90 1
4 5 6
NETWORK
GROUP.NO. Parameter
23 (No group (fixed) 3
for using*1
setting) 4 OFF
SW3 (common
5 (fixed)
parameter
6
7
(PRM)) 13
SW4
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
8 No. of OFF
(3) Station number setting switch stations*1 (fixed)
SW5
Setting SW6 Total B/W OFF

Set necessity at
STATION)
Station number setting switch Description SW7 points*1 (fixed)
value GOT
connection OFF
SW8 Not used
(fixed)
STATION.NO. : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary

14
78
9 0 1
4 5 6
X10 *1 The MELSECNET/10 network module can be communicated

23 Station number by default parameters.
CONNECTION
78 setting 1
Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC
9 0 1
4 5 6
X1 (Station No.1)*3
network) Reference Manual (Via G4)
CC-Link
23
POINT
15
*3 Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT. When the switch setting (other than the LED indication
select switch) is changed
(4) LED indication select switch
CONNECTION

INVERTER
PLC CPU.
Setting
Set necessity at
LED indication select switch Description
value GOT
connection
16
DISPLAY
SERVO AMPLIFIER
LED indication
L R L (F.L.)
select
CONNECTION
(F.L) (R.L.)

 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (2) Network range assignment
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Setting Monitoring time 200

necessity at Send Start 0000H
Item Set value Station
GOT range
No.1 End 00FFH
connection for
MNET/10 each Start 0100H
Network type Station
(Control station) (fixed) station
No.2 End 01FFH
LB/LW (LB)
Start I/O No. 0000H *1
setting Send Start 0000H
Station
Network No.*1 1 range
No.1 End 00FFH
for
Total stations 2
each Start 0100H
Station
Network range assignment Refer to (2) station
No.2 End 01FFH
(LW)
Refresh parameters
(Use default value) LX/LY setting*1 No setting
parameters Specify I/O master station*1 No setting
Routing parameters Refer to (3) Specify reserved station No setting
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Supplementary setting

*1 Specify the same network No. as that of the network number (Use default value)
setting switch of the MELSECNET/10 network module. Station inherent parameters

POINT
or resetting.

9
(3) Routing parameter setting  [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Item Set value (Use default)
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from Retry 3times
the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Timeout Time 3sec
Network No.]s.
10
POINT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
11
communication unit
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Item Set value

CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
POINT
Setting of the MELSECNET/10 communication unit
For the setting method of the MELSECNET/10
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Item Range
CC-Link CONNECTION
Target network No. 1 to 239 10.3.1 Setting communication interface
Relay network No. 1 to 239 (Communication settings)
STATION)
POINT 14
request source GOT. CONNECTION
For the setting, refer to the following. (Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

10.5 Precautions
 Network configuration
Use the MELSECNET/10 mode of MELSECNET/H  Connection to Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU,
(PLC to PLC network) or MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC CNC C70, CRnQ-700
network) to configure a network including the GOT.
(1) The following networks including the GOT cannot be The Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, CNC C70 and CRnQ-
configured. 700 are applicable to the MELSECNET/H connection
• MELSECNET/10 (Remote I/O network) (PLC to PLC network) only.
• MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network)
For connecting the GOT to the MELSECNET/10
(2) When configuring the network (MELSECNET/H (PLC network system (PLC to PLC network), set the
to PLC network) including the GOT, refer to the MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network)
following. to the MELSECNET/10 mode.
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO
PLC NETWORK)  Connection to QSCPU
 Monitoring range programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU.
Only PLC CPU of the same networks No. can be
The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU.
monitored in GOT.
For details, refer to the following manual.  Connection to Q170MCPU
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the
Manual device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2).
 Starting GOT with MELSECNET/10 When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the
connection
With the MESLSECNET/10 connection, the data link When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0"
starts approximately 10 seconds after the GOT starts. to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
cannot be executed.
 When a network error occurs in the system For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual.
alarm GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
When a system alarm regarding a network error occurs Manual
with the MELSECNET/10 connection, the system alarm
is kept displaying on the GOT even though the error Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device
factor is removed.
To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT.
 Connection in the multiple CPU system

When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system,
the following time is taken until when the PLC runs.
QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10
seconds or more
Manual
 Connection to QCPU (Q mode)

Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H
network module and QCPU (Q mode).

10.5 Precautions
11
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
11.
NETWORK CONNECTION 11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
11.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 2
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
11.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 8
NETWORK
11.3 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 9
11.4 PLC Side Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 11 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
11.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 25
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
11 - 1
11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK
CONNECTION

Communication
type
R04CPU
R08CPU
R16CPU
R32CPU
R120CPU
R08PCPU
R16PCPU
R32PCPU
R120PCPU
MELSEC iQ-R
CC-Link IE 11.2
Series R04ENCPU
R08ENCPU
R16ENCPU
R32ENCPU
R120ENCPU
R08SFCPU*1
R16SFCPU*1
R32SFCPU*1
R120SFCPU*1

CPU (MELSEC CC-Link IE 11.2
C Controller
module
R12CCPU-V CC-Link IE 11.2
(MELSEC iQ-R
Series)
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U

CC-Link IE -
Series FX5UC

11 - 2 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

Communication
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q00JCPU
MELSECNET/H
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1
Q02HCPU*1 10
Q06HCPU*1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Q12HCPU*1 CC-Link IE *1 *1
11.2
*1
Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
11
Q25PHCPU
CONNECTION
Q12PRHCPU
NETWORK
(Extension base)
- -
Q25PRHCPU
MELSEC-Q
(Q mode)
(Extension base)
12
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Q01UCPU
NETWORK
Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Q10UDHCPU
CC-Link CONNECTION
Q13UDHCPU
CC-Link IE 11.2
Q20UDHCPU
STATION)
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
14
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Q26UDEHCPU

15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 - 3

Communication
type
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
MELSEC-Q
Q04UDVCPU CC-Link IE 11.2
(Q mode)
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
Q12DCCPU-V*1
C Controller
Q24DHCCPU-V/VG
module CC-Link IE 11.2
Q24DHCCPU-LS
(Q Series)
Q26DHCCPU-LS
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU CC-Link IE 11.2

L02CPU
L06CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT
L02CPU-P
MELSEC-L - -
L06CPU-P
L26CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
L02SCPU-P
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A - -
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU - -
(QnACPU)
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
- -
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-A A2ACPUP21-S1
- -
(AnCPU) A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
A3ACPUR21
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21


9
Communicati
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
on type
MELSECNET/H
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
A1SHCPU
MELSECNET/10
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU - -
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
11
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
CONNECTION
A0J2HCPU
NETWORK
A0J2HCPUP21
- -
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
12
A2CCPU
CC-Link IE FIELD
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
CONNECTION
NETWORK
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU
Q173CPU
STATION)
Q172CPUN
- -
Q173CPUN
Q172HCPU 14
Q173HCPU
Q172DCPU
Motion CONNECTION
Q173DCPU
controller (Via G4)
CC-Link
CPU Q172DCPU-S1
(Q Series)
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU CC-Link IE 11.2

15
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*1
CONNECTION
INVERTER
Q170MSCPU*2
Q170MSCPU-S1*2
MR-MQ100 - -
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Communication
type
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU
Motion
- -
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series)
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 -
WS0-CPU3
station
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
head module
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC-Link IE 11.2

CRnQ-700
Robot (Q172DRCPU)
CC-Link IE 11.2
CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU)
FX0
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1
FX2
-
FX2C
FX1S
FX1N
-
MELSEC-FX FX2N -
FX1NC
FX2NC -
FX3S
FX3G
FX3GC
-
FX3GE
FX3U
FX3UC

11.1.2 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
CPU series CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit
MELSEC iQ-R Series
Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) RJ71GP21-SX
MELSEC-Q (Q mode)
C Controller module (Q Series)
10
*1
MELSEC-QS QJ71GP21-SX
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71GP21S-SX*1
MELSECNET/10
CNC C70
*1 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a unit with the upper five digits of the serial No. 12052 or
later.
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

CC-Link IE controller
PLC CPU GOT
network module Communication driver
Connection cable

Number of
CC-Link IE controller connectable
Communication Max.
Model name*5 network Cable model Option device Model equipment
type distance
communication unit*1
MELSEC iQ-R
Series
Motion controller
CPU (MELSEC
Optical fiber cable
iQ-R Series) RJ71GP21-SX CC-Link IE *3 GT15-J71GP23-SX*6 119 GOTs*4
*2
C Controller
module
(MELSEC iQ-R
Series)
MELSEC-Q
C Controller
QJ71GP21-SX Optical fiber cable
module CC-Link IE *3 GT15-J71GP23-SX*6 119 GOTs*4
QJ71GP21S-SX *2
(Q Series)
MELSEC-QS
*1 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a unit with the upper five digits of the serial No. 12052 or
later.
For the system configuration on the CC-Link IE Controller Network module side, refer to the following manual.

number of stations.
*4 When Universal model QCPUs is a control station, up to 119 GOTs can be connected.
When a QCPU other than Universal model QCPU is the control station, the number of connectable GOTs is 63 units (at most).
Basic model QCPU and the QSCPU cannot be used as the control station.
*5 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, only MELSEC-Q series Universal model QCPU can be used.
*6 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a module with the serial No. 02910908******* or later.

9
11.3 GOT side settings
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
Set the channel of connecting equipment.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
2.
3. 11
4.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
• CC IE Control
Network
Type*4
Set the network Type
(Default: CC IE Control)
• CC IE Control
extended mode
12
Set the network No.
CC-Link IE FIELD
(Default: 1)
Click!
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Station No. 1 to 120
(Default: 1)
• Online
(auto.
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the reconnection)
13
menu. • Offline
*1
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Set the operation mode of the GOT. • Test station
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Mode Setting (Default: • Self-loopback
channel to be used from the list menu. Online (auto. reconnection)) test*1
• Internal self-
STATION)
3. Set the following items. loopback test*1
• Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • Line test*1
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller • H/W test*1
Type to be connected. Set the number of retries to be 14
timeout occurs.
• Driver: CC-Link IE Controller Network Retry
0 to 5times
retries, a communication times out. CONNECTION

4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, (Default: 3times) (Via G4)
CC-Link
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Set the time period for a
Timeout
Make the settings according to the usage communication to time out. 3 to 90sec
Time
environment. (Default: 3sec)
15
Delay Time load of the network/destination PLC. 0 to 300ms
(Default: 0ms)
CONNECTION
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. Set the number of refreshes to
INVERTER

station units during communication.
POINT (Default: 1ms)
Refresh
Valid when [Block data assurance 1 to 1000ms
Interval
per station is available.] is checked 16
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. by the control station side network
parameters of the CC-Link IE
SERVO AMPLIFIER

Controller Network.
CONNECTION

Set the monitor speed for the CC-
POINT
Monitor *2 *3
This setting is not valid in all High /Normal/Low
Speed
systems.
(Default: High) When communicating within the host network, routing
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual For details of routing parameters, refer to the following
*2 This range is effective when collecting a large amount of manual.
monitor screen. CC-Link IE Controller Network
However, the range may affect the sequence scan time Reference Manual
when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/
Q00/Q01CPU.
If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time,
do not set [High].
(This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above.)
sequence scan time further than the [Normal] setting when
connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU or Q00J/Q00/
Q01CPU.
*4 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended
mode, set to [CC IE Control extended mode]. The extended
mode can be used in GT Designer3 version 1.22Y or later.
POINT
(1) Switch setting example
following. Item Range
11.4 PLC Side Setting Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
(2) Communication interface setting by Utility Relay Network No. 1 to 239
Universal model QCPU 1 to 120
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] Relay Station
QCPU other than Universal model
after writing [Communication Settings] of project No. 1 to 64
data. QCPU*1
For details on the Utility, refer to the following *1 Basic model QCPU and the QSCPU are not included.
manual.
GT User’s Manual
POINT
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the (1) Routing parameter setting of relay station
Utility, the latest setting is effective. Routing parameter setting is also necessary for
(4) Network type the relay station.
Be sure to set the same network types for the CPU For the setting, refer to the following.
side and the GOT side. If the net work types of the
CPU side and the GOT side are different, an error
is displayed in the system alarm of the GOT side. (2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator
11.3.3 Routing parameter setting MELSOFT Navigator.
Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. Relay network No. or Relay station No. are
However, the same transfer network number cannot be set Navigator, those settings are added. Items set
twice or more (multiple times). in advance are not deleted.However, if the
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the target network No. overlaps, the item set in
request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network advance is overwritten.
No.]s. (c) The routing information is used manually by
the user when the data is created. Therefore,
after changing the network configuration by
information again. For details of the creation
of the routing information, refer to the
MELSOFT Navigator help.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-
Link IE controller network module in the following case of  System configuration2
system configuration. (Network Type: CC IE Control extended
mode)
POINT <GOT>
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link IE Controller Network module
MELSECNET/10
Network type : CC IE Control extended mode
For details of the CC-Link IE Controller Network Network No.
Station No.
:1
:2
module, refer to the following manual. Made Setting : Online (auto,reconnection)
Network range assignment : LB0100H to LB01FFH
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference CC-Link IE Controller Network
Monitor Speed : High
LW00100H to LW001FFH
Manual
<CC-Link IE Controller Network module> *1
(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) 11
Station No. :1
11.4.1 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R Mode

Network type
: Online
: CC IE Control extended mode
Series
(Control station)
Network No. :1
CONNECTION
Total stations :2 LB0000H to LB00FFH
NETWORK
Network range assignment : LW00000H to LW000FFH
 System configuration1 *1 The CC-Link IE Controller Network module is mounted on

slot 0 of the base unit.
(Network Type: CC IE Control) The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Controller Network
■ GT Designer3 [Communication settings] on System

module is set at [0]. 12
configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Control)
 Parameter settings (Connecting to MELSEC
CC-Link IE FIELD
<GOT>
iQ-R series) of System configuration1

CONNECTION
(Network Type: CC IE Control)
NETWORK
Network type : CC IE Control
Network No. :1
Station No. :2
Made Setting : Online (auto,reconnection) (1) [Unit parameter] of GX Works3
LW00100H to LW001FFH (a) Unit parameter
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Station No. :1
Mode : Online
Network type : CC IE Control (Control station)
Network No. :1
STATION)
Total stations :2
[Unit parameter] of GX Works3
*1 The CC-Link IE Controller Network module is mounted on

14
The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Controller Network
module is set at [0].
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
15
Station Type Control Station (fixed)
CONNECTION
Network No.*1 1
INVERTER
Station Number Setting 1
Network Range
Refer to (b)
Assignment

16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(b) Network range assignment (c) Routing setting
Up to 64 [Target Network No.]s can be set.
[Target Network No.]s.
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Station Start 0000H

No.1 End 00FFH
LB
Station Start 0100H
LB/LW No.2 End 01FFH

Setting
(1)*1 Station Start 00000H
No.1 End 000FFH
LW
Station Start 00100H
No.2 End 001FFH
Item Range
*1 No Setting
LB/LW Setting (2) Target Network No. 1 to 239
LX/LY Setting (1)*1 No Setting Relay Network No. 1 to 239
LX/LY Setting (2)*1 No Setting Relay Station No. 1 to 120
Reserved Station
(Use default value)
Pairing POINT
request source GOT.
POINT For the setting, refer to the following.
When changing the unit parameter 11.3.3 Routing parameter setting
After writing unit parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the
PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset the PLC
CPU.

(b) Network range assignment 9
 GT Designer3 [Communication settings] on
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE
MELSECNET/H
Control)
Item Set value
Network Type CC IE Control
Network No. 1: Network No.1 10

Station No. 2: Station No.2 Setting
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
necessity at
MELSECNET/10
Group No. 0 (fixed) Item Set value
GOT
Mode Setting Online (auto. reconnection) connection
Transmission Speed 1Gbps (fixed) Start 0000H

Station
Refresh Interval 1ms (Use default value) No.1 End 00FFH
Retry 3times (Use default value)
LB
Station Start 0100H 11
Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) LB/LW No.2 End 01FFH
Delay Time 0ms (Use default value) Setting
CONNECTION
Monitor Speed High (Normal) (Use default value)
No.1 End 000FFH
NETWORK
LW
POINT No.2 End 001FFH
12
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 LB/LW Setting (2) *1 No Setting
CC-Link IE FIELD
LX/LY Setting (1)*1 No Setting
following.
CONNECTION
11.3.1 Setting communication interface LX/LY Setting (2)*1 No Setting
NETWORK
(Communication settings) Reserved Station
(Use default value)
Pairing
 Unit parameter settings of System : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary 13

(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
configuration2 (Network Type: Extended
mode)
(1) [Unit parameter] of GX Works3
STATION)
(a) Unit parameter
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
Setting
CONNECTION
necessity at
Item Set value
INVERTER
GOT
connection
CC IE Control
Station Type
(Control station)
16
Network No.*1 1
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION
Network Range
Refer to (b)
Assignment

(c) Routing setting (2) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
However, the same transfer network number Item Set value
Network type CC IE Control extended mode
from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Network No. 1: Network No.1
[Target Network No.]s. Station No. 2: Station No.2
Group No. 0 (fixed)
Mode Online (auto. reconnection)
Refresh Interval 1ms (Use default value)
Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)
POINT
Network type of the GOT side
When the network is in the extended mode, be sure to
set the network type of the GOT side to [CC IE Control
Item Range extended mode].
Target Network No. 1 to 239
following.
Relay Station No. 1 to 120 (Communication settings)
POINT
request source GOT.

11.4.2 Connecting to C Controller 9
 Parameter settings (Connecting to MELSEC
module (MELSEC iQ-R
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
iQ-R series) of System configuration1
Series)
MELSECNET/H
(1) [Module parameter] of CW Configurator
(a) Module parameter
Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in the following
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(MELSEC iQ-R Series) communication settings.
MELSECNET/10
 System configuration1
■ GT Designer3 [Communication settings] on System
<GOT>
(Use the default value for settings other 11
Network No. :1
Station No. :2
CONNECTION
NETWORK

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) Setting
Station No. :1
Item Set value
necessity at 12
Mode : Online GOT
Network type : CC IE Control (Control station)
Network No. :1 connection
CC-Link IE FIELD
Total stations :2
CONNECTION
Network range assignment : LB0000H to LB00FFH Station Type Control Station (fixed)
NETWORK
Network No.*1 1
slot 0 of the base unit. Station Number Setting 1
module is set at [0]. Network Range
Assignment
Refer to (b) 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
(Network Type: CC IE Control extended
mode) *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT.
STATION)
<GOT>
Network No.
Station No.
Made Setting
:1
:2
: Online (auto,reconnection)
14
<CC-Link IE Controller Network module> *1 CONNECTION

(Use the default value for settings other than the following.) (Via G4)
CC-Link
Station No. :1
Mode : Online
15
(Control station)
Network No. :1

CONNECTION

INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(b) Network range assignment (c) Routing setting
[Target Network No.]s.
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Station Start 0000H

No.1 End 00FFH
LB
Station Start 0100H

Setting
No.1 End 000FFH
LW
No.2 End 001FFH
Item Range
*1 No Setting
LB/LW Setting (2) Target Network No. 1 to 239
LX/LY Setting (1)*1 No Setting Relay Network No. 1 to 239
LX/LY Setting (2)*1 No Setting Relay Station No. 1 to 120
Reserved Station
(Use default value)
Pairing POINT
request source GOT.
POINT For the setting, refer to the following.
When changing the unit parameter 11.3.3 Routing parameter setting
CPU.

Setting 9
necessity at
 GT Designer3 [Communication settings] on Item Set value
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
GOT
System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE connection
MELSECNET/H
Control)
Item Set value Network Range

Refer to (b)
Assignment

: Necessary
(b) Network range assignment
: As necessary : Not necessary
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Group No. 0 (fixed)
Transmission Speed 1Gbps (fixed)
Retry 3times (Use default value) 11
Setting
Delay Time 0ms (Use default value) necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
CONNECTION
connection
NETWORK
Station Start 0000H
POINT No.1 End 00FFH

LB
Start 0100H
12
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Station
For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the LB/LW No.2 End 01FFH
CC-Link IE FIELD
Setting
following.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
No.1 End 000FFH
(Communication settings) LW
 Unit parameter settings of System

No.2 End 001FFH
13
LB/LW Setting (2)*1 No Setting
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
configuration2 (Network Type: Extended
mode) LX/LY Setting (1)*1 No Setting
LX/LY Setting (2)*1 No Setting

STATION)
(a) Module parameter Reserved Station
(Use default value)
Pairing

14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
Setting
Item Set value

necessity at
GOT 16
connection
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CC IE Control
Station Type
CONNECTION
(Control station)
Network No.*1 1

(c) Routing setting (2) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
However, the same transfer network number Item Set value
Network type CC IE Control extended mode
from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Network No. 1: Network No.1
[Target Network No.]s. Station No. 2: Station No.2
Group No. 0 (fixed)
POINT
Network type of the GOT side
When the network is in the extended mode, be sure to
set the network type of the GOT side to [CC IE Control
Item Range extended mode].
Target Network No. 1 to 239
following.
Relay Station No. 1 to 120 (Communication settings)
POINT
request source GOT.

11.4.3 Connecting to MELSEC-Q/L 9
 Parameter settings (Connection to MELSEC-
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q, QS series) of System configuration1
MELSECNET/H
■ GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System
<GOT>
than the following.) 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Network No. :1
Station No. :2
MELSECNET/10

Station No.
Mode
Network type
:1
: Online
: CC IE Control (Control station)
11
Network No. :1
Total stations :2
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
POINT
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
the CC-Link IE Controller Network module is set to Setting
"70". necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
CC IE Control
(Network Type: CC IE Control extended mode) Network type
<GOT>
(Use the default value for settings other Starting I/O No.*1 0000H
STATION)
Network type : CC IE Control extended mode Network No.*2 1
Network No. :1
Station No. :2 Total stations 2
14
LW00100H to LW001FFH Group No. 0 (fixed)
Station No. 1
Mode*3 Online
Station No. :1 CONNECTION
Mode : Online Network range assignment Refer to (b) (Via G4)
CC-Link

(Control station)
Network No. :1 Refresh parameters
Interrupt settings
15
(Use default value)
*1 The CC-Link IE Controller Network module is mounted on Interlink transmission
parameters
CONNECTION
INVERTER

configuration.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

However, the same target station network number
[Target Station Network No.]s.
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Monitoring time 2000
Station Start 0000H

No.1 End 00FFH
LB
Station Start 0100H

setting(1)
Item Range
*1 Station Start 00000H
No.1 End 000FFH Target Station network No. 1 to 239
LW
Relay Station network No. 1 to 239
No.2 Relay station No. 1 to 120
End 001FFH
LX/LY setting*1 No setting

POINT
Specify reserved station No setting Routing parameter setting of request source
Supplementary setting (Use default value) Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the
request source GOT.
POINT
or resetting.

(2) CC IE Control Utility's [Parameter Settings]
9
 Parameter setting (when connecting to C
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Controller module (Q Series)) (a) Parameter settings
MELSECNET/H
Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CC IE
Control utility.
(1) Connection settings between personal computer

and C controller module (Q Series)
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
11
Setting
Setting
necessity at
CONNECTION
necessity at Item Set value
Item Set value GOT
NETWORK
GOT
connection
connection
Number of modules 1

Link device refresh cycle (Use default value) 12
Routing parameter Refer to (c)
User name*2 target
CC-Link IE FIELD
Target module 1
CONNECTION
Password*2 password
NETWORK
Start I/O No. 0000H
Detailed settings -
Channel No. 151
*1 If the IP address of the C Controller module (Q Series) has CC IE Control
Network type
(Control station) 13
Operation settings
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
been changed, input the changed user name and password. Mode*1 Online
Network No.*2 1
Group No. 0
STATION)
Station No. 1
Network range
14
Refer to (b)
assignment

*1 Set the same mode setting as that of the GOT. CONNECTION
*2 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT. (Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Total stations 2
Station Start 0000H

No.1 End 00FFH
LB
Station Start 0100H
No.2 End 01FFH
LB/LW
settings (1)
No.1 End 000FFH
LW
No.2 End 001FFH
LX/LY settings*1 No setting
Monitoring time (Use default value)

Item Range
Supplementary settings (Use default value) Relay station No. 1 to 120
POINT
POINT Routing parameter setting of request source
When changing the network parameter Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the
After writing the network parameter to the C Controller request source GOT.
module (Q Series), either turn the C Controller module For the setting, refer to the following.
(Q Series) OFF and then ON or reset it. 11.3.3 Routing parameter setting

9
 GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of  Parameter settings (Connection to Universal
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
System configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE model QCPU) of System configuration2
MELSECNET/H
Control) (Network Type: Extended mode)
Item Set value (1) [Network parameter] of GX Works2


TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Refresh Interval 1ms (Use default value) 11
Monitor Speed High (Use default value)
Setting necessity
Item Set value at GOT
connection
CONNECTION
POINT
NETWORK
CC IE Control Ext. Mode
Network Type
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Start I/O No.*1 0000H
Designer3, refer to the following. Network No.*2 1
12
Total Stations 2
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Group No. 0 (Fixed)
NETWORK
Station No. 1
Mode*3 Online
Network Range
Same as the following setting 13
[Network parameter]
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Assignment
CC-Link CONNECTION
of GX Developer
Refresh Parameters
Interrupt Setting
STATION)
(Use default value)
parameters
Same as the following setting 14

Routing parameters [Network parameter]
of GX Developer
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary CONNECTION

(Via G4)
CC-Link
(2) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3

Item Set value
Network type CC IE Control extended mode 15


CONNECTION
INVERTER
Delay Time 1ms (Use default value) 16

Refresh Interval High (Use default value)
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

POINT
(1) Network type of the GOT side
When the network is in the extended mode, be
sure to set the network type of the GOT side to
[CC IE Control extended mode].
For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to
the following.
(2) Network type of the PLC side
Only GX Works2 can set [CC IE Control extended
mode (control station)] or [CC IE Control extended
mode (ordinary station)]. The CPU which is
compatible with the extended mode is Universal
model QCPU only.

9
11.5 Precautions
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
 GOT startup in CC-Link IE Controller
Network connection  Connection to Q170MCPU
For the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, the Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the
data link is started approximately 13 seconds after the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2).
GOT startup.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
 When a network error occurs in the system PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored.
MELSECNET/10
alarm When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0"
In the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, when to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
a network error occurs in the system alarm, the system cannot be executed.
alarm display cannot be canceled even though the For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual.
causes are removed. GT Designer3 Version Screen Design 11
To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT. Manual
 Connection in the multiple CPU system Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device
CONNECTION
When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system,
NETWORK
seconds or more
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
alarm occurs. Adjust the opening screen time in the
NETWORK
Manual
 CC-Link IE Controller Network module

13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
version
For version restrictions of the CC-Link IE Controller
Network module, refer to the following manual.
STATION)
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference The RnSFCPU takes 10 seconds or more to run.
Manual
 Connection to QSCPU system alarm occurs. 14
programs by the ladder monitor function in the QSCPU.
CONNECTION
The GOT cannot write any data to the QSCPU.
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

11.5 Precautions
11.5 Precautions
12
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link IE FIELD
MELSECNET/10
12.
NETWORK CONNECTION 11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12.3 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 9
12.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 - 11 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
12.5 Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 19
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
12 - 1
12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK
CONNECTION


Communication
type
R04CPU
R08CPU
R16CPU
R32CPU
R120CPU
R08PCPU
R16PCPU
R32PCPU
R120PCPU CC-Link IE
MELSEC iQ-R
FIELD 12.2
Series R04ENCPU
NETWORK
R08ENCPU
R16ENCPU
R32ENCPU
R120ENCPU
R08SFCPU*1
R16SFCPU*1
R32SFCPU*1
R120SFCPU*1
Motion controller R16MTCPU CC-Link IE

CPU (MELSEC FIELD 12.2
iQ-R Series) R32MTCPU NETWORK
C Controller
CC-Link IE
module
R12CCPU-V FIELD 12.2
(MELSEC iQ-R
NETWORK
Series)
CC-Link IE
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U
FIELD -
Series FX5UC
NETWORK

12 - 2 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

Communication
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q00JCPU
MELSECNET/H
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1
Q02HCPU*1 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q06HCPU*1
MELSECNET/10
Q12HCPU*1 - -
*1
Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU 11
Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU(Main base)
CONNECTION
Q25PRHCPU(Main base)
NETWORK
Q12PRHCPU(Extension base)
- -
Q25PRHCPU(Extension base)
MELSEC-Q
(Q mode)
Q00UJCPU
12
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Q02UCPU
NETWORK
Q03UDCPU
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU 13
CC-Link IE
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Q13UDHCPU
FIELD 12.2
Q20UDHCPU NETWORK
Q26UDHCPU
STATION)
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
14
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
CONNECTION
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU (Via G4)

CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 - 3

Communication
type
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
MELSEC-Q
Q04UDVCPU 12.2
(Q mode)
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU CC-Link IE
Q26UDVCPU FIELD
Q12DCCPU-V*1 NETWORK
C Controller
Q24DHCCPU-V/VG
module 12.2
Q24DHCCPU-LS
(Q Series)
Q26DHCCPU-LS
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU*3 12.2
L02CPU*2
L06CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT*2
CC-Link IE
MELSEC-L L02CPU-P*2 FIELD 12.2
L06CPU-P NETWORK
L26CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT*2
L02SCPU
L02SCPU-P
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A - -
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU - -
(QnACPU)
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
- -
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21 - -
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
*3 Use a module with the upper five digits later than "13042". Use GX Developer of Version 8.98C or later.

Communication
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
type
MELSECNET/H
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2 10
A1SHCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSEC-A
MELSECNET/10
A2SCPU - -
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU 11
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
CONNECTION
A0J2HCPU
NETWORK
A0J2HCPUP21
- -
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24 12
A2CCPU
CC-Link IE FIELD
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
CONNECTION
A2CCPUR21
NETWORK
A2CCPUC24 - -
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
A1FXCPU
CC-Link CONNECTION
Q172CPU
Q173CPU
STATION)
Q172CPUN
- -
Q173CPUN
Q172HCPU 14
Q173HCPU
Motion Q172DCPU
controller Q173DCPU CONNECTION
CPU (Via G4)
CC-Link
-
Q173DCPU-S1
CC-Link IE
Q172DSCPU FIELD 15
Q173DSCPU NETWORK
Q170MCPU*1
CONNECTION
Q170MSCPU*3 *2 *2
INVERTER
12.2
Q170MSCPU-S1*3

*1
*2
Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit (Q52B/Q55B).
For the PLC CPU area, use a module with the upper five digits later than 12012. Only the PLC CPU area can be monitored.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

Communication
type
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU
Motion
- -
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series)
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
WS0-CPU0
WS0-CPU3
QJ72LP25-25
MELSECNET/H
station
QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE CC-Link IE
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 FIELD 12.2
head module NETWORK
CC-Link IE
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB FIELD 12.2
Ethernet
NETWORK
adapter module
CC-Link IE
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU FIELD 12.2
NETWORK
CRnQ-700
CC-Link IE
Robot (Q172DRCPU)
FIELD 12.2
NETWORK
CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU)
FX0
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1
FX2
-
FX2C
FX1S
FX1N
-
MELSEC-FX FX2N -
FX1NC
FX2NC -
FX3S
FX3G
FX3GC
-
FX3GE
FX3U
FX3UC

12.1.2 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
CPU series CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit
MELSEC iQ-R Series RJ71GF11-T2

Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) RJ71EN71
C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) RD77GF4, RD77GF8, RD77GF16
MELSEC-Q(Universal model)
QJ71GF11-T2, QD77GF16
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSEC-L LJ71GF11-T2
MELSECNET/10
MELSEC-QS QS0J71GF11-T2
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

12.2.1 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

CC-Link IE
PLC CPU GOT
Field Network unit
Connection cable
CC-Link IE Field Number of

Network Communication Max connectable
Model name Cable model*2 option device Model equipment
communication type distance*1
unit
MELSEC iQ-R Series

Motion controller CPU RJ71GF11-T2
(MELSEC iQ-R RJ71EN71
Series) RD77GF4*4
C Controller module RD77GF8*4
(MELSEC iQ-R RD77GF16*4
Series) GT15-J71GF13-T2
R04ENCPU
R08ENCPU
R16ENCPU -
R32ENCPU Ethernet cable that meets the
R120ENCPU 1000BASE-T standard:
CC-Link IE
Category 5e or higher, 12100m 120 GOTs
MELSEC-Q Field Network
(double-shielded, STP)
(Universal model)
QJ71GF11-T2 straight cable.
Q170MCPU
QD77GF16*3
C Controller module
(Q Series)
MELSEC-QS QS0J71GF11-T2
GT15-J71GF13-T2
MELSEC-L LJ71GF11-T2
CC-Link IE Field
-
Network head module
Ethernet adapter
-
module
*1 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the connection method (line, star or ring),
the system configuration, etc.
*2 Use hubs that satisfy the following conditions.
• Compliance with the IEEE802.3 (1000BASE-T)
• Supporting the auto MDI/MDI-X function
• Supporting the auto-negotiation function
• Switching hub (A repeater hub is not available.)
Recommended switching hub (Mitsubishi electric products)
Type Model name
Industrial switching hub NZ2EHG-T8

*3 When connecting to the QD77GF16, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User's Manual

*4 When connecting to the RD77GF4, RD77GF8 and RD77GF16, refer to the following manual.
RD77GF Simple Motion Module User's Manual

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
2.
MELSECNET/10
3. 11
4.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Item
Network
Description Range
12
Set the network Type • CC IE Field
Type*4
CC-Link IE FIELD
Click! Set the network No. of the GOT.
CONNECTION
(Default: 1)
NETWORK
Station No. 1 to 120
(Default: 1)
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the • Online
menu. Set the operation mode of the GOT.

Mode Setting (Default:
• Offline
• H/W test*1
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Online (auto. reconnection)) • Self-loopback
test*1
3. Refresh secure the send/receive data in
STATION)
Set the following items. 1 to 1000ms
Interval station units during communication.
• Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC (Default: 25ms)
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Set the hold/clear of input from the
Input for Error
station where the data link is faulty 14
• I/F: Interface to be used due to some reason such as turning Clear/Hold
Station
• Driver: CC-Link IE Field Network the power OFF.
(Default: Clear)
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Set the number of retries to be CONNECTION
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. performed when a communication (Via G4)
CC-Link
timeout occurs.
Retry When receiving no response after 0 to 5times
environment.
retries, the communication times
out. 15
(Default: 3times)
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. Timeout
CONNECTION

Time
(Default: 3sec)
INVERTER

POINT Delay Time load of the network/destination PLC. 0 to 300ms
(Default: 0ms)
Set the monitor speed for the CC- 16
Link IE field network.
For details, refer to the following. Monitor
High*2/Normal/Low*3
SERVO AMPLIFIER
This setting is not valid in all

Speed
1.1.2 I/F communication setting systems.
CONNECTION
(Default: High)

CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module
User's Manual
*2 This range is effective when collecting a large amount of
monitor screen.
However, the range may affect the sequence scan time
when connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU.
If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time,
do not set [High].
(This setting hardly affects QCPUs other than the above.)

sequence scan time further than the [Normal] setting when
connecting to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02UCPU.
POINT
Item Range
following. Relay Network No. 1 to 239
12.4 PLC Side Setting Relay Station

MELSEC-Q (Universal model)
(2) Communication interface setting by Utility Q170MCPU C Controller Module (Q 0 to 120
No.
Series)
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] *1 Basic model QCPU and the QSCPU are not included.
data.
POINT
manual.
GT User’s Manual Routing parameter setting is also necessary for
(3) Precedence in communication settings the relay station.
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the For the setting, refer to the following.
Utility, the latest setting is effective. 12.4 PLC Side Setting
(4) Network type (2) Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator
Be sure to set the same network types for the CPU
side and the GOT side. If the network types of the
CPU side and the GOT side are different, an error
is displayed in the system alarm of the GOT side.
MELSOFT Navigator.
12.3.3 Routing parameter setting Relay network No. or Relay station No. are
Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. Navigator, those settings are added. Items set
However, the same transfer network number cannot be set in advance are not deleted. However, if the
twice or more (multiple times). target network No. overlaps, the item set in
advance is overwritten.
Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the
(c) The routing information is used manually by
request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network
the user when the data is created. Therefore,
No.]s.
after changing the network configuration by
POINT information again. For details of the creation
of the routing information, refer to the
Routing parameter setting MELSOFT Navigator help.

manual.
Reference Manual

12.4 PLC Side Setting 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Link IE controller network module in the following case of  Unit parameter settings of System
system configuration. configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field)
POINT
(1) [Unit parameter] of GX Works3 10
(a) Unit parameter
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link IE Field Network Module
MELSECNET/10
For details of the CC-Link IE Field Network module,
User's Manual
11
12.4.1 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R
Series
CONNECTION
NETWORK
(Network Type: CC IE Field) Setting
■ System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field)
<GOT> GOT connection 12
than the following.) Station type Master station (fixed)
CC-Link IE FIELD
Network type : CC IE Field
No.*1 1
CONNECTION
Network No. :1
Network
Station No. :1
NETWORK
Mode Setting : Online
Network Configuration Settings : RX/RY00 to FFH Station number setting Parameter
RWW/RWr00 to FFH
Monitor Speed : High Station No. 0 (fixed)
<CC-Link IE Field Network module> *1 Parameter setting Engineering tool
Station No. : 0 (fixed) Network Configuration

13
Refer to (b)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Mode : Online (normal)
Network type : CC IE Field (Master station) Settings
Network No. :1
Total stations :1 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Network Configuration Settings : RX/RY00H to FFH
RWW/RWr00H to FFH
STATION)
■ [Unit parameter] of GX Works3
*1 The CC-Link IE Field Network module is mounted on slot 0

of the base unit.
The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network module is
set at "0". 14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(b) Network Configuration Settings (c) Routing setting
However, the same target station network number
Setting necessity
connection
Rx/RY Station Start 0000H

Rx/RY, setting No.1 End 00FFH
RWw/RWr
Setting (1)*1 RWw/RWr Station Start 0000H
setting No.1 End 00FFH
Reserved/Error Invalid Station No setting
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Item Range

Target Station Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Station Network No. 1 to 239

POINT
(1) When changing the unit parameter

After writing unit parameters to the PLC CPU, turn
the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset POINT
the PLC CPU.
(2) GOT station type
Set the GOT as an intelligent device station. Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the
request source GOT.

12.4.2 Connection to C Controller 9
 GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of
module (MELSEC iQ-R
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
System configuration (Network Type: CC IE
Series)
MELSECNET/H
Field)
Item Set value This section describes the settings of the GOT and C
Network Type CC IE Field Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in the following
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Group No. 0 (fixed)
Mode Setting Online

(Network Type: CC IE Field)
■ System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field)
Input for Error Station Clear (Use default value) <GOT>
11
Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) Network No. :1
Station No. :1
Delay Time 0ms (Use default value) Network Configuration Settings : RX/RY00 to FFH
RWW/RWr00 to FFH
CONNECTION
Monitor Speed High (Normal) (Use default value) Monitor Speed : High
NETWORK
<CC-Link IE Field Network module> *1
POINT Station No. : 0 (fixed)

Mode
Network type
: Online (normal)
: CC IE Field (Master station) 12
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Network No.
Total stations
:1
:1
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Network Configuration Settings : RX/RY00H to FFH
CC-Link IE FIELD
RWW/RWr00H to FFH
CONNECTION
NETWORK
(Communication settings) of the base unit.
The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network module is
set at "0".
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(b) Network Configuration Settings
 Unit parameter settings of System
configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field)
Setting necessity
connection

Rx/RY, setting No.1 End 00FFH
RWw/RWr
Setting (1)*1 RWw/RWr Station Start 0000H
Setting Reserved/Error Invalid Station No setting

GOT connection : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Station type Master station (fixed)
Network No.*1 1 POINT

Station No. 0 (fixed)
(1) When changing the unit parameter
Parameter setting Parameter
After writing unit parameters to the PLC CPU, turn
Channel No. (Use default value) the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or reset
the PLC CPU.
Network Configuration
Settings
Refer to (b) (2) GOT station type
Set the GOT as an intelligent device station.

(c) Routing setting 9
Up to 238 [Target Station Network No.]s can be set.  GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
However, the same target station network number System configuration (Network Type: CC IE
MELSECNET/H
cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Field)
from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of Item Set value
Network Type CC IE Field

TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Group No. 0 (fixed)
Mode Setting Online
Input for Error Station Clear (Use default value)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Item Range POINT
Target Station Network No. 1 to 239 12
Relay Station Network No. 1 to 239
CC-Link IE FIELD
Relay Station No. 1 to 120 Designer3, refer to the following.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
POINT
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
request source GOT.
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

12.4.3 Connecting to MELSEC-Q/L  Parameter settings (Connection to MELSEC-
Q, QS series) of System configuration
 System configuration (Network Type: CC IE Field)
(Network Type: CC IE Field) (1) Network parameter] of GX Works2
■ GT Designer3 [Communication setting] of System Use GX Works2 of Version 1.31H or later.
configuration1 (Network Type: CC IE Field)
<GOT>
Network No. :1
Station No. :1
Network Configuration Settings : RX/RY00 to FFH
RWW/RWr00 to FFH
<CC-Link IE Field Network module> *1

Station No. : 0 (fixed)

Mode : Online (normal)
Network type : CC IE Field (Master station)
Network No. :1
Total stations :1
Network Configuration Settings : RX/RY00H to FFH
RWW/RWr00H to FFH
■ [Network parameter] of GX Works2

of the base unit.
The start I/O No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network module is
set at [0].
POINT
Setting
necessity at
When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of Item Set value
GOT
the CC-Link IE Field Network module is set to "70". connection
CC IE Field
Network type
(Master station) (fixed)
*2 1
Network No.
Total stations 1
Online
Mode*3
(Normal mode)
Network Configuration
Refer to (b)
Settings
Refresh parameters
Interrupt settings
(Use default value)
parameters

configuration.

(b) Network Configuration Settings (c) Routing parameter setting 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Item Set value
Setting
necessity at 11
GOT
connection
CONNECTION
setting No.1 End
NETWORK
Rx/RY, 00FFH
RWw/RWr
setting(1)*1 RWw/RWr Station Start 00000H
12
Reserved/Error Invalid Station No setting
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
POINT
(1) When changing the network parameter
After writing the network parameter to the PLC
Item Range 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and Transfer target network No. 1 to 239
then ON or resetting. Relay network No. 1 to 239
(2) GOT station type
Set the GOT as an intelligent device station.
STATION)
POINT
14
request source GOT.
For the setting, refer to the following. CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

 GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of
System configuration (Network Type: CC IE
Field)
Item Set value
Network Type CC IE Field
Mode Setting Online
POINT

9
12.5 Precautions
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
 GOT startup in CC-Link IE Field Network
connection  Data link failure in other stations at GOT
For the CC-Link IE Field Network connection, the data startup
link is started approximately 15 seconds after the GOT At GOT startup, the data link failure may occur in other
startup. stations.
10
However, after the failure occurrence, the GOT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
 When a network error occurs in the system reconnects automatically and monitors the devices
MELSECNET/10
alarm properly.
In the CC-Link IE Field Network connection, when a To avoid such data link failure, start up the GOT 10
network error occurs in the system alarm, the system seconds earlier than the master station.
alarm display cannot be canceled even though the However, if the master station does not complete
causes are removed. startup when GOT starts monitoring (10 seconds after 11
To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT. the GOT startup), the communication timeout occurs in
the GOT side.
 CC-Link IE Field Network module version For details, refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION
For version restrictions of the CC-Link IE Field Network CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module
NETWORK
module, refer to the following manual. User's Manual
User's Manual
 Data link failure in all stations at GOT startup 12
 Connection to Q170MCPU or cable connection/disconnection
CC-Link IE FIELD
The Motion CPU area (CPU No.2) cannot be At GOT startup, the communication is broken
CONNECTION
monitored. temporarily between PORT1 and PORT2 in the CC-
NETWORK
Set the CPU No. to "0" or "1". Link IE Field module which is installed on the GOT.
The device of the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is Thus, as the GOT or a station between the GOT and
monitored. the master station is reconnected, the data link failure
For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual. may occur on all stations. 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Manual
POINT
Example) Setting dialog box of the bit device GOT startup
STATION)
GOT startup indicates the startups after the following
operations:
• Turning ON the GOT
• Resetting the GOT main unit
14
• Operating the utility
• Downloading the project including the
CONNECTION
communication settings
• Downloading the OS (Via G4)
CC-Link
 When the output is required to be held at the

data link failure 15
Set the GOT to hold the input from the data link faulty
stations in the communication setting. Set "Input for
CONNECTION
Error Station" to "Hold".

INVERTER
The RnSFCPU takes 10 seconds or more to run. 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
system alarm occurs.

CONNECTION


12.5 Precautions
12.5 Precautions
13
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link CONNECTION
MELSECNET/10
13.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13.3 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 - 11
13.4 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 14 13
13.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 48
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
13 - 1
13. CC-Link CONNECTION
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)


Communication
type
R04CPU
R08CPU
R16CPU
R32CPU
R120CPU
R08PCPU
R16PCPU
R32PCPU
R120PCPU
MELSEC iQ-R
CC-Link (ID) 13.2
Series R04ENCPU
R08ENCPU
R16ENCPU
R32ENCPU
R120ENCPU
R08SFCPU*1
R16SFCPU*1
R32SFCPU*1
R120SFCPU*1

CPU (MELSEC CC-Link (ID) 13.2
C Controller
module
R12CCPU-V CC-Link (ID) 13.2
(MELSEC iQ-R
Series)
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U

CC-Link (ID) -
Series FX5UC

13 - 2 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

Communication
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
type
MELSECNET/H
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1
10
Q02HCPU*1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q06HCPU*1
MELSECNET/10
Q12HCPU*1
Q25HCPU*1 CC-Link(ID) 13.2
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU

11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Q00UJCPU
MELSEC-Q Q00UCPU
(Q mode) Q01UCPU
Q02UCPU
12
Q03UDCPU
CC-Link IE FIELD
Q04UDHCPU
CONNECTION
Q06UDHCPU
NETWORK
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU *3
13
CC-Link(ID) 13.2
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Q04UDEHCPU
CC-Link CONNECTION
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
STATION)
Q26UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
14
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Q12DCCPU-V*2
module CC-Link(ID)
(Q Series) Q24DHCCPU-LS
13.2
15
Q26DHCCPU-LS

CONNECTION
INVERTER
*3 Use GT15-J61BT13 as the CC-Link communication unit.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13 - 3

Communication
type
L02CPU
L06CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-B
L02CPU-P
MELSEC-L CC-Link(ID) 13.2.2
L06CPU-P
L26CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
L02SCPU-P
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
(QnACPU)
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21 CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SHCPU
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU

Communication
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
A0J2HCPU
MELSECNET/H
A0J2HCPUP21
CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 10
A2CCPUR21
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
A2CCPUC24 - -
MELSECNET/10
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*1*2
Q173CPU*1*2
11
Q172CPUN*1
Q173CPUN*1
CONNECTION
Q172HCPU
NETWORK
Q173HCPU
Q172DCPU
Motion
controller
CPU
Q173DCPU CC-Link(ID) 13.2 12
Q172DCPU-S1
(Q Series)
Q173DCPU-S1
CC-Link IE FIELD
Q172DSCPU
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*3
Q170MSCPU*4
Q170MSCPU-S1*4 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
MR-MQ100 - -
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
STATION)
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU
14
Motion
CC-Link(ID) 13.2.1
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
CONNECTION
(A Series)
A171SHCPU
(Via G4)
CC-Link
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
15
A173UHCPU-S1

CONNECTION
INVERTER

• Q172CPU: Product number N******* or later 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Communication
type
WS0-CPU0
WS0-CPU3
station QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
head module
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC-Link(ID) 13.2

Robot
CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU) CC-Link(ID) 13.2
controller
CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU)
FX0
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1
FX2
-
FX2C
FX1S
FX1N
-
MELSEC-FX FX2N -
FX1NC
FX2NC -
FX3S
FX3G
FX3GC
-
FX3GE
FX3U
FX3UC
13.1.2 CC-Link module
CPU series CC-Link module
MELSEC iQ-R Series

Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) RJ61BT11
MELSEC-Q (Q mode)
QJ61BT11
QJ61BT11N
CNC C70
MELSEC-L LJ61BT11
AJ61QBT11*1
MELSEC-QnA
A1SJ61QBT11*1
MELSEC-Q (A mode)
AJ61BT11*1
MELSEC-A
Motion controller CPU (A Series) A1SJ61BT11*1
*1 Transient communication can be performed to only CC-Link modules of function version B or later and software version J or later.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
13.2.1 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1 compatible
10
CC-Link Ver2(ID) CC-Link(ID)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 (When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z
MELSECNET/10
CC-Link communication unit is used) CC-Link communication unit is used)
PLC CC-Link
GOT
module
Connection cable
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
CC-Link module Communication Max. connectable
*1 type distance
MELSEC iQ-R
Series
12
Motion
controller CPU
CC-Link IE FIELD
CC-Link dedicated
GT15-J61BT13
CONNECTION
(MELSEC iQ-R
RJ61BT11 CC-Link (Ver.1) cable *3
Series) *5
NETWORK
*2
C Controller
module
(MELSEC iQ-R
Series) 13
MELSEC-Q GT15-J61BT13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
(Q mode) *5
Motion
controller CPU CC-Link dedicated
QJ61BT11
(Q Series) CC-Link (Ver.1) cable *3
STATION)
QJ61BT11N GT15-75J61BT13-Z
CNC C70 *2
*6
Robot
controller
(CRnQ-700)
26 GOTs
14
C Controller CC-Link dedicated
QJ61BT11 GT15-J61BT13
module CC-Link(Ver.1) cable *3
QJ61BT11N *5
CONNECTION
(Q Series) *2
CC-Link dedicated (Via G4)

CC-Link
GT15-J61BT13
MELSEC-L LJ61BT11 CC-Link(Ver.1) cable *3
*5
*2
MELSEC-L
- CC-Link(Ver.1)
CC-Link dedicated
cable *3
GT15-J61BT13 15
(L26CPU-BT) *5
*2
GT15-J61BT13
CONNECTION
AJ61QBT11 CC-Link dedicated *5

MELSEC-QnA CC-Link (Ver.1) cable *3
INVERTER
A1SJ61QBT11*4
*2 GT15-75J61BT13-Z
GT15-J61BT13
CC-Link dedicated
MELSEC-A
AJ61BT11
A1SJ61BT11*4
CC-Link (Ver.1) cable *3
*5
16
*2 GT15-75J61BT13-Z
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manuals.

Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 User's Manual
Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual
MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
*2 For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to the following.
CC-Link Partner Association's home page: http://www.cc-link.org/

*3 The maximum overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and
the transmission speed.
Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 User's Manual
Control & Communication Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual
*4 Transient transmission can be performed to only CC-Link modules of function version B or later and software version J or later.
*5 Specify Ver.1 as the mode setting in the Communication Settings to use it.
For details of the settings, refer to the following the manual.
*6 Not available for the universal model QCPU.

13.2.2 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.2 compatible 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
CC-Link Communication driver
PLC
module
GOT
10
Connection cable
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link Ver2(ID)
MELSECNET/10
(When MODEL GT15-J61BT13
CC-Link communication unit is used)

11
Number of
*1 type distance
CONNECTION
MELSEC iQ-R
NETWORK
Series
Motion controller
CC-Link dedicated
CPU (MELSEC iQ-R GT15-J61BT13
RJ61BT11 CC-Link (Ver.2) cable *3
Series)
C Controller module
*2
*4
12
(MELSEC iQ-R
Series)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
MELSEC-Q
NETWORK
(Q mode)
C Controller module 26 GOTs
(Q Series)
Motion controller QJ61BT11N
CPU (Q Series)
CC-Link dedicated
13
CNC C70 GT15-J61BT13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Robot controller *4
*2
(CRnQ-700)
MELSEC-L LJ61BT11
STATION)
MELSEC-L
(L26CPU-BT) -
(L26CPU-PBT)
*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual. 14
CONNECTION
CC-Link Partner Association's home page: http://www.cc-link.org/ (Via G4)

CC-Link
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT11N 15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

13.2.3 Connecting with CC-Link Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed

QCPU CC-Link
GOT
module
Connection cable

*1 type distance
MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link dedicated

GT15-J61BT13
Series CC-Link (Ver.2) cable *3
*4
Motion *2
controller CPU
(MELSEC iQ-R
RJ61BT11
Series) CC-Link dedicated
C Controller GT15-J61BT13
*5
module *2
(MELSEC iQ-R
Series)
MELSEC-Q CC-Link dedicated

GT15-J61BT13
(Q mode) *4
*2
Motion 26 GOTs
controller CPU CC-Link dedicated
GT15-J61BT13
(Q Series) QJ61BT11N cable *3
*5
CNC C70 *2
Robot CC-Link (Ver.1)
CC-Link dedicated
controller GT15-75J61BT13-Z
cable *3
(CRnQ-700) *6
*2
CC-Link dedicated
GT15-J61BT13
C Controller *4
*2
module QJ61BT11N
(Q Series) CC-Link dedicated
GT15-J61BT13
*5
*2
*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual.


*6 Not available for the universal model QCPU.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
POINT
settings)
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
2.

3. 11
(1) CC-Link Ver.2 (ID)
4.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
Click!
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
menu.
Item Description Range 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
channel to be used from the list menu. Station No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1)
3. Set the following items. Transmission

Set the transmission speed and
the mode of the GOT. 0 to E
STATION)
*1
Rate
(Default: 0)
Type to be connected. Set the mode of CC-Link. Ver.1/Ver.2/
Mode
(Default: Ver.1) Additional/Offline
14
• Driver: Expanded Set the cyclic point expansion. Single/Double/
Cyclic (Default: Single) Quadruple/Octuple
When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
communication unit is used Set the number of stations
CONNECTION
Occupied
occupied by the GOT. 1 Station/4 Stations
CC-Link Ver2 (ID) Station
(Default: 1 Station) (Via G4)
CC-Link
When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link

Set Clear/Hold at an error
communication unit is used Input for Error
occurrence. Clear/Hold
Station
CC-Link (ID) (Default: Clear)
15
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. timeout occurs.
CONNECTION
Make the settings according to the usage Retry When no response is received 0 to 5times
INVERTER
environment. after retries, a communication

times out.
13.3.2 Communication detail settings (Default: 3times)

Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90sec 16
(Default: 3sec)
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

PLC.
(Default: 0ms)

*1 Transmission speed settings
The following lists the transmission speed settings of the CC- (2) CC-Link(ID)
Link communication.
Set value Description
0 Online: 156kbps
1 Online: 625kbps
2 Online: 2.5Mbps
3 Online: 5Mbps
4 Online: 10Mbps
A Hardware test: 156kbps
B Hardware test: 625kbps
C Hardware test: 2.5Mbps
D Hardware test: 5Mbps

E Hardware test: 10Mbps
For details of the hardware test, refer to the following
manual. timeout occurs.
Retry 0 to 5times
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's
retries, a communication times out.
Manual for CC-Link module to be used
(Default: 3times)

(Default: 3sec)
POINT
(1) Communication interface setting by Utility
data.
manual.
GT User's Manual


13.3.3 Switch setting (Only when (3) Transmission baudrate setting switch
9
MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Transmission
CC-Link communication unit is
MELSECNET/H
baudrate Description Set value
used) setting switch
0: 156kbps
1: 625kbps
Specify the transmission speed.
POINT
(Default: 0)
2: 2.5Mbps
3: 5Mbps 10
4: 10Mbps
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Switch setting of the communication unit
MELSECNET/10
When using the MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
communication unit, the switch setting is not needed.
Condition
For details of each setting switch and LED, refer to the setting
Setting
following manual. switches
switch
11
GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's Specify input data status of
Manual OFF: Cleared
SW1 the data link error station.
ON: Held
(Default: OFF)
CONNECTION
GT15-75J61BT13-Z Specify the number of stations
NETWORK
OFF: 1 station
Left side Front side SW2 occupied.
ON: 4 stations
(Default: OFF)
RUN
L RUN 12
345
SD
RD POINT
(1)
EF 2
67 A
01
MODE L ERR.
89
BCD
23
CC-Link IE FIELD
901
456

78
10
(2)
CONNECTION
STATION NO.
23

901
456
78
1
NETWORK
23
(3) following.
901
456
78
BAUDRATE
ON
(4) 13.4 PLC Side Setting

1 2
1 3 5 7
SW ON OFF DA DG NC NC
1 HOLD CLEAR 2 4 6 8
2 4 1
DB SLD (FG1) NC
(2) When the switch setting is changed 13

(1) Mode setting switch When changing the switch setting after mounting
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
the MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link
Mode setting
communication unit on the GOT, reset the GOT.
switch
STATION)
Select the online mode.
0 (fixed)
(Default: 0)
14
(2) Station number setting switch
Station CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
number
setting
switch
15
Specify the station No. of the CC-
Link communication unit. 1 to 64
CONNECTION
(Default: 01)
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

The GOT operates as the stations of which are shown
below in the CC-Link system.
Station data Description HINT

Intelligent device station, Ver.1 intelligent device Number of stations occupied
Station type
station or Ver.2 intelligent device station
The number of stations occupied is setting for
Number of stations determining number of link device points (RX/RY/
Station 1 or Station 4
occupied RWw/RWr) used by the GOT.
To use multiple numbers of link device points in the
case of cyclic transmission between the GOT and CC-
The switch settings and parameter settings of the PLC side
Link module, set the number of stations occupied as
(CC-Link module) are described in 13.4.1 to 13.4.11.
the exclusive station 4.
Model name Refer to The number of link device points at the exclusive
station 1 and 4 is shown below.
Connecting
with Ver.1 RJ61BT11 13.4.1
CC-Link Ver.2
compatible
Expanded cyclic setting
Connecting
CC-Link module with Ver.2 RJ61BT11 13.4.2 Single Double Quadruple Octuple
(MELSEC iQ-R compatible Link
device Exclu Exclu Exclu Exclu Exclu Exclu Exclu Exclu
Series) sive sive sive sive sive sive sive sive
Connecting
statio statio statio statio statio statio statio statio
with Ver.1/ n1 n4 n1 n4 n1 n4 n1 n4
Ver.2 RJ61BT11 13.4.3
Remote 32 128 32 224 64 448 128 896
compatibles
input (RX) points points points points points points points points
mixed
Remote 32 128 32 224 64 448 128 896
Connecting output (RY) points points points points points points points points
with QJ61BT11,
13.4.5 Remote
Ver.1 QJ61BT11N register
4 16 8 32 16 64 32 128
compatible points points points points points points points points
(RWw)
Connecting Remote
CC-Link register
4 16 8 32 16 64 32 128
with Ver.2 QJ61BT11N 13.4.6 points points points points points points points points
module (RWr)
compatible
(Q Series)
Connecting
CC-Link Ver.1
with Ver.1/
Ver.2 QJ61BT11N 13.4.7 Number of stations occupied
compatibles Link device
Exclusive station Exclusive station 4
mixed
Remote input (RX) 32 points 128 points
CC-Link module AJ61QBT11,
13.4.10
(QnA Series) A1SJ61QBT11 Remote output (RY) 32 points 128 points
CC-Link module AJ61BT11, Remote register (RWw) 4 points 16 points

13.4.11
(A Series) A1SJ61BT11
Remote register (RWr) 4 points 16 points

13.4.1 Connecting to CC-Link module 9
 Unit parameter setting of GX Works3
(MELSEC iQ-R Series) with
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Ver.1 compatible (1) Unit parameter
MELSECNET/H
(a) Unit parameter
This section describes the settings of the GOT and the CC-
Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) with Ver.1 compatible
in the following system configuration.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
POINT
CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)
For details of the CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
12
<GOT>
connection
Station type : Intelligent device Station type Master station
station
CC-Link IE FIELD
Station No. : Station No.1
Remote net (Ver.1
Number of Mode
CONNECTION
: Exclusive station 1
stations occupied mode)
NETWORK
Transmission speed : 156kbps
<CC-Link module> *1 Station No. 0 (fixed)
(Use the default value for the settings other than the following.)
Type : Master station Transmission speed*1 156kbps
Mode
All connect count
Transmission speed
:
:
:
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
1
156kbps
Parameter setting Engineering tool
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
■ Unit parameter setting of GX Works3
*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0.
The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0".
(b) Link refresh setting
STATION)
POINT
When the switch setting is changed
14
PLC CPU.
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT 15
connection
Special relay (SB) refresh

-
device
CONNECTION
INVERTER
Special register (SW)

-
refresh device
Remote input (RX) refresh

device
Remote output (RY) refresh

16
Set as necessary.
device
SERVO AMPLIFIER
Remote register (RWr)

CONNECTION
refresh device

(c) CC-Link configuration setting 13.4.2 Connecting to CC-Link module
Ver.2 compatible
Link module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) with Ver.2 compatible
in the following system configuration.
POINT
Setting
*1
necessity at
Item Set value For details of the CC-Link module (MELSEC iQ-R
GOT
connection Series), refer to the following manual.
Intelligent device Manuals of MELSEC iQ-R Series
Station type
station (fixed)
Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1
Reserve/invalid station
No setting
select ■ [Communication settings] of GT Designer3
Intelligent buffer select

(Use default value) <GOT>
(word) (Use the default value for settings other
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Station type : Intelligent device
station
*1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote Station No. : Station No.1
net - (Ver. 1 mode)], [Remote station points] cannot be set. Expanded cyclic setting : Single
*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT. Number of
stations occupied
<CC-Link module> *1
POINT (Use the default value for the settings other than the following.)
Type : Master station
When changing the unit parameter Mode
All connect count
:
:
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
1
After writing unit parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the Transmission speed : 156kbps
CPU. *1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0.

 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 (1) [Unit parameter] of GX Works3
(a) Unit parameter
Item Set value
Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps
Mode Ver.1: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value)
Number of stations occupied 1 Station
Input for Error Station 0: Clear
POINT
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Setting necessity
connection
Station type Master station
(Communication settings) Mode
Remote net
(Ver.2 mode)

Item Set value
Setting necessity
at GOT
(c) CC-Link configuration setting 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
connection
MELSECNET/H
Transmission speed*1 156kbps

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Setting
necessity at
Item*1 Set value
GOT
connection
Station type
Ver.2 Intelligent device
station (fixed)
11
Expanded cyclic setting*2 Single
CONNECTION
Setting Remote station points 32 points (fixed)
NETWORK
necessity at Reserve/invalid station select No setting
Item Set value
GOT
Intelligent buffer select (word) (Use default value)
connection

-
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary 12
device *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote
net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.
Special register (SW) [Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station.
CC-Link IE FIELD
-
refresh device The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.
CONNECTION
*2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.
NETWORK
device
Remote output (RY) refresh POINT

Set as necessary.
device

When changing the unit parameter 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
refresh device
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary CPU.
STATION)
 [Communication settings] of GT Designer3
Item Set value 14
CONNECTION
Expanded Cyclic Single (Via G4)
CC-Link

CONNECTION
INVERTER
POINT
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

13.4.3 Connecting to CC-Link module
Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed (1) [Unit parameter] of GX Works3
(a) Unit parameter
This section describes the setting of the GOT and CC-Link

module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2
compatibles mixed in the following system configuration.
POINT
<GOT (Ver.1 compatible)> Setting

(Use default value for settings other than the following.) necessity at
Item Set value
Station type : Intelligent device GOT
station
Station No. : Station No. 1 connection
Number of stations
occupied Station type Master station
Remote net (Ver.2
<GOT (Ver.2 compatible)> Mode
(Use default value for settings other
mode)
Station type : Intelligent device
station *1
Station No. : Station No. 2 Transmission speed 156kbps
Expanded cyclic setting : Single
Number of stations
: Exclusive station
occupied
<CC-Link module> *1 Transmission speed : 156kbps
(Use default value for settings other than the following.) : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Type : Master station *1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
Station No. : Station No. 0
Mode : Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
All connect count : 2 (b) Link refresh setting

Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection

-
device
Special register (SW)

-
refresh device

device

Set as necessary.
device

refresh device

 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(1) Communication Settings of station No.1 (GOT)
MELSECNET/H
Item Set value
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
• CC-Link configuration setting of station No.1
(GOT) Retry 3times (Use default value)
Setting
Item*1 Set value

necessity at
11
GOT
connection (2) Communication Settings of station No.2 (GOT)
Ver.1 intelligent device
Station type Item Set value
CONNECTION
station (fixed)
NETWORK
No setting Mode Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
select
Intelligent buffer select Expanded Cyclic Single 12
(Use default value)
(word) Number of stations occupied 1 Station
CC-Link IE FIELD
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Input for Error Station 0: Clear
CONNECTION
NETWORK
• CC-Link configuration setting of station No.2 Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)
(GOT) Delay Time 0sec (Use default value)
Setting
necessity at
13
Item*1 Set value
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
GOT
connection
Station type
station (fixed)
STATION)
*2 Exclusive station 1
Exclusive station count
No setting
14
select
(Use default value)
CONNECTION
(word)
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (Via G4)

CC-Link
*1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote

[Remote station points] is a setting for the remote I/O station.
*2
The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.
Set the same setting as that of the GOT.
15
POINT
CONNECTION
INVERTER
When changing the unit parameter

CPU. 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

13.4.4 Connection to C Controller
 Module parameter setting of CW
module (MELSEC iQ-R Configurator
Series)
Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) in the following
POINT
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
<GOT (Ver.1 compatible)>
(Use default value for settings other than the following.) connection
station
Station type Master station
Number of stations Remote net (Ver.2
: Exclusive station 1 Mode
occupied mode)

than the following.) Transmission speed*1 156kbps
Station type : Intelligent device Channel No. (Use default value)
station
Expanded cyclic setting : Single : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Number of stations
: Exclusive station
occupied *1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
<CC-Link module> *1 Transmission speed : 156kbps
All connect count : 2
■ Module parameter setting of CW Configurator

Setting
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT
connection

device

Set as necessary.
device

refresh device

TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Item Set value
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
• CC-Link configuration setting of station No.1
(GOT) Retry 3times (Use default value)
Setting
Item*1 Set value

necessity at
11
GOT
connection (2) Communication Settings of station No.2 (GOT)
Station type Item Set value
CONNECTION
station (fixed)
NETWORK
No setting Mode Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
select
Intelligent buffer select Expanded Cyclic Single 12
(Use default value)
(word) Number of stations occupied 1 Station
CC-Link IE FIELD
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Input for Error Station 0: Clear
CONNECTION
NETWORK
• CC-Link configuration setting of station No.2 Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)
(GOT) Delay Time 0sec (Use default value)
Setting
necessity at
13
Item*1 Set value
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
GOT
connection
Station type
station (fixed)
STATION)
No setting
14
select
(Use default value)
CONNECTION
(word)
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary (Via G4)

CC-Link

*2
Set the same setting as that of the GOT.
15
POINT
CONNECTION
INVERTER
When changing the unit parameter

CPU. 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series)
(Q Series) with Ver.1 Set the station number setting switch, transmission
compatible speed / mode setting switch.
QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N
Link module (Q Series) with Ver.1 compatible in the QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
following system configuration. MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
POINT
STATION
NO.
0
X10
CC-Link module (Q Series) (1)

For details of the CC-Link module (Q Series), refer to
0
X1

C
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's (2)
0
MODE
Manual QJ61BT11N 4
NC
1
NC
DA 2
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 3
SLD
■ Setting of the CC-Link communication unit 4
DB
<GOT> (FG)
5
(Use the default value for settings other 6
DG
7
station
Number of
stations occupied
<CC-Link module> *1 (1) Station number setting switch
Station No. : Station No.0 Station number Setting necessity at
Mode : Remote net (Ver.1 mode) setting switch GOT connection
■ Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series)
Station number
*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. setting 0 (fixed)
The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0"
(master station)
(2) Transmission rate/mode setting switch
Transmission
Setting necessity at
rate/mode setting Description Set value
GOT connection
switch
Transmission
rate/
MODE mode setting 0
(Online:
156kbps)*1

*1 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT.
POINT
When the switch setting is changed
PLC CPU.

9
 Parameter setting (when connecting to (b) Station information setting
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Setting
necessity
Item*1 Set value
at GOT
connection
Intelligent device
Station type
station (fixed)
11
No setting
select
CONNECTION
NETWORK
(Use default value)
(word)

net - (Ver. 1 mode)], [Remote station points] cannot be set.
12
*2 Set the same number of occupied stations as that on the
GOT.
CC-Link IE FIELD
Setting
CONNECTION
necessity POINT
NETWORK
Item Set value
at GOT
connection When changing the network parameter
No. of boards in module 1 After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU,
Start I/O No. 0000H
operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON 13
or resetting.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Operation setting (Use default value)
Type Master station (fixed)
Remote net
STATION)
Mode
(Ver.1 mode)
All connect count 1
Remote input (RX) X400 14

Remote output (RY) Y400
Remote register (RWr) D300
Remote register (RWw) D200 CONNECTION

(Via G4)
CC-Link
Special relay (SB) SB0
Special register (SW) SW0
Retry count 15
Automatic reconnection
station count
CONNECTION
Stand by master station No. (Use default value)

INVERTER
PLC down select
Scan mode setting
Delay information setting

16
Station information setting Refer to (b).
SERVO AMPLIFIER
Remote device station initial

settings
CONNECTION
(Use default value)

Interrupt setting

 Parameter setting (when connecting to C (2) CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings]
Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the CC-
Link utility.
Setting
Item Set value necessity at Setting
GOT connection necessity at
Item*1 Set value
GOT
Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default) connection
Write authority Mark the checkbox Number of modules 1
*2 target
User name Target module 1
*2 password Start I/O No. 0000H
Password
Detailed settings - Channel No. (Use default value)
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Type Master station (fixed)

Remote net
been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. Mode
*2 If the account of the C Controller module (Q Series) has (Ver.1 mode)
Operation settings

Expanded cyclic setting Single
Occupied number Exclusive station 1
Error event: input data

Clear
status
CPU stop: data link status Refresh
Other settings (Use default value)
All connect count 1

Station information settings
Sta. Intelligent device

Station Type
No.1 station
Sta.
Occupied number*2 Exclusive station 1
No.1
Reserve/invalid Sta.
No setting
station select No.1

(Use default value)
(word)

*2 Set the same number of occupied stations as that on the
GOT.
POINT

13.4.6 Connecting to CC-Link 9
module (Q Series) with Ver.2
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(1) When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
MELSECNET/H
communication unit is used compatible
Item Set value This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-
Station No. 1: Station No.1 Link module (Q Series) in the following case of system
configuration. 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
POINT
MELSECNET/10
Number of stations occupied 1 Station CC-Link module (Q Series)

Input for Error Station 0: Clear For details of the CC-Link module (Q Series), refer to

Manual QJ61BT11N
11
(2) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link  System configuration
CONNECTION
NETWORK
communication unit is used ■ [Communication settings] of GT Designer3
Item Set value (Use default value) <GOT>
12
Retry 3times
Timeout Time 3sec station
CC-Link IE FIELD
Number of
CONNECTION
stations occupied
POINT
NETWORK
<CC-Link module> *1
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Type

Station No.
:
:
Master station
Station No.0
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Mode : Remote net (Ver.2 mode)

All connect count
Transmission speed
:
:
1
156kbps 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
13.3.1 Setting communication interface ■ [Network parameter] of GX Developer
(Communication settings) *1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0.
STATION)
 Setting of the CC-Link communication unit POINT
(Only when MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z
CC-Link communication unit is used) When connecting to Q170MCPU 14
Item Set value the CC-Link module is set to "70".
CONNECTION
Station number setting switch 1: Station No.1 (Via G4)

CC-Link
Transmission baudrate setting switch 0: 156kbps
SW1 (Input data status of the

Condition data link error station)
OFF: Cleared
15
setting
switches SW2 (Number of occupied
OFF: 1 station
stations)
CONNECTION
INVERTER
POINT
Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
For the setting method of the CC-Link communication 16
unit, refer to the following.
SERVO AMPLIFIER
13.3.3 Switch setting (Only when MODEL

CONNECTION
GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication

unit is used)

 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series)  Parameter setting (when connecting to
Set the station number setting switch, transmission MELSEC-Q or QS series)
speed / mode setting switch.
QJ61BT11N (a) Network parameter
QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION
NO.
5
X10
(1)
5
X1
C
(2)
8
MODE
4
NC
1
NC
DA 2
SLD
3
DB 4
(FG)
5
DG
6
7
Setting
necessity at
(1) Station number setting switch Item Set value
GOT
connection
Station number Setting necessity
Description Set value No. of boards in module 1
setting switch at GOT connection
Start I/O No.*1 0000H
Operation setting (Use default value)
Station number
Type Master station
setting 0 (fixed)
(master station) Remote net
Mode
(Ver.2 mode)
All connect count 1
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Remote input (RX) X400

(2) Transmission rate/mode setting switch Remote register (RWr) D300
Remote register (RWw) D200
Transmission
Setting necessity Special relay (SB) SB0
at GOT connection
switch Special register (SW) SW0
Transmission Retry count
rate/mode Automatic reconnection
setting 0 station count
(Online: Stand by master station No. (Use default value)
156kbps)*1
PLC down select
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Scan mode setting
*1 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT. Delay information setting
Station information setting Refer to (b)
POINT Remote device station initial

setting (Use default value)
When the switch setting has been changed Interrupt setting
Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
PLC CPU. *1 When using Q170MCPU, set it according to the system
configuration.

(b) Station information setting 9
 Parameter setting (when connecting to C
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Controller module (Q Series))
MELSECNET/H
Link utility.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Setting
necessity at
MELSECNET/10
Item*1 Set value
GOT
connection
Station type
station (fixed)

11
Remote station points 32 points (fixed) Setting
Reserve/invalid station select No setting
CONNECTION
GOT connection
NETWORK
User name *2 target 12
Password*2 password
CC-Link IE FIELD
Detailed settings -
CONNECTION
POINT
NETWORK
When changing the network parameter been changed, input the changed IP address or host name.
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
or resetting.
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(2) CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings]
(a) Parameter settings POINT
 [Communication settings] of GT Designer3

Item Set value
Expanded Cyclic Single
Setting Input for Error Station Clear
necessity at
Item*1 Set value Retry 3times (Use default value)
GOT
connection Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)
Number of modules 1
Target module 1
Start I/O No. 0000H

POINT
Channel No. (Use default value) [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
Type Master station For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT
Remote net
Mode 13.3.1 Setting communication interface
(Ver.2 mode)
Operation settings

Clear
status
All connect count 1
Sta. Ver.2 intelligent device

Station Type
No.1 station
Expanded cyclic Sta.

Single
setting*2 No.1
Sta.
Occupied number*2 Exclusive station 1
No.1
Sta.
Remote station points 32 points
No.1
Reserve/invalid Sta.
No setting
station select No.1

(Use default value)
(word)


13.4.7 Connecting to CC-Link module 9
 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q Series)
(Q Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Set the station number setting switch, transmission
compatibles mixed
MELSECNET/H
speed / mode setting switch.
QJ61BT11N
This section describes the setting of the GOT and CC-Link
module (Q Series) with Ver.1/Ver.2 compatibles mixed in QJ61BT11N
10
RUN L RUN
the following system configuration. MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
POINT
STATION
NO.
MELSECNET/10
5
0
X10
CC-Link module (Q Series) (1)

For details of the CC-Link module (Q Series), refer to
0
X1
C
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's (2)
11
0
MODE
Manual QJ61BT11N 4
NC
1
CONNECTION
NC
NETWORK
DA 2
■ [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 3
SLD
■ Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
DB 4
5
12
(FG)
(Use default value for settings other than the following.) 6
DG
Station type : Intelligent device 7
station
Number of stations
CC-Link IE FIELD
occupied
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Station number Setting necessity
Station type : Intelligent device Description Set value
setting switch at GOT connection
Station No.
station
: Station No. 2
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Number of stations
CC-Link CONNECTION
occupied
<CC-Link module> *1 Transmission speed : 156kbps Station number
(Use default value for settings other than the following.) setting 0 (fixed)
Type : Master station (master station)
STATION)
14
Transmission
Setting necessity
CONNECTION
POINT switch
at GOT connection
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Transmission
When connecting to Q170MCPU rate/
When connected to Q170MCPU, the start I/O No. of mode setting 0
the CC-Link module is set to "70". (Online: 15
156kbps)*1

CONNECTION

INVERTER
POINT
When the switch setting has been changed 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
PLC CPU.
CONNECTION

(b) Station information setting
 Parameter setting (when connecting to
• Station information setting of station No.1 (GOT)
Setting
necessity at
Item*1 Set value
GOT
connection
Ver.1 intelligent
Station type
device station (fixed)
No setting
select
(Use default value)
(word)
• Station information setting of station No.2 (GOT)
Setting
Setting *1
necessity at
Item Set value
necessity at GOT
Item Set value connection
GOT
connection Ver.2 intelligent device
Station type
No. of boards in module 1 station (fixed)
Start I/O No.*1 0000H Expanded cyclic setting*2 Single

Operation setting (Use default value) Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1
Type Master station (fixed) Reserve/invalid station
No setting
Remote net select
Mode
(Ver.2 mode)
All connect count 2 (Use default value)
(word)
Remote input (RX) X400
Remote register (RWr) D300 net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set.
Special relay (SB) SB0 *2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.
Retry count POINT
station count When changing the network parameter
Stand by master station No. (Use default value) After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU,
PLC down select operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON
Scan mode setting or resetting.
Station information setting Refer to (b)
Interrupt setting

configuration.

9
 Parameter setting (when connecting to C (2) CC-Link Utility's [Parameter Settings]
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Link utility.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
11
Setting
Item Set value necessity at Setting
GOT connection necessity at
CONNECTION
*1 Set value
Item
NETWORK
GOT
Target module*1 192.168.3.3 (Default) connection
Write authority Mark the checkbox Number of modules 1
User name *2 target Target module 1 12

Password*2 password Start I/O No. 0000H
CC-Link IE FIELD
Detailed settings - Channel No. (Use default value)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Type Master station
been changed, input the changed IP address or host name. Remote net
Mode
*2 If the account of the C Controller module (Q Series) has (Ver.2 mode)
13
Operation settings

(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION

Clear
status
STATION)
All connect count 2 14

Sta. Ver.1 intelligent device
No.1 station
Station Type
Sta. Ver.2 intelligent device CONNECTION
No.2 station (Via G4)
CC-Link
Sta.
Single
Expanded cyclic No.1
setting*2 Sta.
Single
15
No.2
Sta.
Exclusive station 1
CONNECTION
No.1
Occupied number*2
INVERTER
Sta.
Exclusive station 1
No.2
Sta.
32 points
Remote station points
No.1
16
Sta.
32 points
SERVO AMPLIFIER
No.2
CONNECTION

Setting
*1
necessity at (2) Communication Settings of station No.2 (GOT)
Item Set value
GOT
connection
Sta.
No setting
No.1 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps
Reserve/invalid
station select Sta. Mode Ver.2: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
No setting
No.2 Expanded Cyclic Single
(Use default value) Input for Error Station 0: Clear
(word)
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value)
*1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote Delay Time 0ms (Use default value)
The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.  Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
POINT
Item Set value
When changing the network parameter Mode setting switch 0: Online (fixed)
After writing the network parameter to the C Controller Station number setting switch 1: Station No.1
module (Q Series), either turn the C Controller module Transmission baudrate setting switch 0: 156kbps
(Q Series) OFF and then ON or reset it
Condition OFF: Cleared
data link error station)
setting
 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 switches SW2 (Number of occupied
OFF: 1 station
stations)
(a) When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
POINT
communication unit is used
Item Set value Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
Station No. 1: Station No.1 For the setting method of the CC-Link communication
unit is used)
(b) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link

Retry 3times
Timeout Time 3sec

13.4.8 Connecting to MELSEC-L 9
 [Network parameter] of GX Developer
series with CC-Link Ver.1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
compatible (1) Network parameter
MELSECNET/H
MELSEC-L in the following case of the system
configuration.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
POINT
MELSECNET/10
(1) CC-Link module (L Series)
For details of the CC-Link module (L Series), refer
to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local
Module User's Manual 11
(2) CC-Link function built-in CPU
For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU,
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Module User's Manual
12
 System configuration Setting
necessity at
(Example when using CC-Link module (L Series)) Item Set value
GOT
CC-Link IE FIELD
connection
CONNECTION
NETWORK
No. of boards in module 1
<GOT>
(Use the default value for settings other *1 0000H
than the following.) Start I/O No.
Station type : Intelligent device Operation setting (Use default value)
Station No.
station
: Station No.1
Type Master station (fixed) 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Number of Remote net
stations occupied
: Exclusive station Mode
Transmission speed : 156kbps (Ver.1 mode)
<CC-Link module> *1
(Use the default value for the settings other than the following.) All connect count 1
STATION)
All connect count : 1 Remote output (RY) Y400
14
Special relay (SB) SB0
Retry count CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
station count
Stand by master station No.
PLC down select
(Use default value)
15
Scan mode setting
CONNECTION
Station information setting Refer to (2)

INVERTER

Interrupt setting

16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
*1 Set the Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module according to the
CONNECTION

(2) Station information setting 13.4.9 Connecting to MELSEC-L
series with CC-Link Ver.2
compatible

MELSEC-L in the following case of the system
configuration.
Setting POINT
*1
necessity at
Item Set value
GOT (1) CC-Link module (L Series)
connection
For details of the CC-Link module (L Series), refer
Station type
Intelligent to the following manual.
device station (fixed)
Exclusive station count*2 Exclusive station 1 Module User's Manual
Reserve/invalid station (2) CC-Link function built-in CPU
No setting
select For details on the CC-Link function built-in CPU,
(Use default value)
(word) MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local
Module User's Manual
(Example when using CC-Link module (L Series))
POINT
When changing the network parameter <GOT>

After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, (Use the default value for settings other
operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON Station type : Intelligent device
or resetting. Station No.
station
: Station No.1
Number of
: Exclusive station
stations occupied
 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 <CC-Link module> *1

Transmission speed
: 156kbps

Item Set value Station No. : Station No.0
Station No. 1: Station No.1 Transmission speed : 156kbps
POINT

9
 [Network parameter] of GX Developer (2) Station information setting
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Setting
MELSECNET/10
necessity at
Item*1 Set value
GOT
connection
Station type
station (fixed)
Expanded cyclic setting*2 Single 11
Remote station points 32 points (fixed)
CONNECTION
Reserve/invalid station select No setting
NETWORK
Setting
12
necessity at
Item Set value The default value (32 points) must be used on the GOT.
GOT *2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT.
CC-Link IE FIELD
connection
CONNECTION
NETWORK
POINT
*1 0000H
Start I/O No.
Operation setting (Use default value) When changing the network parameter
Type Master station (fixed) After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, 13
operate the PLC CPU either turning OFF and then ON
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Remote net
Mode
(Ver.2 mode)
or resetting.
All connect count 1

STATION)
Remote register (RWr) D300 Item Set value
Remote register (RWw) D200 Station No. 1: Station No.1 14

Special relay (SB) SB0 Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps
Retry count
Expanded Cyclic Single CONNECTION
Number of stations occupied 1 Station (Via G4)
CC-Link
station count Input for Error Station 0: Clear
PLC down select

(Use default value)
Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) 15
Scan mode setting
CONNECTION
POINT
INVERTER

Interrupt setting
Designer3, refer to the following. 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
*1 Set the Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module according to the
system configuration. (Communication settings)
CONNECTION

 Switch settings of CC-Link module (QnA
(QnA Series) Series)
Set for each setting switch.
AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11
Link module (QnA Series) in the following case of system
configuration. AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11
RUN SW E
B ERR. M/S R
RUN 156K
ERR. 625K R MST PRM R
MST
S MST
2. 5M
5M
A
T
S MST TIME O
LOCAL LINE R
POINT
LOCAL 10M E
CPU R / W
CPU R / W
E SW L RUN SD
R M/S TEST T
R PRM S0 E L ERR. RD
O TIME S1 S
R LINE S2 T
CC-Link module (QnA Series) L RUN

L ERR.
SD
RD
STATION NO.
78
MODE
67
89 A
456
(2)
901
x
BCD
345
For details of the CC-Link module (QnA Series), refer 10 23 EF0 2
1
(1)
to the following manual. 78 SW OFF ON
ON
456
901
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 M / L S. M
x
78 1 23 2
Control & Communication Link System Master/

STATION NO.
9 01
4 56
x10 3
(1) (4)
23
78 4 CLR HLD
78
Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11
456
901
5 1/2 3/4
9 01
(3)
4 56
x1 23 23 6 1/4 2/3
7
User's Manual
BCD
MODE
(2)
8 9A
EF 2
01
0 : ONLINE (A. R. ) B RATE 8
67
3 45
1 : ONLINE (RIM )
2 : OFFLINE
0 156K
78
B RATE
9 01
1 625K
(3)
4 56
0 156K 23
1 625K 2 2. 5M
2 2. 5M 3 5M
3 5M
4 10M NC
4 10M
DA 1
ON
OFF ON SW
M/L S MST 1 NC 2
2
3
3

CLEAR
1/2
HOLD
3/4 5
4
(4) DB
1/4 2/3 6
NC 4
7
■ Setting of the CC-Link communication unit 8

DG 5
<GOT> (Use the default value for settings other NC 6
than the following.) SLD 7

NC
Station type : Intelligent device DA 1

NC 8
NC 2
station DB 3 9
Station No. : Station No.1 NC 4 (FG)
10
Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1 DG 5
NC 6
Transmission speed : 156kbps SLD 7
<CC-Link module> *1 NC 8 A1SJ61QBT11
9
(FG)
10
Station type : Master station

Mode setting : Remote net mode
All connect count :1
■ Switch settings of CC-Link module (QnA Series)

■ Parameter setting
*1 The CC-Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0. Station Setting
The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0" number necessity at
setting GOT
switch connection
78
x
456
901
10 23
0 (fixed)
78
(master station)
x
456
901
1 23
Setting
Mode setting necessity at
switch GOT
connection
MODE
Mode setting
789
(Online: Remote net 0 (fixed)
AB E
456
CD
23
F0 1
mode)

9
(3) Transmission speed setting switch  Parameter setting
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Setting There are two methods for the parameter setting:
MELSECNET/H
Transmission
necessity at perform the setting from [Network parameter] of GX
speed setting Description Set value
switch
GOT Developer and the sequence program.
connection
Performing it from the [Network parameter] of the GX
78 Developer can be set only when the PLC CPU and the
10
456
901
23 CC-Link module use the function version B or later.

Transmission speed
(1) Setting from [Network parameter] of GX Developer
TO PLC NETWORK)
B RATE
CONNECTION (PLC
0
0 156K
setting (156kbps)*1
MELSECNET/10
1 625K
2 2. 5M
3 5M
4 10M

11
Setting
Condition setting Setting Set necessity at
CONNECTION
Description
switches switch value GOT
NETWORK
connection
Station type
SW1
(Master
station/Local
OFF
(fixed)
12
station)
SW2 Setting
CC-Link IE FIELD
OFF
Not used
CONNECTION
(fixed) necessity at
SW OFF ON SW3 Item Set value
NETWORK
GOT
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 M / L S. M
2
Input data connection
3
status of the
4 CLR HLD
SW4 OFF No. of boards in module 1
5 1/2 3/4 data link error
6
7
1/4 2/3
station (clear) Start I/O No. 0000H 13
8
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
SW5 Number of
CC-Link CONNECTION
OFF
stations
SW6 (fixed) All connect count 1
occupied*2
SW7 Remote input (RX) X400
STATION)
OFF
Not used
SW8 (fixed) Remote output (RY) Y400
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Remote register (RWr) D300

*2 Will be valid when the CC-Link module is the local station.
14
In the case of the master station, turn off it.
Special relay (SB) B0
POINT CONNECTION
Special register (SW) W0
Retry count (Via G4)

CC-Link

station count
PLC CPU.
Wait master station No.
15
(Use default value)
PLC down select
CONNECTION
Scan mode setting

INVERTER

16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(b) Station information setting (2) Setting from sequence program
The parameter is written to the buffer memory, and the
data link is automatically started when PLC CPU status
changes from STOP to RUN.
(a) I/O signal of CC-Link module
Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11
User's Manual
Device Application
Setting
necessity at M100, M101 Flag for parameter setting
Item Set value
GOT M102, M103 Flag for data link startup
connection
D0 Number of connected modules
Intelligent device station
Station type D1 Number of retry
(fixed)
D2 Automatic reconnection station count
D3 Operation specification in the case of CPU failure
Reserve/invalid station Reserved station specification (Station No. 1 to
No setting D4
select Station No. 16)
Intelligent buffer select Error invalid station specification (Station No. 1 to
(Use default value) D5
(word) Station No. 16)
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary D6 Station data (first module)
*1 Specify the same number of occupied stations as that of the D400 Error code in the case of data link startup failure
GOT.

POINT example
When changing the network parameter Buffer memory

operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON Decimal (Hex)
or resetting. 1(11 (1H) Number of connected modules 1 (1 module)

2(22 (2H) Number of retry 3 (3times)
Automatic reconnection station
3(33 (3H) 1 (1 station)
count
Operation specification in the
6(66 (6H) 0 (stop)
case of CPU failure
Reserved station specification 0 (No
16(1016 (10H)
(Station No. 1 to Station No. 16) specification)
Error invalid station specification 0 (No
20(1420 (14H)
32(2032 (20H) Station data (first module)*1 2101H
*1 Details for the station data are shown below.

For 1) and 2), set the same station No. and number of station
occupied as those of the GOT.
For 3), the setting is fixed.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b0
3) 2) 1)
1) Station No. (Set the same station No. as that of the GOT)
01H to 40H: Station No. 1 to Station No. 64
2) Number of stations occupied (Set the number of station
occupied as that of the GOT)
1H: Exclusive station 1
3) Station type (2H: Set it to intelligent device station)
0H: Remote I/O station
1H: Remote device station
2H: Intelligent device station (Incl. local station)

(d) Example of sequence program 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Parameter setting
MELSECNET/H
Module error Module
ready
10
Number of connected
modules (1 module)
TO PLC NETWORK)
Number of retry
CONNECTION (PLC
(3 times)
MELSECNET/10
Number of
automatic return
stations (1 station)
11
Operation specification
in the case of CPU
failure (Stop)
Reserved station
CONNECTION
specification (No
NETWORK
specification)
Error invalid station

specification (No
12
specification)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Station data (Intelligent
NETWORK
device station, exclusive
station 1, station No.1)
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Refresh insruction
Refresh insruction
Turn on only during 1 scan after RUN
STATION)
Data link with buffer memory parameter
14
Module error Module
ready
Data link start up

request (buffer memory
CONNECTION
address)
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Data link
startup
normal
completion
(buffer memory)
Error code reading

15
(SW0068)
Data link
startup
abnormal
CONNECTION
completion
(buffer
INVERTER
memory)
POINT
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

(A Series)
communication unit is used This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC-
Link module (A Series) in the following case of system
Item Set value
configuration.

POINT
Expanded Cyclic Single (Use default value) CC-Link module (A Series)

Number of stations occupied 1 Station For details of the CC-Link module (A Series), refer to
Input for Error Station 0: Clear the following manual.
Retry 3times (Use default value) Control & Communication Link System Master/
Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11
User's Manual
(2) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link  System configuration

Item Set value (Use default value) ■ Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
<GOT>
Retry 3times (Use the default value for settings other
Timeout Time 3sec
station
Number of station occupied : Exclusive station 1
POINT
Transmission : 156kbps
speed
<CC-Link module> *1
[Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 Station type : Master station
For the setting method of [Controller Setting] of GT Mode setting : Remote net mode
Designer3, refer to the following. All connect count :1

Module mode : Intelligent mode
■ Settings of CC-Link module (A Series)
(Communication settings) ■ Sequence program
 Setting of the CC-Link communication unit

Item Set value
SW1
Condition (Input data status of the data OFF: Cleared
setting link error station)
OFF: 1 station
stations)
POINT
For the setting method of the CC-Link communication
unit is used)

9
 Settings of CC-Link module (A Series) (3) Transmission speed setting switch
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Set for each setting switch. Setting
MELSECNET/H
Transmission
AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 necessity at
speed setting Description Set value
GOT
A1SJ61BT11 switch
AJ61BT11 RUN SW E connection
B ERR. M/S R
RUN 156K
ERR. 625K R
MST PRM R
MST 2. 5M A S MST TIME O
S MST 5M T
LOCAL 10M E LOCAL LINE R
78
10
CPU R / W CPU R / W
456
901
E SW L RUN SD
R M/S TEST T
R PRM S0 E
L ERR. RD 23
O TIME S1 S
R LINE S2 T
Transmission speed
TO PLC NETWORK)
STATION NO. MODE
CONNECTION (PLC
B RATE
0
L RUN SD
L ERR. RD 8
x (2) 0 156K setting (156kbps)*1
C
5
MELSECNET/10
10 0
1 625K
(1) SW OFF ON 2 2. 5M
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 M / L S. M
x
5
1 2 3 5M
STATION NO. 78
3
4 10M
5
x10
(1) (4)
23
4 CLR HLD
78 5 1/2 3/4
(3)
5
0
5
x1 6 1/4 2/3
23
C 7
MODE
(2) B RATE 8 ISM SFM
8
0 : ONLINE (A. R. )
1 : ONLINE (RIM )
4
11
2 : OFFLINE 0 156K
78
B RATE 1 625K
(3)
5
0 156K 23
2 2. 5M
1 625K
2
3
2. 5M
5M
3 5M
NC (4) Condition setting switches
4 10M
4 10M
DA 1
ON
OFF ON SW
NC 2
M/L S MST 1
2 Setting
DB 3
CLEAR HOLD
3
4
(4) Condition setting Setting necessity at
CONNECTION
1/2 3/4 5
1/4 2/3 6
7
NC 4
ISFM SFM 8
switches switch GOT
NETWORK
DG 5
NC 6 connection
SLD 7
NC
DA 1
NC 8 Station type
12
NC 2
DB 3 9 (Master OFF
NC 4 (FG) SW1
DG 5
10
station/Local (fixed)
NC 6
SLD 7
A1SJ61BT11
station)
NC 8
SW2
CC-Link IE FIELD
OFF
(FG)
10
Not used
CONNECTION
SW3 (fixed)
NETWORK
Input data
(1) Station number setting switch SW OFF ON status of the
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 M / L S. M
SW4 data link OFF
13
2
Setting
3 error station
Station 4 CLR HLD
(clear)
necessity at
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
5 1/2 3/4
number Description Set value
GOT 6 1/4 2/3
SW5 Number of
setting switch 7
OFF
connection 8 ISM SFM stations
SW6 *2
(fixed)
STATION NO. occupied
STATION)
x 78 OFF
SW7 Not used
901
456
10 23 Station number setting (fixed)

0 (fixed)
(master station)
x
78 Module
14
901
456
mode OFF
1 23 SW8
(Intelligent (fixed)
mode)
CONNECTION
(2) Mode setting switch *2 Will be valid when the CC-Link module is a local station. (Via G4)
CC-Link
In the case of the master station, turn off it.
Setting
Mode setting
necessity at POINT 15
switch GOT
connection
MODE Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again, or reset the
CONNECTION
Mode setting
789 PLC CPU.
(Online: Remote net 0 (fixed)
INVERTER
AB E
456
CD
23
F0 1
mode)

16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

 Sequence program
The parameter setting and the sequence program of
the data link startup request is required.
(1) Programming condition (with CC-Link dedicated

instructions)
The program sets the network parameter and
automatic refresh parameter when PLC CPU status
changes from STOP to RUN, and automatically starts
the data link with CC-Link dedicated instructions.
Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11
User's Manual
Device Application
M0 RLPA instruction normal completion flag
M1 RLPA instruction error completion flag
M100 Network parameter setting flag
M101 Automatic refresh parameter setting flag
D0 Synchronous mode valid/invalid
D1 Number of connected modules
D2 Station data
D3 Send buffer size
D4 Receive buffer size
D5 Automatic update buffer size
Error code in the case of error completion of

D400
RLPA instruction
D100 to D103 Automatic refresh setting (RX)
D104 to D107 Automatic refresh setting (RY)
D108 to D111 Automatic refresh setting (RW)
D112 to D115 Automatic refresh setting (SB)
D116 to D119 Automatic refresh setting (SW)

(c) Example of sequence program (CC-Link dedicated instruction) 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
* Setting of network parameter with dedicated RLPA instruction
MELSECNET/H
Module error Module
ready
Synchronous mode
(Invalid)
Number of connected
modules (1 module) 10
Station data (intelligent
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
station 1, station No.1)
Send buffer size

(64 words)
Receive buffer size

(64 words)
Automatic update buffer

size (128 words)
11
Dedicated
instruction (RLPA)
CONNECTION
CC-Link module head
NETWORK
I/O No. (0000H)
Parameter storage
head device (D0)
Turning on during 1 scan

in the case of instruction
12
completion ON (M0)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Error code reading
(SW0068)
RLPA error completion
* Setting of automatic refresh parameter with dedicated RRPA instruction
Module
error
Module
ready
RLPA error
completion
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Head No. of RX (RX0)
RX refresh destination (X)
RX refresh destination
device head No. (400)
No. of refresh points (32)
RY head number (RY0)
RY refresh destination (Y)
RY refresh destination
RW head No. (RW0)
RW refresh destination (D)
RW refresh destination
SB head No. (SB0)
SB refresh destination (B)
SB refresh destination
device head number (0)
SW head number (SW0)
SW refresh destination (W)
SW refresh destination
device head No. (0)
Dedicated instruction
(RRPA)
CC-Link module head

I/O No. (0000H)
Parameter storage head

device (D100)
POINT

(2) Program condition (for FROM/TO instruction)
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
This program writes parameters to the buffer memory
when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN
MELSECNET/H
and automatically starts the data link with FROM/TO
instruction.
Local Module Type AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 10
User's Manual
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
(b) Devices used by user
Device Application
M100, M101 Flag for parameter setting
M102, M103 Flag for data link startup
D0 Number of connected modules 11
D1 Number of retry
D2 Automatic reconnection station count
CONNECTION
D3 Operation specification in the case of CPU failure
NETWORK
Reserved station specification (Station No. 1 to
D4
Station No. 16)
Error invalid station specification (Station No. 1 to

D5
Station No. 16) 12
D6 Station data (first module)
D400 Error code in the case of data link startup failure
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
example
Buffer memory
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Decimal (Hex)
1 (1H) Number of connected modules 1 (1 module)
2 (2H) Number of retry 3 (3times)
STATION)
Automatic reconnection station
3 (3H) 1 (1 station)
count
Operation specification in the

6 (6H)
case of CPU failure
0 (stop)
14
Reserved station specification 0 (No
16 (10H)
CONNECTION
Error invalid station specification 0 (No
20 (14H)
(Station No. 1 to Station No. 16) specification) (Via G4)
CC-Link
32 (20H) Station data (first module)*1 2101H
*1 Details for the station data are shown below.

For 1) and 2), set the same station No. and number of station
occupied settings as those of the GOT.
15
For 3), the setting is fixed.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b0
CONNECTION
3) 2) 1)
INVERTER
1) Station No. (Set the same station No. as that of the GOT.)
01H to 40H: Station No. 1 to Station No. 64
2) Number of stations occupied (Set the same setting of the
number of station occupied as that of the GOT.)
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

3) Station type (2H: Set it to intelligent device station.)
CONNECTION
0H: Remote I/O station

1H: Remote device station
2H: Intelligent device station (Incl. local station)

(d) Example of sequence program (FROM/TO instruction)
* Parameter setting
Module error Module

ready
Number of connected
modules (1 module)
Number of retry (3 times)
Number of automatic
return stations (1 station)
Operation specification in
the case of CPU failure
(Stop)
Reserved station
specification
(No specification)
Error invalid station

specification
(No specification)
Station data (Intelligent

station 1, station No. 1)
* Refresh instruction
Refresh instruction
Turn on only during 1 scan after RUN
* Data link with buffer memory parameters
Module error Module

ready
Data link startup request

(buffer memory address)
Data link
startup
normal
completion
(buffer memory)
Error code reading

(SW0068)
Data link
startup
abnormal
completion
(buffer
memory)
POINT

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Item Set value
Transmission Rate 0: Online 156kbps 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Timeout Time 3sec (Use default value) 11

(2) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Retry 3times
12
Timeout Time 3sec
CC-Link IE FIELD
POINT
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Designer3, refer to the following. 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
 Setting of the CC-Link communication unit
CC-Link communication unit is used) 14
Item Set value

CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link

OFF: Cleared
Conditio
n setting
data link error station)
15
OFF: 1 station
stations)
CONNECTION
INVERTER
POINT
For the setting method of the CC-Link communication 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION
unit is used)

13.5 Precautions
 Using cyclic transmission
(1) I/O signal for master station  GOT startup in the CC-Link connection
Do not turn on the reserved output signals in the output (intelligent device station)
signals (remote output: RY) to the GOT from the master For CC-Link connection (intelligent device station), the
station. data link is started approximately 10 seconds after the
When the reserved output signal is turned on, the PLC GOT startup.
system may be malfunctioned.
For the assignment of I/O signals in the GOT, refer to
alarm
MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
communication unit User’s Manual In the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station),
when a network error occurs in the system alarm, the
GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's
system alarm display cannot be canceled even though
Manual
the causes are removed.
(2) Access range that can be monitored
The monitoring range of remote I/O (RX and RY) and
that of the remote registers (RWr and RWw) vary
according to the mode in the master station of the CC-
Link system. When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system,
Applicable of monitoring
Mode of master station Data for each station Data for each station seconds or more
compatible with compatible with
CC-Link ver.1 CC-Link ver.2
Remote net mode -

Remote net ver.1
- GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs.
mode
Remote net ver.2 *1 Manual
mode
Remote net additional *1  Connection to LCPU

mode
LCPU may diagnose (check file system, execute
: Applicable : N/A(All "0") -: N/A of system configuration recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when
*1 Monitoring is applicable only when MODEL GT15-J61BT13 turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it
CC-Link communication unit is used.
takes time until the SD memory card becomes
(3) When GOT malfunctions, the cyclic output status available. When the GOT starts before the SD card
remains the same as before becoming faulty. becomes available, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the
opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no
 For transient transmission system alarm occurs.
(1) CC-Link module of target station GT Designer3 Version Screen Design
Mount the CC-Link module of function version B or later Manual
and software version J or later to the PLC CPU when
performing the following CC-Link modules and  Connection to Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU,
transient transmission. CNC C70, CRnQ-700
Only cyclic transmission can be communicated with the The Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, CNC C70 and CRnQ-
CC-Link module of function version A or before and 700 are applicable to the CC-Link network system Ver.2
software version I or before. only
• AJ61BT11
• A1SJ61BT11 For connecting to the CC-Link (ID) network system, set
• AJ61QBT11 the CC-Link (ID) network system to the CC-Link Ver.2
• A1SJ61QBT11 mode.
(2) Access range that can be monitored
The GOT can access to the PLC CPU mounting the
master and local station of the CC-Link System.
It cannot access another network via the CC-Link
module.

13.5 Precautions
9
 Connection to Q170MCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring 10
cannot be executed.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Manual

11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
 Connection to RnSFCPU 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
The RnSFCPU takes 10 seconds or more to run.
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

13.5 Precautions
13.5 Precautions
14
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
MELSECNET/10
14.
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
14.5 PLC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 12
14.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 18 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
14 - 1


Communication
type
R04CPU
R08CPU
R16CPU
R32CPU
R120CPU
R08PCPU
R16PCPU
R32PCPU

CC-Link(G4) -
Series R04ENCPU
R08ENCPU
R16ENCPU
R32ENCPU
R120ENCPU
R08SFCPU
R16SFCPU
R32SFCPU
R120SFCPU

CPU (MELSEC CC-Link(G4) -
C Controller
module
R12CCPU-V CC-Link(G4) -
(MELSEC iQ-R
Series)
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U

CC-Link(G4) -
Series FX5UC
14 - 2 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)

Communication
9
type
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q00JCPU
MELSECNET/H
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1 CC-Link *2 *2 *2
(G4)
Q02HCPU*1
Q06HCPU*1 10
Q12HCPU*1
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Q25HCPU*1
MELSECNET/10
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
CC-Link *2 *3 *3
Q12PRHCPU (Main base) (G4)
Q25PRHCPU (Main base) 11
Q00UJCPU
CONNECTION
Q00UCPU
NETWORK
MELSEC-Q Q01UCPU
(Q mode) Q02UCPU 14.2.1
Q03UDCPU
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
12
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
NETWORK
Q03UDECPU CC-Link *2 *2 *2
Q04UDEHCPU (G4)
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU 13
Q13UDEHCPU
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Q20UDEHCPU
CC-Link CONNECTION
Q26UDEHCPU
Q50UDEHCPU
Q100UDEHCPU
STATION)
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU 14
Q26UDVCPU
CONNECTION
*2 Only master station can be monitored in GT11 and GT10.
*3 For GT10, do not include in the multiple CPU system configuration. (Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14 - 3

Communication
type
Q12DCCPU-V*2
C Controller Q24DHCCPU-V/VG *1 *1 *1
module Q24DHCCPU-LS CC-Link(G4) 14.2.1
(Q Series)
Q26DHCCPU-LS *1 *1
L02CPU
L06CPU
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT
L02CPU-P *1 *1 *1
MELSEC-L CC-Link(G4) 14.2.2
L06CPU-P
L26CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
L02SCPU-P
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q
Q02HCPU-A - -
(A mode)
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA
Q3ACPU - -
(QnACPU)
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
- -
(QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A
A3ACPUR21 - -
(AnCPU)
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
A3NCPUR21

*2 Use only modules with the upper five digits of the serial No. later than 12042.

9
Communication
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
type
MELSECNET/H
A2USCPU
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2 10
A1SHCPU
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSEC-A
A2SCPU - -
MELSECNET/10
(AnSCPU)
A2SCPU-S1
A2SHCPU
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
11
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
CONNECTION
A0J2HCPUP21
NETWORK
- -
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
12
MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
CC-Link IE FIELD
A2CCPUC24 - -
CONNECTION
NETWORK
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*1*2 13
Q173CPU*1*2
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Q172CPUN*1
Q173CPUN*1
STATION)
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion
Q172DCPU 14
Q173DCPU CC-Link (G4) *4 *4 *4
controller 14.2.1
CPU Q172DCPU-S1
CONNECTION
(Q Series)
Q173DCPU-S1
(Via G4)
Q172DSCPU
CC-Link
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU*3
15
Q170MSCPU*5
Q170MSCPU-S1*5
CONNECTION
MR-MQ100 - -
INVERTER

16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION


Communication
type
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
A373UCPU
A373UCPU-S3
Motion A171SCPU
- -
CPU A171SCPU-S3N
(A Series) A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
A172SHCPU
A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU
A173UHCPU-S1
WS0-CPU0
WS0-CPU3
station QJ72BR15
CC-Link IE
head module
CC-Link IE
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB - -
Ethernet
adapter module
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC-Link (G4) *1
14.2.1
Robot controller CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU) CC-Link (G4) *1
14.2.1
CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU)
FX0
FX0S
-
FX0N
FX1
FX2
-
FX2C
FX1S
FX1N
-
MELSEC-FX FX2N -
FX1NC
FX2NC -
FX3S
FX3G
FX3GC
-
FX3GE
FX3U
FX3UC
*1 Only master station can be monitored in GT11.
14.1.2 CC-Link module/peripheral module

Model name
CPU series
CC-Link module Peripheral module
MELSEC-Q (Q mode)
QJ61BT11
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) AJ65BT-G4-S3
QJ61BT11N
CNC C70 AJ65BT-R2N
MELSEC-L LJ61BT11

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
14.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)
10
CC-Link (G4)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Peripheral
QCPU CC-Link module connection GOT
module
11
CONNECTION
Peripheral connection
PLC Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT
NETWORK
module Number of
CC-Link Cable model connectable
Model Cable Max. Model Communication Max. Option equipment
module Connection diagram Model
name
*1
model distance name type
number
distance device
12
GT09-C30R2-9P
or
CC-Link IE FIELD
- (Built into
15m
CONNECTION
RS-232 connection GOT)
AJ65BT
NETWORK
RS-232 diagram 1)
-R2N
RS-232 connection - (Built into

15m
diagram 2) GOT)
13
MELSEC- GT16-C02R4-
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Q 9S
CC-Link 1 GOT for
QJ61BT11
dedicated GT15-RS2T4- 1 peripheral
C QJ61BT11 *3
cable GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) 9P*5 connection
Controller N
STATION)
*2 GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) module
module 30m GT15-RS4-9S
GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
(Q Series)
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)
AJ65BT
-G4-S3
RS-422 - (Built into 14
GOT)
CONNECTION
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
- (Built into (Via G4)
CC-Link
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) 30m
GOT)
GT10-C300R4-25P(30m)
*4
*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual. 15
CONNECTION

INVERTER
*4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram. 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Peripheral
CC-Link
LCPU connection GOT
module
module
Connection cable 2) Connection cable 2) Communication driver
CC-Link (G4)
Peripheral connection
PLC Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT Number of
module
connectable
Model CC-Link Cable Max. Model Communication Cable model Connection Max. Option
Model equipment
name module*1 model distance name type diagram number distance device
GT09-C30R2-9P
or - (Built into
15m
AJ65B RS-232 connection GOT)
RS-232
T-R2N diagram 1)

15m
diagram 2) GOT)
GT16-
C02R4-9S
L02CPU
GT15-
L26CPU- CC-Link 1 GOT for
BT LJ61BT1 dedicated GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) RS2T4-9P*5 1 peripheral
*3 GT15-RS4-
L02CPU-P 1 cable GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) connection
30m 9S
L26CPU- *2 GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) module
PBT AJ65B GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)
T-G4- RS-422 - (Built into
S3 GOT)
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
- (Built into
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) 30m
GOT)
GT10-C300R4-
25P(30m)*4
GT09-C30R2-9P
or - (Built into
15m
AJ65B RS-232 connection GOT)
RS-232
T-R2N diagram 1)

15m
diagram 2) GOT)
GT16-
C02R4-9S
GT15-
L26CPU- CC-Link 1 GOT for
BT dedicated GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) RS2T4-9P*5 1 peripheral
- *3 GT15-RS4-
L26CPU- cable GT01-C100R4-25P(10m) connection
30m 9S
PBT *2 GT01-C200R4-25P(20m) module
AJ65B GT01-C300R4-25P(30m)
T-G4- RS-422 - (Built into
S3 GOT)
GT10-C30R4-25P(3m)
GT10-C100R4-25P(10m)
- (Built into
GT10-C200R4-25P(20m) 30m
GOT)
GT10-C300R4-
25P(30m)*4
*1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the following manual.
*4 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
GOT and the PLC. 14.3.2 RS-422 cable
14.3.1 RS-232 cable  Connection diagram

10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
GOT side Untied wire color of
(terminal block) GT10-C□□□R4-25P
MELSECNET/10
GOT side SDA Brown
(D-Sub 9-pin) PLC side
SDB Red
CD 1 7 RS(RTS)
RDA Orange
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD)
RDB Yellow 11
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD)
SG Green
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR)
RSA Blue
CONNECTION
SG 5 5 SG
RSB Purple
NETWORK
DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR)
CSA Black
RS(RTS) 7 1 CD
CSB White
CS(CTS) 8 8 CS(CTS) 12
- 9 9 -
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
RS-232 connection diagram 2) (1) Cable length
NETWORK
GOT side PLC side The length of the RS-422 cable must be 500m or less.
(terminal block)
SD 2 RD(RXD) For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
RD 3 SD(TXD) 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
ER 6 DR(DSR)
DR 4 ER(DTR)
(1) GOT side
SG 5 SG
STATION)
RS 1 CD resistor must be connected to the GOT.
RS(RTS) (a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
14
CS 7
NC 8 CS(CTS)
NC 9 NC (b) For GT14, GT11, GT10
CONNECTION
 Precautions when preparing a cable (Via G4)

CC-Link

(1) Cable length to the following.
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less. 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

2.
3.
4.
Set this item when change the 9600bps,
transmission speed used for 19200bps,
Transmission
communication with the connected 38400bps
Speed
equipment. 57600bps
Click!
(Default: 9600bps) 115200bps
Retry 0 to 5times
timeout occurs.
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the (Default: 0time)

menu. Timeout Time 3 to 30sec
to time out.(Default: 3sec)
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Set this item to adjust the transmission
channel to be used from the list menu. Delay time 0 to 300ms
from the GOT.
(Default: 0ms)
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller POINT
• I/F: Interface to be used (1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
• Driver: CC-Link (G4) The communication interface setting can be
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, after writing [Communication Settings] of project
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. data.
Make the settings according to the usage For details on the Utility, refer to the following
environment. manual.
14.4.2 Communication detail settings GT User's Manual
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. Utility, the latest setting is effective.
POINT
For details, refer to the following:

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
HINT
MELSECNET/H
controller
example, faulty station that has communication 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Disconnect the
MELSECNET/10
faulty station
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
(Fundamentals)
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Model Reference
 Switch setting of peripheral connection
AJ65BT-G4-S3 14.5.1
Peripheral connection module
module AJ65BT-R2N 14.5.2
Set the station number setting switch, data link
transmission speed setting switch, and operation
setting DIP switch.
14.5.1 Connecting AJ65BT-G4-S3
(2) (1)

B RATE STATION NO.
MITSUBISHI AJ65BT-G4-S3 x 10 x1
01 0 1 90 1
2 8
peripheral connection module in the following case of the PW 2 2
3 3 7 3
RUN 4 654 654
L RUN
SW
SD SW1 SW6 MODE 12345678 RESET
RD OFF OFF A ON
ON OFF QnA
L ERR. OFF ON Q
ON ON non-used
RS-422 (3)
POINT
(1) Peripheral connection module
For details of the peripheral connection module,
Peripheral Connection Module Type AJ65BT- (1) Station number setting switch
G4-S3 User's Manual (detail volume)
(2) CC-Link module Setting
Station number setting necessity at
For details of the CC-Link module, refer to the Description Set value
switch GOT
following manual.
connection
Manual QJ61BT11N STATION NO.
×10 ×1 AJ65BT-G4-S3
MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local 01 90 1 station number 1 to 64
Module User's Manual 2 8 2
3 7 3 setting
(3) CC-Link function built-in CPU 654 654
refer to the following manual. : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
Module User's Manual (2) Data link transmission speed setting switch
Setting
Data link transmission necessity at
 System configuration speed setting switch
GOT
14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series) connection
14.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX Developer
B RATE 0: 156kbps
<CC-Link module> *1 Setting example
Station type : Master station Data link 1: 625kbps
01 transmission 2: 2.5Mbps
Mode : Remote net (Ver.1 mode) 2
All connect count :1 3 speed setting 3: 5Mbps
Transmission speed : 156kbps 4 4: 10Mbps

<GOT>Setting example
Transmission speed: 9600bps
<AJ65BT-G4-S3> Setting example

Station type : Intelligent device station
Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1
■ Switch setting of peripheral connection module
*1 The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0"

(3) Operation setting DIP switch 14.5.2 Connecting AJ65BT-R2N 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and
MELSECNET/H
Operation setting Setting necessity
Description Set value peripheral connection module in the following case of the
DIP switch Switch at GOT
connection
SW1 = OFF
POINT
SW1,
SW6
Operation
mode
SW6 = ON
(fixed) 10
(Q mode) (1) Peripheral connection module
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Peripheral For details of the peripheral connection module,
MELSECNET/10
SW2
SW transmissi OFF (fixed) refer to the following manual.
12345678 SW3
ON
on speed*1 Peripheral Connection Module Type AJ65BT-
SW4 R2N User's Manual
(2) CC-Link module
SW5 Not used OFF (fixed)
For details of the CC-Link module, refer to the
SW7 following manual. 11
OFF (fixed) CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's
SW8 Test mode
(Online mode) Manual QJ61BT11N
(3) CC-Link built-in CPU
CONNECTION
NETWORK
*1 The peripheral connection module operates with the baud
rate set in the GOT. refer to the following manual.
14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 MELSEC-L CC-Link System Master/Local
Module User's Manual 12
POINT
CC-Link IE FIELD
Operation mode of peripheral connection module
CONNECTION
Be sure to set the "Q mode" as an operation mode of 14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series)
NETWORK
14.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX Developer
the peripheral connection module.
<CC-Link module> *1 Setting example
Station type : Master station
Station No.
Mode
: Station No. 0
: Remote net (Ver.1 mode) 13
All connect count :1
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
<GOT> Setting example

Transmission speed: 9600bps
STATION)
<AJ65BT-R2N> Setting example
Station type : Intelligent device station
Number of stations occupied : Exclusive station 1 14
■ Switch setting of peripheral connection module
*1 The Start I/O No. of the CC-Link module is set to "0"

CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

 Switch setting of peripheral connection (4) RS-232 transmission setting switch
module Setting
Set the station number setting switch, data link RS-232 transmission Setting Set necessity at
Description
transmission speed setting switch, and operation setting switch switch value GOT
connection
setting DIP switch.
SW1
(3) (2)
2 (1)
SW2 Peripheral
OFF
transmission
SW3 *1
(fixed)
speed
SW4
Data OFF
SW5
bit length (fixed)
4
(4) SW6
Parity bit OFF
length (fixed)
SW7
Stop bit OFF

SW8
length (fixed)
*1 The peripheral connection module operates with the baud
Setting rate set in the GOT.
Station number setting necessity at
Description Set value 14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
switch GOT
connection
POINT
AJ65BT-R2N
station number 1 to 64
Precautions when setting peripheral connection
setting module
(1) mode setting switch
Be sure to set the Operation mode setting switch
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary to "5" (MELSOFT/connection mode).
(2) Data link transmission speed setting switch (2) RS-232 transmission setting switch
Turn OFF SW1 through SW8 of the RS-232
Setting transmission setting switch.
Data link transmission necessity at If any switch of SW1 through SW8 is ON, setting
speed setting switch GOT error will occur (RUN LED turns off).
connection
0: 156kbps
Data link 1: 625kbps
transmission 2: 2.5Mbps
speed setting 3: 5Mbps
4: 10Mbps
Setting
necessity at
Mode setting switch Description Set value
GOT
connection
5 (fixed)
(MELSOFT/
Mode setting
connection
mode)

14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link 14.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX 9
module (Q series) Developer
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / (1) Network parameter
mode setting switch.
QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N
QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
10
MST S MST
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
MELSECNET/10
STATION
NO.
5
X10
(1)
5
X1
C 11
(2)
8
MODE
4
CONNECTION
NETWORK
NC
1
NC
DA 2
SLD
3
(FG)
DB 4
5 12
DG
6
7
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Setting necessity
NETWORK
connection
Station number
Setting
necessity
Start I/O No.
Operation setting
0000H
(Use default value)
13
setting switch at GOT
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
connection
Mode Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
STATION
NO.
All connect count 1
STATION)
5
X10
0 (fixed) Remote output (RY) Y400
(master station)
14
5
X1
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Special relay (SB) SB0
CONNECTION
Retry count
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Transmission Setting Automatic reconnection

rate/ necessity station count
mode setting
switch
at GOT
connection PLC down select
(Use default value)
15
0: 156kbps Scan mode setting
C 1: 625kbps
Transmission rate/mode Delay information setting
CONNECTION
2: 2.5Mbps
8
MODE
setting Station information setting Refer to (2)
INVERTER
4
3: 5Mbps
4: 10Mbps Remote device station
initial setting (Use default value)
Interrupt setting

16
POINT
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

PLC CPU.

(2) Station information setting 14.5.5 Parameter setting (when
connecting to C Controller
module (Q Series))
Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E Ver.3.05F or later for the C

Controller module setting utility.
Setting necessity
Item*1 Set value
at GOT connection
Intelligent device
Station type*2
station (fixed)
Number of stations
Exclusive station 1 (fixed)
occupied
No setting
select
Intelligent buffer select Setting

(Use default value)
(word) necessity
Item Set value
at GOT
connection
net - (Ver. 2 mode)], [Remote station points] can be set. Target module*1 192.168.3.3
*2 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote *2 target
User name
net - (Ver. 2 mode)] or [Remote net - Additional mode], set to
[Ver. 1 Intelligent device station]. Password*2 password
Detailed settings -
POINT : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
When changing the network parameter been changed, input the changed IP address or host name.
After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, been changed, input the changed user name and password.
or resetting.
(3) Completion confirmation

After initial communications of CC-Link are completed,
the L RUN LED of AJ65BT-G4-S3 turns on.
The GOT starts to monitor after the L-RUN LED of
AJ65BT-G4-S3 turns on.
It does not monitor while the L RUN LED turns off.
PW
RUN
L RUN
SD
RD
L ERR.

(2) [Parameter Setting] of CC-Link utility 14.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT 9
Designer3
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Item Set value
9600bps
19200bps
Transmission Speed 38400bps 10
57600bps
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
115200bps
MELSECNET/10
Retry Count 0 to 5times
11
POINT
Setting [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3
necessity
CONNECTION
Item Set value For [Controller Setting], of GT Designer3, refer to the
at GOT
NETWORK
connection
following.
Number of modules 1 14.4.1 Setting communication interface
Target module 1
12
Start I/O No. 0000H
CC-Link IE FIELD
type Master station(fixed)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Remote net
Mode*1
(Ver.1 mode)
Expanded cyclic
Single(fixed)
station
Operation
Occupied number
Exclusive station 1 13
setting (fixed)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Error event : input data
Clear
status
CPU stop: data link
Refresh
STATION)
status
14
All connect count 1
Station type
station(fixed)
Expanded cyclic
Single
CONNECTION
Station station
information Occupied number*2 Exclusive station 1 (Via G4)
CC-Link
settings
Remote station points 32 points
No setting
select
15
(Use default value)
(word)

CONNECTION
*1 If the CC-Link module [Mode] is [Remote net -Ver.1 mode],

INVERTER
[Remote station points] cannot be set.

POINT 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION


14.6 Precautions
When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system,  Connection to Q170MCPU
the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monitor the
QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2).
seconds or more When the CPU No. is set to "0" or "1", the device on the
MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored.
When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system When the CPU No. is set to the number other than "0"
alarm occurs.Adjust the opening screen time in the to "2", a communication error occurs and the monitoring
GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs. cannot be executed.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design For setting the CPU No., refer to the following manual.
Manual
Manual
LCPU may diagnose (check file system, execute
recovering process, etc.) the SD memory card when
turning on the power or when resetting. Therefore, it
takes time until the SD memory card becomes
available. When the GOT starts before the SD card
becomes available, a system alarm occurs. Adjust the
opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no
Manual
 Connection to Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU,

CNC C70, CRnQ-700
The Q17nDCPU, Q170MCPU, CNC C70 and CRnQ-
700 are applicable to the CC-Link network system Ver.2
only.
For connecting to the CC-Link (Via G4) network
system, set the CC-Link (G4) network system to the
CC-Link Ver.2 mode.

14.6 Precautions
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA
DEVICE CONNECTIONS
15. INVERTER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1

16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 1
17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 1
18. CNC CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 1
19. ENERGY MEASURING UNIT/ELECTRIC MULTI-MEASURING
INSTRUMENT CONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 1
15
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
INVERTER CONNECTION
MELSECNET/10
15.
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
15.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 3 12
15.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 24
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 34
15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 50 13
15.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 53
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
15 - 1
15. INVERTER CONNECTION

Communication
type
FREQROL-A500/A500L
FREQROL-F500/F500L RS-485 15.2.1
FREQROL-V500/V500L
FREQROL-E500
FREQROL-S500/S500E
FREQROL-F500J RS-485 15.2.2
FREQROL FREQROL-D700
FREQROL-F700PJ
FREQROL-E700 RS-485 15.2.3

FREQROL-A700
FREQROL-F700 RS-485 15.2.4
FREQROL-F700P
FREQROL-A800/F800 RS-485 15.2.5

Sensorless
FREQROL-E700EX RS-485 15.2.3
servo
MELIPM MD-CX522- K(-A0) RS-485 15.2.6
15 - 2 15. INVERTER CONNECTION

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
15.2.1 Connecting to FREQROL-A500/A500L/F500/F500L/V500/V500L
 When connecting to one inverter

10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Computer link
Inverter GOT Communication driver
option
Connection cable
FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO
11
Inverter Connection cable GOT Number of
CONNECTION
connectable
NETWORK
Computer link Communication Connection diagram Max.
Model name Option device Model equipment
option type number distance
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
12
*1
GT15-RS2T4-9P
RS485
FREQROL- 500m
GT15-RS4-9S
CC-Link IE FIELD
A500/A500L connection diagram 1)
CONNECTION
F500/F500L - RS-485
NETWORK
V500/V500L - (Built into GOT)
*2
RS485
connection diagram 500m - (Built into GOT) 13
10)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
1 GOT for 1 inverter
CC-Link CONNECTION
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
STATION)
RS485
500m
FREQROL- connection diagram 2) GT15-RS4-9S
A500/A500L
F500/F500L
V500/V500L
FR-A5NR RS-485
- (Built into GOT) 14
RS485
CONNECTION
connection diagram 500m - (Built into GOT)
11) (Via G4)
CC-Link
*2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter.
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15 - 3

 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the distributor)
Inverter Inverter
Distributor Distributor GOT
Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
Connection Connection
Inverter Distributor*3 GOT
cable 1) cable 2) Number of
Terminal Max.
Connection Connection connectable
Communication cable distance
Model name diagram Model name diagram Option device Model equipment
type
number number
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS485
GT15-RS4-9S
BMJ-8 connection
FREQROL- (Recommended) diagram 1)
RS485 RS485
A500/A500L 31 inverters
F500/F500L RS-485 500m for one
diagram 9) diagram 3) - (Built into GOT)
V500/V500L GOT*4
*2
RS485
BMJ-8 connection
diagram 10) - (Built into GOT)
(Recommended)
*3 The distributor is a product manufactured by HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
*4 For GT11 and GT10, the number of connectable inverters differs according to the hardware version.
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manual.
GT11 User’s Manual
Model name Hardware version
Inverter
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1155-QSBD F or later 31
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10
GT1055-QSBD C or later 31
GT1050-QBBD B or earlier 10
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD

GT1030-H
Model name
GT1020-L D
GT1030-L D
D
E or later
B or later
A or earlier
D or earlier
Hardware version
10
31
10
31
Inverter

15 - 5
CC-Link CC-Link CONNECTION CC-Link IE FIELD CC-Link IE CONTROLLER MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/H
SERVO AMPLIFIER INVERTER CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE NETWORK NETWORK CONNECTION (PLC CONNECTION (PLC
9
CONNECTION CONNECTION (Via G4) STATION) CONNECTION CONNECTION TO PLC NETWORK) TO PLC NETWORK)
11
16
15
14
13
12
10
 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the computer link option)
Computer Computer
Inverter link Inverter link
option option
GOT
Connection cable

Max.
Computer link Communication Connection diagram connectable
Model name Option device Model distance
option type number equipment
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
FREQROL- RS485 connection
GT15-RS4-9S
A500/A500L diagram 4) 31 inverters
FR-A5NR RS-485 500m
F500/F500L for one GOT*2
- (Built into GOT)
V500/V500L
RS485 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 12)
Inverter
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
GT1030-L D B or later 31
GT1030-H D A or earlier 10
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10

15.2.2 Connecting to FREQROL-E500/S500/S500E/F500J/D700/F700PJ 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Inverter GOT
FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Connection cable
MELSECNET/10
11
Inverter Connection cable GOT
Communication Connection diagram Max. equipment
type number distance
CONNECTION
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
NETWORK
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS485 connection
FREQROL-
E500/S500/S500E diagram 1)
500m GT15-RS4-9S
12
RS-485 1 GOT for 1 inverter
F500J/D700/F700PJ
- (Built into GOT)
*2
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
RS485 connection
NETWORK
diagram 10)
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Inverter Inverter
Connection Distributor Connection

Inverter GOT
cable 1) *3 cable 2) Number of
Max.
Terminal cable Connection Connection connectable
Communication Model distance
Model name diagram diagram Option device Model equipment
type name
number number
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS485
BMJ-8 GT15-RS4-9S
connection
(Recomm diagram 1)
FREQROL- RS485 RS485 ended)
E500/S500 31 inverters
S500E/F500J RS-485 500m for one
D700 GOT*4
*2
RS485
BMJ-8 connection
(Recomm diagram 10) - (Built into GOT)
ended)
Inverter
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD

GT1030-H
Model name
GT1020-L D
GT1030-L D
D
E or later
B or later
A or earlier
D or earlier
Hardware version
10
31
10
31
Inverter

15 - 9
9
11
16
15
14
13
12
10
15.2.3 Connecting to FREQROL E700/sensorless servo (FREQROL-E700EX)
Inverter Control
sensorless terminal GOT
servo option
Connection cable

Control Communication Connection diagram Max. connectable
Model name Option device Model equipment
terminal option type number distance
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS485
500m
connection diagram 1) GT15-RS4-9S
FREQROL-E700/
sensorless servo - RS-485
(FREQROL-E700EX)*2 - (Built into GOT)
RS485
10) 1 GOT for 1
GT16-C02R4-9S inverter
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS485
500m
connection diagram 7) GT15-RS4-9S
FREQROL-E700/
sensorless servo FR-E7TR*3 RS-485
(FREQROL-E700EX)*3 - (Built into GOT)
RS485
15)
*3 The control terminal option and the PU port cannot be used at the same time.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Inverter Inverter
sensorless sensorless
servo servo FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Distributor Distributor GOT 11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Terminating
cable 1) cable 2)
Max.
Number of
connectable
12
cable Connection Connection distance
Communication equipment
Model name diagram Model name diagram Option device Model
type
number number
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
GT16-C02R4-9S
NETWORK
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS485
FREQROL-
BMJ-8 connection
GT15-RS4-9S
13
(Recommended) diagram 1)
E700/ RS485 RS485
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
31inverters
sensorless connection connection
RS-485 500m for one
servo diagram 9) diagram 3) - (Built into GOT)
(FREQROL- GOT*4
STATION)
E700EX)*2
RS485
BMJ-8
(Recommended)
connection
diagram 10) - (Built into GOT) 14
*2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter. CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
Inverter
CONNECTION
INVERTER
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD

Inverter
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10

9
 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the control terminal option)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Inverter Control Inverter Control

10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
sensorless terminal sensorless terminal
servo option servo option
MELSECNET/10
GOT
Connection cable
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Max.
Control terminal Communication Connection diagram connectable
Model name Option device Model distance
option type number equipment
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
12
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
CC-Link IE FIELD
FREQROL-E700/ RS485 connection
CONNECTION
GT15-RS4-9S
sensorless servo diagram 8) 31 inverters
NETWORK
*2 RS-485 500m
(FREQROL- FR-E7TR
for one GOT*3
- (Built into GOT)
E700EX)*2
RS485 connection
- (Built into GOT)
13
diagram 16)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
*2 The control terminal option and the PU port cannot be used at the same time.
STATION)
14
Inverter
CONNECTION
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10 (Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
INVERTER
GT1020-L D
E or later 31 16
D or earlier 10
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

15.2.4 Connecting to FREQROL-A700/F700/700P
Connection cable

GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS485 connection
500m GT15-RS4-9S
FREQROL- diagram 1)
A700/F700/F700P RS-485
(PU port) - (Built into GOT)
RS485 connection
diagram 10)
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
500m GT15-RS4-9S
A700/F700/F700P diagram 5)
RS-485
(Built-in RS485
- (Built into GOT)
terminal block)
RS485 connection
diagram 13)

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
Inverter Inverter
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) 11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Terminal Max.
Connection Connection connectable
Communication cable distance
type
number number
GT16-C02R4-9S
13
(0.2m)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS485
GT15-RS4-9S
BMJ-8 connection
STATION)
FREQROL- RS485 RS485
31 inverters
A700/F700/ connection connection
for one
14
RS-485 diagram 9) diagram 3) 500m
F700P - (Built into GOT)
GOT*3
(PU port)
CONNECTION
RS485
BMJ-8 connection
- (Built into GOT) (Via G4)
CC-Link
*1
*2
The distributor is a product manufactured by HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
15
CONNECTION

INVERTER
Inverter
C or later 31 16
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
SERVO AMPLIFIER
F or later 31
CONNECTION
GT1155-QSBD

Inverter
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10

9
 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the built-in RS485 terminal block)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Inverter Inverter
10
GOT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Connection cable
11
Max. Number of connectable
Communication Connection diagram distance equipment
type number
CONNECTION
NETWORK
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
12
GT15-RS4-9S
A700/F700/F700P diagram 6)
RS-485 500m 31 inverters for one GOT*2
(Built-in RS485
- (Built into GOT)
terminal block)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
RS485 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 14)
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
Inverter
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10 14
GT1055-QSBD C or later 31 CONNECTION

(Via G4)
GT1050-QBBD
CC-Link
B or earlier 10
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
B or later 31
15
GT1030-L D
CONNECTION
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
INVERTER
D or earlier 10
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

15.2.5 Connecting to FREQROL-A800/F800
Connection cable

GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS485 connection
500m GT15-RS4-9S
FREQROL- diagram 1)
A800/F800 RS-485
(PU port) - (Built into GOT)
RS485 connection
diagram 10)
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
500m GT15-RS4-9S
A800/F800 diagram 5)
RS-485
(Built-in RS485
- (Built into GOT)
terminal block)
RS485 connection
diagram 13)
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). Cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Inverter Inverter
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10

11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Terminal Max.
Model name
Communication cable
Connection
diagram Model name
Connection
diagram Option device Model
distance
connectable
equipment
12
type
number number
GT16-C02R4-9S
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
(0.2m)
NETWORK
RS485 GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
BMJ-8 connection GT15-RS4-9S

RS485 RS485 (Recommended) diagram 1)
FREQROL-
A800/F800 RS-485
500m
31 inverters
for one
13
(PU port) GOT*3
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
RS485
BMJ-8 connection
STATION)
(Recommended)
*1
*2
The distributor is a product manufactured by HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. For details, contact HAKKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
14
GT11 User’s Manual CONNECTION
GT10 User’s Manual (Via G4)
CC-Link
Inverter
GT1155-QTBD
C or later 31
15
B or earlier 10
GT1150-QLBD
CONNECTION
E or earlier 10
INVERTER
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
E or later 31
CONNECTION
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10

 When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the built-in RS485 terminal block)
Inverter Inverter
GOT
Connection cable

Communication Connection diagram
Model name Option device Model distance equipment
type number
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT15-RS4-9S
A800/F800 diagram 6)
RS-485 500m 31 inverters for one GOT*2
(Built-in RS485
- (Built into GOT)
terminal block)
RS485 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 14)
Inverter
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10

15.2.6 Connecting to MD-CX522- K(-A0) 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Inverter GOT 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Connection cable
MELSECNET/10
11
Communication Connection diagram Max. Model name equipment
CONNECTION
NETWORK
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS485 connection
MD-CX522- K diagram 1)
20m GT15-RS4-9S
12
RS-485 1 GOT for 1 inverter
(-A0)*2
- (Built into GOT)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
RS485 connection
NETWORK
diagram 10)
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Inverter Inverter
Inverter Distributor*3 GOT Number of
cable 1) cable 2)
Terminating Max. connectable
cable Connection Connection distance Model name
Communication
type
number number
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS485
GT15-RS4-9S
BMJ-8 connection
RS485 RS485
MD-CX522 31 inverters
- K(-A0) RS-485 20m for one
*2 GOT*4
RS485
BMJ-8 connection
(Recommended)
Inverter
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD

GT1030-H
Model name
GT1020-L D
GT1030-L D
D
E or later
B or later
A or earlier
D or earlier
Hardware version
10
31
10
31
Inverter

15 - 23
9
11
16
15
14
13
12
10
GOT and the inverter. RS485 connection diagram 3)
Distributor side Inverter side or distributor side
15.3.1 RS-485 cable (Modular connector) (Modular connector)
SDA 5 5 SDA
 Connection diagram SDB 4 4 SDB
RDA 3 3 RDA
RS485 connection diagram 1)
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) RDB 6 6 RDB
Inverter or Distributor side P5S 2 2 P5S
GOT side*1 (Modular connector)
P5S 8 8 P5S
RDA 2 5 SDA
SG 1 1 SG
RDB 7 4 SDB
SDA 1 3 RDA
SDB 6 6 RDB
RSA 3 2 P5S
RSB 8 8 P5S
CSA 4 - -
CSB 9 - -
SG 5 1 SG
FG -
*1 For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor to

"Disable".
For GT14, GT11 and GT10, set the terminating resistor to
"330 ".
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )
FR-A5NR side
GOT side*2 (terminal block)
RDA 2 SDA
RDB 7 SDB
SDA 1 RDA
SDB 6 RDB
*1
RSA 3 RDR
RSB 8
CSA 4
CSB 9
SG 5 SG
FG -
*1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and

RDR.The terminating resister jumper is packed together
with the FR-A5NR.
"Disable".
"330 ".

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
FR-A5NR side FR-A5NR side FR-A5NR side
(terminal block) (terminal block) (terminal block)
GOT side*2 Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.n
RDA RDA
SDA 1 RDA
10
RDB RDB
SDB 6 RDB
SDA SDA
RDA 2 SDA
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SDB SDB
RDB SDB
MELSECNET/10
7
SG SG
SG 5 SG
RDR RDR
RSA 3 RDR
*1
RSB 8
CSA 4 11
CSB 9
FG -
CONNECTION
NETWORK
*1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR which are assigned in the FR-A5NR of the inverter located farthest from
the GOT.
The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A5NR.
*2 For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "Enable".
For GT14, GT11 and GT10, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330 ".
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Inverter side
RS485 terminal block
GOT side*1 (built into the inverter)*2
RDA 2 SDA1(TXD1+)
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
RDB 7 SDB1(TXD1-)
SDA 1 RDA1(RXD1+)
SDB
STATION)
6 RDB1(RXD1-)
RSA 3
RSB 8
14
CSA 4
CSB 9
SG 5 SG(GND) CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
FG -

"Disable".
15
"330 ".
CONNECTION
*2 RDA2, RDB2, SDA2 and SDB2 terminals of the RS485

terminal block (built into the inverter) cannot be used.
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

Built-in RS-485 Built-in RS-485 Built-in RS-485
terminal block terminal block terminal block*1
GOT side *2
Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.n
SG 5 GND SDA2 SDA1
SDB 6 RDB1 SDB2 SDB1
SDA 1 RDA1 RDA2 RDA1
RDB 7 SDB1 RDB2 RDB1
RDA 2 SDA1 GND GND
RSA 3 SDA2 SDA1 SDA2
RSB 8 SDB2 SDB1 SDB2
CSA 4 RDA2 RDA1 RDA2
CSB 9 RDB2 RDB1 RDB2
- GND GND GND
*1 Set the terminator switch built in the farthest inverter from the GOT to ON (100 ).

FR-E7TR side
GOT side*1 (terminal block)*2
RDA 2 SDA
RDB 7 SDB
SDA 1 RDA
SDB 6 RDB
RSA 3
RSB 8
CSA 4
CSB 9
SG 5 SG
FG -

"Disable".
"330 ".
*2 Turn ON (100 ) the terminator switch for the FR-E7TR.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
FR-E7TR side FR-E7TR side FR-E7TR side
MELSECNET/H
terminal block terminal block terminal block*1
GOT side*2 Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.2
RDA 2 SDA SDA SDA
RDB 7 SDB SDB SDB
SDA 1 RDA RDA RDA

10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SDB 6 RDB RDB RDB
MELSECNET/10
RSA 3 SDB SDB SDB
RSB 8 SDA SDA SDA
CSA 4 RDB RDB RDB
CSB
11
9 RDA RDA RDA
SG 5 SG SG SG
FG - SG SG SG
CONNECTION
NETWORK
*1 Turn ON (100 ) the terminator switch for the most distant FR-E7TR from the GOT.
RS485 connection diagram 9) RS485 connection diagram 11)
CC-Link IE FIELD
Distributor side (For GT1030, GT1020)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
SDA 5 GOT side*2 FR-A5NR side
Terminating resistor
SDB 4
100Ω 1/2W
SDA RDA
RDA 3
SDB RDB 13
RDB 6
RDA SDA
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
P5S 2
RDB SDB
P5S 8
SG SG
STATION)
SG 1
RSA RDR
*1
RSB
CSA
14
(For GT1030, GT1020)
CSB
GOT side*1 Inverter side or distributor side
CONNECTION
(terminal block) (Modular connector)
*1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR.
SDA RDA The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the (Via G4)
CC-Link
3
FR-A5NR.
SDB 6 RDB *2 Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330 ".
RDA 5 SDA
15
RDB 4 SDB
SG 1 SG
CONNECTION
RSA 2 P5S
INVERTER
RSB 7 SG
CSA 8 P5S
CSB 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
*1 Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330 ".


(For GT1030, GT1020)
FR-A5NR side FR-A5NR side FR-A5NR side

GOT side*2 (terminal block) (terminal block) (terminal block)
(terminal block) Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.n
RDA RDA RDA
SDA
RDB RDB RDB
SDB
SDA SDA SDA
RDA
SDB SDB SDB
RDB
SG SG SG
SG
RDR RDR RDR
RSA
*1
RSB
CSA
CSB
*1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR which are assigned in the FR-A5NR of the inverter located farthest from
the GOT.
The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A5NR.
*2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "330 ".

(For GT1030, GT1020)
Inverter side
GOT side*1 RS485 terminal block
(terminal block) (built into the inverter)
SDA RDA1(RXD1+)
SDB RDB1(RXD1-)
RDA SDA1(TXD1+)
RDB SDB1(TXD1-)
SG SG(GND)
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB


9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(For GT1030, GT1020)
Built-in RS-485 Built-in RS-485 Built-in RS-485
MELSECNET/H
GOT side terminal block terminal block terminal block*1
(terminal block) Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.n
SG GND SDA2 SDA1
SDB RDB1 SDB2 SDB1
SDA RDA1 RDA2 RDA1

10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
RDB SDB1 RDB2 RDB1
MELSECNET/10
RDA SDA1 GND GND
RSA SDA2 SDA1 SDA2
RSB SDB2 SDB1 SDB2
CSA RDA2 RDA1 RDA2
CSB RDB2 RDB1 RDB2

11
GND GND GND
CONNECTION
*1 Set the terminator switch built in the farthest inverter from the GOT to ON (100 ).
NETWORK
RS485 connection diagram 15) 12

(For GT1030, GT1020)
GOT side*1
CC-Link IE FIELD
FR-E7TR side
CONNECTION
NETWORK
SDA RDA
SDB RDB
RDA SDA 13
RDB SDB
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
SG SG
RSA
STATION)
RSB
CSA
CSB 14
CONNECTION
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT (Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(For GT1030, GT1020)
FR-E7TR side FR-E7TR side FR-E7TR side
GOT side*2 terminal block terminal block terminal block*1
(terminal block) Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.2
SDA RDA RDA RDA
SDB RDB RDB RDB
RDA SDA SDA SDA
RDB SDB SDB SDB
SG SG SG SG
RSA SDB SDB SDB
RSB SDA SDA SDA
CSA RDB RDB RDB
CSB RDA RDA RDA
SG SG SG
*1 Turn ON (100 ) the terminator switch for the most distant FR-E7TR from the GOT.

9
 Precautions when preparing a cable (4) Terminal block layout in the FR-A5NR computer link
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
option
(1) Cable length Attach this option to the A500 and F500 Series.
MELSECNET/H
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Terminal block
Screw size: M3
SDA SDB RDA RDB RDR SG A B C 10
(3) Inverter connector specifications
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Terminal
(a) Pin layout in the PU port symbol
MELSECNET/10
When seen from the front of the inverter Connected to the GOT
(receptacle side)
(5) Terminal block layout in the FR-E7TR control

terminal option
11
Mount the FR-E7TR to the E700 series.
Set the terminal 2/SG switch to the
OPEN right position (ON) to change the
CONNECTION
Modular jack
terminal 2 to the terminal SG.
NETWORK
To the GOT or 100
Pin No. Signal name Remark 10 4
I
the previous
V
1 GND (SG) inverter
2 (P5S) Not used SDB RDA

SDA SDB
SDA RDA RDB
RDB SG
SG 22
12
SOURCE
O
N
3 RXD+ (RDA)
SINK
CC-Link IE FIELD
4 TXD- (SDB) SDA SDB RUN FU
RDB RUN
RDA RDB
CONNECTION
SDA SDB RDA FU SE
SE
NETWORK
5 TXD+ (SDA)
6 RXD- (RDB)
7 GND (SG) RM RH MRS RES SD
13
FM RL PC STF STR SD SD
8 (P5S) Not used

A B C
To the next inverter
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
The contents inside ( ) indicate symbols described
CC-Link CONNECTION
in the inverter manual.
The pins number 2 and 8 (P5S) are connected to
the power supply for an operation panel or a  Connecting terminating resistors
STATION)
parameter unit.
Do not use them in RS-485 communication. (1) GOT side
(b) Connector of cable between FREQROL Series resistor must be connected to the GOT. 14
inverters
Use the commercial connectors and cables shown
Set the terminating resistor setting switch.
in the table below or the comparable
products.(Refer to the manual for the inverter.) (b) For GT14, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION
Set the terminating resistor selector switch. (Via G4)
CC-Link
Name Model name Specifications Manufacturer
Tyco International, For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer
Connector 5-554720-3 RJ45 connector
Ltd to the following.
15
Modular 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
HAKKO ELECTRIC
ceiling
BMJ-8 - CO.,LTD.
rosette
CONNECTION
TEL(03)-3806-9171
(Distributor)
INVERTER
Cable
conforming to MITSUBISHI
SGLPEV
Cable EIA568 CABLE
0.5mm 4P
(such as cable
10BASE-T)
INDUSTRIES, LTD.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

2.
3.
4. Item Description Range

Transmission
communication with the 38400bps,
Speed
Click! Set this item when change the
data length used for
Data Bit communication with the 7bits/8bits
(Default: 7bits)
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Specify the stop bit length for
Stop Bit communications. 1bit/2bits
menu.
(Default: 1bit)
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Specify whether or not to perform
a parity check, and how it is
None
channel to be used from the list menu. Parity
performed during communication.
Even
Odd
(Default: Odd)
• Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC performed when a communication
Retry 0 to 5times
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller timeout occurs.
(Default: 0time)
• I/F: Interface to be used Set the time period for a
• Driver: FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS (Default: 3sec)
SERVO
Set this item to adjust the
transmission timing of the
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300ms
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. GOT.
(Default: 10ms)
environment.
15.4.2 Communication detail settings POINT
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. (1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
POINT after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
The settings of connecting equipment can be For details on the Utility, refer to the following
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. manuals.
For details, refer to the following. GT User's Manual
1.1.2 I/F communication setting (2) Precedence in communication settings

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
HINT
MELSECNET/H
controller
example, faulty station that has communication 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
(Fundamentals)
11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings
For details of the inverter, refer to the manual of each series.
15.5.1 Connecting FREQROL-S500, S500E, F500J series
 Communication settings
Make the communication settings of the inverter.
Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.
(1) Communication port and corresponding parameters
GOT connection
Parameters corresponding to inverter
destination
RS-485 port Pr.79, n1 to n7, n10 to n12
(2) Communication settings of inverter

Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.30 (Extended function selection) to 1 [With
display] before making the parameter settings.
Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed,
communication with the GOT is disabled.
Setting item*1 Parameter No.*4 Set value Contents of setting
Communication station number n1 (331) 0 to 31 15.5.14 Station number

setting
Communication speed*2 n2 (332) 192*3 19200bps
Data length: 7bit

Stop bit length*2 n3 (333) 10
Stop bit length: 1bit
Parity check presence/absence*2 n4 (334) 1 Odd
--- The inverter will not come to an

Number of communication retries n5 (335)
(65535) alarm stop.
Communication check
Communication check time interval n6 (336) ---
suspension
Wait time setting n7 (337) 0 0ms
CRLF selection n11 (341) 1*3 With CR, without LF
Protocol selection*5 ― ― ―
External operation mode at

Operation mode selection Pr.79 0*3
power on
Link start mode selection n10 (340) 1 Computer link operation
E2PROM write selection n12 (342) 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-S500, S500E, and F500J series.
*2 Settings on the GOT can be changed.
When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings.
*3 Inverter default values (No need to change)
*4 When being monitored from the GOT, the parameter n1 through n7 correspond with Pr.331 through Pr.337, and the parameter
n10 through n12 correspond with Pr.340 through Pr.342.
Numbers in brackets show the parameter number when the parameter unit is in use.
*5 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side.

15.5.2 Connecting FREQROL-E500 series 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
GOT connection
10
destination
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.146, Pr.342
MELSECNET/10
Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit).
Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT.If they are changed,
11
Setting item*1 Parameter No. Set value Contents of setting
Communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 15.5.14 Station number
setting
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps
Data length: 7bit

Stop bit length*2 Pr.119 10
12
Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 1 Odd
9999 The inverter will not come to an

Number of communication retries Pr.121
CC-Link IE FIELD
(65535) alarm stop.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Communication check
Communication check time interval Pr.122 9999
suspension
Wait time setting Pr.123 0 0ms
CRLF presence/ absence selection Pr.124 1 *3 With CR, without LF 13

Protocol selection*4 ― ― ―
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Operation mode selection Pr.79 1*3 PU operation mode
Communication startup mode selection*4 ― ― ―
STATION)
2 Pr.342 *3 Written to RAM and EEPROM
E PROM write selection 0
Built-in frequency setting

Frequency setting command selection*5 Pr.146 9999
potentiometer invalid 14
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-E500 series.
CONNECTION
*3 Inverter default values (No need to change) (Via G4)
CC-Link

*5 The setting is required for Frequency setting command selection.
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

15.5.3 Connecting FREQROL-F500, F500L series
GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124
FR-A5NR (Option unit) Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342

Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.160 (user group read selection) to 0 [All
parameters can be accessed for reading and writing.] before making the parameter settings.
Parameter No.
Setting item*1 Set value Contents of setting
PU connector FR-A5NR
Communication station number Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31 15.5.14 Station number

setting
Communication speed*2 Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps
Stop bit length/data length Data length: 7bit

Pr.119 Pr.333 10
Stop bit length*2 Stop bit length: 1bit
Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd
The inverter will not come to an

Number of communication retries Pr.121 Pr.335 9999
alarm stop.
Communication check
Communication check time interval Pr.122 Pr.336 9999
suspension
Wait time setting Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms
CRLF presence/ absence selection Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF
Protocol selection*5 ― ― ― ―
PU
1 PU operation mode
connector
Operation mode selection Pr.79
FR-A5NR 0*3
power on
Link start mode selection*6 ― Pr.340 1 Computer link operation
E2PROM write selection*6 ― Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-F500 and F500L series.
*4 Since the value has been set as a default, no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side.
*6 The setting is required on the inverter side when FR-A5NR is used.

15.5.4 Connecting FREQROL-A500, A500L series 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.342
MELSECNET/10

Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Do not change these parameters, even though they
can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed, communication with the GOT is disabled.
Parameter No.
11
CONNECTION
setting
NETWORK
Data length: 7bit

Stop bit length*2 Pr.119 Pr.333 10
Stop bit length: 1bit 12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
alarm stop.
NETWORK
Communication check
suspension
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PU
1 PU operation mode
connector
STATION)
FR-A5NR 0*3
power on
Link start mode selection*6 ― Pr.340 1 Computer link operation 14

2 Pr.342 *3 Written to RAM and EEPROM
E PROM write selection 0
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-A500 and A500L series.
*2 Settings on the GOT can be changed. CONNECTION
When changing the settings on the GOT, be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings. (Via G4)
CC-Link

*6 The setting is required on the inverter side when FR-A5NR is used. 15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

15.5.5 Connecting FREQROL-V500, V500L series
GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.342

Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.160 (Extended function display selection) to
1 [All parameters can be accessed for reading and writing.] before making the parameter settings.
Parameter No.

setting
Stop bit length/data length Data length: 7bit

Pr.119 Pr.333 10
Stop bit length*2 Stop bit length: 1bit

alarm stop.
Communication check
suspension
PU
1 PU operation mode
connector
FR-A5NR 0*3
power on
Link start mode selection*6 ― Pr.340 1 Computer link operation
E2PROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-V500 and V500L series.
*6 The setting is required on the inverter side when FR-A5NR is used.

15.5.6 Connecting FREQROL-E700 series 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
GOT connection
10
destination
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PU connector
MELSECNET/10
FR-E7TR Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549
(RS-485 terminal block)

11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
PU communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 15.5.14 Station number
setting
PU communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps
Data length: 7bit

12
PU communication stop bit length*2 Pr.119 10
CC-Link IE FIELD
PU communication parity check*2 Pr.120 1 Odd
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Number of PU communication retries Pr.121 9999
alarm stop.
Communication check
PU communication check time interval Pr.122 9999
suspension
13
PU communication wait time setting Pr.123 0 0ms
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 1*3 With CR, without LF
Mitsubishi Electric inverter

Protocol selection Pr.549 0*3
protocol
STATION)
Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 1 Network operation mode.
Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 *3 Written to RAM and EEPROM

14
0
CONNECTION
*3 Inverter default values (No need to change) (Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

15.5.7 Connecting FREQROL-D700 series
GOT connection
destination
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549

Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit). Set Pr.160 (User group read selection) to 0 [The
simple mode and extended parameters can be displayed] before making the parameter settings.

setting
Data length: 7bit


alarm stop.
Communication check
suspension
PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 *3 With CR, without LF

1

protocol
Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-D700 series.

15.5.8 Connecting FREQROL-F700/700P series 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
GOT connection
10
destination
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
RS-485 terminal Pr.79, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.340 to Pr.342, Pr.549

simple mode and extended parameters can be displayed] before making the parameter settings. 11
Parameter No.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
PU connector RS-485
PU communication station number/RS-485 15.5.14 Station number

Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31
communication station number setting
PU communication speed/RS-485
12
Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps
communication speed*2
CC-Link IE FIELD
PU communication stop bit length/ Data length: 7bit
CONNECTION
Pr.119 Pr.333 10
RS-485 communication stop bit length*2 Stop bit length: 1bit
NETWORK
PU communication parity check/
Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd
RS-485 communication parity check*2
Number of PU communication retries/

RS-485 communication retry count
Pr.121 Pr.335 9999
alarm stop.
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PU communication check time interval/ Communication check
Pr.122 Pr.336 9999*4
RS-485 communication check time interval suspension
PU communication waiting time setting/

Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms
STATION)
RS-485 communication waiting time setting
PU communication CR/LF selection/

Pr.124 Pr.341 1*3 With CR, without LF
RS-485 communication CR/LF selection

14
Protocol selection ― Pr.549 0*3
protocol
PU
CONNECTION
1 PU operation mode
connector
(Via G4)
CC-Link
RS-485 0*3
power on
PU
Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 connector
0*3 Refer to Pr.79 settings.
15
RS-485 1 Network operation mode.
CONNECTION
INVERTER
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-F700 series.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

HINT
Automatic setting with Pr.999 (FREQROL-F700P series only)
If Pr.999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number] and
[Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication
settings of the GOT side.
Parameter No. Set value Description Operation in parameter setting mode
10 GOT Initial settings (PU connector) [AUTO]→[GOT]→[1]Write

Pr.999*1 GOTInitial settings
11 -
(RS-485 terminal)
*1 When monitoring the value of Pr.999, 9999 is always monitored.

15.5.9 Connecting FREQROL-F700PJ series 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
GOT connection
10
destination
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549
MELSECNET/10
simple mode and extended parameters can be displayed] before making the parameter settings.
communication with the GOT is disabled. 11
CONNECTION
setting
NETWORK
Data length: 7bit

PU communication stop bit length Pr.119 10
Stop bit length: 1bit 12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
alarm stop.
NETWORK
Communication check
suspension
PU communication waiting time setting Pr.123 0 0ms
PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 1 *3 With CR, without LF

13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
protocol

Operation mode selection Pr.79 0*3
STATION)
power on
Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.342 0*3 Written to RAM and EEPROM 14
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-F700 series.
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
HINT 15
Automatic setting with Pr.999
CONNECTION
INVERTER
Pr.999*1 10 GOT Initial settings (PU connector) [AUTO] [GOT] [1]Write

16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION

15.5.10 Connecting FREQROL-A700 series
GOT connection
destination

Parameter No.
PU connector RS-485

Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31
Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps

Pr.119 Pr.333 10

Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd
Number of PU communication retries/ The inverter will not come to an

Pr.121 Pr.335 9999
RS-485 communication retry count alarm stop.

Pr.122 Pr.336 9999*4

Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms


protocol
PU
1 PU operation mode
connector
RS-485 0*3
power on
PU

0
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-A700 series.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
HINT
MELSECNET/H
(1) Automatic setting with Pr.999
If Pr.999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number]
and [Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default
communication settings of the GOT side.
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
10 GOT Initial settings (PU connector) [AUTO] [GOT] [1]Write
MELSECNET/10
Pr.999*1
11 GOT Initial settings (RS-485) ―
(2) Inverters available for automatic batch setting

Parameters are not automatically set in a batch depending on the SERIAL (production number) symbol of the 11
inverter to be used. For details, contact your local distributor.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

15.5.11 Connecting FREQROL-A800/F800 series
The GOT1000 series does not support the automatic connection of inverters.
GOT connection
destination

Set Pr.160 (User group read selection) to 0 [The simple mode and extended parameters can be displayed]
before making the parameter settings.
Parameter No.
PU connector RS-485

Pr.117 Pr.331 0 to 31
Pr.118 Pr.332 192*4 19200bps

Pr.119 Pr.333 10

Pr.120 Pr.334 1 Odd
Number of PU communication retries/ The inverter will not come to an

Pr.121 Pr.335 9999
RS-485 communication retry count alarm stop.

Pr.122 Pr.336 9999*4

Pr.123 Pr.337 0 0ms


protocol
PU
1 PU operation mode
connector
RS-485 0*3
power on
PU

0
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of FREQROL-A800/F800 series.

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
HINT
MELSECNET/H
Automatic setting with Pr.999
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
10 GOT Initial settings (PU connector) [AUTO] [GOT] [1]Write
Pr.999*1
11 GOT Initial settings (RS-485 terminal) ―
11
15.5.12 Connecting a sensorless servo (FREQROL-E700EX series)
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Make the communication settings of the sensorless servo (FREQROL-E700EX series).
12
GOT connection
destination
CC-Link IE FIELD
PU connector
CONNECTION
NETWORK
FR-E7TR Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.340, Pr.342, Pr.549
(RS-485 terminal block)
(2) Communication settings of sensorless servo

13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
setting
PU communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps 14

Data length: 7bit
PU communication parity check*2 Pr.120 1 Odd CONNECTION

(Via G4)
CC-Link

alarm stop.

Communication check
suspension 15
PU communication CR/LF selection Pr.124 1*3 With CR, without LF

CONNECTION
INVERTER

protocol
Communication startup mode selection Pr.340 1 Network operation mode. 16

SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
*3 Sensorless servo (FREQROL-E700EX series) default values (No need to change)

15.5.13 Connecting MD-CX522- K(-A0)
GOT connection
destination
PU connector Pr.79, Pr.117 to Pr.124

• Set the following parameters using the PU (parameter unit).
• After setting the parameters for the communication settings, reset the inverter.
• Do not change these parameters, even though they can be monitored from the GOT. If they are changed,
Communication station number Pr.117 0 to 31 15.5.14 Station number setting
Communication speed*2 Pr.118 192*3 19200bps
Data length: 7bit

Stop bit length/data length*2 Pr.119 10
Parity check presence/absence*2 Pr.120 1 Odd
Number of communication retries Pr.121 9999 The inverter will not come to an alarm stop.
Communication check time interval Pr.122 9999 Communication check suspension
Wait time setting Pr.123 0 0ms
CRLF presence/absence selection Pr.124 1*3 With CR, without LF
*1 Setting items are parameter names described in the manual of MELIPM series.

15.5.14 Station number setting 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Set each station number so that no station number
MELSECNET/H
overlaps.
The station number can be set without regard to the cable
connection order. There is no problem even if station
numbers are not consecutive.
Station
No.3
Station
No.0
Station
No.1
Station
No.21
Station
No.6
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
GOT
Examples of station number setting
(1) Direct specification 11

When setting the device, specify the station number of
the inverter of which data is to be changed.
CONNECTION
Specification range
NETWORK
0 to 31
(2) Indirect specification

When setting the device, indirectly specify the station
12
number of the inverter of which data is to be changed
using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
GD25).
NETWORK
When specifying the station No. from 100 to 155 on GT
Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to
the station No. specification will be the station No. of
the inverter.
13
Specification Compatible
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Setting range
CC-Link CONNECTION
station NO. device
100 GD10
101 GD11
STATION)
102 GD12
103 GD13
14
104 GD14
105 GD15
CONNECTION
106 GD16
0 to 31
107 GD17 For the setting other than the above,
(Via G4)
CC-Link
108 GD18 error (dedicated device is out of range)

will occur.
109
110
GD19
GD20
15
111 GD21
CONNECTION
112 GD22
INVERTER
113 GD23
114 GD24
115 GD25
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT
are as follows.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the
 Inverter (FREQROL 500/700/800 series),
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3. sensorless servo (FREQROL-E700EX)
The device specifications of controllers may differ Device name Setting range
Device No.
depending on the models, even though belonging to the representation
same series. Inverter status RS0: 0 to RS15: 31
Bit device
Please make the setting according to the specifications of monitor (RS)*3 RS0: 100 to RS15: 115
the controller actually used. Decimal
Run command WS0: 0 to RS15: 31
When a non-existent device or a device number outside (WS)*4*5 WS0: 100 to RS15: 115
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings Alarm definition A0: 0 to A7: 31
may not be monitored.
(A)*2*3 A0: 100 to A7: 115
 Setting item Parameter (Pr) Pr0: 0 to 1500: 31
Word device
*1*2 Pr0: 100 to 1500: 115
Decimal
Programmed PG0: 0 to PG89: 31
*1*2 PG0: 100 to PG89: 115
operation(PG)
Special parameter SP108: 0 to SP127: 31
(SP)*2*4*5 SP108: 100 to SP127: 115
*1 When creating the screen, designate only either of

programmed operation (PG) device or parameter (Pr)
device.
Do no designate both PG (PG0 to PG89) and Pr (Pr900 to
Pr905) devices.
*2 Only 16-bit (1-word) designation is possible.
Item Description *4 Precautions for PU operation mode
When the GOT is connected to the PU connector and the
operation mode is set to the PU operation mode, the multi-
The bit number can be set only by specifying the bit of word speed operation (W3 to W7, SP121, SP122) cannot be used.
device. For using the multi-speed operation, follow either of the
Monitors the inverter of the specified station No. operations as below.
• Connect the GOT to the RS-485 terminal and set the
Device 0 to 31: To monitor the inverter of the specified
operation mode to the NET operation mode (Computer
Station station No. link operation mode), and then operate the inverter.
No. 100 to 115: To specify the station No. of the inverter • Change the motor speed with the set frequency (SP109,
to be monitored by the value of GOT data register SP110), and then operate the inverter with the forward or
(GD).*1 reverse rotation (WS1, WS2, SP121, SP122).
Displays the device type and setting range which are *5 Precautions for WS devices
Information Only writing is possible for WS devices.
selected in [Device].
More than one WS cannot turn on at once.
*1 The following shows the relation between the inverter station (Except the turned on WS device, the other WS devices turn
numbers and the GOT data register. off.)
Bits of SP122 (word device) and SP121 (word device) are
Station assigned to WS0 to WS7 and WS8 to WS15 respectively.
GOT data register (GD) Setting range
No. When more than one WS turns on at once, convert the
values for the bit devices that are assigned to the word
100 GD10 0 to 31 device into values for the word device. Write the converted
101 GD11 (If setting a value values into SP122 or SP121.
outside the • Setting High speed operation command (WS5), Middle
: :
range above, a speed operation command (WS4), and Low speed
114 GD24 operation command (WS3)
device range
115 GD25 When setting High speed operation command (WS5),
error occurs)
Middle speed operation command (WS4), and Low speed
operation command (WS3), write numerical values to
(1) Setting the device by inputting directly from the device SP122 as necessary.
keyboard As the following figure shows, each operation mode is
When setting the device by inputting directly from the assigned to device SP122.
keyboard, set the items as follows. The following shows an example for Forward rotation
command (WS1) and Low speed operation command
(WS3).
Station No.
Device number
Device name

9
WS4: Middle speed operation command(RM)

Device name Description*1
WS5: High speed operation command(RH)
WS3: Low speed operation command(RL)

WS2: Reverse rotation command(STR)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
WS1: Forward rotation command(STF)
RS0 Inverter running (RUN)
WS6: Second function selection(RT)
WS0: Current input selection(AU)
MELSECNET/H
RS1 Forward rotation (STF)
WS7: Output stop(MRS)

RS2 Reverse rotation (STR)
RS3 Up to frequency (SU)
RS4 Overload (OL)
RS5 Instantaneous power failure (IPF) 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
RS6 Frequency detection (FU)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device SP122 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
MELSECNET/10
RS7 Fault (ABC1)
b15 b7 b0
Write 1 to the bits of device SP122 that correspond to the RS8 ABC2
Forward rotation command (WS1) and Low speed RS9 -
operation command (WS3).
In this example, device SP122 must store 000AH. RS10 -
Convert 000AH to a decimal value (10), and then write 10
to device SP122.
RS11 - 11
• Setting the JOG operation command (WS8), Selection of RS12 -
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
command (WS9), Start self-holding selection command RS13 -
(WS10), and Reset command (WS11)
RS14 -
CONNECTION
When setting the above commands, write values to device
NETWORK
SP121 as necessary. As shown in the figure below, each RS15 Fault occurrence
operation mode is assigned to a bit of device SP121. The
following shows an example of setting the Reset *1 The description (function of input terminal) may be changed
by the parameter of the inverter side. Check the function of
command (WS11).
the inverter used.
12
WS10: Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (CS)
Inverter User's Manual (Application) Communication

operation and setting
CC-Link IE FIELD
(2) Run command
CONNECTION
An example with FREQROL-A700 series is shown
NETWORK
below. For the setting items of other than the
FREQROL-A700 series, refer to the following manual.
User's Manual of the used inverter
WS9: Start self-holding selection (STOP)
(Communication function (Setting item and set 13

data))
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
WS8: JOG operation (JOG)
Device name Description*1

WS11: Reset (RES)
WS15: Not used
WS14: Not used
WS13: Not used
WS12: Not used
WS0 Current input selection (AU)
STATION)
WS1 Forward rotation command (STF)
WS2 Reverse rotation command (STR)
Device SP121 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
WS3 Low speed operation command (RL) 14
b15 b7 b0 WS4 Middle speed operation command (RM)
Write 1 to the bit of device SP121 that corresponds to the WS5 High speed operation command (RH)
CONNECTION
Reset command (WS11). In this example, device SP121
must store 0800H. Convert 0800H to a decimal value WS6 Second function selection (RT)
(2048), and then write 2048 to device SP121.When using
(Via G4)
CC-Link
WS7 Output stop (MRS)

a WS device, [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used.
Use [Momentary], [Set], and [Reset] for bit switch actions. *2 Jog operation (JOG)
WS8
When using a WS device, [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot
be used.
Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit switch. WS9*2
Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous 15
power failure (CS)
The following shows correspondences between virtual
inverter devices used in the GOT and data of the WS10*2 Start self-holding (STOP)
CONNECTION
inverter. WS11*2 Reset (RES)

INVERTER
(1) Inverter status monitor WS12 -

An example with FREQROL-A700 series is shown WS13 -
below. For the setting items of other than the
FREQROL-A700 series, refer to the following manual.
WS14 -
16
WS15 -
User's Manual of the used inverter
SERVO AMPLIFIER
(communication function (setting item and set *1 The data (function of input terminal) may be changed by the
parameter of the inverter side. Check the function of the
CONNECTION
data)) inverter used.

Inverter User's Manual (Application) Communication
operation and setting

*2 Write a value to parameter Pr.185, Pr.186, Pr.188, or Pr.189 Device name Description
that corresponds to a signal within parentheses. Doing so
issues the corresponding run command (WS8 to WS11). For PG30 to PG39 Program set 2 (running frequency)
the details of the inverter rameters, refer to the following.
PG40 to PG49*1 Program set 2 (time)
Manual of the inverter used
PG50 to PG59 Program set 2 (rotation direction)
(3) Alarm definition PG60 to PG69 Program set 3 (running frequency)
*1 Program set 3 (time)
PG70 to PG79
Device name*1 Description
A0 Second alarm in past
*1 To set the start time (PG10 to PG19, PG40 to PG49, PG70
A1 Latest alarm to PG79), set hour or minute in the upper 8bits, and minute
or second in the lower 8bits.
A2 Fourth alarm in past Example) To set 13 hour 35 minute
A3 Third alarm in past
Time to be set 13H 35M Remark
A4 Sixth alarm in past
Convert "hour" and "minute"
H0D H23 HEX
A5 Fifth alarm in past into hexadecimal.
A6 Eighth alarm in past Combine upper and lower 8-

Input H0D23 or 3363. -
bit values.
A7 Seventh alarm in past
*1 Only reading is possible for A0 to A7. (6) Special parameter

These devices cannot be used for a write object (numerical input etc.). The numbers of the inverter’s virtual devices (SP) used
(4) Parameter for the GOT correspond to instruction codes of the
The numbers of virtual devices for inverter (parameter inverter communication function.
(Pr)), used by GOT, correspond to the inverter For instruction details, and values to be read and
parameter numbers. written, refer to the following,
For the inverter parameters, refer to the following. Manual of the inverter used
Manual of the inverter being used
Instruction
Device
Description code
name
POINT Read Write
SP108 Second parameter changing 6CH ECH
(1) Monitoring Pr.37 SP109 *1 Set frequency (RAM) 6DH EDH
GOT cannot monitor the parameter (Pr.37) of
SP110*1 Set frequency (RAM, E2PROM) 6EH EEH
FREQROL-E500/S500(E)/F500J/D700/F700PJ/
*1*2 Output frequency 6FH -
E700. SP111
(2) When setting "8888" or "9999" to inverter parameter (Pr) SP112*2 Output current 70H -
"8888" and "9999" designate special function. SP113*2 Output voltage 71H -
To set these numbers from GOT, designate a *2
SP114 Special monitor 72H -
number as shown below.
SP115 Special monitor selection No. 73H F3H
Set value of inverter side Value specified by GOT
Alarm definition all clear - F4H
8888 65520 SP116
Latest alarm, second alarm in past 74H -
9999 65535
SP117 Third alarm in past, fourth alarm in past 75H -
(3) Precautions for setting calibration parameter SP118 Fifth alarm in past, sixth alarm in past 76H -
(Pr900 to Pr905)
Seventh alarm in past, eights alarm in
When setting a calibration parameter (Pr900 to SP119
past
77H -
Pr905), it is necessary to set the value below for
Inverter status monitor (extended)
extension second parameter (SP108), depending on SP121 79H F9H
Run command (extend)
the device number to be used and the inverter model.
Inverter status monitor 7AH -
Value to be set to extension SP122
Description Run command - FAH
second parameter (SP108)
H00 Offset/gain SP123 Communication mode 7BH FBH
H01 Analog SP124*3 All parameter clear - FCH

H02 Analog value at terminal SP125*3 Inverter reset - FDH
SP127 Link parameter extended setting 7FH FFH
*1 GOT cannot monitor SP109 to SP111 if the conditions below

(5) Programmed operation are satisfied at the same time.
(Only FREQROL-E500/S500(E)/F500J/D700/F700PJ/E700
The devices below correspond to the parameters series)
(Pr.201 to Pr.230) of FREQROL-A500 series. • Pr37 0
• SP127 = 1
Device name Description *2 Only reading is possible for SP111 to SP114.
These devices cannot be used for a write object (numerical
PG0 to PG9 Program set 1 (running frequency) input etc.).
*3 Only writing is possible for SP124 and SP125.
PG10 to PG19*1 Program set 1 (time)
These devices cannot be used for read object.

9
15.7 Precautions
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
 Station No. of inverter system
Make sure to establish inverter system with No.0
station.
 Number of inverter 10
Up to 31 inverters can be connected.
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
For GT11 and GT10, refer to the following manual for
MELSECNET/10
the procedure to check the connectable inverter
depending on the version.
GT11 User's Manual, GT10 User's Manual

Number of connect-
able Inverter
11
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
CONNECTION
NETWORK
GT1050-QBBD B or earlier 10 12
GT1045-QSBD
A or later 31
GT1040-QBBD
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
E or later 31
GT1020-L D
D or earlier 10 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
 Parameter setting
(1) Communication parameter change
STATION)
Do not make any change for each communication
parameter of the inverter side from GOT.
If changed, the communication to the inverter cannot
be made.
14
(2) When setting "8888" or "9999" to inverter parameter
(Pr)
"8888" and "9999" designate special function. When CONNECTION
specifying from the GOT, it will be as follows.
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Set value of inverter side Value specified by GOT
8888 65520 15
9999 65535
CONNECTION
 Screen switching devices, system

INVERTER
information devices
Make sure to use GD for screen switching devices and
system information devices when the GOT is
connected to only the inverter.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
 GOT clock control

CONNECTION
Since the inverter does not have a clock function, the

settings of [time adjusting] or [time broad cast] by GOT
clock control will be disabled.

15.7 Precautions
15.7 Precautions
16
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SERVO AMPLIFIER
MELSECNET/10
16.
CONNECTION 11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
16.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 15 13
16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 17
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 20
STATION)
16.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 58
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION
16 - 1
16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION

Communication
type
MR-J2S- A
RS-232
MELSERVO-J2-Super MR-J2S- CP 16.2.1
RS-422
MR-J2S- CL
MR-J2M-P8A RS-232
MELSERVO-J2M 16.2.2
MR-J2M- DU RS-422
MR-J3- A RS-232
MELSERVO-J3
RS-422
MR-J3- T
16.2.3
MR-J4- A RS-232
MELSERVO-J4*1 *2 *2
MR-J4- A-RJ RS-422
MELSERVO-JE MR-JE- A RS-422 16.2.4
*1 For the RS-422 communication, use MELSERVO-J4 of software version A3 or a later version.
*2 The GT15 and GT11 cannot be connected to MR-J4- A-RJ.
16 - 2 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
16.2.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series
 When connecting via RS-232 communication

Servo
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
GOT
amplifier
MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE
MELSECNET/10
MITSUBISHI Connection cable
CHARGE
Servo amplifier Connection cable GOT Number of

11
Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Series name Option device Model equipment
GT15-RS2-9P
CONNECTION
MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m)
NETWORK
or 15m
-
RS-232 connection diagram 1) (Built into GOT)
MELSERVO-
RS-232
MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m)
1 GOT for
1 servo
12
J2-Super*1
amplifier
or RS-232 -
+ 15m
RS-232 connection (Built into GOT)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
diagram 1)
NETWORK
-
RS-232 connection diagram 3) 15m
(Built into GOT)
*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3.
 When connecting via RS-422 communication 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Servo Servo
amplifier amplifier MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE
STATION)
CHARGE CHARGE
GOT
14
Connection cable
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
Servo amplifier Connection cable GOT

Series name
Communication
type
Connection diagram
number
Option device Model distance equipment
15
RS-422 connection - (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
CONNECTION
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
INVERTER
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 Up to 32 axes for 1

MELSERVO-J2-Super RS-422 connection GOT
RS-422 GT15-RS4-9S 30m
*1 diagram 2) (multi-drop
- (Built into GOT)

communication)
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
RS-422 connection - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION
diagram 7)
16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 - 3

16.2.2 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M Series

Servo
GOT
amplifier
Connection cable

Communication Cable model Max. connectable
GT15-RS2-9P
MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m)
or 15m
-
(Built into GOT)
MELSERVO 1 GOT for
-J2M RS-232 MR-CPCATCBL3M(3m) 1 servo
*1
or amplifier
RS-232 -
+ 15m
RS-232 connection connection diagram 2) (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
-
RS-232 connection diagram 3) 15m
(Built into GOT)

Servo Servo
amplifier amplifier
MITSUBISHI
CHARGE
GOT
Connection cable

Communication Connection diagram Max. connectable
RS-422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
MELSERVO-J2M RS-422 connection 0 to 31 stations
RS-422 30m GT15-RS4-9S
*1 diagram 2) for 1 GOT
- (Built into GOT)
RS-422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 7)

16.2.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
 When connecting to one servo amplifier
MELSECNET/H
Servo RS-422/232 MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE

GOT
amplifier converter
10
Connection cable
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
Number of
Series name
RS-422/232 interface
converter Communication
Cable model
Connection diagram
Max.
Option device Model
connectable 11
RS-422/232 conversion type distance equipment
number
cable
GT15-RS2-9P
CONNECTION
NETWORK
- 15m
DSV-CABV(1.5m)*2
- (Built into GOT)
or RS-232
FA-T-RS40VS *3
12
RS-232 connection
diagram 2)
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
MELSERVO- GT16-C02R4-9S 1 GOT for
NETWORK
J4*1, J3*1 (0.2m) 1 servo amplifier
GT15-RS2T4-9P*4
RS-422 connection
- RS-422
diagram 3)
30m
GT15-RS4-9S
13
- (Built into GOT)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
RS-422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 8)
STATION)
*2 DSV-CABV is a product manufactured by Diatrend Corporation. For details, contact Diatrend Corporation.
*3 FA-T-RS40VS is a product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
14
The cables (RS-PCATCBL-0.5M(0.5m), RS-422SCBL-2M(2m)) are packed together.
Use the provided cables to connect devices.
CONNECTION
* FA-T-RS40VS stopped being produced at the end of March, 2013. The replacement product is not produced.
*4 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . (Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

 When connecting to multiple servo amplifiers (RS-422 connection)
Servo Servo
amplifier amplifier
Connection Connection Connection

Terminating Distributor Distributor
Servo amplifier cable cable cable GOT
cable *2 *2 Number of
1) 2) 3) Max.
connectable
Connection Connection Connection Connection distance
Series Communication Option equipment
diagram diagram Model name diagram Model name diagram Model
name type device
number number number number
GT16-
C02R4-
9S(0.2m)
GT15-
RS2T4-
RS-422 9P*1
connection
diagram 3) GT15-
MELS RS-422 RS-422 RS-422 RS4-9S
ERVO- connection connection connection Up to 32
BMJ-8 BMJ-8
RS-422 diagram 6) diagram 5) diagram 4) 30m axes for
J4*1, (Recommended) (Recommended)
1 GOT
J3*1 - (Built
into
GOT)
RS-422
connection - (Built
diagram 8) into
GOT)


9
 When connecting to multiple servo amplifiers (RS-232 connection)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
Servo Servo
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
amplifier amplifier
MELSECNET/10
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) 11
RS-422/232
CONNECTION
converter
NETWORK
12
CC-Link IE FIELD
Connection Connection Connection
RS-422/232
CONNECTION
Servo Terminating Distributor Distributor
cable cable cable GOT
amplifier cable converter*2
NETWORK
*3 *3 interface Number of
1) 2) 3) Max.
connectable
Connection Connection Connection Connection distance
Series Model Communication Option equipment
diagram diagram Model name diagram Model name diagram Model
name
number number number
name type
number
device
13
GT15-
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
RS2-
9P
STATION)
- -
MELSE RS-422 RS-422 RS-422
FA-T- (Built Up to 32
RVO- connection connection connection
*1
J4 , diagram 6) diagram 5)
BMJ-8
BMJ-8
(Recommended)
RS40 RS-232 into
GOT)
30m axes for 14
VS 1 GOT
J3*1
RS-232 - CONNECTION
connection (Built
(Via G4)
CC-Link
diagram 2) into
GOT)
*1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. 15

*2 FA-T-RS40VS is a product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For detail of this
product, contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
The cables (RS-PCATCBL-0.5M(0.5m), RS-422SCBL-2M(2m)) are packed together.
CONNECTION
Use the cables packed together to connect.

INVERTER
* FA-T-RS40VS stopped being produced at the end of March, 2013. The replacement product is not produced.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

16.2.4 Connecting to the MELSERVO-JE Series

Servo Servo
amplifier amplifier
CHARGE CHARGE
GOT
Connection cable

Communication Connection diagram distance equipment
Series name Option device Model
type number
RS-422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 9)
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
RS-422 connection Up to 32 axes for 1 GOT
MELSERVO-JE*1 RS-422 GT15-RS4-9S 30m
diagram 10) (multi-drop communication)
- (Built into GOT)
RS-422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 11)

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
GOT and the servo amplifier.
 Precautions when preparing cable
16.3.1 RS-232 cable (1) Cable length
The length of the cable RS-232 must be 15m or less.
10
 Connection diagram (2) GOT side connector
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
RS-232 connection diagram 1) 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
Connector for interface unit's or
GOT side servo amplifier's CN3
CD/NC*1 1 Plate FG
SD(TXD) 3 2 RXD 11
- 9 1 LG
RD(RXD) 2 12 TXD
CONNECTION
SG 5 11 LG
NETWORK
RS(RTS) 7
CS(CTS) 8
DR(DSR) 6 12
ER(DTR) 4
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
GOT side Connection cable side
SD(TXD) 1 3 TXD
RD(RXD) 2 2 RXD 13
ER(DTR) 3 1 -
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
DR(DSR) 4 4 DTR
SG 5 5 GND
STATION)
RS(RTS) 6 6 DSR
CS(CTS) 7 7 RTS
NC 8 8 CTS 14
NC 9 9 -
CONNECTION
RS-232 connection diagram 3) (Via G4)
CC-Link
Connector for interface unit's or

GOT side servo amplifier's CN3
SD(TXD) 1 2 RXD
15
RD(RXD) 2 1 LG
ER(DTR) 3 12 TXD
CONNECTION
DR(DSR) 4 11 LG
INVERTER
SG 5 Plate FG
RS(RTS) 6
CS(CTS) 7
16
NC 8
SERVO AMPLIFIER
NC 9
CONNECTION

16.3.2 RS-422 cable
Connector for Connector for Connector for
interface unit's interface unit's interface unit's
or or or
1st axis servo 2nd axis servo 32nd axis (last axis)*1
GOT side amplifier's CN3 amplifier's CN3 servo amplifier's CN3
SDP SDP
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 9 9 9 SDP
SDN SDN
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 19 19 19 SDN
RDP RDP
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 5 5 5 RDP
RDN RDN
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 15 15 15 RDN
LG LG
SG 13 11 11 11 LG
LG LG
RSA(RTS+) 9 1 1 1 LG
TRE TRE
RSB(RTS-) 10 10 10 10 TRE
SD SD
CSA(CTS+) 11 Plate Plate Plate SD
CSB(CTS-) 12
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
SDB2(TXD2-) 6
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
NC 14
Shell
*1 At the last axis, connect TRE to RDN.

or or or
1st axis servo 2nd axis servo 32nd axis (last axis)
GOT side amplifier's CN3 amplifier's CN3 servo amplifier's CN3 *1
SDP SDP
RXD+(RDA) 2 9 9 9 SDP
SDN SDN
RXD-(RDB) 7 19 19 19 SDN
RDP RDP
TXD+(SDA) 1 5 5 5 RDP
RDN RDN
TXD-(SDB) 6 15 15 15 RDN
LG LG
SG(GND) 5 11 11 11 LG
LG LG
RTS+(RSA) 3 1 1 1 LG
TRE TRE
RTS-(RSB) 8 10 10 10 TRE
SD SD
CTS+(CSA) 4 Plate Plate Plate SD
CTS-(CSB) 9

RS-422 connection diagram 3) RS-422 connection diagram 6)
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Modular connector Distributor side
(Servo amplifier side/ (Modular connector)
MELSECNET/H
GOT side Distributor side)
LG 1
SDA 1 3 RDP
RDA 2 5 SDP P5D 2
RDP 3
10
RSA 3 2 P5D
SDN 4 *1
CSA 4 7 LG
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SG 5 1 LG SDP 5
MELSECNET/10
SDB 6 6 RDN RDN 6
RDB 7 4 SDN LG 7
RSB 8 8 NC NC 8
CSB
11
9
*1 Perform terminal processing on the part between RDP (3-
FG - pin) and RDN (6-pin) with a 150 resistor.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Distributor side Distributor side
(Modular connector) (Modular connector)
LG 1 1 LG
12
P5D 2 2 P5D
RDP 3 3 RDP
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
SDN 4 4 SDN
NETWORK
SDP 5 5 SDP
RDN 6 6 RDN
LG 7 7 LG
13
NC 8 8 NC
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
STATION)
Servo amplifier side Distributor side
(Modular connector) (Modular connector)
*1
LG 1 1 LG 14
P5D 2 2 P5D
RDP 3 3 RDP
SDN 4 4 SDN CONNECTION

(Via G4)
CC-Link
SDP 5 5 SDP
RDN 6 6 RDN
LG 7 7 LG 15
NC 8 8 NC
CONNECTION
*1Make the wiring between the distributor and servo amplifier as short as
INVERTER
possible.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

or or or
1st axis servo 2nd axis servo 32nd axis (last axis) 1
*
SDP SDP SDP
RXD+(RDA) 9 9 9
SDN SDN SDN
RXD-(RDB) 19 19 19
RDP RDP RDP
TXD+(SDA) 5 5 5
RDN RDN RDN
TXD-(SDB) 15 15 15
LG LG LG
SG(GND) 11 11 11
LG LG LG
RTS+(RSA) 1 1 1
TRE TRE TRE
RTS-(RSB) 10 10 10
CTS+(CSA) Plate Plate Plate
CTS-(CSB)

Modular connector
(Servo amplifier side/
GOT side Distributor side)
TXD+(SDA) 1 3 RDP
TXD-(SDB) 2 6 RDN
RXD+(RDA) 3 5 SDP
RXD-(RDB) 4 4 SDN
SG 5 1 LG
RTS+(RSA) 6 7 LG
RTS-(RSB) 7 2 P5D
CTS+(CSA) 8 8 NC
CTS-(CSB) 9

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
or or or
1st axis servo 2nd axis servo 32nd axis (last axis)*1
SDP SDP
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 13 13 13 SDP
SDN SDN
RDB1(RXD1-) 4
RDP
14
RDP
14 14 SDN
10
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 39 39 39 RDP
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
RDN RDN
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 40 40 40 RDN
MELSECNET/10
LG LG
SG 13 3,28 3,28 3,28 LG
LG LG
RSA(RTS+) 9 30,34 30,34 30,34 LG
TRE TRE
RSB(RTS-) 10 31 31 31 TRE
CSA(CTS+) 11
SD
Plate
SD
Plate Plate SD 11
CSB(CTS-) 12
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
CONNECTION
SDB2(TXD2-) 6
NETWORK
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
NC 14 12
Shell
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
NETWORK
13
or or or
1st axis servo 2nd axis servo 32nd axis (last axis)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
servo amplifier's CN1 *1
CC-Link CONNECTION
GOT side amplifier's CN1 amplifier's CN1
SDP SDP
RXD+(RDA) 2 13 13 13 SDP
SDN SDN
RXD-(RDB) 7 14 14 14 SDN
STATION)
RDP RDP
TXD+(SDA) 1 39 39 39 RDP
RDN RDN
TXD-(SDB) 6
LG
40
LG
40 40 RDN
14
SG(GND) 5 3,28 3,28 3,28 LG
LG LG
RTS+(RSA) 3 30,34 30,34 30,34 LG
CONNECTION
TRE TRE
RTS-(RSB) 8 31 31 31 TRE
SD SD (Via G4)
CC-Link
CTS+(CSA) 4 Plate Plate Plate SD
CTS-(CSB) 9

15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

or or or
1st axis servo 2nd axis servo 32nd axis (last axis) 1
*
SDP SDP SDP
RXD+(RDA) 13 13 13
SDN SDN SDN
RXD-(RDB) 14 14 14
RDP RDP RDP
TXD+(SDA) 39 39 39
RDN RDN RDN
TXD-(SDB) 40 40 40
LG LG LG
SG(GND) 3,28 3,28 3,28
LG LG LG
RTS+(RSA) 30,34 30,34 30,34
TRE TRE TRE
RTS-(RSB) 31 31 31
CTS+(CSA) Plate Plate Plate
CTS-(CSB)
Name Model name Specifications Manufacturer

 Precautions when preparing cable Connector
TM10P-88P
RJ45 connector
HIROSE ELECTRIC
(Plug) CO.,LTD.
(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-422 cable must be 30m or less. Modular HAKKO ELECTRIC
ceiling rosette BMJ-8 - CO.,LTD.
(2) GOT side connector (Distributor) TEL(03)-3806-9171
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Cable conforming
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications Cable -
to EIA568
-
(such as cable
(3) Servo amplifier connector 10BASE-T)
Use the connector compatible with the servo amplifier.
See the technical data of the servo amplifier to
be used. (1) GOT side
(a) Servo amplifier connector specifications When connecting a servo amplifier to the GOT, a
• Pin layout in the Modular connector terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT.
When seen from the front of the servo amplifier (a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
(receptacle side) Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
GOT main unit to "No".
to the following.
Modular jack 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
Pin No. Signal name Remark

1 LG
2 P5D
3 RDP
4 SDN
5 SDP
6 RDN
7 LG
8 NC
• Connector of cable between MELSERVO Series

servo amplifiers
Use the commercial connectors and cables
shown in the table below or the comparable
products.
(Refer to the manual for the servo amplifier.)

9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
2.
3. 11
4.
CONNECTION
Transmission
NETWORK
communication with the connected 38400bps,
Speed
equipment. 57600bps
Set this item when change the data length
Data Bit
used for communication with the
8bit (fixed) 12
(Default: 8bit)
Click! Specify the stop bit length for
CC-Link IE FIELD
Stop Bit communications. 1bit (fixed)
CONNECTION
(Default: 1bit)
NETWORK
Specify whether or not to perform a parity
check, and how it is performed during
Parity
communication.
Even (fixed)
(Default: Even)
menu.
Set the number of retries to be performed 13
Retry when a communication timeout occurs. 0 to 5times
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
(Default: 3times)
CC-Link CONNECTION
channel to be used from the list menu. Set the time period for a communication to
Timeout Time time out. 3 to 30sec
3. Set the following items. (Default: 3sec)
STATION)
Specify the station number of the servo
Host Address amplifier in the system configuration. 0 to 31
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller (Default: 0)
• I/F: Interface to be used Delay Time
0 to 300 (ms)
14
the GOT.
• Driver: MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE (Default: 0ms)
Specify whether to use the station No.
Station No.
during communication. CONNECTION
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. If [Yes] is selected, the station No. is fixed Yes or No
Selection (Via G4)
CC-Link
to "0."
Make the settings according to the usage (Default: Yes)
environment.
16.4.2 Communication detail settings 15
POINT
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. (1) Communication interface setting by Utility
CONNECTION

INVERTER
POINT changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]

The settings of connecting equipment can be data.
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details on the Utility, refer to the following
manual.
16
GT User's Manual
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION


HINT
controller
(Fundamentals)

9
16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/H
Model name Refer to
MELSERVO-J2-Super Series 16.5.1 POINT

MELSERVO-J2M Series 16.5.2
MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series 16.5.3

(1) Parameter setting
Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
provided on the operation section of the servo
16.5.1 Connecting to the amplifier or setup software.
MELSECNET/10
MELSERVO-J2-Super Series
Pushbutton switch
provided on the operation
POINT
MODE UP DOWN SET
section of the servo amplifier
11
(2) When changing the parameter
MELSERVO-J2-Super Series
Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective
For details of the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series, refer the new parameter.
CONNECTION
NETWORK
See the technical manual for the MELSERVO-
J2-Super Series servo amplifiers.
12
 Parameters of MELSERVO-J2-Super Series
Enter the parameters of the MELSERVO-J2-Super
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
Series.
NETWORK
Item Set value
Station number setting: 0 to 31
Basic parameter No. 15
(Default: 0)*1
Serial communication function selection
13
(Default: 0000)
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Basic parameter No. 16
(3) (2) 0 (1)
(1) Serial communication baud rate
STATION)
selection*2
0: 9600bps
1: 19200bps
Basic parameter No. 16 2: 38400bps 14
3: 57600bps
(2) Serial communication I/F selection
0: RS-232
CONNECTION
1: RS-422
(3) Communication response delay time (Via G4)
CC-Link
selection
0: Invalid
1: Valid (Response after 800 s or longer
delay) 15
Function selection 8
In case of MR-J2S- :
(Default: 0000)*3
Expansion parameter 2 No. 53
Expansion parameter 2 No. 53 or No. 57
CONNECTION
In case of MR-J2S- CP:

0 (1) 0 0
INVERTER

(1) Station No. selection for protocol
In case of MR-J2S- CL:
0: With station No.
1: Without station No.
*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other

axes.
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to

the following.
CONNECTION

*3 To change the set value, enter "000E" to basic parameter
No. 19.

16.5.2 Connecting to the
MELSERVO-J2M Series POINT
(1) Parameter setting
POINT
MELSERVO-J2M Series amplifier or setup software.
For details of the MELSERVO-J2M Series, refer to the
following manual.
Pushbutton switch
See the technical manual for the MELSERVO- provided on the operation
J2M Series servo amplifiers. section of the servo amplifier
MODE UP DOWN SET

 Parameter of MELSERVO-J2M Series Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective
Enter the parameters of the MELSERVO-J2M Series. the new parameter.
Item Set value

(Default: 0000)
Basic IFU parameter No. 0
(3) (2) 0 (1)
(1) Serial communication baud rate selection*1

0: 9600bps
1: 19200bps
Basic IFU parameter 2: 38400bps
No. 0 3: 57600bps
(2) Serial communication I/F selection
0: RS-232
1: RS-422
(3) Communication response delay time
selection
0: Invalid
delay)
Interface unit serial communication station No.
Basic IFU parameter
selection:
No. 10
0 to 31 (Default: 0) *2
Basic IFU parameter Slot 1 serial communication station No. selection:

No. 11 0 to 31 (Default: 1) *2

No. 12 0 to 31 (Default: 2) *2

No. 13 0 to 31 (Default: 3) *2

No. 14 0 to 31 (Default: 4) *2

No. 15 0 to 31 (Default: 5) *2

No. 16 0 to 31 (Default: 6) *2

No. 17 0 to 31 (Default: 7) *2

No. 18 0 to 31 (Default: 8) *2

For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to
the following.
units.

16.5.3 Connecting to the 16.5.4 Station number setting 9
MELSERVO-J4,J3,JE Series
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Set each station number so that no station number
MELSECNET/H
overlaps.
The station number can be set without regard to the cable
POINT connection order. There is no problem even if station
numbers are not consecutive.
MELSERVO-J4, J3, JE Series Station Station Station Station Station 10
For details of the MELSERVO-J4, J3, JE Series, refer NO.3 NO.0 NO.1 NO.21 NO. 6
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
MELSECNET/10
See the technical manual for the MELSERVO- GOT
J4, J3, JE Series servo amplifiers.
 Parameters of MELSERVO-J4, J3, JE Series Examples of station number setting
Enter the parameters of the MELSERVO-J4, J3, JE (1) Direct specification 11

When setting the device, specify the station number of
Series.
the servo amplifier of which data is to be changed.
Item Set value
CONNECTION
Specification
NETWORK
Basic parameter Station number setting: 0 to 31
range
No. PC20 (Default: 0)*1
0 to 31
(Default: 0000)
(2) Indirect specification 12
Basic parameter No. PC21 When setting the device, indirectly specify the station
(2) (1) number of the inverter of which data is to be changed
CC-Link IE FIELD
(1) Serial communication baud rate selection*2 using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to
CONNECTION
0: 9600bps GD25).
NETWORK
Basic parameter 1: 19200bps When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on GT
No. PC21 2: 38400bps Designer3,the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to
3: 57600bps the station No.specification will be the station No.of the
4: 115200bps
(2) Communication response delay time
servo amplifier. 13
selection
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Specification Compatible
CC-Link CONNECTION
0: Invalid Setting range
station NO. device
delay) 100 GD10
STATION)
101 GD11
axes. 102 GD12
14
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to 103 GD13
the following.
104 GD14
(Communication settings) 105 GD15
106 GD16
107 GD17 0 to 31 CONNECTION
POINT For the setting other than the above, a (Via G4)
CC-Link
108 GD18 communication timeout error will occur.

(1) Parameter setting 109 GD19
110 GD20
15
111 GD21
amplifier or setup software.
112 GD22
CONNECTION
113 GD23
INVERTER
Pushbutton switch 114 GD24

provided on the operation 115 GD25
MODE UP DOWN SET
section of the servo amplifier

(3) All station specification 16
Target station differs depending on write-in operation or
Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective
SERVO AMPLIFIER
read-out operation.
the new parameter. • For write-in operation, all station will be a target.
CONNECTION
• For read-out operation, only one station will be a

target.

The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT
are as follows. (a) Device Definition dialog box
When setting a device on the Device dialog box and
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3. click the [Device Definition...] button, the
correspondence between the GOT virtual device for a
The device specifications of controllers may differ
servo amplifier and the definition of the servo amplifier
depending on the models, even though belonging to the
same series. is displayed.
Please make the setting according to the specifications of 1. 2. 3. 3.
the controller actually used.
When a non-existent device or a device number outside
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings
may not be monitored.
(1) Servo amplifier
4. 5. 6.
The device can be searched with the servo definition or
other items on this dialog box to set a device.
1. Select a key item for searching.
Item Description Function Name Search: Select this item when
Set the device name, device number, and bit number. searching a device with the function name.
The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device. Text Search: Select this item when searching a device
Clicking the button displays the dialog box indicating with the character string.
Device
the correspondence between the GOT virtual device
for a servo amplifier and the definition of servo
2. Select and input a key item for searching.
amplifier. 3. Click the [Search] button.
If selecting an item on the displayed dialog box,
remember that the servo amplifier definition is
4. The items that matches to the specified condition are
displayed in the text box below.
displayed.
The display contents are as follows.
Informat Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in
ion [Device]. Device : The GOT virtual device for a servo
amplifier is displayed.
Set the monitor target of the set device.
Definition : The definition of the servo amplifier is
Select this item when writing data to all servo displayed.
amplifiers connected. Symbol : The abbreviated name for the servo
During a monitoring, the servo amplifier of Station amplifier is displayed.
No. 0 is monitored.
All
When inputting data by Numerical Input, the data is 5. Select a device to be set.
written to all servo amplifiers connected during
inputting; the servo amplifier of Station No. 0 is
6. Clicking the [OK] button reflects the device selected
by step 4 to the Device dialog box.
monitored during other than inputting (displaying).
Network Select this item when monitoring the servo amplifier
of the Station No. specified. POINT
After selecting, set station numbers of servo
amplifiers in the following range.
When selecting [All] in the Network setting
0 to 31:
Selection
The servo amplifier of the Station No. specified will The network No. 0 and Station No. FF are displayed on
be monitored. Device List and when printing.
100 to 115: (Device List screen)
Specify the Station No. of the servo amplifier to be
monitored with a GOT data register (GD).*1
For details of *1, refer to the following.
Station No. GOT data register (GD) Setting range
100 GD10
101 GD11 0 to 31
(If setting a value out
: :
of the range above, a
114 GD24 timeout error occurs.)
115 GD25

(2) MELSERVO-J2M-P8A
9
POINT
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device
MELSECNET/H
No.
Monitoring servo amplifier Device name *2 Setting range available
represent
Carefully read the manual of servo amplifier to be ation
connected and fully understand the operating
Servo amplifier request
procedures before monitoring. SP1 to SP2
Bit device
(SP)
Before operation, check the parameter settings.
Improper settings may cause some machines to
10
Operation mode selection
OM0 to OM4
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
perform unexpected operation. (OM)
The parameter settings must not be changed
MELSECNET/10
Basic parameter
excessively. Operation will be insatiable. Expansion parameter
PRM0 to PRM29
(1) Parameters with * in front of it's abbreviated name (PRM) *1
PRM1000 to PRM1029
For the parameter with * in front of it's abbreviated
Status display (ST) ST0 to ST2
name, powering off the servo amplifier after setting
Word device
AL0
then on makes the parameter valid.
(2) Data length for setting virtual devices for servo
AL11 to AL13
Decimal
11
Alarm (AL) AL200 to AL205
amplifier AL210 to AL215
Set the following data length for setting devices. AL230 to AL235
• PRM, ST, AL, PA, PB, PC, PD, POS, SPD, ACT, External input (DI)*3
CONNECTION
DI0 to DI2
DCT, DWL, AUX
NETWORK
External output (DO) DO0 to DO1
: 16bits or 32bits (depends on the data of servo
Double word device
amplifier)
• DI, DO, TMI, TMO, TMD: 32bits Forced output of signal pin
(for test operation) TMO0
12
If the above data length was not set, data would (TMO)
not be set to the servo amplifier correctly or the
CC-Link IE FIELD
GOT can not monitor normally.
CONNECTION
*1 Use PRM0 to PRM29 when writing parameters to the servo
NETWORK
(a) Monitoring amplifier RAM.
• When the 16-bit data is handled as 32-bit PRM1000 to PRM1029 are used when writing parameters to
E2PROM of the servo amplifier.
data, the upper 16bits are displayed as 0. Use PRM1000 to PRM1029 when reading parameters to the
• When the 32-bit data is handled as 16-bit
*2
servo amplifier RAM.
The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive 13
data, the lower 16bits only are displayed as devices.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
0.
CC-Link CONNECTION
(b) Writing
The GOT writes within the range of data
length set. Note that the servo amplifier POINT
STATION)
responds correctly while the written data is
invalid in the servo amplifier side when the Precautions for SP, OM, and TMO devices
written data is outside the range of values (1) For bit devices 14
which can be set by the servo amplifier. Only writing is possible.
(3) Memory area for writing parameters [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used.
Parameters are written to RAM or E2PROM of Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit
servo amplifier. switch. CONNECTION
(a) When written to RAM (2) For word devices, double word devices (Via G4)
CC-Link
Remember that written parameters are Only writing is possible.

cleared when power supply to the servo Numerical input cannot be used.
amplifier is turned off. When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch. 15
(b) When written to E2PROM
Written parameters are not cleared even
when power supply to the servo amplifier is
CONNECTION
turned off.However, there are limits in the

INVERTER
number of writing to E2PROM.

If the data is frequently updated (more than
once in an hour), write the parameters to the
RAM. 16
For details, refer to the manual of the servo
SERVO AMPLIFIER
amplifier used.
CONNECTION

(a) Servo amplifier request (e) Alarm
Device name Item Symbol Device

Item Symbol
SP1 Current alarm clear ― name
SP2 Alarm history clear ― AL0 Current alarm number ―

Servo status when alarm occurs
AL11 ―
regenerative load factor
(b) Operation mode selection
AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ―
Device name Item Symbol Servo status when alarm occurs peak bus
AL13 ―
Normal mode voltage
OM0 ―
(not test operation mode) Alarm number from alarm history
AL200 ―
Output signal (DO) forced most recent alarm
OM4 ―
output Alarm number from alarm history
AL201 ―
first alarm in past
(c) Basic parameter/expansion parameter Alarm number from alarm history
AL202 ―
second alarm in past
Device name Item *2
Symbol Alarm number from alarm history
AL203 ―
Serial communication third alarm in past
PRM0, PRM1000 function selection, *BPS Alarm number from alarm history
AL204 ―
alarm history clear fourth alarm in past
Regenerative brake option Alarm number from alarm history
PRM1, PRM1001 *REG AL205 ―
selection fifth alarm in past
PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL210 ―
PRM3, PRM1003 Analog monitor 1 output MD1 most recent alarm
PRM4, PRM1004 Analog monitor 2 output MD2 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL211 ―
PRM5, PRM1005 Analog monitor 3 output MD3 first alarm in past
PRM6, PRM1006 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL212 ―
PRM7, PRM1007 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
PRM8, PRM1008 Analog monitor 3 offset MO3 AL213 ―
third alarm in past
PRM9, PRM1009 Function selection 2 *OP2
Interface unit serial AL214 ―
fourth alarm in past
PRM10, PRM1010 communication station No. *ISN
selection AL215 ―
fifth alarm in past
Slot 1 serial communication
PRM11, PRM1011 *DSN1 Detailed alarm from alarm history
station No. selection AL230 ―
most recent alarm
PRM12, PRM1012 *DSM2 Detailed alarm from alarm history
first alarm in past
PRM13, PRM1013 *DSM3 Detailed alarm from alarm history
third alarm in past
fifth alarm in past
PRM17, PRM1017 *DSN7
station No. selection
(f) External I/O signal
PRM18, PRM1018 *DSN8
station No. selection
Device
PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter write inhibit *BLK Item Symbol
name
Serial communication DI0 External input pin statuses CN1A/CN1B ―
PRM20, PRM1020 SIC
time-out selection
DI1 External input pin statuses CN5 ―
PRM21 to PRM29
For manufacturer setting ― DI2 External input pin statuses CN4A/CN4B ―
PRM1021 to PRM1029
DO0 External output pin statuses CN1A/CN1B ―
*2 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting
DO1 External output pin statuses CN1A/CN1B ―
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and
back on after setting the parameter data.
(g) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)
(d) Status display
Device
Device name Item Symbol Item Symbol
name
ST0 Regenerative load ratio ―
TMO0 Forced output of signal pin ―
ST1 Bus voltage ―
ST2 Peak bus voltage ―

(3) MELSERVO-J2M-*DU
The following shows correspondences between virtual 9
devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
amplifier used with the GOT.
Device
MELSECNET/H
*2
No. (a) Servo amplifier request
represent
ation Device
Item Symbol
name
Servo amplifier request
SP0 to SP6 SP0 Status display data clear ―
(SP)
10
Bit device
SP1 Current alarm clear ―

OM0 to OM4 SP2 Alarm history clear ―
(OM)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SP3 External input signal prohibited ―
Instruction demand
TMB0 to TMB1 SP4 External output signal prohibited ―
MELSECNET/10
(for test operation) (TMB)
SP5 External input signal resumed ―
Basic parameter
PRM0 to PRM84 SP6 External output signal resumed ―
Expansion parameter
PRM1000 to PRM1084
(PRM)*1
Word device

AL0 Decimal Device
Item Symbol
11
AL11 to AL21 name
Alarm (AL) AL200 to AL205 OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ―
AL210 to AL215 OM1 JOG operation ―
AL230 to AL235
CONNECTION
OM2 Positioning operation ―
Input signal for test
NETWORK
OM3 Motorless operation ―
Double word device
operation TMI0
OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ―
(for test operation) (TMI)
Forced output of signal pin
(for test operation) (TMO)
TMO0 (c) Instruction demand (for test operation) 12
Set data Device name Item Symbol
TMD0 to TMD2
(for test operation) (TMD) Clears acceleration/
CC-Link IE FIELD
TMB0 deceleration time constant ―
CONNECTION
amplifier RAM. (test mode)
NETWORK
PRM1000 to PRM1084 are used when writing parameters to
Temporary stop command
E2PROM of the servo amplifier. TMB1 ―
(test mode)
Use PRM1000 to PRM1084 when reading parameters to the
*2 The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive
devices.
(d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter 13
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
Symbol*1
CC-Link CONNECTION
Device name Item
POINT PRM0, PRM1000 For manufacturer setting ―
Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD
STATION)
PRM2, PRM1002 Auto tuning ATU
devices CMX Electronic gear
(1) For bit devices numerator
PRM3, PRM1003 CMX
Only writing is possible. (Command pulse multiplying
factor numerator)
14
[Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used.
Electronic gear
Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit
denominator
switch. PRM4, PRM1004 CDV
CONNECTION
(Command pulse multiplying
(2) For word devices, double word devices factor denominator)
Only writing is possible.
(Via G4)
CC-Link
PRM5, PRM1005 In-position range INP

Numerical input cannot be used. PRM6, PRM1006 Position loop gain 1 PG1
When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch.
Position command
PRM7, PRM1007
acceleration/deceleration
PST
15
time constant
(position smoothing)
PRM8 to PRM15,
CONNECTION
For manufacturer setting ―

PRM1008 to PRM1015
INVERTER
PRM16, PRM1016 Alarm history clear *BPS

PRM17 to PRM18,
PRM1017 to PRM1018
PRM19, PRM1019
PRM20, PRM1020
DRU parameter block
*BLK
*OP2
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
PRM21, PRM1021 *OP3
(Command pulse selection)
CONNECTION

PRM23, PRM1023 Feed forward gain FFC

(e) Status display
Device name Item Symbol*1
PRM24, PRM1024 Zero speed ZSP Device name Item Symbol
PRM25 to PRM26, ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses ―
PRM1025 to PRM1026 ST1 Servo motor speed ―
PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR ST2 Droop pulses ―
PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1 ST3 Cumulative command pulses ―
PRM29 to PRM32,
For manufacturer setting ― ST4 Command pulse frequency ―
PRM1029 to PRM1032
ST5 Effective load ratio ―
Electromagnetic brake
PRM33, PRM1033 MBR ST6 Peak load ratio ―
sequence output
Ratio of load inertia moment ST7 Instantaneous torque ―
PRM34, PRM1034 to servo motor inertia GD2 ST8 Within one-revolution position ―
moment ST9 ABS counter ―
PRM35, PRM1035 Position loop gain 2 PG2 ST10 Load inertia moment ratio ―
PRM36, PRM1036 Speed loop gain 1 VG1
(f) Alarm
Speed integral
PRM38, PRM1038 VIC
compensation Device
Item Symbol
Speed differential name
PRM39, PRM1039 VDC
compensation AL0 Current alarm number ―
PRM40 to PRM41,
For manufacturer setting ― Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative
PRM1040 to PRM1041 AL11 ―
feedback pulses
PRM42, PRM1042 Input signal selection 1 *DI1
PRM43 to PRM50, AL12 ―
For manufacturer setting ― servo motor speed
PRM1043 to PRM1050
Servo status when alarm occurs droop
PRM51, PRM1051 Function selection 6 *OP6 AL13 ―
pulses
PRM52 to PRM53,
For manufacturer setting ― Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative
command pulses
Servo status when alarm occurs command
PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection A *OPA AL15 ―
pulse frequency
PRM56 to PRM57,
For manufacturer setting ― Servo status when alarm occurs effective
load ratio
Machine resonance
PRM58, PRM1058 NH1 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load
suppression filter 1 AL17 ―
Machine resonance ratio
PRM59, PRM1059 NH2
suppression filter 2 Servo status when alarm occurs
AL18 ―
Low-pass filter, instantaneous torque
PRM60, PRM1060 adaptive vibration LPF Servo status when alarm occurs within one-
AL19 ―
suppression control revolution position
Ratio of load inertia moment Servo status when alarm occurs ABS
AL20 ―
PRM61, PRM1061 to servo motor inertia GD2B counter
moment 2 Servo status when alarm occurs
Position control gain 2 AL21 ―
PRM62, PRM1062 PG2B load inertia moment ratio
changing ratio
Alarm number from alarm history
Speed control gain 2 AL200 ―
PRM63, PRM1063 VG2B most recent alarm
changing ratio
Speed integral compensation AL201 ―
PRM64, PRM1064 VICB first alarm in past
changing ratio
PRM65, PRM1065 Gain changing selection *CDP AL202 ―
PRM66, PRM1066 Gain changing condition CDS
PRM67, PRM1067 Gain changing time constant CDT AL203 ―
third alarm in past
PRM68, PRM1068 For manufacturer setting ―
Command pulse multiplying AL204 ―
PRM69, PRM1069 CMX2 fourth alarm in past
factor numerator 2
Command pulse multiplying AL205 ―
PRM70, PRM1070 CMX3 fifth alarm in past
factor numerator 3
Command pulse multiplying Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
PRM71, PRM1071 CMX4 AL210 ―
factor numerator 4 most recent alarm
PRM72 to PRM75, Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
For manufacturer setting ― AL211 ―
PRM1072 to PRM1075 first alarm in past
PRM76, PRM1076 Internal torque limit 2 TL2 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL212 ―
PRM77 to PRM84, second alarm in past
PRM1077 to PRM1084 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL213 ―
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting third alarm in past
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
back on after setting the parameter data. AL214 ―

Device
name
Item Symbol
(4) MELSERVO-J2S-*A
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
AL215 ―
fifth alarm in past Device
MELSECNET/H
No.
Detailed alarm from alarm history Device name *2 Setting range
AL230 ― represent
most recent alarm
ation
Detailed alarm from alarm history
AL231 ― Servo amplifier request
first alarm in past SP0 to SP6
(SP)
10
Bit device
AL232 ― Operation mode selection
second alarm in past OM0 to OM4
(OM)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
AL233 ― Instruction demand
third alarm in past TMB0 to TMB1
MELSECNET/10
AL234 ― Basic parameter
fourth alarm in past PRM0 to PRM84
/expansion parameter
Detailed alarm from alarm history PRM1000 to PRM1084
AL235 ― *1
(PRM)
fifth alarm in past
11
Word device
(g) Input signal for test operation (for test operation) AL0 to AL1
AL11 to AL25
Decimal
Device Alarm (AL) AL200 to AL205
Item Symbol
name AL210 to AL215
TMI0 Input signal for test operation ― AL230 to AL235
CONNECTION
External input (DI)*3
NETWORK
DI0
(h) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) External output (DO) DO0
12
Double word device
Device operation TMI0

Item Symbol
name (for test operation) (TMI)
TMO0 Forced output of signal pin ― Forced output of signal pin
TMO0
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
(i) Set data (for test operation) Set data
TMD0 to TMD2
NETWORK
(for test operation) (TMD)
Device
Item Symbol *1 Use PRM0 to PRM84 when writing parameters to the servo
name amplifier RAM.
TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ― PRM1000 to PRM1084 are used when writing parameters to
TMD1
Writes the acceleration/deceleration time
―
13
constant (test mode) servo amplifier RAM.
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Writes the moving distance in pulses (test *2 The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive
TMD2 ― devices.
mode)
STATION)
POINT
devices
14
(1) For bit devices
[Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
switch.
(2) For word devices, double word devices
Only writing is possible. 15
Numerical input cannot be used.
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

PRM24, PRM1024 Zero speed ZSP
(a) Servo amplifier request Analog speed command
PRM25, PRM1025 maximum speed VCM
Device /limit maximum speed
Item Symbol
name Analog torque command
PRM26, PRM1026 TLC
SP0 Status display data clear ― maximum output
SP1 Current alarm clear ― PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR
SP2 Alarm history clear ― PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1
SP3 External input signal prohibited ― Analog speed command offset
PRM29, PRM1029 VCO
SP4 External output signal prohibited ― /limit offset
SP5 External input signal resumed ― Analog torque command offset
PRM30, PRM1030 TLO
/limit offset
SP6 External output signal resumed ―
PRM31,PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1
PRM33, PRM1033 MBR
Device sequence output
Item Symbol Ratio of load inertia moment to
name PRM34, PRM1034 GD2
servo motor inertia moment
OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ―
PRM35, PRM1035 Position loop gain 2 PG2
OM1 JOG operation ―
PRM38, PRM1038 Speed integral compensation VIC
PRM39, PRM1039 Speed differential compensation VDC
(c) Instruction demand (for test operation)
Input signal automatic ON
PRM41, PRM1041 *DIA
selection
Device name Item Symbol
PRM42, PRM1042 Input signal selection 1 *DI1
Clears acceleration/
TMB0 ― PRM43, PRM1043 Input signal selection 2 (CN1B-5) *DI2
deceleration time constant
TMB1 Temporary stop command ― PRM44, PRM1044 Input signal selection 3 (CN1B-14) *DI3
PRM45, PRM1045 Input signal selection 4 (CN1A-8) *DI4
(d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter PRM46, PRM1046 Input signal selection 5 (CN1B-7) *DI5
PRM47, PRM1047 Input signal selection 6 (CN1B-8) *DI6
Device name Item Symbol*1 PRM48, PRM1048 Input signal selection 7 (CN1B-9) *DI7
Control mode, regenerative PRM49, PRM1049 Output signal selection 1 *DO1
PRM0, PRM1000 *STY
brake option selection PRM50, PRM1050 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM1, PRM1001 Function selection 1 *OP1 PRM51, PRM1051 Function selection 6 *OP6
PRM2, PRM1002 Auto tuning ATU PRM52, PRM1052 For manufacturer setting ―
Electronic gear numerator PRM53, PRM1053 Function selection 8 *OP8
PRM3, PRM1003 (Command pulse multiplying CMX PRM54, PRM1054 Function selection 9 *OP9
factor numerator)
PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection A *OPA
Electronic gear denominator
PRM4, PRM1004 (Command pulse multiplying CDV PRM56, PRM1056 SIC
time-out selection
factor denominator)
PRM5, PRM1005 In-position range INP
Machine resonance
PRM6, PRM1006 Position loop gain 1 PG1 PRM58, PRM1058 NH1
suppression filter 1
Position command
Machine resonance
PRM7, PRM1007 acceleration/deceleration time PST PRM59, PRM1059 NH2
constant
Low-pass filter, adaptive
PRM8, PRM1008 Internal speed command1/limit1 SC1 PRM60, PRM1060 LPF
vibration suppression control
PRM9, PRM1009 Internal speed command2/limit2 SC2
Ratio of load inertia moment
PRM10, PRM1010 Internal speed command3/limit3 SC3 PRM61, PRM1061 GD2B
to servo motor inertia moment 2
PRM11, PRM1011 Acceleration time constant STA Position control gain 2
PRM62, PRM1062 PG2B
PRM12, PRM1012 Deceleration time constant STB changing ratio
S-pattern acceleration/ Speed control gain 2 changing
PRM13, PRM1013 STC PRM63, PRM1063 VG2B
deceleration time constant ratio
PRM14, PRM1014 Torque command time constant TQC Speed integral compensation
PRM64, PRM1064 VICB
PRM15, PRM1015 Station number setting *SNO changing ratio
Serial communication function PRM65, PRM1065 Gain changing selection *CDP
PRM16, PRM1016 *BPS
selection, alarm history clear PRM66, PRM1066 Gain changing condition CDS
PRM17, PRM1017 Analog monitor output MOD PRM67, PRM1067 Gain changing time constant CDT
PRM18, PRM1018 Status display selection *DMD PRM68, PRM1068 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter block *BLK Command pulse multiplying
PRM69, PRM1069 CMX2
PRM20, PRM1020 Function selection 2 *OP2 factor numerator 2
Function selection 3 (Continued to next page)
PRM21, PRM1021 *OP3
(Command pulse selection)

Device
name
Item Symbol 9
AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ―
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Command pulse multiplying
PRM70, PRM1070 CMX3 Alarm number from alarm history
factor numerator 3 AL200 ―
MELSECNET/H
most recent alarm
PRM71, PRM1071 CMX4 Alarm number from alarm history
factor numerator 4 AL201 ―
first alarm in past
PRM72, PRM1072 Internal speed command4/limit4 SC4
PRM73, PRM1073 Internal speed command5/limit5 SC5 AL202 ―
PRM74, PRM1074
PRM75, PRM1075
Internal speed command6/limit6
Internal speed command7/limit7
SC6
SC7 AL203
third alarm in past
― 10
PRM76, PRM1076 Internal torque limit 2 TL2 Alarm number from alarm history
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
AL204 ―
PRM77 to PRM84, fourth alarm in past
MELSECNET/10
PRM1077 to PRM1084 Alarm number from alarm history
AL205 ―
fifth alarm in past
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL210 ―
back on after setting the parameter data. most recent alarm
(e) Status display AL211 ―
first alarm in past
11
Device AL212 ―
Item Symbol second alarm in past
name
ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses ― AL213 ―
third alarm in past
ST1 servo motor speed ―
CONNECTION
AL214 ―
NETWORK
ST2 Droop pulses ― fourth alarm in past
ST3 Cumulative command pulses ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL215 ―
ST4 Command pulse frequency ― fifth alarm in past
ST5
ST6
Analog speed command voltage/limit voltage
Analog torque command voltage/limit voltage
―
―
AL230
most recent alarm
― 12
ST7 Regenerative load ratio ― Detailed alarm from alarm history
AL231 ―
first alarm in past
ST8 Effective load ratio ―
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
ST9 Peak load ratio ― AL232 ―
NETWORK
ST10 Instantaneous torque ―
ST11 Within one-revolution position ― AL233 ―
third alarm in past
ST12 ABS counter ― Detailed alarm from alarm history
AL234 ―
ST13
ST14
load inertia moment ratio
Bus voltage
―
―
AL235
―
13
fifth alarm in past
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
(f) Alarm
(g) External I/O signal
Device
Item Symbol Device
name
STATION)
Item Symbol
AL0 Current alarm number ― name
AL1 Detailed data of current alarms ― DI0 External input pin statuses ―
AL11
Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative
feedback pulses
―
DO0 External output pin statuses ―
14
AL12
― (h) Input signal for test operation (for test operation)
servo motor speed
CONNECTION
AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses ― Device
Item Symbol
Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative name
AL14 ― (Via G4)
CC-Link
command pulses TMI0 Input signal status for test operation ―

AL15 ―
pulse frequency
(i) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)
AL16
Servo status when alarm occurs analog
speed command voltage/limit voltage
―
Device
15
Item Symbol
Servo status when alarm occurs analog name
AL17 ―
torque command voltage/limit voltage TMO0 Forced output status of signal pin ―
CONNECTION
Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative

AL18 ―
load ratio
INVERTER
(j) Set data (for test operation)

Servo status when alarm occurs effective load
AL19 ―
ratio
Device
AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio ― Item Symbol
name
AL21
instantaneous torque
― TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ― 16
Servo status when alarm occurs within one- TMD1 ―
SERVO AMPLIFIER
AL22 ― constant (test mode)

revolution position
Writes the moving distance in pulses (test
CONNECTION
AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― TMD2 ―

mode)
AL24 ―
load inertia moment ratio

(5) MELSERVO-J2S-*CP
POINT
Device
No.
Device name*3 Setting range Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD
represent
devices
ation
Servo amplifier request (1) For bit devices
SP0 to SP6 Only writing is possible.
(SP)
Bit device

OM0 to OM4 Use [Set], [Reset], and [Momentary] of a bit
(OM)
switch.
Instruction demand
TMB0 to TMB1 (2) For word devices, double word devices
Basic parameter
PRM0 to PRM90 Numerical input cannot be used.
/expansion parameter
PRM1000 to PRM1090 When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch.
(PRM)*1
AL0 to AL1
AL11 to AL27 The following shows correspondences between virtual
Alarm (AL) AL200 to AL205
AL210 to AL215
AL230 to AL235
External input (DI)*4 DI0 to DI2 (a) Servo amplifier request
External output (DO) DO0 to DO1
Device
Point table POS1 to POS31 Item Symbol
Word device
name
(position) (POS)*2 POS1001 to POS1031
Decimal SP0 Status display data clear ―
Point table
SPD1 to SPD31 SP1 Current alarm clear ―
Point table (speed)
SPD1001 to SPD1031 SP2 Alarm history clear ―
(SPD)*2
Point table
ACT1 to ACT31 SP4 External output signal prohibited ―
(acceleration time
ACT1001 to ACT1031
constant) (ACT)*2 SP5 External input signal resumed ―
Point table SP6 External output signal resumed ―
DCT1 to DCT31
(deceleration time
DCT1001 to DCT1031
constant) (DCT)*2 (b) Operation mode selection
Point table DWL1 to DWL31
Device
(dwell) (DWL)*2 DWL1001 to DWL1031 Item Symbol
name
Point table AUX1 to AUX31
(auxiliary function) (AUX)*2 AUX1001 to AUX1031
Double word device
operation TMI0
(for test operation) (TMI) OM3 Motorless operation ―
Forced output of signal pin OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ―
TMO0
Set data (c) Instruction demand (for test operation)
TMD0 to TMD2
amplifier RAM. Clears the acceleration/
TMB0 ―
PRM1000 to PRM1090 are used when writing parameters to deceleration time constant
E2PROM of the servo amplifier. TMB1 Temporary stop command ―
*2 When writing to a point table, use the area of 1001 to 1031
(E2PROM area) of POS, SPD, ACT, DCT, DWL, or AUX.
If writing to the area of 1 to 31 (RAM area) of POS, SPD,
ACT, DCT, DWL, or AUX, the value is not reflected.
devices.
*4 Only reading is possible for DI0 to DI1.

(d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter
Device name Item Symbol*1 9
PRM46, PRM1046
Software limit + *LMP
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device name Item Symbol*1 PRM47, PRM1047
MELSECNET/H
Command system/ PRM48, PRM1048
Software limit - *LMN
PRM0, PRM1000 regenerative brake option *STY PRM49, PRM1049
selection PRM50, PRM1050
Position range output address + *LPP
PRM1, PRM1001 Feeding function selection *FTY PRM51, PRM1051
PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1 PRM52, PRM1052
PRM3, PRM1003 Auto tuning ATU PRM53, PRM1053
Position range output address - *LNP
10
PRM4, PRM1004 Electronic gear numerator *CMX PRM54, PRM1054 For manufacturer setting ―
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PRM5, PRM1005 Electronic gear denominator *CDV PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection 6 *OP6
MELSECNET/10
PRM6, PRM1006 In-position range INP PRM56, PRM1056 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM7, PRM1007 Position loop gain 1 PG1 PRM57, PRM1057 Function selection 8 *OP8
PRM8, PRM1008 Home position return type *ZTY PRM58, PRM1058 Function selection 9 *OP9
PRM9, PRM1009 Home position return speed ZRF PRM59, PRM1059 Function selection A *OPA
PRM10, PRM1010 Creep speed CRF PRM60, PRM1060 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM11, PRM1011 Home position shift distance ZST
PRM61, PRM1061
Machine resonance
NH1
11
PRM12, PRM1012 Rough match output range CRP suppression filter 1
PRM13, PRM1013 Jog speed JOG Machine resonance
PRM62, PRM1062 NH2
S-pattern acceleration/ suppression filter 2
PRM14, PRM1014 *STC
CONNECTION
deceleration time constant Low-pass filter,
NETWORK
PRM15, PRM1015 Station number setting *SNO PRM63, PRM1063 adaptive vibration suppression LPF
control
Serial communication function
PRM16, PRM1016 selection, *BPS Ratio of load inertia moment
PRM64, PRM1064 GD2B
alarm history clear to servo motor inertia moment 2
Position control gain 2
12
PRM17, PRM1017 Analog monitor output MOD PRM65, PRM1065 PG2B
changing ratio
PRM18, PRM1018 Status display selection *DMD
Speed control gain 2 changing
CC-Link IE FIELD
PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter block *BLK PRM66, PRM1066 VG2B
ratio
CONNECTION
NETWORK
Speed integral compensation
PRM21, PRM1021 For manufacturer setting ― PRM67, PRM1067 VICB
changing ratio
PRM68, PRM1068 Gain changing selection *CDP
Serial communication time-out
PRM23, PRM1023 SIC PRM69, PRM1069 Gain changing condition CDS
selection
PRM70, PRM1070 Gain changing time constant CDT 13
PRM71 to PRM90,
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PRM25, PRM1025 Override offset VCO
PRM1071 to PRM1090
PRM26, PRM1026 Torque limit offset TLO
PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting
PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1
STATION)
PRM29, PRM1029 Internal torque limit 2 TL2
PRM30, PRM1030 Backlash compensation *BKC (e) Status display
PRM31,PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1
Device name Item Symbol 14
ST0 Current position ―
PRM33, PRM1033 MBR ST1 Command position ―
sequence output
CONNECTION
ST2 Command remaining distance ―
Ration of load inertia moment
PRM34, PRM1034 GD2 ST3 Point table No. ―
to servo motor inertia moment (Via G4)
CC-Link
PRM35, PRM1035 Position control gain 2 PG2 ST4 Cumulative feedback pulses ―
PRM36, PRM1036 Speed control gain 1 VG1 ST5 Servo motor speed ―
PRM37, PRM1037
PRM38, PRM1038
Position control gain 2
VG2
VIC
ST6
ST7
Droop pulses
Override
―
―
15
Speed differential ST8 Torque limit voltage ―
PRM39, PRM1039 VDC
compensation ST9 Regenerative load ratio ―
CONNECTION
PRM40 to PRM41, ST10 Effective load ratio ―

INVERTER
PRM1040 to PRM1041
ST11 Peak load ratio ―
Home position return position
PRM42, PRM1042 *ZPS ST12 Instantaneous torque ―
data
ST13 Within one-revolution position ―
PRM43, PRM1043
Moving distance after
proximity dog
DCT ST14 ABS counter ― 16
Moving distance ST15 Load inertia moment ratio ―
SERVO AMPLIFIER
PRM44, PRM1044 ZTM

after proximity dog ST16 Bus voltage ―
CONNECTION
Stopper type home position

PRM45, PRM1045 ZTT
return torque limit value

(f) Alarm (g) External I/O signal
Device Device
Item Symbol Item Symbol
name name
AL0 Current alarm number ― DI0 Input device statuses ―
AL1 Detailed data of current alarms ―
DI1 External input pin statuses ―
AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs current position ―
Statuses of input devices switched on
Servo status when alarm occurs command DI2 ―
AL12 ― through communication
position
DO0 Output device statuses ―
AL13 ―
remaining distance DO1 External output pin statuses ―
AL14 ―
point table No. (h) Point table (position)
AL15 ―
cumulative feedback pulses Device name Item Symbol
Servo status when alarm occurs POS1 to POS31, Point table (position)
AL16 ― ―
servo motor speed
POS1001 to POS1031 No. 1 to No. 31
AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses ―
SPD1 to SPD31, Point table (speed)
AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs override ― ―
SPD1001 to SPD1031 No. 1 to No. 31
Servo status when alarm occurs torque limit
AL19 ― Point table
voltage ACT1 to ACT31,
(acceleration time constant) ―
Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative ACT1001 to ACT1031
AL20 ― No. 1 to No. 31
load ratio
Servo status when alarm occurs effective load Point table
AL21 ― DCT1 to DCT31,
ratio (deceleration time constant) ―
DCT1001 to DCT1031
No. 1 to No. 31
AL22 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio ―
Servo status when alarm occurs instantaneous Point table
AL23 ― DWL1 to DWL31,
torque (dwell) ―
DWL1001 to DWL1031
Servo status when alarm occurs within one- No. 1 to No. 31
AL24 ―
revolution position Point table
AUX1 to AUX31,
AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― (auxiliary function) ―
AUX1001 to AUX1031
Servo status when alarm occurs No. 1 to No. 31
AL26 ―
Load inertia moment ratio
AL27 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ― (i) Input signal for test operation (for test operation)
AL200 ―
most recent alarm Device
Item Symbol
Alarm number from alarm history name
AL201 ―
first alarm in past TMI0 Input signal for test operation ―
AL202 ―
(j) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)
AL203 ―
third alarm in past
Device
Alarm number from alarm history Item Symbol
AL204 ― name
Alarm number from alarm history TMO0 Forced output of signal pin ―
AL205 ―
fifth alarm in past
AL210
―
(k) Set data (for test operation)
most recent alarm
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history Device
AL211 ― Item Symbol
first alarm in past name
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ―
AL212 ―
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history TMD1 ―
AL213 ― constant (test mode)
third alarm in past
Writes the moving distance in pulses (test
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history TMD2 ―
AL214 ― mode)
AL215 ―
fifth alarm in past
AL230 ―
most recent alarm
AL231 ―
first alarm in past
AL232 ―
AL233 ―
third alarm in past
AL234 ―
AL235 ―
fifth alarm in past

(6) MELSERVO-J2S-*CL
The following shows correspondences between virtual 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device amplifier used with the GOT.
MELSECNET/H
*2
No.
represent (a) Servo amplifier request
ation
Device
Servo amplifier request Item Symbol
SP0 to SP6 name
(SP)
SP0 Status display data clear ―
10
Bit device

OM0 to OM4 SP1 Current alarm clear ―
(OM)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
SP2 Alarm history clear ―
Instruction demand
TMB0 to TMB1
MELSECNET/10
(for test operation) (TMB) SP3 External input signal prohibited ―
Basic parameter SP4 External output signal prohibited ―

PRM0 to PRM90
/expansion parameter SP5 External input signal resumed ―
*1
PRM1000 to PRM1090
(PRM) SP6 External output signal resumed ―
AL0 to AL1 (b) Operation mode selection 11
AL11 to AL28
Alarm (AL) AL200 to AL205 Device
Item Symbol
AL210 to AL215 name
Word device
AL230 to AL235 OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ―
CONNECTION
External input (DI)*4 OM1 JOG operation ―
NETWORK
DI0 to DI2 Decimal
External output(DO) DO0 to DO1 OM2 Positioning operation ―
Current position latch data OM3 Motorless operation ―
LD1
(LD) OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ―
12
The value of the general-
RR1 to RR4
purpose register (Rx) (c) Instruction demand (for test operation)
*3
RR1001 to RR1004
CC-Link IE FIELD
(RR)
CONNECTION
The value of the general- Device name Item Symbol
RD1 to RD4
NETWORK
purpose register (Dx) (RD) Clears the acceleration/
TMB0 ―
Input signal for test deceleration time constant
Double word device
operation TMI0 TMB1 Temporary stop command ―

13
TMO0
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Set data
TMD0 to TMD2
*1 PRM0 to PRM90 are used when writing parameters to the
STATION)
PRM1000 to PRM1090 are used when writing parameters to
servo amplifier RAM. 14
devices.
*3 Use the integer number when writing parameters to Rx.
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
POINT
devices 15
(1) For bit devices
CONNECTION

INVERTER

switch.
Numerical input cannot be used. 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

(d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter
PRM48, PRM1048
Software limit- *LMN
PRM49, PRM1049
PRM50, PRM1050 Position range output
Command system/ *LPP
PRM0, PRM1000 regenerative brake option *STY PRM51, PRM1051 address+
selection PRM52, PRM1052
Position range output address- *LNP
PRM1, PRM1001 Feeding function selection *FTY PRM53, PRM1053
PRM2, PRM1002 Function selection 1 *OP1 PRM54, PRM1054 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM3, PRM1003 Auto tuning ATU PRM55, PRM1055 Function selection 6 *OP6
PRM4, PRM1004 Electronic gear numerator *CMX PRM56, PRM1056 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM5, PRM1005 Electronic gear denominator *CDV PRM57, PRM1057 Function selection 8 *OP8
PRM6, PRM1006 In-position range INP PRM58, PRM1058 Function selection 9 *OP9
PRM7, PRM1007 Position loop gain 1 PG1 PRM59, PRM1059 Function selection A *OPA
PRM8, PRM1008 Home position return type *ZTY PRM60, PRM1060 For manufacturer setting ―
PRM9, PRM1009 Home position return speed ZRF Machine resonance
PRM61, PRM1061 NH1
PRM10, PRM1010 Creep speed CRF suppression filter 1
PRM11, PRM1011 Home position shift distance ZST Machine resonance
PRM62, PRM1062 NH2
Low-pass filter,
PRM13, PRM1013 Jog speed JOG
PRM63, PRM1063 adaptive vibration suppression LPF
S-pattern acceleration/ control
PRM14, PRM1014 *STC
Ratio of load inertia moment
PRM15, PRM1015 Station number setting *SNO PRM64, PRM1064 GD2B
to Servo motor inertia moment 2
Serial communication function Position control gain 2
PRM16, PRM1016 selection, *BPS PRM65, PRM1065 PG2B
changing ratio
alarm history clear
Speed control gain 2 changing
PRM17, PRM1017 Analog monitor output MOD PRM66, PRM1066 VG2B
ratio
PRM18, PRM1018 Status display selection *DMD Speed integral compensation
PRM67, PRM1067 VICB
PRM19, PRM1019 Parameter block *BLK changing ratio
PRM20, PRM1020 Function selection 2 *OP2 PRM68, PRM1068 Gain changing selection *CDP
PRM21, PRM1021 For manufacturer setting ― PRM69, PRM1069 Gain changing condition CDS
PRM22, PRM1022 Function selection 4 *OP4 PRM70, PRM1070 Gain changing time constant CDT
Serial communication time-out PRM71 to PRM73,
PRM23, PRM1023 SIC For manufacturer setting ―
selection PRM1071 to PRM1073
PRM24, PRM1024 Feed forward gain FFC PRM74, PRM1074 OUT1 output time selection OUT1
PRM25, PRM1025 Override offset VCO PRM75, PRM1075 OUT2 output time selection OUT2
PRM26, PRM1026 Torque limit offset TLO PRM76, PRM1076 OUT3 output time selection OUT3
PRM27, PRM1027 Encoder output pulses *ENR Selected to program input
PRM77, PRM1077 SYC1
PRM28, PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1 polarity selection 1
PRM29, PRM1029 Internal torque limit 2 TL2 PRM78 to PRM90,
PRM30, PRM1030 Backlash compensation *BKC PRM1078 to PRM1090
PRM31,PRM1031 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1 *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting
PRM33, PRM1033 MBR
sequence output (e) Status display
Ration of load inertia moment
PRM34, PRM1034 GD2
to servo motor inertia moment Device name Item Symbol
PRM35, PRM1035 Position control gain 2 PG2 ST0 Current position ―
PRM36, PRM1036 Speed control gain 2 VG1 ST1 Command position ―
PRM37, PRM1037 Speed control gain 2 VG2 ST2 Command remaining distance ―
PRM38, PRM1038 Speed integral compensation VIC ST3 Program Number ―
Speed differential ST4 Step Number ―
PRM39, PRM1039 VDC
compensation ST5 Cumulative feedback pulses ―
JOG operation acceleration/ ST6 Servo motor speed ―
PRM40, PRM1040 JTC
deceleration time constant ST7 Droop pulses ―
Home position return
ST8 Override ―
PRM41, PRM1041 operation acceleration/ ZTS
ST9 Torque limit voltage ―
PRM42, PRM1042 *ZPS ST11 Effective load ratio ―
data
Moving distance after ST12 Peak load ratio ―
PRM43, PRM1043 DCT
proximity dog ST13 Instantaneous torque ―
Stopper type home position ST14 Within one-revolution position ―
PRM44, PRM1044 ZTM
return stopper time ST15 ABS counter ―
Stopper type home position ST16 Load inertia moment ratio ―
PRM45, PRM1045 ZTT
return torque limit value
ST17 Bus voltage ―
PRM46, PRM1046
Software limit+ *LMP
PRM47, PRM1047

(f) Alarm
Device
name
Item Symbol 9
Detailed alarm from Alarm History
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device AL234 ―
Item Symbol fourth alarm in past
name
MELSECNET/H
Detailed alarm from Alarm History
AL0 Current alarm number ― AL235 ―
fifth alarm in past
AL11
Servo status when alarm occurs Current
―
(g) External I/O signal
position
Device
AL12
Servo status when alarm occurs Command
position
―
name
Item Symbol
10
Servo status when alarm occurs Command DI0 Input device statuses ―
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
AL13 ―
remaining distance DI1 External input pin statuses ―
MELSECNET/10
Servo status when alarm occurs Program Statuses of input devices switched on
AL14 ― DI2 ―
Number through communication
AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs Step Number ― DO0 Output device statuses ―
Servo status when alarm occurs Cumulative DO1 External output pin statuses ―
AL16 ―
feedback pulses
AL17
Servo motor speed
― (h) Current position latch data 11
AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs Droop pulses ―
Device
AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs Override ― Item Symbol
name
Servo status when alarm occurs Torque limit LD1 Current position latch data ―
AL20 ―
CONNECTION
voltage
NETWORK
AL21 ― (i) The value of the general-purpose register (Rx)
Regenerative load ratio
Servo status when alarm occurs Effective
AL22 ― Device name Item Symbol
load ratio
Servo status when alarm occurs Peak load RR1, RR1001
―
12
AL23 ― purpose register (R1)
ratio
Servo status when alarm occurs RR2, RR1002 ―
AL24 ―
CC-Link IE FIELD
Instantaneous torque purpose register (R2)
CONNECTION
Servo status when alarm occurs Within one- The value of the general-
RR3, RR1003 ―
NETWORK
AL25 ― purpose register (R3)
revolution position
AL26 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― The value of the general-
RR4, RR1004 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs purpose register (R4)
AL27 ―
AL28
Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage ― (j) The value of the general-purpose register (Dx)
13
Alarm number from Alarm History
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
most recent alarm
Alarm number from Alarm History The value of the general-
AL201 ― RD1 ―
first alarm in past purpose register (D1)
STATION)
AL202 ― RD2 ―
second alarm in past purpose register (D2)
AL203 ― RD3 ―
third alarm in past
purpose register (D3)
14
AL204 ― RD4 ―
fourth alarm in past purpose register (D4)
AL205 ―
fifth alarm in past
(k) Input signal for test operation (for test operation) CONNECTION
AL210 ―
most recent alarm (Via G4)
CC-Link

AL211 ― TMI0 Input signal for test operation ―
first alarm in past
AL212
― (l) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) 15
third alarm in past
CONNECTION
AL214 ―
INVERTER
AL215
―
(m) Set data (for test operation)
fifth alarm in past
Detailed alarm from Alarm History Device
name
16
most recent alarm
Detailed alarm from Alarm History TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ―
AL231 ―
first alarm in past Writes the acceleration/deceleration time
TMD1 ―
SERVO AMPLIFIER
Detailed alarm from Alarm History constant(test mode)

AL232 ―
second alarm in past Writes the moving distance in pulses(test
CONNECTION
TMD2 ―
Detailed alarm from Alarm History mode)
AL233 ―
third alarm in past

(7) MELSERVO-J3-*A devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo
Device amplifier used with the GOT.
*2
No.
represen (a) Servo amplifier request
tation
Device
Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 Item Symbol
name
Bit device
Operation mode selection SP0 Status display data clear ―

OM0 to OM4
(OM) SP1 Current alarm clear ―
Instruction demand SP2 Alarm history clear ―
TMB1 to TMB6
(for test operation) (TMB) SP3 External input signal prohibited ―
Basic setting parameter PA1 to PA19 SP4 External output signal prohibited ―
(PA)*1 PA1001 to PA1019 SP5 External input signal resumed ―
Gain filter parameter PB1 to PB45 SP6 External output signal resumed ―
(PB)*1 PB1001 to PB1045
Extension setting parameter PC1 to PC50 (b) Operation mode selection
(PC)*1 PC1001 to PC1050
Device
PD1 to PD30 Item Symbol
Word device
I/O setting parameter (PD)*1 name

PD1001 to PD1030
Status display (ST)*3 ST0 to ST14 Decimal
AL0 to AL1 OM2 Positioning operation ―
AL11 to AL25 OM3 Motorless operation ―
Alarm (AL)*3 AL200 to AL205 OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ―
AL210 to AL215
AL230 to AL235
External input (DI)*4 DI0 to DI2
Device
External output (DO)*3 DO0 to DO1 Item Symbol
name
Input signal for test operation
Double word device
TMI0 TMB1 Temporary stop command ―

Test operation (positioning operation) start
Forced output of signal pin TMB2 ―
TMO0 command
(for test operation) (TMO) TMB3 Forward rotation direction ―
Set data TMD0 to TMD1 TMB4 Reverse rotation direction ―
(for test operation) (TMD) TMD3 TMB5 Restart for remaining distance ―
*1 1 to 50 of PA, PB, PC, and PD are used when writing data to TMB6 Remaining distance clear ―
the servo amplifier RAM.
1001 to 1050 of PA, PB, PC, and PD are used when writing
data to E2PROM of the servo amplifier. (d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter
Use PA, PB, PC, PD 1001 to 1050 when reading parameters
to the servo amplifier RAM. Device name Item Symbol*1
devices. PA1, PA1001 Control mode *STY
*3 Only reading is possible. PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option *REG
*4 Only reading is possible for DI0 to DI1. Absolute position detection
PA3, PA1003 *ABS
system
POINT PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 *AOP1

Number of command input
PA5, PA1005 *FBP
pulses per revolution
Electronic gear numerator
devices PA6, PA1006 (command pulse multiplying CMX
(1) For bit devices factor numerator)
Only writing is possible. Electronic gear denominator
PA7, PA1007 (command pulse multiplying CDV
factor denominator)
PA8, PA1008 Auto tuning mode ATU
switch.
PA9, PA1009 Auto tuning response RSP
PA10, PA1010 In-position range INP
PA11, PA1011 Forward torque limit TLP
Numerical input cannot be used. PA12, PA1012 Reverses torque limit TLN
PA13, PA1013 Command pulse input form *PLSS
PA14, PA1014 Rotation direction selection *POL
PA15, PA1015 Encoder output pulses *ENR
PA16 to PA18,
PA1016 to PA1018
PA19, PA1019 Parameter block *BLK

(e) Gain filter parameter (f) Extension setting parameter 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device name Item Symbol*1 Device name Item Symbol*1
MELSECNET/H
Adaptive tuning mode PC1, PC1001 Acceleration time constant STA
PB1, PB1001 FILT
(Adaptive filter II) PC2, PC1002 Deceleration time constant STB
Vibration suppression control filter S-pattern acceleration/
tuning mode PC3, PC1003 STC
PA2, PB1002 VRFT deceleration time constant
(Advanced vibration suppression
PC4, PC1004 Torque command time constant TQC
control)
PC5, PC1005 Internal speed command1/limit1 SC1 10
Position command acceleration/
PC6, PC1006 Internal speed command2/limit2 SC2
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PB3, PB1003 deceleration time constant PST
MELSECNET/10
PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain FFC PC8, PC1008 Internal speed command4/limit4 SC4
PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting ― PC9, PC1009 Internal speed command5/limit5 SC5
Ratio of load inertia moment to PC10, PC1010 Internal speed command6/limit6 SC6
PB6, PB1006 GD2
servo motor inertia moment PC11, PC1011 Internal speed command7/limit7 SC7
PB7, PB1007 Model control gain PG1
PC12, PC1012
Analog speed command
maximum speed VCM
11
PB8, PB1008 Position loop gain PG2
/limit maximum speed
PB9, PB1009 Speed loop gain VG2
Analog torque command
PB10, PB1010 Speed integral compensation VIC PC13, PC1013 TLC
maximum output
CONNECTION
PB11, PB1011 Speed differential compensation VDC
PC14, PC1014 Analog monitor 1 output MOD1
NETWORK
PB12, PB1012 For manufacturer setting ―
Machine resonance suppression
PB13, PB1013 NH1 Electromagnetic brake
filter 1 PC16, PC1016 MBR
PB14, PB1014 Notch form selection 1 NHQ1
PC17, PC1017
sequence output
Zero speed ZSP
12
PB15, PB1015 NH2 PC18, PC1018 Alarm history clear *BPS
filter 2
CC-Link IE FIELD
PC19, PC1019 Encoder output pulse selection *ENRS
CONNECTION
PC20, PC1020 Station number setting *SNO
NETWORK
PC21, PC1021 Communication function selection *SOP
PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting LPF
PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 *COP1
Vibration suppression control
PB19, PB1019 VRF1 PC23, PC1023 Function selection C-2 *COP2
vibration frequency setting
PB20, PB1020
Vibration suppression control
VRF2
PC24, PC1024 Function selection C-3 *COP3 13
resonance frequency setting PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting ―
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PB21 to PB22, PC26, PC1026 Function selection C-5 *COP5
PB1021 to PB1022 PC27 to PC29,
PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter selection VFBF PC1027 to PC1029
STATION)
Slight vibration suppression PC30, PC1030 Acceleration time constant 2 STA2
PB24, PB1024 *MVS
control selection PC31, PC1031 Deceleration time constant 2 STB2
PB25, PB1025 Function selection B-1 *BOP1 Command pulse multiplying
PB26, PB1026 Gain changing selection *CDP
PC32, PC1032
factor numerator 2
CMX2
14
PB27, PB1027 Gain changing condition CDL Command pulse multiplying
PC33, PC1033 CMX3
PB28, PB1028 Gain changing time constant CDT factor numerator 3
CONNECTION
Ratio of load inertia moment to Command pulse multiplying
PC34, PC1034 CMX4
PB29, PB1029 servo motor inertia moment at GD2B factor numerator 4
(Via G4)
CC-Link
changing gain PC35, PC1035 Internal torque limit 2 TL2

Position loop gain at changing PC36, PC1036 Status display selection *DMD
PB30, PB1030 PG2B
gain Analog speed command offset
PB31, PB1031 Speed loop gain at changing gain VG2B
PC37, PC1037
/limit offset
VCO
15
Speed integral compensation at Analog torque command offset
PB32, PB1032 VICB PC38, PC1038 TPO
changing gain /limit offset
Vibration suppression control PC39, PC1039 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1
CONNECTION
PB33, PB1033 vibration frequency setting for VRF1B PC40, PC1040 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2
INVERTER
changing gain
PC41 to PC50,
Vibration suppression control For manufacturer setting ―
PC1041 to PC1050
PB34, PB1034 vibration resonance setting for VRF2B
PB35 to PB45,
changing gain
16
PB1035 to PB1045
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION


(g) I/O setting parameter (i) Alarm
Device name Item *1
Symbol Device name Item Symbol
Input signal automatic ON AL0 Current alarm number ―
PD1, PD1001 *DIA1
selection 1
PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting ―
Input signal device selection 1 AL11 ―
PD3, PD1003 *DI1 feedback pulses
(CN1-15)
Input signal device selection 2 AL12 ―
PD4, PD1004 *DI2 servo monitor speed
(CN1-16)
Input signal device selection 3
PD5, PD1005 *DI3 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative
(CN1-17) AL14 ―
command pulses
PD6, PD1006 *DI4 Servo status when alarm occurs command
(CN1-18) AL15 ―
pulse frequency
PD7, PD1007 *DI5 Servo status when alarm occurs analog
(CN1-19)
AL16 speed command voltage ―
Input signal device selection 6 /limit voltage
PD8, PD1008 *DI6
(CN1-41)
PD9, PD1009 For manufacturer setting ― AL17 analog torque command voltage ―
Input signal device selection 8 /limit voltage
PD10, D1010 *DI8
(CN1-43) Servo status when alarm occurs
AL18 ―
Input signal device selection 9 regenerative load ratio
PD11, PD1011 *DI9
(CN1-44) Servo status when alarm occurs effective
AL19 ―
Input signal device selection 10 load ratio
PD12, PD1012 *DI10
(CN1-45) Servo status when alarm occurs peak load
AL20 ―
Output signal device selection 1 ratio
PD13, PD1013 *DO1
(CN1-22) Servo status when alarm occurs
AL21 ―
Output signal device selection 2 instantaneous torque
PD14, PD1014 *DO2
(CN1-23) Servo status when alarm occurs within one-
AL22 ―
Output signal device selection 3 revolution position
PD15, PD1015 *DO3
(CN1-24) AL23 Load inertia moment ratio ABS counter ―
Output signal device selection 4 Servo status when alarm occurs
PD16, PD1016 *DO4 AL24 ―
(CN1-25) load inertia moment ratio
PD17, PD1017 For manufacturer setting ― AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ―
Output signal device selection 6 Alarm number from alarm history
PD18, PD1018 *DO6 AL200 ―
(CN1-49) most recent alarm
PD19, PD1019 Response level setting *DIF Alarm number from alarm history
AL201 ―
PD20, 1020 Function selection D-1 *DOP1 first alarm in past
PD21, PD1021 For manufacturer setting ― Alarm number from alarm history
AL202 ―
PD22, PD1022 Function selection D-3 *DOP3 second alarm in past
PD23, PD1023 For manufacturer setting ― Alarm number from alarm history
AL203 ―
third alarm in past
PD24, PD1024 Function selection D-5 *DOP5
PD25 to PD30, AL204 ―
For manufacturer setting ― fourth alarm in past
PD1025 to PD1030
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting AL205 ―
fifth alarm in past
back on after setting the parameter data. Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL210 ―
most recent alarm
(h) Status display AL211
―
first alarm in past
Device Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
Item Symbol AL212 ―
name second alarm in past
ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL213 ―
ST1 Servo motor speed ― third alarm in past
ST2 Droop pulses ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL214 ―
ST3 Cumulative command pulses ― fourth alarm in past
ST4 Command pulse frequency ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL215 ―
fifth alarm in past
ST5 Analog speed command voltage/limit voltage ―
ST6 Analog torque command voltage/limit voltage ― AL230 ―
most recent alarm
ST8 Effective load ratio ― AL231 ―
first alarm in past
ST9 Peak load ratio ― Detailed alarm from alarm history
AL232 ―
ST10 Instantaneous torque ― second alarm in past
ST11 Within one-revolution position ― Detailed alarm from alarm history
AL233 ―
ST12 ABS counter ― third alarm in past
ST13 Load inertia moment ratio ― Detailed alarm from alarm history
AL234 ―
AL235 ―
fifth alarm in past

(j) External input (8) MELSERVO-J3-*T
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device
Item Symbol Device
MELSECNET/H
name
*5
No.
DI0 Input device statuses ― Device name Setting range
represen
DI1 External input pin statuses ― tation
Statuses of input devices switched on Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6
DI2 ―
through communication
Bit device
(OM)
OM0 to OM5
Decimal 10
(k) External output Instruction demand
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
TMB1 to TMB6
MELSECNET/10
Basic setting parameter PA1 to PA19
DO0 Output device statuses ―
(PA)*1 PA1001 to PA1019
DO1 External output pin statuses ―
Gain filter parameter PB1 to PB45
(PB)*1 PB1001 to PB1045
(l) Input signal for test operation (for test operation) Extension setting PC1 to PC50
Device name Item Symbol parameter (PC)*1 PC1001 to PC1050 11
TMI0 Input signal for test operation ― I/O setting parameter PD1 to PD30
(PD)*1 PD1001 to PD1030
(m) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) Option unit parameter PO1 to PO35
CONNECTION
(PO)*1 PO1001 to PO1035
NETWORK
Status display (ST)*4 ST0 to ST17
AL0 to AL1
(n) Set data (for test operation) Alarm (AL)*4

AL11
AL200
to
to
AL28
AL205
12
AL210 to AL215
Device name Item Symbol AL230 to AL235
CC-Link IE FIELD
Word device
TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ―
CONNECTION
Writes the acceleration/
NETWORK
*4 DO0 to DO4
External output (DO)
TMD1 deceleration time constant ―
(test mode) Point table POS1 to POS255
TMD2 For manufacturer setting ― (position) (POS)*2 POS1001 to POS1255 Decimal
TMD3
Writes the moving distance
―
Point table SPD1 to SPD255 13
(test mode) (speed) (SPD)*2 SPD1001 to SPD1255
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
Point table
ACT1 to ACT255
(acceleration time constant)
*2
ACT1001 to ACT1255
(ACT)
STATION)
Point table
DCT1 to DCT255
(deceleration time constant)
DCT1001 to DCT1255
(DCT)*2
Point table DWL1 to DWL255 14
(dwell) (DWL)*2 DWL1001 to DWL1255
Point table AUX1 to AUX255
(auxiliary function) (AUX)*2
CONNECTION
AUX1001 to AUX1255
Point table MCD1 to MCD255 (Via G4)
CC-Link
(M code) (MCD)*2*3 MCD1001 to MCD1255

Double word device
TMI0 to TMI2
(for test operation) (TM0)
TMO0 to TMO1
15
Set data TMD0 to TMD1
CONNECTION
(for test operation) (TMD) TMD3

INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

*1 Use 1 to 50 of PA, PB, PC, PD, and PO when the GOT The following shows correspondences between virtual
writes data to RAM of the servo amplifier.
Use 1001 to 1050 of PA, PB, PC, PD, and PO when the GOT
write data to E2PROM of the servo amplifier. amplifier used with the GOT.
Use PA, PB, PC, PD, PO 1001 to 1050 when reading
parameters to the servo amplifier RAM. (a) Servo amplifier request
*2 When the GOT writes data to point tables, use 1001 to 1255
of POS, SPD, ACT, DCT, DWL, AUX, and MCD (E2PROM Device
area). Item Symbol
name
Even if the GOT writes a value to POS, SPD, ACT, DCT,
DWL, AUX, or MCD (1 to 255) in the RAM area, the value is SP0 Status display data clear ―
not reflected.
SP1 Current alarm clear ―
*3 MCD cannot be used as a real number.
*4 Only reading is possible. SP2 Alarm history clear ―
devices.
*6 Only reading is possible for DI0 to DI4. SP4 External output signal prohibited ―
SP5 External input signal resumed ―
POINT SP6 External output signal resumed ―
Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD (b) Operation mode selection
devices
Device
(1) For bit devices Item Symbol
name
Only writing is possible. OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ―
switch.
Numerical input cannot be used. OM5 One step sending ―

Device
Item Symbol
name
TMB1 Temporary stop command ―
Test operation (positioning operation) start
TMB2 ―
command
TMB3 Forward rotation direction ―
TMB4 Reverse rotation direction ―
TMB5 Restart for remaining distance ―
TMB6 Remaining distance clear ―
(d) Basic setting parameter

PA1, PA1001 Control mode *STY
PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option *REG
Absolute position detection
PA3, PA1003 *ABS
system
PA4, PA1004 Function selection A-1 *AOP1
PA5, PA1005 Feeding function selection *FTY
PA6, PA1006 Electronic gear numerator *CMX
PA7, PA1007 Electronic gear denominator *CDV
PA8, PA1008 Auto tuning mode ATU
PA10, PA1010 In-position range INP
PA11, PA1011 Forward torque limit TLP
PA12, PA1012 Reverses torque limit TLN
PA13, PA1013 For manufacturer setting ―
PA16 to PA18,
PA1016 to PA1018
PA19, PA1019 Parameter block *BLK

(e) Gain filter parameter
Device name
PC6, PC1006
Item
Home position shift distance
Symbol*1
ZST
9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PC7, PC1007 Home position return position data *ZPS
PC8, PC1008 Moving distance after proximity dog DCT
MELSECNET/H
Adaptive tuning mode Hold time home position return
PB1, PB1001 FILT
PC9, PC1009 ZTM
(Adaptive filter II) hold time
Vibration suppression control filter
Hold time home position return
tuning mode PC10, PC1010 ZTT
PA2, PB1002 VRFT torque limit value
(advanced vibration suppression
PC11, PC1011 Rough match output range CRP
PB3, PB1003
control)
For manufacturer setting ― PC12, PC1012 Jog speed JOG 10
S-pattern acceleration/
PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain FFC
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PC13, PC1013 *STC
MELSECNET/10
PC14, PC1014 Backlash compensation *BKC
Ratio of load inertia moment to
PB6, PB1006 GD2 PC15, PC1015 For manufacturer setting ―
servo motor inertia moment
Electromagnetic brake sequence
PB7, PB1007 Model control gain PG1 PC16, PC1016 MBR
output
PB8, PB1008 Position loop gain PG2
PC17, PC1017 Zero speed ZSP
PB10, PB1010 Speed integral compensation VIC
PC18, PC1018
PC19, PC1019
Alarm history clear
Encoder output pulse selection
*BPS
*ENRS
11
PB13, PB1013 NH1 PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 *COP1
filter 1
CONNECTION
PC23, PC1023 For manufacturer setting ―
NETWORK
Machine resonance suppression PC24, PC1024 Function selection C-3 *COP3
PB15, PB1015 NH2 PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting ―
filter 2
PB16, PB1016
PB17, PB1017
Notch form selection 2
For manufacturer setting
NHQ2
― PC27, PC1027 For manufacturer setting ― 12
PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting LPF PC28, PC1028 Function selection C-7 *COP7
Vibration suppression control PC29 to PC30,
CC-Link IE FIELD
PB19, PB1019 VRF1 PC1029 to PC1030
vibration frequency setting
CONNECTION
Vibration suppression control PC31, PC1031 Software limit + Low LMPL
NETWORK
PB20, PB1020 VRF2
resonance frequency setting PC32, PC1032 Software limit + High LMPH
PB21 to PB22, PC33, PC1033 Software limit - Low LMNL
PB1021 to PB1022 PC34, PC1034 Software limit - High LMNH
PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter selection
Slight vibration suppression
VFBF PC35, PC1035 Internal torque limit 2 TL2 13
PB24, PB1024 *MVS PC36, PC1036 Status display selection *DMD
control selection
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PC37, PC1037 Position range output address + Low *LPPL
PC38, PC1038 Position range output address + High *LPPH
PB26, PB1026 Gain changing selection *CDP
PC39, PC1039 Position range output address - Low *LNPL
PB27, PB1027 Gain changing condition CDL
Position range output address -
STATION)
PB28, PB1028 Gain changing time constant CDT PC40, PC1040 *LNPH
High
Gain changing, Ratio of load PC41 to PC50,
PB29, PB1029 inertia moment to servo motor GD2B For manufacturer setting ―
PC1041 to PC1050
inertia moment
14
PB30, PB1030 Gain changing, Position loop gain PG2B becomes effective when the power is turned off once and
PB31, PB1031 Gain changing, Speed loop gain VG2B back on after setting the parameter data.
Gain changing, Speed integral
CONNECTION
PB32, PB1032 VICB (g) I/O setting parameter
compensation
Gain changing, Vibration (Via G4)
CC-Link
PB33, PB1033 suppression control vibration VRF1B Device name Item Symbol*1
frequency setting Input signal automatic ON
PD1, PD1001 *DIA1
Gain changing, Vibration selection 1
PB34, PB1034 suppression control resonance
frequency setting
VRF2B PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting ― 15
Input signal automatic ON
PD3, PD1003 *DIA3
PB35 to PB45, selection 3
PB1035 to PB1045 Input signal automatic ON
PD4, PD1004 *DIA4
CONNECTION
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting selection 4

INVERTER
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and PD5, PD1005 For manufacturer setting ―
back on after setting the parameter data. Input signal device selection 2
PD6, PD1006 *DI2
(CN6-2)
(f) Extension setting parameter
PD7, PD1007
(CN6-3)
*DI3
16
PC1, PC1001 For manufacturer setting ― PD8, PD1008 *DI4
(CN6-4)
SERVO AMPLIFIER
PC2, PC1002 Home position return type *ZTY

Output signal device selection 1
PD9, PD1009 *DO1
CONNECTION
PC3, PC1003 Direction of home position return *ZDIR (CN6-14)

PC4, PC1004 Home position return speed ZRF Output signal device selection 2
PD10, D1010 *DO2
PC5, PC1005 Creep speed CRF (CN6-15)

(i) Status display
Output signal device selection 3
PD11, PD1011 *DD3
(CN6-16)
Device
PD12 to PD15, Item Symbol
For manufacturer setting ― name
PD1012 to PD1015
ST0 Current position ―
PD16, PD1016 Input polarity selection *DIAB
ST1 Command position ―
PD17 to PD18,
For manufacturer setting ― ST2 Command remaining distance ―
PD1017 to PD1018
ST3 Point table No. ―
PD19, PD1019 Response level setting *DIF
ST4 Cumulative feedback pulses ―
PD20, 1020 Function selection D-1 *DOP1
ST5 Servo monitor speed ―
ST6 Droop pulses ―
ST7 Override voltage ―
ST8 Override ―
ST9 Analog torque command voltage/limit voltage ―
PD25 to PD30,
For manufacturer setting ― ST10 Regenerative load ratio ―
PD1025 to PD1030
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting ST11 Effective load ratio ―
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and ST12 Peak load ratio ―
back on after setting the parameter data. ST13 Instantaneous torque ―
ST14 Within one-revolution position ―
(h) Option unit parameter
ST15 ABS counter ―
Device name Item Symbol ST16 load inertia moment ratio ―
PO1, PO1001 For manufacturer setting ― ST17 Bus voltage ―
MR-J3-D01
PO2, PO1002 Input signal device selection 1 *ODI1 (j) Alarm
(CN10-21, 26)
MR-J3-D01 Device
Item Symbol
PO3, PO1003 Input signal device selection 2 *ODI2 name
(CN10-27, 28) AL0 Current alarm number ―
MR-J3-D01 AL1 Detailed data of current alarms ―
PO4, PO1004 Input signal device selection 3 *ODI3 AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs Current position ―
(CN10-29, 30) AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs Command position ―
MR-J3-D01 Servo status when alarm occurs Command
PO5, PO1005 Input signal device selection 4 *ODI4 AL13 ―
remaining distance
(CN10-31, 32)
MR-J3-D01 AL14 ―
Point table No.
PO6, PO1006 Input signal device selection 5 *ODI5
Servo status when alarm occurs Cumulative
(CN10-33, 34) AL15 ―
feedback pulses
MR-J3-D01
PO7, PO1007 Input signal device selection 6 *ODI6 AL16 ―
Servo motor speed
(CN10-35, 36)
AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs Droop pulses ―
MR-J3-D01
Servo status when alarm occurs Override
PO8, PO1008 Output signal device selection 1 *ODO1 AL18 ―
voltage
(CN10-46, 47)
AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs Override ―
MR-J3-D01
PO9, PO1009 Output signal device selection 2 *ODO2 Servo status when alarm occurs
AL20 ―
(CN10-48, 49) Analog torque limit voltage
PO10, PO1010 Function selection 0-1 *OOP1 Servo status when alarm occurs
AL21 ―
Regenerative load ratio
PO11, PO1011 For manufacturer setting ―
Servo status when alarm occurs Effective
PO12, PO1012 Function selection 0-3 *OOP3 AL22 ―
load ratio
MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 1 AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs Peak load ratio ―
PO13, PO1013 MOD1
output
MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 2 AL24 ―
PO14, PO1014 MOD2 Instantaneous torque
output
Servo status when alarm occurs Within one-
MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 1 AL25 ―
PO15, PO1015 M01 revolution position
offset
AL26 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ―
MR-J3-D01 Analog monitor 2
PO16, PO1016 M02 Servo status when alarm occurs
offset AL27 ―
PO17 to 20,
For manufacturer setting ― AL28 Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage ―
PO1017 to PO1020
Alarm number from alarm history,
MR-J3-D01 AL200 ―
PO21, PO1021 VCO Most recent alarm
Override offset
MR-J3-D01 AL201 ―
PO22, PO1022 TLO First alarm in past
Analog torque limitation offset
PO23 to 35, AL202 ―
For manufacturer setting ― Second alarm in past
PO1023 to PO1035
AL203 ―
Third alarm in past
AL204 ―
Fourth alarm in past

Device
name
Item Symbol
Device name
AUX1 to AUX255, Point table
Item Symbol
9
―
Alarm number from alarm history AUX1001 to AUX1255 (auxiliary function) No.1 to 255
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
AL205 ―
Fifth alarm in past MCD1 to MCD255, Point table
―
MELSECNET/H
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history MCD1001 to MCD1255 (M code) No.1 to 255
AL210 ―
Most recent alarm
AL211
First alarm in past
― (n) Input signal for test operation (for test operation)
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history Device
Second alarm in past
AL213
―
name
TMI0 Input signal for test operation 1 ―
10
Third alarm in past
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
AL214 ― TMI2 Input signal for test operation 3 ―
MELSECNET/10
Fourth alarm in past
AL215 ―
Fifth alarm in past (o) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)
AL230 ―
Most recent alarm Device
Item Symbol
Detailed alarm from alarm history name
AL231
First alarm in past
―
TMO0 Forced output from signal pin (CN6) ― 11
Detailed alarm from alarm history TMO1 Forced output from signal pin (CN10) ―
AL232 ―
Second alarm in past
AL233
Third alarm in past
― (p) Set data (for test operation)
CONNECTION
Detailed alarm from alarm history Device
NETWORK
Fourth alarm in past name
Detailed alarm from alarm history TMD0 Writes the speed (test mode) ―
AL235 ―
Fifth alarm in past
(k) External input
TMD1
constant (test mode)
―
12
TMD3 Writes the moving distance (test mode) ―
Device
Item Symbol
CC-Link IE FIELD
name
CONNECTION
DI0 Input device statuses 1 ―
NETWORK
DI3 External input pin statuses 1 ―
DI4 External input pin statuses 2
―
13
DI5 ―
through communication 1
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
DI6 ―
DI7 ―
STATION)
(l) External output

Device
14
Item Symbol
name
DO0 Output device statuses 1 ―
CONNECTION
DO2 Output device statuses 3 ― (Via G4)
CC-Link
DO3 External output pin statuses 1 ―

DO4 External output pin statuses 2 ―
(m) Point table (position) 15

POS1 to POS255, Point table
CONNECTION
―
POS1001 to POS1255 (position) No.1 to 255
INVERTER
SPD1 to SPD255, Point table

―
SPD1001 to SPD1255 (speed) No.1 to 255
Point table
ACT1 to ACT255,
(acceleration time constant) ―
ACT1001 to ACT1255
No.1 to 255 16
Point table
DCT1 to DCT255,
SERVO AMPLIFIER
(deceleration time constant) ―

DCT1001 to DCT1255
No.1 to 255
CONNECTION
DWL1 to DWL255, Point table

―
DWL1001 to DWL1255 (dwell) (DWL) No.1 to 255

(9) MELSERVO-J4-*A, JE-*A
POINT
Device
No.
Device name*2 Setting range Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD
represen
devices
tation
Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6 (1) For bit devices
Operation mode selection OM0 to OM2
(OM) OM4 [Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used.
Bit device
Instruction demand
TMB1 to TMB6 switch.
One-touch tuning command (2) For word devices, double word devices
OTI0 to OTI5 Only writing is possible.
(OTI)*5
Basic setting parameter PA1 to PA32
(PA)*1 PA1001 to PA1032
Gain
PB1 to PB64
filter parameter
*1
PB1001 to PB1064 The following shows correspondences between virtual
(PB)
Extension setting PC1 to PC80 amplifier used with the GOT.
parameter (PC)*1 PC1001 to PC1080
I/O setting parameter PD1 to PD48 (a) Servo amplifier request
(PD)*1 PD1001 to PD1048
Device
Extension setting 2 PE1 to PE64 Item Symbol
name
parameter (PE)*1 PE1001 to PE1064
SP0 Status display data clear ―
Extension setting 3 PF1 to PF48 SP1 Current alarm clear ―
parameter (PF)*1 PF1001 to PF1048
SP2 Alarm history clear ―
Linear servo motor/DD motor PL1 to PL48 SP3 External input signal prohibited ―
setting parameter (PL)*2 PL1001 to PL1048
SP4 External output signal prohibited ―
Word device
Status display (ST)*3 ST0 to ST41 Decimal SP5 External input signal resumed ―
AL0 to AL1 SP6 External output signal resumed ―
AL11 to AL25
Alarm (AL)*3 AL200 to AL205
AL210 to AL215
AL230 to AL235
Device
ALM0 to ALM1 Item Symbol
name
ALM11 to ALM52
Alarm (ALM)*3 ALM200 to ALM215
ALM220 to ALM235 OM1 JOG operation ―
ALM240 to ALM255 OM2 Positioning operation ―
Machine diagnosis data OM4 Output signal (DO) forced output ―
MD0 to MD11
(MD)*3
One-touch tuning data (c) Instruction demand (for test operation)
OTS0 to OTS3
(OTS)*3
Device
External input (DI)*4 DI0 to DI2 Item Symbol
name
External output (DO)*3 DO0 to DO1 TMB1 Temporary stop command ―
Lifetime diagnosis (ALD)*3 ALD0 to ALD1 Test operation (positioning operation) start
TMB2 ―
command
Double word device
TMI0 TMB3 Forward rotation direction ―

(for test operation) (TM0)
Forced output of signal pin TMB4 Reverse rotation direction ―
TMO0
(for test operation) (TMO) TMB5 Restart for remaining distance ―
Set data TMD0 to TMD1 TMB6 Remaining distance clear ―
(for test operation) (TMD) TMD3
*1 Use 1 to 80 of PA, PB, PC, PD, PE, PF and PL when the
GOT writes data to RAM of the servo amplifier.
Use 1001 to 1080 of PA, PB, PC, PD, PE, PF and PL when
the GOT write data to E2PROM of the servo amplifier.
Use PA, PB, PC, PD, PE, PF, PL 1001 to 1080 when reading
parameters to the servo amplifier RAM.
devices.
*5 Only writing is possible.

(d) One-touch tuning (f) Gain filter parameter 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device Device name Item Symbol*1
Item Symbol
MELSECNET/H
name Adaptive tuning mode
PB1, PB1001 PB1
One-touch tuning start command (adaptive filter II)
OTI0 ―
(Basic mode) Vibration suppression control
One-touch tuning start command PB2, PB1002 tuning mode (advanced vibration VRFT
OTI1 ― suppression control II)
(High mode)
OTI2
One-touch tuning start command
(Low mode)
― PB3, PB1003
Position command acceleration/
deceleration time constant PST 10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
OTI3 One-touch tuning stop command ― PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain FFC
MELSECNET/10
OTI4 Return to initial value ― PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting ―
OTI5 Return to value before adjustment ― PB6, PB1006 Load to motor inertia ratio GD2
PB7, PB1007 Model loop gain PG1
(e) Basic setting parameter PB8, PB1008 Position loop gain PG2
PA1, PA1001 Operation mode *STY
PB10, PB1010
PB11, PB1011
Speed differential compensation
VIC
VDC
11
PA2, PA1002 Regenerative option *REG
PB12, PB1012 Overshoot amount compensation OVA
PA3, PA1003*2 *ABS
PB13, PB1013
NH1
system
filter 1
CONNECTION
PB14, PB1014 Notch shape selection 1 NHQ1
NETWORK
PA5, PA1005 *FBP Machine resonance suppression
pulses per revolution PB15, PB1015 NH2
filter 2
Electronic gear numerator
PA6, PA1006 (command pulse multiplication
numerator)
CMX
PB17, PB1017 Shaft resonance suppression filter NHF 12
Electronic gear denominator PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting LPF
PA7, PA1007 (command pulse multiplication CDV Vibration suppression control 1
PB19, PB1019 VRF11
CC-Link IE FIELD
denominator) - Vibration frequency
CONNECTION
PA8, PA1008 Auto tuning mode ATU Vibration suppression control 1
PB20, PB1020 VRF12
NETWORK
PA9, PA1009 Auto tuning response RSP - Resonance frequency
PA10, PA1010 In-position range INP Vibration suppression control 1

PB21, PB1021 VRF13
- Vibration frequency dumping
PA11, PA1011 Forward rotation torque limit TLP
13
Vibration suppression control 1
PA12, PA1012 Reverse rotation torque limit TLN PB22, PB1022 VRF14
- Resonance frequency dumping
PA13, PA1013 Command pulse input form *PLSS
PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter selection VFBF
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PA15, PA1015 Encoder output pulses *ENR PB24, PB1024 *MVS
control
PA16, PA1016 Encoder output pulses 2 *ENR2 PB25, PB1025 Function selection B-1 *BOP1
PA17 to 18, PB26, PB1026 Gain switching function *CDP
STATION)
PA1017 to 1018
PB27, PB1027 Gain switching condition CDL
PA19, PA1019 Parameter writing inhibit *BLK
PB28, PB1028 Gain switching time constant CDT
PA20, PA1020
PA21, PA1021
Tough drive setting
Function selection A-3
*TDS
*AOP3 PB29, PB1029
Load to motor inertia ratio after
gain switching
GD2B 14
PA22, PA1022 For manufacturer setting ― Position loop gain after gain
PB30, PB1030 PG2B
Drive recorder arbitrary alarm switching
PA23, PA1023 DRAT
CONNECTION
trigger setting Speed loop gain after gain
PB31, PB1031 VG2B
PA24, PA1024 Function selection A-4 *AOP4 switching
(Via G4)
CC-Link
One-touch tuning - Overshoot Speed integral compensation

PA25, PA1025 OTHOV PB32, PB1032 VICB
permissible level after gain switching
PA26, PA1026*2 Function selection A-5 *AOP5 Vibration suppression control 1
PA27 to 32,
PA1027 to 1032
PB33, PB1033 - Vibration frequency after gain
switching
VRF1B
15
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting PB34, PB1034 - Resonance frequency after gain VRF2B
switching
CONNECTION

*2 The MELSERVO-JE series is equivalent to the MELSERVO- Vibration suppression control 1
INVERTER
J4 series, but they are different in parameter functions. PB35, PB1035 - Resonance frequency dumping VRF3B
When using the MELSERVO-JE series, refer to the after gain switching
following.
Technical manual for the MELSERVO-JE series PB36, PB1036 - Resonance frequency dumping VRF4B
servo amplifiers after gain switching 16
PB37 to 44,
SERVO AMPLIFIER
PB1037 to 1044
PB45, PB1045 Command notch filter CNHF
CONNECTION

PB46, PB1046 NH3
filter 3

Machine resonance suppression PC19, PC1019 Encoder output pulse selection *ENRS
PB48, PB1048 NH4
filter 4
PC20, PC1020*2 Station number setting *SNO
PB49, PB1049 Notch shape selection 4 NHQ4 *2
PB50, PB1050 NH5 PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 *COP1
filter 5
PB51, PB1051 Notch shape selection 5 NHQ5 PC23, PC1023 Function selection C-2 *COP2
Vibration suppression control 2 PC24, PC1024 Function selection C-3 *COP3

PB52, PB1052 VRF21 PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting ―
- Vibration frequency
Vibration suppression control 2 PC26, PC1026 Function selection C-5 *COP5
PB53, PB1053 VRF22
- Resonance frequency PC27, PC1027*2 Function selection C-6 *COP6
Vibration suppression control 2 PC28, PC1028 For manufacturer setting ―
PB54, PB1054 VRF23
- Vibration frequency dumping
PB55, PB1055 VRF24 PC30, PC1030 Acceleration time constant 2 STA2
- Resonance frequency dumping
PC31, PC1031 Deceleration time constant 2 STB2
PB56, PB1056 - Vibration frequency after gain VRF21B Command input pulse
PC32, PC1032 CMX2
switching multiplication numerator 2
Vibration suppression control 2 Command input pulse
PC33, PC1033 CMX3
PB57, PB1057 - Resonance frequency after gain VRF22B multiplication numerator 3
switching Command input pulse
PC34, PC1034 CMX4
Vibration suppression control 2 multiplication numerator 4
PB58, PB1058 - Vibration frequency dumping VRF23B PC35, PC1035 Internal torque limit 2 TL2
after gain switching PC36, PC1036 Status display selection *DMD
Vibration suppression control 2 Analog speed command offset
PB59, PB1059 - Resonance frequency dumping VRF24B PC37, PC1037 VCO
Analog speed limit offset
after gain switching
Analog torque command offset
Model loop gain after gain PC38, PC1038 TPO
PB60, PB1060 PG1B Analog torque limit offset
switching
PB61 to 64, PC39, PC1039 Analog monitor 1 offset MO1
For manufacturer setting ― PC40, PC1040 Analog monitor 2 offset MO2
PB1061 to 1064
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting PC41 to 42,
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and PC1041 to 1042
back on after setting the parameter data. Error excessive alarm detection
PC43, PC1043 ERZ
level
(g) Extension setting parameter PC44 to 50,
PC1044 to 1050
Forced stop deceleration time
PC1, PC1001 Acceleration time constant STA PC51, PC1051 RSBR
constant
PC2, PC1002 Deceleration time constant STB PC52, PC1052 For manufacturer setting ―
S-pattern acceleration/ PC53, PC1053 For manufacturer setting ―
PC3, PC1003 STC
Vertical axis freefall prevention
PC4, PC1004 Torque command time constant TQC PC54, PC1054 RSUP1
compensation amount
Internal speed command 1 PC55 to PC59,
PC5, PC1005 SC1 For manufacturer setting ―
Internal speed limit 1 PC1055 to PC1059
Internal speed command 2 PC60, PC1060 Function selection C-D *COPD
PC6, PC1006 SC2
Internal speed limit 2 PC61 to PC80,
Internal speed command 3 PC1061 to PC1080
PC7, PC1007 SC3
Internal speed limit 3 *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting
Internal speed command 4 back on after setting the parameter data.
PC8, PC1008 SC4
Internal speed limit 4 *2 The MELSERVO-JE series is equivalent to the MELSERVO-
Internal speed command 5 J4 series, but they are different in parameter functions.
PC9, PC1009 SC5 When using the MELSERVO-JE series, refer to the
Internal speed limit 5 following.
Internal speed command 6 Technical manual for the MELSERVO-JE series
PC10, PC1010 SC6
Internal speed limit 6 servo amplifiers
PC11, PC1011
Internal speed command 7
SC7
(h) I/O setting parameter
Internal speed limit 7
Analog speed command -
Maximum speed Input signal automatic on
PC12, PC1012 VCM PD1, PD1001 *DIA1
Analog speed limit - Maximum selection 1
speed PD2, PD1002 For manufacturer setting ―
Analog torque command PD3, PD1003 Input device selection 1L *DI1L
PC13, PC1013 TLC
maximum output PD4, PD1004 Input device selection 1H *DI1H
PC14, PC1014 Analog monitor 1 output MOD1 PD5, PD1005 *2 Input device selection 2L *DI2L
PD6, PD1006*2 Input device selection 2H *DI2H
Electromagnetic brake sequence
PC16, PC1016 MBR PD7, PD1007*2 Input device selection 3L *DI3L
output
PC17, PC1017 Zero speed ZSP PD8, PD1008*2 Input device selection 3H *DI3H
PC18, PC1018 Alarm history clear *BPS PD9, PD1009*2 Input device selection 4L *DI4L

Device name
*2
Item Symbol*1 Device
name
Item Symbol 9
PD10, PD1010 Input device selection 4H *DI4H
TO PLC NETWORK)
PF23, Vibration tough drive - Oscillation detection
CONNECTION (PLC
PD11, PD1011 Input device selection 5L *DI5L OSCL1
PF1023 level
MELSECNET/H
PF24,
PD13, PD1013 Input device selection 6L *DI6L Vibration tough drive function selection OSCL2
PF1024
PF25, Instantaneous power failure tough drive
PD15 to 16, CVAT
For manufacturer setting ― PF1025 - Detection time
PD1015 to 1016
PF26 to 30,
PD17, PD1017
PD18, PD1018
Input device selection 8L
Input device selection 8H
*DI8L
*DI8H
PF1026 to For manufacturer setting ― 10
1030
TO PLC NETWORK)
PD19, PD1019 Input device selection 9L *DI9L
CONNECTION (PLC
PF31, Machine diagnosis function - Friction
PD20, PD1020 Input device selection 9H *DI9H FRIC
MELSECNET/10
PF1031 judgement speed
*2 Input device selection 10L *DI10L
PD21, PD1021 PF32 to 48,
PD22, PD1022*2 Input device selection 10H *DI10H PF1032 to For manufacturer setting ―
1048
PD23, PD1023*2 Output device selection 1 *DO1
*1 The MELSERVO-JE series is equivalent to the MELSERVO-
PD24, PD1024 Output device selection 2 *DO2
J4 series, but they are different in parameter functions.
PD25, PD1025 Output device selection 3 *DO3 When using the MELSERVO-JE series, refer to the
following.
11
PD26, PD1026*2 Output device selection 4 *DO4
PD27, PD1027 For manufacturer setting ― Technical manual for the MELSERVO-JE series
servo amplifiers
(k) Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter
CONNECTION
PD29, PD1029 Input filter setting *DIF
NETWORK
PD32, PD1032 Function selection D-3 *DOP3 Linear servo motor/DD motor
PL1, PL1001 *LIT1
PD33, PD1033
PD34, PD1034
For manufacturer setting
Function selection D-5
―
*DOP5
function selection 1
Linear encoder resolution -
12
PL2, PL1002 *LIM
Numerator
PD35 to 48,
PD1035 to 1048 Linear encoder resolution -
CC-Link IE FIELD
PL3, PL1003 *LID
Denominator
CONNECTION
NETWORK
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and Linear servo motor/DD motor
back on after setting the parameter data. PL4, PL1004 *LIT2
*2 The MELSERVO-JE series is equivalent to the MELSERVO-
J4 series, but they are different in parameter functions. Position deviation error detection
PL5, PL1005 LB1
When using the MELSERVO-JE series, refer to the level
following.
PL6, PL1006
Speed deviation error detection
LB2
13
Technical manual for the MELSERVO-JE series level
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
servo amplifiers
CC-Link CONNECTION
Torque/thrust deviation error
PL7, PL1007 LB3
(i) Extension setting 2 parameter detection level
Linear servo motor/DD motor
Device name Item Symbol PL8, PL1008 *LIT3
STATION)
PE1 to 40, Magnetic pole detection voltage
PE1000 to 1040 PL9, PL1009 LPWM
level
PE41, PE1041
PE42 to 64,
Function selection E-3 EOP3
PL10 to PL16,
14
For manufacturer setting ― PL1010 to PL1016
PE1042 to 1064
Magnetic pole detection - Minute
PL17, PL1017 position detection method - LTSTS
CONNECTION
(j) Extension setting 3 parameter Function selection
Device Magnetic pole detection - Minute (Via G4)

CC-Link
Item Symbol PL18, PL1018 position detection method - IDLV

name
PF1 to 8, Identification signal amplitude
PF1001 to
1008
For manufacturer setting ― PL19 to PL48,
PL1019 to PL1048
For manufacturer setting ― 15
PF9, *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting
Function selection F-5 *FOP5 becomes effective when the power is turned off once and
PF1009*1
CONNECTION
PF10 to 14,
INVERTER
PF1010 to For manufacturer setting ― (l) Status display

1014
Device
PF15, Item Symbol
Electronic dynamic brake operating time DBT name
*1
PF1015
PF16 to 20,
ST0
ST1
Comulative feedback pulse
Servo motor speed
―
―
16
PF1016 to For manufacturer setting ―
ST2 Droop pulse ―
SERVO AMPLIFIER
1020
ST3 Cumulative command pulse ―
PF21,
CONNECTION
Drive recorder switching time setting DRT ST4 Command pulse frequency ―
PF1021
ST5 Analog speed command voltage/limit voltage ―
PF22,
PF1022

Device Device
name name
Analog torque command voltage/limit Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most
ST6 ― AL210 ―
voltage recent alarm
ST7 Regenerative load ratio ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first
AL211 ―
ST8 Effetive load ratio ― alarm in past
ST9 Peak load ratio ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history
AL212 ―
ST10 Instantaneous torque ―
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third
ST11 Within one-revolution position(1 pulse unit) ― AL213 ―
alarm in past
ST12 ABS counter ―
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth
ST13 Load inertia moment ratio ― AL214 ―
alarm in past
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth
ST15 to 31 For manufacturer setting ― AL215 ―
alarm in past
ST32 Internal temperature of encoder ― Detailed alarm from Alarm History most
AL230 ―
ST33 Setting time ― recent alarm
ST34 Oscillation detection frequency ― Detailed alarm from Alarm History first alarm
AL231 ―
ST35 Number of tough drives ― in past
ST36 to 39 For manufacturer setting ― Detailed alarm from Alarm History second
AL232 ―
alarm in past
Unit power consumption 1
ST40 ― Detailed alarm from Alarm History third alarm
(incremwnt of 1 W) AL233 ―
in past
Unit total power consumption 1
ST41 ― Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth
(incremwnt of 1 Wh) AL234 ―
alarm in past
Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm
(m) Alarm (compatible with MELSERVO-J3-*A) AL235 ―
in past
Device *1 The MELSERVO-JE series is equivalent to the MELSERVO-
Item Symbol J4 series, but they are different in parameter functions.
name
When using the MELSERVO-JE series, refer to the
AL0 Current alarm number ―
following.
AL1*1 Detailed data of current alarms ―
Technical manual for the MELSERVO-JE series
Servo status when alarm occurs Cumulative servo amplifiers
AL11 ―
feedback pulses
(n) Alarm (extended for MELSERVO-J4-*A)
Servo status when alarm occurs Servo motor
AL12 ―
speed Device
Item Symbol
Servo status when alarm occurs Droop name
AL13 ―
pulses ALM0 Current alarm number ―
AL14 ― ALM1*1 Detailed data of current alarms ―
command pulses
Servo status when alarm occurs Cumulative
Servo status when alarm occurs command ALM11 ―
AL15 ― feedback pulses
pulse frequency
Servo status when alarm occurs analog ALM12 ―
AL16 ― speed
speed command voltage/limit voltage
Servo status when alarm occurs Droop
Servo status when alarm occurs analog ALM13 ―
AL17 ― pulses
torque command voltage/limit voltage
Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative ALM14 ―
AL18 ― command pulses
load ratio
Servo status when alarm occurs effective ALM15 ―
AL19 ― pulse frequency
load ratio
Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ALM16 ―
AL20 ― speed command voltage/limit voltage
ratio
Servo status when alarm occurs ALM17 ―
AL21 ― torque command voltage/limit voltage
Instantaneous torque
Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative
Servo states when alarm occurs Within ALM18 ―
AL22 ― load ratio
onerevolution position(1 pulse unit)
Servo status when alarm occurs effective
AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― ALM19 ―
load ratio
Servo status when alarm occurs load inertia
AL24 ― Servo status when alarm occurs peak load
moment ratio ALM20 ―
ratio
AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage ―
Alarm number from Alarm History most ALM21 ―
AL200 ― Instantaneous torque
recent alarm
Servo states when alarm occurs Within
Alarm number from Alarm History first alarm ALM22 ―
AL201 ― onerevolution position(1 pulse unit)
in past
ALM23 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ―
Alarm number from Alarm History second
AL202 ― Servo status when alarm occurs load inertia
alarm in past ALM24 ―
moment ratio
Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm
AL203 ― ALM25 Servo status when alarm occurs Bus voltage ―
in past
ALM
Alarm number from Alarm History fourth For manufacturer setting ―
AL204 ― 26 to 42
alarm in past
Servo states when alarm occurs Internal
Alarm number from Alarm History fifth alarm ALM43 ―
AL205 ― temperature of encoder
in past
ALM44 Servo states when alarm occurs Setting time ―

Device
name
Item Symbol
Device
name
Item Symbol 9
Servo states when alarm occurs Oscillation Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 13th
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
ALM45 ― ALM233 ―
detection frequency alarm in past
MELSECNET/H
Servo states when alarm occurs Number of Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 14th
ALM46 ― ALM234 ―
tough drives alarm in past
ALM Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 15th
For manufacturer setting ― ALM235 ―
47 to 50 alarm in past
Servo states when alarm occurs Unit power Detailed alarm from Alarm History most
ALM51 ― ALM240*1 ―
consumption 1 (incremwnt of 1 W)
Servo states when alarm occurs Unit total
recent alarm
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 1st alarm
10
ALM52 ― ALM241*1 ―
power consumption 1 (incremwnt of 1 Wh) in past
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Alarm number from Alarm History most Detailed alarm from Alarm History 2nd alarm
ALM242*1
MELSECNET/10
ALM200 ― ―
recent alarm in past
Alarm number from Alarm History 1st alarm in Detailed alarm from Alarm History 3rd alarm
ALM201 ― ALM243*1 ―
past in past
Alarm number from Alarm History 2nd alarm Detailed alarm from Alarm History 4th alarm
ALM202 ― ALM244*1 ―
in past in past
ALM203
Alarm number from Alarm History 3rd alarm
in past
― ALM245*1
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 5th alarm
in past
― 11
Alarm number from Alarm History 4th alarm Detailed alarm from Alarm History 6th alarm
ALM204
in past
― ALM246*1 ―
in past
ALM205 ― ALM247*1 ―
CONNECTION
in past in past
NETWORK
ALM206 Alarm number from Alarm History 6th alarm ― Detailed alarm from Alarm History 8th alarm
in past ALM248*1 ―
in past
ALM207 ― ALM249*1 ―
ALM208
in past
Alarm number from Alarm History 8th alarm
―
in past
12
in past
ALM209 ― Detailed alarm from Alarm History 11th alarm
CC-Link IE FIELD
in past
CONNECTION
NETWORK
in past
in past
ALM212
in past
―
ALM254*1
in past
― 13
ALM213 ―
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
in past Detailed alarm from Alarm History 15th alarm
ALM255*1 ―
in past
ALM214 ― *1 The MELSERVO-JE series is equivalent to the MELSERVO-
in past
J4 series, but they are different in parameter functions.
STATION)
ALM215 ― When using the MELSERVO-JE series, refer to the
in past following.
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most Technical manual for the MELSERVO-JE series
ALM220 ―
recent alarm
ALM221
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 1st
―
servo amplifiers
(o) Machine diagnosis data
14
alarm in past
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 2nd Device
ALM222 ― Item Symbol
alarm in past name
ALM223
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 3rd
― MD0 Machine diagnosis data parameter number ― CONNECTION
alarm in past (Via G4)
CC-Link
Machine diagnosis data shift judgment

Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 4th MD1 ―
ALM224 ― (test mode)
alarm in past
MD2 Machine diagnosis data status ―
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 5th
ALM225
alarm in past
―
MD3
Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction
torque in positive direction
― 15
ALM226 ― Machine diagnosis data friction torque at
alarm in past MD4 ―
rated speed in positive direction
CONNECTION
ALM227 ― Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction

torque in negative direction
INVERTER

ALM228 ― Machine diagnosis data friction torque at
rated speed in negative direction
ALM229 ― Machine diagnosis data oscillation frequency
ALM230
―
(motor is stopped)
Machine diagnosis data vibration level
16
(motor is stopped)
SERVO AMPLIFIER

ALM231 ― Machine diagnosis data oscillation frequency
CONNECTION
(motor is operating)
ALM232 ― Machine diagnosis data vibration level
(motor is operating)
MD11 Machine diagnosis data rated speed ―

(p) One-touch tuning data
(10)MELSERVO-J4-*A-RJ
Device
Item Symbol Device
name
*2
No.
OTS0 One-touch tuning status confirmation ― Device name Setting range
represe
OTS1 Error code list ―
ntation
OTS2 Setting time ―
Servo amplifier request (SP) SP0 to SP6
OTS3 Overshoot amount ―
Operation mode selection OM0 to OM2
(OM) OM4 to OM5
Bit device
(q) External input Instruction demand (for test Decimal
TMB1 to TMB6
operation) (TMB)
One-touch tuning command
DI0 Input device statuses ― OTI0 to OTI5
(OTI)*1
PA1 to PA32
Statuses of input devices Basic setting parameter (PA)*2
PA1001 to PA1032
DI2 switched on through ―
communication PB1 to PB64
Gain filter parameter (PB)*2
PB1001 to PB1064
(r) External output Extension setting parameter PC1 to PC80
(PC)*2 PC1001 to PC1080
Device
Item Symbol PD1 to PD48
name
I/O setting parameter (PD)*2
DO0 Output device statuses ― PD1001 to PD1048
DO1 External output pin statuses ― Extension setting No.2 PE1 to PE64
parameter (PE)*2 PE1001 to PE1064
(s) Lifetime diagnosis Extension setting No.3 PF1 to PF48

parameter (PF)*2 PF1001 to PF1048
Device
Item Symbol PO1 to PO32
name Option unit parameter (PO)*2
PO1001 to PO1032
ALD0 Cumulative energization time ―
Linear servo motor/DD motor PL1 to PL48
ALD1 Number of ON/OFF times for rush relay ―
setting parameter (PL)*2 PL1001 to PL1048
Positioning control parameter PT1 to PT48
(t) Input signal for test operation (for test operation)
(PT)*2 PT1001 to PT1048
Device
Item Symbol Status display (ST)*4 ST0 to ST48
name
Alarm (current alarm, AL0 to AL1
TMI0 Input signal for test operation ―
compatible with J3) (AL)*4 AL11 to AL25
AL200 to AL205
(u) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation) Alarm (alarm history,
Word device
*4
AL210 to AL215
compatible with J3) (AL)
Device AL230 to AL235 Decimal
Item Symbol
name Alarm (current alarm, ALM0 to ALM1
TMO0 Forced output from signal pin ― extended for J4) (ALM)*4 ALM11 to ALM59
ALM200 to ALM215
Alarm (alarm history, extended
(v) Set data (for test operation) *4
ALM220 to ALM235
for J4) (ALM)
ALM240 to ALM255
Device
Item Symbol POS1 to POS255
name Point table (position) (POS)*5
POS1001 to POS1255
SPD1 to SPD255
TMD1
― Point table (speed) (SPD)*5
SPD1001 to SPD1255
constant (test mode)
TMD3 Writes the moving distance (test mode) ― Point table (acceleration time ACT1 to ACT255
constant) (ACT)*5 ACT1001 to ACT1255
Point table (deceleration time DCT1 to DCT255
constant) (DCT)*5 DCT1001 to DCT1255
DWL1 to DWL255
Point table (dwell) (DWL)*5
DWL1001 to DWL1255
Point table (auxiliary function) AUX1 to AUX255
(AUX)*5 AUX1001 to AUX1255
MCD1 to MCD255
Point table (M code) (MCD)*5*6
MCD1001 to MCD1255
Machine diagnosis data (MD)*3 MD0 to MD11
One-touch tuning data (OTS)*4 OTS0 to OTS3
External output (DO)*4 DO0 to DO4

Device
No.
The following shows correspondences between 9
Device name*2 Setting range virtual devices for servo amplifier and data of the
TO PLC NETWORK)
represe
CONNECTION (PLC
ntation servo amplifier used with the GOT.
MELSECNET/H
Current position latch data
LD0 to LD1 (a) Servo amplifier request
(LD)*4
The value of the general- RR1 to RR4 Device
Item Symbol
purpose register (Rx) (RR)*8 RR1001 to RR1004 name
Double word device

purpose register (Dx) (RD)
RD1 to RD4
SP0
SP1
Status display data clear
Current alarm clear
―
―
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
Decimal
CONNECTION (PLC
Lifetime diagnosis (ALD)*3 ALD0 to ALD1 SP2 Alarm history clear ―
MELSECNET/10
Input signal for test operation SP3 External input signal prohibited ―
TMI0 to TMI2
(for test operation) (TMI) SP4 External output signal prohibited ―
Forced output of signal pin (for SP5 External input signal resumed ―
TMO0
test operation) (TMO) SP6 External output signal resumed ―
Set data (for test operation) TMD0 to TMD1
(TMD)
*1
TMD3
(b) Operation mode selection 11
*2 Use 1 to 80 of PA, PB, PC, PD, PE, PF, PL, PO, and PT Device
when the GOT writes data to RAM of the servo amplifier. Item Symbol
name
Use 1001 to 1080 of PA, PB, PC, PD, PE, PF, PL, PO, and
PT when the GOT writes data to E2PROM of the servo OM0 Normal mode (not test operation mode) ―
CONNECTION
amplifier.
NETWORK
Use PA, PB, PC, PD, PE, PF, PL, PO, and PT 1001 to 1080
when reading parameters to the servo amplifier RAM. OM2 Positioning operation ―
devices.
*4
*5
Only reading is possible.
When the GOT writes data to point tables, use 1001 to 1255
OM5 Single-step feed operation ―
12
of POS, SPD, ACT, DCT, DWL, AUX, and MCD (E2PROM
area). (c) Instruction demand (for test operation)
Even if the GOT writes a value to POS, SPD, ACT, DCT,
CC-Link IE FIELD
DWL, AUX, or MCD (1 to 255) in the RAM area, the value is Device
CONNECTION
Item Symbol
not reflected. name
NETWORK
*6 MCD cannot be used as a real number.
*7 Only reading is possible for DI0 to DI3. TMB1 Temporary stop command ―
*8 Use the integer number when writing parameters to Rx. Test operation (positioning operation) start
TMB2 ―
command
TMB3 Forward rotation direction ― 13
POINT TMB4 Reverse rotation direction ―
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
TMB5 Restart for remaining distance ―
Precautions for SP, OM, TMB, TMI, TMO, and TMD TMB6 Remaining distance clear ―
devices
STATION)
(1) For bit devices (d) One-touch tuning
Device
[Alternate] of a bit switch cannot be used. Item Symbol
name
14
switch. OTI0 ―
(Basic mode)
Only writing is possible. OTI1 ―
CONNECTION
(High mode)
One-touch tuning start command (Via G4)
CC-Link
OTI2 ―
(Low mode)
OTI3 One-touch tuning stop command ―
OTI4
OTI5
Return to initial value
Return to value before adjustment
―
―
15
(e) Basic setting parameter
CONNECTION
INVERTER

PA1, PA1001 Operation mode *STY
PA2, PA1002 Regenerative brake option *REG
PA3, PA1003
system
*ABS 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

CONNECTION
PA5, PA1005 *FBP

pulses per revolution

Electronic gear numerator Machine resonance suppression
PB15, PB1015 NH2
(command pulse multiplication filter 2
PA6, PA1006 *CMX
numerator)/Number of gear teeth PB16, PB1016 Notch form selection 2 NHQ2
on machine side
PB17, PB1017 Shaft resonance suppression filter NHF
Electronic gear denominator
PB18, PB1018 Low-pass filter setting LPF
(command pulse multiplication
PA7, PA1007 *CDV Vibration suppression control 1 -
denominator)/Number of gear PB19, PB1019 VRF11
Vibration frequency
teeth on servo motor side
Vibration suppression control 1 -
PA8, PA1008 Auto tuning mode ATU PB20, PB1020 VRF12
Resonance frequency
PA10, PA1010 In-position range INP PB21, PB1021 VRF13
Vibration frequency dumping
Forward rotation torque limit/
PA11, PA1011 TLP Vibration suppression control 1 -
positive direction thrust limit PB22, PB1022 VRF14
Resonance frequency dumping
Reverse rotation torque limit/
PA12, PA1012 TLN PB23, PB1023 Low-pass filter selection VFBF
negative direction thrust limit
PA13, PA1013 Command pulse input form *PLSS PB24, PB1024 *MVS
control selection
Rotation direction selection/
PA14, PA1014 *POL PB25, PB1025 Function selection B-1 *BOP1
travel direction selection
PB26, PB1026 Gain switching function *CDP
PB27, PB1027 Gain changing condition CDL
PA16, PA1016 Encoder output pulses 2 *ENR2
PB28, PB1028 Gain changing time constant CDT
PA17, PA1017 Servo motor series setting *MSR
Load to motor inertia ratio/load to
PA18, PA1018 Servo motor type setting *MTY
PB29, PB1029 motor mass ratio after gain GD2B
PA19, PA1019 Parameter block *BLK switching
PA20, PA1020 Tough drive setting *TDS PB30, PB1030 Gain changing, Position loop gain PG2B
PA21, PA1021 Function selection A-3 *AOP3 PB31, PB1031 Gain changing, Speed loop gain VG2B
PA22, PA1022 For manufacturer setting ― Gain changing, Speed integral
PB32, PB1032 VICB
Drive recorder arbitrary alarm compensation
PA23, PA1023 DRAT
trigger setting Vibration suppression control 1 -
PA24, PA1024 Function selection A-4 AOP4 PB33, PB1033 Vibration frequency after gain VRF1B
One-touch tuning - Overshoot switching
PA25, PA1025 OTHOV
permissible level Vibration suppression control 1 -
PA26, PA1026 Function selection A-5 *AOP5 PB34, PB1034 Resonance frequency after gain VRF2B
switching
PA27 to PA32,
For manufacturer setting ― Vibration suppression control 1 -
PA1027 to PA1032
PB35, PB1035 Vibration frequency damping after VRF3B
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and gain switching
back on after setting the parameter data. Vibration suppression control 1 -
PB36, PB1036 Resonance frequency damping VRF4B
(f) Gain filter parameter after gain switching
PB37 to PB44,
Device name Item Symbol*1 For manufacturer setting ―
PB1037 to PB1044
Adaptive tuning mode (adaptive
PB1, PB1001 FILT PB45, PB1045 Command notch filter CNHF
filter II)
Vibration suppression control PB46, PB1046 NH3
filter 3
PB2, PB1002 tuning mode (advanced vibration VRFT
suppression control II) PB47, PB1047 Notch form selection 3 NHQ3
Position command acceleration/ Machine resonance suppression

PB48, PB1048 NH4
PB3, PB1003 deceleration time constant PST filter 4
(position smoothing) PB49, PB1049 Notch form selection 4 NHQ4
PB4, PB1004 Feed forward gain FFC Machine resonance suppression
PB50, PB1050 NH5
PB5, PB1005 For manufacturer setting ― filter 5
Load to motor inertia ratio/load to PB51, PB1051 Notch form selection 5 NHQ5
PB6, PB1006 GD2
motor mass ratio Vibration suppression control 2 -
PB52, PB1052 VRF21
PB7, PB1007 Model control gain PG1 Vibration frequency
PB8, PB1008 Position loop gain PG2 Vibration suppression control 2 -

PB53, PB1053 VRF22
Resonance frequency
PB10, PB1010 Speed integral compensation VIC PB54, PB1054 VRF23
Vibration frequency dumping
PB12, PB1012 Overshoot amount compensation OVA PB55, PB1055 VRF24
Resonance frequency dumping
Machine resonance suppression Vibration suppression control 2 -
PB13, PB1013 NH1
filter 1 PB56, PB1056 Vibration frequency after gain VRF21B
PB14, PB1014 Notch form selection 1 NHQ1 switching

Device name Item Symbol*1 Device name Item Symbol*1 9
Vibration suppression control 2 - Home position return
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PB57, PB1057 Resonance frequency after gain VRF22B PC31, PC1031 deceleration time constant/ STB2
switching Deceleration time constant 2
MELSECNET/H
Vibration suppression control 2 - Command pulse multiplying
PC32, PC1032 CMX2
PB58, PB1058 Vibration frequency damping after VRF23B factor numerator 2
gain switching Command pulse multiplying
PC33, PC1033 CMX3
Vibration suppression control 2 - factor numerator 3
PB59, PB1059 Resonance frequency damping
after gain switching
VRF24B
PC34, PC1034
factor numerator 4
CMX4 10
Model loop gain after gain
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
PB60, PB1060 PG1B Internal torque limit 2/internal
switching PC35, PC1035 TL2
thrust limit 2
MELSECNET/10
PB61 to PB64, PC36, PC1036 Status display selection *DMD
PB1061 to PB1064
Analog speed command offset/
PC37, PC1037 VCO
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting limit offset
back on after setting the parameter data. PC38, PC1038 Analog torque limitation offset TPO
(g) Extension setting parameter

PC39, PC1039
PC40, PC1040
Analog monitor 1 offset
Analog monitor 2 offset
MO1
MO2
11
PC41 to PC42,
Device name Item Symbol*1 For manufacturer setting ―
PC1041 to PC1042
JOG operation acceleration time
Error excessive alarm detection
CONNECTION
PC1, PC1001 constant/Acceleration time STA PC43, PC1043 ERZ
level
NETWORK
constant 1
JOG operation deceleration time
PC2, PC1002 constant/Deceleration time STB PC45, PC1045 Function selection C-A *COPA
constant 1 PC46 to PC50,
PC1046 to PC1050
S-pattern acceleration/
PC3, PC1003 *STC
deceleration time constant Forced stop deceleration time
PC51, PC1051 RSBR
constant
CC-Link IE FIELD
Torque command time constant/
PC4, PC1004 TQC
CONNECTION
thrust command time constant PC52 to PC53,
NETWORK
PC5, PC1005 Automatic operation speed 1 SC1 PC1052 to PC1053
PC6, PC1006 Automatic operation speed 2 SC2 Vertical axis freefall prevention
PC54, PC1054 RSUP1
compensation amount
PC7, PC1007 Manual operation speed 1 SC3
PC55 to PC59,
PC1055 to PC1059
PC60, PC1060 Function selection C-D *COPD
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PC61 to PC72,
PC11, PC1011 Internal speed command7/limit7 SC7 For manufacturer setting ―
PC1061 to PC1072
Analog speed / limit command - PC73, PC1073 Error excessive warning level ERW
PC12, PC1012 VCM
STATION)
Maximum speed
PC74 to PC80,
Analog torque command For manufacturer setting ―
PC13, PC1013 TLC PC1074 to PC1080
maximum output
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and 14
PC15, PC1015 Analog monitor 2 output MOD2 back on after setting the parameter data.
PC16, PC1016 MBR (h) I/O setting parameter
sequence output
PC17, PC1017 Zero speed ZSP CONNECTION
Device name Item Symbol*1 (Via G4)
CC-Link
PC18, PC1018 Alarm history clear *BPS Input signal automatic on

PD1, PD1001 *DIA1
PC19, PC1019 Encoder output pulses selection *ENRS selection 1
15
RS-422 communication function PD3, PD1003 Input device selection 1L *DI1L
PC21, PC1021 *SOP
selection PD4, PD1004 Input device selection 1H *DI1H
PC22, PC1022 Function selection C-1 *COP1 PD5, PD1005 Input device selection 2L *DI2L
CONNECTION
PC23, PC1023 Function selection C-2 *COP2 PD6, PD1006 Input device selection 2H *DI2H
INVERTER
PC25, PC1025 For manufacturer setting ― PD8, PD1008 Input device selection 3H *DI3H
PC27, PC1027
PC28, PC1028
Function selection C-6
Function selection C-7
*COP6
*COP7
PD10, PD1010 Input device selection 4H *DI4H 16
SERVO AMPLIFIER

Home position return PD13, PD1013 Input device selection 6L *DI6L
CONNECTION
PC30, PC1030 acceleration time constant/ STA2

Acceleration time constant 2

PD15 to PD16, Fully closed loop control -
PD1015 to PD1016 PE34, PE1034 Feedback pulse electronic gear 2 *FBN2
PD17, PD1017 Input device selection 8L *DI8L - Numerator
PD18, PD1018 Input device selection 8H *DI8H Fully closed loop control -
PE35, PE1035 Feedback pulse electronic gear 2 *FBD2
- Denominator
PE36 to PE40,
PD21, PD1021 Input device selection 10L *DI10L For manufacturer setting ―
PE1036 to PE1040
PE41, PE1041 Function selection E-3 EOP3
PE42 to PE43,
PD24, PD1024 Output device selection 2 *DO2 For manufacturer setting ―
PE1042 to PE1043
PD25, PD1025 Output device selection 3 *DO3 Lost motion compensation
PD26, PD1026 Output device selection 4 *DO4 PE44, PE1044 positive-side compensation value LMCP
PD27, PD1027 For manufacturer setting ― selection
PD28, PD1028 Output device selection 6 *DO6 Lost motion compensation

PE45, PE1045 negative-side compensation LMCN
PD29, PD1029 Response level setting *DIF
value selection
PE46, PE1046 Lost motion filter setting LMFLT
PE47, PE1047 Torque offset TOF
Lost motion compensation
PD33, PD1033 Function selection D-4 *DOP4 PE48, PE1048 *LMOP
function selection
PE49, PE1049 Lost motion compensation timing LMCD
PD35 to PD40,
For manufacturer setting ― Lost motion compensation non-
PD1035 to PD1040 PE50, PE1050 LMCT
sensitive band
Input signal automatic on
PD41, PD1041 *DIA3 PE51 to PE64,
selection 3 For manufacturer setting ―
PE1051 to PE1064
Input signal automatic on
PD42, PD1042 *DIA4 *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting
selection 4 becomes effective when the power is turned off once and
PD43, PD1043 Input device selection 11L *DI11L back on after setting the parameter data.
(j) Extension setting No.3 parameter
PD46, PD1046 Input device selection 12H *DI12H Device name Item Symbol*1
PD47, PD1047 Output device selection 7 *DO7 PF1 to 8,
PD48, PD1048 For manufacturer setting ― PF1001 to PF1008
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting PF9, PF1009 Function selection F-5 *FOP5
PF10 to PF14,
back on after setting the parameter data. For manufacturer setting ―
PF1010 to PF1014
(i) Extension setting No.2 parameter PF15, PF1015
Electronic dynamic brake
DBT
operating time
Device name Item *1
Symbol PF16 to PF20,
Fully closed loop function PF1016 to PF1020
PE1, PE1001 *FCT1
selection 1 Drive recorder switching time
PF21, PF1021 DRT
PE2, PE1002 For manufacturer setting ― setting
Fully closed loop function PF22, PF1022 For manufacturer setting ―

PE3, PE1003 *FCT2
selection 2 Vibration tough drive - Oscillation
PF23, PF1023 OSCL1
Fully closed loop control - detection level
PE4, PE1004 Feedback pulse electronic gear 1 *FBN Vibration tough drive function
PF24, PF1024 OSCL2
- Numerator selection
Fully closed loop control - SEMI-F47 function -
PE5, PE1005 Feedback pulse electronic gear 1 *FBD PF25, PF1025 Instantaneous power failure CVAT
- Denominator detection time
Fully closed loop control - Speed PF26 to PF30,
PE6, PE1006 BC1 For manufacturer setting ―
deviation error detection level PF1026 to PF1030
Fully closed loop control - Machine diagnosis function -
PF31, PF1031 FRIC
PE7, PE1007 Position deviation error detection BC2 Friction judgement speed
level PF32 to PF33,
Fully closed loop dual feedback PF1032 to PF1033
PE8, PE1008 DUF
filter RS-422 communication function
PF34, PF1034 *SOP3
PE9, PE1009 For manufacturer setting ― selection 3
Fully closed loop function PF35 to PF48,
PE10, PE1010 FCT3 For manufacturer setting ―
selection 3 PF1035 to PF1048
PE11 to PE33, *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting
PE1011 to PE1033 becomes effective when the power is turned off once and

(k) Option unit parameter
Device name Item Symbol*1 9
PT12, PT1012 Rough match output range CRP
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Device name Item Symbol*1 PT13, PT1013 JOG operation JOG
MELSECNET/H
PO1 to PO11, PT14, PT1014 Backlash compensation *BKC
PO1001 to PO1011 PT15, PT1015 Software limit +(Low) LMPL
PO12, PO1012 Function selection O-3 *OOP3 PT16, PT1016 Software limit +(High) LMPH
PO13 to PO32, PT17, PT1017 Software limit +(Low) LMNL
PO1013 to PO1032 PT18, PT1018 Software limit +(High) LMNH
*1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting Position range output address 10
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and PT19, PT1019 *LPPL
+(Low)
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Position range output address
MELSECNET/10
PT20, PT1020 *LPPH
(l) Linear servo motor/DD motor setting parameter +(High)
Position range output address
PT21, PT1021 *LNPL
Device name Item Symbol*1 +(Low)
Linear servo motor/DD motor Position range output address
PL1, PL1001 *LIT1 PT22, PT1022 *LNPH
function selection 1 +(High)
PL2, PL1002
Linear encoder resolution -
*LIM
PT23, PT1023 OUT1 output setting time OUT1 11
Numerator PT24, PT1024 OUT2 output setting time OUT2
Linear encoder resolution - PT25, PT1025 OUT3 output setting time OUT3
PL3, PL1003 *LID
Denominator
PT26, PT1026 Function selection T-2 *TOP2
CONNECTION
PL4, PL1004 *LIT2 PT27, PT1027 Operation mode selection *ODM
NETWORK
PT28, PT1028 Number of stations per rotation *STN
Position deviation error detection
PL5, PL1005 LB1 PT29, PT1029 Function selection T-3 *TOP3
level
PL6, PL1006
Speed deviation error detection
LB2
PT30 to PT33,
PT1030 to PT1033
level
PT34, PT1034 Point table/program default *PDEF
Torque/thrust deviation error
PL7, PL1007 LB3 PT35 to PT37,
CC-Link IE FIELD
detection level For manufacturer setting ―
CONNECTION
PT1035 to PT1037
PL8, PL1008 *LIT3
NETWORK
function selection 3 PT38, PT1038 Function selection T-7 *TOP7
Magnetic pole detection voltage PT39, PT1039 Torque limit delay time INT
PL9, PL1009 LPWM
level Station home position shift
PT40, PT1040 *SZS
PL10 to PL16,
PL1010 to PL1016
distance
Home position return inhibit
13
PT41, PT1041 ORP
Magnetic pole detection - Minute selection
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
PL17, PL1017 position detection method - LTSTS Digital override minimum
PT42, PT1042 *OVM
Function selection multiplication
Magnetic pole detection - Minute PT43, PT1043 Digital override pitch width *OVS
STATION)
PL18, PL1018 position detection method - IDLV PT44 to PT48,
Identification signal amplitude For manufacturer setting ―
PT1044 to PT1048
PL19 to PL48,
PL1019 to PL1048
For manufacturer setting ― *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting
becomes effective when the power is turned off once and 14
back on after setting the parameter data. (n) Status display
CONNECTION
(m) Positioning control parameter Device
Item Symbol (Via G4)
CC-Link
name
Device name Item Symbol*1 ST0 Cumulative feedback pulses ―
PT1, PT1001 Command mode selection *CTY ST1 Servo motor speed ―
PT2, PT1002 Function selection T-1 *TOP1 ST2 Droop pulses ― 15
PT3, PT1003 Feeding function selection *FTY ST3 Cumulative command pulses ―
PT4, PT1004 Home position return type *ZTY ST4 Command pulse frequency ―
CONNECTION
PT5, PT1005 Home position return speed ZRF Analog speed command voltage/Analog
ST5 ―
INVERTER
PT6, PT1006 Creep speed CRF speed limit voltage
PT7, PT1007 Home position shift distance ZST Analog torque limit voltage/Analog torque
ST6 ―
command voltage
PT8, PT1008 *ZPS ST7 Regenerative load ratio ―
data
Moving distance after proximity ST8 Effective load ratio ― 16
PT9, PT1009 DCT
dog ST9 Peak load ratio ―
SERVO AMPLIFIER
Stopper type home position return ST10 Instantaneous torque ―

PT10, PT1010 ZTM
CONNECTION
stopper time ST11 Position within one-revolution ―

Stopper type home position return ST12 ABS counter ―
PT11, PT1011 ZTT
torque limit value ST13 Load to motor inertia ratio ―

Device Device
name name
ST14 Bus voltage ― Servo status (alarm) Within one-revolution
AL22 ―
ST15 Load-side cumulative feedback pulses ― position(1 pulse unit)
ST16 Load-side droop pulses ― AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ―
Load-side encoder information 1/Z-phase AL24 Servo status(alarm) load inertia moment ratio ―
ST17 ―
counter AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ―
ST18 Load-side encoder information 2 ― Alarm number from Alarm History most recent
AL200 ―
ST19 to alarm
ST21 Alarm number from Alarm History first alarm in
AL201 ―
ST22 Temperature of servo motor thermistor ― past
Servo motor-side cumulative feedback Alarm number from Alarm History second alarm
ST23 ― AL202 ―
pulses (before gear) in past
ST24 Electrical angle ― Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm in
AL203 ―
past
ST25 to
For manufacturer setting ― Alarm number from Alarm History fourth alarm
ST29 AL204 ―
in past
Servo motor-side/load-side position
ST30 ― Alarm number from Alarm History fifth alarm in
deviation AL205 ―
past
ST31 Servo motor-side/load-side speed deviation ―
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most
ST32 Internal temperature of encoder ― AL210 ―
recent alarm
ST33 Settling time ―
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first
ST34 Oscillation detection frequency ― AL211 ―
alarm in past
ST35 Number of tough drive operations ―
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second
ST36 to AL212 ―
For manufacturer setting ― alarm in past
ST39
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third
ST40 Unit power consumption ― AL213 ―
alarm in past
ST41 Unit total power consumption ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth
AL214 ―
ST42 Current position ― alarm in past
ST43 Command position ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth
AL215 ―
ST44 Command remaining distance ― alarm in past
Point table No./Program No./Station position Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent
ST45 ― AL230 ―
No. alarm
ST46 Step No. ― Detailed alarm from Alarm History first alarm in
AL231 ―
past
ST47 Analog override voltage ―
Detailed alarm from Alarm History second alarm
ST48 Override level ― AL232 ―
in past
(o) Alarm (compatible with MELSERVO-J3-*A) AL233
Detailed alarm from Alarm History third alarm in
―
past
Device Detailed alarm from Alarm History fourth alarm
Item Symbol AL234 ―
name in past
AL0 Current alarm number ― Detailed alarm from Alarm History fifth alarm in
AL235 ―
AL1 Detailed data of current alarms ― past
AL11 ―
feedback pulses (p) Alarm (compatible with MELSERVO-J4-*A)
AL12 ― Device
speed Item Symbol
name
ALM0 Current alarm number ―
AL14 ― ALM1 Detailed data of current alarms ―
command pulses
Servo status when alarm occurs command Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative
AL15 ― ALM11 ―
pulse frequency feedback pulses
Servo status (alarm) analog speed command Servo status when alarm occurs Servo motor
AL16 ― ALM12 ―
voltage/limit voltage speed
Servo status (alarm) analog torque command ALM13 Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses ―
AL17 ―
voltage/limit voltage Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative
ALM14 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative command pulses
AL18 ―
load ratio Servo status when alarm occurs command
ALM15 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs effective load pulse frequency
AL19 ―
ratio Servo status (alarm) analog speed command
ALM16 ―
AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio ― voltage/limit voltage
Servo status when alarm occurs instantaneous Servo status (alarm) analog torque command
AL21 ― ALM17 ―
torque voltage/limit voltage

Device
name
Item Symbol
Device
name
Item Symbol 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative Alarm number from Alarm History 4th alarm in
ALM18 ― ALM204 ―
load ratio past
MELSECNET/H
Servo status when alarm occurs effective load Alarm number from Alarm History 5th alarm in
ALM19 ― ALM205 ―
ratio past
ALM20 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio ― Alarm number from Alarm History 6th alarm in
ALM206 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs instantaneous past
ALM21 ―
torque
Servo status (alarm) Within one-revolution
ALM207
Alarm number from Alarm History 7th alarm in
past
― 10
ALM22 ―
position (1 pulse unit) Alarm number from Alarm History 8th alarm in
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
ALM208 ―
ALM23 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter ― past
MELSECNET/10
ALM24 Servo status (alarm) load inertia moment ratio ― Alarm number from Alarm History 9th alarm in
ALM209 ―
past
ALM25 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage ―
Servo status (alarm) Load-side cumulative ALM210 ―
ALM26 ― past
feedback pulses
ALM27 Servo status (alarm) Load-side droop pulses
Servo status (alarm) Load-side encoder
― ALM211
past
―
11
ALM28 ― Alarm number from Alarm History 12th alarm in
information 1 ALM212 ―
past
Servo status (alarm) Load-side encoder
information 2 ALM213 ―
CONNECTION
past
ALM30 to
NETWORK
For manufacturer setting ― Alarm number from Alarm History 14th alarm in
ALM32 ALM214 ―
past
Servo status (alarm) Temperature of servo
motor thermistor
Servo status (alarm) Servo motor-side
ALM215
past
―
12
ALM34 ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most
cumulative feedback pulses (before gear) ALM220 ―
recent alarm
ALM35 Servo status (alarm) Electrical angle ―
CC-Link IE FIELD
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 1st
ALM221 ―
CONNECTION
ALM36 to
ALM40
NETWORK
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 2nd
Servo status (alarm) Servo motor-side/load-side ALM222 ―
ALM41 ― alarm in past
position deviation
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 3rd
Servo status (alarm) Servo motor-side/load-side ALM223 ―
ALM42
speed deviation
― alarm in past
13
Servo status (alarm) Internal temperature of ALM224 ―
ALM43 ― alarm in past
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
encoder
ALM44 Servo status (alarm) Setting time ― ALM225 ―
alarm in past
Servo status (alarm) Oscillation detection
ALM45 ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 6th
STATION)
frequency ALM226 ―
alarm in past
ALM46 Servo status (alarm) Number of tough drives ―
ALM47 to ALM227 ―
ALM50
14
ALM51 Servo status (alarm) Unit power consumption ― ALM228 ―
alarm in past
Servo status (alarm) Unit total power Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 9th
ALM52 ― ALM229 ―
CONNECTION
consumption alarm in past
ALM53 Servo status when alarm occurs current position ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 10th
ALM230 ― (Via G4)
CC-Link
Servo status when alarm occurs command alarm in past

ALM54 ―
position Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 11th
ALM231 ―
Servo status when alarm occurs command alarm in past
ALM55
remaining distance
―
ALM232
―
15
Servo status (alarm) Point table No./Program alarm in past
ALM56 ―
No./Station position No. Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 13th
ALM233 ―
ALM57 Servo status (alarm) Step No. ― alarm in past
CONNECTION
ALM58 Servo status (alarm) Analog override voltage ― Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 14th
INVERTER
ALM234 ―
ALM59 Servo status (alarm) Override level ― alarm in past
Alarm number from Alarm History most recent Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 15th
ALM200 ― ALM235 ―
alarm alarm in past
ALM201
Alarm number from Alarm History 1st alarm in
― ALM240
Detailed alarm from Alarm History most recent
―
16
past alarm
SERVO AMPLIFIER
Alarm number from Alarm History 2nd alarm in Detailed alarm from Alarm History 1st alarm in
ALM202 ― ALM241 ―
past past
CONNECTION
Alarm number from Alarm History 3rd alarm in Detailed alarm from Alarm History 2nd alarm in
ALM203 ― ALM242 ―
past past

Device Device
name name
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 3rd alarm in Machine diagnosis data oscillation
ALM243 ― MD7 ―
past frequency (motor is stopped)
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 4th alarm in Machine diagnosis data vibration level
ALM244 ― MD8 ―
past (motor is stopped)
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 5th alarm in Machine diagnosis data oscillation
ALM245 ― MD9 ―
past frequency (motor is operating)
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 6th alarm in Machine diagnosis data vibration level
ALM246 ― MD10 ―
past (motor is operating)
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 7th alarm in MD11 Machine diagnosis data rated speed ―
ALM247 ―
past
ALM248
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 8th alarm in
―
(s) One-touch tuning data
past
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 9th alarm in Device
ALM249 ― Item Symbol
past name
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 10th alarm in OTS0 One-touch tuning status confirmation ―
ALM250 ―
past OTS1 Error code list ―
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 11th alarm in OTS2 Setting time ―
ALM251 ―
past OTS3 Overshoot amount ―
ALM252 ―
past (t) External input
ALM253 ―
past Device
Item Symbol
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 14th alarm in name
ALM254 ―
past DI0 Input device statuses 1 ―
Detailed alarm from Alarm History 15th alarm in DI1 Input device statuses 2 ―
ALM255 ―
past DI2 Input device statuses 3 ―
(q) Point table
DI4 ―
Symbo through communication 1
Device name Item
l Statuses of input devices switched on
DI5 ―
POS1 to POS255, Point table (position) through communication 2
―
POS1001 to POS1255 No. 1 to 255 Statuses of input devices switched on
DI6 ―
SPD1 to SPD255, Point table (speed) through communication 3
―
SPD1001 to SPD1255 No. 1 to 255
ACT1 to ACT255, Point table (acceleration time
(u) External output
―
ACT1001 to ACT1255 constant) No. 1 to No. 255
DCT1 to DCT255, Point table (deceleration time
― DO0 Output device statuses 1 ―
DCT1001 to DCT1255 constant) No. 1 to No. 255
DWL1 to DWL255, Point table (dwell)
― DO2 Output device statuses 3 ―
DWL1001 to DWL1255 No. 1 to No. 255
AUX1 to AUX255, Point table (auxiliary function) DO3 Output device statuses 4 ―
―
AUX1001 to AUX1255 No. 1 to No. 255 DO4 External output pin statuses ―
MCD1 to MCD255, Point table (M code)
―
MCD1001 to MCD1255 No. 1 to No. 255 (v) Current position latch data

(r) Machine diagnosis data
LD0 Position data unit ―
Device LD1 Current position latch data ―
Item Symbol
name
MD0 Machine diagnosis data parameter number ― (w) The value of the general-purpose register (Rx)
Machine diagnosis data shift judgment
MD1 ―
(test mode) Device name Item Symbol
MD2 Machine diagnosis data status ― The value of the general-
RR1, RR1001 ―
Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction purpose register (R1)
MD3 ―
torque in positive direction The value of the general-
RR2, RR1002 ―
Machine diagnosis data friction torque at purpose register (R2)
MD4 ―
rated speed in positive direction The value of the general-
RR3, RR1003 ―
Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction purpose register (R3)
MD5 ―
torque in negative direction The value of the general-
RR4, RR1004 ―
Machine diagnosis data friction torque at purpose register (R4)
MD6 ―
rated speed in positive direction
(x) The value of the general-purpose register (Dx)

Device name Item Symbol 9
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
RD1 ―
MELSECNET/H
RD2 ―
RD3 ―
RD4
―
10
TO PLC NETWORK)
CONNECTION (PLC
(y) Lifetime diagnosis
MELSECNET/10
ALD0 Cumulative energization time ―
Number of ON/OFF times for
ALD1 ―
rush relay
(z) Input signal for test operation (for test operation)

11
CONNECTION
NETWORK
(aa) Forced output of signal pin (for test operation)

12
CC-Link IE FIELD
CONNECTION
(ab) Set data (for test operation)
NETWORK
Writes the acceleration/ 13
TMD1 deceleration time constant ―
(INTELLIGENT DEVICE
CC-Link CONNECTION
(test mode)
Writes the moving distance
TMD3 ―
(test mode)
STATION)
14
CONNECTION
(Via G4)
CC-Link
15
CONNECTION
INVERTER
16
SERVO AMPLIFIER
CONNECTION

16.7 Precautions
 Station number setting in the servo system
Make sure to establish servo system with the station
number set with the host address.
For details of host address setting, refer to the
following.
 GOT clock function

Since the servo amplifier does not have a clock
function, the settings of [Adjust] or [Broadcast] by GOT
clock control will be disabled.
 Servo amplifier/test operation using the GOT

During the servo amplifier/test operation, when the
communication between the GOT and the servo
amplifier is interrupted for 0.5[ms] or more, the servo
amplifier decelerates, stops, and then gets into the
servo lock status. During the servo amplifier/test
operation, continue the communication constantly by
monitoring the status display of the servo amplifier on
the GOT screen, etc.

16.7 Precautions
17
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
17. ROBOT CONTROLLER
CONNECTION 19
MEASURING INSTRUMENT
UNIT/ELECTRIC MULTI-
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
17.4 PLC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 6 21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
17.5 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 8
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12,
17.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 8
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
17 - 1
17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION

Communication *2 *2 *2
type
CRnD-700
Robot
*1
CR750-D Ethernet 17.2.1
controller
CR751-D
*1 For details on the connection with CRnQ-700/CR750-Q/CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU), refer to Mitsubishi Electric Products (Chapter 5
to 13).
*2 When the robot controller is connected, use the GOT outside the safety fence.

17.2.1 Connecting to robot controller (CRnD-700)
Robot
GOT
controller Communication driver
Connection cable
Robot controller Connection cable Maximum GOT Number of connectable

Model name Communication type *1*2 segment length*3 Option device Model equipment
• 10BASE-T - (Built into GOT)
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or
CRnD-700*5*6
CR750-D*5*6 Ethernet 100m 1 GOT
CR751-D*5*6 GT15-J71E71-
• 100BASE-TX
100
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP):
Category 5 and 5e
system.
*2 A straight cable is available.
When connecting QnUDE(H) and GOT directly with Ethernet cable, remember that the by cross cable is available.

cascades.
*5 For the system configuration of CRnD-700, CR750-D/CR751-D, refer to the following manual.
CRnD-700, CR750-D/CR751-D SET UP MANUAL

*6 Select [CRnD-700] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.
17 - 2 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
 GT16, GT14
18
CNC CONNECTION
2.
3. 19
ENERGY MEASURING
4.
CONNECTION
Item Description
Range
20
(Default: 1)
GOT MULTI-DROP
GOT PLC Set the station No. of the GOT.
1 to 64
CONNECTION
No.*2 (Default: 1)
Click!

network.(Only for connection via
router) 0.0.0.0 to 21
Subnet Mask*1
If the sub network is not used, the 255.255.255.255
CONNECTION FUNCTION
menu.
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Set the router address of the default
GT11, GT10
channel to be used from the list menu. gateway where the GOT is
Default 0.0.0.0 to
3. Set the following items. Gateway*1
router)
255.255.255.255

• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller Ethernet
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
1024 to 5010 to
22
Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet
Download Port 5014 to 65534
Type to be connected. download.
(Except for 5011, 5012,
MULTI-CHANNEL
No.
• I/F: Interface to be used *1
(Default: 5014)
5013 and 49153)
• Driver:
FUNCTION
1024 to 5010 to
GOT Set the GOT port No. for the
Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 5014 to 65534
Communication connection with the Ethernet module.
(Except for 5011, 5012,
Port No. (Default: 5001)
5013 and 49153)
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Set the number of retries to be
23
timeout occurs.
FA TRANSPARENT
environment. Retry 0 to 5times

17.3.2 Communication detail settings retries, the communication times out.
FUNCTION
(Default: 3times)
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. Specify the time period from the GOT
POINT (Default: 3sec)
The settings of connecting equipment can be Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90sec
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. (Default: 3sec)
For details, refer to the following: Set the delay time for reducing the
0 to 10000
1.1.2 I/F communication setting Delay Time load of the network/destination PLC.
( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)
17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 - 3

*1 Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT
IP Address Setting]
screen.
 GT15, GT12


(Default: 1)
1 to 64
No.*1 (Default: 1)
IP Address (Default: 192.168.0.18) 255.255.255.255
network. (Only for connection via
router) 0.0.0.0 to
Subnet Mask
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
gateway where the GOT is
Default 0.0.0.0 to
connected. (Only for connection via
Gateway 255.255.255.255
router)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
1024 to 5010 to
Ethernet Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet 5014 to 65534
Download Port download. (Except for 5011,
No. (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013 and
49153)
1024 to 5010 to
GOT Set the GOT port No. for the 5014 to 65534
Communication connection with the Ethernet module. (Except for 5011,
Port No. (Default: 5001) 5012, 5013 and
49153)
timeout occurs.
Retry 0 to 5times
(Default: 3times)
(Default: 3sec)
Timeout Time
*1
(Default: 3sec)
0 to 10000
Delay Time load of the network/destination PLC.
( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)

POINT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Example of [Detail setting].
For examples of [Detail setting], refer to the following.
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
The host is displayed. (The host is
Host ―
indicated with an asterisk (*))
Set the network No. of the connected
19
N/W No. Ethernet module. 1 to 239
ENERGY MEASURING
(Default: blank)
Set the station No. of the connected
CONNECTION
PLC No.*1 Ethernet module. 1 to 64
(Default: blank)
Set the type of the connected
Type*1 Ethernet module. CRnD-70(fixed)
CRnD-70(fixed) 20
Set the IP address of the connected
0.0.0.0 to
GOT MULTI-DROP
IP address Ethernet module.
255.255.255.255
(Default: blank)
CONNECTION
Set the port No. of the connected
Port No. Ethernet module. 1024 to 65534
(Default: 5001)
*1
*2
Select [CRnD-700] for [Controller Type].
Each of [GOT PLC No.] set in the communication detail
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
POINT
(1) Example of [Ethernet]
For examples of [Ethernet], refer to the following.
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] FUNCTION

data.
manual.
23
GT User's Manual
FA TRANSPARENT

FUNCTION

Model Reference
(2) For R32TB or R56TB
Robot controller CRnD-700 17.4.1
17.4.1 Connecting to robot controller

(CRnD-700)
This section describes the settings of a GOT and a robot
controller in the following case of system configuration.
POINT
Robot controller (CRnD-700)
For details of the robot controller (CRnD-700), refer to
the following manual. (For R56TB)
CRnD-700 SET UP MANUAL
Setting
necessity at
 System configuration Item Set value
GOT
connection
Designer3 NETIP 192.168.0.19
<GOT> (The settings other than the GOTPORT 5001
Network No. :1 : Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary
PLC No. :1

IP address : 192.168.0.18
Port No. : 5001
Designer3
(1) Communication settings
<CRnD-700> (The settings other than the Item Set value
Network No. :1 GOT NET No. 1
PLC No. :2
IP address : 192.168.0.19 GOT PLC No. 1
Port No. : 5001
Communication format : UDP(fixed) GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18

■2Parameter settings for CRnD-700
GOT Port No.
5014
 Parameter settings for CRnD-700 (Ethernet Download)

(1) For RT ToolBox2
Retry 3times
Startup Time 3sec
Timeout Time 3sec
Delay Time 0ms
Item Set value
Host *
N/W No. 1
Setting necessity at PLC No. 2

Item Set value Ethernet setting
GOT connection Type CRnD-700
No.1
NETIP 192.168.0.19 IP address 192.168.0.19
GOTPORT 5001
: Necessary : As necessary : Not necessary Communication UDP (fixed)

17
POINT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
(Communication settings) 18
CNC CONNECTION
 Confirming communication state of CRnD-
700
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows®.
Windows®. 19
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
ENERGY MEASURING
TTL=64
CONNECTION
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.19
Request timed out.
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
• Parameter settings
• Operation state of the CRnD-700. (faulty or not)
• The IP address of the CRnD-700 specified for the
Ping command.
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

For details on the device range that can be used on the
GOT, refer to the following.
2.3 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR,
CRnD-700
17.6 Precautions
 When setting IP address
Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address.
(Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the
system)
The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with
the above numbers.
Consult with the administrator of the network before
setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.

equipment (including GOT) in a segment
By increasing the network load, the transmission speed
between the GOT and PLC may be reduced.
The following actions may improve the communication
performance.
• Using a switching hub
• Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT

18
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
18. CNC CONNECTION
19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
18.5 CNC Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 16
18.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 23 21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
18.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 23
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
18 - 1
18. CNC CONNECTION

Communication
type
RS-232
RS-422 18.2.1
MELDAS
FCA C6 MELSECNET/10*2 18.2.2
C6/C64
FCA C64
*1 CC-Link(ID) 18.2.3
Ethernet 18.2.4
*1 Use the NC system software version D0 or later.

*2 Includes the case on the MELSECNET/H network system in the NET/10 mode. The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O
network..
For the connection to CNC C70, refer to Mitsubishi Electric Products (Chapter 5 to Chapter 13).
18 - 2 18. CNC CONNECTION

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU
ROBOT
18
MELDAS
CNC CONNECTION
F311 cable GOT Communication driver
C6/C64
Connection cable
AJ71C24, MELDAS C6*
19
CNC Connection cable GOT
Number of
ENERGY MEASURING
Model name F311 cable Cable model Option device Model equipment
CONNECTION
type distance
- (Built into GOT)

MELDAS C6/C64
*1
- RS-232
RS232 connection
diagram
15m 20
GOT MULTI-DROP
GT15-RS2-9P
CONNECTION
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) 1 GOT for 1 PLC
GT01-C30R4-25P(3m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*4
MELDAS C6/C64 *3 GT01-C100R4-25P(10m)
RS-422 30.5m GT15-RS4-9S
*2 GT01-C200R4-25P(20m)
GT01-C300R4-25P(30m) 21
- (Built into GOT)
CONNECTION FUNCTION
*1 Connect the connector of the CNC side to TERMINAL.
*2 Connect the connector of the CNC side to SIO.
GT11, GT10
*3 To be prepared by the user, referring the following.
MELDAS C6/C64 CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (BNP-B2255) F311 Cable Production Drawing
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
18. CNC CONNECTION 18 - 3

18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
POINT
MELSECNET/10 connection includes the case that MELSECNET/H is used in NET/10 mode.The GOT
cannot be connected to the remote I/O network.
• MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) optical loop system
• MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) coaxial bus system

When connecting the MELSECNET/H network module to the MELSECNET/10 network system, specify the
MELDAS Expansion
GOT
C6/C64 unit
Connection cable
CNC Connection cable GOT Number of

Max. connectable
Model name Expansion unit Communication type Cable model Option device Model equipment
distance
GT15-J71BR13*2
MELSECNET/10 Coaxial cable
FCU6-EX878 *1 31 GOTs
(Coaxial bus system) *3
GT15-75J71BR13-Z
MELDAS C6/C64
GT15-J71LP23-25*2
MELSECNET/10 Optical fiber cable
FCU6-EX879 *1 63 GOTs
(Optical loop system) *3
GT15-75J71LP23-Z
number of stations.
For details, refer to the following manuals.
C6/C64/C64T CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP-B2255
C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373

*3 For the coaxial cable and optical fiber cable, refer to the following manuals.


18.2.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) 17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
MELDAS Expansion
GOT
C6/C64 unit
Connection cable
19
ENERGY MEASURING
CNC Connection cable GOT Number of
CONNECTION
Model name Expansion unit Cable model Option device Model equipment
type distance
CC-Link dedicated GT15-J61BT13*2

MELDAS C6/C64 FUC6-HR865 CC-Link(ID) cable *1 26 GOTs
*3 GT15-75J61BT13-Z 20
GOT MULTI-DROP
number of stations.
For details, refer to the following manuals.
CONNECTION
18.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) 21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

18.2.4 Ethernet connection
MELDAS Expansion
GOT Communication driver
C6/C64 unit
Connection cable
CNC Connection cable*1 GOT

Number of
Maximum connectable
Communication
Model name Expansion unit Cable model segment Option device Model equipment
type
length*3

• 10BASE-T - (Built into GOT)
Shielded twisted pair cable
(STP) or unshielded twisted
128 GOTs
FUC6-EX875 pair cable (UTP): Category
MELDAS C6/C64 Ethernet 100m (recommended to
*4*5 3, 4, and 5
16 units or less)
• 100BASE-TX GT15-J71E71-100
Shielded twisted pair cable
(STP):
Category 5 and 5e
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards.
GT16 User's Manual
cascades.
*4 For the system configuration of the expansion unit, refer to the following manuals.

*5 Select [AJ71QE71] for [Controller Type] in [Ethernet] of GT Designer3.

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
GOT and the CNC.
ROBOT
18.3.1 RS-232 cable 18
CNC CONNECTION
RS232 connection diagram
MELDAS C6/C64 side*1

GOT side (20 pin half pitch)
CD 1 1 GND 19
RD(RXD) 2 6 SD
ENERGY MEASURING
SD(TXD) 3 16 RD
CONNECTION
ER(DTR) 4 - -
SG 5 11 GND
DR(DSR) 6 - -
RS(RTS) 7 - - 20
CS(CTS) 8 18 ER(DTR)
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
- 9 - -
*1 For details of the MELDAS C6/C64 side connection, refer to

the following manuals.
MELDAS C6/C64 CONNECTION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP-B2255 21
MELDAS C6/C64 NETWORK MANUAL BNP-B2373
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
(1) Cable length
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. 22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

POINT
settings)
Set the channel of the connected equipment. confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
2. 1.1.2 I/F communication setting
3. 18.4.2 Communication detail settings

4. (1) AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6*
Click!

menu.

3. Set the following items. 4800bps,
• Controller Type: Transmission
19200bps,
For GT16, GT15 Speed 38400bps,
equipment.
57600bps,
MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6* (Default: 19200bps)
115200bps
For GT14, GT11
Set this item when change the data
MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6*
length used for communication with the
• I/F: Interface to be used Data Bit
8bit (fixed)
• Driver: (Default: 8bit)
For direct connection to CPU Specify the stop bit length for
AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* Stop Bit communications. 1bit (fixed)
For ELSECNET/10 connection (Default: 1bit)
MELSECNET/H Specify whether or not to perform a parity
MELSECNET/10 check, and how it is performed during
Parity Odd (fixed)
For CC-Link (ID) connection communication.
(Default: Odd)
CC-Link Ver2 (ID)
CC-Link (ID)
For Ethernet connection Retry
timeout occurs.
0 to 5times
Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 (Default: 0time)
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Timeout Time to time out. 3 to 30sec
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. (Default: 3sec)
Make the settings according to the usage Set this item to adjust the transmission
environment. timing of the communication request
18.4.2 Communication detail settings from the GOT.
(Default: 0ms)

(2) MELSECNET/H (3) MELSECNET/10
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
• MNET/H mode
Set the number of retries to be 19
Set the network type. performed when a communication
Network Type • MNET/10 mode
(Default: MNET/H mode) timeout occurs.
• MNET/H EXT mode
Retry 0 to 5times
ENERGY MEASURING
Set the network No.
Network No. 1 to 239 retries, the communication times out.
(Default: 1)
CONNECTION
(Default: 3times)
Station No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1) Set the time period for a communication
• Online Timeout Time to time out. 3 to 90sec
(auto. reconnection)
• Offline
(Default: 3sec)
20
Set the operation mode of the • Test between
GOT MULTI-DROP
GOT. slave station*1
Mode Setting
(Default: POINT
• Self-loopback test*1
CONNECTION
Online (auto. reconnection))
• Internal self-
When MELSECNET/H communication unit is used
loopback test*1
• H/W test *1 When connecting to the MELSECNET/10 network
using the MELSECNET/H communication unit,
specify [MELSECNET/10 mode] as [Network Type].
timeout occurs.
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
out.
(Default: 3times)
GT11, GT10
(Default: 3sec)
Delay Time
0 to 300ms
22
PLC.
(Default: 0ms)
MULTI-CHANNEL
station units during FUNCTION
communication.
Refresh (Default: 1time)
1 to 1000times
Interval Valid when [Secured data send/
Secured data receive] is marked
by the control station side network 23
parameters of the MELSECNET/H
FA TRANSPARENT
network system.
transmission speed.
FUNCTION

10Mbps/25Mbps
Speed When specifying [MNET/10 mode]
as the network type, only 10Mbps
can be set applicable.
Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)

(4) CC-Link Ver.2 (ID) (5) CC-Link(ID)

Set the station No. of the GOT. Item Description Range
Station No. 1 to 64
(Default: 1) Set the number of retries to be
Set the transmission speed and performed when a communication
Transmission
the mode of the GOT. 0 to E timeout occurs.
Rate*1 Retry 0 to 5times
(Default: 0) When receiving no response after
Ver.1/Ver.2/
Set the mode of CC-Link. (Default: 3times)
Mode Additional/
(Default: Ver.1)
Offline Set the time period for a communication
Single/
(Default: 3sec)
Expanded Set the cyclic point expansion. Double/
Cyclic (Default: Single) Quadruple/
Octuple
Set the number of stations
Occupied
occupied by the GOT. 1 Station/4 Stations
Station
(Default: 1 Station)
Set Clear/Hold at an error
Input for Error
occurrence. Clear/Hold
Station
(Default: Clear)
timeout occurs.
Retry When no response is received 0 to 5times
times out.
(Default: 3times)
(Default: 3sec)
PLC.
(Default: 0ms)
*1 Transmission speed settings

The following lists the transmission speed settings of the CC-
Link communication.
Set value Description

0 Online: 156kbps
1 Online: 625kbps
2 Online: 2.5Mbps
3 Online: 5Mbps
4 Online: 10Mbps
A Hardware test: 156kbps
B Hardware test: 625kbps
C Hardware test: 2.5Mbps
D Hardware test: 5Mbps
E Hardware test: 10Mbps
For details of the hardware test, refer to the following

manual.
Manual for CC-Link module to be used

(6) Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700
*1 Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT 17
IP Address Setting]
screen.
(a) GT16, GT14
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
ENERGY MEASURING
(Default: 1)
CONNECTION
1 to 64
No.*2 (Default: 1)
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
Subnet router) 0.0.0.0 to
CONNECTION
Mask*1 If the sub network is not used, the 255.255.255.255
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
Set the router address of the
Default default gateway where the GOT is
Gateway connected.(Only for connection via
0.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255
21
*1 router)
CONNECTION FUNCTION
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
1024 to 5010,
GT11, GT10
No.*1 (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013 and
49153)
GOT
Set the GOT port No. for the
1024 to 5010 to
5014 to 65534
22
connection with the Ethernet
Communication (Except for 5011,
module.
Port No. 5012, 5013 and
MULTI-CHANNEL
(Default: 5001)
49153)
FUNCTION
timeout occurs.
out.
23
(Default: 3times)
FA TRANSPARENT
Specify the time period from the

GOT startup until GOT starts the
FUNCTION

(Default: 3sec)
(Default: 3sec)
load of the network/destination 0 to 10000
Delay Time
PLC. ( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)

(b) GT15, GT12
POINT
data.
manual.
GT User's Manual

(Default: 1)
1 to 64
No.*1 (Default: 1)
GOT IP Set the IP address of the GOT. 0.0.0.0 to
Address (Default: 192.168.0.18) 255.255.255.255
router) 0.0.0.0 to
Subnet Mask
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
Set the router address of the
default gateway where the GOT is
Default 0.0.0.0 to
Gateway 255.255.255.255
router)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
1024 to 5010 to
No. (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013 and
49153)
1024 to 5010 to
Set the GOT port No. for the
GOT 5014 to 65534
connection with the Ethernet
Communication (Except for 5011,
module.
Port No. 5012, 5013 and
(Default: 5001)
49153)
timeout occurs.
out.
(Default: 3times)
Specify the time period from the
GOT startup until GOT starts the
(Default: 3sec)
(Default: 3sec)
load of the network/destination 0 to 10000
Delay Time
PLC. ( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)

18.4.3 Ethernet setting 18.4.4 Switch setting 17
 Switch setting (GT15-75J71P23-Z, GT15-
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
75JBR13-Z)
ROBOT
POINT
18
Switch setting of the communication unit
CNC CONNECTION
When using the MELSECNET/H communication unit,
the switch setting is not needed.

Item Description Range following manual.
GT15 MELSECNET/10 communication unit
19
The host is displayed. (The host
Host ― User's Manual
is indicated with an asterisk (*))
Set the network No. of the
Network No. of
ENERGY MEASURING
N/W No. connected Ethernet module.
CNC*1
(Default: blank) GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z
CONNECTION
Set the station No. of the
PLC No.*2 connected Ethernet module. Station No. of CNC RUN POWER
(Default: blank)
PC
DUAL D.LINK
SW.E T.PASS
20
M/S.E
E PRM.E GOT R/W E
Set the type of the connected

R CRC CRC R
R OVER R
OVER
O O
R AB.IF AB.IF R
TIME TIME
Type Ethernet module. AJ71QE71

DATA DATA
UNDER UNDER
LOOP LOOP
SD SD
(Default: QJ71E71)
RD RD
GOT MULTI-DROP
F.LOOP R.LOOP
Set the IP address of the
CONNECTION
IP Address connected Ethernet module. IP address of CNC 4 5 6
7 8 (2)
2 3
GROUP No.
(Default: blank)
9 0 1
89
67 4 5 6
(4)
AB E
45
7 8
2 3
CD
MODE X100
23
F0 1 9 0 1
Set the port No. of the connected 4 5 6 4 5 6
(1)
7 8
2 3
7 8
2 3
X10 X10 NETWORK

9 0 1 9 0 1 No.
Port No. Ethernet module. 5001 (3) STATION

No.
4 5 6 4 5 6
21
7 8
2 3
7 8
2 3
X1 X1
(Default: 5001)
9 0 1 9 0 1

(1) Network number setting switch
CONNECTION FUNCTION
*1 For operating CNC monitor function, set N/W No. to "239".
*2 Each of [GOT PLC No.] set in the communication detail Network number setting
setting and [PLC No.] set in the Ethernet setting must be set Description Set value
switch
GT11, GT10
18.4.2 Communication detail settings 5 6
4
7 8
2 3
X100
22
9
0 1
Set the network No. of the

4 5 6
MELSECNET/10
7 8
2 3
X10 NETWORK 1 to 239

9 0 1 No. communication unit.
MULTI-CHANNEL
(Default: 001)
4 5 6
FUNCTION
7 8
2 3
X1
9
0 1
(2) Group number setting switch 23

FA TRANSPARENT

switch
FUNCTION
Set the group No. of the

4 5 6 0: No group
MELSECNET/10
setting
7 8
2 3
GROUP No.
9 0 1 communication unit.
(fixed)*1
(Default: 0)
*1 The GOT does not use the group number.

Specify "0".

(3) Station number setting switch  Switch setting (Only when MODEL GT15-
75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is
switch used)
4
5 6 Set the station No. of the 1 to 64:
POINT
7 8
2 3
9
X10 MELSECNET/10 GT15-
0 1
STATION communication unit. 75J71LP23-Z
No.
4
5 6 Set to not duplicate other 1 to 32: Switch setting of the communication unit
stations in the network. GT15-
7 8
2 3
X1
When using the MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
(Default: 01) 75J71BR13-Z
9
0 1
communication unit, the switch setting is not needed.

(4) Mode setting switch following manual.
Mode setting switch Description Set value GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's
Manual
89
67 Online
AB
45
0
CDE
MODE
(Default: 0)
23
F0 1
GT15-75J61BT13-Z
Left side Front side
POINT
RUN
L RUN

SD
RD
345
(1)
EF 2
67 A

01
MODE L ERR.
89
BCD
23
following.
901
456
78
10
(2) 23
STATION NO.
901
456
18.5.1 MELSECNET/10 connection 78

1
23
(3)
901
456

78
BAUDRATE
ON
When changing the switch setting after mounting (4)

1 2
1 3 5 7
SW ON OFF DA DG NC NC
1 HOLD CLEAR 2 4 6 8
the MELSECNET/10 communication unit to the 2 4 1

DB SLD (FG1) NC
GOT, reset the GOT.

(3) Self check test (1) Mode setting switch
Select "3" to "9" as the mode setting switch to
provide a self check test of the MELSECNET/10 Mode setting
communication unit. switch
345
GT15 MELSECNET/10 communication unit Select the online mode.
EF 2
67 A
01
0 (fixed)
89
User's Manual BCD (Default: 0)
Station number
setting switch
23
901
456
78 Specify the station No. of the

CC-Link communication unit. 1 to 64
23
(Default: 01)
901
456
78

(3) Transmission baudrate setting switch
17
Transmission
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
baudrate setting Description Set value
switch
ROBOT
0: 156kbps
23 1: 625kbps
Specify the transmission speed.
18
901
456
2: 2.5Mbps
(Default: 0)
3: 5Mbps
78
4: 10Mbps
CNC CONNECTION
Condition
Setting
setting Description Set value
switch
switches
Specify input data status of the

19
OFF: Cleared
SW1 data link error station.
ON: Held
ENERGY MEASURING
(Default: OFF)
ON
1 2
Specify the number of stations
CONNECTION
OFF: 1 station
SW2 occupied.
ON: 4 stations
(Default: OFF)
20
POINT
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
following.
18.5.2 CC-Link (ID) connection
When changing the switch setting after mounting 21
the GT15-75J61BT13-Z type CC-Link
CONNECTION FUNCTION
communication unit to the GOT, reset the GOT.
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

18.5 CNC Side Settings
18.5.1 MELSECNET/10 connection
Set parameters related to MELSECNET/10 with
MELSEC's peripheral devices in the same way as
parameter setting of MELSEC CPU, and write them on
CNC by Personal computer. However, in the case of
using the default parameters or not requiring separate
settings due to normal stations, it is not necessary to
set the network
(1) Control Station Parameter

If you wish to place the control station in CNC and set
the common parameters, set the network parameters
by peripheral device and write them on CNC. An
example of parameter setting by GPPW is as follows.
Set the first I/O No. as follows according to the
expansion slot to which the unit is inserted.
(a) Start I/O No.
Slot Start I/O No.
EXT1 0200
EXT2 0280
EXT1
EXT2
(b) Example of GX Developer setting
For details of the parameter setting, refer to the

following.
C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION
MANUAL BNP-B2373
(2) Normal Station Parameter

As for normal stations, it is not necessary to set
parameters unless separate settings are required.
The refresh parameters are set and written as required.
In this case, the parameter setting of the first I/O No. is
the same as in the case of the control station.

17
 Expansion unit settings
(1) FCU6-EX879 (Optical fiber cable)
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
No. Switch name Settings
ROBOT
Condition setting Set the operation condition.
switch
SW Description OFF ON
1 Network type*1 Inter-PC net (PC) Remote I/O net

18
CNC CONNECTION
8 2 Station type*4 Normal station (N.ST) Control station (MNG)
7
6 3 Used parameter*2 Common parameters (PRM) Default parameter (D.PRM)
5
1)
4 4 OFF ON OFF ON
3 Number of stations*2 8 16 32 64
2 5 (Valid when SW3 is ON) OFF Station OFF Station ON Station ON Station
1
ON 6 B/W total points*2
(Valid when SW3 is ON)
OFF 2K
points
ON 4K
points
OFF 6K
points
ON 8K
points
19
7 OFF OFF ON ON
ENERGY MEASURING
8 Not used Always OFF
CONNECTION
Station number
setting switch
Station number setting*2*3
(Setting range)
2)
01 to 64: Station number
Other than 01 to 64: Setting error
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
Setting switch of
group number
3)
Not used, fixed to 0
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Setting switch of
network number
Network number setting*2
(Setting range)
GT11, GT10
4)
001 to 255: Network number
22
*2
Mode setting switch Mode setting
MULTI-CHANNEL
0: Online
5) 1: Cannot be used
FUNCTION
2: Offline
3 to F: Test mode
*1 Set the network type to the PLC to PLC network.
*2 Set as necessary.
*3 Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units. 23
*4 Set the station type to the control station.
For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following.
FA TRANSPARENT

FUNCTION

(2) FCU6-EX878 (Coaxial cable)
Switch layout No. Switch name Settings
Set the operation condition.

Condition setting
SW Description OFF ON
switch
1 Network type*1 Inter-PC net (PC) Remote I/O net
2 Station type*4 Normal station (N.ST) Control station (MNG)

8
7 Common parameters Default parameter
6 3 Used parameter*2
(PRM) (D.PRM)
5
1)
4 4 OFF 8 ON 16 OFF 32 ON 64
3 Number of stations*2 Sta Sta Sta Sta
2
5 (Valid when SW3 is ON) OFF tio OFF tio ON tio ON tio
1
n n n n
ON
6 OFF 2K ON 4K OFF 6K ON 8K
B/W total points*2
1) poi poi poi poi
7 (Valid when SW3 is ON) OFF OFF ON ON
nts nts nts nts
8 Not used Always OFF
2) Station number
setting switch
Station number setting*2*3
3)
(Setting range)
2)
01 to 64: Station number
4)
Setting switch of
group number
3)
Not used, fixed to 0
Setting switch of
5) network number
Network number setting*2
(Setting range)
4)
001 to 255: Network number
Mode setting*2
Mode setting switch
0: Online
5) 1: Cannot be used
2: Offline
3 to F: Test mode
*1 Set the network type to the PLC to PLC network.
*3 Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units.
*4 Set the station type to the control station.

18.5.2 CC-Link (ID) connection 17
 Expansion unit settings
Make the communication settings by the setting switch
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
in the expansion unit (FCU6-HR865).
Set parameters related to CC-Link connection with GX
(1) Expansion unit
ROBOT
Developer and write them to CNC by PLC. However, in
the case of using the local stations, it is not necessary
to set the network parameters. 1)
18
(1) Master station parameter
CNC CONNECTION
It is necessary to set and write the network parameters
to CNC with GX Developer. The following shows an
example of parameter settings.Set the first I/O No. as 2)
follows according to the expansion slot to which the unit
is inserted. 3)
(a) Start I/O No.
4) 19
Slot Start I/O No.
EXT1 0200
ENERGY MEASURING
EXT2 0280
CONNECTION
EXT1
EXT2 20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
(b) Example of GX Developer setting
1) 21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
2)
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
following.
C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION FUNCTION
MANUAL BNP-B2373
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

(2) Contents of setting
No. Switch name Settings
Set the operation condition.
Switch status Setting validity

Condition setting Master station Local station
No. Description
switch OFF ON (Standby (Standby
master station) master station)
Master station/local
SW1 Station type*1 Standby master station (Valid) (Valid)
station
SW2 Not used Always OFF - -

1) SW3 Not used Always OFF - -
Data link error station

SW4 Clear Hold valid valid
input data status*1
SW4 OFF 1 OFF 2 ON ON 4

3
Number of occupied Sta Sta Sta
Sta Invalid valid
SW5 stations*1 OFF tio ON tio ON OFF tio
tion
n n n
This switch sets the unit operation status.

Mode setting switch Settability
No. Name Description
Master station Local station
Automatic online return provided when data link is

0 Yes Yes
Online*1 enabled
1 Link with remote I/O net mode Yes No
2)
2 Offline*1 Data link offline state Yes Yes
3 Line test 1*1 Line test 1 in offline state Yes No
4 Line test 2*1 Line test 2 in offline state Yes No
Parameter confirmation
5 Checks the parameter details Yes No
test*1
6 Hardware test*1 Test Expansion unit (FCU6-HR865) Yes Yes
7 to F Not usable
This switch sets the unit transmission speed.

Transmission speed
setting switch No. Description
0 156Kbps*1
1 625Kbps*1
3)
2 2.5Mbps*1
3 5Mbps*1
4 10Mbps*1
5 to F Not usable
Setting switch of
station No.
This switch sets the unit station No.*1*2
(Setting range)
4) Master station: 00
Local station: 01 to 64
Standby master station: 01 to 64
*2 Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units.

18.5.3 Ethernet connection 17
Set parameters related to Ethernet with MELSEC’s
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
peripheral devices in the same way as parameter
The following shows the example of the system setting of MELSEC CPU, and write them on CNC by
ROBOT
configuration when using the CNC monitor function. Personal computer.
<CNC-2> <GOT>
(1) Network parameter setting
N/W No. :239
PLC No. :3
N/W No. :1
PLC No. :1
Set the network parameters by peripheral device and 18
IP address :192.168.1.3 IP address :192.168.1.1 write them on CNC. An example of parameter setting
CNC CONNECTION
by GPPW is as follows. Set the first I/O No. as follows
according to the expansion slot to which the unit is
Ethernet (192.168.1.xx) inserted.
<CNC-1> (a) Unit No.
[Communication with GOT]
N/W No. :239 Start
PLC No. :2
IP address :192.168.1.2
Slot
position
I/O
No.
Mounting position of extension unit 19
EXT1 0200
When mounted When mounted
ENERGY MEASURING
in EXT1 and EXT2 in EXT1 and EXT3
EXT2 0280
CONNECTION
EXT3 0300
EXT2
EXT3
EXT1 EXT1
20
Unit2
Unit2
GOT MULTI-DROP
Unit1 Unit1
CONNECTION
in EXT2 and EXT3 in EXT1 only
21
EXT2
EXT3
EXT1
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Unit1
GT11, GT10
Unit2 Unit1

in EXT2 only in EXT3 only
22
EXT3
MULTI-CHANNEL
EXT2
FUNCTION
Unit1 Unit1
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

(b) Example of GX Developer setting (2) CNC side parameter setting
Confirm the CNC side parameter setting with the
settings of IP address, gateway address, subnet mask
and port No. by the 7-segment LED and rotary switch of
the CNC side.
For details of the parameter setting operation, refer to
the following.
MANUAL BNP-B2373 IV Setting the Ethernet
IP Address
following.
MANUAL BNP-B2373 7-segment LED
POINT
IP address setting
IP address setting on GX Developer is invalid.
Set the IP address by the 7-segment LED and rotary
switch of the CNC side, referring to the next page.
Rotary switch

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
For details of the device range that can be used on the GOT, refer to the following.
ROBOT
18.7 Precautions 18
CNC CONNECTION
18.7.1 Direct connection to CPU 18.7.3 CC-Link (ID) connection
 Version of CNC  Using cyclic transmission
For MELDAS C6/C64, use NC system software version
D0 or later.
(1) I/O signal for master station
Do not turn on the reserved output signals in the output 19
signals (remote output: RY) to the GOT from the master
18.7.2 MELSECNET/10 connection station.
ENERGY MEASURING
When the reserved output signal is turned on, the CNC
 Network configuration system may be malfunctioned.
CONNECTION
For the assignment of I/O signals in the GOT, refer to
Use the MELSECNET/10 mode of MELSECNET/H
(PLC to PLC network) or MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC
network) to configure a network including the GOT. MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link
communication unit User's Manual 20
(1) The following networks including the GOT cannot be GT15 CC-Link communication unit User's
configured.
GOT MULTI-DROP
Manual
• MELSECNET/10 (Remote I/O network)
CONNECTION
• MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network) (2) CC-Link Mode
CNC is not compatible with CC-Link Ver.2.
(2) When configuring the network (MELSECNET/H
(PLC to PLC network) including the GOT, refer to the (3) When GOT malfunctions
following. The cyclic output status remains the same as before
becoming faulty. 21
9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO
CONNECTION FUNCTION
PLC NETWORK)  For transient transmission
 Monitoring range (1) Access range that can be monitored
GT11, GT10
Only CNC of the same networks No. can be monitored The GOT can access to the CNC mounting the master
in GOT. and local station of the CC-Link System.
It cannot access another network via the CC-Link
3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on
module. 22
Network Systems  GOT startup in CNC connection (CC-Link
MULTI-CHANNEL
connection (intelligent device station))
 Starting GOT with CNC connection In the CNC connection (CC-Link connection (intelligent
(MELSECNET/10 connection) FUNCTION
device station)), the data link is started approximately
With the CNC connection (MESLSECNET/10 10 seconds after the GOT startup.
connection), the data link starts approximately 10
seconds after the GOT starts.  When a network error occurs in the system 23
alarm
FA TRANSPARENT
In the CNC connection (CC-Link connection (intelligent

alarm
device station)), when a network error occurs in the
FUNCTION
When a system alarm regarding a network error occurs system alarm, the system alarm message cannot be
with the CNC connection (MELSECNET/10 canceled even though the causes are removed.
connection), the system alarm is kept displaying on the
GOT even though the error factor is removed.
To cancel the system alarm display, restart the GOT.  Version of CNC
 Version of CNC D0 or later.
E0 or later.

18.7.4 Ethernet connection
 Version of CNC
 Via network system D0 or later.
GOT with Ethernet communication cannot access the
CNCs in another network via the CNC (network
module, Ethernet module, etc.).
 When connecting to multiple GOTs

When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet
network, set each [PLC No.] to the GOT.

equipment (including GOT) in a segment
By increasing the network load, the transmission speed
between the GOT and CNC may be reduced.
The following actions may improve the communication
performance.
• Using a switching hub
• Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT
 Ethernet cable connection

Ethernet cable is so susceptible to noise that you
should wire power cables and electric supply cables
separately. And you need to attach a ferrite core
(attachment) on the control unit side.
For details of the Ethernet cable connection, refer to the
following

MANUAL BNP-B2373 IX Connection Function
with GOT
LED1
1 turn
Ferrite
core
GOT
Ferrite core
Ethernet
FG cable for Ethernet

18.7 Precautions
19
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
ENERGY MEASURING UNIT/
19.
ELECTRIC MULTI-MEASURING 19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
19.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 4 21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
19.5 Setting of Energy Measuring Unit/Electric Multi-measuring
GT11, GT10
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 10
19.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 - 11
22
19.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 12
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
19 - 1
19. ENERGY MEASURING UNIT/
ELECTRIC MULTI-MEASURING

Communication
Manufacturer Series Model name*1 Clock Refer to
type
Energy EMU4-BD1-MB
measuring RS-485
EMU4-HD1-MB
unit
Mitsubishi
Electric Electric ME110SSR-MB 19.2.1
multi-
RS-485
measuring ME96NSR-MB
instrument
*1 Select a model which is compatible with the communication protocol (MODBUS).

For details, refer to the following catalog.
Catalog of energy measuring unit/electric multi-measuring instrument
POINT
Versions of GOTs which are compatible with RS-422/485 connection
GOTs can be connected to an energy measuring unit/electric multi-measuring instrument by the RS-422/485
connection.
The following GOT models are compatible with the RS-422/485 connection.
For the confirming method of hardware version, refer to the following.
GT16 User's Manual
GT15 User's Manual
GT14 User's Manual
GT11 User's Manual
GT10 User's Manual
GOT Hardware version Standard monitor OS
GT16, 15, GT14 Version A or later
GT1155-QTBD Version C or later

-
GT1155-QSBD Version F or later
GT1150-QLBD Version F or later
GT1055-QSBD, GT1050-QBBD Version C or later
GT1045-QSBD, GT1040-QBBD Version A or later

Standard monitor OS [01.32.00] or later
GT1030-L D , GT1030-H D Version B or later Communication driver MODBUS/RTU [01.09.00] or later
GT1020-L D Version E or later
19 - 2 19. ENERGY MEASURING UNIT/ELECTRIC MULTI-MEASURING INSTRUMENT CONNECTION

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
19.2.1 Connecting to an energy measuring unit/electronic multi-measuring
instrument
ROBOT
CNC CONNECTION
MODBUS/RTU
ENERGY MEASURING UNIT

ELECTRIC MULTI-MEASURING GOT
INSTRUMENT
Connection cable
19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
Connection cable GOT Number of
Communication
Controller Cable model Max. connectable
type Option device Model
Connection diagram number distance equipment
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05(0.5m)*1
20
RS-422/485 connection
1000m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)*1
GOT MULTI-DROP
diagram 1)
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20(2m)*1
CONNECTION
diagram 2)
RS-422/485 connection Total number of

Energy measuring unit
diagram 3) energy measuring
units and electric
21
Electric multi-measuring RS-422/485
CONNECTION FUNCTION
RS-422/485 connection multi-measuring
1000m GT10-9PT5S*2
instrument diagram 4) instruments: Up to 31
for 1 GOT
GT11, GT10
diagram 5)
1000m GT15-RS4-TE
diagram 6)
22
1000m GT14-RS2T4-9P*3
diagram 7)
MULTI-CHANNEL
*1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
FUNCTION
*2 Connect it to the RS-422 interface (built into GOT).
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
19. ENERGY MEASURING UNIT/ELECTRIC MULTI-MEASURING INSTRUMENT CONNECTION 19 - 3

The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS-422/485 cable used for connecting
the GOT to a PLC.
RS-422/485 connection diagram 1)

ENERGY MEASURING UNIT ENERGY MEASURING UNIT
ELECTRIC MULTI-MEASURING ELECTRIC MULTI-MEASURING
INSTRUMENT (1st) INSTRUMENT (1st)
CON side(20pin)*3
Signal name Signal name
SDA1(TXD1+) 6 1)*1 1)*1
*1 *1
SDB1(TXD1-) 8 2) 2)
*2
RDA1(RXD1+) 10 Ter Ter
RDB1(RXD1-) 12
SG 2 SLD
*4
SLD
*4
NC 1
NC 3
NC 4
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
SDB2(TXD2-) 7
RDA2(RXD2+) 9
RDB2(RXD2-) 11
NC 13
RSA(RTS+) 14
NC 15
RSB(RTS-) 16
NC 17
CSA(CTS+) 18
NC 19
CSB(CTS-) 20
*1 The signal name differs depending on the series name. Refer to the following table.
Series name Signal name 1) Signal name 2)
Energy measuring unit RS485+ RS485-
Electric multi-measuring instrument T/R+ T/R-
*2 Short-circuit between the following terminals of the energy measuring unit or electric multi-measuring instrument which will be a
terminal.
By the short circuit of the following terminals, a terminating resistor with 120 is connected.
Series name Signal name Signal name
Energy measuring unit RS485- <-> Ter
Electric multi-measuring instrument T/R- <-> Ter
*3 When placing the GOT to the terminal, set the terminating resistor of the GOT to "Enable".
When placing the GOT to the position other than the terminal, set the terminating resistor of the GOT to "Disable".
*4 Ground a shield correctly.

RS-422/485 connection diagram 2) 17
CON side(14pin)*3
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 1)*1 1)*1
ROBOT
*1 *1
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 2) 2)
*2
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 Ter Ter
RDB1(RXD1-) 4
SLD SLD
18
SG 13
*4
*4
CNC CONNECTION
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
SDB2(TXD2-) 6
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
RSA(RTS+) 9
RSB(RTS-) 10
CSA(CTS+) 11 19
CSB(CTS-) 12
ENERGY MEASURING
NC 14
Shell
CONNECTION
*2
Short-circuit between the following terminals of the energy measuring unit or electric multi-measuring instrument which will be a
20
terminal.
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
GOT side(D-sub 9pin)*3
*1 *1
22
SDA 1 1) 1)
SDB 6 2)*1 2)*1

*2
RDA 2 Ter Ter
MULTI-CHANNEL
RDB 7
SLD SLD
SG 5 *4
FUNCTION
*4
RSA 3
RSB 8
CSA 4
CSB 9
23
FA TRANSPARENT

FUNCTION

terminal.
*3 When placing the GOT to the terminal, set the terminating resistor of the GOT to "110 ".
When placing the GOT to the position other than the terminal, set the terminating resistor of the GOT to "OPEN".

GOT side
(Terminal block)*3 Signal name Signal name
*1 *1
SDA 1) 1)
SDB 2)*1 2)*1

*2
RDA Ter Ter
RDB
SG SLD SLD
*4 *4
terminal.
*3 When placing the GOT to the terminal in the system configuration, set the terminating resistor to "110 ".
Set the 1pair/2pair signal selection switch to "1Pair" when using the connection conversion adapter.
Connection Conversion Adapter User's manual

GOT side(Terminal block)*3 Signal name Signal name
SDA 1)*1 1)*1
*1
SDB 2) 2)*1
*2
RDA Ter Ter
RDB
SG SLD SLD
*4 *4
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
terminal.
*3 When placing the GOT to the terminal in the system configuration, set the terminating resistor to "110 ".

RS-422/485 connection diagram 6) 17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
GOT side(Terminal block)*3 Signal name Signal name
*1 *1
ROBOT
SDA1 1 1) 1)
SDB1 2 2)*1 2)*1

*2
RDA1 3 Ter Ter

18
RDB1 4
CNC CONNECTION
SDA2 5 SLD SLD
*4 *4
SDB2 6
RDA2 7
RDB2 8
SG 9 19
FG 10
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
terminal. 20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
*4
Ground a shield correctly. 21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
GOT side
(Terminal block)*3*4 Signal name Signal name
*1
SDA 1) 1)*1
SDB 2)*1 2)*1

*2
22
RDA Ter Ter
MULTI-CHANNEL
RDB
FUNCTION
SG SLD SLD
*4 *4
Energy measuring unit RS485+ RS485- 23
FA TRANSPARENT
terminal.
FUNCTION

*3 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows.
2-wire type/4-wire type: 2-wire type (1Pair)
When placing the GOT to the terminal: Set the terminating resistor of the GOT to "110 ".
When placing the GOT to the position other than the terminal: Set the terminating resistor of the GOT to "OPEN".
*4 For the RS232 setting, check "Enable the 5V power supply".

(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-422/485 cable must be 1,000m or
less.

(1) GOT side
When connecting an energy measuring unit/electric
multi-measuring instrument to the GOT, a terminating
(a) For GT16 body, RS-422/485 communication unit
resistor selector.
to the following.
(2) Energy measuring unit/electric multi-measuring
instrument side
When connecting an energy measuring unit/electric
multi-measuring instrument to the GOT, a terminating
resistor must be connected to the energy measuring
unit/electric multi-measuring instrument.
For details, refer to the energy measuring unit/electric
multi-measuring instrument user's manual.

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
settings) Make the settings according to the setting value of an
energy measuring unit/electric multi-measuring instrument
to be connected.
18
Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT.
CNC CONNECTION
2. Set this item when change the 9600bps,
Transmission
Speed*1
equipment. 57600bps,
3. Set this item when change the data length 19
Data Bit*2 used for communication with the 7bit/8bit
connected equipment. (Default: 8bit)
ENERGY MEASURING
Stop Bit*4 1bit/2bit
4. communications. (Default: 1bit)
CONNECTION
Specify whether or not to perform a parity None
Parity*4 check, and how it is performed during Even
communication. (Default: Even) Odd
Retry
Set the number of retries to be performed
when a communication error occurs. 0 to 5times
20
(Default: 3times)
GOT MULTI-DROP
Click! Set the time period for a communication to
CONNECTION
time out. (Default: 3sec)
Host Specify the host address in the connected
1 to 247
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Address*4 network. (Default: 1)
menu. Set this item to adjust the transmission

Delay Time
the GOT.
0 to 300ms 21
channel to be used from the list menu. (Default: 0ms)
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Select the steps to store two words (32-bit
3. Set the following items. 32bit Storage*3 data).
LH Order/
HL Order
• Manufacturer: MODBUS (Default: LH Order)
GT11, GT10
• Controller Type: MODBUS *1 Set either of the following values for the transmission speed.
• I/F: Interface to be used [9600bps], [19200bps], [38400bps]
*2 Set [8bit].
• Driver: MODBUS/RTU *3 Set [HL Order].
*4 Make the settings to match the setting of the energy 22
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, measuring unit/electronic multi-measuring instrument.
MULTI-CHANNEL
Make the settings according to the usage POINT
environment.
FUNCTION
19.4.2 Communication detail settings (1) Communication interface setting by Utility
changed on the Utility's [Communication setting]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project 23
POINT data.
FA TRANSPARENT
The settings of connecting equipment can be set and manual.

confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, User's Manual of GOT used
FUNCTION
refer to the following. (2) Precedence in communication settings

1.1.2 I/F communication setting When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the

19.5 Setting of Energy Measuring Unit/
Electric Multi-measuring Instrument
19.5.2 Station number setting

POINT
Energy measuring unit/electric multi-measuring In the MODBUS network, a maximum of 31 energy
instrument measuring units/electronic multi-measuring instruments
For details of the energy measuring unit/electronic can be connected to 1 GOT.
multi-measuring instrument, refer to the following Assign a non-overlapped station number ranging from 1 to
manual. 247 arbitrarily to each energy measuring unit/electronic
Energy measuring unit/Electronic multi- multi-measuring instrument.
measuring instrument User's Manual In the system configuration, the energy measuring unit/
electric multi-measuring instrument with the station number
set with the host address must be included. The station
number can be set without regard to the cable connection
Series Model name Refer to
order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not
EMU4-BD1-MB consecutive.
Energy measuring unit
EMU4-HD1-MB
19.5.1
ME110SSR-MB Station Station Station
Electric multi-measuring instrument GOT No.3 No.15 No.1
ME96NSR-MB
19.5.1 Connecting to an energy

measuring unit/electronic
multi-measuring instrument Examples of station number setting
Make the communication settings with the front
operation switch on the energy measuring unit/
electronic multi-measuring instrument.
Item Set value
*1*2 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Transmission speed
Data Bit 8bits (Fixed)
1bit, 2bits
Stop Bit*2
(Default: 1bit)
NONE/EVEN/ODD
Parity*2
(Default: EVEN)
1 to 247
Device address*2
(Default: 1)
*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on

the GOT side.

19.5 Setting of Energy Measuring Unit/Electric Multi-measuring Instrument
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
 Device setting items for GT Designer3
ROBOT
POINT
Address conversion example
18
For monitoring the address "031AH" of holding register
CNC CONNECTION
(Current value of total power)
The address of the holding register is displayed as
"4*****" on GT Designer3.
GT Designer3 converts the holding register's address
"031AH" to "00794" in decimal format.
Then, "+1" is added to this decimal address since the
holding register's address on GT Designer3 always
starts from "1."
19
Therefore, the holding register's address "031AH" is
displayed as "400795" on GT Designer3.
ENERGY MEASURING
Holding register 031AH
CONNECTION
Item Description
Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of
word device.
Information
Displays the device type and its setting range selected in "4 00794" +1 20
[Device].
GOT MULTI-DROP
Set the station number of the controller to be monitored.
"400795"
CONNECTION
Select this item for monitoring the host
Host
controller.
Select this item for monitoring other
Network controllers.  GS device settings
After selecting the item, set the station number Set the GS device as follows.
Other and network number of the controller to be
monitored.
21
GS573*1 = 2
CONNECTION FUNCTION
NW No.: Set [1].
*1 The GS device specifies the maximum number of the holding
Station No.: Set the station No. register read times.
 Address To input the numerical values to the GS device
GT11, GT10
automatically at GOT startup, use the status
GT Designer3 converts the device numbers into
observation function or the script function.
decimal format according to the address map of the
(Setting example of the status observation function)
energy measuring unit/electric multi-measuring 22
instrument to be used.
The table below shows the representations on the
MULTI-CHANNEL
MODBUS/RTU communication protocol and GT
Designer3.
FUNCTION
MODBUS/RTU Communication protocol

Function Code Representation
Device name
Read
to be used
Write
Address on GT Designer3
23
FA TRANSPARENT
0000 400001
0001 400002
Holding register 0x03 0x10 to to
FUNCTION
FFFE 465535
FFFF 465536
For details of the status observation function or the

script function, refer to the following manual.
(Drawing)
27. STATUS OBSERVATION FUNCTION
30. SCRIPT FUNCTION

19.7 Precautions
 Station number setting of the energy
measuring unit/electronic multi-measuring
instrument
In the system configuration, the energy measuring unit/
electric multi-measuring instrument with the station
number set with the host address must be included. For
details of host address setting, refer to the following.
 GOT clock control

The settings of "time adjusting" or "time broadcast"
made on the GOT will be disabled on the PLC.
 Cutting the portion of multiple connection of

the controller
example, the faulty station where a communication
timeout error occurs can be disconnected from
connected equipment. For details of the setting
contents of GOT internal device, refer to the following
manual.

19.7 Precautions
MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS
20. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 1

21. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION
FUNCTION CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 1
20
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
GOT MULTI-DROP
20.
CONNECTION 19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
20
20.1 CPU that can be Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 2
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
20.3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 16
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
20.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 26
20.7 Setting of connection conversion adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 31
GT11, GT10
20.8 Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 32
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
20 - 1
20.1 CPU that can be Monitored

The GOT can monitor only a CPU to which a serial multi-drop connection unit (GT01-RS4-M) is connected directly.
Serial Multi-Drop Unit
20 - 2 20. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

20.1 CPU that can be Monitored
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
 Connecting the CPU to the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit (hereinafter referred to as "master
module") directly
ROBOT

Communication type
Between CPU and Between master

18
master module module and GOT
CNC CONNECTION
R04CPU
R08CPU
R16CPU
R32CPU
R120CPU 19
R08PCPU
ENERGY MEASURING
R16PCPU
R32PCPU
CONNECTION
MELSEC iQ-R R120PCPU RS-232
RS-485
Series R04ENCPU RS-422
R08ENCPU 20
R16ENCPU
GOT MULTI-DROP
R32ENCPU
CONNECTION
R120ENCPU
R08SFCPU
R16SFCPU
R32SFCPU 21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
R120SFCPU
RS-232
CPU (MELSEC RS-485
R32MTCPU RS-422
iQ-R Series)
GT11, GT10
C Controller
module RS-232
R12CCPU-V RS-485
(MELSEC iQ-R
Series)
RS-422
22
RS-485
MULTI-CHANNEL
Series FX5UC RS-422
(Continued to next page) FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
20. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 20 - 3

Communication type
Series Model name Clock Between CPU Between

and master master module
module and GOT
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1 RS-232
Q02HCPU*1 RS-422
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1
Q25HCPU*1
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU RS-232
Q25PHCPU RS-422

-
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
MELSEC-Q Q02UCPU
(Q mode)*4 Q03UDCPU
RS-232
Q04UDHCPU
RS-422
Q06UDHCPU RS-485
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
RS-232 *2 *2 *2
Q50UDEHCPU *2 *2 *2 *2
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
Q12DCCPU-V*3
C Controller *2 *2 *2
Q24DHCCPU-V/VG
module RS-232 *2 *2 *2 *2
Q26DHCCPU-LS
MELSEC-QS*4 QS001CPU -

*2 Access via the (RS-232) in the multiple CPU system.
*4 Ww and Wr devices cannot be monitored.

Communication type 17
module and GOT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
L02CPU*5
L06CPU*5
ROBOT
L26CPU*5
L26CPU-BT*5
18
L02CPU-P*5 RS-232
MELSEC-L*3
*5 RS-422
L06CPU-P
L26CPU-P*5
CNC CONNECTION
L26CPU-PBT*5
L02SCPU
L02SCPU-P
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q RS-232
Q02HCPU-A
(A mode)*3 RS-422
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU 19
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA RS-422
Q3ACPU
(QnACPU)*2*3
ENERGY MEASURING
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU RS-422
CONNECTION
Q2ASCPU
RS-422
(QnASCPU)*2*3 Q2ASHCPU
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
A2UCPU-S1
20
A3UCPU
GOT MULTI-DROP
RS-485
A4UCPU
CONNECTION
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
A3ACPUP21
A3ACPUR21
MELSEC-A
A1NCPU*1 RS-422
(AnCPU)*4
A1NCPUP21*1
GT11, GT10
A1NCPUR21*1
A2NCPU*1
A2NCPUP21*1
A2NCPUR21*1
22
A2NCPU-S1*1
MULTI-CHANNEL
A2NCPUP21-S1*1
A2NCPUR21-S1*1
FUNCTION
A3NCPU*1
A3NCPUP21*1
A3NCPUR21*1
MELSEC-A
A2USCPU RS-422 23
(AnSCPU)*4
FA TRANSPARENT
*1 When monitoring AnNCPU or A2SCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU.
• AnNCPU(S1) with link: Version L or later, AnNCPU(S1) without link: Version H or later
FUNCTION
• A2SCPU: Version H or later

*2 GT10 can be connected to CPUs of the following HW versions or later.
PLC type HW/SW Version PLC type HW/SW Version
Q2ACPU DA Q2ASCPU AL
Q2ACPU-S1 DA Q2ASCPU-S1 AL
Q3ACPU DA Q2ASHCPU BL
Q4ACPU EA Q2ASHCPU-S1 BL
Q4ARCPU AL - -
*4 SB, SW, Ww, Wr, ER, and BM devices cannot be monitored.
*5 When connecting in direct CPU connection, the adapter L6ADP-R2 or L6ADP-R4 is required.
When using L6ADP-R4, use an LCPU whose upper five digits are "15102" or later.

Communication type
module and GOT
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
MELSEC-A A1SHCPU
*5
RS-422
(AnSCPU) A2SCPU*1
A2SHCPU
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU*1
A0J2HCPUP21*1
RS-422
A0J2HCPUR21*1
A0J2HCPU-DC24*1
A2CCPU*1
MELSEC-A*5
A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 RS-422
A2CCPUC24-PRF
A2CJCPU-S3
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*2*3 RS-485
Q173CPU*2*3 RS-232
Q172CPUN*2 RS-422
Q173CPUN*2
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion controller Q172DCPU

CPU (Q Series) Q173DCPU
RS-232 *4
Q172DCPU-S1 *4 *4 *4 *4
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU
Q170MSCPU RS-232
Q170MSCPU-S1
A273UCPU RS-422
A273UHCPU
RS-422
A273UHCPU-S3
Motion controller A373UCPU
CPU (A Series)*5 A373UCPU-S3
A171SCPU RS-422
A171SCPU-S3
A171SCPU-S3N
*1 When monitoring A0J2HCPU or A2CCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU.
• A0J2HCPU (with/without link): Version E or later
• A0J2HCPU-DC24: Version B or later
• A2CCPU: Version H or later

module and GOT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
ROBOT
Motion controller A172SHCPU
RS-422
CPU (A Series)*2 A172SHCPUN
A173UHCPU 18
A173UHCPU-S1
CNC CONNECTION
WS0-CPU0
MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 RS-232
WS0-CPU3
QJ72LP25-25
MELSECNET/H
QJ72LP25G RS-232
remote I/O station
CC-Link IE
QJ72BR15
19
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 -
head module
ENERGY MEASURING
CC-Link IE
CONNECTION
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB -
Ethernet adapter
module
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU RS-232
CRnQ-700 20
(Q172DRCPU)
CR750-Q RS-485
GOT MULTI-DROP
Robot controller RS-232
(Q172DRCPU)
CONNECTION
CR751-Q
(Q172DRCPU)
FX0 RS-422
FX0S
RS-422
FX0N
FX1 RS-422
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
FX2
RS-422
FX2C *1
FX1S
GT11, GT10
FX1N RS-232
FX2N RS-422
MELSEC-FX
FX1NC
FX2NC
RS-232 22
*1 RS-422
MULTI-CHANNEL
FX3S
FX3G
FX3GC RS-232 FUNCTION
FX3GE RS-422
FX3U
FX3UC
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

Communication type

module and GOT
FREQROL-A500/A500L
FREQROL-F500/F500L
FREQROL-V500/V500L
FREQROL-E500
FREQROL-S500/S500E
FREQROL-F500J
FREQROL-D700
FREQROL
FREQROL-F700PJ
RS-485
FREQROL-E700
FREQROL-A700
FREQROL-F700
FREQROL-F700P
FREQROL-A800
RS-485
FREQROL-F800
Sensorless servo FREQROL-E700EX
MELIPM MD-CX522- K(-A0)
MR-J2S- A
MR-J2S- CP
MR-J2S- CL
MR-J2M-P8A
RS-232
MELSERVO MR-J2M- DU
RS-422
MR-J3- A
MR-JE- A
MR-J3- T
MR-J4- A

17
 Connecting the CPU to the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit (hereinafter referred to as "master
module") in computer link connection
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Communication type
ROBOT
Series Model name Clock Between CPU and Between master
master module module and GOT
R04CPU
18
CNC CONNECTION
R08CPU
R16CPU
R32CPU
MELSEC iQ-R RS-232
R120CPU RS-485
Series RS-422
R08PCPU
R16PCPU 19
R32PCPU
ENERGY MEASURING
R120PCPU
CONNECTION
RS-232
CPU (MELSEC RS-485
RS-422
20
C Controller
module RS-232
GOT MULTI-DROP
R12CCPU-V RS-485
(MELSEC iQ-R RS-422
CONNECTION
Series)

RS-485
Series FX5UC RS-422

21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

Communication type

module and GOT
Q00JCPU
Q00CPU*1
Q01CPU*1
Q02CPU*1 RS-232
Q02HCPU*1 RS-422
Q06HCPU*1
Q12HCPU*1
Q25HCPU*1
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU RS-232
Q25PHCPU RS-422

-
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
MELSEC-Q Q02UCPU
(Q mode)*3 Q03UDCPU
RS-232
Q04UDHCPU
RS-422
Q06UDHCPU RS-485
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU RS-232
Q50UDEHCPU RS-422
Q100UDEHCPU
Q03UDVCPU
Q04UDVCPU
Q06UDVCPU
Q13UDVCPU
Q26UDVCPU
Q12DCCPU-V*2
C Controller
Q24DHCCPU-V/VG
module RS-232
Q26DHCCPU-LS
MELSEC-QS QS001CPU -


module and GOT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
L02CPU
L06CPU
ROBOT
L26CPU
L26CPU-BT
MELSEC-L*1
L02CPU-P RS-232 18
L06CPU-P RS-422
CNC CONNECTION
L26CPU-P
L26CPU-PBT
L02SCPU
L02SCPU-P
Q02CPU-A
MELSEC-Q RS-232
(A mode)*1
Q02HCPU-A
Q06HCPU-A
RS-422 19
Q2ACPU
ENERGY MEASURING
Q2ACPU-S1
MELSEC-QnA RS-232
Q3ACPU
(QnACPU)*1 RS-422
CONNECTION
Q4ACPU
Q4ARCPU
Q2ASCPU
MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1 RS-232 20
(QnASCPU)*1 Q2ASHCPU RS-422
GOT MULTI-DROP
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU
CONNECTION
A2UCPU-S1
A3UCPU RS-485
A4UCPU
A2ACPU
A2ACPUP21 21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
A2ACPUR21
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1
GT11, GT10
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPU
A3ACPUP21
MELSEC-A RS-232
(AnCPU)
A3ACPUR21
RS-422 22
A1NCPU
A1NCPUP21
MULTI-CHANNEL
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPU
FUNCTION
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPU-S1
A2NCPUP21-S1 23
A2NCPUR21-S1
FA TRANSPARENT
A3NCPU
A3NCPUP21
FUNCTION
A3NCPUR21
MELSEC-A RS-232
A2USCPU
(AnSCPU) RS-422

Communication type
module and GOT
A2USCPU-S1
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU
A1SCPUC24-R2
MELSEC-A A1SHCPU RS-232
(AnSCPU) A2SCPU RS-422
A2SHCPU
A1SJCPU
A1SJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU
A0J2HCPUP21
RS-422
A0J2HCPUR21
A0J2HCPU-DC24
A2CCPU
MELSEC-A -
A2CCPUP21
A2CCPUR21
A2CCPUC24 RS-232
A2CCPUC24-PRF RS-422
A2CJCPU-S3
-
A1FXCPU
Q172CPU*1*2 RS-485
Q173CPU*1*2 RS-232
Q172CPUN*1*2 RS-422
Q173CPUN*1*2
Q172HCPU
Q173HCPU
Motion controller Q172DCPU

CPU (Q Series) Q173DCPU RS-232
*3
Q172DCPU-S1 RS-422 *3 *3 *3 *3
Q173DCPU-S1
Q172DSCPU
Q173DSCPU
Q170MCPU
RS-232
Q170MSCPU
RS-422
Q170MSCPU-S1
A273UCPU
A273UHCPU
A273UHCPU-S3
Motion controller A373UCPU RS-232
CPU (A Series) A373UCPU-S3 RS-422
A171SCPU
A171SCPU-S3
A171SCPU-S3N

module and GOT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
A171SHCPU
A171SHCPUN
ROBOT
Motion controller A172SHCPU RS-232
CPU (A Series) A172SHCPUN RS-422
A173UHCPU 18
A173UHCPU-S1
CNC CONNECTION
WS0-CPU0
WS0-CPU3
QJ72LP25-25
MELSECNET/H RS-232
QJ72LP25G
remote I/O station RS-422
CC-Link IE
QJ72BR15
19
Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 -
head module
ENERGY MEASURING
CC-Link IE
CONNECTION
Field Network
NZ2GF-ETB -
Ethernet adapter
module
RS-232
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU
RS-422 20
CRnQ-700
(Q172DRCPU)
GOT MULTI-DROP
RS-485
CR750-Q
CONNECTION
Robot controller -
(Q172DRCPU)
CR751-Q
(Q172DRCPU)
FX0 -
FX0S
FX0N
- 21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
FX1 -
FX2
-
FX2C *1
GT11, GT10
FX1S
FX1N
-
FX2N
MELSEC-FX
FX1NC 22
FX2NC -
*1
MULTI-CHANNEL
FX3S
FX3G
FUNCTION
FX3GC
-
FX3GE
FX3U
FX3UC 23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

Communication type

module and GOT
FREQROL-A500/A500L
FREQROL-F500/F500L
FREQROL-V500/V500L
FREQROL-E500
FREQROL-S500/S500E
FREQROL-F500J
FREQROL-D700
FREQROL
FREQROL-F700PJ
RS-485
FREQROL-E700
FREQROL-A700
FREQROL-F700
FREQROL-F700P
FREQROL-A800
RS-485
FREQROL-F800
Sensorless servo FREQROL-E700EX
MELIPM MD-CX522- K(-A0)
MR-J2S- A
MR-J2S- CP
MR-J2S- CL
MR-J2M-P8A
RS-232
MELSERVO MR-J2M- DU
RS-422
MR-J3- A
MR-JE- A
MR-J3- T
MR-J4- A

17
 [Controller Type] and [Communication driver] of GT Designer3
The following table shows the [Controller Type] and [Communication driver] of GT Designer3 for which the GOT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
multi-drop connection is available.
PLC Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit
ROBOT
GOT type
Connection type Type Serial Multi-Drop Connection driver
DIRECT MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700
CONNECTION TO
CPU
MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
Serial(MELSEC)
18
COMPUTER LINK
CNC CONNECTION
CONNECTION MELSEC-L
DIRECT MELSEC-A MELSEC-A
CONNECTION TO
MELSEC-FX MELSEC-FX
CPU
DIRECT MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR
CONNECTION TO
CPU
MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6*
Serial(MELSEC) 19
COMPUTER LINK
CONNECTION MELSEC-L
ENERGY MEASURING
DIRECT MELSEC-A MELSEC-A
CONNECTION TO
CONNECTION
MELSEC-FX MELSEC-FX
CPU
DIRECT MELSEC-QnU/DC
CONNECTION TO MELSEC-QnA/Q
CPU
COMPUTER LINK
MELSEC-Q(MULTI)
Serial(MELSEC)
20
CONNECTION MELSEC-L
GOT MULTI-DROP
(RS-422) DIRECT MELSEC-A MELSEC-A
CONNECTION
CONNECTION TO
MELSEC-FX MELSEC-FX
CPU
POINT
21
GOT models support the GOT Multi-Drop Connection
CONNECTION FUNCTION
The following GOT models support the GOT Multi-Drop Connection.
For the confirming method of hardware version, refer to the following.
GT11, GT10
GT User's Manual
GOT Hardware version Standard monitor OS
GT16, GT15*1, GT14 version A or later
GT1155-QTBD version C or later - 22
GT1155-QSBD, GT1150-QLBD version F or later
MULTI-CHANNEL
GT1055-QSBD, GT1050-QBBD version C or later
GT1045-QSBD, GT1040-QBBD version A or later
FUNCTION
Standard monitor OS[01.12.**]or later
GT1030-L D , GT1030-H D version B or later
GT1020-L D version E or later
*1 When connecting GT16/GT15 in multi-drop connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the
GOT from GT Designer3 (Version 1.14Q or later), as well as the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to 23
the serial multi-drop connection unit are required.
For details of the OS installation, refer to the following.
FA TRANSPARENT
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

FUNCTION

Connection type Multi-Drop (Slave)

dependent
(Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit) (GOT)
Serial multi
PLC drop connection GOT GOT
unit
Varies according to the

connection type. Connection cable Connection cable
Serial Multi-Drop Connection

Connection cable GOT Number of
Unit Max.
PLC connectable
Communication distance
Model Cable model Option device Model equipment
type
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)
RS485
FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)
connection diagram 2) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)
RS485
GT15-RS4-9S
For details of the connection diagram 1)
system
RS485
configuration GT15-RS4-TE
between the
16 GOTs for
Serial Multi-Drop
GT01-RS4-M RS-485 500m*2 Serial Multi-Drop
Connection Unit GT10-9PT5S*1
Connection Unit*3
and PLC, refer to
the RS485
corresponding
section.
- (Built into GOT)
*5
RS485
GT14-RS2T4-9P*4
*1 Connect it to the RS-422/485 interface (built into GOT).
*2 The maximum distance from the PLC to the terminal GOT.
*3 When the number of connected GOTs is increased, the response performance decreases.
*5 Cannot be connected to products with input voltage 5V.

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
The following diagram shows the cable connection between the serial multi-drop connection unit and the GOT.
ROBOT
20.4.1 RS-485 cable
18
CNC CONNECTION
3 3 3
GOT side* (9 pin) GOT side* (9 pin) GOT side* (9 pin)
SHELL
SHELL
SHELL
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SG
SG
SG
19
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
Terminal Terminal Terminal
SG
SG
SG
FG
FG
FG
block *6 block *6 block *6
Serial multi drop R R

*4
20
connection unit *2
GOT MULTI-DROP
RDA*1
CONNECTION
RDB*1
SDA*1
SDB*1
SG
*5
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
*1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB and RDA/RDB.
*2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
*3 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable".
GT11, GT10
*4 Connect a 330 terminating resistor to the GOT to be a terminal.
*5 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding.
*6 For the cable for converting D-sub9 pin connector to terminal block, refer to the following. 22
 Precautions when preparing a cable(2)
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

(For 1 pair wiring)
Serial multi drop

connection unit *2 CON side*3(20 pin) CON side*3(20 pin) CON side*3(20 pin)
SDA1(TXD1+) SDA2(TXD2+) SDA1(TXD1+)

SDA*1 6 5 6
SDB1(TXD1-) SDB2(TXD2-) SDB1(TXD1-)
SDB*1 8 7 8
RDA1(RXD1+) RDA2(RXD2+) RDA1(RXD1+)
RDA 10 9 10
RDB1(RXD1-) RDB2(RXD2-) RDB1(RXD1-)
R
RDB 12 11 12
*4
SG SG SG
SG 2 2 2
NC NC NC
1 1 1
*5 *5 *5 *5
NC NC NC
3 3 3
NC NC NC
4 4 4
5 6 5
7 8 7
9 10 9
*5 *5
11 12 11
NC NC NC
13 13 13
RSA(RTS+) RSA(RTS+) RSA(RTS+)
14 14 14
NC NC NC
15 15 15
RSB(RTS-) RSB(RTS-) RSB(RTS-)
16 16 16
NC NC NC
17 17 17
CSA(CTS+) CSA(CTS+) CSA(CTS+)
18 18 18
NC NC NC
19 19 19
CSB(CTS-) CSB(CTS-) CSB(CTS-)
20 20 20
*1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB.



17
(For 2 pair wiring)
Serial multi drop
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
connection unit *2 CON side*3(20pin) CON side*3(20pin) CON side*3(20pin)
ROBOT
RDA*1 6 5 6
R
RDB*1 8 7 8
18
*4
SDA*1 10 9 10
R
SDB *1
CNC CONNECTION
12 11 12
*4
SG SG SG
SG 2 2 2
NC NC *5 *5 NC
1 1 1
*5 *5
NC NC NC
3 3 3
NC NC NC
4 4 4
SDA2(TXD2+)
5
SDA1(TXD1+)
6
SDA2(TXD2+)
5
19
7 8 7
ENERGY MEASURING
9 10 9
CONNECTION
11 12 11
NC NC NC
13 13 13
*5 *5
RSA(RTS+) RSA(RTS+) RSA(RTS+)
20
14 14 14
NC NC NC
15 15 15
RSB(RTS-) RSB(RTS-) RSB(RTS-)
GOT MULTI-DROP
16 16 16
CONNECTION
NC NC NC
17 17 17
CSA(CTS+) CSA(CTS+) CSA(CTS+)
18 18 18
NC NC NC
19 19 19
CSB(CTS-) CSB(CTS-) CSB(CTS-)
20 20 20
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
*1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB and RDA/RDB.
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

(For 1 pair wiring)
Serial multi drop

connection unit *2 GOT side*3 GOT side*3 GOT side*3
SDA1 SDA2 SDA1
SDA*1 1 5 1
SDB1 SDB2 SDB1
SDB*1 2 6 2
RDA1 RDA2 RDA1
RDA 3 7 3
RDB1 RDB2 RDB1
R
RDB 4 8 4
*4
SG SG SG
SG 9 9 9
*5 SDA2 SDA1 SDA2

5 1 5
SDB2 SDB1 SDB2
6 2 6
RDA2 RDA1 RDA2
7 3 7
RDB2 RDB1 RDB2
8 4 8
FG FG FG
10 10 10
*1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB.



(For 2 pair wiring)
Serial multi drop

SDA1 SDA2 SDA1
RDA*1 1 5 1
SDB1 SDB2 SDB1
RDB*1 2 6 2
*1 RDA1 RDA2 RDA1

SDA 3 7 3
R
*1 RDB1 RDB2 RDB1
SDB 4 8 4
*4
SG SG SG
SG 9 9 9
*5 SDA2 SDA1 SDA2

5 1 5
SDB2 SDB1 SDB2
6 2 6
RDA2 RDA1 RDA2
7 3 7
RDB2 RDB1 RDB2
8 4 8
FG FG FG
10 10 10
*1 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA/SDB, RDA/RDB.



17
(For 1 pair wiring)
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Serial multi drop
connection unit *2 GOT side*1 *3 GOT side*1 *3 GOT side*2 *3
ROBOT
SDA *4 SDA *4 SDA *4
SDA 1 1 1
SDB SDB SDB
SDB 6 6 6
RDA
RDA
2
RDA
2
RDA
2 18
RDB RDB RDB
CNC CONNECTION
RDB 7 7 7
*3 *3 *3
SG SG SG
SG 5 5 5
*5 RSA *5 RSA *5 RSA

3 3 3
RSB RSB RSB
8 8 8
CSA CSA CSA
4 4 4
CSB
9
CSB
9
CSB
9
19
ENERGY MEASURING
*1 Set the terminating resistor selector to "OPEN".
CONNECTION
*3 Set the 1pair/2pair signal selection switch to "1pair" when using the connection conversion adapter.
In that case, transition wiring is not necessary between SDA and RDA or SDB and RDB.
*4 This is the connector pin No. of GT14, GT11, GT105 , or GT104 main unit. 20
*5 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding (100 or less).
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
(For 2 pair wiring)
Serial multi drop

connection unit *2 GOT side*1 *3 GOT side*1 *3 GOT side*2 *3
*4 *4 *4
RDA
SDA
1
SDA
1
SDA
1 21
SDB SDB SDB
CONNECTION FUNCTION
RDB 6 6 6
RDA RDA RDA
SDA 2 2 2
RDB RDB RDB
SDB 7 7 7
GT11, GT10
SG SG SG
SG 5 5 5
*5 RSA *5 RSA *5 RSA

3 3 3
RSB
8
RSB
8
RSB
8 22
CSA CSA CSA
4 4 4
MULTI-CHANNEL
CSB CSB CSB
9 9 9
FUNCTION
*1 Set the terminating resistor selector to "OPEN".
*3
Set the 1pair/2pair signal selection switch to "2pair" when using the connection conversion adapter. 23
*4 This is the connector pin No. of GT14, GT11, GT105 , or GT104 main unit.
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

(For 1 pair wiring)
Serial multi drop

SDA SDA SDA SDA
SDB SDB SDB SDB
RDA RDA RDA RDA
RDB RDB RDB RDB
SG SG SG SG
*3 *3 *3
20.6.3 Setting switches

• When GOT is a terminal
Terminating resistor: 110
• When GOT is not a terminal
Terminating resistor: OPEN

(For 2 pair wiring)
Serial multi drop

RDA SDA SDA SDA
RDB SDB SDB SDB
SDA RDA RDA RDA
SDB RDB RDB RDB
SG SG SG SG
*3 *3 *3

• When GOT is a terminal
Terminating resistor: 330
• When GOT is not a terminal
Terminating resistor: OPEN

SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
POINT
connection unit
Serial multi drop
RSA
RSB
CSA
CSB
SDA1
SDB1
RDA1
GT16
RDB1
SDA2
SDB2
(FA-LTBGTR4CBL□□)
RDA2
Mixed wiring with various GOTs
RDB2
SG
Example of mixed wiring with various GOTs
RDB1
RDA1
SDB1
SDA1
RDB2
RDA2
SDB2
GT16, GT15
(GT15-RS4-TE)
SDA2
SG
FG
SDA1 SDA
SDB1 SDB
RDA1 RDA
The GOT multi-drop connection can be used with various GOTs mixed.
RDB1 RDB
SDA2 RSA
SDB2 RSB
RDA2 CSA
GT16, GT15
(GT15-RS4-9S)
RDB2 CSB
SG SG
FG SHELL
User-created
RDB
terminal block
RDA
SDB
SDA

RSA
RSB
CSA
GT11, GT10
(GT10-9PT5S)
CSB
SG
20 - 23
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, ENERGY MEASURING ROBOT
FA TRANSPARENT MULTI-CHANNEL GT11, GT10 GOT MULTI-DROP UNIT/ELECTRIC MULTI- CONTROLLER
FUNCTION FUNCTION CONNECTION FUNCTION CONNECTION CONNECTION CNC CONNECTION CONNECTION
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
 Precautions when preparing a cable (3) GOT side connector
(1) Cable 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
Use a shielded twisted pair cable of 0.3mm2 or more as
a cable for GOT multi-drop connection.The following
shows recommended model names and manufacturers
of the cable to be used. When connecting a Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit
to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to
Manufacturer Model Remark
the GOT.
MITSUBISHI CABLE Two-pair cable of
SPEV(SB)-0.5-2P (a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
INDUSTRIES, LTD. 0.5mm2
Two-pair cable of
Showa Electric Wire & KMPEV-SB
Cable Co.,Ltd CWS-178 0.5SQ 2P 0.5mm2
Three-pair cable of
DPEV SB 0.3 3P (b) For GT14, GT11, GT10
Sumitomo Electric 0.3mm2
Set the terminating resistor selector switch.
Industries.,Ltd Three-pair cable of
DPEV SB 0.5 3P
0.5mm2
The Furukawa Electric Three-pair cable of
D-KPEV-SB 0.5 3P to the following.
Co.,Ltd 0.5mm2
Two-pair cable of 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
IPEV-SB 2P 0.3 mm2
0.3mm2
Fujikura Ltd.
Two-pair cable of
IPEV-SB 2P 0.5 mm2
0.5mm2
Pair
Shield
Two-pair cable structural

Three-pair cable structural
drawing example
drawing example
(2) Cable for converting D-sub9 pin connector to

terminal block
Create by yourself, referring to the following connection
diagram.
Example of connection diagram for 2 pair wiring

SDA1 1 SDA
SDB1 6 SDB
RDA1 2 RDA
RDB1 7 RDB
SDA2 5 SG
SDB2 3 RSA
RDA2 8 RSB
RDB2 4 CSA
SG 9 CSB
FG Shell FG
Make sure to connect the wiring branched on the GOT side

connector.
Use a shielded twisted pair cable of 0.2mm2 or more.
Use an applicable cable to D-sub connector.
Wiring should be the shortest distance.

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
interface (communication
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
2.
3.
19
4.
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION

4800bps,
9600bps,
20
19200bps,
Transmission Speed communication with the connected
GOT MULTI-DROP
Click! 38400bps,
equipment.
57600bps,
CONNECTION
115200bps

timeout occurs.
menu. Retry When receiving no response after
0 to 5times
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
out.
channel to be used from the list menu. (Default: 0time)
3. Set the following items. Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
GT11, GT10
• Manufacturer: Set it according to the connected (Default: 3sec)
equipment. Specify the station number of the

host station in the system
• Controller Type: Set it according to the connected
equipment.
GOT Address
configuration.
(Default: 0)
0 to 15
22
• I/F: Interface to be used Set this item to adjust the
MULTI-CHANNEL
• Driver: Multi-Drop (slave) transmission timing of the
Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 ms
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, GOT. FUNCTION
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. (Default: 0ms)
environment.
POINT 23
FA TRANSPARENT
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. (1) Communication interface setting by Utility
FUNCTION

POINT after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
The settings of connecting equipment can be For details on the Utility, refer to the following
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. manual.
GT User's Manual
1.1.2 I/F communication setting (2) Precedence in communication settings

20.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit
20.6.1 Write the OS
Write the standard monitor OS and communication interface (Communication
driver according to the desired connection type onto the settings)
serial multi-drop connection unit.
For the OS writing methods, refer to the following
Make the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit interface
manual.
setting on [Communication with GT01-RS4-M] of GT
GT Designer3 Version Screen design manual Designer 3.
For the communication interface driver, set the same
communication driver as the serial multi-drop
connection.
For details on [Communication with GT01-RS4-M] of
GT Designer3, refer to the manuals.
GT Designer3 Version Screen design manual
1.
Click!
1. Check-mark a communication driver according to the

desired connection type and click the [Write] button.

17
 Controller setting  Setting the multi-drop system information
function
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
When checking the connection status of each GOT
which is connected to GT01-RS4-M on the PLC side,
ROBOT
set the multi-drop system information function.
The GOT connection status is stored in the PLC side
word device. 18
(1) Setting on the PLC side word device
CNC CONNECTION
19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
1. Set the following to the driver for the connected
equipment.
• Connection type dependent
The driver for connection with the GOT is fixed to the 21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
following one.
• Multi-drop(Host)
2. Perform the detailed settings for the driver.

1.
GT11, GT10
Select [Use the system information of Multidrop] and
■ Communication detail settings click the [Set] button. The following dialog window is
displayed.
3. Set [Use the system information of Multidrop] as
22
necessary.
■ Setting the multi-drop system information
MULTI-CHANNEL
function
FUNCTION
4. Click the [Write] button when settings are completed.
5. If the [Communication with GT01-RS4-M] dialog box

is closed, communication setting contents for GT01- 2. Set the PLC side word device to [Head Device (10 23
RS4-M does not remain. Points)]. In this example, "D0" is set.
FA TRANSPARENT
• To maintain the communication setting contents,

click (export).
FUNCTION
■ Exporting/Importing the communication

setting contents
• To use communication setting contents which are
saved previously, click (import).
■ Exporting/Importing the communication
setting contents

(2) Assignment contents of the PLC side word device (c) Slave station control signal
The following table shows the device assignment This signal controls slave stations which are not
contents when setting [Head Device (10 Points)] to updated by the master station.
"D0". Usually, the master station accesses all stations
(up to 16 stations). In addition, if stations are
Device Description temporarily in communication error due to a power
D0 (Head device+0) Control signal 1-1 disconnection or screen data transfer during the
D1(Head device+1) Station information notification signal steady operation, the automatic recovery of the
D2(Head device+2) (Reserve) station is executed for one station per ten seconds.
D3(Head device+3) (Reserve)
Therefore, the automatic recovery may take
maximum 2 minutes and 30 seconds.
Using this control signal, the number of slave
D5(Head device+5) Slave station control signal
stations to be monitored by the master station can
be reduced to the actual number of slave stations
to be used by a user. This makes the automatic
D8(Head device+8) (Reserve) recovery processing smooth. If an error occurs in
D9(Head device+9) (Reserve) only one station, the time for the station to recover
automatically can be reduced within 10 seconds.
(3) Details on the word device assignment contents Device

Action
(a) Control signal 1-1 value
The master station accesses all the slave stations

Bit position Description 0 (station 0 to 15). When the multi-drop system
bit0 10 second cycle flicker signal information is not used, the operation is the same.
bit1 to 15 (Reserve) Turning on the bit corresponding to a station No.

disconnects the specified slave station from the
< 10 second cycle flicker signal *1 > master station.
By the repetition of turning ON/OFF every 5
seconds, the connection between GT01-RS4-M Other bit15 bit14 .......... bit2 bit1 bit0
and the PLC can be confirmed on the PLC side. than 0 Station Station Station Station Station
When no repetition of this ON/OFF is observed, ..........
No. 15 No. 14 No. 2 No. 1 No. 0
GT01-RS4-M is not connected to the PLC.
5sec 5sec 1...Connected
0...Unconnected
ON
OFF When the bits are off and the master station and
the slave stations are in communication, the
*1 When writing or clearing data on the program area from the
personal computer to the PLC using FA transparent function, communication with the corresponding slave
flicker of the signal as shown above may be temporarily stations is disconnected if the above corresponding
stopped.
bits are turned on.
(b) Station information notification signal *2
This signal notifies the status of the slave station
(GOT) which is connected to the master station
(GT01-RS4-M). Only the bit corresponding to the
number of connected slave station (GOT) is turned
ON and other bits are turned OFF.
bit15 bit14 .................. bit2 bit1 bit0
Station Station Station Station Station

..................
No. 15 No. 14 No. 2 No. 1 No. 0
• 1: Connected
• 0: Unconnected (Including communication error
status)
*2 When the communication between GT01-RS4-M and the
PLC becomes faulty, the station information notification
signal is not updated.

17
 Exporting/Importing the communication  Communication detail settings
setting contents Make the settings according to the usage environment.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
(1) Export (3) For the connection with GOT
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
1. After determining the storage location as necessary,
name the file and save it.
The file format is [*.ini] (fixed).
20
4800bps,
GOT MULTI-DROP
(2) Import 9600bps,
CONNECTION
19200bps,
Transmission Speed communication with the connected
38400bps,
equipment.
57600bps,
115200bps
performed when a communication 21
timeout occurs.
CONNECTION FUNCTION
out.
(Default: 0time)
GT11, GT10
(Default: 3sec)
Set this item to adjust the 22
transmission timing of the
Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 ms
MULTI-CHANNEL
GOT.
1. Enter the name of the file previously saved and open (Default: 0ms)
FUNCTION
the file.
The file format is [*.ini] (fixed).
(4) For the connected equipment 23

Set the communication detail settings of the driver for
FA TRANSPARENT
controllers according to the connection type.

Refer to each chapter.
FUNCTION

Set the switches according to the connection type.
POINT
Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit
For details on the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit,
Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit User’s
Manual
Terminating resistor PLC communication

selector switch selection switch

17
20.7 Setting of connection conversion adapter
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
Set the switches according to the connection type.
18
POINT
CNC CONNECTION
Connection conversion adapter
For details on the connection conversion adapter, refer
Connection Conversion Adapter User’s manual
19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
1pair / 2pair signal
selection switch
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

20.7 Setting of connection conversion adapter
20.8 Precautions
 Connecting GT16 and GT15 in multi-drop  Using the multi-drop connection in the multi-
connection channel configuration
(1) Standard monitor OS installation, Writing If a communication timeout error occurs when using the
Communication driver multi-drop connection in the multi-channel
When connecting GT16/GT15 in multi-drop connection, configuration, set the send delay time to the serial
the writing of the standard monitor OS and multi-drop connection unit side.
communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3 ■ Communication detail settings
(Version 1.12N or later), as well as the writing of the
standard monitor OS and communication driver to the  Device update cycle
serial multi-drop connection unit are required.
• When the number of connected slave GOTs and the
(2) Device specification device points of each GOT increase, the device
Network No. and station No. are not supported. update cycle on the screen may get slower. In such a
case, it is recommended to reduce the device points
 Station number setting on GOT of each GOT. (Please consider 250 points as a guide
Set each station number so that no station number of 1 GOT, and 750 points as a guide of the total
points.) In addition, when a timeout error occurs,
overlaps.When the station No. is duplicated, the GOT
make the timeout time longer in the communication
whose station No. is duplicated cannot be monitored
settings of the slave GOT.
normally.
The station number can be set without regard to the • When the device number is set randomly, the device
update cycle becomes slower compared to the case
cable connection order.There is no problem even if
that the device number is set consecutively.Therefore,
station numbers are not consecutive.
it is recommended to set the device number
consecutively.
Station Station Station
No.3 No.0 No.15 • Depending on the device points or combination, it
may take time to switch the screen.At this time, the
device update cycle of other slave station is also
affected.
 FA transparent function
The example of a Station No. setting FA transparent function is available for each GOT in the
GOT multi-drop connection system.
 Extended/Option function of GOT
(1) Standard monitor OS installation, Writing
The extended/option functions of GOT shown below
are not available.
When using FA transparent function in GOT multi-drop
System monitor, Device monitor, Ladder monitor, A list connection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and
editor, FX list editor, Intelligent unit monitor, Network communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3
monitor, Q motion monitor, Servo amplifier monitor, (Version 1.18U or later), as well as the writing of the
CNC monitor, Backup/restore, CNC data I/O, SFC standard monitor OS and communication driver to the
monitor, Ladder editor, Log viewer, MELSEC-L serial multi-drop connection unit are required.
troubleshoot, Motion SFC, motion program (SV43)
(2) Number of personal computers
editor, Motion program (SV43) I/O Only one personal computer can be connected to the
multi-drop connection system.
 System alarm (GT16, GT15, GT14, GT11) Only one personal computer
The alarms of the serial multi-drop connection unit are
displayed on the system alarm.The alarms of the
connected PLC are not displayed.
 Activating the serial multi-drop connection

unit
The master module detects a slave GOT, which is
connected, at the startup.It may take time to detect (3) Monitor speed of GOT
again the slave station which is not detected at this The monitoring performance slows down according to
point.Activate the master module in the condition that a the number of monitoring GOTs. While using FA
communication can be made after the startup of the transparent function, the monitoring performance of the
whole multi-drop system decreases. As a result,
slave GOT.
timeout error may occur in GOTs in the system.

20.8 Precautions
21
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11,
21.
GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION CONNECTION

19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
21.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 2 20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
21.5 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 - 11 21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
21 - 1
21. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10
CONNECTION FUNCTION

For details of connectable models, refer to the following.

21.2.1 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-232 interface
Serial (MELSEC) MELSEC-A MELSEC-FX

( For GT10)
GOT GOT
PLC
(1st) (2nd)
Connection cable
Varies according to
the connection type.
PLC GOT (1st) *1 Connection cable GOT (2nd) *1 Number of

connectable
Communication Option Communication Max. Option
Connection type Model Cable model Model equipment
type device type distance device
- -
RS-422 connection
(Built into RS-422 30m (Built into
GOT) diagram 1) GOT)
- -
For the system RS-422 connection
configuration diagram 1)
GOT) GOT)
between a got and
A plc, refer to the - -
RS-422 connection
following. (Built into RS-422 30m (Built into
DIRECT RS-232 - - 2 GOTs
CONNECTION RS-422 connection
TO CPU GOT) diagram 1) GOT)
-
COMPUTER
GT10-C30R2-6P(3m)*3 3m (Built into
LINK GOT)
-
CONNECTION*4
(Built into RS-232 GT10-C02H-6PT9P (0.2m)
GOT) + - *2
15m (Built into
RS-232 connection
GOT)
diagram 4)
21 - 2 21. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION

17
Communication Option Communication Max. Option connectable
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
For the system - -
RS-422 connection
ROBOT
configuration between a (Built into RS-422 30m (Built into
GOT) diagram 2) GOT) *5
got and A plc, refer to the
following.
RS-232
GT01-C30R2-6P(3m)
GT10-C02H-6PT9P
3m
2 GOTs
18
DIRECT - -
CNC CONNECTION
(0.2m)
CONNECTION TO CPU (Built into RS-232 (Built into
+ 15m
GOT) GOT)
COMPUTER LINK
RS-232 connection
CONNECTION*4 diagram 5)
*1 When GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are intermingled, the Multiple connection function is not supported.
*2 The 2nd GOT must be a RS-232 built-in product.
*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.( RS-232 connection diagram 2)) 19
*4 When connected to the Computer link, the multiple connection function supports only RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), Motion controller
CPU (Q mode), LCPU.
ENERGY MEASURING
*5 The 2nd GOT must be a GT10 (input power supply: 24V) RS-422 built-in product.
CONNECTION
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
21. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 - 3

21.2.2 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-422 interface
Serial (MELSEC) MELSEC-A MELSEC-FX

( For GT10)
GOT GOT
PLC
(1st) (2nd)
Connection cable
Varies according to
the connection type.

connectable
Communication Option Communication Max. Option
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
- or -
RS-232 connection
GOT) GOT)
diagram 1)
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
- or -
RS-232 connection
GOT) GOT)
diagram 1)
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
- or -
For the system RS-232 connection
GOT) GOT)
configuration diagram 1)
between a got and GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
A plc, refer to the - or -
following. (Built into RS-232 15m (Built into
RS-232 connection
GOT) GOT)
RS-422 diagram 1) 2 GOTs
DIRECT
CONNECTION TO *3 3m
GT10-C30R2-6P(3m)
CPU
GT10-C02H-6PT9P
- -
(0.2m) *2
(Built into RS-232 (Built into
COMPUTER LINK +
GOT) 15m GOT)
CONNECTION*4
RS-232 connection
diagram 4)
- -
GT01-C30R2-6P(3m) 3m
GT10-C02H-6PT9P
- -
(0.2m)
(Built into RS-232 (Built into
+ 15m
GOT) GOT)
RS-232 connection
diagram 5)
*1 When GT14, GT12, GT11 and GT10 are intermingled, the Multiple connection function is not supported.
*2 The 2nd GOT must be a GT10 (input power supply: 24V) RS-232 built-in product.
*3 For the connection to GOT, refer to the connection diagram.( RS-232 connection diagram 2))
*4 When connected to the Computer link, the multiple connection function supports only RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), Motion controller
CPU (Q mode), LCPU.

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
GOT and the PLC.
ROBOT
Cable (GT10-C02H-6PT9P) Second GOT side
21.3.1 RS-232 Cable D-Sub 9-pin (terminal block)
18
N.C. 1 6 RS
CNC CONNECTION
 Connection diagram RD (RXD) 2 1 SD (TXD)
SD (TXD) 3 2 RD (RXD)
GOT side GOT side ER (DTR) 4 4 DR (DSR)
SG 5 5 SG
N.C. 1 1 N.C.
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD(TXD)
DR (DSR) 6 3 ER (DTR) 19
RS (RTS) 7 7 CS (CTS)
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD)
ENERGY MEASURING
CS (CTS) 8 8 N.C.
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR(DSR)
CONNECTION
- 9 9 N.C.
SG 5 5 SG
DR(DSR) 6 4 ER(DTR)
RS(RTS) 7 8 CS(CTS) Cable (GT10-C02H-6PT9P)
D-Sub 9-pin side
Second GOT side 20
CS(CTS) 8 7 RS(RTS)
N.C. 1 1 N.C.
GOT MULTI-DROP
- 9 - -
CONNECTION
RD (RXD) 2 3 SD (TXD)
RS-232 connection diagram 2) SD (TXD) 3 2 RD (RXD)
Second GOT side Untied wire color ER (DTR) 4 6 DR (DSR)

(terminal block) of GT10-C30R2-6P
SG 5 5 SG
SD Brown DR (DSR) 6 4 ER (DTR)
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
RD Red RS (RTS) 7 8 CS (CTS)
ER Blue CS (CTS) 8 7 RS (RTS)
GT11, GT10
DR Yellow - 9 - -
SG Green
RS
22
Purple
CS  Precautions when preparing a cable

NC (1) Cable length
MULTI-CHANNEL
NC
(2) GOT side connector FUNCTION
RS-232 connection diagram 3) For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
Second GOT side 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
First GOT side (terminal block)
23
N.C. 1 6 RS
FA TRANSPARENT
RD(RXD) 2 1 SD(TXD)
FUNCTION
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD(RXD)
ER(DTR) 4 4 DR(DSR)
SG 5 5 SG
DR(DSR) 6 3 ER(DTR)
RS(RTS) 7 7 CS(CTS)
CS(CTS) 8 8 N.C.
- 9 9 N.C.

21.3.2 RS-422 cable
 Connection diagram (1) Cable length
GOT side GOT side
SDA 1 2 RDA 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
RDA 2 1 SDA
RSA 3 4 CSA
CSA 4 3 RSA (1) GOT side
SG 5 5 SG When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating
SDB 6 7 RDB Set the terminating resistor selector of the GOT main
RDB 7 6 SDB unit to "300 ".
RSB 8 9 CSB
to the following.
CSB 9 8 RSB

Second GOT side
First GOT side (terminal block)
RDA 2 1 SDA
RDB 7 2 SDB
SDA 1 3 RDA
SDB 6 4 RDB
SG 5 5 SG
CSA 4 6 RSA
CSB 9 7 RSB
RSA 3 8 CSA
RSB 8 9 CSB

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
interface (Communication 4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,
ROBOT
settings) Make the settings according to the usage
environment. 18
This section explains with an example of the following 21.4.2 Communication detail settings
CNC CONNECTION
RS-232 1st GOT RS-422 2nd GOT
cable cable
GT11 GT11 (2) Settings of communication interface connecting to

 Setting for the first GOT the second GOT
19
2.
(1) Settings of communication interface connecting to
ENERGY MEASURING
the PLC
2.
CONNECTION
20
3.
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
4.
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Click!
GT11, GT10
Click!

menu. 22
1. Select [Common] [I/F Communication Setting] from
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the the menu.
MULTI-CHANNEL
2. The I/F Connection list window is displayed. Select
FUNCTION
3. Set the following items. the following.
• Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC • I/F-1: RS422/232
• Controller Type: Set according to the Controller CH No.: 9
Type to be connected. Driver: Host (PC) 23
• I/F: Standard I/F (RS-232)
• Driver: Set either of the following according to the
FA TRANSPARENT
Controller Type to be connected. Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
For GT14, GT12, GT11
FUNCTION
Serial (MELSEC)
MELSEC-FX
For GT10
Serial (MELSEC)
MELSEC-A
MELSEC-FX

(3) [Transparent] setting (GT14 only)
 Setting for the second GOT
Set the communication interface connecting to the first
GOT.
2.
3.
4.
1. Select [Common] [Environment Setup] [GOT

Setup], check [Enable GOT Setup], and select the
[Transparent] menu.
Click!
2. After [Controller CH No.] is displayed, check the
channel No. connected to the target PLC of multiple
GOTs.
For details of connectable models, refer to the
following.
menu.
7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select
[CH1] from the list menu.
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. 3. Set the following items.
• Controller Type: Set the same setting as the first
GOT (communication interface connecting to the
PLC)
• I/F: Standard I/F (RS422/232)
• Driver: Set the same setting as the first GOT
(communication interface connecting to the PLC)

Set the same setting as the first GOT (communication
interface connecting to the PLC)

21.4.2 Communication detail settings (2) MELSEC-FX
17
(a) For the GT14, GT12, GT11
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
(1) Serial (MELSEC)
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
Item Description

Range
19
ENERGY MEASURING
Set this item when change the equipment. 19200bps,
Transmission
CONNECTION
transmission speed used for (Default: 115200bps) 38400bps,
communication with the connected Speed When the setting exceeds the limit of
9600bps, 57600bps,
equipment. the connected equipment,
19200bps, 115200bps
Transmission (Default: 115200bps) communication is performed at the
20
38400bps, fastest transmission speed supported
57600bps, by the connected equipment.
115200bps
communication is performed at the Set the number of retries to be
GOT MULTI-DROP
fastest transmission speed supported performed when a communication
Retry 0 to 5times
CONNECTION
by the connected equipment. timeout occurs.
(Default: 0time)
performed when a communication Set the time period for a communication
Retry 0 to 5times
timeout occurs. Timeout Time to time out. 3 to 30sec
(Default: 0time)

(Default: 3sec)

21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Timeout Time to time out. 3 to 30sec timing of the communication request
(Default: 3sec) from the GOT.
(Default: 0ms)
GT11, GT10
Delay Time 0 to 300ms (b) For GT10
from the GOT.
(Default: 0ms)
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT

FUNCTION

equipment. 19200bps,
Transmission (Default: 115200bps) 38400bps,
Speed When the setting exceeds the limit of 57600bps,
115200bps
communication is performed at the

(3) Serial (MELSEC) (GT10)

equipment.
19200bps,
38400bps,
57600bps,
communication is performed at the 115200bps
(4) MELSEC-A (GT10)

equipment.
9600bps
communication is performed at the
POINT
data.
For details on the RS-422 conversion unit and the
GOT utility, refer to the following manual:
GT User's Manual

17
21.5 Precautions
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
 GOT's communication timing
 Using the FA transparent function
ROBOT
(1) GOT's communication timing
Adjust the communication timing so that, after applying When multiple GOTs are connected, the FA transparent
the power to the system, the communication with the function is not available even if the RS-232 interface or
connected device (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC) is USB interface is used for the connection. 18
performed in order starting from the first GOT (from the
(When connecting a personal computer to the first
CNC CONNECTION
1st GOT to the 2nd, and so on).
GOT, the FA transparent function can be used.)
When the communication is failed, retries are
performed. And if the predetermined time has elapsed, 1st GOT 2nd GOT
PC
a communication error occurs. RS-232
• If the first GOT is turned on after a while the second

GOT is turned on, because the communication start of
the second GOT is delayed, a communication error
PC 19
may be detected at the second GOT.
USB
• If the system power is turned on simultaneously and it
ENERGY MEASURING
takes time to start the communication of the second
CONNECTION
GOT, a communication error may be developed. 1st GOT
PC
(2) Adjusting communication timing

(a) When powering up the system simultaneously 20
Using the utility or selecting [GOT Setup] -  Monitoring stop condition for the GOT in the
multiple-GT11 connection
GOT MULTI-DROP
[Opening Screen Time] from GT Designer3, set the
opening screen time adding a delay to each setting In the system where multiple GOTs are connected,
CONNECTION
for the GOTs. performing either of the following monitoring stop
During the opening process, communication with operations on the preceding stage (the first GOT) also
the connected device does not start. stops monitoring of the GOT on the next stage (the
second GOT).
Example: Set value of [Opening Screen Time]
(Inside (): set value) When the GOT on the preceding stage resumes
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
First module (5s) Second module (10s) monitoring, the GOT on the next stage also resumes it.
(b) When powering on devices individually • When project data or the OS is written/read by GT
Turn on the connected device first, and then the Designer3*1
GT11, GT10
first GOT, the second GOT, and so on. • When the GOT is set up*1
*1 A timeout error occurs in GX Developer.
Power supply (24V DC)
Power feeding to GOT
The title screen
is displayed. 1st GOT 2nd GOT
GT Designer3 22
Monitoring
MULTI-CHANNEL
Downloading
stopped
Communication of the
First GOT's 2nd GOT is enabled.
communication user screen
FUNCTION
USB
The project data is being download.
Second GOT's
communication  When PLC power disconnection occurs in
Retry user screen
the multiple-GOT connection 23
In the system where multiple GOTs are connected,
FA TRANSPARENT
when the communication between the PLC and the first

GOT is stopped due to PLC power disconnection and a
FUNCTION
disconnection of the communication cable between the

PLC and the first GOT, the GOT waits for timeout
against the communication request from the peripheral
devices (GX Developer, etc.), and recovery of
monitoring between the PLC and the GOT is delayed.
1st GOT 2nd GOT
Monitoring Monitoring

21.5 Precautions
21.5 Precautions
22. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 1

22
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
22.
19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
22.1 What is Multi-channel Function? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 2
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
22.4 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 41
22.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 42
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
22 - 1
22. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
22.1 What is Multi-channel Function?

Multi-channel Function is a function to monitor up to four FA controllers (PLC CPU, temperature controller, inverter, etc.)
on one GOT by writing multiple communication drivers in the GOT.
(For GT155 , up to two controllers (two channels))
Installing multiple
communication drivers Channel No.1
Bus connection
Channel No.2
OMRON PLC
connection
Monitoring the devices
of FA controllers
Channel No.3
Temperature
controller
connection
Channel No.4
Servo amplifier
connection
POINT
(1) Before using the multi-channel function
This manual describes the procedure to use the multi-channel function, based on the following system
configuration example.
22.2.1 Bus connection and serial connection
22.2.2 Ethernet multiple connection
(2) System configuration when the multi-channel function is used
The system configuration between GOT and the controllers is the same as that of when not using the multi-
channel function.
For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers, refer to the following.
Each chapter indicating the system configuration
(3) Precautions for hardware
To use the multi-channel function, an option function board is required for some GOTs.
The following table shows the required option function boards.
GOT Option function board
GT16, GT12 Not necessary
GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M, GT15-QFNB32M,

GT15
GT15-QFNB48M, GT15-MESB48M
GT14 Not necessary
22 - 2 22. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION

17
 Features of the multi-channel function
(1) With a single unit of GOT, the system consisting of PLC CPU, temperature controller, servo amplifier and
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
other controllers can be configured.
One GOT can monitor a PLC CPU, temperature controller and servo amplifier, etc. Therefore, the system
ROBOT
configuration, in which several controllers are mixed, can be easily established.
In addition, each system can be monitored on the GOT screen, and the unified management of the information
is possible. 18
CNC CONNECTION
PLC system
PLC
Temperatur
controller Temperature controller system
Servo amplifier
Can monitor
different kinds Servo amplifier system
19
of controllers on
the same screen.
ENERGY MEASURING
(2) Controlling FXCPU/third party PLC, etc. through the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.)
CONNECTION
It is possible to control FXCPU/third party PLC, etc. through the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.).
For example, it is possible to execute read/write of a device such as FXCPU when the condition is satisfied,
using the device of the PLC CPU on the network (MELSECNET/H, etc.) as the trigger for action.
Condition is satisfied 20
GOT MULTI-DROP
FXCPU
CONNECTION
Writing to a device
(3) With one GOT, the Ethernet connection and the bus or network connection are available in combination. 21
(GT16 only)
CONNECTION FUNCTION
One GOT can make the Ethernet connections and the bus or network connection. Therefore, the system
configuration, in which several networks are linked, can be established.
Also, the GOT can monitor multiple controllers on an Ethernet network.(Multi-channel Ethernet connection)
GT11, GT10
22
Hub
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
22. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 - 3

22.2.1 Bus connection and serial connection
One GOT can monitor a PLC CPU, temperature controller and servo amplifier, etc. Therefore, the system configuration,
in which several controllers are mixed, can be easily established.
In addition, each system can be monitored on the GOT screen, and the unified management of the information is
possible.
Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver
Bus(Q) OMRON SYSMAC OMRON THERMAC

/INPANEL NEO MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M
Bus connection
QCPU Connection cable
(Channel No.1)
Direct CPU
OMRON connection
Connection cable
PLC (Channel No.2) GOT
OMRON Temperature
temperature Connection cable controller
controller connection
(Channel No.3)
MELSERVO-
J2-Super Servo amplifier connection
Connection cable
series (Channel No.4)
GOT Number of
Connection
PLC Connection cable Channel connectable
type Option device Model
No. equipment
Bus For the system configuration between
MELSEC-Q 1 GT15-QBUS 4 connected
connection GOT and the controllers, refer to the
following. equipment for 1
OMRON PLC 2 - (Built into GOT)
Direct CPU GOT
OMRON temperature controller Each chapter indicating the 3 GT15-RS2-9P
connection (4 channels)
MELSERVO-J2-Super system configuration 4 GT15-RS4-9S
For the system configuration between
OMRON PLC GOT and the controllers, refer to the 1 2 connected
Direct CPU following. equipment for 1
- (Built into GOT)
connection GOT
OMRON temperature controller Each chapter indicating the 2 (2 channels)
system configuration

17
POINT
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Controllers that use Channels No.5 to 8
The following shows the drivers that can be set to Channels No. 5 to 8.
ROBOT
For the system configuration and connection condition with the controller, refer to the chapter of each controller.
Channel No. Driver*1 Reference
Barcode Reader, 18
RFID Controller, GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS, Products, Peripherals)
5 to 7
CNC CONNECTION
PC Remote Operation(Serial), FINGERPRINT AUTHENTICATION DEVICE CONNECTION
Printer (Serial)
BAR CODE READER CONNECTION
Barcode Reader,
PC REMOTE CONNECTION
RFID Controller,
8 PC Remote Operation(Serial), PRINTER CONNECTION
Fingerprint Authentication, RFID CONNECTION
Printer (Serial)
*1 Only one channel can be assigned to one driver.

19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

22.2.2 Ethernet multiple connection
One GOT can make several Ethernet connections and the bus or network connections. Therefore, the system
configuration, in which several networks are linked, can be established.
Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver Communication driver
Ethernet/IP(AB)/ Ethernet(MELSEC),
MELSECNET/H MELSEC-FX Gateway Q17nNC, CRnD-700
FXCPU Direct CPU connection

Connection cable
(Channel No.1)
MELSECNET/H
QCPU Connection cable connection
(Channel No.2) GOT
ALLEN-
Ethernet connection
BRADLEY Connection cable
(Channel No.3)
PLC
Robot Ethernet connection

controller Connection cable
(Channel No.4)
GOT Number of
PLC Connection type Connection cable connectable
Channel No. Option device Model
equipment
Direct CPU
MELSEC-FX For the system configuration between 1 GT15-RS2T4-9P
connection
GOT and the controllers, refer to the 4 connected
QCPU MELSECNET/H 2 GT15-J71LP23-25 equipment for 1
following.
ALLEN-BRADLEY GOT
Each chapter indicating the 3
PLC Ethernet - (Built into GOT) (4 channels)
Robot controller 4
ALLEN-BRADLEY For the system configuration between
1 2 connected
PLC GOT and the controllers, refer to the
following. equipment for 1
Ethernet - (Built into GOT)
GOT
OMRON PLC Each chapter indicating the 2
(2 channels)

17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
22.3.1 Basics of interface selection
ROBOT
This section explains basic knowledge of the multi-channel function.
A general flow of operation from system selection for the multi-channel function to drawing is explained in 22.3.2 to 18
22.3.6.
CNC CONNECTION
It is recommended to refer to 22.3.2 to 22.3.6 when making necessary settings using the multi-channel function for the
first time.
 Multi-channel function specifications

How the units are installed and the multi-channel function specifications are described below.
(1) Image drawing of unit installation 19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
Extension interface allows the installation of a
3rd stage communication unit up to the 3rd stage, respectively.
(For the GT1655, GT155 , only one extension
interface can be installed.)
2nd stage
A communication unit installed at the 4th or higher
stage cannot be used.
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
1st stage
Standard interface
For GT16 21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
The RS-232 interface, the USB interface,
the RS-422/485 interface, and the Ethernet interface
are built in as the standard interfaces.
For GT15
GT11, GT10
The RS-232 interface and the USB interface
are built in as the standard interfaces.
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

(2) Specifications
Specifications
GT1695
GT1685 GT1595
Item GT1675 GT1585 Description
GT1655 GT155 GT14 GT12
GT1672 GT157
GT1665 GT156
GT1662
GT16
• In bus connection and network connection (*1), only 1 channel can
be set for one GOT.
• For the Ethernet connection (*2), up to 4 channels can be set.
• When the Ethernet interface built in the GOT is used for connection
other than communication with a controller (*3), the connection is
not included in the count of the number of channels.
• The interface used for connecting to an external device (*4) is not
included in the count of the number of channels.
GT15
• For the bus connection, network connection (*1), and Ethernet
connection (*2), only 1 channel can be set for one GOT.
• When an Ethernet communication unit is used in other than
communications with a controller (*3), it is not included in the count
of the number of channels.
Max. included in the count of the number of channels.
number of 4 channels 2 channels
channels GT14
• For the Ethernet connection (*2), up to 2 channels can be set.
(GT1455-QTBDE, GT1450-QMBDE and GT1450-QLBDE only)
• When the Ethernet interface built in the GOT is used for connection
other than communication with a controller (*3), the connection is
not included in the count of the number of channels.
(GT1455-QTBDE, GT1450-QMBDE and GT1450-QLBDE only)
GT12
• For the Ethernet connection (*2), only 1 channel can be set for one
GOT.
• When an Ethernet communication unit is used in other than
communications with a controller (*3), it is not included in the count
of the number of channels.
• Multiple identical units can be installed only for serial communication

units.
Max. • It is necessary to calculate the consumed current.
installable (( This section ■ Calculating consumed current)
5 3 5 3 -
number of • An RS-422 conversion unit is not included in the count of the
modules number of units.
(For GT1655, GT155 , the RS-422 conversion unit is not
applicable.)
• A module that occupies 2 slots (*5, *6, *7) must be installed at the
first stage.
• For the video/RGB display, RGB output, and multimedia function,
Allowable Max. 3 Max. 3 Max. 3 Max. 3
install the unit indicated in *6 at the first stage and the other units at
number of stages stages stages stages -
the second or later stage.
stages (2 slots) (1 slot) (2 slot) (1 slot)
• When a unit indicated in *7 is used, other extension units cannot be
installed.
• The CF card unit must be installed on the last stage, if used.
*1 MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, CC-Link connection
(intelligent device station)
*2 Ethernet connection, MODBUS®/TCP connection
*3 Gateway function, MES interface function, Ethernet download
*4 Fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer (writing remote personal computer operation (serial), FA
transparent function, OS install, project data) or serial printer
*5 GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-J71GP23-SX, GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13, GT15-J61BT13

*6 GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4, GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1, GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1, GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT, GT16M-
MMR 17
*7 GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-75J71LP23-Z,
GT15-75J71BR13-Z, GT15-75J61BT13-Z
Usable units differ depending on the GOT.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
For units usable with each GOT, refer to the following manuals.
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

 Calculating consumed current
For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units,
bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply.
For the current that the GOT can supply and the current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller,
refer to the below tables. For the current that the GOT can supply and the current for the extension units, bar code
reader, or RFID controller, refer to the below tables. Make sure that the total of consumed current is within the
capacity of the GOT.
(1) Current supply capacity of the GOT
Capacity Capacity
GOT type GOT type
(A) (A)
GT1695M-X 2.4 GT1595-X 2.13
GT1685M-S 2.4 GT1585V-S 1.74
GT1675M-S 2.4 GT1585-S 1.74
GT1675M-V 2.4 GT1575V-S 2.2
GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN 2.4 GT1575-S 2.2
GT1665M-S 2.4 GT1575-V, GT1572-VN 2.2
GT1665M-V 2.4 GT1565-V, GT1562-VN 2.2
GT1662-VN 2.4 GT1555-V 1.3
GT1655-V 1.3 GT1555-Q, GT1550-Q 1.3
(2) Current consumed by an extension unit/barcode reader/RFID controller
Consumed Consumed
Module type current Module type current
(A) (A)
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2,
0.275*1 GT15V-75V4 0.2*1
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L
GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2,
0.12 GT16M-R2 0*1
GT15-RS2-9P 0.29 GT15V-75R1 0.2*1
GT15-RS4-9S 0.33 GT16M-V4R1 0.12*1
GT15-RS4-TE 0.3 GT15V-75V4R1 0.2*1
GT15-RS2T4-9P 0.098 GT16M-ROUT 0.11*1
GT15-J71E71-100 0.224 GT15V-75ROUT 0.11
GT15-J71GP23-SX 1.07 GT16M-MMR 0.27*1
GT15-J71GF13-T2 0.96 GT15-CFCD 0.07
GT15-J71LP23-25 0.56 GT15-CFEX-C08SET 0.15
GT15-J71BR13 0.77 GT15-SOUT 0.08
GT15-J61BT13 0.56 GT15-DIO 0.1
Bar code reader *2 GT15-DIOR 0.1
GT15-PRN 0.09 RFID controller *2
GT16M-V4 0.12*1 GT15-80FPA 0.22
*1 Value used for calculating the current consumption of the multi-channel function.
For the specifications of the unit, refer to the manual included with the unit.
*2 When the GOT supplies power to a barcode reader or a RFID controller from the standard interface, add their consumed current.
(Maximum value is less than 0.3 A)

(3) Calculation example
17
(a) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (3 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (for the gateway
function) and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1575-V
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
2.2 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=2.104
Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GOT, they can be connected to the GOT.
18
(b) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (2 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (for the gateway
CNC CONNECTION
function) and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1585-S
1.74 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=1.774
Since the calculated value exceeds the capacity of the GOT, such configuration is not allowed.
19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

22.3.2 General flow from system selection to drawing
System selection for using the multi-channel function is explained below.

Make selection and setting for the multi-channel function by following the order shown below.
System selection 22.3.3

Determining the connection type and channel No. (System
Determine the connection type and the channel No. to be used. selection)
Interface selection
22.3.4
Determine the GOT side interface and communication units to Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)
be used for the multichannel function.
Checking the unit installation position 1.3.7

Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation
Determine the communication unit installation position. position)
22.3.5
Make settings for Communication Settings.
Setting for communication settings
22.3.6
Confirm items to know before starting drawing.
Items to be checked before starting drawing

22.3.3 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection) 17
 Determining the connection type
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
(1) GT16
ROBOT
For GT16, the combinations of the bus or network connection, the Ethernet connection, and the serial
connection are available as shown in the following table.
Connection type Reference 18

Bus connection 5. BUS CONNECTION
CNC CONNECTION
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION
Bus/network connection CC-Link IE Field Network connection 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)
CNC connection(MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC
19
network))
CNC connection(CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)) 18.2.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
ENERGY MEASURING
Ethernet connection 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
CONNECTION
Robot controller connection 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION
CNC connection (Ethernet connection) 18.2.4 Ethernet connection
Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1
• 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection
20
• 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
Ethernet connection Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection) • 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC
• 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC
• 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC
21
Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Microcomputer connection (Ethernet)
• 3. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (ETHERNET)
MODBUS®/TCP connection
• 5. MODBUS(R)/TCP CONNECTION
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

Connection type Reference
Direct CPU connection 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
Computer link connection 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
CC-Link connection (via G4) 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
Inverter connection 15. INVERTER CONNECTION
Servo amplifier connection 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION
CNC connection (serial connection) 18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU
GOT Multi- Drop Connection 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
• 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC
4.2 Serial Connection
• 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC
• 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC
• 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC
• 9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC
• 12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC
• 13. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC
• 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC PLC
• 2. CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC
Third party PLC connection (serial connection)
• 3. CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC
• 4. CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC
• 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC
• 11. CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC
Serial connection • 12. CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC
• 16. CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER
Third party safety controller connection
• 13. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER
Third party servo amplifier connection
• 14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER
• 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER
Third party robot controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2
• 15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC
CONTROLLER
• 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
• 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
• 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
Third party temperature controller connection • 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER
• 5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
• 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
• 9. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
Microcomputer Connection (Serial)
• 2. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (SERIAL)
MODBUS®/RTU connection
• 4. MODBUS(R)/RTU CONNECTION

The following shows the applicable combinations of connection types, the number of channels, and restricted 17
functions.
: Allowed : Restricted
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
GOT to be used Functions that are restricted by the connection type*1
GT1695 FA transparent function
ROBOT
GT1685
Item Allowable combination of connection types GT1675
GT1672
GT1665
RS-232 USB 18
GT1662
CNC CONNECTION
GT1655
• Bus/network connection: 1 channel *2
(a) Max. 4 channels
• Serial connection: 1 to 3 channels
• Bus/network connection: 1 channel *2
(b) Max. 4 channels
• Ethernet connection: 1 to 3 channels
• Ethernet connection: 1 to 3 channels
(c)
Max. 4 channels *2
19
• Bus/network connection: 1 channel
(d) • Ethernet connection: 1 to 2 channels Max. 4 channels *2
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
(e) • Serial connection: 4 channels Max. 4 channels *2
(f) • Ethernet connection:: 4 channels Max. 4 channels *2
*1 When the functions below are used, the connectable number of channels may be restricted depending on the combination of the
functions to be used. 20
Fingerprint authentication Barcode function RFID function
Remote personal computer operation Video display function Multimedia function
GOT MULTI-DROP
Operation panel function External I/O function RGB display function
CONNECTION
Report function Hard copy function(for printer output) Sound output function
Functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit
The video display function, multimedia function and RGB display function cannot be used together.
The CF card unit and the CF card extension unit cannot be used at the same time.
22.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) 21
*2 For the FA transparent function via the RS-232 connection, the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is available only.
CONNECTION FUNCTION
When the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is already used, the FA transparent function is not available.
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

(2) GT15
For GT15, the combinations of the bus, network, or Ethernet connection and the serial connection are available
as shown in the following table.

Bus connection 5. BUS CONNECTION
Ethernet connection 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION
MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection 11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION
CC-Link IE Field Network connection 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) 13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)
Robot controller connection 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION
CNC connection(MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC
network))
CNC connection(CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)) 18.2.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
CNC connection (Ethernet connection) 18.2.4 Ethernet connection
Bus/network/Ethernet
connection Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1
Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection) • 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC

17
Direct CPU connection 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
Computer link connection 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
CC-Link connection (via G4) 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
ROBOT
Inverter connection 15. INVERTER CONNECTION
Servo amplifier connection 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION
CNC connection (serial connection) 18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU
GOT Multi- Drop Connection 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
18
CNC CONNECTION
• 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC
19
• 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC EW PLC
ENERGY MEASURING
Third party PLC connection (serial connection)
CONNECTION
• 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
• 11. CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC
Serial connection • 12. CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC
• 13. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
Third party robot controller connection Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2
• 15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC
CONTROLLER
22
• 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE
MULTI-CHANNEL
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER FUNCTION
• 5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER
• 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE
23
CONTROLLER
FA TRANSPARENT

Microcomputer Connection (Serial)
FUNCTION


The number of channels and the functions that can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used.
The table below shows the allowable combinations of connection types, the number of channels and restricted
functions.
Functions that are restricted by the connection

GOT to be used
type*1*2
Item Allowable combination of connection types GT1595 FA transparent function

GT1585
GT155
GT157 RS-232 USB
GT156
• Bus/network/Ethernet connection: 1 channel Max. 4 Max. 2 *3

(a)
• Serial connection: 1 to 3 channels channels channels
Max. 4 Max. 2 *3
(b) • Serial connection: 4 channels
channels channels
functions to be used.
Fingerprint authentication Barcode function RFID function
Remote personal computer operation Video display function Operation panel function
External I/O function RGB display function Report function
Hard copy function(for printer output) Sound output function
Functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit
The video display function and RGB display function cannot be used together.
The CF card unit and the CF card extension unit cannot be used at the same time.
22.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)
*2 When any of the connection methods below is used, Ethernet connection cannot be used although Ethernet download, gateway
function, MES interface function and file transfer function (FTP client) can be used.
Bus connection MELSECTNET/H connection
MELSECNET/10 connection CC-Link IE Controller Network connection
CC-Link connection MODBUS®/TCP connection CC-Link IE Field Network connection
(3) GT14
For GT14, the combinations of the Ethernet connection and the serial connection are available as shown in the
following table.
Ethernet connection 8.ETHERNET CONNECTION
CNC connection (Ethernet connection) 18.2.4Ethernet connection
• 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection
Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection)
• 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.3 Ethernet Connection
Ethernet connection
• 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 10.3 Ethernet
Connection
• 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14.3 Ethernet Connection
Direct CPU connection 6.DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
Computer link connection 7.COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
CC-Link connection (via G4) 14.CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
Serial connection Inverter connection 15.INVERTER CONNECTION
Servo amplifier connection 16.SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION
CNC connection (serial connection) 18.2.1Direct connection to CPU
GOT Multi- Drop Connection 20.GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

17
• 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
• 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC EW PLC
Third party PLC connection (serial connection) Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2
• 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.2 Serial Connection
• 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.2 Serial Connection
• 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 11.2 Serial Connection
18
CNC CONNECTION
Serial connection Third party robot controller connection
• 15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER 19
ENERGY MEASURING
• 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Third party temperature controller connection CONTROLLER
• 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER
• 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
Microcomputer connection (Serial)
CONNECTION
The number of channels and the functions that can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used. The table
below shows the allowable combinations of connection types, the number of channels and restricted functions. 21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GOT to be used Functions that are restricted by the connection type*1
Item Allowable combination of connection types GT1455-QTBDE, GT1455-QTBD, FA transparent function
GT11, GT10
GT1450-QMBDE, GT1450-QMBD,
GT1450-QLBDE GT1450-QLBD RS-232 USB Ethernet
• Ethernet connection: 1 to 2 channels *2 *3

(a) Max. 2 channels -
22
(b) • Serial connection: 2 channels Max. 2 channels Max. 2 channels *2 *3
MULTI-CHANNEL
Barcode function RFID function FUNCTION
When the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is already used, the FA transparent function is not available. 23
*3 When a GOT and PLC are connected by Ethernet connection, connecting a GOT and a personal computer by Ethernet is not
FA TRANSPARENT
allowed.
FUNCTION

(4) GT12
For GT12, the combinations of the Ethernet connection and the serial connection are available as shown in the
following table
Ethernet connection 8.ETHERNET CONNECTION
CNC connection (Ethernet connection) 18.2.4Ethernet connection
Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection)
• 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection
Ethernet connection
• 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.3 Ethernet Connection
• 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 10.3 Ethernet Connection
Direct CPU connection 6.DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU
Computer link connection 7.COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION
CC-Link connection (via G4) 14.CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)
Inverter connection 15.INVERTER CONNECTION
Servo amplifier connection 16.SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION
CNC connection (serial connection) 18.2.1Direct connection to CPU
GOT Multi- Drop Connection 20.GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION
• 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection
• 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC PLC
Third party PLC connection (serial connection) Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2
• 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6.2 Serial Connection
• 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7.2 Serial Connection
• 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 11.2 Serial Connection
Serial connection • 11. CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC
• 12. CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC
Third party robot controller connection
• 15. CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER
• 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
• 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER
• 5. CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
• 8. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
Microcomputer connection (Serial)

The number of channels and the functions that can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used. 17
The table below shows the allowable combinations of connection types, the number of channels and restricted
functions.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
GOT to be used Functions that are restricted by the connection type*1*2
ROBOT
Item Allowable combination of connection types GT1275 FA transparent function
GT1265 RS-232 USB
18
• Ethernet connection: 1 channel *3
(a) Max. 2 channels
CNC CONNECTION
• Serial connection: 1 channel
(b) • Serial connection: 2 channels Max. 2 channels *3
Barcode function RFID function
19
*2 When any of the connection methods below is used, Ethernet connection cannot be used although Ethernet download and
gateway function can be used.
ENERGY MEASURING
MODBUS®/TCP Connection
CONNECTION
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

 Determining the channel No.
(1) Channel No. of PLC, motion controller, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, CNC, robot
controller
After determining the connection type to be used, determine the channel Nos. (CH No. 1 to CH No. 4) to be
used for the respective connection types.
There are no special cautions to be attended to for determining channel Nos.
Set the channel No. by selecting [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.
1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting)
(2) Channel No. of external devices (fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer and
serial printer)
When connecting a fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer or serial printer, select
the channel No. (No.5 to No.8) for each external device.
(a) Number of external devices that can be connected to the GOT
One fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer or serial printer can be connected
to one GOT.
One driver must be set for one channel No. (No.5 to No.8) in the communication settings.
(b) Operator authentication (external authentication or fingerprint authentication)
When using the operator authentication (external authentication or fingerprint authentication), the RFID
controller is available for the channel No.8 only.
(c) External devices that requires the power supply from the GOT
When using the barcode reader or RFID controller that requires the power supply from the GOT, set the
channel No.8.
When the channel No.5 to No.7 is set, the GOT cannot supply the power.
Write down the following items selected in this section to the check sheet.
Selection of connection type
Write Check Write down the name of connection type to be used.
Sheet
22.5
Multi-channel Function
Check Sheet

22.3.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) 17
To use the multi-channel function, add interfaces to the GOT with the following methods if required.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
(1) GT16
ROBOT
• Install communication units on the extension interfaces.
• Use communication units installed on the extension interfaces with the RS-232 interface, the RS422/485
interface, and/or the Ethernet interface built in the GOT.
18
CNC CONNECTION
Extension interface allows the installation

3rd stage of a communication unit up to the 3rd stage,
respectively.
(For the GT1655, only one extension interface can
be installed.) 19
2nd stage
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
1st stage
(RS-232 interface built in the GOT) 20
Allows a controller to be connected via the serial
GOT MULTI-DROP
communication.
CONNECTION
For RS-232 communications, connect RS-232 cable.
For RS-422 communications, attach an RS-422
conversion unit and connect RS-422 cable to it.
(For the GT1655, the RS-422 conversion unit is not applicable.)
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
Not used for the multi-channel function.
(Ethernet interface built in the GOT)
GT11, GT10
Allows controllers to be connected via Ethernet.
Up to four channels can be set.
Standard interface 3 22
(RS-422/485 interface built in the GOT)
Allows a controller to be connected via the serial
MULTI-CHANNEL
communication.
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

(2) GT15
• Install communication units on the extension interfaces.
• Use communication units installed on the extension interfaces with the RS-232 interface built in the GOT.
Extension interface allows the installation

3rd stage of a communication unit up to the 3rd stage,
respectively.
(For the GT155 , only one extension interface can
be installed.)
2nd stage A communication unit installed at the 4th
or higher stage cannot be used.
1st stage
Allows a controller to be connected via the serial communication.

For RS-232 communications, connect RS-232 cable.
For RS-422 communications, attach an RS-422
conversion unit and connect RS-422 cable to it.
(For the GT155 , the RS-422 conversion unit is not applicable.)
Not used for the multi-channel function.

For the connection via the connection type selected in 22.3.3, select interfaces and communication units to be used. 17
Select the interfaces and communication units according to the connection type by referring to the following.
Selected connection type Reference for required interface and communication unit
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
• Bus connection This section ■ GOT interface used for bus connection
ROBOT
• MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)
• MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
• CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

18
CNC CONNECTION
• CC-Link IE Field Network connection
This section ■ GOT interface used for network connection
• CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
• CNC connection
(MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network),
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station))
19
• Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection)
• MODBUS®/TCP connection
ENERGY MEASURING
This section ■ GOT interface used for Ethernet connection
• Robot controller connection
CONNECTION
• CNC connection (Ethernet connection)
• Microcomputer connection (Ethernet)

20
GOT MULTI-DROP
• CC-Link connection (via G4)
CONNECTION
• Third party PLC connection (serial connection)
• Third party safety controller connection
• Third party servo amplifier connection
• Third party robot controller connection

This section ■ GOT interface used for serial connection
21
• Third party temperature controller connection
CONNECTION FUNCTION
• Microcomputer Connection (Serial)
• GOT Multi- Drop Connection
GT11, GT10
• MODBUS®/RTU connection
• Inverter connection
• Servo amplifier connection

22
• CNC connection (serial connection)
MULTI-CHANNEL
• Other functions This section ■ Interfaces and option units used for other functions
FUNCTION
POINT
Number of units that can be installed to a GOT
The number of units that can be installed to extension interfaces differs depending on the GOT type.
23
FA TRANSPARENT
GOT Number of units that can be installed
GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665,

Up to 5 units can be installed (up to 4 communication units)
FUNCTION
GT1662, GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156
GT1655, GT155 Up to 3 units can be installed (up to 2 communication units)
GT12 -

 GOT interface used for bus connection
For the bus connection, use the following communication units.
Interface Model*1
GT15-75QBUS(2)L, GT15-75ABUS(2)L, GT15-QBUS(2),

Bus connection unit
GT15-ABUS(2)
*1 To mount multiple units, the GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-ABUS(2) is required.
POINT
(1) Bus connection units to be used
GT15-QBUS(2) and GT15-ABUS(2) can be used independent of the number of serial connection channels.
When using the multi-channel function for the first time, it is recommended to use GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-
ABUS(2).
(2) Restrictions by bus connection unit installation
For the following functions, use the GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-ABUS(2), regardless of the number of channels
used for the serial connection.
With the GT15-75QBUS(2)L or GT15-75ABUS(2)L, the following functions are not available.
Function
Remote personal computer operation(serial), Video display function, Multimedia function,

Operation panel function, External I/O function, RGB display function,
Report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer),
Hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer),
Sound output function, Functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit,
Ethernet download*1, Gateway function*1, MES interface function*1
*1 Since the GT16 has the Ethernet interface, the function is available regardless of the bus connection unit to be used.
 GOT interface used for network connection

For the network connection, use the following communication units.
Interface Model
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15-J71GP23-SX
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13
POINT
When using GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, or GT15-75J61BT13-Z
(1) GT16
The GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, and GT15-75J61BT13-Z are not applicable.
(2) GT15
No unit can be mounted on the GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z, or GT15-75J61BT13-Z. (For the
GT155 , the GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15- 75J71BR13-Z, and GT15-75J61BT13-Z are not applicable)
Therefore, the RS-232 interface built in the GOT is used for the serial connection.
Because of this, the functions using the RS-232 interface, including the barcode function, are not available.
The gateway function, the printer output, and others are also not available since no unit can be mounted on
the above models.

17
 GOT interface used for Ethernet connection
For the Ethernet connection, use the following interface built in the GOT and communication unit.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
(1) GT16
ROBOT
Interface Name
Interface built in GOT Ethernet interface*1

*1 Up to four channels can be used. 18
CNC CONNECTION
(2) GT15
Interface Model
Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100
(3) GT14
19
Interface Name
Interface built in GOT Ethernet interface*1
ENERGY MEASURING
*1 Up to two channels can be used.
CONNECTION
(4) GT12
Interface Name
Interface built in GOT Ethernet interface

20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
POINT
When using Ethernet download, gateway function, or MES interface function
(1) GT16
The Ethernet download, the gateway function, and the MES interface function are available using the Ethernet 21
interface built in the GOT (one channel).
CONNECTION FUNCTION
(2) GT15
For using Ethernet download, the gateway function and MES interface function, only one Ethernet
communication unit is required.
GT11, GT10
(3) GT14
The Ethernet download and the gateway function are available using the Ethernet interface built in the GOT
(one channel). 22
(4) GT12
The Ethernet download and the gateway function are available using the Ethernet interface built in the GOT
MULTI-CHANNEL
(one channel).
FUNCTION
 GOT interface used for serial connection

For the serial connection, provide interfaces equivalent to the number of channels by using the following interfaces 23
built in the GOT and communication units in combinations.
FA TRANSPARENT
(1) GT16
FUNCTION
Interface Name/model
Interface built in GOT *1*2

RS-232 interface , RS-422/485 interface
Serial communication module GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE

*1 The operator authentication (external authentication or fingerprint authentication) or the FA transparent function (RS-232
communication) uses the RS-232 interface built in the GOT.
*2 For the RS-422 communication using the RS-232 interface built in the GOT, the RS-422 conversion unit is required.
(For GT 1655, the RS-422 conversion unit is not applicable.)

(2) GT15
Interface built in GOT RS-232 interface*1*2
Serial communication module GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE

*1 The operator authentication (external authentication or fingerprint authentication) or the FA transparent function (RS-232
communication) uses the RS-232 interface built in the GOT.
*2 For the RS-422 communication using the RS-232 interface built in the GOT, the RS-422 conversion unit is required.
(For GT155 , the RS-422 conversion unit is not applicable.)
(3) GT14
Interface built in GOT RS-232 interface*1, RS-422/485 interface
Serial communication module -

*1 The FA transparent function (RS-232 communication) uses the RS-232 interface built in the GOT.
(4) GT12
Interface built in GOT RS-232 interface*1, RS-422/485 interface
Serial communication module -

*1 The FA transparent function (RS-232 communication) uses the RS-232 interface built in the GOT.
 Interfaces and option units used for other functions

When the following functions are used in combinations, the number of available channels may vary according to the
combinations of units
Function Reference
Report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), Hard copy function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer),
Operation panel function, External I/O function, (1) (a)
Sound output function
Remote personal computer operation (serial), Video display function,

(1) (b)
Multimedia function, RGB display function
Functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit (1) (c)
Remote personal computer operation(Ethernet), Ethernet download*1,

(1) (d)
Gateway function*1, MES interface function*1
Fingerprint authentication, Barcode function,

RFID function, Remote personal computer operation(serial), (1) (e)
Report function (when using the serial printer), Hard copy function (when using the serial printer)
*1 For GT16, the function is available regardless of the combinations of units because the GOT has the Ethernet interface.
For GT15, the function is not available when the Ethernet communication unit cannot be mounted because of the combination of
units.
Refer to the explanation below to check if the number of channels for the multi-channel function to be used is
restricted or not. If it is restricted, review the system configuration.
(1) Number of stages taken up by the individual functions (number of slots)
(a) Report function (when using a PictBridge compatible printer), hard copy function (when using a PictBridge
compatible printer), operation panel function, external I/O function and sound output function
The printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit is required depending on the
function to be used.
Each unit uses one stage (one slot) of an extension interface.

(b) Remote personal computer operation (serial), video display function, multimedia function and RGB display 17
function
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
A video input unit, an RGB input unit, a video/RGB input unit, an RGB output unit or a
ROBOT
multimedia unit is required corresponding to the function to be used.
Each type of unit uses 1 stage (2 slots) of extension interface.
Only one piece of each type of unit can be installed on a GOT. 18
CNC CONNECTION
(c) Functions with CF card unit or CF card extension unit
19
The CF card unit or CF card extension unit is required.
The CF card unit or CF card extension unit uses one stage
ENERGY MEASURING
(one slot) of an extension interface.
CONNECTION
(d) Remote personal computer operation (Ethernet), Ethernet download, gateway and MES interface functions 20
GOT MULTI-DROP
• GT16
CONNECTION
Use the interface built in the GOT.
The Ethernet communication unit is not applicable.
• GT15
An Ethernet communication unit is required.
An Ethernet communication unit uses 1 stage (1 slot) of extension interface.
If the GOT is already connected in the Ethernet connection, the Ethernet
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
communication unit installed in the GOT is used.
(e) Fingerprint authentication, barcode function, RFID function, remote personal computer operation (serial),
report function (when using a serial printer) and hard copy function (when using a serial printer)
GT11, GT10
22
Use the interface built in the GOT or a serial communication unit.
MULTI-CHANNEL
A serial communication unit uses 1 stage (1 slot) of extension interface.
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

(2) Combinations of units that affect the number of available channels
The following are examples of unit combinations that affect the number of available channels.
POINT
Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position)
For details on the precautions for installing units on another unit, refer to the following.
1.3.7 Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position)
For the installation method of each unit, refer to the User's Manual for the communication unit and option unit you
are using.
For the method for installing a unit on another unit, refer to the following.
Example 1) To add the printer output (when using a PictBridge compatible printer) and the Ethernet download in
a system using the bus connection (1 channel), serial connection (3 channels), and the barcode
function
(a) For GT16
Mount the printer unit at the third stage, and use the Ethernet interface built in the GOT. This enables both
the printer output of the report function and the Ethernet download.
Printer unit
unit
Serial communication Serial communication
unit unit
Bus connection unit
Barcode reader
(b) For GT15

Because units can be mounted up to the third stage for GT15, the printer output of the report function and
the Ethernet download cannot be used together.
Printer unit
Ethernet communication
unit
unit
unit unit
Bus connection unit
Barcode reader

Example 2) To add the serial connection (1 channel) to the system using the bus connection (unit occupying 2 17
slots: 1 channel), the serial connection (2 channels), the video display, and the barcode function
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
unit unit
ROBOT
Bus connection unit
Video input unit

18
CNC CONNECTION
Barcode reader
Since there are no available areas left for installing a unit, serial connection can be used for up to 2
channels.
19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

Write down the following items selected in this section to the check sheet.
Selection of interface (communication unit)
Write Check Write down the name of interface and the model name of communication unit to be used
Sheet
for each of the connection type.
22.5
Check Sheet

Write down the following items to the check sheet.
17
Attaching the communication unit
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Write Check
Sheet
1. Write down the name of communication unit to be used for each of the
ROBOT
22.5 connection type.
Check Sheet
18
CNC CONNECTION
19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
* For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1. 21
When GT15-QBUS2/ABUS2 is used, although GT15-RS2-9P is installed physically at the
CONNECTION FUNCTION
2nd stage of extend interface 2, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage.
Therefore, in the check sheet, the position should be entered as 1st stage.
GT11, GT10
2. After writing down the names of communication units, write down CH
No. to be assigned to respective units based on the entry in ■ Check
Sheet No. 1 (selection of connection type and interface). 22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

3. After writing down CH No., write down the communication driver name
for each connection type. For the communication drivers used for the
respective connection types, refer to the following.
Chapters of each respective connection type
* For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1.

22.3.5 Setting for communication settings 17
Make communication settings based on the interface and the installation position of the respective communication units.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Extend interface 1
ROBOT
Extend interface 2
3rd stage 18
CNC CONNECTION
2nd stage
1st stage
19
RS-232 interface
built in a GOT
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
20
Make settings for Communication Settings by GT Designer3 referring to the check sheet
GOT MULTI-DROP
where the necessary information has been written.
CONNECTION
The positions that the settings should be made on the communication settings screen are
Check specified on the check sheet by numbers (GT16: (1) to (9), GT15: (1) to (7)).
22.5
Check Sheet
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
* For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1.

This completes the setting for Communication Settings.
Create a screen with GT Designer3.

Example: Setting example for "Bus connection (1 channel) + Serial connection (3 channels) + Bar code reader"
(In the case of the GT157 )
3 Serial communication unit (GT15-RS2-9P)

OMRON temperature controller connection

FXCPU direction CPU connection
1 Bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS2) Inverter connection
QCPU bus connection
5 Bar code reader
1
2
3

Example: Setting example for "MELSECNET/H connection (1 channel) + Serial connection (1 channel)" 17
(In the case of the GT155 )
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Serial communication unit (GT15-RS2-9P)
ROBOT
FXCPU direction CPU connection
MELSECNET/H communication unit
(GT15-J71LP23-25) 18
CNC CONNECTION
19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
20
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

Example: Setting example for Ethernet connection (4 channels) (In the case of the GT1685)
Ethernet interface built in the GOT

QCPU Ethernet connection
YOKOGAWA PLC Ethernet connection
YASKAWA PLC Ethernet connection
MODBUS /TCP connection

22.3.6 Items to be checked before starting drawing 17
The following describes that should be understood before starting drawing and the functions that should be set
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
beforehand when using the multi-channel function.
ROBOT
 Device settings
It is necessary to set the device to be used together with the CH No.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual 18
CNC CONNECTION
19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
20
Click the device setting button. Click the controller to be set. Set the device.
 Accessible range for monitoring
GOT MULTI-DROP
The accessible range for monitoring is not changed even when the multi-channel function is used.
CONNECTION
3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
FXCPU
22
Accessible range
is not changed.
FXCPU
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

 Clock function
Set the controller for which adjust/broadcast should be executed by the CH No.
10:10
10:10
CH No. 1
Mitsubishi Electric PLC
M
TS
IUBISHI
CH No. 2
C
H
ARGE
Servo amplifier
10:10
CH No. 3
Broadcast is OMRON PLC
executed for
CH No. 1 and CH No. 4
CH No. 3. Temperature controller
 FA transparent function
Set the controller for which the FA transparent function should be executed by the CH No.
The set CH No. can be changed by the Utility.
To execute the FA transparent function for other CH No., change the CH No. using the Utility.
CH No. 1
M
TS
IUBISHI
CH No. 2
C
H
ARGE
Servo amplifier
CH No. 3
OMRON PLC
CH No. 4
FA transparent function is Temperature controller
executed for CH No. 1.
 Station No. switching function

Set the controller for which the station No. switching function should be executed by the CH No.
CH No. 1
MITSUBISH I
CH No. 2
CHA RGE Servo amplifier
CH No. 3
OMRON PLC
CH No. 4
Station No. switching is Temperature controller
executed for CH No. 1.

17
22.4 Precautions
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
22.4.1 Precautions for hardware
ROBOT
To use the multi-channel function, an option function board is required according to the GOT.
The following shows required option function boards according to the GOT.
18
GOT Option function board
CNC CONNECTION
GT16 Not necessary
GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M, GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M

GT15
GT15-MESB48M
GT14 Not necessary
GT12 Not necessary

19
22.4.2 Precautions for use
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
 Occurrence of the same system alarm at different channels
When the advanced system alarm is used, if the system alarms with the same error code occur in different channels
the GOT treats the alarms as the same system alarm.
Therefore, if the system alarms with the same error code occur one by one, the time of later system alarm occurrence
20
is not reflected to the GOT.
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
 Confirmation of the channel No. at which a system alarm occurred
When a system alarm occurred, confirm the channel No. where the alarm occurred, using the procedure indicated
below.
(1) Check by [System alarm display] of the utility.
21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT15 User's Manual
GT14 User's Manual
GT11, GT10
(2) Monitor the internal devices of the GOT.
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

22.4 Precautions
22.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet
This section provides the check sheet to be used for Communication Settings when the multi-channel function is used.
Sections 22.3.3 to 22.3.5 contain explanations of the items to be checked on the check sheet.
Checking items explained in these sections using the check sheet on the following page allows you to complete the
setting for the multi-channel function.
Enter the selections having been made in the steps above to the check sheet.
Shows items and
Selection of connection type contents to be written on
Write Check
Enter the name of connection type to be used. the check sheet.
Sheet
Also describes an
Section 2.8.10 example of the check
Multi-channel function sheet.
check sheet
The following symbols are used for each purpose.
Indicates parts where items and details are to be written.

Confirm the details and write them to the check sheet.
Write Check
Sheet
Indicates parts where written details are to be checked.

Confirm the details and perform the Communication Settings.
Check

17
 Check sheet No.1 (selection of connection type and interface)
(1) Channel No. of PLC, motion controller CPU, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, CNC, robot
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
controller (No.1 to No.4)
ROBOT
CH Selection of connection type Selection of interface (communication unit)
No.
( 22.3.3) ( 22.3.4)
Connection name
18
1
CNC CONNECTION
Connection name
2
Connection name
3
Connection name
4
19
ENERGY MEASURING
(2) Channel No. of fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, personal computer, serial printer
(No.5 to No.8)
CONNECTION
CH Selection of connection type Selection of interface (communication unit)
No.
( 22.3.3) ( 22.3.4)
20
Connection name
5
GOT MULTI-DROP
CONNECTION
Connection name
6
Connection name
7
8
Connection name
RS-232 interface built in a GOT 21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

 Check sheet No. 2 (selection of GOT side interface)
Attaching the communication unit
( 1.3.7)
(1) GT16
Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2

3rd stage
Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 3rd stage
Com. unit name CH No. Driver name
(1)
(4)
2rd stage
(2)
(5)
1rd stage
(3) Com. unit name CH No. Driver name
(6)
(only one connection)
Connecting a controller
Standard interface 1 (only one connection)
(8)
(7)
Connecting a fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, or

personal computer
(7)
8
Connecting a personal computer
(8)
(9) 9 Host (PC)

(3) Connecting a controller (Without multi-channel Ethernet connection)
(1)
(9)
(6) Connecting a controller (With multi-channel Ethernet connection)

(4)
Multi Multi-channel Ethernet connection

(2) GT15
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2
3rd stage
ROBOT
(1)
(4)
2nd stage
Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 2nd stage
18
CNC CONNECTION
(2)
(5)
1st stage
Com. unit name CH No. Driver name 1st stage
(6)
19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
20
(7)
(7)
GOT MULTI-DROP
Connecting a fingerprint unit, barcode reader, RFID controller, or
personal computer
CONNECTION
8
(3)
Connecting a personal computer
(2)
(1) 9 Host (PC)
21
(6)
CONNECTION FUNCTION
(5)
(4)
GT11, GT10
* For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1. 22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION

23. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 1

23
17
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
ROBOT
18
CNC CONNECTION
23.
19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
23.1 FA Transparent Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 2
23.2 Compatible Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 2 20
GOT MULTI-DROP
23.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 15
CONNECTION
23.4 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 34
23.6 Personal Computer Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 48 21
CONNECTION FUNCTION
23.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 85
GT11, GT10
22
MULTI-CHANNEL
FUNCTION
23
FA TRANSPARENT
FUNCTION
23 - 1
23. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION
23.1 FA Transparent Function

The FA transparent function allows the sequence programs of the Mitsubishi Electric PLC to be read, written and
monitored from a personal computer connected via a GOT.
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Bus connection cable RS-232 cable

RS-232/RS-422 cable USB cable
Ethernet connection cable Ethernet connection cable
Sequence program can be read, written, monitored, etc.
23.2 Compatible Software

The following shows the software compatible with the FA transparent function.
POINT
(1) The range accessible by software when FA transparent function is used
Use of the FA transparent function does not affect the range accessible by the software.
For details on accessible range, refer to the manual for the respective software.
(2) The software settings when using FA transparent function
For the software settings, refer to the following when using FA transparent function.
23.6.1 Accessing by GX Works3

23.6.2 Accessing by CW Configurator
23.6.3 Accessing the PLC by the GX Developer, PX Developer, GX Configurator
23.6.4 Accessing by GX Works2
23.6.5 Accessing by GX LogViewer
23.6.6 Accessing PLC by GX Configurator-QP
23.6.7 Accessing by the MT Developer
23.6.8 Accessing by the MT Works2
23.6.9 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator
23.6.10 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator2
23.6.11 Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator
23.6.12 Accessing PLC by FX Configurator-FP
23.6.13 Accessing by FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool
23.6.14 Accessing by RT ToolBox2
23.6.15 Accessing by NC Configurator
23.6.16 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator
23.6.17 Accessing by CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool
23.6.18 Accessing by Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module
23.6.19 Accessing by MX Component(MX Sheet)
23 - 2 23. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION

23.1 FA Transparent Function
17
 Connecting the GOT and personal computer with RS-232
(1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs.
PLC CPU Software
ROBOT
*9
MELSOFT Navigator
GX Developer*1
GX Works2*10
18
CNC CONNECTION
QCPU (Q mode), C Controller module (Q Series) PX Developer*4
GX Configurator*5-AD/DA/SC/CT/TI/TC/AS/FL/PT
GX Configurator-QP*7
MX Component*11, MX Sheet*12
GX Developer*1
Q/QnA/ACPU,
GX Works2*11
motion controller CPU (A Series)
19
MELSOFT Navigator*9
ENERGY MEASURING
MT Developer*2
SW6RN-GSV13P, SW6RN-GSV22P, SW6RN-GSV43P,
CONNECTION
Motion controller CPU (Q Series) SW6RN-GSV54P, SW6RN-DOSCP,
SW6RN-SNETP (for user API)
MR Configurator*3
MT Works2*8, MX Component*16, MX Sheet*17
20
Robot controller (CRnQ-700) *6
RT ToolBox2
GOT MULTI-DROP
*15
MELSERVO(MR-J3-B) MR Configurator*3, MR Configurator2*13
CONNECTION
MELSERVO(MR-J4-B)*15 MR Configurator2*14
*1 GX Developer Version 8 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.

GX Developer Version 8.68W or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the QnUDE(H)CPU to the
GOT.
*2 MT Developer (SW6RNC-GSVE) Version 00N or later is required to use the FA transparent function. 21
*3 MR Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E) Version B1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
CONNECTION FUNCTION
*4 PX Developer Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
PX Developer Version 1.18U or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the Q02PHCPU or
Q06PHCPU to the GOT.
*5 Use GX Developer Version 8.30G or later combined with the following GX Configurator version or later to use the FA transparent
GT11, GT10
function.
GX Configurator-AD : Version 2.03D or later, GX Configurator-DA : Version 2.04E or later
GX Configurator-SC : Version 2.10L or later, GX Configurator-CT : Version 1.23Z or later
GX Configurator-TI
GX Configurator-AS
: Version 1.22Y or later, GX Configurator-TC
: Version 1.20W or later, GX Configurator-FL
: Version 1.21X or later
: Version 1.21X or later
22
GX Configurator-PT : Version 1.20W or later
*6 RT ToolBox2 Version 1.1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
MULTI-CHANNEL
*7 GX Configurator-QP Version2.32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*8 MT Works2 Version 1.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*9 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function. FUNCTION
*10 GX Works2 Version 1.03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*11 MX Component Version 3.14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
23
*12 Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet.
*13 Start MR Configurator2 with MT Developer2 Version 1.10L or later.
*14 MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
FA TRANSPARENT
*15 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in bus connection.
*16 MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*17 MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function.
FUNCTION
23. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23 - 3

(2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection
The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs.
PLC CPU Software
*25 *26
FX5U, FX5UC GX Works3 , MX Component , MX Sheet*27
MELSOFT Navigator*10
GX Developer
GX Works2*11
QCPU (Q mode) PX Developer*3
GX Configurator*4-AD/DA/SC/CT/TI/TC/AS/FL/PT
GX Configurator-QP*8
LCPU*14 GX Developer*12 GX Works2*13, GX Logviewer
*16
MX Component , MX Sheet*17, CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool*19
GX Developer
QCPU (A mode), QnA/ACPU
GX Developer
GX Works2*11
FXCPU FX-PCS/WIN*5
FX Configurator-FP*6
FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool
MT Developer
SW6RN-GSV54P, SW6RN-DOSCP, SW6RN-SNETP (for user API)
MT Works2*9
MR Configurator*1, MX Component*22, MX Sheet*23
GX Developer
SW3RN-GSV51P
MELSERVO(MR-J3-B)*21 MR Configurator*1, MR Configurator2*18
MELSERVO(MR-J4-B)*21 MR Configurator2*20
FREQROL A700/F700/E700/D700 Series FR Configurator*2
Sensorless servo (FREQROL E700EX) FR Configurator*24
Robot controller (CRnQ-700) RT ToolBox2*7
*1 MR Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E) Version B1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.

*2 FR Configurator(FR-SW2-SETUP-WJ) Ver.1.02 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the A700/
F700 series to the GOT.
FR Configurator(FR-SW3-SETUP-WJ) Ver.2.00 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the E700
series to the GOT.
FR Configurator(FR-SW3-SETUP-WJ) Ver.3.10 or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the F700
series to the GOT.
*3 PX Developer Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
PX Developer Version 1.18U or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the Q02PHCPU or
Q06PHCPU to the GOT.
*4 Use GX Developer Version 8.30G or later combined with the following GX Configurator version or later to use the FA transparent
function.
GX Configurator-AD : Version 2.03D pr later, GX Configurator-DA : Version 2.04E or later
GX Configurator-SC : Version 2.10L or later, GX Configurator-CT : Version 1.23Zor later
GX Configurator-TI : Version 1.22Y or later, GX Configurator-TC : Version 1.21X or later
GX Configurator-AS : Version 1.20W or later, GX Configurator-FL : Version 1.21X or later
GX Configurator-PT : Version 1.20W or later
*5 The RS-232/USB conversion adaptor (GT10-RS2TUSB-5S) is not applicable to FX-PCS/WIN.
*6 FX Configurator-FP Version 1.30 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*7 RT ToolBox2 Version 1.1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*8 GX Configurator-QP Version2.32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*9 MT Works2 Version 1.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*10 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*11 GX Works2 Version 1.03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
23 - 4 23. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION

*12 GX Developer Version 8.88S or later is required to use the FA transparent function. 17
*13 GX Works2 Version 1.11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*14 The adapter (L6ADP-R2 or L6ADP-R4) is required.
*15 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1.07H or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
CONTROLLER
CONNECTION
*16 MX Component Version 4.03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*17 Use MX Component Version 3.14Q or later for MX Sheet.
ROBOT
*18 Start MR Configurator2 with MT Developer2 Version 1.10L or later.
*19 CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*20 MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*21 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection. 18
*22 MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
CNC CONNECTION
*23 MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required for MX Sheet to use the FA transparent function.
*24 FR Configurator Version5.21 or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*25 GX Works3 Version 1.005F or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*26 MX Component Version 4.11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
*27 MX Sheet, please use the MX Component (Version 4.11M or later).
19
ENERGY MEASURING
CONNECTION
20

Connection Manual: Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Connection Manual: Series

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Connection Manual: Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Series

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

● Remove the protective film of the GOT.

[PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOTE CONTROL]

● Correctly connect the battery connector.

● Do not drop or apply strong impact to the unit.

● Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit.

● Replace battery with GT15-BAT(GT16, GT15) or GT11-50BAT(GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10) by

● Dispose of used battery promptly.

[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................A - 1

1.PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

3.ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING

4.HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM

6.DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU

7.COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION

9.MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

10.MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

11.CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

12.CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

13.CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

14.CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS

16.SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION

17.ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION

19.ENERGY MEASURING UNIT/ELECTRIC MULTI-MEASURING

MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS

21.MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION

The following table lists the manual relevant to this product.

 Screen creation software manuals

GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product -

 Extended and option function manuals

Setting available functions on GT Designer3

Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing

Setting details for figures and objects

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Setting functions to use peripheral devices

 Connecting a controller to the GOT

Connecting Mitsubishi Electric products to the GOT

Establishing communication between a personal computer and a

Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT

 Transferring data to the GOT

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

Verifying a editing project to a GOT project

• GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)

GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT

GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option

GT157 GT1575-V Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD

GT155 GT1555-Q Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD

GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155

GT11 Abbreviation of GT115 , GT11 Handy GOT

GT10 Abbreviation of GT105 , GT104 , GT1030, GT1020

GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3

*1 A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set

CF card extension unit*1 GT15-CFEX-C08SET

*1 GT15-CFEX + GT15-CFEXIF + GT15-C08CF set

GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SW DND-GTWK3-E and SW DND-GTWK3-EA